JP7803552B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes the use of symbols in gaming machines to create effects.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for further improvement in presentation in order to increase the entertainment value of the game.

The purpose of this invention is to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as the following gaming machine: This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, and is equipped with a determination means (for example, a game control unit 200) for making a determination and a performance control means (for example, a performance control unit 300) for controlling the performance, and the performance control means can be set to either a first mode or a second mode, can display information display according to game information, can execute a role-play performance that operates a movable means, can execute a variation performance that varies a performance pattern, temporarily stops it, and then stops it, and displays a specific image portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern and a predetermined image portion that is displayed behind the specific image portion. a specific effect can be executed while the variable effect is being executed, the operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle, after the start of the specific effect while the variable effect is being executed, the effect symbols can be displayed in the first operation mode and the effect symbols can be displayed in the second operation mode, a specific emphasis effect can be executed that highlights the effect symbols when the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific sequence that suggests that a special game will be executed while the variable effect is being executed, and the specific emphasis effect includes a first specific emphasis effect and a second specific emphasis effect different from the first specific emphasis effect, In one variation, a second specific emphasis effect can be executed after the execution of a first specific emphasis effect, a first image can be displayed for each of a plurality of effect patterns in the first specific emphasis effect, a second image can be displayed for each of a plurality of effect patterns in the second specific emphasis effect, and it is possible not to execute the first specific emphasis effect and the second specific emphasis effect while the effect patterns are stopped and displayed, and the display time of the first operation mode when the effect patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific sequence suggesting that a special game will be executed in the second mode is shorter than the display time of the first operation mode when the effect patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific sequence suggesting that a special game will be executed in the first mode, and in the variation effect, It is possible to execute operation presentations that prompt the player to operate the stages, the operation presentations include a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation, a periodic first display can be executed while the first operation presentation is being executed, a periodic second display can be executed while the second operation presentation is being executed, and the period of the first display and the period of the second display can be made different, the reel presentations include a first reel presentation and a second reel presentation, a periodic third display can be executed while the first reel presentation is being executed, a periodic fourth display can be executed while the second reel presentation is being executed, and the period of the third display can be made different from the period of the fourth display, and the second reel presentation is more likely to be executed when the second operation presentation is being executed than when the first operation presentation is being executed .

Please note that the above symbols in this section are used for illustrative purposes only and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

This invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine when viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the bottom left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display arranged at the bottom left of the game board. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit during power interruption processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process. A flowchart showing the contents of the normal prize entry port switch processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the large prize entrance switch processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the out ball detection switch processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during stoppage. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a customer waiting setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol processing. This is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize slot processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an electric tulip process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an MY value specification process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a complete determination process. This is a diagram showing the relationship between the MY specific standard value, difference in balls, and MY value according to the results of playing at multiple times in a day. This is a diagram showing the relationship between the MY specific standard value, difference in balls, and MY value according to the results of playing at multiple times in a day. These figures show examples of the configuration of random numbers used in this embodiment, where (a) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a small jackpot pattern random number, (d) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a reach random number, and (e) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a winning random number. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of a game control unit, where FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a memory area, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in FIG. 10A and 10B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of the performance control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a preliminary determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are flowcharts showing the operation of the performance control unit, in which FIG. 10A is a diagram showing main processing, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a command receiving process. A flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of Figure 37. A flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of Figure 37. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process of FIG. 37. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a pre-operation notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a specific time-saving related performance process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect button processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display information of the information display device in each game zone. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a main process of the general control unit. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels by the lamp control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a return-to-origin process of the lamp control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an initial operation process of the lamp control unit. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during a setting change. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after confirming settings. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole in a normal gaming state. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting hole in a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the first starting port in normal game mode. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting port during normal game play. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting port in a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the first starting port in a special time-saving game state. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing effect images displayed on an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. A figure showing the operating mode when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop by a decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode of pseudo consecutive patterns. A figure showing an example of the 49th operating mode of the frame part in a pseudo-consecutive pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode of the zone symbol. A figure showing an example of the 51st operating mode of the frame part in a zone pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of operation modes of a zone execution image. A figure showing an example of a 53rd operation mode of the decoration part in the zone execution image. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of operation modes of a stage image. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during the customer waiting performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing modified examples of the display mode of decorative patterns. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of the sixth operating mode of the numeral section. A figure showing a modified example of the 17th operating mode of the second numeral decoration part. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which the presentation control unit receives a stop command for the next variable display without receiving a stop command for the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to variable presentation example 4. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which the presentation control unit receives a stop command for the next variable display without receiving a stop command for the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to variable presentation example 3. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which the presentation control unit receives a stop command for the next variable display without receiving a stop command for the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to variable presentation example 3. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This figure shows a modified example of the presentation example shown in Figures 199 and 200. FIG. 203 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stop shown in FIG. 202. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern for each stage. This is a diagram showing the operating mode of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped and the period of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped for each performance situation. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed during variable effects. A figure showing variant example 1 of the temporary stop mode during the customer waiting performance. A figure showing variant 2 of the temporary stop mode during the customer waiting performance. This is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in the customer waiting performance shown in Figure 312. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state of temporary suspension after power is cut off and then restored without clearing the RAM. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state of temporary suspension after power is cut off and then restored with RAM cleared. A diagram showing the manner in which decorative patterns are temporarily stopped after the variation has stopped. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state of temporary stopping after the demo screen is not displayed. This is a chart showing the flow of decorative pattern patterns in the effects shown in Figures 314 to 317. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing modified examples of components of decorative patterns. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the performance situation and the performance mode by the speaker. FIG. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole in a normal gaming state. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting hole in a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the first starting port in normal game mode. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting port in a special time-saving game state. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. (1) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the first left-handed hit notification, and (2) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the second left-handed hit notification. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the display timing of each effect image in the second right-hit image and the output timing of the right-hit sound effect and right-hit sound. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the button effects. A diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each button effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution time of each effect during reach-time effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the role-playing performance. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. (1) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect, and (2) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the ongoing suggestion effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the jackpot effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each effect in the jackpot effect. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between images related to the presentation. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A diagram showing a timing chart of the performance when a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when viewed from the rear side.
Figure 3 is a diagram explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, where Figure 3(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board 110, Figure 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and Figure 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment.
1 shows a pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of a gaming machine, which is configured to pay out prize balls when a gaming ball shot out in response to a player's instruction enters a prize ball. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 from which the gaming balls are shot out, and a frame member 150 that surrounds the gaming board 110. The gaming board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has, on the front, a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a path along which game balls launched from below rise and head toward the upper position of the game area 111, and a guide member 113 on the right side of the game area 111 that guides the game balls.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for effects is disposed in a position in the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. This image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the player progresses through the game, it displays, for example, decorative symbols to notify the player of the lottery results (pattern variation results) of the special symbol lottery, or displays effect images due to the appearance of characters or items. In addition, the image display unit 114 is provided with a plurality of layers on which images are displayed, and an image is displayed on each of the plurality of layers.
The game board 110 of this embodiment is also provided with a light guide plate 118 that emits light under predetermined conditions. The light guide plate 118 is a transparent panel made of a resin such as acrylic, and is located in front of the play area 111 so as to cover the play area 111. The light guide plate 118 emits light in a manner that corresponds to the situation of the presentation.

In addition, the front of the game board 110 is provided with three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 that are used for various effects.
The three movable role pieces 115 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction above the image display unit 114. When describing each of the three movable role pieces 115 individually, the movable role piece 115 arranged on the left side will be referred to as the "left movable role piece 1151." The movable role piece 115 arranged in the center will be referred to as the "middle movable role piece 1152." The movable role piece 115 arranged on the right side will be referred to as the "right movable role piece 1153." When no particular distinction is made between the three movable role pieces 115, they will simply be referred to as "movable role pieces 115." The movable role pieces 115 perform various effects by operating on the game board 110. In this embodiment, the movable role piece 115 is arranged to be movable from the initial position shown in FIG. 1 to an effect position where it overlaps with the image display unit 114.
In this embodiment, the left movable role 1151 and the right movable role 1153 are visible to the player in the initial position. On the other hand, the center movable role 1152 is located behind the upper frame lamp 1571 (described later) in the initial position, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see.

The panel lamps 116 emit light to create various effects. In this embodiment, the panel lamps 116 include an upper panel lamp 1161 located above the image display unit 114, a left panel lamp 1162 located to the left of the image display unit 114, a right panel lamp 1163 located to the right of the image display unit 114, and a lower panel lamp 1164 located below the image display unit 114.

The game area 111 is equipped with game pegs and windmills (not shown) that change the direction in which game balls fall. Various prize-winning and lottery-related devices are also installed in predetermined positions in the game area 111. The game area 111 is also equipped with an outlet 117 that ejects game balls that have been shot into the game area 111 but have not entered any of the winning holes (first start hole 121, second start hole 122, big prize hole 125, and regular prize hole 127, described below) from the game area 111. The pachinko game machine 100 is also equipped with an out-ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see Figure 4, described below). The out-ball detection switch 227 detects all game balls that have been shot into the game area 111.

In this embodiment, various prize-winning and lottery-related devices are provided on the game board 110, including a first start gate 121 and a second start gate 122 that start a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the game, and a start gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 that starts a normal symbol lottery (open/close lottery) when a game ball passes through. In FIG. 1 , the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, with the left gate 124 labeled 124L and the right gate 124 labeled 124R. The first start gate 121 and the second start gate 122 refer to the winning gates that trigger the activation of a predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of a gaming ball when a winning prize is awarded are provided in the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. When the gaming ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by this switch triggers the activation of the special symbol display device.
In this embodiment, a start port lamp 1211 that emits light under predetermined conditions is provided at the first start port 121. The start port lamp 1211 emits light in a manner that corresponds to the situation of the performance.

The second starting hole 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123, a standard electric device with a pair of tulip-shaped blades that open and close using an electric solenoid and light up. The electric tulip 123 is configured so that when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, but when the blades are open, the entrance to the second starting hole 122 expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122. When a standard symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 123's blades light up or flash while opening for a specified time (e.g., 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (e.g., 1 to 3 times).

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two game states: a no-electric support state in which there are fewer chances of winning at the second starting hole 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning at the second starting hole 122 than in the no-electric support state. The machine is controlled to either the no-electric support state or the electric support state under a predetermined condition, such as triggered by a jackpot or the number of draws for a special symbol. The electric support state is a game state controlled by, for example, shortening the normal symbol variation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, or a combination thereof.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two game states: a no-time-reduction state in which the special symbol variation time is long, and a time-reduction state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than that in the no-time-reduction state. Here, the time-reduction state is considered to be a state more advantageous to the player than the no-time-reduction state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the no electric support state and no time-saving state are simply referred to as the no-time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as other devices related to winning prizes and lotteries, a special electric device called a large prize opening 125 that opens depending on the results of a special symbol drawing, and a regular prize opening 127 that does not trigger a lottery even if a game ball wins are arranged on the game board 110. The large prize opening 125 is provided with a large prize opening door 125D that opens and closes the large prize opening 125. In the following description, for convenience, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the large prize opening door 125D may be referred to as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the large prize opening 125.
In addition, in this embodiment, a display 130 is provided at the bottom left of the game board 110 to display the lottery results and the number of reserved balls.

In the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 , the second starting hole 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, and the big prize hole 125 are located in the right area of the gaming area 111. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, when a gaming ball is to be placed in the second starting hole 122, the big prize hole 125, etc., or when a gaming ball is launched so that it passes through the gate 124R, the gaming ball is caused to flow down into the right area of the gaming area 111. Here, the left area of the gaming area 111 can also be considered as the first gaming area. Furthermore, the right area of the gaming area 111 can also be considered as the second gaming area.
In the illustrated example, the second starting gate 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, and the large prize opening 125 are located in the right area of the play area 111, but this is not limited to this. The second starting gate 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, and the large prize opening 125 may be located in the left area of the play area 111, and the first starting gate 121, the gate 124L, and the regular prize opening 127 may be located in the left area of the play area 111. In this case, the right area of the play area 111 is considered to be the first play area. Furthermore, the left area of the play area 111 is considered to be the second play area.

Attached to the back of the gaming board 110 are a gaming control board 200B, which determines whether a special symbol has been won, a presentation control board 300B, which controls the overall presentation, and a payout control board 330B, which controls the launch and payout of gaming balls. Also attached to the back of the gaming board 110 are various boards (not shown), such as an image control board (not shown), which controls the presentation using images and sounds, and a lamp control board (not shown), which controls the presentation using various lamps and movable gadgets 115. Also located on the back of the gaming board 110 are a connector 200C, which connects the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B, and a switching power supply (not shown), which converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards. The connector 200C has multiple wires (not shown) for connecting the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B.

The frame member 150 includes a handle 151 and a launching device 158 (see FIG. 4 ) that electrically launches game balls at a predetermined time interval (e.g., 100 balls per minute) with a ball-hitting force corresponding to the angle of operation when a player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise. The handle 151 is also provided with a touch sensor 151a and a launching volume 151b. The handle 151 of this embodiment is also provided with a handle lamp 1511 that emits light under predetermined conditions. The handle lamp 1511 emits light in a manner corresponding to the presentation situation. The launching device 158 is also provided with a launch solenoid 158a and a ball-feeding solenoid 158b.
The frame member 150 also includes a supply device (not shown) that supplies game balls one by one to the launching device in sequence in response to the player's operation of a lever 152, and a tray 153 that temporarily stores the game balls that the supply device supplies to the launching device. Balls are dispensed onto this tray 153 by a payout unit, for example.
In this embodiment, the tray 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower tray, but a configuration example in which the upper tray and the lower tray are separated is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and an ejection button 155 for dropping the game balls accumulated in the tray 153 into a box (not shown) and removing them.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that notify the player of the game status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and provide various effects.
The speaker 156 produces various effects using music, voice, and sound effects.
The frame lamps 157 are composed of light-emitting elements such as LEDs, and perform various light-based effects using lighting/flashing patterns, different light colors, etc. A possible configuration example for the frame lamps 157 is one that allows effects to be created by changing the direction of light irradiation. The frame lamps 157 in this embodiment include an upper frame lamp 1571 located above the upper panel lamp 1161, an upper left frame lamp 1572 located above the left panel lamp 1162 and to the left of the upper frame lamp 1571, an upper right frame lamp 1573 located above the right panel lamp 1163 and to the right of the upper frame lamp 1571, a left frame lamp 1574 located to the left of the left panel lamp 1162, and a right frame lamp 1575 located to the right of the right panel lamp 1163.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

3(a), the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a win at the first start gate 121, a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to a win at the second start gate 122, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to a game ball passing through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then a static display to display the lottery result based on a win at the first start gate 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then a static display to display the lottery result based on a win at the second start gate 122. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform a cyclical change (cyclical display) multiple times, with the change in display mode being one cycle (one period = 256 ms), and display a static display after the special symbol change time has elapsed.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by variably displaying normal symbols and then stopping them based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode of the LEDs. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a first special symbol reserve indicator 218 that operates in response to a reserve on the first special symbol display 221, a second special symbol reserve indicator 219 that operates in response to a reserve on the second special symbol display 222, and a regular symbol reserve indicator 220 that operates in response to a reserve on the regular symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, and the regular symbol reserve indicator 220 are each comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed by the lighting pattern of the LEDs.

Here, we will explain the reservation. If a game ball enters the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning game is being performed), the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning game cannot be started because the special symbol is still changing. Therefore, the later winning game is stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for that winning game ball is reserved until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed.
The normal symbols are also processed in the same manner as the special symbols. The fact that such a reservation has been made and the number of reservations (number of remaining reservations) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 218, the second special symbol reservation indicator 219, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 220.

The display 130 also includes a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured as a display device with an array of two LEDs. One of the two LEDs lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is short. The other LED lights up to indicate whether a state is favorable to the player by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the gaming ball).

The display 130 also includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the jackpot opening 125 is activated in a jackpot game that is played based on the results of the special symbol lottery. Jackpot games will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of rounds that the jackpot opening 125 will be activated in a jackpot game is displayed by the lighting pattern of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is composed of a single LED and is used to indicate that the setting change mode (described below) or the setting confirmation mode (described below) has been set. The LED begins to light up when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered, and turns off when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. As such, because the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been set. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in any location as long as it is on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting is changed or checked, but the display may be configured to make it clear which mode is set. For example, the status check indicator 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting check mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 226 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been set, but it may also be used as another indicator. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the number of rounds indicator 225, the status indicator 224, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is equipped with an input device through which a player inputs information regarding effects. As shown in FIG. 3B , in this embodiment, an example of an input device is provided on the frame member 150. The input device includes an effect button 161 and effect keys 162, which are adjacent to the effect button 161 and consist of a plurality of keys arranged in a generally cross shape. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is generated in which an operation to select one image from a plurality of images is accepted. In this case, for example, a player can select one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114 by operating the effect keys 162, which consist of four keys arranged in a cross shape, and then select the selected image by operating the effect button 161. Furthermore, in addition to the effect buttons 161 and effect keys 162 shown in the figure, various input forms, such as levers and handles, can be adopted as the input device depending on the content of the effect.
The effect button 161 of this embodiment is provided with a button lamp 1611 that emits light under predetermined conditions. The button lamp 1611 emits light in a manner that corresponds to the effect situation.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a sub-information display 80 inside the game area 111, which consists of a sub-first change display 81, a sub-second change display 82, a sub-first hold display 83, a sub-second hold display 84, a sub-normal map change display 85, a sub-normal map hold display 86, and a sub-right-hit display 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to be dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator, such as the status check indicator 226, that indicates whether the setting is in the setting change mode or setting check mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is used to display (notify) whether the first special symbol is being displayed or not, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is used to display (notify) whether the second special symbol is being displayed or not. Each is composed of a single LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (on for 0.1 seconds, then off for 0.1 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as a static symbol. In other words, the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 repeatedly display a cycle in which one flash constitutes one cycle (0.2 seconds = one period), and light up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as a static symbol.

The results of the special symbol jackpot determination may be announced using the sub-first variable indicator 81 or the sub-second variable indicator 82. In this case, the LED may light up in the event of a jackpot, and turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number), which will be described later, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number), which will be described later. Each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off; when the hold number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off; when the hold number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on; when the hold number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on; and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 is used to display (announce) the results of the winning lottery, and is composed of a single LED. When the normal symbol variation display begins, the LED flashes (varies) at a predetermined interval. When the normal symbol is displayed in a static state, the LED displays a static display indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes out if there is a loss).

In addition, the sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying a regular symbol variation, and to light up or turn off when the regular symbol is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to determine whether or not a regular symbol variation is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-right hit indicator 87 is used to encourage the player to fire the game ball toward the right area of the play area 111 (a so-called right hit), and is composed of a single LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play) and a time-saving play state, and is off in other play states.

[Configuration of the control unit]
Next, a control unit that controls the operation and processes signals in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
4, the control unit includes, as a game control means, a game control unit 200 that determines whether a special symbol has been won, etc. Also, as a presentation control means, it includes a presentation control unit 300 that controls the presentation overall, and a payout control board 330B that controls the payout of game balls and the launch of game balls, etc.

[Game control unit configuration and functions]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs calculations when determining whether a special symbol has been won, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201 and various data, and a RAM 203 that serves as a working memory for the CPU 201. The RAM 203 also includes a special symbol reserved memory area, a prize ball count memory area, a total payout memory area, a total out memory area, a payout memory area, a base memory area, a complete flag memory area, a complete standby flag memory area, an MY specific reference value memory area, an MY value memory area, and an error information memory area for storing information related to various error determinations. In addition to the memory areas described above, the RAM 203 also includes numerous other memory areas and timer counters for measuring various times.

The gaming control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to either a no-time-reduction state or a time-reduction state. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the no-time-reduction state may be referred to below as the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the time-reduction state may be referred to below as the time-reduction gaming state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-reduction gaming state includes a special time-reduction gaming state and a specific time-reduction gaming state. The special time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled via a jackpot game. Furthermore, the specific time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled when the number of times the special symbol variable display executed after a predetermined condition is met (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of variations) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes one of the normal gaming state, the special time-shortened gaming state, and the specific time-shortened gaming state. The gaming control unit 200 switches between the normal gaming state and the special time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the normal gaming state and the specific time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the specific time-shortened gaming state and the special time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. In the time-shortened gaming state, the gaming control unit 200 also performs control such as increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery compared to the normal gaming state, shortening the normal symbol variation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123.

Note that the time-saving game state is considered to be a more advantageous state than the normal game state in that the special symbol variation time is more likely to be shorter than in the normal game state, and it is possible to execute a larger number of special symbol variation displays in a shorter time than in the normal game state. On the other hand, the normal game state may be designed to more easily execute jackpot games with a larger number of rounds than in the time-saving game state, in which case the normal game state is considered to be a more advantageous state than the time-saving game state. Furthermore, the normal game state and the time-saving game state do not need to be in an advantageous or disadvantageous relationship. In other words, the normal game state and the time-saving game state only need to be different states.

The game control unit 200 conducts a special symbol lottery when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122. Then, depending on the results of the special symbol lottery, a special game such as a big win game or a small win game is played. During a big win game, the game control unit 200 controls the large winning opening 125, a special electric device, to repeat a predetermined number of rounds in which it remains open until a predetermined condition (e.g., 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 gaming balls have entered) is met. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between the opening and closing of the large winning opening 125 when it opens. During a small win game, the game control unit 200 controls the large winning opening 125, a special electric device, to repeat a predetermined number of rounds in which it remains open until a predetermined condition (e.g., 0.9 seconds have elapsed) is met. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between the opening and closing of the large winning opening 125 when it opens.

The game control unit 200 also performs a normal symbol lottery when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the operation of the electric tulip according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 sets holds that occur when the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during special pattern fluctuation, and holds that occur when the game ball passes through the gate 124 during normal pattern fluctuation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sends information related to game control, such as the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery, information on changing the time-saving state to no time-saving state, and hold setting information, to the presentation control unit 300 using commands described below.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 121, the second start opening 122, the big prize opening 125, or the normal prize opening 127, the game control unit 200 instructs the payout control board 330B to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per gaming ball depending on where the gaming ball entered. For example, the game control unit 200 sends an instruction command to the payout control board 330B to pay out three prize balls when the gaming ball enters the first start opening 121, four prize balls when the gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, thirteen prize balls when the gaming ball enters the big prize opening 125, and ten prize balls when the gaming ball enters the normal prize opening 127. Note that even if it detects that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 124, it does not instruct the payout control board 330B to pay out the corresponding prize balls.
When the payout control board 330B pays out prize balls in accordance with instructions from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 obtains information on the number of prize balls paid out (number of prize balls) from the payout control board 330B, thereby managing the number of prize balls paid out.

As shown in Figure 4, the game control unit 200 is connected to detection means including a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 121, a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 124.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to a large prize opening detection unit (large prize opening switch (SW)) 215 that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 125, a large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216 that sets the large prize opening door 125D of the large prize opening 125 to a closed state and a protruding and tilted open state, and a regular prize opening detection unit (regular prize opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the entry of a game ball into the regular prize opening 127.

In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time are connected to the game control unit 200. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern reserve display 218 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging balls that have entered the first starting gate 121 while the special pattern is changing, a second special pattern reserve display 219 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging balls that have entered the second starting gate 122 while the special pattern is changing, and a normal pattern reserve display 220 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging balls that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal pattern is changing.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern display 221 which displays the change in the special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 and the results of the special pattern lottery, a second special pattern display 222 which displays the change in the special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 and the results of the special pattern lottery, a normal pattern display 223 which displays the change in the normal pattern and the results of the normal pattern lottery, and a status display 224 which displays the status of the pachinko game machine 100.

Then, detection signals detected by the first start gate switch 211, the second start gate switch 212, the gate switch 214, the big prize gate switch 215, the regular prize gate switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are sent to the game control unit 200. Control signals from the game control unit 200 are also sent to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the big prize gate door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the regular symbol reserve indicator 220, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the regular symbol indicator 223, and the status indicator 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of prize balls paid out as described above.

Also mounted on the surface of the gaming control board are a RAM clear switch 228 that inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in RAM 203 of the gaming control unit 200 or to update the setting value, which indicates the degree of advantage in the game (the probability of determining a jackpot), a setting key switch 229 that inputs a signal to transition to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (described below) by operating the setting key, an information display 230 that displays performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood, and other electronic components.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a-230d, see Figure 52 below) arranged horizontally. The two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), while the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information indicating setting values and performance information values (see Figure 51). Static lighting is used to display setting values, and dynamic lighting is used to display performance information.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for the board, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. The game control unit 200 then transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out and information indicating the status of the game control unit 200, etc., obtained from the payout control board 330B, to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350.

[Configuration and function of the dispensing control board]
The payout control board 330B includes a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 360 that controls the launch of game balls.
The payout control unit 330 comprises a CPU 331 that performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as working memory for the CPU 331.
The payout control unit 330 then controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 receives a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has entered (such as the first starting hole 121). Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout drive unit 334 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

Also connected to the payout control unit 330 are a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, a ball presence detection unit 336 that detects whether game balls are stored in the storage unit (not shown), and a full tank detection unit 337 that detects whether the tray 153 that holds the game balls used by the player when playing and the paid-out prize balls is full. The payout control unit 330 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, ball presence detection unit 336, and full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing in accordance with these detection signals.
Furthermore, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a slot external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 then transmits to the host computer via the slot external information terminal board 340, for example, information regarding the number of prize balls that the payout drive unit 334 has been instructed to pay out, and information regarding the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335. The same information is also transmitted to the game control unit 200.

The firing control unit 360 is equipped with a control circuit and input/output ports (not shown). The handle 151 is connected to the input port of the firing control unit 360, and the firing device 158 is connected to the output port of the firing control unit 360.

The touch sensor 151a is provided inside the handle 151 and is composed of a capacitance-type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance when a player touches the handle 151. When the touch sensor 151a detects that a player has touched the handle 151, it outputs a touch signal to the launch control unit 360 that allows the launch solenoid 158a to be energized. If no touch signal is input from the touch sensor 151a, the launch control unit 360 will not launch the gaming ball.
The launch volume 151b is directly connected to the rotating part that rotates the handle 151 and is composed of a variable resistor. The launch volume 151b divides a constant voltage (e.g., 5 V) applied to the launch volume 151b using the variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the launch control unit 360 (varying the voltage supplied to the launch control unit 360). The launch control unit 360 energizes the launch solenoid 158a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 151b, rotating a launch member (not shown) directly connected to the launch solenoid 158a, thereby launching the game ball into the game area 111.

The firing solenoid 158a is configured as a rotary solenoid, and a firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 158a, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 158a rotates the firing member.
The ball feeding solenoid 158b is composed of a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the tray 153 one by one toward the firing member directly connected to the launch solenoid 158a.

When the launch control unit 360 detects that the player's hand is touching the handle 151 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor 151a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 158b and the launch solenoid 158a. When it detects a change in the rotation angle of the handle 151 based on a detection signal from the launch volume 151b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 158b and also drives the launch solenoid 158a to fire game balls at a predetermined frequency (e.g., 99.9 balls/minute) with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 151.

[Configuration and functions of the production control unit]
The performance control unit 300 comprises a CPU 301 that performs calculations when controlling the performance, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as working memory for the CPU 301, and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the date and time.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At this time, the effect control unit 300 may receive operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 and set the effect content according to the operation input. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) according to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Furthermore, when a game is suspended for a predetermined period of time, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of a screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation content based on the change information of the time-shortening state and the time-shortening state received from the game control unit 200.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 sends a command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 to instruct the execution of the set performance content.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls performances using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls performances using various lamps and movable props 115.

The game control unit 200 and each functional unit connected to the input/output ports of the game control unit 200 can also be regarded as a game control means for controlling the progress of the game.
In addition, the performance control unit 300, each functional unit connected to the input/output ports of the performance control unit 300, the payout control board 330B, each functional unit connected to the input/output ports of the payout control board 330B, and the external information terminal board 350 for the board can also be seen as a performance control means that controls the performance.

[Image/sound control unit configuration and functions]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/audio control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 that performs calculations when controlling the images and sounds that represent the performance content, a ROM 312 that stores programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data, a RAM 313 that is used as working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, based on the command sent from the performance control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores image data such as symbol images and background images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 during play, decorative symbols for notifying the player of lottery results, characters and items for displaying preview effects to the player, etc. The SNDROM 316 also stores various sound data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, as well as sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes drawing-related commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314.

The VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, etc. using the read image data, and performs sound processing using the read sound data. The VDP 314 then controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 using the sound data that has been subjected to the sound processing.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not limiting, and a separate processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided.

[Configuration and function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 comprises a CPU 321 that performs calculations when controlling the illumination of various lamps and the operation of the movable props 115 and the performance button 161, a ROM 322 that stores programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data, and a RAM 323 that is used as working memory for the CPU 321.
The lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/flashing and color of light of various lamps based on commands sent from the performance control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable role object 115 and the performance button 161.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light-emitting pattern data) for the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start-up lamp 1211, and movable role object 115, in accordance with the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light-emitting pattern data stored in ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the performance control unit 300. The lamp control unit 320 then controls the light emission of the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start-up lamp 1211, and movable role object 115 based on the read-out light-emitting pattern data.

The board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start lamp 1211, and movable part 115 are all considered to be light-emitting means. Furthermore, the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start lamp 1211, and movable part 115 may be collectively referred to as "lamps" as light-emitting means. Furthermore, the image display unit 114 displays images by illuminating the display. Therefore, in a broad sense, the image display unit 114 can also be considered to be light-emitting means.

Moreover, the frame lamp 157, the button lamp 1611, and the handle lamp 1511 are all provided on the frame member 150. Therefore, the frame lamp 157, the button lamp 1611, and the handle lamp 1511 are all considered to be frame light-emitting means.
Moreover, the board lamp 116, the light guide plate 118, the starting lamp 1211, the image display unit 114, and the movable accessory 115 are all provided on the game board 110. Therefore, the board lamp 116, the light guide plate 118, the starting lamp 1211, the image display unit 114, and the movable accessory 115 are all regarded as board light-emitting means.

In addition, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data for the movable role object 115 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable role object 115 using the read operation pattern data.

In this embodiment, the game control unit 200, the presentation control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, and the lamp control unit 320 are individually configured on a game control board 200B as a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110, a presentation control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board (not shown), and a lamp control board (not shown). Also, the payout control unit 330 and the launch control unit 360 are individually configured on a payout control board 330B arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110.
5, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may also be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by this lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of the game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in Fig. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, a special symbol determination unit 234, and a normal symbol variation control unit 236 as functional units that execute various lottery processes.
The game control unit 200 also includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with the variation of special symbols.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is equipped with a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, a prize ball processing unit 239, an output control unit 240, and a random number control unit 241, which are functional units that control the operation of various devices and process data related to prize balls, etc.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery and a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. Specifically, in the case of the random number value used in the special symbol lottery, one number (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numbers for each type of random number, on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, etc.
Furthermore, in the case of the random number value used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. The obtained random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Note that as the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a winning random number indicating whether or not there is a win, a pattern random number indicating the type of win or a variable pattern random number may also be set.
When a special pattern lottery is held, the special pattern change control unit 233 controls the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222 according to the lottery result.

When the special symbols start to change, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table such as that shown in FIG. 26, which will be described later, to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is won, and whether it is a minor jackpot or a miss if a jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which serve as detection means, and the special symbol determination unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. Note that the aforementioned special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) refers to the processing performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the determination result of whether or not a jackpot game will be played and the determination result of whether or not a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) that can produce a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation is to be used. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" refers to a presentation that makes the player expect a big win in the decorative symbols described below.

When the normal symbol starts to vary, the normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table such as that shown in FIG. 26( e), which will be described later, to determine whether the result of the normal symbol lottery is a "win" or not. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to play the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123, based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Furthermore, if multiple types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of win" when the determination result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
When a regular symbol lottery is held, the regular symbol variation control unit 236 controls the variation of the regular symbol by the regular symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result.
If the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines a "win" in the normal symbol lottery, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times, creating a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the second starting hole 122. On the other hand, if a "loss" is determined, the electric tulip 123 does not open in this manner. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but examples include an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the large prize opening 125 in an operation pattern specified based on the type of big win won, as a big prize game. Also, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 opens the large prize opening 125 for a specified time and a specified number of times, as a small prize game.
The prize ball processing unit 239 manages the number of prizes won by various devices related to winning and lottery, and sets commands for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 performs initialization and initial settings of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Furthermore, when the power is turned off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the basic processing operation by the game control unit 200.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the gaming control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter, step will be abbreviated as "S") 701). Then, the gaming control unit 200 determines whether a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S702).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not a backup flag relating to operation when power is cut off is ON (S703).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the checksum created when the power was cut off is normal (S704).

If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), the game control unit 200 then executes a restoration process (S705). During this restoration process, the game control unit 200 configures the RAM 203. By performing this process, the game progress state (control state) is restored (restored) to the state before the power was shut off. During the restoration process, the game control unit 200 also clears the MY value and MY specific reference value (described below). That is, the MY value and MY specific reference value (described below) are cleared upon power restoration (the counter value becomes "0" upon power restoration). During the restoration process, the game control unit 200 also configures the presentation control means, such as the presentation control unit 300, in response to the restoration from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 configures the presentation control means by outputting a power restoration command to the presentation control unit 300. The power restoration command is a command that includes information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, whether the game is in a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, in this restoration process, the gaming control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.
In addition, the game control unit 200 may send a game status command indicating the current game status to the presentation control unit 300 before or after sending the power restoration command, without including information indicating the current game status in the power restoration command.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S702), the backup flag is OFF (No in S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S704), the game control unit 200 then clears the contents stored in RAM 203 as an initialization process (S706). Clearing the contents stored in RAM 203 may be referred to as RAM clearing below.
If a complete flag or a complete wait flag, which will be described later, is set, these flags are cleared in step 706. That is, if the complete flag or the complete wait flag is set, these flags are cleared by clearing the RAM. Furthermore, by clearing the RAM, the MY value and the MY specific reference value, which will be described later, are also cleared.
In the following, the restoration of power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the RAM clear switch is ON may be referred to as RAM clear restoration. In addition, the restoration of power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the RAM clear switch is OFF may be referred to as non-RAM clear restoration.

Next, the game control unit 200 sets the working area of RAM 203 (S707). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set (initialize) the performance control means, and sets up the sub-board (performance control means) (S708). Setting up the sub-board includes clearing RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) is completed or after the sub-board setting (see S708) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709).The game control unit 200 then repeatedly executes the following loop processes: interrupt permission (S710), interrupt prohibition (S711), symbol random number control process (S712), initial value random number update process (S713), and determination of whether the power cutoff flag is ON (S714).
Here, the interrupt permission (S710) and the interrupt prohibition (S711) are provided to enable the execution of an interrupt process during the execution of this loop process (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, this interrupt process executes the main control process in the game control. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the pattern random number control process (S712), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special pattern lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in game control.
In determining the power-off flag, if the power-off flag is OFF (No in S714), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the loop processing (S710 to S714) and the main control processing by interruption. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (Yes in S714), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (processing at the time of power-off).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit 200 during power-off processing.
In the power-off process, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and enters an infinite loop.

[Main control process of gaming machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, and also instructs the presentation control unit 300 of the presentation control means to control the presentation, and instructs the payout control unit 330 to control the payout of prize balls.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop process shown in Figure 7, the main control process is executed as interrupt processing. As shown in Figure 9, the main control process sequentially executes a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric device process, a prize ball process, a counting process, a base value determination process, a performance information setting process, a MY value determination process, a complete determination process, and an output process (S901 to S911).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting random numbers and updating random number values will be described later.

The switch processing (S902) includes start port switch processing, gate switch processing, normal prize port switch processing, large prize port switch processing, and out ball detection switch processing.
In the start port switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in Fig. 4, and executes processing for the special symbol lottery when the switch is turned ON. Also, as will be described in detail later, when performing pre-determination processing in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, it calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes processing for pre-determination.
In the gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal pattern lottery.
In the normal winning port switch processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the normal winning port switch 217 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal symbol lottery.
In the special prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the special prize opening switch 215 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing related to the prize balls.
In the out ball detection switch processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the out ball detection switch 227 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, performs processing related to the out ball.
The details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are carried out.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol change control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the change pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol change and the processing associated with this pattern change.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol change control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and the processing associated with this pattern change.
The details of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S904), the big prize slot processing and the electric tulip processing are carried out.
In the special prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the special prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the special electric device, the special prize opening 125, based on predetermined conditions.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric device, based on predetermined conditions.
The details of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S905), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239 and sets commands for managing the number of winning balls and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winnings. More specifically, the game control unit 200 references the prize ball count memory area of RAM 203 and causes the prize ball processing unit 239 to set a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the winnings at each winning slot (first start slot 121, second start slot 122, large winning slot 125, regular winning slot 127). The payout control command set in the prize ball processing unit 239 is sent to the payout control unit 330 by the output process shown in step 911, described below. As a result, the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls corresponding to the winnings at each winning slot, which are stored in the prize ball count memory area of RAM 203.

In the counting process (S906), the game control unit 200 performs processing to count the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering various winning ports (mainly the first start port 121 and normal winning port 127) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the total payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering each winning port (the first start port 121, the second start port 122, the large winning port 125, the normal winning port 127) regardless of the game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 regardless of the game state.
In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected entering each winning slot (first starting slot 121, second starting slot 122, large winning slot 125, normal winning slot 127), the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated based on the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning slot. The number of prize balls to be paid out may be referred to as the "planned number of prize balls" below. The calculated planned number of prize balls is added to the value stored in the total payout number storage area. In other words, the total payout number is calculated based on the planned number of prize balls, not the number of game balls actually paid out. However, the total payout number may also be calculated based on the number of game balls actually paid out, rather than the planned number of prize balls.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of payouts during normal play is also calculated based on the planned number of prize balls, not the number of game balls actually paid out. However, the number of payouts during normal play may be calculated based on the number of game balls actually paid out, not the planned number of prize balls.
In this embodiment, the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play do not change depending on the setting value. Therefore, by counting the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play, it is possible to identify the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that is not affected by the setting value.

In the base value determination process (S907), the game control unit 200 determines the normal base value for the current game section, which is divided by the total number of outs. The normal base value is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts during normal play by the number of outs during normal play and multiplying the result by 100. In addition, in step 907, the game control unit 200 stores the determined normal base value in the first area of the base memory area in RAM 203.
In this embodiment, the game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base memory area includes first to fourth areas. The first area stores the normal base value for the current game section, the second area stores the normal base value for the previous game section, the third area stores the normal base value for the previous game section, and the fourth area stores the normal base value for the previous game section.

In the performance information setting process (S908), the game control unit 200 performs settings to display the normal base value saved in the base memory area of RAM 203 as performance information on the information display 230. The manner in which the performance information is displayed on the information display 230 will be described later.

In the MY value determination process (S909), the game control unit 200 performs a process of determining the MY value. The MY value and the MY value determination process will be described later.
In the complete determination process (S910), the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the conditions for activating the complete function are met. The complete function and the complete determination process will be described later.

In the output process (S911), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240 and outputs various commands to the performance control unit 300 and the payout control board 330B. The RAM 203 has a storage area set up for each type of control command.
The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the memory areas of each control command in RAM 203, and if a control command is stored in each memory area (i.e., if a control command has been generated in the processing of S902 to S910), it reads out the control command and outputs it to the output destination (the performance control unit 300 or the payout control board 330B).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each of the processing steps S902 to S910 by the above-mentioned functions as first processing means are stored in the corresponding memory area of RAM 203 for each processing step. Then, after these processing steps, output control unit 240, acting as second processing means, outputs all of the commands generated in each processing step that have been accumulated in the memory area of RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when one cycle of main control processing is executed, the commands generated in that cycle are output after the final command in that cycle is generated.

[Modification of the basic operation of the gaming machine]
In the example of operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, an interrupt is permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and a main control processing consisting of a series of processes is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control processing may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 7 to 9. For example, the main control processing may be incorporated into the series of operations of the basic processing, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the system may return to the main control processing every regular interval (e.g., 4 milliseconds). Furthermore, while the main control processing is incorporated into the series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt may be generated every regular interval, as in the operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, and when an interrupt is generated, the system may return to the main control processing incorporated into the basic processing.

Furthermore, when outputting commands generated in basic processing, as a general rule, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called and output. Basic processing differs from main control processing related to the progress of the game, and is special processing such as initial operations that are performed only when the power is turned on. Furthermore, because the processing procedure may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, basic processing is processing that promptly outputs generated commands to ensure that no output processing is missed. Note that, in cases where commands are generated consecutively by multiple related processes, or in other cases, a processing procedure may be adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and output together depending on the specific processing requirements.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
Random numbers, which serve as judgment information for various lotteries in game control, such as special symbol lotteries, are counted by a counter, starting from a predetermined initial value and incremented by one each time the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. 9 is performed. The value at the time of each lottery is obtained by the start switch process (FIG. 10) and the gate switch process (FIG. 11) and used in the special symbol process (FIG. 13) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 18). This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum random number value (e.g., 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 26(a) described below), it returns to the initial value. Furthermore, because the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is identified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and initial value information. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process at S713.

[Start port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
This start port switch processing is performed sequentially by processing for a win at the first start port 121 and processing for a win at the second start port 122. Referring to Figure 10, the game control unit 200 first determines whether a game ball has won at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned ON (S1001).

When the first start port switch 211 is turned ON (YES in S1001), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1002).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1002), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning at the first start port 121 (S1003), and ends the processing for the winning at the first start port 121. In this case, information indicating the winning at the first start port 121 is created, but the random number value based on the winning at the first start port 121 is not obtained and no prize balls are awarded.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1002), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1004). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the first start port 121 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the first start port 121 to the value stored in the total payout number memory area.

After step 1004, the game control unit 200 determines whether the number U1 of pending winnings from the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1005). In the example shown in Figure 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number U1 of pending winnings has reached the upper limit (No in S1005), no more pending winnings can be reserved, and processing for the winnings from the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1005), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been won this time and stores it in RAM 203 (S1006). In this case, since the win occurred in the first starting slot 121, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value then determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol processing. The random number values referred to here include a jackpot random number value that determines whether or not a win has been won, a small win, or a miss; a pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the type of jackpot; a variation pattern random number value that specifies the variation pattern in the pattern variation; and a reach random number value that determines whether or not a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described below will be set in the event of a miss.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1007). The pre-determination process is a process (pre-determination) in which a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet had its random number determined by the special pattern process described below is subjected to a random number determination (pre-determination) before the random number is determined by the special pattern process.

The effect control unit 300 of this embodiment can then perform a preview effect that suggests the result of the random number determination made by the pre-determination process (pre-determination result) before the random number is determined by the special pattern processing and the result is announced. This preview effect is performed, for example, using a reserve display effect (described below) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting port but for which the random number has not yet been determined by the special pattern processing. This preview effect based on pre-determination suggests to the player the result of the subsequent random number determination made by the special pattern processing for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-determination related to the preview effect. This allows the player to play with anticipation for the reserved ball. Details of the preview effect based on pre-determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S1008).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1009).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number U1 due to S1005 (S1010), and ends processing for the winning at the first starting port 121.

If a negative result is obtained in step 1001, if a negative result is obtained in step 1005, or if the processing of step 1010 is performed, processing for a win at the second start hole 122 is then performed. Referring to Figure 10, the game control unit 200 determines whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 122 and the second start hole switch 212 has been turned ON (S1011).

When the second start port switch 212 is turned ON (YES in S1011), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1012).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1012), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning at the second start port 122 (S1013), and ends the processing for the winning at the second start port 122. In this case, information indicating the winning at the second start port 122 is created, but the random number value based on the winning at the second start port 122 is not obtained and no prize balls are awarded.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1012), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1014). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the second start opening 122 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the second start opening 122 to the value stored in the total payout number memory area.

After step 1014, the game control unit 200 determines whether the number U2 of pending winnings at the second start port 122 that have not yet changed is less than the upper limit (S1015). In the example shown in Figure 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number U2 of pending winnings has reached the upper limit (No in S1015), no more pending winnings can be reserved, and processing for the winnings at the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1015), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery resulting from this winning and stores it in RAM 203 (S1016). In this case, the winning occurred in the second starting slot 122, so similar to S1006 above, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number value, jackpot symbol random number value, small jackpot symbol random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value is then used to determine the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol process.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S1017). The contents of this preliminary determination process are the same as those of S1007.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S1018).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S1017 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1019).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number U2 by S1018 (S1020), and ends processing for the winning at the second start port 122.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the gate switch processing when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1101).

When the gate switch 214 is turned ON (YES in S1101), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1102).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1102), the game control unit 200 disables the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 (S1103), and the gate switch processing ends. In this case, information indicating the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 is created, but a random number value based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 is not obtained.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1102), the game control unit 200 determines whether the number of reserved unchanged balls G is less than the upper limit (S1104). In the example shown in Figure 11, the upper limit is set to 4 balls. If the number of reserved balls G has reached the upper limit (NO in S1104), no more unchanged balls can be reserved, and the gate switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1104), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery when the current game ball passes through the gate 124, and stores it in RAM 203 (S1105). Here, a random number value (such as a winning random number value) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S1106).
After the value of the reserved number G is added in S1106, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number G increase command in RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number G due to S1106 (S1107), and ends processing for the passage of the game ball through gate 124.

[Normal winning port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal winning port switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this normal winning port switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal winning port 127 and the normal winning port switch 217 has been turned ON (S1201). If the normal winning port switch 217 has not been turned ON (NO in S1201), the normal winning port switch processing ends.

On the other hand, if the normal winning port switch 217 is turned ON (YES in S1201), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1202).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning of the regular winning opening 217 (S1203). In this case, information indicating the winning of the regular winning opening 217 is created, but the winning ball for the winning of the regular winning opening 217 is not awarded.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1204). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win at the normal winning port 217 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win at the normal winning port 127 to the value stored in the total payout memory area.

[Big prize slot switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize entrance switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this special prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the special prize opening 125 and the special prize opening switch 215 has been turned ON (S1211). If the special prize opening switch 215 has not been turned ON (NO in S1211), the current special prize opening switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big prize opening switch 215 is turned ON (YES in S1211), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1212).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1212), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning of the special prize opening 215 (S1213). In this case, information indicating the winning of the special prize opening 215 is created, but no winning balls are awarded for the winning of the special prize opening 215.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1212), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1214). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win in the special prize opening 215 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win in the special prize opening 125 to the value stored in the total payout memory area.

[Out ball detection switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12C is a flowchart showing the contents of the out ball detection switch processing of the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this out ball detection switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the out ball detection switch 227 is ON (S1221). If the out ball detection switch 227 is OFF (NO in S1221), the out ball detection switch processing ends.

On the other hand, if the out ball detection switch 227 is turned ON (YES in S1221), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1222).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1222), the game control unit 200 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the complete function was activated (S1223). This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds.
If the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the complete function was activated (YES in S1223), the game control unit 200 updates the number of game balls to be paid back (S1224). More specifically, the game control unit 200 updates the value stored in the payout number storage area of the RAM 203 as the number of game balls to be paid back to the player (planned payout number) to the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 after the complete function was activated.

Furthermore, if a predetermined time has passed since the complete function was activated (NO in S1223), the game control unit 200 disables the detection of out balls by the out ball detection switch 227 (S1225). In this case, information indicating the detection of out balls by the out ball detection switch 227 is created, but the total number of outs and the number of outs during normal play are not added.
Also, after step 1224, the game control unit 200 updates the value stored in the total number of outs storage area of the RAM 203 as the total number of outs (S1226).

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with a payout number storage area that stores the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 after the complete function is activated as the number of game balls to be paid out to the player (planned payout number), and a set time period for counting the planned payout number. The pachinko gaming machine 100 then pays out to the player the game balls that were in the game area 111 when the complete function was activated (the out balls added to the payout number storage area).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game balls that were shot out when the complete function was activated from being wasted by the player.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a jackpot game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (S1301). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the special symbol variation state (S1302).
If the special symbol is not currently being changed (No in S1302), the special symbol change control unit 233 next refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1303). If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 restricts the change of the special symbol (S1304). In this case, even if there is a reserve (a reserve related to a win at the first start port 121, a reserve related to a win at the second start port 122), the special symbol change control unit 233 does not change the special symbol based on this reserve.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 performs processing on the pending numbers U1 and U2 (see Figure 10) of the special symbols that have not yet changed (S1305-S1308). In this embodiment, a distinction is made between the pending number U1 related to winning at the first start port 121 and the pending number U2 related to winning at the second start port 122, so this processing is also performed separately for each corresponding start port.

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 is 1 or more (S1305). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U2 (S1306). On the other hand, if the reserved number U2=0 (No in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 is 1 or more (S1307). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1307), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U1 (S1308). On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 = 0 (No in S1308), this means that there is no winning combination to trigger the lottery for the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not started, and a separate routine for customer waiting setting processing is executed, and the processing ends (S1323).
In this embodiment, priority is given to processing the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122. That is, if the reserved number U2 is 1 or more, processing is performed for the reserved number U2, and if the reserved number U2 = 0, processing is performed for the reserved number U1 (see S1305-S1306). On the other hand, it is also possible to control the reserved numbers U1 and U2 to be decremented in the order of winning, regardless of whether the winning is at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

After subtracting the reserved number U1 or reserved number U2 in S1306 or S1308, the special symbol variation control unit 233 generates a game status command indicating the current game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in RAM 203 (S1309). The game status command set in S1309 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9. Furthermore, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S1310). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1323, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a separate routine for determining whether a jackpot has occurred and for selecting a variation pattern (S1311, S1312). Details will be described later, but this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process determine setting information (jackpot symbol, game status, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbols that are displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 starts variation of the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in Fig. 3 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process (S1313). Then, a variation start command including setting information indicating the setting contents (jackpot symbol, game status, variation pattern, etc.) is generated and set in RAM 203 (S1314). The variation start command set in S1314 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Fig. 9.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of times the special symbol has been varied since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clearing, resetting of the number of variations) (S1315). Then, a variation number command indicating the added number of times the variable display has been varied is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1316). The variation number command set in S1316 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

Also, if it is determined in S1302 that a special symbol is changing (Yes in S1302), the special symbol change control unit 233 references the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1317). If the complete flag is ON (Yes in S1317), the special symbol change control unit 233 stops the change of the special symbol that is currently being performed (S1318) and ends the special symbol processing.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1317), or after the number of variations command is set in S1316, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the variation time has elapsed (S1319). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the special symbol variation began in S1313 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process in S1312. If the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1319), the special symbol variation continues, and the special symbol processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S1319), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first stops the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 at the symbol determined in the jackpot determination process of S1311 (S1320). Then, another routine of during-stop processing is executed (S1321). The details of the during-stop processing will be described later. In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233 sets a variation stop command to stop the decorative symbols (described later) in the RAM 203 (S1322). The variation stop command set in S1322 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.
It should be noted that, if a win at the second starting port 122 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121, the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122 may occur during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121. Also, for example, if a win at the first starting port 121 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122, the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121 may occur during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 13, after subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or reserved number U1 (see S1306, S1308), the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1311, S1312), but this is not limited to this.
In the special symbol processing, after the jackpot determination processing and the variation pattern selection processing are executed, a processing for subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 may be executed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection processing, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 before subtraction.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Game Control Unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process (S1311 in FIG. 13).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value for this special symbol lottery (S1401) and determines whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has occurred (S1402, S1405). Whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has occurred is determined by determining whether the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S1006 or S1016 of Fig. 10 matches the value set as the winning value for the jackpot or the value set as the winning value for the small jackpot (see Fig. 26(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a jackpot (Yes in S1402), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1403). The type of jackpot is determined based on the result of this determination. The type of jackpot is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in S1006 or S1016 of FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of jackpot (see FIG. 26(b)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1404).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a small win (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the small win symbol random number value (S1406). The type of small win is determined based on the result of this determination. The type of small win is determined by whether the value of the big win symbol random number obtained in S1006 or S1016 of FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of small win (see FIG. 26(c)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (small win symbol) representing the type of small win determined by the determination of the small win symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a big win nor a small win (No in S1402 and S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then sets a symbol indicating that the lottery was lost (hereinafter referred to as the losing symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1408).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1312 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, or the specific time-saving game state) (S1501). Then, using the determination result of S1402 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), it determines whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1502). Then, if a jackpot has been achieved (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a variation pattern table for the jackpot from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if a jackpot has not been reached (No in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then uses the determination result of S1405 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not a small jackpot has been reached in this special pattern lottery (S1504). If a small jackpot has been reached (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for small jackpots from ROM 202 and sets it in RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if a small win has not been achieved (NO in S1504), a random number value is judged to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform a reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value acquired in S1006 or S1016 of Fig. 10 matches a preset value (see Fig. 26(d)).
If the result of the determination using the random number value is that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). On the other hand, if a reach effect is not to be performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a table that associates multiple pre-prepared fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S1006 or S1016 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509 (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 references the variation pattern table set in RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern corresponding to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced will differ depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in a time-shortened state or not), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it has been a jackpot or a small jackpot, and whether a reach effect is to be performed if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot has been achieved), etc., and therefore the variation pattern that is determined will differ.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1510 as setting information in RAM 203 (S1511). The setting information for the variation pattern set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1314 of FIG. 13, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stoppage process (S1321 in FIG. 13).
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether a flag indicating a time-shortened state (hereinafter, the time-shortened flag) is ON in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S1601). If the time-shortened flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (variable number) J in the time-shortened state (S1602) and checks whether the number of lotteries J has become 0 (S1603). If the number of lotteries J=0 (Yes in S1603), the game control unit 200 turns OFF the time-shortened flag (S1604). The operation of turning ON the time-shortened flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 20) in the large prize winning port process (FIG. 19) described below.
If the number of lottery draws J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time-saving count command indicating the value of the number of lottery draws J in the time-saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time-saving count command set in S1605 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG.

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 can enter a high-probability time-shortening no-play state, processing related to the high-probability time-shortening no-play state is performed during this stoppage processing.
The game control unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high probability state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability flag) is ON in the flag settings of the RAM 203. If the high probability flag is ON, the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of variations) X in the high probability state, and checks whether the number of lotteries X has become 0. If the number of lotteries X=0, the high probability flag is turned OFF.

Also, if the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S1601), or after the time-saving flag is turned OFF in S1604, or after the time-saving count command is set in S1605, the game control unit 200 then generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S1606). The game status command set in S1606 is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not a jackpot has been awarded in this special symbol lottery (S1607). Here, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been awarded can be made based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 26(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the answer is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), the game control unit 200 then turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608), which sets the game state in the RAM 203 to the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery draws J (S1609). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S1601 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S1603, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S1610).

After initializing the value of the number of lottery draws J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S1611).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets in the RAM 203 an opening command for the effect control unit 300 to perform an effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag (S1612), and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is sent to the effect control unit 300 by the output processing shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1607), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the result of this special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S1613).
If it is a small win (YES in S1613), the game control unit 200 then starts a small win game (S1614).

On the other hand, if it is not a small win (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 determines whether the number of times the special symbol variable display has been executed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the variable number) has reached a specific number (300 in this embodiment) (S1615). If the specific number has been reached (YES in S1615), the game control unit 200 executes a game status setting process of a separate routine (S1616). The content of the game status setting process will be described later.
Also, if the number of times the variable display has been displayed has not reached the specified number (NO in S1615), the processing during the stoppage is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1323 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and processing ends immediately (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the gaming control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in RAM 203 (S1702), and sets the customer waiting flag ON (S1703). The pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to be in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting command set in S1702 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9. The customer waiting flag is set when the variation of special symbols has stopped and there are no reserved symbols.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. When the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 21) described below, making it easier to win the second start hole 122 (auxiliary game state).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state has already been entered and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1802).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 restricts the change of the normal symbol (S1803). If the change of the normal symbol is being executed in step 1802, the normal symbol change control unit 236 stops the change of the normal symbol that is being executed. Also, even if there is a hold (a hold related to the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124) in step 1802, the normal symbol change control unit 236 does not execute the change of the normal symbol based on this hold.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S1804). If the normal symbol is not during change (NO in S1804), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 11) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or greater (S1805). If the reserved number G = 0 (NO in S1805), this means that there is no winning combination to start the normal symbol lottery, and processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1805), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number G (S1806). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number for this normal symbol lottery and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (S1807). Whether or not a win has been achieved is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S1105 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in a table such as that shown in FIG. 26(e) described below.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1808). That is, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the win (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing the loss (hereinafter, the losing symbol) is set in RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol variation time (S1809). This variation time is set based on the time-saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2008 in FIG. 20 described below. That is, if the time-saving flag is ON when setting in S1809, the variation time is set to a short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and if the time-saving flag is OFF, the variation time is set to a long time (e.g., 4.0 seconds). After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts varying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 2(a) and FIG. 4 based on the settings in S1809 (S1810). The normal symbol variation pattern can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, thereby setting the fluctuation time.

After the normal pattern change has started in S1810, or if it is determined in S1804 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S1804), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1811). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S1810 has reached the change time set in S1809. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1811), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (Yes in S1811), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 (S1812). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether the result of the determination in S1807 was a win (S1813). If it was a win (Yes in S1813), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1814). On the other hand, if the lottery was unsuccessful (No in S1813), the normal symbol processing ends without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Big prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize slot processing in the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this special prize opening process, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the special prize opening flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the special prize opening flag is OFF, no prize will be won in the special prize opening 125, and the special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the special prize opening flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the special prize opening operation control started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S1902).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the opening mode (Yes in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation has elapsed (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation of the special prize opening 125 continues, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs operation settings for the special prize opening 125 (S1904), initializes the number of wins C (C = 0) (S1905), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R for the operation of the special prize opening 125 (S1906), and starts operation (opens) the special prize opening 125 (S1907).

The activation setting in S1904 sets the activation pattern of the large prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (number of activation rounds) to be activated with that activation pattern. The activation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Note that in a jackpot game, it is specified that the large prize opening 125 is activated multiple times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, it is activated for 15 rounds (15R), with one round opening for 29.5 seconds. As another example, it is activated for two rounds (2R), with one round opening for 0.9 seconds. To explain further, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the opening time for the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the opening time for the special prize opening 125 has not elapsed (No in S1908), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the number of prizes C won by the special prize opening 125 is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 9 prizes) (S1909). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of prizes C is less than the specified number, the special prize opening 125 will remain in operation (open), and special prize opening processing will be terminated (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or the number of prizes C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 will terminate operation (close) of the special prize opening 125 (S1910).

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the special prize opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations will be performed, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1911).

When the number of rounds R of operation of the special prize opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the special prize game flag.
After this, the big win opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for the performance control unit 300 to perform the performance in the ending operation according to the big win game flag (S1913). This ending command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of operation of the special prize opening 125 to 0 (S1914), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has exceeded the preset time for the ending operation to be performed (ending time) (S1917). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation continues, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1917), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs a game status setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1918), and then turns off the jackpot game flag and terminates the special prize opening processing (S1919). The details of the game status setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the ending mode is in progress (S1915). If the ending mode is in progress (Yes in S1915), the operations from S1917 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not currently ending (No in S1915), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the special prize opening 125 is in operation (open) (S1916). If it is not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onwards are executed.

[Game status setting process]
The contents of the game status setting process (S1616, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 determines whether the result of the special symbol lottery was a big win or a small win (S2001, S2002). This determination can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the big win determination process (FIG. 14). Note that these determinations are generally similar to S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 in the big win determination process (FIG. 14), and therefore the determination results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may also be used.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win (YES in S2001), the game control unit 200 does not change the game state and therefore ends the game state setting process.
If the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (NO in S2001 and YES in S2002), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lotteries J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2003). This initial value is, for example, 100 times.

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 can enter a high-probability time-shortening no-play state, processing relating to the high-probability time-shortening no-play state is carried out in step 2003 .
The game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag and sets an initial value for the number of lottery draws X. The initial value for the number of lottery draws X is, for example, 100. As a result, the game state setting in the RAM 203 becomes a high probability time-shortened game state. Then, when 100 lotteries have been drawn in this high probability time-shortened game state, the high probability time-shortened game state ends, and the game enters a normal game state (a low probability non-time-shortened game state).

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times the special symbol has been displayed after the predetermined condition is met (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of times the special symbol has been displayed) (S2004). The game control unit 200 also generates a command indicating the number of times the special symbol has been displayed and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2005). This command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the special time-shortening flag (S2006), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the special time-shortening game state.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is neither a big win nor a small win (NO in S2001, NO in S2002), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lotteries J (S2007). In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of lotteries J is 295. Therefore, when 295 lotteries are performed in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the specific time-shortening flag (S2008), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the specific time-shortening game state.

Next, the game control unit 200 generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S2009). This game status command is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing in the electric accessory processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON or not (S2101).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S2101), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 restricts the operation of the electric tulip 123 (S2102). If the electric tulip 123 is operating (open) in step 2101, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 closes the electric tulip 123. Also, even if the auxiliary game flag is ON in step 2101, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 does not operate (open) the electric tulip 123.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S2101), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag settings in RAM 203 (S2103). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF (NO in S2103), the electric tulip 123 will not open, and the electric tulip processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (YES in S2103), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 then determines whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S2104).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2104), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern for the electric tulip 123 (S2105) and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S2106). The operation pattern is set based on the time-saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2006 and S2008 in FIG. 20. For example, if the time-saving flag is OFF when set in S2105, an operation pattern is set that opens the electric tulip once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds. If the time-saving flag is ON, an operation pattern is set that opens the electric tulip three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds. Thus, when the time-saving flag is ON (in the time-saving state), the electric tulip 123 is typically opened multiple times for a long period of time, providing a winning support (electric tulip support) that makes it easier to win a prize in the second starting hole 122. It is also possible to provide multiple operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) for the electric tulip 123 when the time-saving flag is ON or OFF, and set the operation pattern according to the type of win determined in the normal symbol processing (see Figure 18).

If it is determined in S2104 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S2104), or after operating the electric tulip 123 in S2106, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time for the set operation pattern has elapsed (S2107). If the opening time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 will remain in operation (open state), and the electric tulip processing will end (No in S2107). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2107), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 will turn off the auxiliary game flag and end the electric tulip processing (S2108).

[Stopping the game]
Next, the stopping of the game will be explained.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment stops the game and notifies the user of the game's stoppage when a predetermined condition is met. Here, stopping the game means stopping the variation of the symbols (special symbols, normal symbols), not starting the variation of the symbols (special symbols, normal symbols), invalidating the winnings at each winning slot (first starting slot 121, second starting slot 122, big winning slot 125, normal winning slot 127), and invalidating the passage of the game balls through the gate 124.
Hereinafter, the function of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to stop playing and notify the player of the game's halt when predetermined conditions are met may be referred to as the "complete function." Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100's stopping playing and notifying the player of the game's halt when predetermined conditions are met may be referred to as the "activation of the complete function."

In this embodiment, two conditions are defined as conditions for activating the complete function. Note that, hereinafter, the conditions for activating the complete function may be referred to as complete function activation conditions.
The first complete function activation condition is determined based on the relationship between the number of game balls paid out and the number of game balls shot. More specifically, the first complete function activation condition is that the increase in the number of game balls from the point at which the number of game balls is lowest when the game results for that day are obtained reaches a predetermined upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit is 95,000 balls. However, the upper limit may be any value.
The second condition for the complete function to be activated is determined based on the game status. More specifically, the second condition is that the game is not in progress and the jackpot symbol is not being determined.
That is, in this embodiment, the time when the number of game balls has decreased the most when the game results for that day are used as the reference, and even if the increase in the number of game balls from this reference reaches the upper limit, the complete function does not operate when the jackpot symbol is stopped to be determined or a jackpot game is in progress. Also, even if the time when the jackpot symbol is not stopped to be determined or a jackpot game is not in progress, the complete function does not operate when the increase in the number of game balls from this reference does not reach the upper limit, and even if the time when the jackpot symbol is not stopped to be determined or a jackpot game is in progress, the complete function does not operate.

In addition, the value at which the number of game balls has decreased the most between the reference value (0) when the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off is used as the base value, and if the increase in the number of game balls from this value reaches the upper limit value, or if the increase reaches the upper limit value while the jackpot pattern is being confirmed or a jackpot game is in progress, the complete function will be activated after the jackpot game ends.
This allows the pachinko gaming machine 100 to realize a variety of games while suppressing excessive increases in gambling.

When the complete function is activated, the game control unit 200 may stop (limit) the launch of game balls by stopping the flow of electricity to the launch solenoid 158a and the ball feed solenoid 158b via the payout control board 330B.

In the following, the value at which the number of game balls has decreased the most between the reference value at power-on and the time when the power is cut off may be referred to as the MY specific reference value.
In the following, the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the total number of outs from the total number of payouts after the power is turned on may be referred to as the difference in balls. The above-mentioned MY specific reference value can also be regarded as the difference in balls when it has decreased the most after the power is turned on (the difference in balls when the game result is obtained the most). In other words, the MY specific reference value can also be regarded as the difference in balls when it has decreased the most in the game result from the time the power is turned on to the present in one day.
Furthermore, the first complete function activation condition mentioned above can also be understood as the difference between the difference balls and the MY specific reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the difference balls) reaching an upper limit value.
In addition, hereinafter, the difference between the difference balls and the MY specific reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the difference balls) may be referred to as the MY value. The MY value can also be regarded as the increase in the number of game balls relative to the MY specific reference value. In addition, the upper limit of the difference between the difference balls and the MY specific reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the difference balls), which is set as the first complete function activation condition, may be referred to as the MY upper limit value. In addition, hereinafter, the difference between the MY upper limit value and the MY value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY value from the MY upper limit value) may be referred to as the MY remaining value.

[MY value determination process by game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the MY value specification process shown in S909 of FIG.
The game control unit 200 refers to the value stored in the total payout memory area and the value stored in the total out memory area, and determines whether the total payout number or the total out number has changed (S2201). If neither the total payout number nor the total out number has changed (NO in S2201), the game control unit 200 ends the MY value determination process.

On the other hand, if the total number of payouts or the total number of outs has changed (YES in S2201), the game control unit 200 subtracts the value stored in the total number of outs memory area from the value stored in the total number of payouts memory area to calculate the difference in balls at the current time (S2202).
Next, the game control unit 200 refers to the MY specific reference value stored in the MY specific reference value storage area of the RAM 203, and determines whether the MY specific reference value is greater than the current difference in balls (S2203).

If the MY specific reference value is greater than the current difference in balls (YES in S2203), the game control unit 200 updates the MY specific reference value by storing the current difference in balls in the MY specific reference value memory area (S2204).
Also, if the MY specific reference value is smaller than the current difference in balls (NO in S2203), and after step 2204, the game control unit 200 updates the MY value by storing the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the current difference in balls in the MY value memory area (S2205).

Next, the game control unit 200 generates an MY value command indicating the updated MY value and sets it in RAM 203 (S2206). This MY value command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9.

As described above, in this embodiment, the MY specific reference value is not updated when the difference in balls is updated to a larger value, and is updated when the difference in balls is updated to a smaller value. In other words, the MY specific reference value is the smallest difference in balls in a day after the power is turned on. Furthermore, the MY value is not updated when the difference in balls is smaller than the MY specific reference value, but is updated according to the increase in the number of game balls from the MY specific reference value. In other words, the MY value is always greater than or equal to 0.

[Complete determination process by the game control unit]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the contents of the complete determination process shown in S910 of FIG.
The game control unit 200 first refers to the value stored in the MY value storage area and determines whether the MY value has reached the MY upper limit (S2301). If the MY value has not reached the MY upper limit (NO in S2301), the game control unit 200 ends the complete determination process.

On the other hand, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (YES in S2301), the game control unit 200 determines whether the standby condition is met (S2302). In this embodiment, the standby condition is that the jackpot symbol is stopped and fixed or that a jackpot game is in progress.
If the standby condition is not satisfied (NO in S2302), the game control unit 200 turns ON the complete flag in the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 (S2303). The game control unit 200 also generates a complete command indicating that the complete function is activated and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2304). This complete command is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

Also, if the standby conditions are met (YES in S2302), the game control unit 200 turns ON the complete standby flag in the complete standby flag storage area of RAM 203 (S2305). The game control unit 200 also generates a complete standby command indicating that the operation of the complete function is in a standby state, and sets this in RAM 203 (S2306). This complete standby command is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value when the jackpot symbol is not fixed and stopped, or when the jackpot game is not in progress, the complete function is activated.
Furthermore, when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit while the jackpot symbol is being determined or stopped or during a jackpot game, the operation of the complete function is put on standby. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the waited complete function is carried out.

[Relationship between MY specific standard value, difference ball and MY value]
Next, the relationship between the MY specific reference value, the difference ball, and the MY value will be described.
Figures 24 and 25 are diagrams showing the relationship between the MY specific reference value, the difference in balls, and the MY value according to the results of games at multiple timings in one day.
24 and 25, timing T0 is when the power is turned on. At timing T0, the difference ball, MY specific reference value, and MY value are all 0.
As shown in Figure 24 (1), at timing T1, the difference in balls becomes "-5000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-5000" and the MY value is "0".

Next, as shown in Figure 24 (2), at timing T2, the difference in balls becomes "+5000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-5000". In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T2, the difference in balls is greatest at timing T1, so the MY specific reference value at timing T2 remains unchanged from timing T1. Furthermore, the MY value is "+10000", which is the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-5000" from the difference in balls at timing T2 of "+5000".

Next, as shown in Figure 24 (3), at timing T3, the difference in balls becomes "-10000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is updated to "-10000". In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T3, timing T3 is the timing when the difference in balls decreased the most, so the difference in balls at timing T3 becomes the MY specific reference value. Also, the value "0" obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-10000" from the difference in balls at timing T3 "-10000" is the MY value.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (4), at timing T4, the difference in balls becomes "+15,000." In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-10,000." In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T4, the difference in balls decreased the most at timing T3, so the MY specific reference value at timing T4 remains unchanged from timing T3. Also, the MY value is "+25,000," which is the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-10,000" from the difference in balls "+15,000" at timing T4.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (5), at T5, the difference in balls becomes "+85000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-10000". In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T5, the timing at which the difference in balls decreased the most was timing T3, so the MY specific reference value at timing T5 remains unchanged from timing T3. Also, the value "+95000" obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-10000" from the difference in balls "+85000" at timing T5 is the MY value.
When the MY value reaches "95000" (MY upper limit), the game stops and the operation of the complete function is announced, except when the jackpot symbol is stopped to be determined or the jackpot game is in progress. Also, if the jackpot symbol is stopped to be determined or the jackpot game is in progress when the MY value reaches "95000", the game stops after the jackpot game ends and the operation of the complete function is announced.

[Random number determination method]
Next, we will explain in detail the random number determination method used in the jackpot determination process (Figure 14), variable pattern selection process (Figure 15), normal pattern process (Figure 18), etc.
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 26(a) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 26(b) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 26(c) shows an example of the composition of a small win random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 26(d) shows an example of the composition of a reach random number used in the special pattern lottery that is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in normal game mode, and Figure 26(e) shows an example of the composition of a winning random number used in the normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 26( a), the jackpot random number determination values are set to two types: a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is in a low-probability state, a jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is in a high-probability state, and a small jackpot. The range of values for the random numbers (jackpot random numbers) is 300, ranging from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) at a low-probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In the case of a special symbol lottery at a high-probability state, ten winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). In other words, in the illustrated example, if a prize is awarded in the starting slots 121 and 122 at a high-probability state and a special symbol lottery is held, the winning probability is 10 times higher than when a special symbol lottery is held at a low-probability state. In addition, three small prize values are set regardless of whether the state is low probability or high probability, and the probability of winning is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, taking the special symbol lottery in the low probability state as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot random number value (see S1006, S1016) obtained as a result of winning in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 matches the winning value of "5" in the jackpot lottery in the low probability state in Fig. 26(a). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small win.

Referring to Figure 26(b), there are five types of jackpot symbols available: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, and jackpot symbol E. Here, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C are symbols that indicate a jackpot as the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win in the first starting gate 121, and of these, jackpot symbol A indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol B indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol C indicates a ten-round jackpot. Furthermore, jackpot symbol D and jackpot symbol E are symbols that indicate a jackpot as the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win in the second starting gate 122, and of these, jackpot symbol D indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol E indicates a ten-round jackpot. The random number value range is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the jackpot symbol A, 20 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol A is 20/100 (= 2/10).
For the jackpot symbol B, 70 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol B is 70/100 (=7/10).
For the jackpot symbol C, 10 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol C is 10/100 (= 1/10).

For the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol D is 50/100 (= 5/10).
For the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol E is 50/100 (= 5/10).

Here, taking jackpot pattern A as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot pattern random number value (see S1006) obtained upon winning in the first starting slot 121 matches the winning value of jackpot pattern A in Figure 26 (b), which is "0 to 19." While a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery for other jackpot patterns, such as jackpot pattern B.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value, which is a level of advantageousness in the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to one of, for example, six levels: "1,""2,""3,""4,""5," and "6."
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1," the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1," the probability of winning is 1/100.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is highest when the set value is set to "6." For example, when the set value is "6," the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to Figure 26(c), there are three types of small win symbols: small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C. Here, small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C all indicate a two-round small win. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the small prize symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery that is initiated by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol A is 20/100 (= 2/10).
For the small prize symbol B, 50 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol B is 50/100 (= 5/10).
For the small prize symbol C, 30 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol C is 30/100 (= 3/10).

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be explained. The reach random number is set according to the number of reserved balls, as will be described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 121 is one will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 26(d), the range of random number values is 250, from 0 to 249. 22 random number values are assigned to the lottery results (with reach) that result in a variation pattern (variation time) in which a reach effect can be executed (e.g., 15.0 seconds or longer), and 228 random number values are assigned to the lottery results (without reach) that do not result in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed (e.g., less than 15.0 seconds). In other words, in the illustrated example, if a jackpot is not won in the special pattern lottery, a reach effect is executed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Hereinafter, the reach effect is an effect executed on the image display unit 114 when a special pattern changes. Hereinafter, an effect when a special pattern changes that does not result in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed is referred to as a reach-free effect, and a effect when a special pattern changes that results in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed is referred to as a reach-free effect.

Here, taking the example of a reach-enabled situation, it is determined whether the reach random number value (see S1006) obtained upon winning in the first starting port 121 matches the reach-enabled winning value of "0 to 21" in Figure 26 (d). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but the same applies to the special symbol lottery without a reach. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting port 121 and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting port 122 may have the same or different winning values. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the normal play state, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving play state, and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the specific time-saving play state may have the same or different winning values.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, an effect using decorative symbols is produced on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 (hereinafter, referred to as special symbol displays 221 and 222 when no distinction is made). The decorative symbols are, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a vertically consecutive sequence of numbers from 1 to 9. When the special symbol display units 221 and 222 begin to display the special symbol changes, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 114 begin scrolling. Furthermore, when the special symbol is displayed as a static symbol a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol display (the start of the decorative symbol scrolling), the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped. Generally, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, the decorative symbol displays three identical numbers lined up horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. The effect produced in conjunction with the display of the special symbol changes is called a dynamic effect. Note that, below, a variable effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot may be referred to as a jackpot variable effect. Also, a variable effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss may be referred to as a miss variable effect. Also, a variable effect in which a reach effect is executed may be referred to as a reach variable effect. Also, a variable effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss and in which a reach effect is executed may be referred to as a reach miss variable effect. Also, a variable effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss and in which a reach effect is not executed may be referred to as a miss variable effect.

In the reach effect, the following operation is performed on the decorative symbols as a variable effect. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are fixed and stopped, any two symbols (number series) are temporarily stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolling vertically, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal line.
Next, the scrolling speed of the last row gradually slows down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. After the last row temporarily stops, the three symbols will stop.

Now, let's explain what a temporary stop is. A temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which, at first glance, the pattern appears to be stopped, but in reality, the decorative pattern (performance pattern) is moving. In other words, a temporary stop of a decorative pattern (performance pattern) is a state in which, for game control purposes, the decorative pattern (performance pattern) is treated as continuing to change. Here, the stop of a decorative pattern (performance pattern) includes not only a confirmed stop, but also a temporary stop. Furthermore, a confirmed stop of a pattern refers to a state in which, in the display of one change in the special pattern, the decorative pattern (performance pattern) is stopped as a confirmed decorative pattern (performance pattern).

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may change the decorative pattern (performance pattern), then stop the decorative pattern (performance pattern), temporarily stop it, and then finally stop it. In this case, the stillness of the decorative pattern (performance pattern) after the change and before the temporary stop is also included in the stopping of the decorative pattern (performance pattern).
Furthermore, when the performance control unit 300 stops the movement of the decorative pattern (performance pattern) in a predetermined direction (scrolling direction) during the change, it may cause the decorative pattern (performance pattern) to be displayed in motion by a stop-time motion performance described below. In this case, the display of the decorative pattern (performance pattern) in motion by the stop-time motion performance is also included in the stopping of the decorative pattern (performance pattern).
In other words, stopping the decorative pattern (performance pattern) includes stopping the movement of the decorative pattern (performance pattern) in a specified direction (scrolling direction) during variation, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (performance pattern) is displayed in motion or not.

Returning to the explanation of the reach effect. In the reach effect, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. The SP reach effect is generally called a super reach or a special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a jackpot than a reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds. The SPSP reach effect is generally called a super super reach or a special special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a jackpot than an SP reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds.
In addition, a reach effect in which neither the SP reach effect nor the SPSP reach effect is performed may be referred to as a normal reach effect below.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27, which will be described later, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are not fixed and stopped until they are fixed and stopped without any performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach performance, and the symbols are fixed and stopped without the same numbers lining up in a straight line horizontally (vertically) or diagonally.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot random number is a miss, the reach random number determines whether to perform a reach effect in which the reach effect is an executable variation pattern on the image display unit 114, or a reach-less effect in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern. Also, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect according to the number of reserved numbers, enabling efficient game progress while giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols can be fixed and stopped with the same numbers lined up in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. On the other hand, when a small win or a loss occurs, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped with the same numbers not lined up in the above line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
26(e), the range of random number values is 10, from 0 to 9, with one value assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF and nine values assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is ON. Therefore, when a gaming ball passes through gate 124 and a regular symbol lottery is held when there is no time-saving state, there is a 1/10 probability of winning. In contrast, when a gaming ball passes through gate 124 and a regular symbol lottery is held when there is a time-saving state, there is a 9/10 probability of winning.

Here, taking the time-saving flag OFF as an example, it is determined whether the winning random number value (see S1105) obtained when the game ball enters the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122 or when the game ball passes through the gate 124 matches "0", which is the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF in Figure 26 (e). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but the same applies to the normal symbol lottery when the time-saving flag is ON.

Although not shown, it is possible to set a plurality of winning options with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening patterns of the electric tulips 123) to be played when a winning is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set in the same way as the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 26(b)) that specifies the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and identifies the type of winning based on the acquired random number value by the normal symbol determination unit 232.
Note that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in Figure 26 are merely examples and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting a fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
Figure 27 is a diagram showing an example of setting the variation pattern and table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in Figure 15. In addition, Figure 27 shows a setting example when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 in FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value (see S1006) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, if the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern random number is "51," this matches the variation pattern random number range of "50 to 69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. 27, and therefore "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time for this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds."

Furthermore, when the result of the special symbol lottery determination is a miss (when both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery is "1," the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the reach random number value (see S1006) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the reserved number "1" for a "miss" in FIG. 26, or to the reach random number range "22 to 249." If the acquired reach random number is within the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 69", so "PR8" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the table shown in Figure 27, "PR1," which is a "variation pattern" of "no reach" where the "reserved number" is "1," is set to "8.00" as the "time," "PR2," which is a "variation pattern" of "no reach" where the "reserved number" is "2" and "3," is set to "4.80" as the "time," and "PR3," which is a "variation pattern" of "no reach" where the "reserved number" is "4," is set to "3.60" as the "time." In other words, in normal gameplay, the more reserved numbers there are, the shorter the special symbol variation time may become.

28 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 28 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second starting hole in the normal game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 28, variation patterns are provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, variation patterns are provided in which the "determination result" corresponds to "big win,""smallwin," and "miss," respectively.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern in which "time" is "7.00" is provided for "jackpot pattern D". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "7.01" is provided for "jackpot pattern E". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "6.00" is provided for "small prize pattern A". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "6.01" is provided for "small prize pattern B". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "6.02" is provided for "small prize pattern C". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "0.50" is provided for "miss".

In this table, a "miss" is not assigned a winning value in the reach random number. Therefore, a reach is not performed for special symbol variations in which the lottery result based on winning the second start slot 122 during normal gameplay is a miss.

29 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 29 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.
The table shown in Figure 29 provides variation patterns according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U2 for the second special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 29, a fluctuation pattern in which the "time" is "2.50" for "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1" is provided. This "time" of "2.50" is shorter than the "time" of "8.00" for the "fluctuation pattern" in which the "reserved number" is "1" and "no reach" is provided in the table shown in FIG. 27. Also, in the table shown in FIG. 29, a fluctuation pattern in which the "time" is "2.00" for "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3" is provided. This "time" of "2.00" is shorter than the "time" of "4.80" for the "fluctuation pattern" in which the "reserved number" is "2 to 3" and "no reach" is provided in the table shown in FIG. 27. Also, in the table shown in FIG. 29, a fluctuation pattern in which the "time" is "1.50" for "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "4" is provided. This "time" of "1.50" is shorter than the "time" of "3.60" of the "variation pattern" set as "no reach" in the table shown in Figure 27, where the "number of reserved" is "4".

30 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 30 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 30, a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery, the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In this table, a winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to a "variation pattern" in which the "judgment result" is "miss." Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start slot 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, a reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in Fig. 30, a variation pattern is provided in which the "reserved number" is "1 to 4" and the "time" is "14.00". The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than any of the "times" of the "variation patterns" provided as "no reach" in the table shown in Fig. 29. In other words, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a "miss" and "no reach", the variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning at the second start port 122 is shorter than the variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning at the first start port 121.

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used to select the special symbol variation pattern based on whether the gaming ball has entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 and the game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained when the gaming ball entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, and conditions such as the presence or absence of a reach effect and the number of reserved balls. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is then included in a variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300. As described below, the presentation control unit 300 selects and executes, as the presentation when the special symbol varies, a presentation that corresponds to (can be executed within) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of performance control unit for performing preview performance based on advance judgment]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the presentation control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the preview presentation based on the advance determination will be described.
31A and 31B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 31A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 204, and Fig. 31B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 31A.

As shown in Figure 31(a), RAM 203 has memory area 204, which serves as a special symbol reserve memory area for storing jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This memory area 204 has eight memory sections corresponding to the maximum number of reserved numbers for first start port 121 and second start port 122 (when the upper limit for each reserved number is 4). Specifically, memory area 204 has first memory section 204a, second memory section 204b, third memory section 204c, fourth memory section 204d, fifth memory section 204e, sixth memory section 204f, seventh memory section 204g, and eighth memory section 204h.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(b), each of these memory units 204a to 204h has an area for storing information indicating which starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) was won, an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number. In other words, each of memory units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order, starting with the first storage unit 204a. To be more specific, for example, if no random numbers are stored in any of the first storage unit 204a through the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number will be stored in the first storage unit 204a. Also, for example, if random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a through the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number will be stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

When the reserved numbers (reserved numbers U1, U2) are subtracted in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 (S1306, S1308), the random numbers stored in the first memory unit 204a through the eighth memory unit 204h are shifted to the previous memory area 204. Here, the RAM 203 may be provided with a random number memory area for storing random numbers used in the jackpot determination processing (S1311). In this case, the random numbers stored in the first memory unit 204a are shifted to the random number memory area in response to the subtraction of the reserved numbers. At this time, the random numbers already stored in the random number memory area, i.e., the random numbers used in the previous jackpot determination processing (the previous special symbol variable display), are erased (overwritten). However, the timing at which the random numbers stored in the random number memory area are erased is not limited to when the reserved numbers are subtracted. When a special symbol lottery is executed in the jackpot determination processing, the random numbers used in this special symbol lottery (the random numbers stored in the random number memory area) may be erased.

Fig. 32 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of RAM 303 (see Fig. 4) of performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 32(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved memory areas 305 and 306, and Fig. 32(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 32(a).
As shown in FIG. 32A, RAM 303 includes a first reserved memory area 305 and a second reserved memory area 306 as reserved status memory areas for storing the status of reserved balls. The first reserved memory area 305 and the second reserved memory area 306 correspond to reserved balls for winning the first starting hole 121 and reserved balls for winning the second starting hole 122, respectively, and each has four memory sections. Specifically, the first reserved memory area 305 includes a first memory section 305a, a second memory section 305b, a third memory section 305c, and a fourth memory section 305d. The second reserved memory area 306 includes a first memory section 306a, a second memory section 306b, a third memory section 306c, and a fourth memory section 306d.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32(b), each of these memory units 305a-305d and 306a-306d has a reserve flag memory area for turning a reserve flag ON/OFF and a notification flag memory area for turning a notification flag ON/OFF. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying whether or not there are reserved balls in each of the memory units 305a-305d and 306a-306d. For example, if the number of reserved balls due to winning in the first starting hole 121 is three, the reserve flags will be ON in the three reserve flag memory areas of the first through third memory units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a preview effect based on the results of a preliminary determination for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a preview effect based on the results of a preliminary determination depending on the game status and the presentation situation. Therefore, if a preview effect is to be performed, the notification flag is turned ON, and if a preview effect is not to be performed, the notification flag is turned OFF. For example, if a preview effect is to be performed on the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

In addition, although not specifically shown, RAM 203 also has an area (hereinafter referred to as the "pre-determination information storage area") for storing pre-determination information, separate from the configuration shown in Figure 31(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process based on the random numbers described above (see S1007 and S1017 in Figure 10). The content of the pre-determination information is similar to the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol process (see Figure 13). Specifically, the content of the pre-determination information indicates whether a jackpot has been achieved (and whether a small jackpot has been achieved), and if so, the type of jackpot, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach effect, and the details of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is included in a pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, either together with information regarding the reserve corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process was performed (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved information"), or separately from this reserve information at a unique timing.

[Preliminary Determination Processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S1007 and S1017 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the preliminary determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination as follows using a random number table similar to the example of random number configuration described with reference to Figures 27 to 30.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S1007 and S1017 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in Figure 33, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game status (S3301), selects a table corresponding to the current game status of the pachinko game machine 100, and performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number (S3302).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performs a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S3303). Furthermore, it selects a table according to the current game state and performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S3304).
Although not shown in the figures, in S3302, S3303 and S3304, a dedicated table is selected depending on whether the pre-determination process is based on a winning entry at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of the pre-determinations in S3302, S3303, and S3304 (S3305).
After that, the game control unit 200 stores the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the reach random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern, and the preliminary determination pattern obtained as described above in the preliminary determination information storage area as preliminary determination information (S3306).Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the performance control unit 300, a preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3307).

The above-mentioned preliminary determination was made using a random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122, and a determination table having a configuration similar to that of the determination table used in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26). In other words, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S1311 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called, and the random number determination in the above-mentioned preliminary determination is made.

By adopting this configuration, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random numbers in the pre-determination process. This reduces the number of control instructions and prevents the increase in program size related to the jackpot determination process and pre-determination process. Furthermore, as described above, if the determination table used for the pre-determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

While only the advance judgment (whether or not a jackpot is reached) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described above, in this embodiment, the variation patterns for the variable display and stop display of the special symbol are also predicted (pre-judgment). The variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is selected using the variation pattern selection random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122, and the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 27 to 32) (see S1312 and FIG. 15 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when predicting the variation pattern, the variation pattern to be selected can be predicted using the variation pattern selection random number value obtained at the time of entry and a predictive table with the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process for the special symbol processing. In other words, a different predictive table can be used for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In addition, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on whether the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122 is won.

In this case, the subroutine (see S1312 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 13) can be called and used to predict the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process. Furthermore, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process for the special symbol processing may also be used for the predictive table used to predict the variation pattern selection. This configuration reduces the number of control commands related to predictive prediction of variation pattern selection, and prevents the program size from increasing.

Note that if the preliminary determination process and the jackpot determination process when a special symbol changes are performed in the same subroutine using the same set of determination tables, the execution times of each process may differ, resulting in different results between the preliminary determination and the jackpot determination process when a special symbol changes. This occurs when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (either the normal game state, the special time-limited game state, or the specific time-limited game state) changes after the preliminary determination process is performed and before the special symbol changes. In this case, different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, so the specific determination tables used for the determination differ between the execution of the preliminary determination process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122 is used, the preliminary determination and the determination results of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such cases, if the game state changes after the preliminary determination process is performed and before the special symbol variation begins, the effect control unit 300 may perform control such as prohibiting the execution of effects based on the preliminary determination results.

In accordance with the commands output from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 as described above, the presentation control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the speaker 156, various lamps, etc. For example, when the presentation control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the presentation control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant," or an image indicating an abnormal condition. The presentation control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal condition, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, etc. The presentation control unit 300 also causes various lamps to light up, for example, in red, to indicate an abnormal condition.

In addition, while it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies that an error has occurred using the image display unit 114, speaker 156, and all of the various lamps, it may also be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may also be switched depending on the type of error. For example, if a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, speaker 156, and all of the various lamps may be used as described above. Furthermore, if a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and speaker 156 notify that an error has occurred. This allows staff at gaming establishments (pachinko parlors) and the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in a gaming machine.

[Example of setting a pre-determination pattern]
Next, an example of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG. 33 will be described.
Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the settings of the pre-determination pattern and table used in the pre-determination process shown in Fig. 33. Fig. 34 shows an example of the settings when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal gaming state.

In the table shown in Figure 34, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""expected variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines the expected fluctuation pattern and the pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination results of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.

35 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. Note that FIG. 35 shows an example of the setting when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 35, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""expected variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

[Operation of the production control unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation of the performance control unit 300.
The operation of the performance control unit 300 consists of the main processing shown in Fig. 36(a) and the interrupt processing shown in Fig. 36(b). Referring to Fig. 36(a), the performance control unit 300 first performs initial setting at startup (S3601), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3602), and then accepts interrupt processing while updating the random numbers used in performance control according to the set cycle (S3603).

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 36(b), in this interrupt processing, the presentation control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S3611). In this command reception processing, the presentation content (presentation pattern) is selected. The presentation control unit 300 also performs specific time-saving related presentation processing to execute presentations related to the specific time-saving game state (S3612). The presentation control unit 300 also performs presentation button processing to accept operation of the presentation button 161 or the like by the player (S3613). Thereafter, the presentation control unit 300 performs command transmission processing to send a command including information on the selected presentation pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3614). This results in presentations such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, operation of the movable role-player 115, and illumination of various lamps.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S3611 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this command reception process, the performance control unit 300 first determines whether a command has been received (S3701). If no command has been received (NO in S3701), the performance control unit 300 ends the command reception process.

On the other hand, when the performance control unit 300 receives any command (YES in S3701), it determines whether the received command is a preliminary determination result command or a reserved number increase command (S3702). The preliminary determination result command and the reserved number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch processing shown in Figure 10 (S1009, S1010, S1019, S1020) and are commands sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Figure 9.
Then, if the performance control unit 300 determines that the received command is a pre-determination result command and a command to increase the number of reserved items (Yes in S3702), it adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved items stored in RAM 303 (S3703).
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S3704). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is neither a pre-determination result command nor a reserved number increase command (No in S3702), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S3705). This fluctuation start command is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in Fig. 13 (S1314) and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S3705), the performance control unit 300 executes a performance selection process (S3706). Also, when a fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for performance control used in the performance selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S3603 of the main process shown in Figure 36 (a). The performance selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a fluctuation start command (No in S3705), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S3707). This fluctuation stop command is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in Fig. 13 (S1322) and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S3707), the performance control unit 300 executes a fluctuation performance end process (S3708). In the fluctuation performance end process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets a fluctuation performance end command in RAM 303 to instruct the end of the symbol fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a fluctuation stop command (No in S3707), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening operation of the jackpot game (S3709). This opening command is set in the stop processing shown in Fig. 16 (S1612) and is the command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3709), the effect control unit 300 executes a big win effect selection process (S3710). The big win effect selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not an opening command (No in S3709), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an ending command for starting the ending operation of the jackpot game (S3711). This ending command is set in the jackpot entry processing shown in Fig. 19 (S1913) and is the command sent to the presentation control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S3711), the rendering control unit 300 executes an ending rendering selection process (S3712). The details of the ending rendering selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not an ending command (No in S3711), the performance control unit 300 next determines whether the received command is a customer waiting command (S3713).
If the received command is a customer waiting command (YES in S3713), the performance control unit 300 executes a customer waiting command reception process to transition to a customer waiting state (S3714). The customer waiting command reception process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a customer waiting command (NO in S3713), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a power restoration command (S3715).
If the received command is a power restoration command (YES in S3715), the performance control unit 300 performs a power restoration process (S3716). In this power restoration process, the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not a complete command has been received. If the performance control unit 300 has not received a complete command, it executes the initial operation of the movable role piece 115, and if it has received a complete command, it does not execute the initial operation of the movable role piece 115.

If the received command is not a power restoration command (NO in S3715), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an MY value command (S3717).
If the received command is an MY value command (YES in S3717), the performance control unit 300 performs pre-activation notification processing (S3718). The pre-activation notification processing will be described later.

If the received command is not an MY value command (NO at S3717), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a complete standby command (S3719).
If the received command is a complete standby command (YES in S3719), the performance control unit 300 performs a complete standby notification process (S3720). In this complete standby notification process, the performance control unit 300 transmits the complete standby command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. The complete standby notification will be described later.

If the received command is not a complete standby command (NO at S3719), it means that the received command is a complete command. In this case, the performance control unit 300 performs complete operation notification processing (S3721). In this complete operation notification processing, the performance control unit 300 transmits a complete command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. Complete operation notifications will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S3704) and the effect selection process (S3706) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S3801). The effect control unit 300 then analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S3802). The effect control unit 300 then selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) to be used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S3803).

Pre-determination effect patterns can include various effect patterns that foretell the results of the random number determination made by the special pattern processing before the start of fluctuations based on the results of the random number determination made by the special pattern processing. For example, effects such as a hold display effect or a continuous notice effect can be provided as pre-determination effect patterns. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special pattern reserved display 218 and the second special pattern reserved display 219 of the display unit 130 (see Figure 3), and a reserve display indicating the occurrence of a reserved ball and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, by reflecting the pre-determination result in the display mode of the reserve display in this reserve display effect, a pre-determination effect can be provided that suggests to the player the determination result when a random number determination is subsequently made using the special pattern processing for that reserved ball.

Note that while we have explained the case where the hold display effect is used as a pre-determination effect, it is possible to perform a variety of preview effects by reflecting this in the various effect contents that are performed before the start of fluctuations based on the random number determination results from special pattern processing. For example, effects using effect images displayed on the image display unit 114, effects using the illumination of various lamps, effects using the movement of movable props, effects using audio output such as music and sound effects, etc. can be set as pre-determination effect patterns.

In addition, the pre-determination effect may be executed in conjunction with a pattern change for another winning ball that occurs before the pattern change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which a pre-determination has been made. In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls is limited to four per start port (first start port 121 or second start port 122) (see Figure 10). Priority is given to the consumption of reserved balls in second start port 122. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination is made for a reserved ball in second start port 122, pattern changes will occur for up to four winning balls, including the currently changing change (referred to as the change in question), before the pattern change for that reserved ball occurs. In the preview effect for a reserved ball for which a pre-determination has been made, if multiple pattern changes occur before the pattern change for that reserved ball, a preview effect (continuous preview effect) may be executed that spans those multiple pattern changes.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets in RAM 303 a hold number command containing the value of the hold number after the addition and information about the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (S3804). The hold number command contains information indicating the selected pre-determined effect pattern, in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of that pattern. Upon receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like to cause the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data representing the selected pre-determined effect pattern from CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and displays the pre-determined effect using the image display unit 114 and speaker 156.

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S3811). It also subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 (S3812). The effect control unit 300 then selects a fluctuation effect pattern for the pattern fluctuations using images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (such as the type of jackpot, the game status after the jackpot, and fluctuation patterns) obtained from the analysis results of the fluctuation start command (S3813). Note that after a fluctuation effect pattern is selected, the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. In other words, the fluctuation effect pattern may be selected before the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the performance control unit 300 sets a variable performance start command in RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected performance (S3814). The variable performance start command includes information indicating the selected variable performance pattern, in order to notify the CPU 311 of that pattern. Upon receiving the variable performance start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like to cause the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data representing the selected variable performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and displays the variable performance using the image display unit 114 and speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting the variation presentation pattern for the symbol variation in S3813, the variation presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. The variation presentation pattern determined here determines the variation display of the decorative symbol, background presentation, preview presentation, etc. Note that the variation presentation of the decorative symbol is a presentation display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variation presentation of the special symbol performed on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222. In this variation presentation of the decorative symbol, a reach presentation, etc. is executed. Note that, unlike this embodiment, if multiple variation presentation patterns are set for a variation pattern, the variation presentation pattern may be selected by lottery using a presentation random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3603 of Figure 36 (a), the presentation random number value being obtained when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process (S3710) of FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3901) and selects an effect pattern (jackpot effect pattern) (S3902). The effect control unit 300 then reads from ROM 302 the image data and sound data used for the effects of the selected jackpot effect pattern, sets this data together with a jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect in RAM 303, and terminates the jackpot effect selection process (S3903). This determines the effects during the jackpot. Note that the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3902) may be determined based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S3712) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S4001) and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S4002). The effect control unit 300 then reads from ROM 302 the image data and sound data used for the effects of the selected ending effect pattern, and sets these data and an ending effect start command instructing the selected effect in RAM 303, thereby terminating the ending effect selection process (S4003). Note that in selecting the ending effect pattern (S4002), a determination may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process (S3713) of FIG.
The performance control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for transitioning to a customer waiting state has been received (S4101). If a customer waiting command has been received (Yes in S4101), the performance control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4102) and turns on a measurement flag in RAM 303 (S4103). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4101), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 is on (S4104). If the measurement flag is off (No in S4104), the performance control unit 300 ends the customer waiting command reception process.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S4104 or after being set to ON in S4103), the performance control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-out period (e.g., 10 seconds) (S4105). If the time has not expired (No in S4105), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time has expired (Yes in S4105), the performance control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 (S4106).

Next, the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-shortened game state (S4107). If it is in the specific time-shortened game state (YES in S4107), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the first variable effect in the special time-shortened game state has not yet started (S4108).
If it is not before the start of the first variable effect (NO in S4108), the effect control unit 300 sets a customer waiting effect command for performing the first customer waiting effect in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command reception process (S4109). This causes the machine to be controlled to the customer waiting state.
Furthermore, if the game is not in the specific time-saving game state (NO in S4107) or if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has not yet started (YES in S4108), the effect control unit 300 sets a customer waiting effect command for performing a second customer waiting effect (demo effect) in RAM 303 and terminates the customer waiting command reception process (S4110). This places the game in the customer waiting state. Furthermore, the second customer waiting effect is an effect that is different in type from the first customer waiting effect.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-operation notification process (S3718) of FIG.
First, the performance control unit 300 notifies the MY remaining value (S4201). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 notifies the MY remaining value based on the MY value indicated in the MY value command.
Next, the performance control unit 300 determines whether the pre-alert conditions are met (S4202). In this embodiment, the pre-alert condition is that the MY value has reached a specific value. The specific value is a value lower than the MY upper limit value. Also, in this embodiment, "90000" is set as the specific value. However, the specific value can be any value as long as it is lower than the MY upper limit value. If the pre-alert conditions are not met (NO in S4202), the performance control unit 300 terminates the pre-activation alert process.

On the other hand, if the advance notification conditions are met (YES in S4202), the performance control unit 300 issues an advance notification (S4203). An advance notification is a notification in advance that the complete function will be activated when the complete function activation conditions are met. Advance notifications will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time-saving related effect processing (S3612) of FIG. 36(b).
The presentation control unit 300 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the normal gaming state (S4301). If it is the normal gaming state (YES in S4301), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether it has been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (S4302). If it has been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (YES in S4302), the presentation control unit 300 terminates the specific time-shortened gaming state processing. Furthermore, if it has not been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (NO in S4302), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether a variable presentation is being executed (S4303). If it is not in a variable presentation state (NO in S4303), the presentation control unit 300 terminates the specific time-shortened gaming state processing.

On the other hand, if a variable effect is being performed (YES in S4303), the effect control unit 300 determines whether RAM clearing was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (S4304). If RAM clearing was not performed (NO in S4304), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the number of times the decorative symbols have changed since the most recent return is equal to or greater than the first number (S4305). In this embodiment, the first number is 50 times. However, the first number may be any value. If the number of times of change is less than the first number (NO in S4305), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated. Note that the condition for the effect control unit 300 to determine that the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the first number may be that the first number of changes has ended or that the first number of changes has started.
If the number of changes is equal to or greater than the first number (YES in S4305), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is equal to or greater than the second number (S4306). The second number is a number of changes greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the second number is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number may be any value as long as it is a number of changes greater than the first number. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is equal to or greater than the second number when the second number of changes has ended or when the second number of changes has started.
If the number of changes is less than the second number (NO in S4306), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is the third number (S4307). In this embodiment, the third number is 100. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is the third number as a condition that the third change has ended or that the third change has started.

If the number of times of change is not the third number (NO in S4307), the effect control unit 300 determines by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2) whether or not to execute a clear negation effect (S4308). The clear negation effect is an effect indicating that RAM clear has not been executed. If it is determined that the clear negation effect will not be executed (NO in S4308), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated.
If it is determined that a clear denial effect should be executed (YES in S4308), the effect control unit 300 executes a clear denial effect and an effect informing the player of the number of remaining times (S4309). The effect informing the player of the number of remaining times is an effect informing the player of the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-saving game state.

Also, if the number of changes is the third number (YES in S4307), the performance control unit 300 determines whether a clear negation effect has been executed (S4310). If a clear negation effect has not been executed (NO in S4310), the performance control unit 300 executes a clear negation effect and a remaining number of times notification effect (S4311).

On the other hand, if a RAM clear was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (YES in S4304), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations was a reset based on a jackpot (S2004 in FIG. 20) (S4312). If the reset was not based on a jackpot (NO in S4312), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the number of fluctuations after the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state was the fourth number or more (S4313). The fourth number is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the fourth number is 100. However, the fourth number may be any value as long as it is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. If the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4313), the specific time-saving related presentation processing is terminated. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the fourth number when the fourth fluctuation has ended or when the fourth fluctuation has started.

If the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the fourth number (YES in S4313) or if the most recent reset was due to a jackpot (YES in S4312), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the remaining number of times notification effect has been executed (S4314).If the remaining number of times notification effect has not been executed (NO in S4314), the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification effect (S4315).
Furthermore, if S4306 is YES, if S4310 is YES, after S4309 is executed, after S4311 is executed, if S4314 is YES, or after S4315 is executed, the presentation control unit 300 executes a remaining number update presentation (S4316). The remaining number update presentation is a presentation that notifies the user of the updated number of variable presentations required to enter the specific time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if the game is not in the normal game state (NO in S4301), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-shortened game state (S4317). If the game is not in the specific time-shortened game state (NO in S4317), the specific time-shortened effect processing is terminated.
If the specific time-saving game state is active (YES in S4317), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether or not the first variable presentation in the specific time-saving game state has yet to begin (S4318). If the first variable presentation has yet to begin (YES in S4318), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether or not there is a hold (S4319). If there is a hold (NO in S4319), the specific time-saving related presentation processing is terminated.
If there is no reserved ball (YES in S4319), the performance control unit 300 starts a right-hit notification (S4320). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 starts a notification to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111.

On the other hand, if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has already started (NO in S4318), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the right-hit notification has already started (S4321). If the right-hit notification has already started (NO in S4321), the specific time-saving effect processing is terminated.
If the right-hit notification has not yet started (YES in S4321), the effect control unit 300 starts the right-hit notification (S4322). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 executes a specific time-shortening notification effect (S4323). The specific time-shortening notification effect is an effect that notifies the user that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a specific time-shortening game state.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S3613 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether the player has operated an operation means such as the effect button 161 during a predetermined acceptance period (the operation valid period described below) (S4401). Here, operation of the operation means includes pressing the effect button 161 so that it moves from its non-operation position (reference position) to a predetermined position, turning it ON, and pressing the center key or surrounding keys of the effect keys 162, turning it ON. Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is equipped with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and effect keys 162, such as a touch panel, this also includes detecting the operation of that device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.
If an operating means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4401), the effect button processing is terminated.

Also, if an operating means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S4401), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command containing information indicating the operation content of the operating means in RAM 303 and terminates effect button processing (S4402).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S3614) in Figure 36 (b) and sends the commands set in RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance button process described above to the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320. Then, based on the received commands, the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320 control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of various lamps, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Information displayed on the information display in each gaming area]
Next, the display information of the information display device 230 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 45. In the table of display information in Fig. 45, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display device 230 are associated with each other.
In the following, the current play interval may be referred to as the first play interval. The previous play interval may be referred to as the second play interval. The previous play interval may be referred to as the third play interval. The previous play interval may be referred to as the fourth play interval.

Here, the first game zone shown in Figure 45 begins when the power is turned on for the first time. The total number of outs set to 60,000 is a value that can roughly guarantee one day's operation of a pachinko machine that shoots 100 shots per minute. The normal base value is always displayed in two digits in the numeric segment. Furthermore, if the number of outs during normal play is "0" or if the normal base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numeric segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one section before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two sections before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three sections before.

The numerical information displayed in the numeric segments of the information display 230 includes "--", which indicates that no normal base value has been calculated; "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the number of normal outs is "0"; "01" to "99", which indicate that the number of normal outs is "1" or greater and the normal base value is "1" to "99"; and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or greater. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and the display will be in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segments does not change (it is displayed as a lit indicator) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segments changes (it is displayed as a flashing indicator or a lit indicator) depending on the play area, the number of outs during normal play, etc. (whether or not a calculated normal base value has been calculated, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is reliable).

Specifically, in the first through fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a flashing manner. Furthermore, in play zones from the second play zone onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period is one in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of normal outs is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a flashing manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit state.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 230, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 230 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the numeric segment displays performance information that does not use the decimal points DP of the 7-segment display, such as "00" to "99."; on the other hand, when the normal base value is "100" or more, the numeric segment displays performance information that uses the decimal points DP of the 7-segment display, such as "99.", making it easier to recognize that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g., "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two 7-segment displays as numeric segments to provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "--" will be displayed in the numeric segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the gaming section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the counting process, base value determination process, and performance information setting process as information programs, one or two of them may be executed as game programs (for example, the counting process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest are executed as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 230 may be executed by the performance program rather than by the output control process, which is a gaming program.

In addition, rather than using the out ball detection switch 227 to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have entered the normal prize entry port 127, first start port 121, second start port 122, and large prize entry port 125, and game balls that have flowed into the discharge port 117, the out ball detection switch 227 may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out port. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 227, normal prize entry port switch 217, first start port switch 211, second start port switch 212, or large prize entry port switch 215.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
The main processing of the image/audio control unit 310 will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image/audio control unit 310. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from a power supply board (not shown), is input to the CPU 311.

First, in step T1, CPU 311 disables all interrupts, and then in step T2, performs initial setting processing. Specifically, the CPU performs initial setting of the internal registers and other settings, grants access to RAM 313, initializes all RAM areas of RAM 313 (clears them to 0), and starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and then in step T3, all interrupts are enabled.

In step T4, the CPU 311 performs adjustment mode switching processing. Specifically, by referencing an input signal from a selector switch (not shown) operable by an arcade staff member, the CPU 311 performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sounds output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114, as well as to switch the adjustment mode related to volume and light intensity adjustment (whether volume can be adjusted, whether light intensity can be adjusted, the initial volume value (any value between 0 and 5), the initial light intensity value (any value between 0 and 5), the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the light intensity value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

Here, a changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board serving as the main board, and switches between adjustment modes related to the volume of the effect sounds output from the speaker 156, the light intensity of the display devices (image display unit 114, sub-display unit (a display device that displays images related to the effects separately from the image display unit 114)), and various lighting devices (various lamps).
In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the selector switch (not shown) can be done at any time as long as the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on (after the image/sound control unit 310 has been started).

In step T5, the CPU 311 performs a volume adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switches that detect the operation of the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player.

In step T6, the CPU 311 performs a light intensity adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 based on the detection signals (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from the detection switches that detect the operation of the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume and light intensity values using the effect key 162 is restricted (limited) when the variable effect starts and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops). Furthermore, the settings (adjustments) of the volume and light intensity values using the effect key 162 are restricted (limited) from when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on until game progress control begins (specifically, from when a timer interrupt is initiated on the game control board during setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, or the initial operation of various drive sources), and also during the notification (output of alarm sounds) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities.

In addition, while the abnormality alarm sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) being output from the speaker 156 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality alarm sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the CPU 311 performs eco mode control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to control the start and end of eco mode, which reduces the amount of light from the backlight of the image display unit 114 to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 300. If it has not received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T11. If it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the CPU 311 performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, it determines an animation pattern from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T10, the CPU 311 performs sound pattern setting processing. Specifically, it determines a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not a complete command has been received from the performance control unit 300. If a complete command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T13, and if a complete command has been received, the process proceeds to step T12.
In step T12, the CPU 311 performs an activation process, instructing the VDP 314 to draw image data and output sound to notify the user that the complete function has been activated.

In step T13, the CPU 311 determines whether a frame switch flag is set in the RAM 313, indicating that it is time to update the frame image displayed on the image display unit 114. If the frame switch flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12; if the frame switch flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switch flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed each time the image/sound control unit 310 receives a V blank signal sent from the VDP 314 every 1/30 seconds (the time it is expected that one frame's worth of effect image will be drawn and displayed). Therefore, steps T14 to T17, described below, are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T14, the CPU 311 clears the frame switch flag set in RAM 313, and in step T15 performs scene update processing. Specifically, the CPU 311 references the scene switch counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter, which are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10 above.

In step T16, the CPU 311 performs drawing control processing. Specifically, it generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) for one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, in accordance with the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, and outputs this display list to the VDP 314, while also performing processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws display images based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also displays the images (effect images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start and end timing of the various effects (image displays and sound outputs such as hold displays, variable effects, jackpot preview effects, and pre-reading effects) performed by the image display unit 114. Note that effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 300 and lamp control unit 320 (effect operation of the movable role object 115) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T17, the CPU 311 performs audio control processing. Specifically, it generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs this audio control command to the image/audio control unit 310.

As a result, the image/audio control unit 310 performs processing to output various sound effects and notification sounds from the speaker 156 based on the voice control commands. When this processing is completed, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable effect begins and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using a selector switch (not shown) that can be operated by gaming facility staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it less likely that the player will miss important points such as the start and end of the variable effect, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, during the notification (output of alarm sound) of an important (high security level) abnormality (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a tray full error or payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a selector switch (not shown) that can be operated by gaming facility staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of volume and light intensity adjustment for the gaming facility while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing that an abnormality has occurred when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality alert sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) being output from speaker 156 is reduced from its previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality alert sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This prevents the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality alert sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player, or the adjustment range for the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of lamp control unit)
The initial processing of the reel by the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Fig. 47 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the reel by the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 320 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a complete command has been received from the performance control unit 300. If a complete command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103; if a complete command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102.

The CPU 321 performs an activation process in step R102. In this activation process, if the movable role piece 115 is in operation, the CPU 321 stops the operation of the movable role piece 115 that is currently being performed, and sets the drive data of the movable role piece 115 for use when the complete function is activated. This stops the normal operation of the movable role piece 115, and performs a process to return the movable role piece 115 to its initial position (see FIG. 1).
In this way, when the complete function is activated, the lamp control unit 320 executes the operation of the movable prop 115 in response to the complete command sent from the performance control unit 300 .

In step R103, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the game control unit 200. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R104; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R105.

In step R104, the CPU 321 sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each step of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return processing for the reels (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), and effect button 161).

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107, assuming that the origin return processing of the reel will not be executed. If the initial processing number is "1", the CPU 321 executes the origin return processing in step R106, terminating the current reel initial processing. Specifically, the CPU 321 executes the return operation of the reel (movable reel 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, and performs processing such as setting the initial processing number to "2". Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

In step R107, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the reel is not executed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed in step R108 and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the CPU 321 performs processing such as initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the reel is operating normally, and sets the initial processing number to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initializing process shown in Figure 47, the origin return process for returning various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation process for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of various reels are not executed simultaneously. As a result, the return operations of various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of various reels are not mixed together, making it possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

Furthermore, according to the reel initializing process shown in Figure 47, a return-to-origin process is executed before the initial operation process. This causes the various reels to perform their initial operation from their origin positions, making it easier to determine whether there are any abnormalities in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process for lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)), is "0." If the board role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0," the CPU 321 sets the movable role 115 (movable performance device) as the drive target to be returned to the origin in step R105-2, and proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the CPU 321 sets the sub-display device (not shown) as the drive target to be returned to its origin in step R105-4, and then proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether the target device is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects whether each device is in the origin position. If the target device is not in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-6. If the target device is in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor to move the target board device so that the target board device returns to its origin position, and in step R105-7, it increments by +1 the board device abnormality determination timer, which determines whether a return abnormality has occurred, in which the board device does not return to its origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated board/role device abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board/role device abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the board/role device being driven, and proceeds to step R105-9. If the board/role device abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets in RAM 323 recovery abnormality information (movable effect device recovery abnormality information, sub-display device recovery abnormality information) indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the target board device, and in step R105-10, clears the board device abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-11, the CPU 321 updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0," it updates the board role processing number to "1" to drive the sub-image display unit (not shown), and if the board role processing number is "1," it updates the board role processing number to "2" to end the process of returning the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the origin return status of the frame role (effect button 161), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," processing proceeds to step R105-13; if the board role processing number is not "0," processing proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether the effect button 161 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 161 is in the origin position. If the effect button 161 is not in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-14. If the effect button 161 is in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the effect button drive motor to move the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to its original position, and in step R105-15, it increments by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine whether a return abnormality has occurred, in which the effect button 161 does not return to its original position within a specified time.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated frame reel abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame reel abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161 and proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame reel abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, the current return-to-origin process is terminated.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161, and in step R105-18, clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame reel processing number is "0," the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number to "1" to terminate the process of returning the frame reel (effect button 161) to its origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role object processing number and the frame role object processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role object processing number is "2" and the frame role object processing number is "1." If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21; if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the initial processing number described above to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return-to-origin processing.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in Figure 48, if the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on, are not in the origin position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) simultaneously (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable role 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)). This makes it easier to check whether various board roles have returned to their origin positions. Furthermore, if the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two roles from applying stress to each other, preventing the inconvenience of both roles being damaged at the same time.

Furthermore, according to the origin return process shown in Figure 48, the return operation of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin position and the return operation of the frame role device (performance button 161) to its origin position can be performed simultaneously (at the same time). This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the return operations of the various role devices, and to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various role devices that will be executed next.

In addition, the origin return process shown in Figure 48 sets an upper limit on the time it takes for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return operations of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return operation even during a variable performance, preventing the performance from taking place, and prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the origin return processing shown in Figure 48, when both the return operation of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin position and the return operation of the frame role device (performance button 161) to its origin position are completed, processing is performed to transition to the initial operation processing. As a result, the return operation of various role devices to their origin positions and the initial operation of various role devices are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of various role devices separately.

The movable reel 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) are designed to return to their original positions in a predetermined order (movable reel 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)), but they may also be designed to start returning to their original positions at the same time. This reduces the time required for the return operation of the movable reel 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown), allowing for a smooth transition to the initial operation of the next reel to be executed.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the board feature, is "0." If the board feature processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-2; if the board feature processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not abnormal return information for the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) has been set in RAM 323. If abnormal return information has not been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-4, assuming that the board role will perform its initial operation and initial light emission. If abnormal return information has been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-3, setting the board role processing number to "2" to indicate that the board role will not perform its initial operation, and proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see Figure 50 (a)) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and sets it in RAM 323. Specifically, it references the board role device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (a) and determines one initial operation pattern from multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the CPU 321 increments the board feature processing number by 1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0," the CPU 321 increments the board feature processing number to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the board role processing number is "1," the CPU 321 executes the initial operation of the board role according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in RAM 323 in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether all stages of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all stages of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all stages of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1," the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame reel processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame reel (effect button 161), is "0." If the frame reel processing number is "0," processing proceeds to step R107-12; if the frame reel processing number is not "0," processing proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not abnormal return information for the effect button 161 has been set in the RAM 323. If abnormal return information has not been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-14, assuming that the initial operation of the frame reel will be performed. If abnormal return information has been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-13, setting the frame reel processing number to "2" to indicate that the initial operation of the frame reel will not be performed, and proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a framed device initial operation pattern determination table (see Figure 50 (b)) for determining the initial operation pattern of the framed device. Details of the framed device initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (effect button 161) and sets it in RAM 323. Specifically, it references the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame reel processing number is "0," the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame reel.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame reel processing number is "1." If the frame reel processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame reel processing number is "1," the CPU 321 executes the initial operation of the frame reel in accordance with the initial operation pattern of the frame reel set in RAM 323 in step R107-18.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether all steps of the initial operation of the frame role object have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role object have not been completed, processing proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role object have been completed, in step R107-20, the frame role object processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "1," the frame role object processing number is updated to "2" to end the processing for initializing the frame role object.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number and frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22; if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, ending this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, the initial operation of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role device (effect button 161) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of various roles, and to prevent the effect operation of various roles from being hindered during play.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, if there is a recovery abnormality in the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) that make up the board role, the initial operation of the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board role from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing a board role that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 161 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the effect button 161 will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage to the effect button 161 by forcibly initializing the effect button 161 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, even if the initial operation of the board device where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame device where a return abnormality has not occurred will be executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame device where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board device where a return abnormality has not occurred will be executed. This makes it possible to check whether there are any abnormalities in the operation of the device where a return abnormality has not occurred.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, the initial operation processing ends when both the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 161) have been completed. This eliminates the occurrence of a situation where it is unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is occurring, such as when one of the board role and the frame role is performing an initial operation while the other is performing an effect operation.

(Table for determining initial operation patterns of board roles)
Figure 50(a) is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)).

The board role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command issued when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of abnormal recovery information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and also lists the operating mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps in the initial operation for reference.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-03, which are determined when a power-on command is received; patterns 04-06, which are determined when a first power restoration command indicating that the machine is waiting for customers is received; and patterns 07-09, which are determined when a second power restoration command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed or a third power restoration command indicating that a jackpot is being played is received.

"Small descent of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable performance device 115 moving (descending) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position, "large descent of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable performance device 115 moving (descending) from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and "return to origin of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable performance device 115 returning to the standby position.

"Sub-display device movement" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) rising from the standby position to the performance position, and "sub-display device return to origin" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) returning to the standby position.

"Moveable performance device LEDs" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the movable prop 115, and "sub-display device LEDs" refers to the multiple LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-image display unit (not shown).

Note that the lighting color of the movable effect device LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08. This is because the movable effect device LED will flash red to indicate an abnormality when the left movable role piece 1151 returns to its normal state.

Furthermore, the lighting color of the sub-display LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 09. This is because the sub-display LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the sub-image display unit (not shown) recovers abnormally.

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (a) is that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is the same when the power is turned on, which involves initialization of RAM 203, and when the power is restored without initializing RAM 203. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

Note that the same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable role device 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable role device 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. In this way, it becomes easy to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

Furthermore, if the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable role 115 and/or sub-image display unit (not shown) is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it becomes easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A second feature of the board/game device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board/game device (movable device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or when the power is restored (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that while the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED is different. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that while the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED is different. Conversely, the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, while the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED may be the same.

In addition, the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED and the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

A fifth feature of the board and role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that the initial light emission pattern during the initial operation of the board and role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs when power is restored to restore the waiting state and when power is restored while special symbols are changing or during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being restored to restore the waiting state and when power is restored while special symbols are changing or during a jackpot game.

When power is restored during the display of changing special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are set to turn off, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED may also be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when power is restored to return to the waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the movable role 115 but no recovery abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is not performed and the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is performed; and if there is no recovery abnormality in the movable role 115 but there is a recovery abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is performed but the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform appropriate initial operations depending on whether or not there is a recovery abnormality.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (effect button 161).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps in the initial operation are also listed.

"Effect button big rise" is the action of the effect button 161 rising from the standby position (initial position) to the effect position (upper position), and "effect button return to origin" is the action of the effect button 161 returning to the standby position.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 161) is different when the power is turned on, which involves initialization of RAM 203, and when the power is restored, which does not involve initialization of RAM 203. This makes it easy to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is set to perform an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the effect button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. This makes it possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

A third feature of the framed device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the framed device (effect button 161) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or when the power is restored (the game control state is restored).

A fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 161) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot is played. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The effect button LED is set to turn off when power is restored during the display of special symbols or when a jackpot is played, but the effect button LED may be set to light up in the same illumination pattern as when power is restored to return to the waiting state.

A fifth feature of the frame role device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is different from the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the effect button 161 when it is initially illuminated upon power-on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the effect button 161 when it is initially illuminated upon power-on, but this may be reversed.

A sixth feature of the frame role device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the color of light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on initially includes a color that is not included in the color of light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

A seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the time for which the effect button 161 vibrates when the power is turned on or restored is different from the time for which the effect button 161 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 161.

An eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed in overlap with the initial operation of the effect button 161, which does detect whether it is at the origin position. This means that the operation of the effect button 161 and the button vibration motor can be checked simultaneously, shortening the time required for operation checks.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on and RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters setting change mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed, and the various drive sources begin operating as their initial operation (drive sources = ON). A setting change notification is also initiated to indicate that the settings are being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (the setting change screen is displayed, and the setting change voice "Settings are being changed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoids" are alternately output). The current setting value (here, "6") is also displayed on the seven-segment display 230d on the far right of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the operating time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and from then on, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from timing T3 to timing T10.

If the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed at timing T10 before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at timing T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), ending the initial operation of the various drive sources, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 will also cease. The game control unit 200 will then transition from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. Note that the initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T11, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base values) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters RAM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 will show a status confirmation message indicating that RAM clear preparation is in progress, and the various drive sources will start operating as their initial operation (drive sources = ON). In addition, a RAM clear preparation notification will start (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating audio notification of "Press RAM clear again" and audio confirmation of initial operation of "Check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that RAM clear preparation is in progress and to prompt confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T2, when the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the various drive sources started operating, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and from then on, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from timing T3 to timing T10.

If, at time T10, the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and RAM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the game control unit 200 will transition from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. Note that the initial operation of the movable reels 115 ends after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T11, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base values) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation message indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the various drive sources begin operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. A setting confirmation notification is also initiated to indicate that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources (the setting confirmation screen is displayed, and the setting confirmation voice "Settings are being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoids" are alternately output). The current setting value (here, "6") is also displayed on the seven-segment display 230d on the far right of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the various drive sources started operating, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and from then on, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from timing T3 to timing T10.

If, at time T10, the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 also ends. The game control unit 200 then transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power restoration notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. Note that the initial operation of the movable reels 115 ends after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T11, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base values) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) are initially operated. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls game progress when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at an amusement parlor.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (during the pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, and status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a hidden (inactive) state. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources (a RAM clear preparation notification to indicate that RAM clear is being prepared and to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification to indicate that settings are being confirmed and to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources).This notifies the operator (factory worker, game parlor staff) who is checking the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, allowing them to properly check the operation.

In addition, in the setting change modes (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initially operated, which eliminates the need to create multiple pre-start states before game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs (shorten development time, etc.) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, when the pre-start state ends with a setting value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped even before their operation time has elapsed. This prevents the initial operation of the various drive sources from being set to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing this with the operation of the various drive sources as the game progresses.

In addition, in the pre-start state before game progress control is performed, various drive sources are initialized to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state when game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable device 115 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. This means that two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED remains off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the large prize opening door 125D, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the special prize opening door 125D are initially operating, an open signal is not output even though the special prize opening 125 is open. This prevents unnecessary processing burdens from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also prevents inconveniences such as information collection devices, such as hall computers, that collect information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is powered on until game progress control begins, the information display 230 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base values) (the display of performance information is restricted), which makes it possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the gaming control unit 200.

In addition, since the gaming machine's performance information (normal base values) is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after game progress control has begun, it is possible to confirm whether game progress control has begun and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

Furthermore, during setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a-230c other than the 7-segment display 230d, which displays the current setting value. This allows the current setting value to be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming facility.

In the above example, the setting change notification, RAM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification did not display text such as "Drive source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources, but such text may also be displayed.

In addition, in the example described above, after game progress control has begun, all seven-segment displays 230a-230d of the information display 230 are fully lit to confirm that they are lit, but lighting confirmation may not be performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Drive Sources)
A modified example of initializing the various drive sources will be described below with reference to the drawings. This modified example differs from the above embodiment in that drive source operation processing is performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode has ended.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting change operation is performed (the setting key switch 229 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON), the game control unit 200 enters setting change mode and returns to the pre-start state before game progress control begins. At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that a setting change is in progress, and the setting change notification described above begins. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the setting value confirmation operation is performed (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF), the setting change mode and setting change notification end, the initial operation of the various drive sources begins, and the setting value displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and an initial operation notification is initiated (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice message saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids") to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T3, after the activation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the initial operation notification began, the various drive sources begin their first activation (drive sources = ON), and at timing T4, after the activation time (0.512 seconds in this case) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the activation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the various drive sources start operating for the second time, and at timing T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed for the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources begins, and at timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T10, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RAM)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after clearing the RAM in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing the various drive sources after clearing the RAM in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters RAM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins. At this time, the RAM clear preparation notification described above begins.

At timing T2, when the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources begins. At this time, an initial operation notification is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice message saying, "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At timing T3, after the activation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the initial operation notification began, the various drive sources begin their first activation (drive sources = ON), and at timing T4, after the activation time (0.512 seconds in this case) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the activation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the various drive sources start operating for the second time, and at timing T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed for the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources begins, and at timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T10, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing the various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins. At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress, and the setting confirmation notification described above begins. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the confirmation end operation is performed (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF), the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification end, the initial operation of the various drive sources begins, and the setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 are erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and an initial operation notification is initiated (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice message "Please check the operation of the solenoids") to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T3, after the activation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the initial operation notification began, the various drive sources begin their first activation (drive sources = ON), and at timing T4, after the activation time (0.512 seconds in this case) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the activation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the various drive sources start operating for the second time, and at timing T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed for the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources begins, and at timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T10, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) are initially operated. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls game progress when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at an amusement parlor.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (during the pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, and status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a hidden (inactive) state. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, gaming parlor staff) who checks the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before game progress control has begun, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) has ended. This eliminates the need to perform complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation), and allows for proper operation checks.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, once the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) has ended, an operation standby time has elapsed before the operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins. This allows ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game occurs after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED remains off. This avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the large prize opening door 125D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before game progress control is performed, various drive sources are initialized to operate movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game, and in the playable state when game progress control is performed, an initial operation of the movable device 115 that does not affect the outcome of the game is performed. Therefore, the two types of initial operation can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the special prize opening door 125D are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the special prize opening 125 is open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of performance information is restricted) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until game progress control begins, which makes it possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the gaming control unit 200.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after game progress control has begun, making it possible to confirm whether game progress control has begun and to inform the player that the performance information is related to the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, during setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, thereby allowing the current setting value to be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming facility.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 230 does not display setting values or gaming machine performance information during the initial operation of the various drive sources, allowing gaming facility employees to focus their attention on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources and accurately determine whether any of the drive sources are malfunctioning.

[Pre-determined effect pattern table]
57 and 58 are diagrams showing examples of pre-determination effect patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-determination effect selection process of FIG. 38(a). Note that FIG. 57 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, FIG. 58 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.

The pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 57, which is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in normal gaming mode, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JA1" to "JA9," "JB1" to "JB6," and "JR1" to "JR13" set using Figure 34 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AA1" to "AA9," "AB1" to "AB6," and "AR1" to "AR13."

Furthermore, the pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 58, which is used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JF1" to "JF8," "JG1" to "JG3," and "JH1" to "JH9" set using Figure 35 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AF1" to "AF8," "AG1" to "AG3," and "AH1" to "AH9."

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect that is performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, in the illustrated pre-determined effect pattern, "reserved image,""displaycolor,""chanceeye,""image,""gimmick," and "symbol action" are set. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect will not be executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. The reserved image will be described in detail later.
"Display color" refers to the display color of the reserved image. The effect control unit 300 changes the display color of the reserved image to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, the display color may be selected from "blue,""green,""red," or "rainbow." For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored reserved image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Chance Eye" indicates the type of chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect that displays a chance eye based on the results of a preliminary determination process. The chance eye is three decorative symbols that are a combination of symbols of the same predetermined color and that include different numbers. The chance eye effect, for example, notifies or suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special symbol variation that follows the special symbol variation that started the chance eye effect. Furthermore, the chance eye effect may be performed multiple times in multiple variation effects.
The chance eye may be any three specific decorative patterns 41 that notify or suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the chance eye performance, and the three decorative patterns 41 do not have to be the same color.

"Image" refers to a presentation image. This presentation image is displayed based on the results of the preliminary determination process. Furthermore, the presentation image displayed based on the results of the preliminary determination process may notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning a jackpot, depending on the display format.

"Gem" indicates the type of gem effect. A gem effect is an effect in which the movable gem 115 moves. The gem effect performed based on the results of a preliminary determination may be an effect that gives the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that started the gem effect, or an effect that gives the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that follows the special pattern variation that started the gem effect.

"Symbol movement" refers to the type of symbol movement effect. Symbol movement effects refer to effects in which decorative symbols move. Symbol movement effects, which are performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, are effects that encourage players to expect a jackpot in the special symbol movement that begins after the special symbol movement that started the symbol movement effect.

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determination performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 57 and 58. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determination performance pattern corresponding to the pre-determination pattern set in the pre-determination process (see Figure 33) based on the tables shown in Figures 57 and 58.
57, if the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-judgment pattern is "JR6", "AR6" is selected as the pre-judgment effect pattern. In this pre-judgment effect pattern "AR6", a "reserved image" is displayed, the "display color" turns "blue", a "chance eye" is executed, an "image" is displayed, a "gimmick" is executed, and a "symbol action" is executed.

There is no pre-determination effect pattern table to be used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. In other words, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, no pre-determination effect is performed. However, there may be a pre-determination effect pattern table to be used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. The effect control unit 300 may then use this pre-determination effect pattern table to perform a pre-determination effect when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state.

[Variable performance pattern table]
59 to 62 are diagrams showing examples of variable presentation patterns and table settings used in the variable presentation pattern selection (S3813) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 38(b). Note that FIG. 59 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the first starting gate 121 in the normal game state. Also, FIG. 60 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the second starting gate 122 in the normal game state. Also, FIG. 61 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the second starting gate 122 in the special time-saving game state. Also, FIG. 62 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the first starting gate 121 in the special time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 59, the variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on a win at the first starting slot 121 during normal game play has multiple variable effect patterns set. The variable effect patterns "PA1" to "PA9," "PB1" to "PB6," and "PR1" to "PR13" set using Figure 27 above are associated one-to-one with the variable effect patterns "EA1" to "EA9," "EB1" to "EB6," and "ER1" to "ER13."

60, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 122 in the normal gaming state. Variable effect patterns "EC1", "EC2", "ED1" to "ED3", and "EE1" correspond one-to-one to the variable effect patterns "PC1", "PC2", "PD1" to "PD3", and "PE1" set using the above-mentioned FIG.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in Fig. 61. Variable presentation patterns "PF1" to "PF8,""PG1" to "PG3," and "PH1" to "PH9" set using Fig. 29 above are associated one-to-one with variable presentation patterns "EF1" to "EF8,""EG1" to "EG3," and "EH1" to "EH9."
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 62. Variable presentation patterns "EI1" to "EI3" and "EJ1" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PI1" to "PI3" and "PJ1" set using Fig. 30 above.

The number of variable presentation patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in Figures 59 to 62.
For example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be fewer than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.
In this case, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 in the normal game state or if a game ball enters the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the interest in the game can be increased by various presentations even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery based on a win in the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the number of variable presentation patterns is small, making it difficult to increase the interest in the game. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should enter the first start port 121 in the normal game state and that the game ball should enter the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot.Furthermore, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be fewer than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.

Here, the variable effect is an effect that notifies the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) in a dramatic manner by displaying a variable effect pattern and then displaying it in a stationary state.
In addition, the variable presentation patterns shown in the figure include the following settings: "final display color,""pseudoexcitement,""pseudo consecutive number of times,""reachexcitement,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""zoneexcitement,""zone,""development,""gimmick," and "button." Note that "-" in each column of the table shown indicates that the corresponding presentation will not be executed.

Here, "final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described below). The effect control unit 300 changes the display color of the variable image to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In the illustrated example, one of "-", "blue", "green", "red", or "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. Note that "-" means white. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Pseudo-stimulation" refers to a pseudo consecutive stimulation effect. A pseudo consecutive stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect (pseudo consecutive effect). A pseudo consecutive effect is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple decorative pattern variations are being displayed in a variation display (one variation effect) of one variation of a special pattern. In a pseudo consecutive effect, the effect control unit 300 varies the decorative pattern before entering a reach state, then temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the variation display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in a pseudo consecutive effect, after the decorative pattern begins to vary, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-varied a set number of times, and then is stopped to confirm, thereby completing the variation display of one variation of the special pattern.
In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display), the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" refers to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are performed. In the example shown, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is also set in relation to the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which one can expect to win. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation.

"Reach stimulation" indicates the type of reach stimulation effect. The reach stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates whether or not a reach effect will be executed. In other words, the reach stimulation effect is an effect that raises expectations that a reach effect will be executed.
"Normal" indicates a normal reach presentation.
"SP Reach" indicates an SP Reach performance.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the SPSP Reach performance.

"Zone hype" refers to a zone hype effect. The zone hype effect is an effect that hypes up the execution of a zone effect.
The term "zone" refers to a zone effect, which is an effect that, for example, is controlled by a specific effect mode (stage), and thereby makes a player expect a jackpot in the variation of a special symbol.

The "development" refers to a development effect. The development effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the player that the game will develop to the SPSP reach.
"Yakumono" refers to a gag performance.
The term "button" refers to a button operation effect. The button operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161.

The performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 59 to 62. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 59 to 62.
For example, in FIG. 59, when the "jackpot symbol" is "jackpot symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PA1", "EA1" is selected as the variation presentation pattern. In this variation presentation pattern "EA1", the "final display color" and "reach stimulation" are set to "-". In other words, when "EA1" is selected as the variation presentation pattern, the variation image (described later) is displayed in white, and the reach stimulation presentation is not executed. In addition, in the variation presentation pattern "EA1", "2" is executed as the "pseudo consecutive number of times", and "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "zone stimulation", "zone", "development", "gimmick", and "button" are executed.

As will be described later, the presentation control unit 300 controls one of multiple stages (presentation modes) in normal gaming mode, but the same variable presentation pattern table shown in Figure 59 is used regardless of the stage in normal gaming mode. However, different variable presentation pattern tables may be used for each stage in normal gaming mode.

[Produced image]
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
As shown in Fig. 63-1, the effect control unit 300 controls to display effect images on the image display unit 114. The effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include a decorative symbol 41, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small symbol 56, and a stage image 61. The image display unit 114 also displays effect images such as a pseudo consecutive symbol 57, a zone symbol 58, a zone execution image 59, a reach line image 501, a first transition image 502, an SP reach image 503, a second transition image 504, a first role effect image 505, a chance eye effect image 506, a re-change notification image 507, a second role effect image 508, an SPSP reach image 509, a button operation image 510, a first large role effect image 511, a second large role effect image 512, a second large role effect image 513, a second large role effect image 514, a second large role effect image 515, a second large role effect image 516, a second large role effect image 517, a second large role effect image 518, a second large role effect image 519, a second large role effect image 520, a second large role effect image 521, a third large role effect image 522, a fourth large role effect image 523, a fourth large role effect image 524, a fourth large role effect image 525, a fifth large role effect image 526, a fifth large role effect image 527, a fifth large role effect image 528, a fifth large role effect image 529, a fifth large role effect image 530, a fifth large role effect image 531, a fifth large role effect image 532, a fifth large role effect image 533, a fifth large role effect image 534, a fifth large role effect image 535, a fifth large role effect image 536, A hit highlight image 511, a second jackpot highlight image 550, a right hit image 512, a jackpot start image 513, a round number image 514, a round in progress image 515, a time-saving start image 516, a first tease image 517, a second tease image 518, a post-button image 519, a third transition image 520, a success image 521, a third jackpot highlight image 522, a recovery in progress image 524, an initialization in progress image 525, and a demo screen 523 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 63-1 (1), three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When describing each of the three columns of symbols constituting the decorative symbols 41 individually, the symbol arranged in the left column may be referred to as the "left decorative symbol 41," the symbol arranged in the center column as the "middle decorative symbol 41," and the symbol arranged in the right column as the "right decorative symbol 41." When describing the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative symbols 41." When describing the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, the left and right decorative symbols 41 with matching numbers, i.e., the left and right decorative symbols 41 for which a reach has been achieved, may be referred to as the "reach-eye decorative symbol 41." Furthermore, three decorative patterns 41 including different numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with no matching numbers." Furthermore, three decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with the same numbers."

The display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode in which character images are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers (see FIG. 63-1(1)), and a less decorative display mode in which letters such as numbers are displayed as the main feature (see FIG. 130(4), FIG. 143(23), FIG. 147(5), FIG. 148(10), etc.). The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is by the image of these characters and the like. Furthermore, in the less decorative decorative pattern 41, the area occupied by the characters is higher than in the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 41 is switched according to changes in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. Although the details will be described later, for example, decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the time-saving game state, etc., and decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed in other cases.
In addition to letters such as numbers, simple pictures, images of characters, etc. may also be displayed on the low-decorative decorative pattern 41. In other words, the "low-decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 130 (4), Figure 143 (23), Figure 147 (5), Figure 148 (10), etc. may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 63-1 (1), etc.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays the three decorative symbols 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "3"), then temporarily stops the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "4"), and then stops the center decorative symbol (for example, the number "1"). Note that the combination "314" of the decorative symbols 41 displayed as stopped, shown in FIG. 63-1 (3), is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a losing result. Also, the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a presentation symbol.
The detailed configuration of the decorative pattern 41 and the operation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described in detail later.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 63-1 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed (the effect symbol is being displayed) by the special symbol variable control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). In other words, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol while the special symbol is being displayed. The variable image 51 can also be considered as an image suggesting the contents of the random number used in the special symbol lottery for the special symbol being displayed. The variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114) when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and disappears when the special symbol is displayed in a static state. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. A variable base is also displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.
The variable image 51 may be erased (not displayed) when the variable performance ends, or may be erased (not displayed) before the variable performance ends (during the variable performance).

Furthermore, the variable image 51 changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than if the result is a miss. For example, if the colors of the variable image 51 are set to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow, the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 51 may be 100%.

(Pending image 52)
As shown in FIG. 63-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved image 52 based on information in the memory area corresponding to the currently reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. The reserved image 52 can also be considered an image suggesting the contents of the random numbers that have not been used (not yet executed) in the special symbol lottery (jackpot determination). The display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the results of the preliminary determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved base is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable base of the variable image 51 and the reserved base of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes. Hereinafter, the display mode of the variable image 51, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 52, which is white, may be referred to as the normal display mode.

As mentioned above, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52. Therefore, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52 being displayed on the image display unit 114. Furthermore, the multiple pending images 52 that are generated by a win at the first starting port 121 are displayed in the area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from the position closest to the variable image 51 to the position farther away, that is, from right to left.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are also generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. The multiple reserved images 52 generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from left to right.
Furthermore, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. Furthermore, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the first starting port 121 may have a different display form from the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the second starting port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the up to four pending images 52 that are displayed may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," "second pending image 52," "third pending image 52," and "fourth pending image 52," in order of their proximity to the variable image 51.

(Pending number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 63-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in the memory area corresponding to reserved balls in RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number depending on the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. In the reserved number display 55, the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
As shown in Fig. 63-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see Fig. 6, etc.) based on winning at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122. The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed stationary in accordance with the stationary display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As mentioned above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in either a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of text. However, the small patterns 56 may also be displayed in a display mode that displays images such as pictures and characters in addition to text. In other words, the small patterns 56 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.

The small symbols 56 are displayed (vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122. As the small symbols 56 scroll, the number images are displayed in increments of one from "1" to "9," and then the numbers are displayed again in increments of one from "1." When the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the small symbols 56 are also displayed in a static state. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the statically displayed small symbols 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbols 41. To further explain, in the example of Figure 63-1 (1), the number corresponding to the decorative symbols 41's "314" is displayed as the small symbols 56. The small symbols 56 can also be considered as performance symbols.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 63-1(1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc. This stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idols, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The stage image 61 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61.
The presentation control unit 300 selects one of the presentation modes and executes a variable presentation in the selected presentation mode. The presentation control unit 300 then displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the selected presentation mode. A presentation mode is provided for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Each time the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation mode corresponding to the switched game state and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the set presentation mode. The presentation control unit 300 also switches the presentation mode when a predetermined number of variable presentations in one presentation mode have been performed, and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the switched presentation mode. Therefore, the presentation mode can also be considered as a stage displayed in the stage image 61. The stage image 61 (the display mode of the stage image 61) may also be switched when a specific variable presentation (e.g., a variable presentation in which an SP reach or SPSP reach presentation is performed) is performed.
In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed on a layer behind other performance images such as the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

(Pseudo consecutive pattern 57)
111(1), a pseudo consecutive symbol 57 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive symbol 57 is an image that notifies the user that a pseudo consecutive effect will be performed when it stops.
The pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in place of the middle decorative symbols 41. Therefore, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are also regarded as performance symbols.
In addition, even when the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 may be displayed (variable display, stationary display).
As will be described later, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a cyclical motion.

(Zone pattern 58)
113(1), a zone symbol 58 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This zone symbol 58 is an image that notifies that a zone effect will be executed when it stops.
The zone symbol 58 is displayed in place of the middle decorative symbol 41. Therefore, the zone symbol 58 can also be regarded as a performance symbol.
It should be noted that even when the zone pattern 58 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 may be displayed (variable display, stationary display).
As will be described later, the zone symbol 58 is displayed in a cyclical motion.

(Zone execution image 59)
115(1), a zone execution image 59 is displayed on the image display section 114. The zone execution image 59 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed.
As will be described later, the zone execution image 59 is periodically displayed in motion.

(Reach line image 501)
127(7), a reach line image 501 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach line image 501 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 501 is displayed in white.

(First transitional image 502)
As shown in FIG. 130 (2), a first transition image 502 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first transition image 502 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect being executed will transition from a normal reach effect to an SP reach effect during normal game play. In the illustrated example, the first transition image 502 is a white image displayed across the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Furthermore, the first transition image 502 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the first transition image 502 can also be considered as the stage image 61. The stage (presentation mode) when the first transition image 502 is displayed may be considered the stage (presentation mode) before the first transition image 502 is displayed during execution of the variable effect, or may be considered a stage (presentation mode) specific to when the first transition image 502 is displayed.

(SP reach image 503)
As shown in FIG. 130 (3), an SP reach image 503 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This SP reach image 503 is an image indicating that an SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 503 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. The SP reach image 503 is displayed over the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. The SP reach image 503 is also displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SP reach image 503 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (presentation mode) when the SP reach image 503 is displayed may be regarded as the stage (presentation mode) before the first transition image 502 is displayed during execution of the variable effect, or as a stage (presentation mode) specific to the SP reach effect being executed.

(Second transitional image 504)
As shown in FIG. 130 (5), a second transition image 504 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second transition image 504 is an image that suggests or notifies that, in a normal game state, the background (display mode of the stage image 61) of the decorative symbol 41 and the like will transition from the background corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect to the background (display mode of the stage image 61) before the reach effect starts in the variable effect. The second transition image 504 is displayed over the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. The second transition image 504 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small symbol 56.

(First effect image of reel 505)
139(4), a reel first effect image 505 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reel first effect image 505 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 1153. In the example shown in the figure, the reel first effect image 505 is displayed around the right movable reel 1153.

(Chance effect image 506)
139(5), a chance eye effect image 506 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The chance eye effect image 506 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the chance eye effect image 506 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Re-change notification image 507)
As shown in FIG. 141 (7), a re-change notification image 507 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 507 is an image that notifies that the decorative pattern 41 will change again due to the pseudo-consecutive effect. In the example shown, the re-change notification image 507 is displayed at the top of the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 507 also shows the number of times that the decorative pattern 41 will change again in the change effect due to the re-change. In the example shown, the text "x2" is displayed, which is the number of times that the decorative pattern 41 will change again in the change effect due to the re-change.

(Second effect image of reel 508)
143 (22), the image display unit 114 displays a second reel effect image 508. The second reel effect image 508 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 1152 in the development performance. In the illustrated example, the second reel effect image 508 is a radial image centered on the middle movable reel 1152.

(SPSP reach image 509)
As shown in FIG. 143 (23), an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 509 is an image indicating that an SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 509 is, for example, a moving image of characters fighting that appear in content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The SPSP reach image 509 is displayed across one entire layer on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 509 is also displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SPSP reach image 509 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (presentation mode) when the SPSP reach image 509 is displayed may be regarded as the stage (presentation mode) before the first transition image 502 is displayed during execution of the variable effect, or as a stage (presentation mode) specific to the SPSP reach effect being executed.

(Button operation image 510)
As shown in FIG. 143 (24), a button operation image 510 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button operation image 510 is an image that is displayed when a button operation effect is being executed. The display of this button operation image 510 allows the player to recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the example shown, an image that resembles the effect button 161 and a gauge that indicates the valid operation period are displayed as the button operation image 510. The valid operation period is the period during which operation of the effect button 161 is accepted by the effect control unit 300 as being valid. If the button operation image 510 is displayed during the valid operation period, and the effect button 161 is operated between the display of the button operation image 510 and the lapse of the valid operation period, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161 is executed.

(First jackpot emphasis image 511)
As shown in FIG. 147 (2), a first jackpot emphasis image 511 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first jackpot emphasis image 511 is an image that emphasizes (notifies or suggests) that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. The first jackpot emphasis image 511 is displayed on the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the first jackpot emphasis image 511.

(Second jackpot emphasis image 550)
As shown in FIG. 147 (3), a second jackpot emphasis image 550 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second jackpot emphasis image 550 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The second jackpot emphasis image 550 is displayed when a double-digit decorative symbol 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the second jackpot emphasis image 550 is displayed as a radial image in rainbow colors centered on the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Right-handed image 512)
As shown in FIG. 147 (7), a right-hit image 512 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-hit image 512 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, a mark of an arrow pointing to the right is displayed as the right-hit image 512. The right-hit image 512 is displayed, for example, during execution of a jackpot game, in a time-saving game state, etc.

(Jackpot start image 513)
As shown in FIG. 147 (7), a jackpot start image 513 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot start image 513 is an image that notifies the user that a jackpot game will start. In the example shown, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the jackpot start image 513. The jackpot start image 513 may also include content that suggests the type of jackpot game (for example, the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(Round number image 514)
As shown in FIG. 147(8), a round number image 514 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 514 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being played in a jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the round number image 514 displays the text "Round 1."

(Round image 515)
As shown in Fig. 147 (8), a round-in-progress image 515 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This round-in-progress image 515 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 515 is displayed during a round in a jackpot game.

(Time-saving start image 516)
148(9), a time-saving start image 516 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The time-saving start image 516 is an image that notifies the start of a time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving start image 516 displays the text "Special time-saving start!", which suggests or notifies that the gaming state will be controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

(First teaser 517)
As shown in FIG. 179 (3), a first promotional image 517 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first promotional image 517 is an image that encourages (creates expectations of) the execution of a jackpot game. The first promotional image 517 is displayed in a time-saving game mode. In the illustrated example, the text "..." is displayed as the first promotional image 517.

(Second teaser image 518)
As shown in FIG. 180 (3), a second promotional image 518 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second promotional image 518 is an image that encourages (creates expectations of) the execution of a jackpot game. The second promotional image 518 is displayed in a time-saving game mode. In the illustrated example, the text "Reach?" is displayed as the second promotional image 518.

(Image after button 519)
As shown in FIG. 186 (8), a post-button image 519 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The post-button image 519 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. The post-button image 519 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-button image 519 displays the text "X", which indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Third transitional image 520)
As shown in FIG. 187 (10), a third transition image 520 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third transition image 520 is an image that suggests or notifies that the background (display mode of the stage image 61) of the decorative symbol 41 and the like will transition from the background corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the time-saving game mode to the background (display mode of the stage image 61) before the reach effect starts in the variable effect. The third transition image 520 is displayed on the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. The third transition image 520 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41, variable image 51, reserved image 52, and stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, and right-hit image 512.

(Success image 521)
189(2), a success image 521 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The success image 521 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect performed in the SPSP reach effect has been successful. The success image 521 is displayed only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

(Third jackpot emphasis image 522)
As shown in FIG. 189 (3), a third jackpot emphasis image 522 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third jackpot emphasis image 522 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and is an image that emphasizes the middle movable role element 1152. The third jackpot emphasis image 522 is displayed before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, an image spreading out from the middle movable role element 1152 is displayed in rainbow colors as the third jackpot emphasis image 522.

(Image 524 during restoration)
314(3), a restoration in progress image 524 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The restoration in progress image 524 is an image that suggests or notifies that the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being restored. In the illustrated example, the restoration in progress image 524 displays the text "Restoring."

(Initializing image 525)
As shown in Fig. 315 (3), an initializing image 525 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The initializing image 525 is an image that suggests or notifies that RAM clearing is in progress (various settings of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are being initialized). In the illustrated example, the initializing image 525 displays the text "Initializing."

(Demo screen 523)
As shown in FIG. 317 (2), a demo screen 523 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The demo screen 523 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting performance state. The demo screen 523 is a screen displayed on the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. However, the demo screen 523 may be displayed on a portion of one layer on the image display unit 114 and not on another portion. The demo screen 523 may also be a moving image. However, even if the demo screen 523 is a moving image, once a predetermined operation display is completed, the demo screen 523 becomes invisible without being repeated (without performing periodic operation display). In the illustrated example, the demo screen 523 displays a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

(Configuration of decorative pattern 41)
Next, the configuration of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
Figure 63-2 (1) is a diagram showing the configuration of the decorative pattern 41. Also, Figure 63-2 (2) is a diagram showing the relationship between the components of the decorative pattern 41 and the layers of the image display unit 114 on which the small pattern 56 is displayed.
The decorative pattern 41 is made up of various components.
As shown in Figure 63-2 (1), the decorative pattern 41 has a number portion 411, a first number decorative portion 412, a second number decorative portion 413, a character portion 414, a first character decorative portion 415, and a second character decorative portion 416.

The number portion 411 is a portion that indicates the number of the decorative pattern 41. The number portion 411 allows the player to identify which pattern it is based on the number indicated. Therefore, the number portion 411 can also be regarded as an identification portion that identifies the decorative pattern 41.
As shown in Figure 63-2 (2), the image display unit 114 displays various images by drawing a plurality of different layers that are superimposed on one another. Here, the plurality of layers are defined as upper layers on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, which is on the player's side, and lower layers on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, which is on the opposite side from the player. The plurality of layers that the image display unit 114 has are configured in the following order from the uppermost layer to the lowermost layer: first layer LA1, second layer LA2, third layer LA3, fourth layer LA4, fifth layer LA5, sixth layer LA6, and seventh layer LA7.
Furthermore, the number portion 411 is displayed on the second layer LA2.

The first numeral decoration portion 412 is a portion that decorates the numeral portion 411. The first numeral decoration portion 412 is displayed on the third layer LA3. The first numeral decoration portion 412 is also displayed in an area that overlaps with the numeral portion 411 on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the first numeral decoration portion 412 is formed in a circular shape. The first numeral decoration portion 412 can also be considered as a decoration portion that decorates the identification portion.

The second numeral decoration portion 413 is a portion that decorates the numeral portion 411. The second numeral decoration portion 413 is displayed on the fourth layer LA4. A portion of the second numeral decoration portion 413 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the numeral portion 411 and the first numeral decoration portion 412 on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the second numeral decoration portion 413 is formed in a cross shape. The second numeral decoration portion 413 can also be considered as a decoration portion that decorates the identification portion.

The character portion 414 is a portion that decorates the number portion 411. The character portion 414 is displayed on the sixth layer LA6. Furthermore, a portion of the character portion 414 is displayed in an area of the image display unit 114 that overlaps with the number portion 411, the first number decoration portion 412, and the second number decoration portion 413. However, the character portion 414 may also be displayed in an area of the image display unit 114 that does not overlap with any of the number portion 411, the first number decoration portion 412, and the second number decoration portion 413. In the illustrated example, the character portion 414 shows a character from the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The character portion 414 can also be regarded as a decoration portion that decorates the identification portion.
Although the details will be described later, the character portion 414 is different for each number portion 411 (each number in the decorative design 41), and the design can be identified by the character portion 414. Therefore, the character portion 414 can also be regarded as an identification portion for identifying the decorative design 41.

The first character decoration part 415 is a part that decorates the character part 414. The first character decoration part 415 is displayed on the fifth layer LA5. The first character decoration part 415 is also displayed in an area of the image display part 114 that overlaps with the first number decoration part 412 and the character part 414. However, the first character decoration part 415 may also be displayed in an area of the image display part 114 that does not overlap with the first number decoration part 412 or the character part 414. In the illustrated example, the name of the character part 414 is shown as the first character decoration part 415.
Furthermore, the display of the first character decorative portion 415 emphasizes the decorative pattern 41, which is mainly composed of the number portion 411. Therefore, the first character decorative portion 415 can also be regarded as a decorative portion that decorates the identification portion (number portion 411, character portion 414).

The second character decoration part 416 is a part that decorates the character part 414. The second character decoration part 416 is displayed on the seventh layer LA7. A portion of the second character decoration part 416 is displayed in an area of the image display part 114 that overlaps with the character part 414. However, the second character decoration part 416 may also be displayed in an area of the image display part 114 that does not overlap with the character part 414. In the illustrated example, the second character decoration part 416 is formed in a circular shape.
Furthermore, the display of the second character decorative portion 416 emphasizes the decorative pattern 41, which is mainly composed of the number portion 411. Therefore, the second character decorative portion 416 can also be regarded as a decorative portion that decorates the identification portion (number portion 411, character portion 414).

Figure 63-2 (3) is a diagram showing the configuration of the small pattern 56.
The small design 56 has a number portion 561 and a number decorative portion 562. The number portion 561 of the small design 56 has the same shape as the number portion 411 of the decorative design 41. The number decorative portion 562 of the small design 56 has the same shape as the first number decorative portion 412 of the decorative design 41.
The small design 56 is displayed on the first layer LA1. That is, the number portion 561 and the number decoration portion 562 of the small design 56 are displayed on a common layer in the image display unit 114.

It should be noted that the layers included in the image display unit 114 are not limited to the first layer LA1 to the seventh layer LA7 shown in FIG. 63-2(2).
The image display unit 114 is provided with layers in addition to the first layer LA1 to the seventh layer LA7. For example, the layer on which the stage image 61 (see FIG. 63-1 (1)) is displayed is a layer lower than the seventh layer LA7 (rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 100). The image display unit 114 may also be provided with a layer higher than the first layer LA1 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100). The image display unit 114 may also be provided with layers between the first layer LA1 to the seventh layer LA7 on which various effect images are displayed.
In addition, in the small pattern 56, the number portion 561 may be displayed in a layer higher than the number decoration portion 562 on the image display unit 114. Even in this case, the number portion 561 and the number decoration portion 562 are displayed in a layer higher than any of the components of the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, the layer on which the components of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the image display unit 114 is not limited to the example shown in Figure 63-2 (2).
For example, the number portion 411 and the first number decoration portion 412 in one decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on the same display layer in the image display unit 114, while the number portion 411 may be drawn to be displayed in front of the first number decoration portion 412. In other words, if the number portion 411 has a higher display priority in the image display unit 114 than the first number decoration portion 412, the number portion 411 may be displayed on a layer in front of the first number decoration portion 412, or may be displayed on the same layer as the first number decoration portion 412. The display priority is the priority of which of a plurality of images is visually recognized by the player as being displayed in front of the image display unit 114.
Regardless of whether the performance control unit 300 displays each component of the decorative pattern 41 on the layer shown in Figure 63-2 (2) or displays all on the same layer in the image display unit 114, the display priority of each component of the decorative pattern 41 may be, in descending order, number section 411, first number decoration section 412, second number decoration section 413, first character decoration section 415, character section 414, and second character decoration section 416.

The performance control unit 300 may display each component of the decorative pattern 41 separately or as a whole. When the performance control unit 300 displays each component of the decorative pattern 41 as a whole, the components of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed on the same layer in the image display unit 114. However, even in this case, the performance control unit 300 may assign the display priority of each component of the decorative pattern 41, in descending order, to the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the first character decoration section 415, the character section 414, and the second character decoration section 416.

64-1 and 64-2 are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 for each stage.
As described above, the performance control unit 300 controls one of the multiple stages. The stages controlled by the performance control unit 300 include the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage. The components of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the stage being controlled.

The contents shown in Figures 64-1 and 64-2 will be explained.
The "stage" refers to a stage controlled by the production control unit 300. The "stage" includes a first stage, a second stage, a third stage, and a third stage.
The "element" refers to the target element in the decorative pattern 41. The "element" includes a number portion 411, a first number decoration portion 412, a second number decoration portion 413, a character portion 414, a first character decoration portion 415, and a second character decoration portion 416.
"Numbers" refers to the numbers of the decorative pattern 41. "Numbers" include 1 to 9.
64-1 and 64-2 show the display modes of "element elements" according to "stages" and "numbers."

As shown in Fig. 64-1, the number portion 411 is displayed in a common decorative manner regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 3) being controlled. Also, the number portion 411 is displayed in a different display manner for each number (1 to 9) of the decorative pattern 41.
The first number decoration portion 412 is displayed in a common decoration mode regardless of the stage (first stage to third stage) to be controlled. Also, the first number decoration portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41.
The second number decoration portion 413 is displayed in a common decoration mode regardless of the stage (first stage to third stage) to be controlled. Also, the second number decoration portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41.

64-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a decorative manner depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The character portion 414 is displayed in a decorative manner that differs for each number on the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 on the third stage does not have a character portion 414.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner that differs for each number of the decoration pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decoration pattern 41 in the third stage does not have the first character decoration portion 415.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a common decoration manner regardless of the number of the decoration pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the decoration pattern 41 in the third stage does not have the second character decoration portion 416.

In addition, the left decorative pattern 41, right decorative pattern 41, and center decorative pattern 41 display each component of the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decorative portion 412, second number decorative portion 413, character portion 414, first character decorative portion 415, second character decorative portion 416) in a common display mode.

(Temporary Stop of Decorative Designs)
Next, the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
As described above, the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops. Here, each component of the decorative pattern 41 (the number portion 411, the first number portion 412, the second number portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character portion 415, and the second character portion 416) can be temporarily stopped periodically in various operating modes. Below, the operating modes of each component of the decorative pattern 41 (the number portion 411, the first number portion 412, the second number portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character portion 415, and the second character portion 416) during temporary stopping will be described.

As will be described in more detail below, after the decorative pattern has been fixed and stopped, the effect control unit 300 may display at least a portion of the decorative pattern in motion when a variable effect is not being executed (such as when a customer waiting effect is being executed, or when a jackpot game is being played). Such movement of the decorative pattern when a variable effect is not being executed (such as when a customer waiting effect is being executed, or when a jackpot game is being played) may be considered a temporary stop in a broad sense.

First, a description will be given of the operation modes when the number portion 411 is temporarily stopped. The operation modes when the number portion 411 is temporarily stopped include a first operation mode to an eighth operation mode.
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the temporary stop of the number portion 411 in the first operation mode.
The first operation mode is an operation mode in which a target portion (in this example, the number portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41 sways sideways (left and right). In this example, the display of the number portion 411 in the first operation mode is performed at a cycle of one second.

At the start of temporary stopping in the first operating mode, the number section 411 is displayed in the position shown in Figure 65 (1). In the following, the display position of the number section 411 shown in Figure 65 (1) will be considered to be the initial position of the number section 411 in the first operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the first operation mode progresses, the number portion 411 moves to the left of its initial position, as shown in FIG. 65(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the first operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 moves to the right as shown in FIG. 65(3), thereby returning to the initial position.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the first operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 moves to the right of the initial position, as shown in FIG. 65(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the first operation mode progresses further, the number section 411 returns to the initial position by moving to the left as shown in Fig. 65(5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the first operation mode of the number section 411. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the first operation mode continues, the number section 411 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 65(2) to (5), thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the first operation mode of the number section 411.
Furthermore, the time for which the numeric section 411 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 65(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the first operation mode of the numeric section 411, is 1 second, as described above.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the number portion 411 in the second operation mode.
In the second operation mode, a light-emitting image that imitates light is displayed in a target portion (in this example, the number portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41, and the light-emitting image descends in the target portion. In this example, the display of the number portion 411 in the second operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.8 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 66(1), the luminous image simulating light is not displayed.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the second operation mode progresses, an illuminating image simulating light is displayed above the number portion 411, as shown in FIG. 66(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the second operation mode progresses further, the luminous image descends in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 66(3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the second operation mode progresses further, the luminous image further descends in the number portion 411 as shown in FIG. 66(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the second operation mode progresses further, the luminous image is no longer displayed as shown in Fig. 66(5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the second operation mode of the number portion 411. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the second operation mode continues, the luminous image is repeatedly displayed in the operation modes shown in Fig. 66(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the second operation mode of the number portion 411.
The time for which the numeric section 411 displays the motion in the modes shown in Figures 66(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the second motion mode of the numeric section 411, is 0.8 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the number portion 411 in the third operation mode.
The third operation mode is an operation mode in which a target portion (in this example, the numeral portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41 swings vertically (up and down). In this example, the display of the numeral portion 411 in the third operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.75 seconds.

At the start of temporary stopping in the third operating mode, the number section 411 is displayed in the position shown in Figure 67 (1). In the following, the display position of the number section 411 shown in Figure 67 (1) will be considered to be the initial position of the number section 411 in the third operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the third operation mode progresses, the number portion 411 moves upward from the initial position, as shown in FIG. 67(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the third operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 moves downward as shown in FIG. 67(3), thereby returning to the initial position.
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the third operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 moves downward from the initial position as shown in FIG. 67(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the third operation mode progresses further, the number section 411 returns to the initial position by moving upward as shown in Fig. 67(5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the third operation mode of the number section 411. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the third operation mode continues, the number section 411 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 67(2) to (5), thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the third operation mode of the number section 411.
The time for which the numeric section 411 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 67(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the third operation mode of the numeric section 411, is 0.75 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the number portion 411 in the fourth operation mode.
The fourth operation mode is an operation mode in which a target portion (in this example, the numeral portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41 swings diagonally. In this example, the display of the numeral portion 411 in the fourth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.5 seconds.

At the start of temporary stopping in the fourth operating mode, the number section 411 is displayed in the position shown in Figure 68 (1). In the following, the display position of the number section 411 shown in Figure 68 (1) will be considered to be the initial position of the number section 411 in the fourth operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the fourth operation mode progresses, the number portion 411 moves to the lower right side of the initial position, as shown in FIG. 68(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the fourth operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 moves to the upper left side as shown in FIG. 68(3), thereby returning to the initial position.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the fourth operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 moves to the upper left side of the initial position, as shown in FIG. 68(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the fourth operation mode progresses further, the number section 411 returns to the initial position by moving to the lower right as shown in Fig. 68(5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the fourth operation mode of the number section 411. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the fourth operation mode continues, the number section 411 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 68(2) to (5), thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the fourth operation mode of the number section 411.
The time for which the numeric section 411 displays the motion in the modes shown in Figures 68(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the fourth motion mode of the numeric section 411, is 0.5 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the number portion 411 in the fifth operation mode.
In the fifth operation mode, a light-emitting image that imitates light is displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the number portion 411), and the light-emitting image moves to the right in the target portion. In this example, the display of the number portion 411 in the fifth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.3 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode, as shown in FIG. 69(1), the luminous image simulating light is not displayed.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode progresses, an illuminating image simulating light is displayed on the left side of the number portion 411, as shown in FIG. 69(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image moves to the right in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 69(3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image moves further to the right in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 69(4).

69(5) 。 As the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image is no longer displayed, thereby completing one cycle of display in the fifth operation mode of the number portion 411. After this, while the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode continues, the luminous image is repeatedly displayed in the operation modes shown in Figures 69(2) to (5), so that the temporary stop in the fifth operation mode of the number portion 411 is periodically performed.
The time for which the numeric portion 411 displays the motion in the modes shown in Figures 69(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the fifth motion mode of the numeric portion 411, is 1.3 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the number portion 411 in the sixth operation mode.
In the sixth operation mode, a light-emitting image that imitates light is displayed in a target portion (in this example, the number portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41, and the light-emitting image rises in the target portion. In this example, the display of the number portion 411 in the sixth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.25 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode, as shown in FIG. 70(1), the luminous image simulating light is not displayed.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses, an illuminating image simulating light is displayed below the number portion 411, as shown in FIG. 70(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image rises in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 70(3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image rises further in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 70(4).

70(5) 。 As the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image is no longer displayed, thereby completing one cycle of display in the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411. After this, while the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode continues, the luminous image is repeatedly displayed in the operation modes shown in Figures 70(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411.
The time for which the numeric portion 411 displays the motion in the modes shown in Figures 70(1) to 70(5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the sixth motion mode of the numeric portion 411, is 1.25 seconds as described above.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the number portion 411 in the seventh operation mode.
In the seventh operation mode, a light-emitting image that imitates light is displayed in a target portion (in this example, the number portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41, and the light-emitting image moves to the left in the target portion. In this example, the display of the number portion 411 in the seventh operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.9 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the seventh operation mode, as shown in FIG. 71(1), the luminous image simulating light is not displayed.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the seventh operation mode progresses, an illuminating image simulating light is displayed on the right side of the number portion 411, as shown in FIG. 71(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the seventh operation mode progresses further, the luminous image moves to the left in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 71(3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the seventh operation mode progresses further, the luminous image moves further to the left in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 71(4).

71(5) 。 As the temporary stop in the seventh operation mode progresses further, the luminous image is no longer displayed, thereby completing one cycle of display in the seventh operation mode of the number portion 411. After this, while the temporary stop in the seventh operation mode continues, the luminous image is repeatedly displayed in the operation modes shown in Figures 71(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the seventh operation mode of the number portion 411.
The time for which the numeric portion 411 displays the motion in the modes shown in Figures 71(1) to 71(5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the seventh motion mode of the numeric portion 411, is 0.9 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode.
The eighth operation mode is an operation mode in which a target portion (in this example, the number portion 411) of the decorative pattern 41 rotates horizontally (counterclockwise). In this example, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode is performed every 10 seconds.

At the start of temporary stopping in the eighth operating mode, the number section 411 is displayed in the area shown in Figure 72 (1). In the following, the display area of the number section 411 shown in Figure 72 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the number section 411 in the eighth operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the eighth operation mode progresses, the number section 411 rotates counterclockwise relative to the initial display area, as shown in FIG. 72(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the eighth operation mode progresses further, the number section 411 rotates further counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 72(3), and the left and right display areas of the number section 411 are reversed.
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the eighth operation mode progresses further, the number portion 411 rotates further counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 72(4).

72(5) 中，当前步骤在第8动作模式中的阵列411进一步转动，返回到初始显示区域(完成一个旋转)，这样完成一周期的显示在第8动作模式中。 Thereafter, when the temporary stop in the eighth operation mode continues, the number section 411 returns to the initial display area by further rotating counterclockwise (completes one rotation), as shown in FIG. 72(5), thereby completing one period of display in the eighth operation mode of the number section 411.
The time for which the numeric part 411 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 72(1) to 72(5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the eighth operation mode of the numeric part 411, is 10 seconds as described above.

It has been explained that the temporary stopping of the number section 411 includes operation modes (second operation mode, fifth operation mode, sixth operation mode, and seventh operation mode) in which an illuminating image simulating light is displayed. Here, the illuminating image may be displayed on a layer in front of the number section 411 on the image display unit 114, or may be displayed on the same layer as the number section 411 on the image display unit 114 while being drawn so as to be displayed in front of the number section 411. Furthermore, the illuminating image may be an image that is displayed by changing the display mode of the number section 411 itself.
In addition, in the temporary stops in the second, fifth, sixth, and seventh operation modes, the number portion 411 does not move. In this way, the temporary stops of the decorative pattern 41 include not only a configuration in which the decorative pattern 41 itself is displayed in motion, but also a configuration in which an image emphasizing the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion.

Furthermore, the first to eighth operating modes described above are common operating modes regardless of the number displayed as the decorative pattern 41. For example, the first operating mode caused by the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 "3" and the first operating mode caused by the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 "4" are the same operating mode.

Next, a description will be given of the operation modes in the temporary stop of the first numeral decoration portion 412. The operation modes in the temporary stop of the first numeral decoration portion 412 include a ninth operation mode to a fifteenth operation mode.
Figure 73 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the ninth operation mode.
The ninth operation mode is an operation mode in which a line is drawn clockwise from the top of a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.1 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the ninth operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 73(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the ninth operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 73 (2), a line is drawn clockwise from the top of the first numeral decorative part 412, forming a quadrant arc in the first numeral decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the ninth operation mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 73 (3), lines are further drawn in the clockwise direction in the first number decorative portion 412, forming a circle in the first number decorative portion 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the ninth operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 73 (4), a line is erased clockwise from the top of the first number decorative part 412, forming a circle with a missing part in the first number decorative part 412.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the ninth operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 73 (5), the lines are further erased in the clockwise direction in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby completing one cycle of display in the ninth operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the ninth operation mode continues, the displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 73 (2) to (5) in the first numeral decoration part 412 are repeated, and the temporary stop in the ninth operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 73 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the ninth operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 1.1 seconds, as described above.

Figure 74 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the tenth operation mode.
The tenth operation mode is an operation mode in which a line is drawn counterclockwise from the top of a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the tenth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.95 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop according to the tenth operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 74(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the tenth operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 74 (2), a line is drawn counterclockwise from the top of the first numeral decorative part 412, forming a quadrant arc in the first numeral decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the tenth operation mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 74 (3), lines are further drawn in the counterclockwise direction in the first number decorative portion 412, forming a circle in the first number decorative portion 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the tenth operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 74 (4), a line is erased counterclockwise from the top of the first number decorative part 412, forming a circle with a missing part in the first number decorative part 412.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the tenth operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 74 (5), the lines are further erased in the counterclockwise direction in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby completing one cycle of display in the tenth operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the tenth operation mode continues, the displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 74 (2) to (5) in the first numeral decoration part 412 are repeated, and the temporary stop in the tenth operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 74 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 10th operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 0.95 seconds, as described above.

Figure 75 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the eleventh operation mode.
The eleventh operation mode is an operation mode in which lines are drawn in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the top of a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the eleventh operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.7 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop according to the eleventh operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 75(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 11th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 75 (2), lines are drawn clockwise and counterclockwise from the top of the first number decorative part 412, forming a quadrant arc in the first number decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 11th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 75 (3), lines are further drawn in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions in the first number decorative portion 412, thereby forming a circle in the first number decorative portion 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 11th operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 75 (4), lines are erased in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the top of the first number decorative part 412, forming a circle with a portion missing in the first number decorative part 412.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 11th operation mode further progresses, as shown in Fig. 75(5), the lines are further erased in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 11th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 11th operation mode continues, the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 75(2) to (5) in the first numeral decoration part 412 is repeated, and the temporary stop in the 11th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 75 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 11th operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 0.7 seconds, as described above.

Figure 76 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the twelfth operating mode.
The twelfth operation mode is an operation mode in which a double line is drawn clockwise from the top of a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the twelfth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.4 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the twelfth operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 76(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 12th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 76 (2), a double line is drawn clockwise from the top of the first numeral decorative part 412, forming a double arc that is a quadrant in the first numeral decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 12th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 76 (3), a double line is further drawn in the clockwise direction in the first numeral decorative portion 412, thereby forming a double circle in the first numeral decorative portion 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 12th operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 76 (4), the double line is erased clockwise from the top of the first number decorative part 412, and a double circle with a portion missing is formed in the first number decorative part 412.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 12th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 76 (5), the double line is further erased in the clockwise direction in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby making the line invisible, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 12th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 12th operation mode continues, the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 76 (2) to (5) in the first numeral decoration part 412 is repeated, thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the 12th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 76 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 12th operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 1.4 seconds, as described above.

Figure 77 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the thirteenth operating mode.
The thirteenth operation mode is an operation mode in which lines are drawn in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the bottom of a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the thirteenth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.6 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop according to the thirteenth operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 77(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 13th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 77 (2), lines are drawn clockwise and counterclockwise from the bottom of the first numeral decorative part 412, forming a quadrant arc in the first numeral decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 13th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 77 (3), lines are further drawn in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions in the first number decorative portion 412, forming a circle in the first number decorative portion 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 13th operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 77 (4), lines are erased in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the bottom of the first number decorative part 412, forming a circle with a portion missing in the first number decorative part 412.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the thirteenth operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 77(5), the lines are further erased in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby completing one cycle of display in the thirteenth operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the thirteenth operation mode continues, the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 77(2) to (5) in the first numeral decoration part 412 is repeated, and the temporary stop in the thirteenth operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 77 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 13th operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 1.6 seconds, as described above.

Figure 78 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the fourteenth operating mode.
The fourteenth operation mode is an operation mode in which a double line is drawn counterclockwise from the top of a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the fourteenth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.45 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop according to the fourteenth operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 78(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 14th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 78 (2), a double line is drawn counterclockwise from the top of the first numeral decorative part 412, forming a double arc that is a quadrant in the first numeral decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 14th operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 78 (3), a double line is further drawn in the counterclockwise direction in the first number decorative part 412, thereby forming a double circle in the first number decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 14th operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 78 (4), the double line is erased counterclockwise from the top of the first number decorative part 412, and a double circle with a portion missing is formed in the first number decorative part 412.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 14th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 78(5), the double line is further erased in the counterclockwise direction in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby making the line invisible, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 14th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 14th operation mode continues, the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 78(2) to (5) in the first numeral decoration part 412 is repeated, thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the 14th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 78 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 14th operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 1.45 seconds, as described above.

Figure 79 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first numeral decoration part 412 in the 15th operating mode.
The fifteenth operation mode is an operation mode in which lines are drawn in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the right side at a target portion (in this example, the first numeral decorative portion 412) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 7.5 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop according to the fifteenth operation mode, no line is drawn, as shown in FIG. 79(1).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 15th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 79 (2), lines are drawn clockwise and counterclockwise from the right side of the first numeral decorative part 412, forming a quadrant arc in the first numeral decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 15th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 79 (3), lines are further drawn in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions in the first number decorative part 412, forming a circle in the first number decorative part 412.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 15th operating mode progresses further, as shown in Figure 79 (4), lines are erased in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the right side of the first number decoration part 412, forming a circle with a portion missing in the first number decoration part 412.

79(5) , as the temporary stop in the 15th operation mode progresses further, the lines are further erased in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions in the first numeral decoration part 412, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 15th operation mode of the first numeral decoration part 412. After this, while the temporary stop in the 15th operation mode continues, the display in the operation modes shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display in the modes shown in Figures 79 (1) to (5) in the first number decoration part 412, i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 15th operation mode of the first number decoration part 412, is 7.5 seconds, as described above.

In addition, the line drawn on the first numeral decoration portion 412 in the ninth to fifteenth operating modes may be displayed on a layer in front of the numeral portion 411 on the image display unit 114, or may be drawn so as to be displayed on the same layer as the numeral portion 411 on the image display unit 114 but in front of the numeral portion 411. In addition, the drawn line may be an image displayed by changing the display mode of the numeral portion 411 itself.
Furthermore, during the temporary stops in the ninth to fifteenth operating modes, the first numeral decorative portion 412 does not move.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned ninth to fifteenth operating modes are common operating modes regardless of the number displayed as the decorative pattern 41. As an example, the ninth operating mode by the first numeral decorative portion 412 of the decorative pattern 41 "3" and the ninth operating mode by the first numeral decorative portion 412 of the decorative pattern 41 "4" are the same operating mode.

Next, a description will be given of the operation modes in the temporary stop of the second numeral decoration portion 413. The operation modes in the temporary stop of the second numeral decoration portion 413 include a 16th operation mode to a 22nd operation mode.
Figure 80 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 16th operation mode.
The sixteenth operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) rotates clockwise. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.5 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 16th operating mode, the second numeral decoration part 413 is displayed in the position shown in Figure 80 (1). In the following, the display position of the second numeral decoration part 413 shown in Figure 80 (1) is assumed to be the initial position of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 16th operating mode. Furthermore, when the second numeral decoration part 413 is in the initial position, one tip part 4131 of the second numeral decoration part 413 is located on the upper right side of the second numeral decoration part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 16th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 80 (2), the second number decorative part 413 rotates clockwise, and one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower right side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 16th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further clockwise, as shown in Figure 80 (3), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower left side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 16th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further clockwise, as shown in Figure 80 (4), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the upper left side of the second number decorative part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 16th operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial position by further rotating clockwise as shown in Fig. 80(5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the 16th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 16th operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 80(2) to (5), thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the 16th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 80 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 16th operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 1.5 seconds, as described above.

Figure 81 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 17th operation mode.
The seventeenth operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) rotates counterclockwise. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the seventeenth operation mode is performed every eight seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 17th operating mode, the second numeral decoration part 413 is displayed at the position shown in Figure 81 (1). In the following, the display position of the second numeral decoration part 413 shown in Figure 81 (1) is assumed to be the initial position of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 17th operating mode. Furthermore, when the second numeral decoration part 413 is in the initial position, one tip part 4131 of the second numeral decoration part 413 is located on the upper right side of the second numeral decoration part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 17th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 81 (2), the second number decorative part 413 rotates counterclockwise, and one tip part 4131 is positioned on the upper left side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 17th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 81 (3), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower left side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 17th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 81 (4), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower right side of the second number decorative part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 17th operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial position by further rotating counterclockwise as shown in Fig. 81 (5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 17th operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 81 (2) to (5), thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 81 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 17th operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 8 seconds, as described above.

Figure 82 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 18th operation mode.
The 18th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) rotates clockwise and counterclockwise. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 18th operation mode is performed every 5 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 18th operating mode, the second numeral decoration part 413 is displayed at the position shown in Figure 82 (1). In the following, the display position of the second numeral decoration part 413 shown in Figure 82 (1) is assumed to be the initial position of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 18th operating mode. Furthermore, when the second numeral decoration part 413 is in the initial position, one tip part 4131 of the second numeral decoration part 413 is located on the upper right side of the second numeral decoration part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 18th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 82 (2), the second number decorative part 413 rotates clockwise, and one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower right side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the eighteenth operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decorative part 413 returns to the initial position by rotating counterclockwise as shown in Figure 82 (3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 18th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 82 (4), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the upper left side of the second number decorative part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 18th operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial position by rotating clockwise as shown in Fig. 82 (5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the 18th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 18th operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 82 (2) to (5), thereby periodically performing the temporary stop in the 18th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 82 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 18th operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 5 seconds, as described above.

Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 19th operation mode.
The 19th operation mode is an operation mode in which a target portion (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) of the decorative pattern 41 is extended. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 19th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 3.5 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 19th operating mode, the second numeral decoration section 413 is displayed in the area shown in Figure 83 (1). In the following, the display area of the second numeral decoration section 413 shown in Figure 83 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the second numeral decoration section 413 in the 19th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the nineteenth operation mode progresses, the second numeral decoration portion 413 extends as shown in FIG. 83(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the nineteenth operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decorative portion 413 extends further as shown in Figure 83 (3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the nineteenth operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decoration portion 413 shortens as shown in FIG. 83(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 19th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 83(5), the second numeral decoration part 413 is further shortened, and the display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 19th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 19th operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 83(2) to (5), and the temporary stop in the 19th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 83 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 19th operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 3.5 seconds, as described above.

Figure 84 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 20th operation mode.
The 20th operation mode is an operation mode in which a triangular portion appears to protrude from a target portion (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 20th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.9 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 20th operation mode, as shown in Figure 84 (1), no triangular portion is displayed in the second numeral decoration part 413. Below, the display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 shown in Figure 84 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 20th operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the twentieth operation mode progresses, a triangular portion is displayed at each of the ends of the cross shape of the second numeral decorative portion 413, as shown in FIG. 84 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the twentieth operation mode progresses further, as shown in FIG. 84(3), each of the triangular portions of the second numeral decorative portion 413 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 84(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the twentieth operation mode progresses further, each of the triangular portions of the second numeral decorative portion 413 is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 84(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 20th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 84(5), each of the triangular portions of the second numeral decoration part 413 becomes invisible, and the display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 20th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 20th operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 84(2) to (5), and the temporary stop in the 20th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 84 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 20th operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 1.9 seconds, as described above.

Figure 85 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 21st operation mode.
The 21st operation mode is an operation mode in which a circular portion appears to protrude from a target portion (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 21st operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.75 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 21st operation mode, as shown in Figure 85 (1), no circular portion is displayed in the second numeral decoration section 413. Below, the display area of the second numeral decoration section 413 shown in Figure 85 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the second numeral decoration section 413 in the 21st operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 21st operation mode progresses, a circular portion is displayed at each of the ends of the cross shape of the second numeral decorative portion 413, as shown in FIG. 85(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 21st operation mode progresses further, each of the circular portions of the second numeral decoration portion 413 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 85(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 21st operation mode progresses further, each of the circular portions of the second numeral decoration portion 413 is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 85(4).

85(5), as the temporary stop in the 21st operation mode progresses further, each of the circular portions of the second numeral decoration part 413 becomes invisible, and the display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 21st operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. After this, while the temporary stop in the 21st operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 85 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 21st operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 1.75 seconds, as described above.

Figure 86 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 22nd operation mode.
The 22nd operation mode is an operation mode in which a target portion (in this example, the second numeral decorative portion 413) of the decorative pattern 41 is shortened. In this example, the display of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 22nd operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.55 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode, the second numeral decoration part 413 is displayed in the area shown in Figure 86 (1). In the following, the display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 shown in Figure 86 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the 22nd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode progresses, the second numeral decoration portion 413 shortens as shown in Figure 86 (2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decoration portion 413 further shortens as shown in Figure 86 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode progresses further, the second numeral decoration portion 413 extends as shown in Figure 86 (4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 86(5), the second numeral decoration part 413 further extends, and the display area of the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 22nd operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 86(2) to (5), and the temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 86 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 22nd operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 1.55 seconds, as described above.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned 16th to 22nd operation modes are common operation modes regardless of the number displayed as the decorative pattern 41. As an example, the 16th operation mode by the second numeral decoration part 413 of the decorative pattern 41 "3" and the 16th operation mode by the second numeral decoration part 413 of the decorative pattern 41 "4" are the same operation mode.

Next, we will explain the operation modes when the character part 414 is temporarily stopped. The operation modes when the character part 414 is temporarily stopped include 23rd operation mode to 34th operation mode.
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 23rd operation mode.
The 23rd operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "1" decorative pattern 41) raises its left hand in a fist. In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 23rd operation mode is performed every two seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 23rd operation mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 87 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 87 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 23rd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 23rd motion mode progresses, the character part 414 makes a fist with its left hand and extends its left arm out to the left, as shown in FIG. 87(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 23rd motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its left arm diagonally upward to the left, as shown in FIG. 87(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 23rd motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its left arm out to the left, as shown in FIG. 87(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 23rd operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 87(5), the character part 414 lowers its left arm, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 23rd operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 23rd operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 87(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the 23rd operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 is displayed in the modes shown in Figures 87(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 23rd operation mode of the character part 414, is 2 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character portion 414 in the 24th operation mode.
The 24th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "1" decorative pattern 41) raises its right hand in a fist. In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 24th operation mode is performed every three seconds.

At the start of temporary stopping in the 24th operating mode, the character portion 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 88 (1). In the following, the display area of the character portion 414 shown in Figure 88 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character portion 414 in the 24th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 24th motion mode progresses, the character part 414 makes a fist with its right hand and extends its right arm towards the right, as shown in FIG. 88(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 24th motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its right arm diagonally upward to the right, as shown in FIG. 88(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 24th motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its right arm out to the right, as shown in FIG. 88(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 24th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 88(5), the character part 414 lowers its right arm, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 24th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 24th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 88(2) to (5), causing the temporary stop in the 24th operation mode of the character part 414 to be performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 displays its motion in the modes shown in Figures 88(1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop of the character part 414 in the 24th motion mode, is 3 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 25th operation mode.
The 25th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "1" decorative pattern 41) raises both hands in a fist shape. In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 25th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 3.75 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 25th operating mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 89 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 89 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 25th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 25th operation mode progresses, as shown in Figure 89 (2), the character part 414 makes both hands into a fist, extends the left arm to the left, and extends the right arm to the right.
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 25th motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 extends its left arm diagonally upward to the left and its right arm diagonally upward to the right, as shown in FIG. 89(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 25th motion mode progresses further, the character portion 414 extends its left arm toward the left side and its right arm toward the right side, as shown in FIG. 89(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 25th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 89(5), the character part 414 lowers both arms, and the display area of the character part 414 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 25th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 25th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 89(2) to (5), and the temporary stop in the 25th operation mode of the character part 414 is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 is displayed in the modes shown in Figures 89(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 25th mode of operation of the character part 414, is 3.75 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode.
The 26th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "3" decorative pattern 41) counts numbers with the left hand. In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode is performed every two seconds.

At the start of temporary stopping in the 26th operating mode, the character portion 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 90 (1). In the following, the display area of the character portion 414 shown in Figure 90 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character portion 414 in the 26th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 26th operation mode progresses, the character portion 414 stretches both arms forward and points to the number 1 with its left hand, as shown in FIG. 90(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 26th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points to the number 2 with its left hand, as shown in FIG. 90(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 26th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points to the number 1 with its left hand, as shown in FIG. 90(4).

90(5) 、 26位的动作模式的显示表现在完成。 English: Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 26th operation mode continues, the character part 414 lowers both arms, and the display area of the character part 414 returns to the initial display area, as shown in Fig. 90(5), thereby completing one display cycle in the 26th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, while the temporary stop in the 26th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 90(2) to (5), and the temporary stop in the 26th operation mode of the character part 414 is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 displays its motion in the modes shown in Figures 90(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 26th motion mode of the character part 414, is 2 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 27th operation mode.
The 27th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "3" decorative pattern 41) counts numbers with the right hand. In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 27th operation mode is performed every 3 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 27th operating mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 91 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 91 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 27th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 27th operation mode progresses, the character portion 414 stretches both arms forward and points to the number 1 with its right hand, as shown in FIG. 91(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 27th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points to the number 2 with its right hand, as shown in FIG. 91 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 27th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points to the number 1 with its right hand, as shown in FIG. 91(4).

91(5), as the temporary stop in the 27th operation mode progresses further, the character part 414 lowers both arms, and the display area of the character part 414 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 27th operation mode of the character part 414. After this, while the temporary stop in the 27th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the displays in the operation modes shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 displays its motion in the modes shown in Figures 91(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 27th motion mode of the character part 414, is 3 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 28th operation mode.
The 28th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "3" decorative pattern 41) counts numbers with both hands. In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 28th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 3.75 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 28th operating mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 92 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 92 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 28th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 28th operation mode progresses, as shown in FIG. 92(2), the character portion 414 stretches both arms forward and indicates the number 1 with both its left and right hands.
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 28th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 shows the number 2 with both the left and right hands, as shown in FIG. 92(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 28th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 shows the number 1 with both the left and right hands, as shown in FIG. 92(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 28th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 92(5), the character part 414 lowers both arms, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 28th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 28th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 92(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the 28th operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 displays its motion in the modes shown in Figures 92(1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 28th motion mode of the character part 414, is 3.75 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode.
The 29th operation mode is an operation mode in which the index finger of the left hand is raised to raise the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "4" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode is performed every two seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 29th operating mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 93 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 93 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 29th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 29th operation mode progresses, the character portion 414 points the index finger of its left hand to the left, as shown in FIG. 93(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 29th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 raises the index finger of its left hand, as shown in FIG. 93(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 29th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points the index finger of its left hand to the left, as shown in FIG. 93(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 29th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 93(5), the character part 414 lowers its left hand, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 29th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 29th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 93(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the 29th operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 displays its motion in the modes shown in Figures 93(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop of the character part 414 in the 29th motion mode, is 2 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 30th operation mode.
The 30th operation mode is an operation mode in which the index finger of the right hand is raised to raise the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "4" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 30th operation mode is performed every three seconds.

At the start of temporary stopping in the 30th operating mode, the character portion 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 94 (1). In the following, the display area of the character portion 414 shown in Figure 94 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character portion 414 in the 30th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 30th operation mode progresses, the character portion 414 points the index finger of its right hand to the right, as shown in FIG. 94(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 30th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 raises the index finger of its right hand, as shown in FIG. 94(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 30th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points the index finger of its right hand to the right, as shown in FIG. 94(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 30th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 94(5), the character part 414 lowers its left hand, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 30th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 30th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 94(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the 30th operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 displays its motion in the modes shown in Figures 94(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 30th motion mode of the character part 414, is 3 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 31st operation mode.
The 31st operation mode is an operation mode in which the index fingers of both hands are raised to indicate the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "4" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 31st operation mode is performed at a cycle of 3.75 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 31st operation mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 95 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 95 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 31st operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 31st operation mode progresses, the character portion 414 points the index finger of its left hand to the left and the index finger of its right hand to the right, as shown in FIG. 95(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 31st operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 raises the index fingers of both hands, as shown in FIG. 95(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 31st operation mode progresses further, the character portion 414 points the index finger of the left hand to the left and the index finger of the right hand to the right, as shown in FIG. 95(4).

95(5) , as the temporary stop in the 31st operation mode progresses further, the character part 414 lowers both hands, and the display area of the character part 414 returns to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 31st operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 31st operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 is displayed in the modes shown in Figures 95(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 31st mode of operation of the character part 414, is 3.75 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 32nd operation mode.
The 32nd operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "7" decorative pattern 41) raises its left hand in the shape of a "peace." In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 32nd operation mode is performed every two seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 32nd operation mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 96 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 96 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 32nd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 32nd motion mode progresses, the character part 414 makes a "peace" shape with its left hand and extends its left arm to the left, as shown in FIG. 96(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 32nd motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its left arm diagonally upward to the left, as shown in FIG. 96(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 32nd motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its left arm out to the left, as shown in FIG. 96(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 32nd operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 96(5), the character part 414 lowers its left arm, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 32nd operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 32nd operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Fig. 96(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the 32nd operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 is displayed in the modes shown in Figures 96(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 32nd mode of the character part 414, is 2 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 33rd operation mode.
The 33rd operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "7" decorative pattern 41) raises its right hand in the shape of a "peace." In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 33rd operation mode is performed every three seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 33rd operation mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 97 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 97 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 33rd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 33rd operation mode progresses, the character part 414 makes a "peace" shape with its right hand and extends its right arm towards the right side, as shown in FIG. 97(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 33rd motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its right arm diagonally upward to the right, as shown in FIG. 97(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 33rd motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 stretches its right arm out towards the right side, as shown in FIG. 97(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 33rd operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 97(5), the character part 414 lowers its right arm, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 33rd operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop due to the 33rd operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats displays due to the operation modes shown in Fig. 97(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop due to the 33rd operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 is displayed in the modes shown in Figures 97(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 33rd mode of operation of the character part 414, is 3 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the character part 414 in the 34th operation mode.
The 34th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the character portion 414 of the "7" decorative pattern 41) raises both hands in the shape of a "open paper." In this example, the display of the character portion 414 in the 34th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 3.75 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 34th operating mode, the character part 414 is displayed in the display area shown in Figure 98 (1). In the following, the display area of the character part 414 shown in Figure 98 (1) will be considered to be the initial display area of the character part 414 in the 34th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 34th operation mode progresses, as shown in Figure 98 (2), the character part 414 makes both hands in a "open" shape, extends the left arm to the left, and extends the right arm to the right.
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 34th motion mode progresses further, the character part 414 extends its left arm diagonally upward to the left and its right arm diagonally upward to the right, as shown in FIG. 98 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop in the 34th motion mode progresses further, the character portion 414 extends its left arm toward the left side and its right arm toward the right side, as shown in FIG. 98(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 34th operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 98(5), the character part 414 lowers both arms, causing the display area of the character part 414 to return to the initial display area, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 34th operation mode of the character part 414. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the 34th operation mode continues, the character part 414 repeats the displays in the operation modes shown in Fig. 98(2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the 34th operation mode of the character part 414.
Furthermore, the time for which the character part 414 is displayed in the modes shown in Figures 98(1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stop in the 34th mode of the character part 414, is 3.75 seconds, as described above.

Next, a description will be given of the operation modes when the first character decoration unit 415 is temporarily stopped. The operation modes when the first character decoration unit 415 is temporarily stopped include the 35th operation mode to the 42nd operation mode.
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 35th operation mode.
The 35th operation mode is an operation mode in which the profile of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "1" decorative pattern 41). Also, in this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 35th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.35 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 35th operation mode, as shown in Figure 99 (1), the text A is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in Figure 99 (1) will be considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 35th operation mode progresses, the text "Age: 25" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 99(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 35th operation mode progresses further, the text "Blood type: A" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415, as shown in FIG. 99(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 35th operation mode progresses further, the text "Zodiac: Rat" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 99(4).

99(5) in the first character decoration unit 415, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 35th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. After this, while the temporary stop in the 35th operation mode continues, the displays shown in FIGS. 99(2) to (5) in the first character decoration unit 415 are repeated, and the temporary stop in the 35th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the first character decoration unit 415 in the modes shown in Figures 99 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 35th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415, is 1.35 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode.
The 36th operation mode is an operation mode in which the lines of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "1" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 36th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 2.65 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 36th operation mode, as shown in FIG. 100(1), the text A is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 100(1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 36th operation mode.

Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 36th operation mode progresses, the text A "Gan" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 100(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 36th operation mode progresses further, the text "A: Good luck" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 100(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 36th operation mode progresses further, the text A "Do your best" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 100 (4).

100(5) in the first character decoration unit 415, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 36th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. After this, while the temporary stop in the 36th operation mode continues, the displays shown in FIGS. 100(2) to (5) in the first character decoration unit 415 are repeated, and the temporary stop in the 36th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the first character decoration unit 415 in the modes shown in Figures 100 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 36th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415, is 2.65 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 37th operation mode.
The 37th operation mode is an operation mode in which the profile of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "3" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 37th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.35 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 37th operation mode, as shown in FIG. 101 (1), the text C is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 101 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 37th operation mode progresses, the text "Age: 35" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 101 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 37th operation mode progresses further, the text "Blood type: B" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415, as shown in FIG. 101 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 37th operation mode progresses further, the text "Chinese Zodiac: Ox" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415, as shown in FIG. 101 (4).

101(5) 中的间隔完成。 Further, as the temporary stop due to the 37th operation mode progresses further, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, as shown in Fig. 101(5), thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 37th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. Further, thereafter, while the temporary stop due to the 37th operation mode continues, the displays shown in Fig. 101(2) to (5) in the first character decoration unit 415 are repeated, and the temporary stop due to the 37th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the first character decoration unit 415 in the modes shown in Figures 101 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 37th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415, is 1.35 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 38th operation mode.
The 38th operation mode is an operation mode in which the lines of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "3" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 38th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 2.65 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 38th operating mode, as shown in FIG. 102 (1), the text C is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 102 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 38th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 38th operation mode progresses, the text C "Sleep" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 102 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 38th operation mode progresses further, the text C "Sleeping" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 102 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 38th operation mode progresses further, the text C "Sleepy" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 102 (4).

102(5) 中的间隔完成。 Further, as the temporary stop due to the 38th operation mode progresses further, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, as shown in Fig. 102(5), thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 38th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. Further, thereafter, while the temporary stop due to the 38th operation mode continues, the displays shown in Fig. 102(2) to (5) in the first character decoration unit 415 are repeated, and the temporary stop due to the 38th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the first character decoration unit 415 in the modes shown in Figures 102 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 38th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415, is 2.65 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 39th operation mode.
The 39th operation mode is an operation mode in which the profile of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "4" that is the decorative pattern 41). Also, in this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 39th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.35 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 39th operation mode, as shown in FIG. 103 (1), the text D is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 103 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 39th operation mode progresses, the text "Age: 45" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 103 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 39th operation mode progresses further, the text "Blood type: AB" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415, as shown in FIG. 103 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 39th operation mode progresses further, the text "Chinese Zodiac: Tiger" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 103 (4).

103(5) 。 Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 39th operation mode progresses further, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, as shown in Fig. 103(5), thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 39th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop due to the 39th operation mode continues, the displays shown in Fig. 103(2) to (5) are repeated in the first character decoration unit 415, and the temporary stop due to the 39th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the first character decoration unit 415 in the modes shown in Figures 103 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 39th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415, is 1.35 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 40th operation mode.
The 40th operation mode is an operation mode in which the lines of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "4" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 40th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 2.65 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 40th operation mode, as shown in FIG. 104 (1), the text D is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 104 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 40th operation mode.

Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the fortieth operation mode progresses, the text D "Battle" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 104 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the fortieth operation mode progresses further, the text D "Fight" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 104 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 40th operation mode progresses further, the text D "Let's fight" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 104 (4).

104(5) 中的间隔完成。 Further, as the temporary stop due to the 40th operation mode progresses further, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, as shown in Fig. 104(5), thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 40th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. Further, thereafter, while the temporary stop due to the 40th operation mode continues, the displays shown in Fig. 104(2) to (5) in the first character decoration unit 415 are repeated, and the temporary stop due to the 40th operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the first character decoration unit 415 in the manner shown in Figures 104 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 40th operation manner of the first character decoration unit 415, is 2.65 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 41st operation mode.
The 41st operation mode is an operation mode in which the profile of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 of the "7" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 41st operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.35 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 41st operation mode, as shown in FIG. 105 (1), the text G is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 105 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 41st operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 41st operation mode progresses, the text "Age: 55" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415, as shown in FIG. 105 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 41st operation mode progresses further, the text "Blood type: O" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415, as shown in FIG. 105 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 41st operation mode progresses further, the text "Zodiac: Rabbit" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 105 (4).

105(5) 。 Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 41st operation mode progresses further, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, as shown in Fig. 105(5), thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 41st operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop due to the 41st operation mode continues, the displays shown in Fig. 105(2) to (5) are repeated in the first character decoration unit 415, and the temporary stop due to the 41st operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for the first character decoration unit 415 to display the operation in the manner shown in Figures 105 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 41st operation manner of the first character decoration unit 415, is 1.35 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 42nd operation mode.
The 42nd operation mode is an operation mode in which the lines of the character shown in the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the first character decoration portion 415 in the "7" decorative pattern 41). In this example, the display of the first character decoration portion 415 in the 42nd operation mode is performed at a cycle of 2.65 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 42nd operation mode, as shown in FIG. 106 (1), the text G is displayed in the first character decoration section 415. In the following, the display mode of the first character decoration section 415 shown in FIG. 106 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the first character decoration section 415 in the 42nd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 42nd operation mode progresses, the text "Escape" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 106(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 42nd operation mode progresses further, the text "G" Escape is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 106 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 42nd operation mode progresses further, the text G "Run away" is displayed in the first character decoration section 415 as shown in FIG. 106 (4).

106(5) 中的间隔完成。 Further, as the temporary stop due to the 42nd operation mode progresses further, the display mode of the first character decoration unit 415 returns to the initial display mode, as shown in Fig. 106(5), thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 42nd operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415. Further, thereafter, while the temporary stop due to the 42nd operation mode continues, the displays shown in Fig. 106(2) to (5) in the first character decoration unit 415 are repeated, and the temporary stop due to the 42nd operation mode of the first character decoration unit 415 is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for which the first character decoration unit 415 displays the operation in the manner shown in Figures 106 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 42nd operation manner of the first character decoration unit 415, is 2.65 seconds, as described above.

Note that during the temporary stops in operation modes 35 to 42, the first character decoration part 415 does not move.

Next, a description will be given of the operation modes when the second character decoration unit 416 is temporarily stopped. The operation modes when the second character decoration unit 416 is temporarily stopped include the 43rd operation mode to the 45th operation mode.
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode.
The 43rd operation mode is an operation mode in which the transparency of a target portion (in this example, the second character decoration portion 416) of the decorative pattern 41 changes. In this example, the display of the second character decoration portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode is performed in a 2.5-second cycle.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 43rd operating mode, the second character decoration part 416 is displayed with low transparency, as shown in FIG. 107 (1). In the following, the transparency of the second character decoration part 416 shown in FIG. 107 (1) is assumed to be the initial transparency of the second character decoration part 416 in the 43rd operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 43rd operation mode progresses, the transparency of the second character decoration portion 416 increases, as shown in FIG. 107(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 43rd operation mode progresses further, the transparency of the second character decoration portion 416 becomes even higher, as shown in FIG. 107(3).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 43rd operation mode progresses further, the transparency of the second character decoration portion 416 becomes even higher, as shown in FIG. 107(4).

107(5) , the transparency of the second character decoration unit 416 decreases and returns to the initial transparency, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 43rd operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416. After this, while the temporary stop in the 43rd operation mode continues, the displays shown in FIGS. 107(2) to (5) are repeated in the second character decoration unit 416, and the temporary stop in the 43rd operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for which the second character decoration unit 416 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 107 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 43rd operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416, is 2.5 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 44th operation mode.
The 44th operation mode is an operation mode in which the display color of a target portion (in this example, the second character decoration portion 416) of the decorative pattern 41 changes. In this example, the display of the second character decoration portion 416 in the 44th operation mode is performed in a 4-second cycle.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 44th operating mode, the second character decoration part 416 is displayed in white, as shown in FIG. 108 (1). Below, the display color of the second character decoration part 416 shown in FIG. 108 (1) will be considered to be the initial display color of the second character decoration part 416 in the 44th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 44th operation mode progresses, the second character decoration part 416 is displayed in yellow, as shown in FIG. 108(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 44th operation mode progresses further, the second character decoration part 416 is displayed in yellow-green, as shown in FIG. 108(3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop due to the 44th operation mode progresses further, the second character decoration part 416 is displayed in green, as shown in FIG. 108 (4).

108(5) 中、第二キャラクター飾り处理部416在44动作模式中的显示在白色来返回到初始显示色。 As shown in Fig. 108(5) 中、第二动作模式416的显示处理部416在44动作模式的显示继续处理部416在44动作模式44的显示处理部416在44时的模式44时的显示在此后，第二动作模式416在44时的模式44时的显示继续地处理。 As shown in Fig. 108(5) 2 to 44 when the temporary stop in the 44th operation mode continues, the second character decoration unit 416 in the second character decoration portion 416 in the 44th operation mode of the display of the display unit 416 in this manner repeats, and the second character decoration unit 416 in the 44th operation mode of the second character decoration portion 416 in a temporary stop in this manner repeats periodically.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the second character decoration unit 416 in the modes shown in Figures 108 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 44th operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416, is 4 seconds, as described above.

FIG. 109A is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 45th operation mode.
The 45th operation mode is an operation mode in which an image resembling a wave is displayed in a target portion (in this example, the second character decoration portion 416) of the decorative pattern 41. In this example, the display of the second character decoration portion 416 in the 45th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 3.25 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 45th operation mode, the second character decoration section 416 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 109-1 (1). Below, the display mode of the second character decoration section 416 shown in FIG. 109-1 (1) is considered to be the initial display mode of the second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 45th operation mode progresses, an image resembling waves is displayed on the upper right side of the second character decoration section 416, as shown in FIG. 109-1(2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 45th operation mode progresses further, an image resembling waves is displayed and moves to the left in the second character decoration section 416, as shown in FIG. 109-1(3).

109-1(4), as the temporary stop due to the 45th operation mode progresses further, the image resembling a wave disappears and the second character decoration unit 416 returns to the initial display mode, thereby completing one cycle of display due to the 45th operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop due to the 45th operation mode continues, the displays shown in FIGS. 109-1(2) to (4) are repeated in the second character decoration unit 416, and the temporary stop due to the 45th operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the operation of the second character decoration unit 416 in the modes shown in Figures 109-1 (1) to (4), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 45th operation mode of the second character decoration unit 416, is 3.25 seconds, as described above.

Note that during the temporary stops in operation modes 43 to 45, the second character decoration part 416 does not move.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned 43rd to 45th operation modes are common operation modes regardless of the number displayed as the decorative pattern 41. As an example, the 43rd operation mode by the second character decoration part 416 of the decorative pattern 41 "3" and the 43rd operation mode by the second character decoration part 416 of the decorative pattern 41 "4" are the same operation mode.

Next, a description will be given of the operation modes when the entire decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. The operation modes when the entire decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped include a 46th operation mode and a 47th operation mode.
Figure 109-2 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the 46th operation mode.
The 46th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the entire displayed decorative pattern 41, i.e., the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413) sways downward to the right and upward to the left. In this example, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the 46th operation mode is performed in a cycle of 1.65 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 46th operating mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the position shown in Figure 109-2 (1). Below, the display position of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 109-2 (1) is considered to be the initial position of the decorative pattern 41 in the 46th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 46th operation mode progresses, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the lower right as shown in FIG. 109-2 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 46th operation mode progresses further, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper left side and is located in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 109-2 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 46th operation mode progresses further, the decorative pattern 41 moves further to the upper left as shown in FIG. 109-2 (4).

109-2(5) 。 Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the 46th operation mode progresses further, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the lower right and returns to the initial position, thereby completing one cycle of display in the 46th operation mode of the decorative pattern 41. After this, while the temporary stop in the 46th operation mode continues, the decorative pattern 41 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Figures 109-2(2) to (5), and the temporary stop in the 46th operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the manner shown in Figures 109-2 (1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stopping in the 46th operation manner of the decorative pattern 41, is 1.65 seconds, as described above.

Note that the movement direction of the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 is not the same in the 46th operation mode and the above-mentioned 4th operation mode (see Figure 68). In other words, the 46th operation mode and the 4th operation mode are different operation modes.

Figure 109-3 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping of the entire decorative pattern 41 by the 47th operation mode.
The 47th operation mode is an operation mode in which the target portion of the decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the entire displayed decorative pattern 41, i.e., the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413) sways upward and downward to the right and left. In this example, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.85 seconds.

At the start of the temporary stop in the 47th operating mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the position shown in Figure 109-3 (1). Below, the display position of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 109-3 (1) is considered to be the initial position of the decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 47th operation mode progresses, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper right as shown in FIG. 109-3 (2).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 47th operation mode progresses further, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the lower left side and is located in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 109-3 (3).
Furthermore, when the temporary stop according to the 47th operation mode progresses further, the decorative pattern 41 moves further to the lower left as shown in FIG. 109-3(4).

109-3(5) 。 Furthermore, as the temporary stop by the 47th operation mode progresses further, the decorative pattern 41 moves to the upper right and returns to the initial position, thereby completing one cycle of display by the 47th operation mode of the decorative pattern 41. After this, while the temporary stop by the 47th operation mode continues, the decorative pattern 41 repeats the display by the operation modes shown in Figures 109-3(2) to (5), and the temporary stop by the 47th operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 is periodically performed.
Furthermore, the time for displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the manner shown in Figures 109-3 (1) to (5), that is, the period of temporary stopping in the 47th operation manner of the decorative pattern 41, is 1.85 seconds, as described above.

Note that the temporary stop in which the entire decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion (temporary stop in the 47th motion mode, temporary stop in the 47th motion mode) can also be considered as a temporary stop in which each component of the displayed decorative pattern 41 (in this example, the number portion 411, the first number decorative portion 412, and the second number decorative portion 413) is displayed in a common motion mode.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned 46th and 47th operation modes are common operation modes regardless of the number displayed as the decorative pattern 41. For example, the 46th operation mode with the decorative pattern 41 "3" and the 46th operation mode with the decorative pattern 41 "4" are the same operation mode.

Furthermore, it has been explained that the second operation mode, the fifth to seventh operation modes, the ninth to fifteenth operation modes, and the forty-fifth operation mode include modes in which a specific image (such as an image imitating light, an image of a line, an image imitating a wave, etc.) that is added during a temporary stop is displayed and modes in which it is not displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the second operation mode, the fifth to seventh operation modes, the ninth to fifteenth operation modes, and the forty-fifth operation mode, a specific image (such as an image imitating light, an image of a line, an image imitating a wave, etc.) that is added during the temporary stop may be displayed at all times while the temporary stop is being executed.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stopping by the decorative pattern 41.
As described above, the decorative pattern 41, either as a component or as a whole, is temporarily stopped by the first to forty-seventh operation modes shown in Figures 65 to 109-3. Here, the first to forty-seventh operation modes are all considered to be different operation modes.
Then, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops different components of the decorative pattern 41 simultaneously in different operating modes.

An example will be described in which the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops different components of the decorative pattern 41 simultaneously using different operating modes.
In the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 110 (1), the number section 411 is temporarily stopped in the second operating mode (see Figure 66), the first number decorative section 412 is temporarily stopped in the ninth operating mode (see Figure 73), the second number decorative section 413 is temporarily stopped in the sixteenth operating mode (see Figure 80), the character section 414 is temporarily stopped in the twenty-fourth operating mode (see Figure 88), and the second character decorative section 416 is temporarily stopped in the forty-fourth operating mode (see Figure 108).

In this case, as the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 progresses, as shown in Figure 110 (2), an illuminating image simulating light is displayed at the top of the number section 411, a quadrant arc is formed in the first number decorative section 412, the second number decorative section 413 rotates clockwise, the character section 414 extends its right arm toward the right side, and the second character decorative section 416 is displayed in yellow.
In this way, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop different components of the decorative pattern 41 simultaneously using different operating modes.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the operating mode of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped while a single variable performance is being executed. For example, while a single variable performance is being executed, the number section 411 may temporarily stop in a first operating mode (see FIG. 65), and then temporarily stop in a third operating mode (see FIG. 67).

In this way, the presentation control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 in various operating modes depending on the progress of the presentation. This can increase the excitement of the game by diversifying the presentation using the decorative pattern 41.

In the following, the number section 411, first number decorative section 412, second number decorative section 413, character section 414, first character decorative section 415, and second character decorative section 416 in the left decorative pattern 41 may be referred to as the left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, and left second character decorative section 416, respectively.
In addition, in the following, the number section 411, the first number decorative section 412, the second number decorative section 413, the character section 414, the first character decorative section 415, and the second character decorative section 416 in the right decorative pattern 41 may be referred to as the right number section 411, the right first number decorative section 412, the right second number decorative section 413, the right character section 414, the right first character decorative section 415, and the right second character decorative section 416, respectively.
In addition, in the following, the number section 411, the first number decorative section 412, the second number decorative section 413, the character section 414, the first character decorative section 415, and the second character decorative section 416 in the middle decorative pattern 41 may be referred to as the middle number section 411, the middle first number decorative section 412, the middle second number decorative section 413, the middle character section 414, the middle first character decorative section 415, and the middle second character decorative section 416, respectively.
In addition, in the following, the number section 411, the first number decorative section 412, the second number decorative section 413, the character section 414, the first character decorative section 415, and the second character decorative section 416 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be referred to as the left and right left number section 411, the left and right first number decorative section 412, the left and right second number decorative section 413, the left and right character section 414, the left and right first character decorative section 415, and the left and right second character decorative section 416, respectively.
In addition, in the following, the number section 411, the first number decorative section 412, the second number decorative section 413, the character section 414, the first character decorative section 415, and the second character decorative section 416 in the three decorative patterns may be referred to as the three left number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, the three second number decorative sections 413, the three character sections 414, the three first character decorative sections 415, and the three second character decorative sections 416, respectively.

(Operational aspects of other effect images)
The performance control unit 300 is capable of periodically displaying not only the decorative pattern 41 but also other performance images different from the decorative pattern 41.
Below, we will explain the operation modes of other performance images that are different from the decorative pattern 41.

First, the operation of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 will be described.
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57.
As shown in FIG. 111 ( 1 ), the pseudo-continuous pattern 57 has a character portion 571 and a frame portion 572 .
The text section 571 displays the text "pseudo-repeated" to identify the pseudo-repeated pattern 57.
The frame portion 572 is a frame that surrounds the character portion 571 .
The performance control unit 300 can periodically display the character portion 571 and the frame portion 572 in different operating modes.

The pseudo-repeated pattern 57 has a 48th operation mode and a 49th operation mode. More specifically, the character portion 571 is displayed in the 48th operation mode, and the frame portion 572 is displayed in the 49th operation mode.
111 is an operation mode in which the target image (in this example, the character portion 571) is enlarged and then reduced. In this example, the display of the character portion 571 in the 48th operation mode is performed in a cycle of 2.15 seconds.

At the start of operation in the 48th operating mode, the character section 571 is displayed at the size shown in Figure 111 (2). In the following, the display size of the character section 571 shown in Figure 111 (2) will be considered to be the initial display size of the character section 571 in the 48th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the operation according to the 48th operation mode progresses, the character portion 571 is displayed in an enlarged manner, as shown in FIG. 111(3).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the 48th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 571 is displayed in a further enlarged scale, as shown in FIG. 111(4).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the 48th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 571 is displayed in a reduced size as shown in FIG. 111(5).

111(6) 。 As the operation according to the 48th operation mode progresses further, the character portion 571 is further reduced in size and returns to its initial display size, thereby completing one display cycle according to the 48th operation mode of the character portion 571. After this, while the display according to the 48th operation mode of the character portion 571 continues, the character portion 571 repeats the display according to the operation modes shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, the time for which the character section 571 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 111(2) to (6), that is, the period of display in the 48th operation mode of the character section 571, is 2.15 seconds, as described above.

Figure 112 is a diagram showing an example of the 49th operating mode of the frame portion 572 in the pseudo-continuous pattern 57.
The 49th operation mode is an operation mode in which the outer shape (shape) of the target image (in this example, frame portion 572) changes (deforms). In this example, the display of frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 1.05 seconds.

At the start of operation in the 49th operation mode, the frame portion 572 is displayed in the shape shown in FIG. 112 (1). Below, the shape of the frame portion 572 shown in FIG. 112 (1) is considered to be the initial shape of the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode.

Furthermore, as the operation according to the forty-ninth operation mode progresses, the shape of the frame portion 572 changes to a sawtooth shape, as shown in FIG. 112(2).
112(3), as the operation according to the 49th operation mode progresses further, the shape of frame portion 572 changes to a curved line and returns to its initial shape, thereby completing one display cycle according to the 49th operation mode of frame portion 572. Thereafter, while the display according to the 49th operation mode of frame portion 572 continues, frame portion 572 repeats the displays according to the operation modes shown in FIGS.
The time for which the frame 572 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 112(1) to (3), that is, the period of display in the 49th operation mode of the frame 572, is 1.05 seconds, as described above.

Next, the operation of the zone symbol 58 will be described.
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode of the zone pattern 58.
As shown in FIG. 113 ( 1 ), the zone design 58 has a character portion 581 and a frame portion 582 .
The text section 581 displays the word "ZONE" to identify the zone design 58.
The frame portion 582 is a frame that surrounds the character portion 581 .
The performance control unit 300 can periodically display the character portion 581 and the frame portion 582 in different operating modes.

The zone design 58 has a 50th operation mode and a 51st operation mode. More specifically, the character portion 581 is displayed in the 50th operation mode, and the frame portion 582 is displayed in the 51st operation mode.
113 is an operation mode in which the characters displayed in the target image (in this example, character portion 581) are switched. In this example, the display of character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode is performed at a cycle of 0.4 seconds.

At the start of operation in the 50th operating mode, the text "ZONE" is displayed in the text section 581, as shown in FIG. 113 (2). Below, the display mode of the text section 581 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is considered to be the initial display mode of the text section 581 in the 50th operating mode.

Furthermore, as the operation according to the 50th operation mode progresses, the text "NE" disappears in the character portion 581, and the displayed text switches to "ZO", as shown in FIG. 113(3).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the 50th operation mode progresses further, as shown in FIG. 113 (4), the text "ZO" becomes hidden in the character section 581 and the text "NE" is displayed, thereby switching the displayed text to "NE."

113(5), as the operation according to the 50th operation mode progresses further, the text "ZO" is added to the character section 581, and the character section 581 returns to its initial display mode, thereby completing one cycle of display according to the 50th operation mode of the character section 581. Thereafter, while the display according to the 50th operation mode of the character section 581 continues, the character section 581 repeats the displays according to the operation modes shown in FIG. 113(3) to (5), and thus the display according to the 50th operation mode of the character section 581 is performed periodically.
The time for which the character section 581 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 113(2) to (5), that is, the period of display in the 50th operation mode of the character section 581, is 0.4 seconds, as described above.

Figure 114 is a diagram showing an example of the 51st operating mode of the frame portion 582 in the zone pattern 58.
The 51st operation mode is an operation mode in which the target image (in this example, the frame portion 582) flashes. In this example, the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode is performed in a cycle of 2.3 seconds.

At the start of the operation in the fifty-first operation mode, the inside of the frame portion 582 is darkened as shown in FIG. 114(1).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the fifty-first operation mode progresses, the inside of the frame portion 582 becomes brighter, as shown in FIG. 114(2).
114(3), as the operation according to the 51st operation mode progresses further, the inside of frame 582 goes dark again, thereby completing one cycle of display according to the 51st operation mode of frame 582. After this, while the display according to the 51st operation mode of frame 582 continues, frame 582 repeats the displays according to the operation modes shown in FIGS.
The time for which the frame 582 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 114(1) to 114(3), that is, the period of the display in the 51st operation mode of the frame 582, is 2.3 seconds, as described above.
In the fifty-first operation mode, the frame portion 582 is not displayed in a moving manner.

Next, the operation of the zone execution image 59 will be described.
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode of the zone execution image 59.
As shown in FIG. 115 ( 1 ), the zone execution image 59 has a band portion 591 and a decorative portion 592 .
The band portion 591 is formed in a band shape extending in the left-right direction. In the illustrated example, the band portion 591 displays the text "X Zone" that identifies the zone effect and marks arranged in the order "◯△□◇".
The decorative portion 592 is a portion that decorates the belt portion 591. The decorative portion 592 can also be considered as an emphasizing portion that emphasizes the belt portion 591. In the illustrated example, the decorative portion 592 is a lightning bolt mark.
The performance control unit 300 can periodically display the belt portion 591 and the decorative portion 592 in different operating modes.

The zone execution image 59 has a 52nd operation mode and a 53rd operation mode. More specifically, the band portion 591 is displayed in the 52nd operation mode, and the decorative portion 592 is displayed in the 53rd operation mode.
115 is an operation mode in which the mark on the target image (in this example, band 591) is scrolled horizontally (to the right). In this example, the display of band 591 in the 52nd operation mode is performed in a 5.5-second cycle.

At the start of operation in the 52nd operation mode, the marks on band 591 are arranged in the order "circle, triangle, square, and ◇" as shown in Figure 115 (2). Below, the display mode of band 591 shown in Figure 115 (2) will be considered the initial display mode of band 591 in the 52nd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the operation according to the 52nd operation mode progresses, the marks on the band portion 591 scroll and are arranged in the order of "◇〇△□" as shown in FIG. 115(3).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the 52nd operation mode progresses further, the marks on the band portion 591 scroll further and are arranged in the order "□◇〇△", as shown in FIG. 115(4).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the 52nd operation mode progresses further, the marks on the band portion 591 scroll further and are arranged in the order "△□◇◯", as shown in FIG. 115(5).

115(6), as the operation according to the 52nd operation mode progresses further, the marks on the band 591 scroll further and the display mode of the band 591 returns to the initial display mode, thereby completing one cycle of display according to the 52nd operation mode of the band 591. After this, while the display according to the 52nd operation mode of the band 591 continues, the band 591 repeats the displays according to the operation modes shown in FIGS.
The time for which the band 591 displays the operation in the modes shown in Figures 115(2) to (6), that is, the period of the display in the 52nd operation mode of the band 591, is 5.5 seconds, as described above.
In the fifty-second operation mode, the band portion 591 is not displayed in a moving manner.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of the 53rd operation mode of the decoration part 592 in the zone execution image 59.
The 53rd operation mode is an operation mode in which the display position of the target image (in this example, the decorative portion 592) is switched. In this example, the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode is performed in a cycle of 1.15 seconds.

At the start of operation in the 53rd operation mode, the decorative part 592 is displayed in the position shown in Figure 116 (1). In the following, the display position of the decorative part 592 shown in Figure 116 (1) will be considered to be the initial position of the decorative part 592 in the 53rd operation mode.

Furthermore, as the operation according to the fifty-third operation mode progresses, the display position of the decorative portion 592 switches to the right of the initial position and below the band portion 591, as shown in FIG. 116(2).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the fifty-third operation mode progresses further, the display position of the decorative portion 592 switches further to the right, above the band portion 591, as shown in FIG. 116 (3).
Furthermore, as the operation according to the fifty-third operation mode progresses further, the display position of the decorative portion 592 switches further to the right, below the band portion 591, as shown in FIG. 116(4).

116(5) 。 Furthermore, as the operation of the 53rd operation mode progresses further, the display position of the decorative part 592 switches to the initial position, thereby completing one cycle of display of the decorative part 592 in the 53rd operation mode. After this, while the display of the decorative part 592 in the 53rd operation mode continues, the decorative part 592 repeats the display in the operation modes shown in Figures 116(2) to (5), and the display of the decorative part 592 in the 53rd operation mode is performed periodically.
Furthermore, the time for which the decorative part 592 displays its operation in the modes shown in Figures 116(1) to (5), i.e., the period of display in the 53rd operation mode of the decorative part 592, is 1.15 seconds, as described above.

Next, the operation of the stage image 61 will be described.
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of the operation mode of the stage image 61.
As shown in FIG. 117(1), the stage image 61 is displayed on the entirety of one layer in the image display section 114.

The stage image 61 is an image that is played in a loop. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (2), an image within a partial area (selection area 611) of the overall stage image 610, which is drawn in a horizontally extending band, is rendered as the stage image 61. The selection area 611 then moves along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the overall background image 610 over time (see the arrow in the figure). Therefore, the stage image 61 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes over time, and the same image is repeated at regular intervals. That is, the stage image 61 is periodically displayed in motion. Here, the motion mode of the stage image 61 is different from any of the motion modes (the first to forty-seventh motion modes) that are possible with the decorative pattern 41.
In this example, the period of the motion display of the stage image 61 is longer than the period of the temporary stop due to any motion mode of the decorative pattern 41. The period of the motion display of the stage image 61 is, for example, 30 seconds.

(Example of variation 1)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 118, a specific description will be given of a variable presentation (variable presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 1 is a random miss variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effect shown in Figure 118 is a variable effect that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 1 to change presentation example 13 described below is a change presentation example when the change starts in the first stage.

As shown in Figure 118 (1), when the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, the highly decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, and stage image 61. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first presentation mode). The first stage is the presentation mode in the normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first start gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second start gate 122.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (2), a change effect begins with the start of the change display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. At this time, a start-up motion effect is also performed. The start-up motion effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 41 moves when the change effect starts. In the illustrated example, as the start-up motion effect, three decorative symbols 41 are displayed moving upward. In addition, the change of the small symbol 56 begins. Here, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 each change by repeatedly displaying the numbers "1" to "9" in order. In other words, the numbers of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 can be changed individually. Note that the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. At this time, a change background music (BGM), which is a performance sound corresponding to the change effect currently being performed, is output from the speaker 156. Although not shown in the figures, in each of the variable performance examples described below, variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, unless otherwise specified.
The decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 may each periodically repeat the display (variable display) of the numbers "1" to "9." In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed variably, for example, at a cycle of 0.3 seconds, regardless of the stage. The small pattern 56 is displayed variably, for example, at a cycle of 0.25 seconds, regardless of the stage. However, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 may be displayed variably at the same cycle.

Next, as shown in Fig. 118(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner. In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a particularly rapidly changing manner (scrolling) and are difficult or impossible to see, the target patterns (decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56) are displayed with arrows for easy understanding.
Next, as shown in Figure 118 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop-time action effect is performed. The stop-time action effect is an effect that occurs when the decorative pattern 41 stops. In the example shown, the stop-time action effect is an enlarged display of the left decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 118(5), the stop action effect of the left decorative pattern 41 ends, and the left decorative pattern 41 is reduced to the display size during the variable stop (see Fig. 118(1)) and starts to be temporarily stopped. Also, the right decorative pattern 41, "4", stops, and the stop action effect of the right decorative pattern 41 is performed.
In addition, when it is shown in the drawings that a part or the whole (at least a part) of the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, for ease of understanding, a mark similar to a double quotation mark is used around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41. In other words, in the drawings, at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 that is surrounded by a mark similar to a double quotation mark is temporarily stopped.

118(6), the stop action effect of the right decorative symbol 41 ends, the right decorative symbol 41 is reduced to the display size during the variable stop, and a temporary stop is initiated. In addition, the center decorative symbol 41, "1," stops, and the stop action effect of the center decorative symbol 41 is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (7), the stop operation performance of the middle decorative pattern 41 ends, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is reduced in size to the display size during the variable stop and begins to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 118 (8), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as the special symbols are displayed. This decorative symbol 41 combination "314" is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a loser. Furthermore, as the special symbols stop changing, three small symbols 56 also stop and are fixed. In other words, in this changing effect, all small symbols 56 stop and are fixed without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56 "314" matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, as the changing effect ends, the changing image 51 is erased (displayed).

Here, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 differs when it is being displayed in a rapidly changing manner (see FIG. 118(3)) and when it is not being displayed in a rapidly changing manner (see FIGS. 118(1), (2), (6) to (8)). More specifically, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 is higher when it is being displayed in a rapidly changing manner than when it is not being displayed in a rapidly changing manner. Therefore, the transparency of the three decorative patterns 41 increases at the same time (see FIG. 118(3)), and the transparency decreases in the order of the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the center decorative pattern 41 (see FIGS. 118(4) to (6)). However, the transparency of the three decorative patterns 41 may increase in the order of the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the center decorative pattern 41 as the rapid changing display begins.
In addition, the decorative pattern 41 has the same transparency before it is displayed changing at high speed (at the start of the changing performance (see Figure 118 (1)), while the start-up action performance is being executed (see Figure 118 (2))) and after it is displayed changing at high speed (when it is displayed changing at low speed, while the stop-time action performance is being executed, during temporary stop, and during final stop).
Furthermore, the transparency of the small pattern 56 is the same when it is displayed in a rapidly changing manner (see Figures 118(2) to (7)) and when it is not displayed in a rapidly changing manner (see Figures 118(1) and (8)). In other words, the transparency of the small pattern 56 is constant regardless of whether it is displayed in a changing manner or not. More specifically, the transparency of the small pattern 56 does not change while it is displayed.

Furthermore, when the small pattern 56 is being displayed in a changing manner, two numbers (e.g., the numbers "3" and "4") that are consecutive in the order of display may be displayed overlapping each other. In this case, of the two numbers that overlap as the small pattern 56, the number that is displayed earlier in the order of display (e.g., the number "3") has a higher display priority than the number that is displayed later in the order of display (e.g., the number "4"). Then, over time, the transparency of the number with the higher display priority (e.g., the number "3") may increase, while the transparency of the number with the lower display priority (e.g., the number "4") may decrease, thereby realizing the changing display of the small pattern 56. In other words, the transparency of the small pattern 56 may change while it is being displayed in a changing manner. Even in this case, the transparency of the small pattern 56 does not change when a changing performance is not being performed.

Figure 119 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variable performance example 1.
Figure 119 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65), the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode (see FIG. 90), and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode (see FIG. 107) begin. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode (see FIG. 93), and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the middle character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode (see FIG. 87), and the display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display in the first operation mode of the left number section 411, the display in the 26th operation mode of the left character section 414, the display in the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416, the display in the first operation mode of the right number section 411, the display in the 29th operation mode of the right character section 414, the display in the 43rd operation mode of the right second character decoration section 416, the display in the first operation mode of the middle number section 411, the display in the 23rd operation mode of the middle character section 414, and the display in the 43rd operation mode of the middle second character decoration section 416 end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the right character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 29th operation mode, while the right second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode. In other words, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right second character decoration section 416 displays for less than one cycle in the 43rd operation mode.
In variation performance example 1, the right decorative pattern 41 starts the temporary stop later than the left decorative pattern 41, but ends the temporary stop at the same timing as the left decorative pattern 41, so the temporary stop execution time is shorter than that of the left decorative pattern 41. Also, the display cycle (2.5 seconds) in the 43rd operation mode is shorter than the display cycle (1 second) in the first operation mode and the display cycle (2 seconds) in the 29th operation mode. Therefore, during the temporary stop period of the right decorative pattern 41, the right number portion 411 and the right character portion 414 are periodically displayed, while the right second character decorative portion 416 is not periodically displayed.

In addition, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the middle number section 411 displays less than one cycle in the first operating mode, the middle character section 414 displays less than one cycle in the 23rd operating mode, and the middle second character decoration section 416 displays less than one cycle in the 43rd operating mode.
In the variation performance example 1, the timing at which the middle decorative pattern 41 starts the temporary stop is later than that of the right decorative pattern 41, but the temporary stop ends at the same timing as that of the right decorative pattern 41, so the execution time of the temporary stop is shorter than that of the right decorative pattern 41. Therefore, during the temporary stop period of the middle decorative pattern 41, no periodic operation display is performed in any of the middle number portion 411, the middle character portion 414, and the middle second character decorative portion 416.

Note that "period 0" shown in the drawing means that the temporary stop was performed periodically (the display was performed for one or more periods due to the temporary stop), and "period x" shown in the drawing means that the temporary stop was not performed periodically (the display was performed for less than one period due to the temporary stop).
Furthermore, the fact that the components of the decorative pattern 41 are not shown in the drawing means that these components are not temporarily stopped. That is, in the variation performance example 1, even during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, the first number decoration part 412, the second number decoration part 413, and the first character decoration part 415 are stationary without being temporarily stopped.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number portion 411) showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., character portion 414) displayed behind the first image, and is capable of displaying the first image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 65), and is capable of displaying the second image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 90) that is different from the first cycle.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the first image and the second image are displayed in motion at the same cycle, it is easier for the player to distinguish between the first image and the second image, and it is easier for the player to recognize both the motion display of the first image and the motion display of the second image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number portion 411) showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., character portion 414) displayed behind the first image, and is capable of periodically displaying the first image in at least a first operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 65), and is capable of periodically displaying the second image in at least a second operating mode different from the first operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 90).
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the first image and the second image are displayed in the same operating mode, it is easier for the player to distinguish between the first image and the second image, and it is easier for the player to recognize both the operating display of the first image and the operating display of the second image, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 90), and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 93), and the performance symbols include a first performance symbol that can be stopped at a predetermined timing in the variable performance (for example, left decorative symbol 41), and a second performance symbol that can be stopped at a timing different from the first performance symbol in the variable performance (for example, right decorative symbol 41).The performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode, and can display the second performance symbol at least in the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the presentation using presentation patterns according to the progress of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 90), and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 93).The performance symbols include a first performance pattern having a first number (for example, "3") and a second performance pattern having a second number that is different from the first number, and during the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode (for example, the first stage), the first performance pattern can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and the second performance pattern can be displayed at least by the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects according to the effect patterns with different numbers, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the first part of the decorative pattern 41 (e.g., the number part 411) while the variable performance is being executed, and can restrict the temporary stopping of the second part of the decorative pattern 41 (e.g., the first number decorative part 412).
In this case, the degree of emphasis can be varied depending on the components of the decorative pattern 41.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 2) will be described with reference to Fig. 120. Variable presentation example 2 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 2 is a random miss variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "2".
The variable effect shown in Figure 120 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned Variable Presentation Example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as Variable Presentation Example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 120 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."

Next, as shown in Fig. 120 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 120 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 120(5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 120(6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the center decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and a motion effect is performed when the center decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(7), the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 120(8), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 121 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation presentation example 2.
Figure 121 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 2.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the middle character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 121 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, while the right character section 414 does not display for one or more cycles in the 29th operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.
The period from time T2 to time T4 in variation presentation example 2 is shorter than the period from time T2 (see FIG. 119) to time T4 in variation presentation example 1. In other words, in variation presentation example 2, the temporary stop period of right decorative pattern 41 is shorter than in variation presentation example 1. Also, the display period (2 seconds) of right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode is shorter than the display period (1 second) of right number section 411 in the 1st operation mode. Therefore, during the temporary stop period of right decorative pattern 41, the periodic operation display of right number section 411 is performed, while the periodic operation display of right character section 414 is not performed.

Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the middle number section 411 displays less than one cycle in the first operating mode, the middle character section 414 displays less than one cycle in the 23rd operating mode, and the middle second character decoration section 416 displays less than one cycle in the 43rd operating mode.

In addition, in variation performance example 2, the temporary stop time of the left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left character portion 414, left second character decorative portion 416) may be shorter than in variation performance example 1. Furthermore, in variation performance example 2 and variation performance example 1, the temporary stop time of the left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left character portion 414, left second character decorative portion 416) may be the same.
In addition, in variation presentation example 2, the temporary stop time of the middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle character portion 414, middle second character decoration portion 416) may be shorter than in variation presentation example 1. In addition, in variation presentation example 2 and variation presentation example 1, the temporary stop time of the middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle character portion 414, middle second character decoration portion 416) may be the same.

(Variation example 3)
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 3) will be described with reference to Fig. 122. Variable effect example 3 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 3 is a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start hole 121 being "3".
The variable effect shown in Figure 122 is a variable effect that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 122 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, three reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "3."

Next, as shown in Fig. 122 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 122 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 122 (5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 122 (6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the center decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and a motion effect is performed when the center decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(7), the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(8), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 123 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation presentation example 3.
Figure 123 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 3.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 122 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 122 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the middle character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 122 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 122 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, and the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, while the left second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.
The period from time T1 to time T4 in variation presentation example 3 is shorter than the period from time T1 (see FIG. 121) to time T4 in variation presentation example 2. In other words, in variation presentation example 3, the temporary stop period of left decorative pattern 41 is shorter than in variation presentation example 2. Also, the display period (2.5 seconds) of left second character decorative portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode is shorter than the display period (1 second) of the operation mode of left number portion 411 and the display period (2 seconds) of left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode. Therefore, during the temporary stop period of left decorative pattern 41, the periodic operation display of left number portion 411 and the periodic operation display of left character portion 414 are performed, while the periodic operation display of left second character decorative portion 416 is not performed.

In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right number section 411 displays less than one cycle in the first operating mode, the right character section 414 displays less than one cycle in the 26th operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 displays less than one cycle in the 43rd operating mode.
The period from time T2 to time T4 in variation presentation example 3 is shorter than the period from time T2 (see FIG. 121) to time T4 in variation presentation example 2. In other words, in variation presentation example 3, the temporary stop period of right decorative pattern 41 is shorter than in variation presentation example 2. Therefore, during the temporary stop period of right decorative pattern 41, no periodic operation display is performed in any of right number section 411, right character section 414, and right second character decorative section 416.

In addition, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the middle number section 411 displays less than one cycle in the first operating mode, the middle character section 414 displays less than one cycle in the 23rd operating mode, and the middle second character decoration section 416 displays less than one cycle in the 43rd operating mode.
In addition, in the variation performance example 3, the temporary stop time of the middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle character portion 414, middle second character decoration portion 416) may be shorter than in the variation performance example 2. In addition, in the variation performance example 3 and the variation performance example 2, the temporary stop time of the middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle character portion 414, middle second character decoration portion 416) may be the same.

(Variation example 4)
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 4) will be described with reference to Fig. 124. Variable presentation example 4 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 4 is a random miss variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "4".
The variable effect shown in Figure 124 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 124 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."

Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the four reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 124 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 "314" stop, and a stop-time action effect is performed. That is, a stop-time action effect is performed by each of the three decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314," are fixed and stopped with the special symbol stop display. That is, all three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, can execute specific variable performances in which specific performances are not executed while variable performances are being executed, and can limit the display of the stopped performance symbols for one cycle or more while specific variable performances are being executed. Examples of specific variable performances include reach stimulation performances, normal reach performances, pseudo consecutive stimulation performances, pseudo consecutive performances, zone stimulation performances, zone performances, role-playing performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances, button operation performances, performances in which double-digit decorative symbols 41 are stopped, etc. Examples of specific variable performances include random miss fluctuation performances, etc.
In this case, in the case of specific variable presentations, by preventing the player from focusing too much on the presentation patterns, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the player focusing on the presentation patterns even in variable presentations in which specific presentations are not executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the variable performance includes a first variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in Figure 124) and a second variable performance different from the first variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in Figure 118), and the performance control unit 300 can limit the operation display of the stopped performance pattern for at least one cycle or more during the execution of the first variable performance, and can execute the operation display of the stopped performance pattern for at least one cycle or more during the execution of the second variable performance.
In this case, the player can pay attention to whether or not the periodic movement display of the performance pattern is performed depending on the variable performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, while a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles in any of the parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, the player can easily recognize the operation display of each part of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped without missing it.
In addition, while the performance control unit 300 is executing a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), if it is possible to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles in any of the parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416), there may be parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped where a temporary stop is not executed for one or more cycles.

In addition, while a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles in any of the parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, the player can easily recognize the temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 41 without missing it.

In addition, during execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for one cycle or more in any of the parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too much on the parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped, and thereby failing to recognize other effects.

In addition, during execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for more than one cycle in any of the parts of the middle decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, the variable effect can be prevented from becoming redundant in order to ensure the temporary stopping time of the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop on at least a portion of the middle decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, character portion 414, second character decorative portion 416) while a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1").
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the provisional stop and the definite stop of the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 increases the number of parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416) that restrict temporary stopping for more than one cycle when a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a second specific number (e.g., "2") that is greater than the first specific number, compared to when a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a first specific number (e.g., "1").
In this case, it is possible to diversify the presentation using the right decorative pattern 41 according to the number of reserved balls.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop on at least a portion of the left decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, character portion 414, second character decorative portion 416) while a variable performance is being executed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "3").
In this case, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41.

In addition, during execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "3"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for more than one cycle in any of the parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, in order to ensure the temporary stop time of the right decorative pattern 41, it is possible to prevent the variable presentation based on the reserved number being a specific number from becoming redundant.

In addition, during the execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "4"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for more than one cycle in any of the parts of the three decorative patterns 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, in order to ensure the temporary stopping time of the three decorative patterns 41, it is possible to prevent the variable presentation based on the reserved number being a specific number from becoming redundant.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop on at least some of the three decorative patterns 41 (number section 411, character section 414, second character decorative section 416) while a variable performance is being executed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "4").
In this case, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the temporary stop of one of the decorative symbols 41.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 107). During execution of a variable effect based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "3"), the effect control unit 300 can at least execute a display of one or more cycles by the first operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (periodic operation display), and a display of less than one cycle by the second operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (non-periodic operation display) (see FIG. 121, etc.).
In this case, the variable presentation based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number can both make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in motion and prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the display of the decorative pattern 41 in motion.

The operational modes of the effect patterns include a first operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 65) that can be repeated by a first part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, and a second operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 107) that can be repeated by a second part (for example, the second character decorative part 416) that is different from the first part of the decorative pattern 41. During the execution of a specific effect during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can at least execute a display of one cycle or more by the first operational mode of the first part (periodic operational display) and a display of less than one cycle by the second operational mode of the second part (non-periodic operational display) (see FIG. 121, etc.).
In this case, the variable presentation based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number can both make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in motion and prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the display of the decorative pattern 41 in motion.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 4)
In the above example, it was explained that in the scattered miss variable presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved winnings for the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is "4", the decorative pattern 41 stops fixedly without stopping temporarily (see Figure 124 (4) and (5)), but this is not limited to this.
Figure 125 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 4.
125 is a variation of the variation presentation example 4 based on the game ball entering the first start hole 121 in the normal game state. Also, the variation of the variation presentation example 4 is a random miss variation presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start hole 121 being "4".
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 125 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."

Next, as shown in Figure 125 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the four reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 125(4), the three decorative symbols 41 "314" stop, and a stop-time action effect is performed. That is, a stop-time action effect is performed by each of the three decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(5), the three decorative symbols 41 begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(6), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 126 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in a modified example of variation presentation example 4.
Figure 126 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in a modified example of variable performance example 4.

First, at time T1, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the three left second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operating mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operating mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operating mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operating mode are started.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 125 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three left second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode all end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 125 (6) begins.
Here, in the period from time T1 to time T2, the three number sections 411 display less than one cycle in the first operation mode, the three left second character decoration sections 416 display less than one cycle in the 43rd operation mode, the left character section 414 display less than one cycle in the 26th operation mode, the right character section 414 display less than one cycle in the 29th operation mode, and the center character section 414 display less than one cycle in the 23rd operation mode. That is, in the modified example of variation performance example 4, no periodic display of temporary stops (operation display of one cycle or more) is performed in any of the three decorative patterns 41.

As described above, during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop for less than one cycle on any of the parts of the three decorative patterns 41 that can be temporarily stopped (number part 411, character part 414, second character decorative part 416).
In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, while preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the three decorative patterns 41.

(Variation example 5)
127 and 128 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 5) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 127 to 128. Variation presentation example 5 is an example of a reach-miss variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, variable performance example 5 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 127 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."

Next, as shown in Fig. 127 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 127 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

127(5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "3", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 127(6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, and a ready state is established.

Next, when the reach effect begins, a reach line image 501 is displayed, as shown in Figure 127 (7). At this time, a reach action effect is also performed. The reach action effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern 41 moves when the reach effect begins. In the example shown, in the reach action effect, the left and right number portions 411 and the left and right character portions 414 move so as to tilt clockwise in the figure. On the other hand, no reach action effect is performed using the left and right first number decorative portions 412, the left and right second number decorative portions 413, the left and right first character decorative portions 415, and the left and right second character decorative portions 416.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (8), the reach-time action effect causes the left and right number portions 411 and the left and right character portions 414 to move in a counterclockwise direction in the figure. At this time, a separation effect is also performed. The separation effect is an effect in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 move away from each other. In the illustrated example, in the separation effect, the left decorative symbol 41 moves to the left, and the right decorative symbol 41 moves to the right.
The reach-time action effect shown in Fig. 127(8) may be an effect included in the distance effect. Also, the distance effect shown in Fig. 127(8) may be an effect included in the reach-time action effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 128 (9), when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are separated, the reach action presentation ends and the left and right number sections 411 and the left and right character sections 414 no longer tilt.
Next, as shown in Figure 128 (10), the middle decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 128 (11), a proximity effect is performed. The proximity effect is an effect in which the left and right decorative patterns 41 move closer to each other. In the example shown, during the proximity effect, the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the right, and the right decorative pattern 41 moves to the left. Also, at this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (12), the proximity effect ends, and the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the display positions at the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 127 (6)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (13), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 129 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5.
Figure 129 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, display of the right number section 411 in the first operating mode, display of the right character section 414 in the 26th operating mode, and display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operating mode are started.
Also, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (6) begins.

In addition, during the period from time T1 to time T2, i.e., the period from when the left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop until the reach effect begins, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, while the left second character decorative section 416 does not display one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode are completed. Also, at this time, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the 9th operation mode (see FIG. 73), the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the 16th operation mode (see FIG. 80), and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 44th operation mode (see FIG. 108) are started.
Also, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the right number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, while the right character section 414 does not display for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the left and right number sections 411 begin to display in the second operation mode (see Figure 66), and the left and right character sections 414 begin to display in the 27th operation mode (see Figure 91). Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, display of the middle number section 411 in the second operating mode, display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operating mode, display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, display of the middle character section 414 in the thirtieth operating mode (see Figure 94), and display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the forty-fourth operating mode are started.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the forty-fourth operating mode, the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the twenty-seventh operating mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the thirtyth operating mode end.
Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, and the left and right character sections 414 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 27th operation mode.
In addition, during the period from time T3 to time T6, one or more cycles of display are performed using the 9th operating mode of the left and right first number decoration parts 412, one or more cycles of display are performed using the 16th operating mode of the left and right second number decoration parts 413, and one or more cycles of display are performed using the 44th operating mode of the left and right second character decoration parts 416.
Furthermore, in the period from time T5 to time T6, in the second operating mode of the middle number section 411, the ninth operating mode of the middle first number decoration section 412, the sixteenth operating mode of the middle second number decoration section 413, the thirtieth operating mode of the middle character section 414, and the forty-fourth operating mode of the middle second character decoration section 416, no display is performed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in an operating mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second), and can display the performance pattern in an operating mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 0.8 seconds) that is different from the first cycle.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the cycle of displaying the effect symbols by the repeatable operation modes is a single cycle, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice both the display by the operation mode repeatable in the first cycle and the display by the operation mode repeatable in the second cycle. Also, because the displays by each operation mode are both performed periodically, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the displays by each operation mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of periodically displaying the performance pattern in a first operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 65), and is capable of periodically displaying the performance pattern in a second operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 66) that is different from the first operating mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the operation mode of the effect symbols that can be displayed periodically is a single operation mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice both the display by the first operation mode of the effect symbols and the display by the second operation mode. Also, since the display by the first operation mode of the effect symbols and the display by the second operation mode of the effect symbols are both performed periodically, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display by the first operation mode of the effect symbols and the display by the second operation mode of the effect symbols, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the performance pattern in a specific operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 65) at a specific timing (for example, before the start of the reach performance) during the execution of a specific variable performance (for example, a reach variable performance), and is capable of restricting the display of the performance pattern in a specific operation mode at a predetermined timing after the specific timing during the execution of the specific variable performance (for example, during the execution of the reach-time operation performance).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the performance symbols at specific timing. Also, at a predetermined timing, by suppressing the performance symbols from excessively drawing the player's attention, it is possible to emphasize a performance that is different from the display of the performance symbols, which makes it possible to diversify the performance according to the progress of the variable performance, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.
In the above example, while the reach-time action presentation is being executed, at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the left first number decorative portion 412, etc.) is temporarily stopped, but this is not limiting. While the reach-time action presentation is being executed, the temporary stop of any part of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 91) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 94) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (for example, left decorative symbol 41) that can be stopped at a predetermined timing in the variable performance, and a second performance symbol (for example, center decorative symbol 41) that can be stopped at a timing different from the first performance symbol in the variable performance. Then, the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode, and the second performance symbol at least in the second operation mode, after the start of a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed. Specific effects include an effect that stops the left decorative pattern 41, a reach stimulation effect, a normal reach effect, a pseudo consecutive stimulation effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a zone stimulation effect, a zone effect, a role effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a button operation effect, an effect that stops the decorative pattern 41 of a losing number, etc.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the presentation using presentation patterns according to the progress of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the variable performances include a first variable performance in which specific performances are not executed while variable performances are being executed, and a second variable performance in which specific performances are executed while variable performances are being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 65) and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 66), and the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (for example, left decorative symbol 41) and a second performance symbol (for example, right decorative symbol 41) that can be stopped after the first performance symbol stops in the variable performance. The performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol in at least the first operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during execution of the first variable performance, and can display the first performance symbol in at least the second operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during execution of the second variable performance. The specific effects include a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, an effect in which a decorative pattern 41 of a missing number is displayed, an effect in which a decorative pattern 41 of a double number is displayed, and the like.
In this case, the player can pay attention to which operation mode the first performance pattern will be displayed in for each variable performance after the second performance pattern stops, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop of at least a portion of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number portion 411) for one or more cycles before the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.
In this case, before the player focuses on the right decorative pattern 41, the player can be made aware of the series of action displays when the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may prevent temporary stops of any part of the left decorative pattern 41 from occurring for more than one cycle before the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, while the random miss variable performance is being executed (whether the random miss variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being "1,""2,""3," or "4").
In this case, the way in which the left decorative pattern 41 is focused on until the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops can be made different between the scattered miss variation presentation and the reach variation presentation.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can limit the temporary stopping of at least a part of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the left second character decorative unit 416) for one cycle or more before the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 41 due to excessive attention being paid to the left decorative pattern 41 by the player.

In addition, during the execution of the reach variation presentation, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of at least a part of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) for one or more cycles before the start of the reach operation presentation.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the series of action displays when the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped before the player focuses on the reach-time action presentation.

In particular, during the execution of the reach variation presentation, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of at least a part of the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) for one or more cycles before the start of the reach operation presentation.
In this case, the player can be made to recognize the series of action displays of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the player focuses on the reach-time action presentation, making it easier for the player to recognize the flow of presentation from the start of the variable presentation to the start of the reach-time action presentation.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the left first number decorative unit 412) while the reach-time operation performance is being executed.
In this case, even during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the reach-time action performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the action presentation at the time of reaching a winning state.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the left first number decorative unit 412) while the separation performance is being performed.
In this case, even when the separation effect is being executed, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the distance performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the separation effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the close performance is being performed.
In this case, even when the proximity effect is being executed, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the close-up performance is being performed.
In this case, even when the close-range effect is being executed, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can display an identification unit (e.g., the number unit 411) that can identify a pattern in operation at least in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 66), and can display an ornamental unit (e.g., the first number ornamental unit 412, the second number ornamental unit 413, etc.) that decorates the identification unit in operation at least in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 73).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the identification portion and the decorative portion, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to notice both the operation display of the identification portion and the operation display of the decorative portion.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can display the identification unit in operation in at least a first operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 66), and can display the decorative unit (for example, the first number decorative unit 412, the second number decorative unit 413, etc.) in operation in at least a second operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 73).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the identification portion and the decorative portion, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to notice both the operation display of the identification portion and the operation display of the decorative portion.

The appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, after the start of the reach performance, temporary stopping of the left and right first number decoration parts 412, the left and right second number decoration parts 413, and the left and right second character decoration parts 416 is initiated, and then temporary stopping of the left and right number parts 411 and the left and right character parts 414 is initiated, but this is not limited to this.
When a reach variation effect is executed, the timing of the start of the temporary stop after the start of the reach effect may be the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, character portion 414, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416).

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When a reach fluctuation effect is executed, temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative patterns 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) (number portion 411, first number decorative portion 412, second number decorative portion 413, character portion 414, second character decorative portion 416, etc.) may not be executed (may be restricted) during execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, during the execution of the close-up performance, the performance control unit 300 may execute a temporary stop by the first part (such as the number part 411, the first number decoration part 412, the second number decoration part 413, the character part 414, and part of the second character decoration part 416) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41), and may not execute (restrict) a temporary stop by the second part (such as the number part 411, the first number decoration part 412, the second number decoration part 413, the character part 414, and part of the second character decoration part 416 that is different from the first part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41).

(Example of variation 6)
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 130. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation based on winning at the first start slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which the SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effect shown in Figure 130 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 127(1) to (8) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 130(1), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are separated by the separation effect (see Figure 127(8)), and the reach action effect ends, and the left and right number sections 411 and the left and right character sections 414 no longer tilt.
Next, as shown in FIG. 130(2), the first transition image 502 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (3), the SP Reach performance begins, and the SP Reach image 503 is displayed. When the SP Reach performance begins, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size and in both upper corners of the image display unit 114. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 have a number section 411, a first number decorative section 412, and a second number decorative section 413, but do not have a character section 414, a first character decorative section 415, or a second character decorative section 416. In other words, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a less decorative manner. At this time, the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 begins again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(4), the center decorative symbol 41, "4," stops. The center decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right. At this time, the center decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Fig. 130(5), the second transitional image 504 is displayed. As the second transitional image 504 is displayed, the three decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see.

130(6), the second transition image 504 disappears, and the stage image 61 and the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 is resumed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 130(7), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 131 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in Variation Presentation Example 6.
Figure 131 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
First, at time T1, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the third operation mode (see FIG. 67), the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the tenth operation mode (see FIG. 74), and the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the seventeenth operation mode (see FIG. 81) are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 130(3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the 46th operation mode (see FIG. 109-2) and the display of the center decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operation mode (see FIG. 109-3) are started. At this time, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the 3rd operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the 10th operation mode, and the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation mode are ended.
Also, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left and right numeral sections 411 display one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the left and right first numeral decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode, and the left and right second numeral decoration sections 413 display one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the 46th operation mode and the display of the center decorative symbol 41 in the 47th operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 46th operation mode, and the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 47th operation mode.

Next, at time T4, display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode, display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operating mode, display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operating mode, and display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operating mode begin.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (6) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operation mode are completed. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (7) begins.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the three number sections 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left and right character sections 414 display for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the center character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 29th operating mode, while the three second character decoration sections 416 do not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

131 does not show the temporary stop state from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect (the start of the SP reach effect). Here, the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect in variable effect example 6 may be the same as that shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
Additionally, in the variation performance example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in Fig. 129, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the variation performance in the variation performance example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 shown at time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 129. In other words, in a losing variation performance in which the SP reach performance is executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 129, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time T1 to time T5 in Fig. 131.

As described above, when an SP reach performance is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 at a cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 67) that was not performed before the start of the SP reach performance.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the uniqueness of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 due to the execution of the SP reach presentation.

In addition, when an SP reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 using an operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 67) that was not performed before the SP reach performance started.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the uniqueness of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 due to the execution of the SP reach presentation.

In addition, when an SP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can continue to temporarily stop the left and right decorative patterns 41 when the display of the center decorative pattern 41 begins (see Figure 130 (4)).

In addition, when an SP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles while the SP reach image 503 is being displayed.
In this case, even while the SP reach image 503 is being displayed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, when the performance control unit 300 executes an SP reach performance during the execution of a variable performance, it can execute a temporary stop of at least one cycle by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) after the second transition image 504 is displayed.
In this case, even if the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see and then becomes visible again, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, when the performance control unit 300 executes an SP reach performance during the execution of a variable performance, it can limit the temporary stopping of at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the left second character decorative unit 416) for one cycle or more after the display of the second transition image 504.
In this case, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to excessive emphasis on the decorative pattern 41 of the losing number.

(Example of variation 7)
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 7) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 132. Variation presentation example 7 is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 132 is a variable effect that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 132(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (2), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner that causes them to sway up and down. Furthermore, when the reach-inducing effect is being executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 have a number portion 411, a first number decorative portion 412, and a second number decorative portion 413, but do not have a character portion 414, a first character decorative portion 415, or a second character decorative portion 416. In other words, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a less decorative manner. Furthermore, at this time, the left decorative symbol 41 begins to temporarily stop.

132(3), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner, and the right decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in a high-speed varying manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 132(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" and the center decorative pattern 41 "1" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 132(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 133 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in Variation Presentation Example 7.
Figure 133 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 7.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 132(2) begins.
Next, at time T2, the left character section 414 starts to be displayed in the 26th operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 132 (3) starts.

Next, at time T3, the following displays begin: the right number section 411 in the first operating mode, the right character section 414 in the 29th operating mode, the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operating mode, the middle number section 411 in the first operating mode, the middle character section 414 in the 23rd operating mode, and the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operating mode. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 133 (4) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 133 (5) begins.

During the period from time T1 to time T4, the left numeric portion 411 displays one or more cycles of the first operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles of the 26th operating mode, while the left second character decoration section 416 does not display one or more cycles of the 43rd operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, in variation performance example 7, the start timing of the temporary stop is different between the left number section 411 and the left character section 414, but the end timing of the temporary stop is the same, so the execution time of the temporary stop is different. In other words, the performance control section 300 can display a first image (number section 411) showing the numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (for example, character section 414) displayed behind the first image, and it is possible to make the execution time of the action display that can be repeated periodically during the execution of the variation performance different between the first image and the second image.
In this case, it is possible to make both the first image and the second image easier for the player to recognize, while differentiating the degree of emphasis between the first image and the second image, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above example, when the random miss variation effect is executed, the execution time of the periodically repeatable action display of the first image (number section 411) is longer than the execution time of the periodically repeatable action display of the second image (e.g., character section 414), but this is not limited to this.
When the random miss variation effect is executed, the execution time of the periodically repeatable action display of the second image (e.g., character section 414) may be longer than the execution time of the periodically repeatable action display of the first image (number section 411).

Furthermore, in a reach miss variable presentation in which a normal reach presentation is performed while an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, for example, by differing whether or not there is a temporary stop restriction during the execution of the reach action presentation between the first image (number section 411) and the second image (e.g., character section 414), the execution time of the cyclically repeatable action display of the first image and the execution time of the cyclically repeatable action display of the second image may be made different.
As an example, the performance control unit 300 may restrict the temporary stop of the first image (number portion 411) while a reach-time action performance is being executed, while not restricting (continuing) the temporary stop of the second image (e.g., character portion 414). In this case, in a reach-miss variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed but an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the execution time of the cyclically repeatable action display of the second image (e.g., character portion 414) is longer than the execution time of the cyclically repeatable action display of the first image (number portion 411).
As another example, the performance control unit 300 may restrict the temporary stop of the second image (e.g., the character portion 414) while a reach-time action performance is being executed, while not restricting (continuing) the temporary stop of the first image (the number portion 411). In this case, in a reach-miss variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed but an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the execution time of the cyclically repeatable action display of the first image (the number portion 411) is longer than the execution time of the cyclically repeatable action display of the second image (e.g., the character portion 414).

Also, in the variation performance example 7, the timing at which the temporary stop starts is different for the left number section 411, the left character section 414, and the left second character decoration section 416, but this is not limited to this.
The left number portion 411 may start a temporary stop at time T2 shown in Fig. 133, similarly to the left character portion 414 and the left second character decorative portion 416. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed (restricted) during the execution of the reach-inducing effect. Even in this case, in the variation effect example 7, the left number portion 411 may be displayed for one or more cycles according to the first operation mode.

(Example of variation 8)
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 8) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 134. Variation presentation example 8 is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 134 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 134(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 134 (2), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the highly decorative left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up-and-down swaying motion. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (3), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, and the right decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in a high-speed changing manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" and the center decorative pattern 41 "1" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 134(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 135 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 8.
Figure 135 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 8.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 134 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the following operations begin: display of the right number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode, display of the middle number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the middle character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 134 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 134 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

(Example of variation 9)
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 9) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Variation presentation example 9 is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in FIG. 136 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 136(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (2), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (3), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the right decorative symbol 41 "4" and the center decorative symbol 41 "1" start to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 136(4), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 137 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 9.
Figure 137 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 9.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 136 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the following operations begin: display of the right number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode, display of the middle number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the middle character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 136 (3) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode all end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 136 (4) begins.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, any of the variation presentation examples 7 to 9 may be executed.
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be configured to execute (provide) only one of the variable performance examples 7 to 9. In this case, the variable performance executed (provided) may be variable performance example 7, variable performance example 8, or variable performance example 9.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, two of the variation effects from variation effect example 7 to variation effect example 9 may be executed, while the remaining variation effect may not be executed (not provided). In this case, the variation effect that is not executed (not provided) may be variation effect example 7, variation effect example 8, or variation effect example 9.

In addition, in the variation performance examples 7 to 9, the temporary stopping of the left decorative pattern 41 starts at the same time as the start of the reach stimulation performance, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation performance examples 7 to 9, the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started before the start of the reach-provoking performance. Also, in the variation performance examples 7 to 9, the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started after the start of the reach-provoking performance.

(Variation example 10)
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 10) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 138. Variation presentation example 10 is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 138 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 138(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 138 (2), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is performed. In the pseudo consecutive fanning effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (3), the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed. In other words, the pseudo consecutive effect fails. In this case, the left decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, and the right decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in a rapidly changing state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" and the center decorative pattern 41 "1" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

In addition, the manner in which the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in variable performance example 10 (the operation manner of the decorative patterns 41, whether the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) may be the same as that shown in Figure 135 or the same as that shown in Figure 137.

In addition, in the variation performance example 10, the temporary stopping of the left decorative pattern 41 starts at the same time as the start of the pseudo consecutive promotion performance, but this is not limited to this.
In variation performance example 10, a temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started before the start of the pseudo consecutive stimulating performance. Also, in variation performance examples 7 to 10, a temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started after the start of the pseudo consecutive stimulating performance.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right after a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance or a pseudo consecutive exciting performance) has failed during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop, the player can be made to recognize that a specific promotional effect has failed.

In addition, during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles using at least a portion of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting effect (such as a reach exciting effect or a pseudo consecutive exciting effect) has failed.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using the middle decorative pattern 41 after a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance or a pseudo consecutive exciting performance) has failed during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, even if a specific promotional effect fails, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles using at least a portion of the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting effect (such as a reach exciting effect or a pseudo consecutive exciting effect) has failed during the execution of a variable effect.

(Variation example 11)
FIG. 139 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 11) will be described with reference to Fig. 139. Variable effect example 11 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 139 is a variable effect that is executed when "AR5" is selected as the "pre-determined effect pattern" in Figure 57 and "ER5" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 139 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "137" on the image display unit 114. At this time, three reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (2), a pre-start action effect is performed in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The pre-start action effect is a start action effect performed as a pre-determination effect. In the illustrated example, as the pre-start action effect, the three character parts 414 are displayed with their arms outstretched.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.

139(4), the role production is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object first effect image 505 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(5), a chance eye effect is executed, and three decorative symbols 41, "331," are stopped. All three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye effect image 506 is displayed around the three decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(6), with the stopping of the special symbol variation, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "331", are fixed and stopped. That is, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped.
In the variation effect example 11, the pre-start action effect, the role effect, the display of the role effect first effect image 505, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Furthermore, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

As described above, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects according to the results of the advance determination by the game control unit 200, and can limit the motion display of the stopped effect symbols for one or more cycles after the start of a specific effect during the execution of a variable effect. Examples of specific effects include advance start motion effects, bonus effect effects, display of the bonus effect first effect image 505, chance eye effects, etc.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too much on the performance symbols and thereby failing to recognize the specific performance, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the specific performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Variation of Variation Example 11)
Next, a modified example of variation presentation example 11 will be explained.
In the variable performance example 11, it has been explained that when a pre-determined performance is executed in the variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 does not temporarily stop, but this is not limited to this.
Figure 140 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 11.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 139 (1) to (4) are executed, and then, as shown in Figure 140 (1), a chance eye effect is executed, and three decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye effect image 506 is also displayed around the three decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Figure 140 (2), as the chance eye presentation ends, the chance eye effect image 506 disappears. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 begin to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at this time, the three number sections 411 begin to display in the first operation mode, the three second character decorative sections 416 begin to display in the 43rd operation mode, the left character section 414 and center character section 414 begin to display in the 26th operation mode, and the right character section 414 begin to display in the 23rd operation mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(3), as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" are fixed and stopped.
In this way, in the variable effect, even when the pre-determined effect is executed, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped. However, even in this case, in any of the temporarily stopped parts of the three decorative patterns 41, display for more than one cycle is not performed (is limited). In other words, in any of the temporarily stopped parts of the three decorative patterns 41, an operation display for less than one cycle is performed.

(Variation example 12)
141 to 144 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
141 to 144, another specific example (variation presentation example 12) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. The variation presentation example 12 is a variation presentation based on winning the first start slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which the SPSP reach presentation is executed.
141 to 144 are variable effects that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 59. Also, variable effect example 12 is an example of a variable effect that is executed after the variable effect shown in variable effect example 11. In other words, variable effect example 12 is an example of a variable effect that shows the result of the lottery for the special pattern that corresponds to the first reserved image 52 (see FIG. 139 (2)) that is displayed during the execution of the variable effect in variable effect example 11.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 141 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in Figure 141 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 141(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 141 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Fig. 141 (5), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is performed. In the pseudo consecutive fanning effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a manner that causes them to sway up and down.
Next, if the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is successful, the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 is displayed in motion as shown in Figure 141 (6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (7), the three decorative patterns 41 are again displayed changing at high speed. At this time, a re-changing notification image 507 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the re-changing notification image 507 displays the text "x2."
Next, as shown in Figure 141 (8), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 142 (9), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" begins to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Fig. 142 (10), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is performed. In the pseudo consecutive fanning effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a manner that causes them to sway up and down.
Next, if the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is successful, the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 is displayed in motion as shown in Figure 142 (11).

Next, as shown in Figure 142 (12), the three decorative patterns 41 are again displayed changing at high speed. At this time, a re-change notification image 507 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the re-change notification image 507 displays the text "x3."
Next, as shown in Figure 142 (13), a zone swaying effect is performed. In the zone swaying effect, the zone symbols 58 are displayed in an up and down motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (14), the zone symbol 58 stops and is displayed in motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (15), the zone effect starts and the zone execution image 59 is displayed in motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 142 (16), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 143 (17), the right decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, when the reach effect starts, a reach line image 501 is displayed as shown in FIG. 143 (18). In the illustrated example, the reach line image 501 is displayed in red. At this time, a reach action effect is performed. In the illustrated example, in the reach action effect, the left and right number portions 411 and the left and right character portions 414 are displayed as if they are clasping their hands together. At this time, the left and right first number decoration portions 412 start to be displayed in the ninth action mode, and the left and right second number decoration portions 413 start to be displayed in the sixteenth action mode.

In addition, the reach line image 501 shown in Figure 143 (18) may be an image that suggests or notifies that there is a higher expectation of a jackpot game being played than the reach line image 501 shown in Figure 127 (7).
In addition, the reach-time action presentation shown in Figure 143 (18) may be a presentation that suggests or notifies that there is a higher expectation of a jackpot game being played than the reach-time action presentation shown in Figure 127 (7).

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (19), a separation effect is performed, and the reach-time action effect ends when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are separated.
Next, as shown in Figure 143 (20), the first transition image 502 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 become difficult to see.
Next, as shown in Figure 143 (21), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 503 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a less decorative manner and are reduced in size. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped again.

Next, as shown in Figure 143 (22), an advanced effect is executed. At this time, the reel effect is executed, and the central movable reel 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel second effect image 508 is also displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 143 (23), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the SPSP reach image 509 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114 in a size smaller than the display size during the SP reach effect (see Figure 143 (21)). Also, at this time, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 begins again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (24), the deciding button operation presentation starts and a button operation image 510 is displayed.
The deciding button operation effect is a deciding effect that accompanies a button operation effect. The deciding effect is an effect that suggests or notifies whether a jackpot game will be executed (whether the executed variable effect is a jackpot variable effect or a miss variable effect). The deciding effect can also be considered as a winning/losing effect that suggests or notifies the possibility of a jackpot game being executed. The deciding effect (winning/losing effect) can also be considered as an effect that makes you expect a jackpot game to be executed.
The deciding button operation effect can also be considered as a button operation effect that suggests or notifies whether a jackpot game will be played (whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss, and whether the currently executed variable effect is a jackpot variable effect or a miss variable effect).The deciding button operation effect can also be considered as an effect that creates anticipation that a jackpot game will be played (the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the currently executed variable effect is a jackpot variable effect).The deciding button operation effect can also be considered as an effect that suggests or notifies whether the special symbol lottery has been won or lost.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the decide button operation effect, the three decorative symbols 41, "343," descend at a slow speed, as shown in FIG. 144 (25). At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are not temporarily stopped. That is, with the display of the center decorative symbol 41, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41 ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (26), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 144 (27), the second transitional image 504 is displayed. As the second transitional image 504 is displayed, the three decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see.

144 (28), the second transition image 504 disappears, and the stage image 61 and the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 is started again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (29), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figures 145 and 146 are charts showing the flow of the operational display of the presentation image performed in variable presentation example 12.
Figures 145 and 146 show the flow of the display of the performance image in variable performance example 12.
First, as shown in Fig. 145, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Fig. 141 (4) starts.

Next, at time T2, the pseudo-continuous pattern 57 begins to display the character portion 571 in the 48th operation mode (see FIG. 111) and the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode (see FIG. 112). Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 141 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the character section 571 in the 48th operation mode, the display of the frame section 572 in the 49th operation mode, the display of the left number section 411 in the 1st operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 141 (7) begins.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, one or more cycles of display in the 48th operation mode of the character portion 571 and one or more cycles of display in the 49th operation mode of the frame portion 572 are performed.
In addition, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Although not shown in the figures, after this, the left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop (see Figure 141 (8)), the right decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop (see Figure 141 (9)), and after the pseudo consecutive performance is executed again (see Figure 142 (11)), the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 disappears (see Figure 142 (12)). Here, from the time the left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop until the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 disappears, at least one cycle of display is performed in the 48th operation mode of the character portion 571, at least one cycle of display in the 49th operation mode of the frame portion 572, at least one cycle of display in the 1st operation mode of the left and right number portions 411, at least one cycle of display in the 43rd operation mode of the left and right second character decorative portions 416, at least one cycle of display in the 26th operation mode of the left character portion 414, and at least one cycle of display in the 29th operation mode of the right character portion 414.

Next, at time T4, the display of the character portion 581 in the zone pattern 58 in the 50th operation mode (see FIG. 113) and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode (see FIG. 114) begin. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in FIG. 142 (14) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode end. At this time, the display of the band portion 591 in the 52nd operation mode (see FIG. 115) and the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode (see FIG. 116) in the zone execution image 59 begin. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 142 (15) begins.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the character portion 581 displays one or more cycles of the 50th operation mode, and the frame portion 582 displays one or more cycles of the 51st operation mode.

Although not shown in the figures, the reach effect is then executed (see Figure 143 (18)). Furthermore, when the reach effect begins, the left and right number sections 411 start to display in the second operation mode, the left and right first number decoration sections 412 start to display in the ninth operation mode, the left and right second number decoration sections 413 start to display in the 16th operation mode, the left and right character sections 414 start to display in the 27th operation mode, and the left and right second character decoration sections 416 start to display in the 44th operation mode.

Also, at time T6, the display in the 52nd operation mode of the band portion 591, the display in the 53rd operation mode of the decoration portion 592, the display in the 2nd operation mode of the left number portion 411, the display in the 9th operation mode of the left first number decoration portion 412, the display in the 16th operation mode of the left second number decoration portion 413, the display in the 27th operation mode of the left character portion 414, and the display in the 44th operation mode of the left second character decoration portion 416 end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (20) starts.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the band portion 591 displays one or more cycles of the 52nd operation mode, and the decorative portion 592 displays one or more cycles of the 53rd operation mode.
In addition, during the period from the start of the reach performance to time T6, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 displays one or more cycles in the 9th operation mode, the left second number decoration section 413 displays one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 27th operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays one or more cycles in the 44th operation mode.

Furthermore, at time T6 in Figure 145, the operation mode of the left decorative pattern 41 and whether or not it periodically displays a temporary stop are shown, but the mode of the left decorative pattern 41 is not shown. Here, the operation mode of the right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right second character decorative portion 416) and whether or not it periodically displays a temporary stop are the same as those of the left decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146, at time T7, display of the left and right number sections 411 in the third operating mode, display of the left and right first number decoration sections 412 in the tenth operating mode, and display of the left and right second number decoration sections 413 in the seventeenth operating mode begin.
Also, time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (21) begins.

Next, at time T8, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the tenth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the seventeenth operation mode are completed. Time T8 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (22) starts.
Here, during the period from time T7 to time T8, one or more cycles of display are performed by the third operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the tenth operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the seventeenth operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413.

Next, at time T9, display begins in the fourth operating mode (see Figure 68) of the left and right number sections 411, in the eleventh operating mode (see Figure 75) of the left and right first number decorative sections 412, and in the eighteenth operating mode (see Figure 82) of the left and right second number decorative sections 413.
Also, time T9 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (23) begins.

Next, at time T10, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the fourth operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the eleventh operation mode, and the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the eighteenth operation mode are completed. Time T10 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (25) starts.
Here, during the period from time T9 to time T10, the left and right number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the fourth operating mode, the left and right first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the 11th operating mode, and the left and right second number decoration sections 413 display one or more cycles in the 18th operating mode.

Next, at time T11, the display of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the 46th operation mode and the display of the center decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operation mode are started.
Time T11 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 144 (26) begins.

Next, at time T12, the display of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the 46th operation mode and the display of the center decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operation mode end. Time T12 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (27) starts.
Here, during the period from time T11 to time T12, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 46th operation mode, and the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 47th operation mode.

Next, at time T13, display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode, display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operating mode, display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operating mode, and display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operating mode begin.
Time T13 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 144 (28) begins.

Next, at time T14, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operation mode are completed. Time T14 is the time when the performance shown in FIG. 144 (29) begins.
Here, during the period from time T13 to time T14, the three number sections 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left and right character sections 414 display for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the center character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 29th operating mode, while the three second character decoration sections 416 do not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode (displays for less than one cycle are made).

145 does not show the specific mode of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance in the variable performance example 12. Here, in the variable performance example 12, the mode of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
Additionally, in the variation performance example 12, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 129, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach in the variation performance example 12 (the operation mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 129. In other words, in a miss variation performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 129, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T7 to T14 in FIG. 146.

As described above, the period of the operation display by the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 and the zone symbols 58 is different from the period of the temporary stop by the decorative symbols 41. In other words, the performance symbols include predetermined performance symbols (for example, decorative symbols 41) and specific performance symbols (for example, pseudo consecutive symbols 57) that are different from the predetermined performance symbols, and the performance control unit 300 can display the predetermined performance symbols in operation at a predetermined period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 65), and can limit the operation display of the specific performance symbols at a predetermined period while a variable performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more easily aware that the specific performance pattern is a performance pattern different from the predetermined performance pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the operation modes of the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 and the zone symbols 58 are different from the operation mode when the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. That is, the performance symbols include predetermined performance symbols (for example, decorative symbols 41) and specific performance symbols (for example, pseudo consecutive symbols 57) that are different from the predetermined performance symbols, and the performance control unit 300 can periodically display the predetermined performance symbols in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 65), and can limit the operation display of the specific performance symbols in the predetermined operation mode for one cycle or more during the execution of the variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more easily aware that the specific performance pattern is a performance pattern different from the predetermined performance pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a specific image (e.g., zone execution image 59) while the variable performance is being executed, and is capable of displaying the performance pattern in a first operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 65), and is capable of displaying the specific image in a second operating mode that can be repeated at least in a second cycle different from the first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 115).
In this case, it is possible for the player to easily distinguish between the performance pattern and the specific image, and it is also possible for the player to easily recognize both the display of the performance pattern in the first operating mode and the display of the specific image in the second operating mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
In the above example, it has been described that a specific image is displayed during the execution of a zone effect during the execution of a variable effect, but this is not limited to this. The specific image may be periodically displayed (displayed in the manner and cycle shown in FIGS. 115 and 116) during the execution of a variable effect, during the execution of a normal reach effect, during the execution of an SP reach effect, or during the execution of an SPSP reach effect. The specific image displayed in this case may be an image that gives the expectation that a jackpot game will be played, and may be an image unrelated to the zone effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance (for example, a reach-time action performance) that displays a performance pattern in motion when a reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, and the specific performances that can be executed in one performance mode (for example, the first stage) include a first specific performance in which a performance pattern having a specific number (for example, "3") is displayed in a first action mode (for example, the action mode shown in Figure 127 (7)), and a second specific performance in which a performance pattern having a specific number is displayed in a second action mode (for example, the action mode shown in Figure 143 (18)) that is different from the first action mode.
In this case, even in one presentation mode, it is possible to realize diversification of presentations by presentation symbols according to the reach presentations that are executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when an SPSP reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 at a cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 68) that was not performed before the SPSP reach performance started.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the uniqueness of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 due to the execution of the SPSP reach presentation.

In addition, when an SPSP reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 using an operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 68) that was not performed before the SPSP reach performance started.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the uniqueness of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 due to the execution of the SPSP reach presentation.

In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can restrict the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time when the display of the middle decorative pattern 41 (the decorative pattern 41 of a missing eye) begins (see Figure 144 (25)).
In this case, when the SPSP reach performance is executed and the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 may be able to continue temporarily stopping the left and right decorative patterns 41 even when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25)).In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 may be able to temporarily stop the middle decorative pattern 41 when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25)).

In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop (periodic temporary stop) of the middle decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles while the SPSP reach image 509 is being displayed.
In this case, even while the SPSP reach image 509 is being displayed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, when the performance control unit 300 executes an SPSP reach performance during the execution of a variable performance, it is capable of executing a temporary stop of at least one cycle by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) after the display of the second transition image 504.
In this case, even if the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see and then becomes visible again, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, when the performance control unit 300 executes an SPSP reach performance during the execution of a variable performance, it is possible to limit the temporary stopping of at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the left second character decorative unit 416) for one cycle or more after the display of the second transition image 504.
In this case, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to excessive emphasis on the decorative pattern 41 of the losing number.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number section 411) while a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance, a pseudo consecutive exciting performance, or a zone exciting performance) is being performed during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, even during the execution of a specific promotional effect, it is possible to make the player more aware that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Note that, while a specific hype performance is being performed, the performance control unit 300 may be capable of temporarily stopping at least a portion of the decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles. Also, while a specific hype performance is being performed, the performance control unit 300 may be capable of restricting temporary stopping of at least a portion of the decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles. Also, while a specific hype performance is being performed, there may be a portion (or the entirety) of the decorative pattern 41 where temporary stopping is performed for one or more cycles, and a portion (or the entirety) where temporary stopping is restricted for one or more cycles.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the character part 414) during the execution of a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance, a pseudo consecutive exciting performance, or a zone exciting performance) during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too locally on the decorative pattern 41 while a specific provocative effect is being performed, making it easier for the player to focus on the specific provocative effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying specific performance patterns (e.g., pseudo-consecutive patterns 57, zone patterns 58, etc.) at least at a cycle that is not performed when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 111).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the specific performance pattern and the decorative pattern 41, and also to increase the degree of emphasis on the specific performance pattern.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying specific performance patterns (e.g., pseudo-consecutive patterns 57, zone patterns 58, etc.) at least in an operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 111) that is not performed when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the specific performance pattern and the decorative pattern 41, and also to increase the degree of emphasis on the specific performance pattern.

In addition, while the performance control unit 300 is executing a temporary stop based on the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 109-2) of the first performance pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 41), it can execute a temporary stop based on the second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 109-3) of the second performance pattern (for example, the middle decorative pattern 41).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing on only one of the first and second performance symbols, and to make it easier for the player to focus on both the first and second performance symbols.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing at least a display in a first operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 65) and a display in a second operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 90) using a first performance pattern having a first number (for example, "3"), and is capable of executing at least a display in a first operating mode and a display in a third operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 93) using a second performance pattern having a second number (for example, "4").
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations according to the numbers of the presentation patterns, while preventing the player from mistaking that the presentation situation is different when the first presentation pattern is displayed and when the second presentation pattern is displayed.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion at least in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65) before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion at least in a second cycle (the cycle shown in FIG. 66) that is shorter than the first cycle after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a reach prompting performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive prompting performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone prompting performance, a zone performance, a role device performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, the player can be more excited as the variable presentation progresses, and the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game can be increased.

In the variable performance example 12, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the reach-time operation performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 12, during the execution of the reach-time action performance, temporary stops may not be made (restricted) by any of the components of the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, character portion 414, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416).
Also, for example, when the reach-time action presentation shown in Figure 127 (7) is executed (when the reach line image 501 shown in Figure 127 (7) is displayed), the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 while the reach-time action presentation is being executed, and when the reach-time action presentation shown in Figure 143 (18) is executed (when the reach line image 501 shown in Figure 143 (18) is displayed), the presentation control unit 300 may be configured to not execute (restrict) a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 while the reach-time action presentation is being executed.

In the above example, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect is smaller in display size than during the execution of the SP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Also, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect.

(Variation example 13)
147 and 148 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 13) will be described with reference to Figures 147 and 148. Variable presentation example 13 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation performance example 13 is a variation performance executed after the variation performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination performance pattern" in Fig. 59, and is a variation performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 59. Also, the variation performance executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination performance pattern" in Fig. 39 is the variation performance shown in Fig. 139 (1) to (6) (the same variation performance as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination performance pattern").
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), Figures 142 (9) to (16), and Figures 143 (17) to (23) are performed, and then the deciding button operation effect begins as shown in Figure 147 (1), and button operation image 510 is displayed.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the first jackpot highlight image 511 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 147 (2). At this time, the special effect is executed, and the middle movable special object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 147 (3), the decorative symbol 41 of "333" is displayed in a smaller size than before the start of the reach effect in the variable effect (see Figure 142 (16)). At this time, the second jackpot highlight image 550 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(5), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(6), three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the second jackpot highlight image 550 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 147 (7), the right-hit image 512 and the jackpot start image 513 are displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 147 (8), the jackpot game begins, and the round number image 514 and the in-round image 515 are displayed. In the example shown, the round number image 514 displays the text "Round 1." At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. More specifically, the decorative pattern 41 is a "3," which constitutes the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in the jackpot variation presentation that was being executed, and is displayed in a less decorative manner. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop.

Next, the big win game ends, and a time-saving start image 516 is displayed as shown in FIG. 148(9). At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is no longer displayed.
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal gaming state to the special time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state), and as shown in FIG. 148 (10), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "333," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped as a sequence of the numbers "333," just like the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). The display mode corresponding to the third stage of the stage image 61 is a display mode with an ocean motif. Furthermore, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting slot 121 displays "1." Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

Figure 149 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 13.
Figure 149 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 13.
Although not shown in the figure, in variable presentation example 13, after the normal reach presentation and the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation begins, and display of the left and right number sections 411 in the fourth operation mode, display of the left and right first number decoration sections 412 in the 11th operation mode, and display of the left and right second number decoration sections 413 in the 18th operation mode begin.

The temporary stop state shown at time T1 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the fourth operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the eleventh operation state, and the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the eighteenth operation state end. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147(2) starts.
Here, during the period from the start of the SPSP reach performance to time T1, one or more cycles of display are made by the fourth operation mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are made by the eleventh operation mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are made by the eighteenth operation mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413.

The temporary stop state shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the three number portions 411 in the fifth operation state (see FIG. 69), the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the twelfth operation state (see FIG. 76), and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 19th operation state (see FIG. 83) are started.
Also, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (5) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the three number portions 411 in the fifth operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the twelfth operation state, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the nineteenth operation state end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the three number sections 411 in the fifth operating mode, one or more cycles of display are performed by the three first number decoration sections 412 in the twelfth operating mode, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 19th operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the numeral portion 411 in the eighth operating mode (see FIG. 72) and the display of the first numeral decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operating mode (see FIG. 79) are started.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (8) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 148 (9) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the eighth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.

In addition, in Variation Presentation Example 13, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation until the start of the SPSP reach presentation is the same as in Variation Presentation Example 12 (see Figures 145 and 146). In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 13, the decorative pattern 41 may temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T6 in Figure 145 and times T7 to T9 in Figure 146, and then temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T5 in Figure 149.

Also, in the variation presentation example 13, the specific mode of the temporary stop from the start of the presentation shown in Fig. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach presentation is not shown. Here, in the variation presentation example 13, the mode of the temporary stop from the start of the presentation shown in Fig. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach presentation may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 129.
Additionally, in the variation effect example 13, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 129, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols 41 from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach in the variation effect example 13 (the operation mode of the decorative symbols 41 and whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols 41 shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 129. That is, in the jackpot variation effect in the first stage, the decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 129, then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T7 to T9 in FIG. 146, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T5 in FIG. 149.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated at a first cycle (for example, the 0.5-second cycle shown in FIG. 68 ) and a second operation mode that can be repeated at a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the 1.3-second cycle shown in FIG. 69 ). After the start of a specific performance during variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in the first operation mode and display the performance symbols in the second operation mode. Specific performances include a performance that stops the left decorative symbol 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number, and a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a double number.
In this case, since the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the effect symbols in the second operation mode are both performed after the start of the specific effect, the impact of the operation of the effect symbols after the start of the specific effect can be increased. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the effect symbols in the second operation mode can both be easily noticed by the player without being overlooked, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 68) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 69) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in the first operation mode and can display the performance symbols in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance while variable performances are being executed. Examples of specific performances include a performance in which the left decorative symbol 41 is stopped, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, since the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the second operation mode are both performed after the start of the specific effect, the impact of the operation of the effect symbols after the start of the specific effect can be increased. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the second operation mode can be easily noticed by the player without being overlooked, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while a variable performance is being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65 ) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 69 ) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which the right decorative symbol 41 stops, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number stops, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number stops.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects of the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols according to the first operation mode and the display of the effect symbols according to the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 65) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 69) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which a left decorative symbol 41 is stopped, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, it is possible to realize a diversification of the effects by the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 66), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 69) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a performance symbol that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance (for example, when decorative symbol 41 of a miss is displayed, or when decorative symbol 41 of a doublet is displayed). Specific effects include an effect that stops the left decorative pattern 41, a reach prompting effect, a normal reach effect, a pseudo consecutive prompting effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a zone prompting effect, a zone effect, a role effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a button operation effect, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a double number, and the like.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Furthermore, it is possible to particularly emphasize the effect symbols that suggest the results of the judgment, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 66) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 69) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a performance symbol that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance (for example, when a decorative pattern 41 of a losing number is displayed, or when a decorative pattern 41 of a double number is displayed). Specific effects include an effect that stops the left decorative pattern 41, a reach prompting effect, a normal reach effect, a pseudo consecutive prompting effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a zone prompting effect, a zone effect, a role effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a button operation effect, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a double number, and the like.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Furthermore, it is possible to particularly emphasize the effect symbols that suggest the results of the judgment, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Fig. 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Fig. 72) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a variable performance is being performed, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a variable performance is not being performed.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the display pattern regardless of whether or not a variable display is being executed, and the display can be diversified by the display pattern depending on whether or not a variable display is being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Fig. 65) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Fig. 72) that is different from the first operation mode. The effect control unit 300 can display the effect symbols at least in the first operation mode when a variable effect is being performed, and can display the effect symbols at least in the second operation mode when a variable effect is not being performed.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the display pattern regardless of whether or not a variable display is being executed, and the display can be diversified by the display pattern depending on whether or not a variable display is being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Fig. 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Fig. 66) that is different from the first cycle. The effect control unit 300 can display a specific part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the effect symbol in the first operation mode, and can display the specific part in the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect symbols. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in Fig. 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Fig. 66).The effect control unit 300 can display a specific part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the effect symbol in the first operation mode, and can display the specific part in the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect symbols. Also, since the first and second operation modes are different operation modes and both can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while a variable performance is being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65 ) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 69 ) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display a specific portion, which is at least a part of the performance symbol, in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the specific portion in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which the right decorative symbol 41 stops, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number stops, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number stops.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect patterns according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances during the execution of variable performances, and the performance pattern operation modes include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 65 ) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 69 ) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display a specific portion, which is at least a part of the performance pattern, using at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of variable performances, and can display the specific portion using at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of variable performances. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which the right decorative pattern 41 stops, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number stops, and a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a double number stops.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect patterns according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance, and can limit the display of the motion of at least a part of the stopped performance symbols (for example, the first number decorative part 412) for one or more cycles before the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which the right decorative symbol 41 is stopped, a reach stimulation performance, a reach performance, a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone stimulation performance, a zone performance, and a role-playing performance.
In this case, before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on an image that is different from at least a part of the performance pattern whose motion display is restricted for one cycle or more, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and when executing specific performances while variable performances are being executed, it can restrict the display of the performance symbols for one or more cycles at specific timing after the start of the specific performance (for example, the timing of executing the performance shown in FIG. 147 (4)). Examples of specific performances include a performance that stops the left decorative symbol 41, a reach prompting performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive prompting performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone prompting performance, a zone performance, a role-playing performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops the decorative symbol 41 of a losing number, and a performance that displays the decorative symbol 41 of a double number.
In this case, depending on whether it is a specific timing or not, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the periodic movement display of the performance pattern or emphasizing another effect different from the periodic movement display of the performance pattern, which makes it possible to diversify the effects according to the progress of the variable effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can limit the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed (see Figure 147 (4)).
In this case, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the double-digit decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 can periodically display the effect symbols in motion during the execution of a jackpot game.
In this case, even during the execution of a jackpot game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the displayed effect symbols.

In addition, during the execution of a jackpot game, the presentation control unit 300 can display the presentation symbols in a cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 72) that was not performed during the execution of a variable presentation.
In this case, the player can be given a sense of superiority by winning the big win game.

In addition, during the execution of a jackpot game, the presentation control unit 300 can display the presentation symbols in an operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 72) that was not performed during the execution of a variable presentation.
In this case, the player can be given a sense of superiority by winning the big win game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion at least for a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 68) before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion at least for a second cycle (the cycle shown in FIG. 69) longer than the first cycle after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a reach stimulation performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone stimulation performance, a zone performance, a role performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, as the variable presentation progresses, the series of actions displayed by the decorative symbols can be more easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first action performance and a second action performance of the decorative pattern 41 during execution of the variable performance, can restrict temporary stops during execution of the first action performance, and can execute temporary stops during execution of the second action performance. Examples of the first action performance include a start action performance and an effect of enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern 41 with double numbers. Examples of the second action performance include a reach-time action performance, a distance performance, a close-up performance, a reach-teasing performance, etc.
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped even while the action presentation is being performed, and making it easier for the player to focus on the action presentation by preventing the player from focusing too much on the temporary stop, depending on the type of action presentation.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance pattern operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 107). Furthermore, when a specific performance is not being executed during variable performances, the performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display using the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and less than one cycle of display using the second operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 123, etc.). Furthermore, when a specific performance is being executed during variable performances, the performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display using the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and one cycle or more of display using the second operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 129, etc.). Specific effects include reach stimulation effects, normal reach effects, pseudo consecutive stimulation effects, pseudo consecutive effects, zone stimulation effects, zone effects, role effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, button operation effects, effects that display decorative patterns 41 of double numbers, etc.
In this case, for each variable effect, the player can be interested in which operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed for one or more cycles, along with whether or not a specific effect is executed.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute specific performances during variable performances, and the performance pattern behavior includes a first behavior (e.g., the behavior shown in FIG. 65 ) that can be repeated by a first portion (e.g., the number portion 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, and a second behavior (e.g., the behavior shown in FIG. 107 ) that can be repeated by a second portion (e.g., the second character decorative portion 416) that is different from the first portion of the decorative pattern 41. During variable performances, when specific performances are not being executed, the performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first behavior of the first portion and less than one cycle of display by the second behavior of the second portion (see FIG. 123 , etc.). During variable performances, when specific performances are being executed, the performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first behavior of the first portion and one cycle or more of display by the second behavior of the second portion (see FIG. 129 , etc.). Specific effects include reach stimulation effects, normal reach effects, pseudo consecutive stimulation effects, pseudo consecutive effects, zone stimulation effects, zone effects, role effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, button operation effects, effects that display decorative patterns 41 of double numbers, etc.
In this case, for each variable effect, the player can be interested in which part of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed for one or more cycles in which operating mode, along with whether or not a specific effect is executed.

Next, a modified example of the start-up action presentation will be described.
FIG. 150 shows a modified example of the start-up action presentation.
First, as shown in Fig. 150(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."

Next, as shown in Fig. 150 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Here, in this modified example, as the start-up action presentation, in addition to the rise of the three decorative symbols 41, a display is made in accordance with the action mode at the temporary stop. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this modified example, as the start-up action presentation, a display in accordance with the first action mode of the three number portions 411, a display in accordance with the 43rd action mode of the three second character decorative portions 416, a display in accordance with the 23rd action mode of the left character portion 414, a display in accordance with the 26th action mode of the right character portion 414, and a display in accordance with the 32nd action mode of the center character portion 414 are made.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 120 (4) to (8) are performed.
During the execution period of the start-up motion presentation shown in the modified example, no periodic motion display is performed in any of the three decorative patterns 41 (motion display of less than one cycle is performed).

Next, a modified example of the behavior of the decorative symbol 41 when it is temporarily stopped before the start of the reach effect will be described.
The behavior of the decorative symbols 41 when they are temporarily stopped before the start of the reach effect is not limited to the example described above.
FIG. 151 shows a modified example of the behavior of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped before the start of the reach effect.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 151(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 151 (2), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (3), the left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop. Here, in a modified example, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character decorative portion 415, left second character decorative portion 416) begins to be displayed in a first operating mode (see Figure 65) that can be repeated every second. In the example shown, the left decorative pattern 41 is moving to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(4), the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 is progressing, and the entire left decorative pattern 41 is moving to the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 151(5), the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 continues, and the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the right and is displayed in the same position as in Fig. 151(3). That is, one cycle of the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 is completed, and the second cycle of the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 is started.
In addition, in this modified example, before the start of the reach effect in the variable effect, the entire right decorative pattern 41 and the entire middle decorative pattern 41 are temporarily stopped by a first operation mode that can be repeated every second.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120 (5) to (8) are performed, except that the entire right decorative pattern 41 and the entire center decorative pattern 41 are temporarily stopped in the first operating mode.

As described above, in the modified example, before the start of the reach effect, different components of the decorative pattern 41 (e.g., the number portion 411 and the character portion 414) temporarily stop in a common operating mode. Even in this case, after the start of the reach effect, different components of the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stop in different operating modes (see time points T3 and T4 in FIG. 129 ). That is, during the execution of a specific change effect (e.g., a reach effect change effect), there are times when the first portion (e.g., the number portion 411) and the second portion (e.g., the character portion 414) of the decorative pattern 41 have different operating modes (e.g., during the execution of the reach effect) and times when they do not have different operating modes (e.g., before the start of the reach effect). In other words, the change effects that the effect control unit 300 can execute include change effects in which the first portion (e.g., the number portion 411) and the second portion (e.g., the character portion 414) have different operating modes (e.g., a reach effect change effect), and change effects in which the first portion and the second portion do not have different operating modes (e.g., a random miss change effect).
In this case, whether to make it easier for the player to recognize the operation displays being performed by the first and second parts or to make it easier for the player to distinguish between the first and second parts can be switched depending on the variable presentation or the progress of the variable presentation.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and variations, and each variation of the variation presentation example in the first stage described below, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped when a reach presentation is not being performed and the stage image 61 is displayed during the execution of the variation presentation may be the manner shown in FIG. 151. In this case, when a reach presentation is not being performed and the stage image 61 is displayed, whether the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number presentation portion 412, second number presentation portion 413, character portion 414, first character presentation portion 415, second character presentation portion 416) displays for one or more cycles in the first operation mode may be the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 118 to 150, as the manner in which the number portion 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operation mode when a reach presentation is not being performed and the stage image 61 is displayed. As an example, in the variable performance example 1 (see FIG. 118), during the variable performance, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character decorative portion 415, left second character decorative portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode. The middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, and the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) is displayed for less than one cycle in the first operating mode (see time T4 in Figure 119).

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the number part 411), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a repeatable operating mode in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 65), and then display it in a repeatable operating mode in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 66), and can display a second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part, in a repeatable operating mode in a first cycle, and then display it in a repeatable operating mode in a third cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 73) (see Figures 151, 127 to 129, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between presenting the first and second parts in a unified manner or making it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts, depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the number part 411), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a first operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 65), and then display it in a second operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 66), and can display a second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part, in the first operating mode, and then display it in a third operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 73) (see Figures 151, 127 to 129, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between presenting the first and second parts in a unified manner or making it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts, depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

Next, a modified example of the behavior of the decorative symbol 41 when it is temporarily stopped during the execution of the normal reach effect will be described.
The behavior of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped during the execution of the normal reach effect is not limited to the example described above.
FIG. 152 shows a modified example of the behavior of the decorative pattern 41 when it is temporarily stopped during the execution of the normal reach effect.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 127(1) to (7) are performed, and then the separation effect is performed as shown in Figure 152(1). In this variation, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are not temporarily stopped during the execution of the separation effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 152 (2), with the left and right decorative patterns 41 separated, the reach-time action presentation ends, and the left and right number sections 411 and left and right character sections 414 no longer tilt. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 begin to temporarily stop again. In this modified example, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character decorative sections 415, left and right second character decorative sections 416) begin to be displayed in a third action mode (see Figure 67), which can be repeated every 0.75 seconds. In the illustrated example, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are moving upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 are moving downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 152(4), the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 continues, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 move upward to be displayed in the same position as in Fig. 152(2). In other words, one cycle of the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is completed, and a second cycle of the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is started.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 128 (10) to (13) are performed.

In addition, in any of the above-mentioned examples of variation, each variant, and each variant of the variation example of the variation example in the first stage described below, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during the execution of the normal reach effect in the variation effect may be the manner shown in Figure 152. In this case, whether the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decorative portion 412, second number decorative portion 413, character portion 414, first character decorative portion 415, second character decorative portion 416) displays for one or more cycles according to the third operation mode during the execution of the normal reach effect may be the same as the manner in which the number portion 411 displays for one or more cycles according to the second operation mode during the execution of the normal reach effect in each example of variation and each variant, as shown in Figure 129. In other words, if the temporary stopping mode of the decorative pattern 41 during execution of the normal reach performance is the mode shown in Figure 152, regardless of the variable performance executed in the first stage, during execution of the normal reach performance, the left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, left and right second character decorative portions 416) may be displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode.

As described above, in the modified example shown in Fig. 152, during the execution of a reach effect, different components of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number portion 411 and the character portion 414) are temporarily stopped in a common operating mode. Even in this case, before the start of the reach effect, different components of the decorative pattern 41 are temporarily stopped in different operating modes (see time T1 in Fig. 129, etc.). In other words, during the execution of a specific variable effect (for example, a reach effect variable effect), there are times when the first portion (for example, the number portion 411) and the second portion (for example, the character portion 414) of the decorative pattern 41 have a common operating mode (for example, during the execution of a reach effect), and times when they do not have a common operating mode (for example, before the start of the reach effect). In other words, the variable effects that the effect control unit 300 can execute include variable effects in which the first part (e.g., the number part 411) and the second part (e.g., the character part 414) have a common operating mode (e.g., a reach variable effect), and variable effects in which the first part and the second part do not have a common operating mode (e.g., a miss variable effect).
In this case, whether to make it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts or to present a unified presentation of the first and second parts can be switched depending on the variable presentation or the progress of the variable presentation.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, it is capable of stopping at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the first character decorative part 415) (limiting the display of movement) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (see Figures 127 (1) to (5), time T1 in Figure 129, etc.), and after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, it is capable of not stopping any part of the decorative pattern 41 (displaying any part of the decorative pattern 41 in movement) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (see Figure 152).
In this case, it is possible to switch between making any part of the decorative pattern 41 more easily noticeable to the player, or varying the degree of emphasis depending on the components of the decorative pattern 41, depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the number part 411), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a repeatable operation mode in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 65), and then display it in a repeatable operation mode in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 67), and can display a second part (e.g., the character part 414), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part, in a repeatable operation mode in a third cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 90), and then display it in a repeatable operation mode in the second cycle (see Figures 127 to 129, Figure 152, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts, or creating a presentation that gives a sense of unity between the first and second parts, depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the number part 411), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a first operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 65), and then display it in a second operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 67), and can display a second part (e.g., the character part 414), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and is different from the first part, in a third operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 90), and then display it in the second operating mode (see Figures 127 to 129, Figure 152, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts, or presenting a presentation that gives a sense of unity between the first and second parts, depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

Next, a modified example of the reach-time action presentation will be described.
The reach-time action presentation is not limited to the above-mentioned examples.
FIG. 153 shows a modified example of the action presentation when a win occurs.

First, in Variation 1, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120 (1), (2), and 132 (1) are performed, and then a reach prompting effect is performed, as shown in Figure 153 (1). In the reach prompting effect, the less decorative decorative patterns 41 on the left and right are displayed in a manner that causes them to sway up and down. At this time, the left number portion 411 begins to be displayed in the first motion mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 153 (2), the right decorative symbol 41, "3," stops and the reach effect begins. In other words, the reach-promoting effect is successful. In Variation 1, at this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41, which have low decorativeness, are enlarged as the reach-time action effect.

In addition, in variant 2, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120 (1) and (2) and Figure 134 (1) are performed, and then a reach-promoting effect is performed, as shown in Figure 153 (3). In the reach-promoting effect, the highly decorative left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at this time, the left number section 411 begins to display in the first motion mode, the left character section 414 begins to display in the 26th motion mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 begins to display in the 43rd motion mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (4), the right decorative symbol 41, "3," stops and the reach effect begins. In other words, the reach-promoting effect is successful. In Variation 2, at this time, the highly decorative left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged as a reach-time action effect.

In addition, in variant 3, after the same effects as those shown in Figures 120 (1) to (4) are performed, as shown in Figure 153 (5), the highly decorative left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop below the display position of the left decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 127 (6). Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at this time, display in the first operation mode of the left number section 411, display in the 26th operation mode of the left character section 414, and display in the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decorative section 416 begin.

Next, as shown in Fig. 153(6), the right decorative pattern 41, "3," begins to temporarily stop below the display position of the right decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 127(6). Although detailed illustration is omitted, at this time, display in the first operation mode of the right number portion 411, display in the 29th operation mode of the right character portion 414, and display in the 43rd operation mode of the right second character decorative portion 416 begin.
Next, the reach effect starts as shown in Figure 153 (7). In the third modification, at this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in reduced size as the reach effect action effect.

In addition to the above-mentioned reach variation effects (variation effect example 5, variation effect example 6, variation effect example 12, variation effect example 13), the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with variation effects in which each of the variations (variation effect example 1 to variation effect 3) shown in Figure 153 is performed as a reach-time action effect in each reach variation effect (variation effect example 5, variation effect example 6, variation effect example 12, variation effect example 13).
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a variable performance in which each of the modified examples (Variation 1 to Variation 3) shown in Figure 153 is performed as a reach-time action performance in each reach variable performance (Variation 5, Variation 6, Variation 12, Variation 13), instead of the above-mentioned reach variable performances (Variation 5, Variation 6, Variation 12, Variation 13).

Next, a modified example of the temporary stop mode during the execution of the SP reach effect will be described.
FIG. 154 shows a modified example of the temporary stop mode during the execution of the SP reach effect.
In this modified example, the display in the third operating mode (see Figure 67) of the number section 411 is performed at a 1-second cycle, the display in the 10th operating mode (see Figure 74) of the first number decoration section 412 is performed at a 2-second cycle, and the display in the 17th operating mode (see Figure 81) of the second number decoration section 413 is performed at a 4-second cycle.

As shown in Figure 154 (1), when the SP Reach performance begins, the SP Reach image 503 is displayed. In a modified example, at this time, the left and right number portions 411 start to display in the third operation mode, the left and right first number decoration portions 412 start to display in the tenth operation mode, and the left and right second number decoration portions 413 start to display in the seventeenth operation mode. Also, at this time, one tip portion 4131 of each of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 is located on the upper right side of the second number decoration portion 413.

Next, as shown in Figure 154 (2), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in the SP reach performance. At this time, the left and right number sections 411 are in the same display mode as the left and right number sections 411 shown in Figure 154 (1). In other words, one cycle of display by the third operation mode of the left and right number sections 411 has been completed. Furthermore, circles are formed in the left and right first number decorative sections 412 (see Figure 74 (3)). Furthermore, one tip 4131 of the left and right second number decorative sections 413 is located on the upper left side of the second number decorative section 413 (see Figure 81 (2)).

Next, as shown in Figure 154 (3), the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the SP reach performance is progressing further. At this time, the left and right number sections 411 are in the same display mode as the left and right number sections 411 shown in Figure 154 (1). That is, two cycles of display by the third operation mode of the left and right number sections 411 have been completed. Furthermore, the left and right first number decorative sections 412 are in the same display mode as the left and right first number decorative sections 412 shown in Figure 154 (1). That is, one cycle of display by the tenth operation mode of the left and right first number decorative sections 412 has been completed. Furthermore, in the left and right second number decorative sections 413, one tip 4131 is located on the lower left side of the second number decorative sections 413 (see Figure 81 (3)).

Next, as shown in Figure 154 (4), the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the SP reach performance is progressing further. At this time, the left and right number sections 411 are in the same display mode as the left and right number sections 411 shown in Figure 154 (1). In other words, three cycles of display by the third operation mode of the left and right number sections 411 have been completed. Furthermore, circles are formed in the left and right first number decorative sections 412 (see Figure 74 (3)). Furthermore, one tip 4131 of the left and right second number decorative sections 413 is located on the lower right side of the second number decorative section 413 (see Figure 81 (4)).

Next, as shown in Figure 154 (5), the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the SP reach performance continues. At this time, the left and right number sections 411 are in the same display mode as the left and right number sections 411 shown in Figure 154 (1). That is, four cycles of display by the third operation mode of the left and right number sections 411 have been completed. Furthermore, the left and right first number decorative sections 412 are in the same display mode as the left and right first number decorative sections 412 shown in Figure 154 (1). That is, two cycles of display by the tenth operation mode of the left and right first number decorative sections 412 have been completed. Furthermore, in the left and right second number decorative sections 413, one tip 4131 is located on the upper right side of the second number decorative section 413, resulting in the same display mode as the left and right second number decorative sections 413 shown in Figure 154 (1). That is, one cycle of display by the seventeenth operation mode of the left and right second number decorative sections 413 has been completed.

As described above, in this modified example, the period of temporary stop of the number section 411, the period of temporary stop of the first number decoration section 412, and the period of temporary stop of the second number decoration section 413 are all different, but at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance (for example, the execution timing of the performance shown in Figure 154 (1)), the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, and the second number decoration section 413 are displayed in a specific display mode (for example, the initial display mode at the start of the temporary stop), and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance (for example, the execution timing of the performance shown in Figure 154 (5)), the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, and the second number decoration section 413 again become the specific display mode (the same display mode as at the predetermined timing).
In this case, even if the periods of temporary stops of different components in the decorative pattern 41 are different, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the motion display of the decorative pattern 41 is temporary stopped.

154 is an example of a mode of temporary stop during execution of the SP reach effect, but is not limited to this. As an example, before the start of the reach effect during execution of the variable effect, the display in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65) of the number section 411 may be performed at a cycle of 1 second, the display in the 26th operation mode (see FIG. 87) of the character section 414 may be performed at a cycle of 2 seconds, and the display in the 43rd operation mode (see FIG. 107) of the second character decoration section 416 may be performed at a cycle of 4 seconds. Furthermore, before the start of the reach performance during the execution of the variable performance, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decoration section 412, second number decoration section 413, character section 414, first character decoration section 415, second character decoration section 416) may be the same when the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 begins and when one cycle of display by the 43rd operation mode of the second character decoration section 416 is completed (when four cycles of display by the first operation mode of the number section 411 are completed, and when two cycles of display by the 26th operation mode of the character section 414 are completed).
In addition, the example shown in Figure 154 may be an example of a temporary stop mode during execution of the SPSP reach effect.

Next, a modified example of the temporary stopping mode of the decorative pattern 41 of the mismatched combination will be described.
FIG. 155 shows a modified example of the temporary stopping mode of the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number.
In this modified example, the display period of the decorative pattern 41 in the 46th operating mode (see Figure 109-2) is the same as the display period of the decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operating mode (see Figure 109-3).
First, when a missing decorative pattern 41 is displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, three decorative patterns 41 "343" descend at a slow speed, as shown in FIG. 155(1).

Next, as shown in Figure 155 (2), the missing decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 begin to be displayed in the 46th operation mode, and the center decorative pattern 41 begins to be displayed in the 47th operation mode. In the example shown, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed moving to the lower right, and the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving to the upper right.

Furthermore, if a missing decorative pattern 41 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach performance, as shown in Figure 155 (3), the missing decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 begin to be displayed in the 46th operation mode, and the middle decorative pattern 41 begins to be displayed in the 47th operation mode. In the example shown, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed moving to the lower right, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving to the upper right.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the first performance pattern (e.g., left decorative pattern 41) and the second performance pattern (e.g., middle decorative pattern 41) in an operational state without synchronizing them.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing on only one of the first and second performance symbols, and to make it easier for the player to focus on both the first and second performance symbols.

(Variation example 14)
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 156, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 14) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable effect example 14 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 14 is a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effect shown in Figure 156 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 14 to change presentation example 23 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the second stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

As shown in Figure 156 (1), when the performance control unit 300 freezes and displays the previous special symbol, the highly decorative symbol 41 is frozen and fixed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small symbol 56, and a stage image 61 corresponding to the second stage (second performance mode). At this time, the reserved number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 indicates "1," which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122.

Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable effect of the small symbol 56 starts, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start operation effect is also performed.
In the above example, the same start-up motion effect is executed in the first and second stages (see FIG. 118(2)), but this is not limiting. The start-up motion effect in the second stage may differ from the start-up motion effect in the first stage in the motion mode of the decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 156 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.
In the above example, the same stop action effect is executed in the first and second stages (see FIG. 118(4)), but this is not limiting. The stop action effect in the second stage may have a different action pattern of the decorative pattern 41 from the stop action effect in the first stage.

Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 156 (6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the center decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and a motion effect is performed when the center decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 156(7), the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (8), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 157 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 14.
Figure 157 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 14.
First, at time T1, the following display modes are started: the 6th operation mode (see FIG. 70) of the left number portion 411, the 13th operation mode (see FIG. 77) of the left first number decoration portion 412, the 17th operation mode of the left second number decoration portion 413, the 37th operation mode (see FIG. 101) of the left first character decoration portion 415, and the 45th operation mode (see FIG. 109-1) of the left second character decoration portion 416. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156(5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode (see FIG. 103), and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the middle first number decoration portion 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the middle second number decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the middle first character decoration portion 415 in the 35th operation mode (see FIG. 99), and the display of the middle second character decoration portion 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display in the 6th operation mode of the left numeral portion 411, the display in the 13th operation mode of the left first numeral decoration portion 412, the display in the 17th operation mode of the left second numeral decoration portion 413, the display in the 37th operation mode of the left first character decoration portion 415, and the display in the 45th operation mode of the left second character decoration portion 416 end. Also, at this time, the display in the 6th operation mode of the right numeral portion 411, the display in the 13th operation mode of the right first numeral decoration portion 412, the display in the 17th operation mode of the right second numeral decoration portion 413, the display in the 39th operation mode of the right first character decoration portion 415, and the display in the 45th operation mode of the right second character decoration portion 416 end. Also, at this time, the display by the 6th operating mode of the middle number section 411, the display by the 13th operating mode of the middle first number decoration section 412, the display by the 17th operating mode of the middle second number decoration section 413, the display by the 35th operating mode of the middle first character decoration section 415, and the display by the 45th operating mode of the middle second character decoration section 416 end.
Also, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the 6th operating mode, the left first number decoration section 412 displays one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode, and the left first character decoration section 415 displays one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, while the left second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 does not display one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the 6th operating mode, and the right first character decoration section 415 displays one or more cycles in the 39th operating mode, while the right first number decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode, the right second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 does not display one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the middle number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, while the middle first number decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, the middle second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, the middle first character decoration section 415 does not display one or more cycles in the thirty-fifth operating mode, and the middle second character decoration section 416 does not display one or more cycles in the forty-fifth operating mode.

As described above, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 65) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 70) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display a specific part of the performance symbol (for example, number part 411) at least in the first operation mode during execution of a variable performance in the first performance mode (for example, the first stage), and can display the specific part in at least the second operation mode during execution of a variable performance in the second performance mode (for example, the second stage).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the effect symbols according to the effect mode. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Variation example 15)
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 15) will be described with reference to Fig. 158. Variable effect example 15 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 15 is a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start hole 121 being "2".
The variable effect shown in Figure 158 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 158 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."

Next, as shown in Fig. 158 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 158 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 158 (5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 158(6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the center decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and a motion effect is performed when the center decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(7), the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(8), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 159 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 15.
Figure 159 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 15.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 158 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 158 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the middle first number decoration portion 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the middle second number decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the middle first character decoration portion 415 in the 35th operation mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration portion 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 158 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the 6th operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 13th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 45th operating mode, the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operating mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operating mode, and the display of the middle first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operating mode end.
Also, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 158 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the 6th operating mode, and the left first character decoration section 415 displays one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, while the left first number decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode, the left second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 does not display one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, while the right first number decoration section 412 does not display for one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, the right second number decoration section 413 does not display for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, the right first character decoration section 415 does not display for one or more cycles in the thirty-ninth operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the forty-fifth operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

(Variation example 16)
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 16) will be described with reference to Fig. 160. Variable effect example 16 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 16 is a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start hole 121 being "3".
The variable effect shown in Figure 160 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 160 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, three reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "3."

Next, as shown in Fig. 160 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 160(5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 160(6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the center decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and a motion effect is performed when the center decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160(7), the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160(8), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 161 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation presentation example 16.
Figure 161 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 16.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the middle first number decoration portion 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the middle second number decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the middle first character decoration portion 415 in the 35th operation mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration portion 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the 6th operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 13th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 45th operating mode, the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operating mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operating mode, and the display of the middle first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operating mode end.
Also, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while executing a variable performance based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "3") (see Figure 161).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopped decorative pattern 41, and also to prevent the variable presentation from becoming redundant.

(Variation example 17)
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 17) will be described with reference to Fig. 162. Variable effect example 17 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 17 is a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start hole 121 being "4".
The variable effect shown in Figure 162 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 162 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."

Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the four reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 "314" stop, and a stop-time action effect is performed. That is, a stop-time action effect is performed by each of the three decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314," are fixed and stopped with the special symbol stop display. That is, all three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, the operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 70), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 109-1) that is different from the first cycle. In a specific variable effect (for example, variable effect example 14), the effect control unit 300 can at least display one or more cycles of the first operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, and display less than one cycle of the second operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 157, etc.).
In this case, one variable presentation can make it easier for the player to recognize the series of action displays by the decorative pattern 41, and can attract the player's interest in the display of more than one cycle by the second action mode of the decorative pattern 41.

In particular, the operation mode of the effect symbols includes a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 77). In the first variable effect (for example, variable effect example 15), the effect control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, and less than one cycle of display by the third operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 159, etc.). In the second variable effect (for example, variable effect example 14), the effect control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, and more than one cycle of display by the third operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 157, etc.).
In this case, the player can be interested in which operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed for one or more cycles for each variable performance.

The operational modes of the effect patterns include a first operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 70) that can be repeated by a first part (for example, number part 411) that is at least a part of decorative pattern 41, and a second operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 109-1) that can be repeated by a second part (for example, second character decorative part 416) that is different from the first part of decorative pattern 41. In a specific variable effect (for example, variable effect example 14), the effect control unit 300 can at least execute a display of one or more cycles by the first operational mode of the first part and a display of less than one cycle by the second operational mode of the second part (see FIG. 157, etc.).
In this case, one variable presentation can make it easier for the player to recognize the series of action displays by the first part, and also attract the player's interest in the display of one or more cycles by the second action mode of the second part.

In particular, the operational mode of the performance pattern includes a third operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 77) that can be repeated by the third part (first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41. The performance control unit 300 can execute, in the first variable performance (for example, variable performance example 15), at least one cycle or more of display by the first operational mode of the first part, less than one cycle of display by the second operational mode of the second part, and less than one cycle of display by the third operational mode of the third part (see FIG. 159, etc.). The performance control unit 300 can also execute, in the second variable performance (for example, variable performance example 14), at least one cycle or more of display by the first operational mode of the first part, less than one cycle of display by the second operational mode of the second part, and more than one cycle of display by the third operational mode of the third part (see FIG. 157, etc.).
In this case, the player can be interested in which part of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed for one or more cycles in which operating mode for each variable performance.

In addition, in the first variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in Figure 151), the performance control unit 300 is capable of not keeping any part of the decorative pattern 41 still (making any part of the decorative pattern 41 display in motion) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and in the second variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in Figure 156), it is capable of keeping at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the character part 414) still (not displaying in motion) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to notice any part of the decorative pattern 41, or varying the degree of emphasis depending on the components of the decorative pattern 41, depending on the variable presentation.

Furthermore, the manner of temporary stopping during the execution of the scattered miss variation effect in the second stage is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first variable presentation based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is a first number (e.g., 1, 2, etc.), one or more cycles are displayed by the sixth operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles are displayed by the thirteenth operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, and one or more cycles are displayed by the thirty-seventh operation mode of the left first character decoration section 415, while one or more cycles are not displayed by the seventeenth operation mode of the left second number decoration section 413, and one or more cycles are not displayed by the forty-fifth operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416 (see Figure 157).
On the other hand, in the second variable presentation based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is a second number (e.g., 3, 4, etc.) that is greater than the first number, one or more cycles of display are made by the 6th operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display are made by the 13th operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, one or more cycles of display are made by the 37th operation mode of the left first character decoration section 415, and one or more cycles of display are made by the 45th operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416, while one or more cycles of display are not made by the 17th operation mode of the left second number decoration section 413.

That is, in the second stage, for a display using a specific operating mode (for example, the 45th operating mode), a temporary stop of one or more cycles may not be performed in the first variable presentation, but a temporary stop of one or more cycles may be performed in the second variable presentation.
In this case, the first variation effect may be a random miss variation effect in which a specific effect is not executed, while the second variation effect may be a random miss variation effect in which a specific effect is executed. Examples of the specific effect include a reach stimulation effect, a zone stimulation effect, and a pseudo consecutive stimulation effect.
Furthermore, the specific operating mode in which a temporary stop of one or more cycles is not performed in the first variable performance, but a temporary stop of one or more cycles is performed in the second variable performance is not limited to the operating mode of the second character decoration unit 416, but may be the operating mode of the number unit 411, the operating mode of the number decoration unit (first number decoration unit 412, second number decoration unit 413), or the operating mode of the character unit 414.

(Example of variation 18)
163 and 164 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 18) will be described with reference to Figures 163 and 164. Variable effect example 18 is an example of a reach-miss variable effect based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
In addition, the variation effect example 18 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 163 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."

Next, as shown in Fig. 163 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 163 (5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "3", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, and a ready state is established.

Next, when the reach effect begins, a reach line image 501 is displayed, as shown in Figure 163 (7). At this time, a reach action effect is also performed. In the example shown, during the reach action effect, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415) are enlarged and displayed. At this time, the left and right second character decorative portions 416 are also hidden. With the start of the reach action effect, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 163 (8), the reach action presentation ends and the separation presentation begins.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (9), the separation effect ends, and with the left and right decorative patterns 41 separated, temporary stopping by the left and right decorative patterns 41 begins again.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (10), the middle decorative pattern 41 "4" temporarily stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (11), a close-up effect is performed. While the close-up effect is being performed, a portion of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, as will be described in detail later. At this time, the left and right second character decorative portions 416 are displayed again. At this time, the center decorative symbol 41 begins to be temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (12), the proximity effect ends, and the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the display positions at the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 163 (6)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (13), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 165 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 18.
Figure 165 shows the flow of movement of the decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 18.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, that is, the period from when the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops until the reach performance starts, no display is performed for more than one cycle in any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character decoration portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 45th operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (7) begins.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the 6th operating mode, the left first number decoration section 412 displays one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode, the left first character decoration section 415 displays one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode, while the left second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

Next, at time T4, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the 6th operating mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration sections 412 in the 13th operating mode, the display of the left and right second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, and the display of the left and right first character decoration sections 415 in the 37th operating mode are started again. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 164 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the left and right first number decoration parts 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the left and right second number decoration parts 413 in the 17th operation mode, and the display of the left and right first character decoration parts 415 in the 37th operation mode end. At this time, the display of the middle number part 411 in the 6th operation mode begins. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 164 (11) begins.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the left and right first number decoration parts 412 display for one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode, and the left and right first character decoration parts 415 display for one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, while the left and right second number decoration parts 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode.

Next, at time T6, the following displays begin: the three first number decorations 412 are displayed in the 13th operating mode, the three second number decorations 413 are displayed in the 17th operating mode, the three second character decorations 416 are displayed in the 45th operating mode, the left and right first character decorations 415 are displayed in the 37th operating mode, and the middle first character decorations 415 is displayed in the 39th operating mode. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 164 (12) begins.

Next, at time T7, the display of the three number sections 411 in the 6th operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 13th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 45th operating mode, the display of the left and right first character decoration sections 415 in the 37th operating mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operating mode end. Time T7 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 164 (13) begins.

During the period from time T4 to time T7, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed in the sixth operation mode for one or more periods.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T7, the middle numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles of the sixth operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T6 to time T7, no display is performed for more than one cycle in any of the 13th operating mode of the three first number decoration parts 412, the 17th operating mode of the three second number decoration parts 413, the 45th operating mode of the three second character decoration parts 416, the 37th operating mode of the left and right first character decoration parts 415, and the 39th operating mode of the middle first character decoration part 415.

As described above, in the variable performance example 18, while the temporary stop of the number section 411 continues, the temporary stop of the first number decoration section 412 may end (see time T6 in FIG. 165, etc.). In other words, the performance control section 300 can make the execution time of the temporary stop different between the first section (e.g., the number section 411) and the second section (e.g., the first number decoration section 412) of the decorative pattern 41.
In this case, the degree of emphasis can be made different between the first and second parts while drawing the player's attention to both the temporary stops in the first part and the temporary stops in the second part.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode (e.g., first stage), the performance control unit 300 can display the first part (e.g., number part 411) and the second part (e.g., first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 in at least a first operating mode (the operating mode shown in Figure 151 (3)), and during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode (e.g., second stage), the performance control unit 300 can display the first part in at least a second operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 70) and the second part in at least a third operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 77).
In this case, it is possible to switch between presenting the first and second parts in a unified manner or making it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts, depending on the presentation mode.
The first and second operation modes may be the same, or the first and third operation modes may be the same, i.e., the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific action performances using the decorative symbols 41 while variable performances are being executed, and can restrict the temporary stopping of the decorative symbols 41 while a specific action performance is being executed in the first performance mode (any of the first to third stages) (see, for example, time T3 in FIG. 165 ), and can execute the temporary stopping of the decorative symbols 41 while a specific action performance is being executed in the second performance mode (a stage different from the first performance mode among the first to third stages) (see, for example, time T3 in FIG. 129 ). Examples of specific action performances include a start action performance, a reach-inducing performance, a reach-in action performance, and an effect in which the doublet decorative symbols 41 are enlarged.
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped even while a specific action presentation is being executed, and making it easier for the player to focus on the specific action presentation by preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stop, depending on the presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific action performance using the decorative pattern 41 while a variable performance is being executed, and can execute a temporary stop of the first part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 while the specific action performance is being executed (see time T3 in FIG. 129 , etc.), and can restrict the temporary stop of the second part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41. Examples of the specific action performance include a start action performance, a reach-inducing performance, a reach-in action performance, an enlarged display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, etc.
In this case, the degree of emphasis of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of a specific action presentation can be varied depending on the constituent parts of the decorative pattern 41.

(Example of variation 19)
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 19) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 166. Variation presentation example 19 is a variation presentation based on winning at the first start slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which the SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effect shown in Figure 166 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 163 (1) to (8) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 166 (1), the separation effect ends, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 are separated, and temporary stopping by the left and right decorative patterns 41 begins again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166(2), the first transition image 502 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (3), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 503 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in reduced size and in both upper corners of the image display unit 114. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a less decorative display mode. At this time, the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is started again.
In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the SP reach performance is the same in the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 130 (3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (4), the center decorative symbol 41, "4," stops. The center decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right. At this time, the center decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Fig. 166(5), the second transitional image 504 is displayed. As the second transitional image 504 is displayed, the three decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see.

166(6), the second transition image 504 disappears, and the stage image 61 and the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 is resumed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (7), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

In addition, in variation presentation example 19, the manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start of the variation presentation until the end of the normal reach presentation (the start of the SP reach presentation) may be the same as that shown at time points T1 to T5 in FIG. 165. Additionally, in variation presentation example 19, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily ended by the start of display of the first transition image 502 at the timing shown at time point T5 in FIG. 165. In this case, the manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start of the variation presentation until the end of the normal reach presentation in variation presentation example 19 (the operation manner of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether a temporary stop of one or more cycles is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as that shown at time points T1 to T5 in FIG. 165 for the manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. Furthermore, during the period from the start of the normal reach presentation until the end of the normal reach presentation, the sixth operation manner of the left and right number sections 411 will be displayed for one or more cycles.
In addition, in the variation performance example 19, the temporary stop mode of the three decorative symbols 41 when the SP reach performance is being executed (the operation mode of the decorative symbols 41 and whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) is the same as the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols 41 shown at time points T1 to T3 in Fig. 131. In other words, a common SP reach performance may be executed in the first stage and the second stage.
In addition, in variable performance example 19, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed for each of the three decorative patterns 41 shown in Figure 166 (6) may be the same as that shown at time T8 in Figure 165 regarding the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display a specific part (e.g., the second number decorative part 413) that is at least a part of the performance pattern in motion at least in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in FIG. 81) before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, and can display a specific part (e.g., the number part 411) that is at least a part of the performance pattern and is different from the specific part in motion at least in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in FIG. 70) (see FIG. 165, etc.). Then, after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, the performance control unit 300 can display a specific part in motion at least in a first cycle, and can display a specific part in motion at least in a third cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in FIG. 67) (see FIG. 131, etc.). Examples of predetermined performances include normal reach performances and SP reach performances.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the effects of the specific part regardless of the progress of the variable performance, and to achieve a diversification of the effects of the specified part according to the progress of the variable performance.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, and before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, can display a specific portion (for example, the second number decorative portion 413) that is at least a part of the performance pattern in at least a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 81), and can display a specific portion (for example, the number portion 411) that is at least a part of the performance pattern and is different from the specific portion in at least a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 70) (see FIG. 165, etc.). Then, after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display the specific portion in at least a first operation mode, and can display the specific portion in at least a third operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 67) (see FIG. 131, etc.). Examples of predetermined performances include normal reach performances and SP reach performances.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the effects of the specific part regardless of the progress of the variable performance, and to achieve a diversification of the effects of the specified part according to the progress of the variable performance.

(Variation example 20)
FIG. 167 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 20) will be described with reference to Fig. 167. Variable effect example 20 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 167 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 158(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 167(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 167 (2), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
167(3), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, and the right decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in a rapidly changing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" and the center decorative pattern 41 "1" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 168 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 20.
Figure 168 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 20.
First, at time T1, the left first character decoration unit 415 starts displaying in the 37th operation mode and the left second character decoration unit 416 starts displaying in the 45th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 167(2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left numeral section 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the left first numeral decoration section 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the left second numeral decoration section 413 in the seventeenth operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 167 (3) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the right number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Also at this time, the display of the middle number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the middle first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operation mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 167 (4) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the 6th operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 13th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 45th operating mode, the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operating mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operating mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operating mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 167 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 37th operating mode of the left first character decoration unit 415, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 45th operating mode of the left second character decoration unit 416.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the left numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, and the left first numeral decoration section 412 displays one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, while the left second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

In the variable performance example 20, the timing at which the temporary stop starts is different for the left first character decoration section 415 and the left second character decoration section 416, and the left number section 411, the left first number decoration section 412 and the left second number decoration section 413, but this is not limited to this.
The left first character decoration portion 415 and the left second character decoration portion 416 may start a temporary stop at the timing of time T2 shown in FIG. 168 , similar to the left number portion 411, the left first number decoration portion 412, and the left second number decoration portion 413. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed (restricted) during the execution of the reach-inducing effect. Even in this case, in the variation effect example 20, the left first character decoration portion 415 may be displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode, and the left second character decoration portion 416 may be displayed for one or more cycles in the 45th operation mode.
168, the left number portion 411, the left first number decoration portion 412, and the left second number decoration portion 413 may start to temporarily stop at the timing of time T1 shown in Fig. 168, in the same manner as the left first character decoration portion 415 and the left second character decoration portion 416. Even in this case, in variation performance example 20, the left number portion 411 may be displayed for one or more cycles in the sixth operation mode, and the left first number decoration portion 412 may be displayed for one or more cycles in the thirteenth operation mode, while the left second number decoration portion 413 may not be displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operation mode.

(Variation example 21)
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 21) will be described with reference to Fig. 169. Variable effect example 21 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 169 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 158(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 169(1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 169 (2), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is performed. In the pseudo consecutive fanning effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 169 (3), the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed. In other words, the pseudo consecutive effect fails. In this case, the left decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, and the right decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in a high-speed variable manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" and the center decorative pattern 41 "1" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

In addition, the specific manner in which the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in variable performance example 21 (the operating manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as that shown at time points T1 to T4 in Figure 168 for the manner in which the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in variable performance example 20. In other words, the manner in which the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in variable performance example 21 is the same as that in variable performance example 20.

(Variation example 22)
170 to 173 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
170 to 173, another specific example (variation presentation example 22) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described. The variation presentation example 22 is a variation presentation based on winning the first start slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which the SPSP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 170 to 173 are variable effects that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, as shown in Figure 170 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in Fig. 170 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the two reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 170 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 170 (5), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is performed. In the pseudo consecutive fanning effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, if the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is successful, the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 is displayed in motion as shown in Figure 170 (6).
Next, as shown in FIG. 170(7), the three decorative patterns 41 are again displayed changing at high speed. At this time, a re-changing notification image 507 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the re-changing notification image 507 displays the text "x2."

Next, as shown in Figure 170 (8), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 171 (9), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Fig. 171 (10), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is performed. In the pseudo consecutive fanning effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 are displayed in a manner that causes them to sway up and down.
Next, if the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is successful, the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 is displayed in motion as shown in Figure 171 (11).

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (12), the three decorative patterns 41 are again displayed changing at high speed. At this time, a re-changing notification image 507 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the re-changing notification image 507 displays the text "x3."
Next, as shown in Figure 171 (13), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 171 (14), the right decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.

Next, when the reach effect starts, a reach line image 501 is displayed as shown in FIG. 171 (15). In the illustrated example, the reach line image 501 is displayed in gold. At this time, a reach action effect is performed. In the illustrated example, in the reach action effect, the left and right character portions 414 fold their arms and raise both hands. In addition, with the start of the reach action effect, the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative symbols 41 ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (16), a separation effect is executed, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 are separated, and temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is started again.
Next, as shown in Figure 172 (17), a zone swaying effect is performed. In the zone swaying effect, the zone symbols 58 are displayed in an up and down motion.

Next, if the zone excitement effect is successful, the zone pattern 58 is displayed in motion as shown in Figure 172 (18).
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (19), the zone execution image 59 is displayed in motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (20), the first transition image 502 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 become difficult to see.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (21), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 503 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reduced size in a less decorative display mode. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (22), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object second effect image 508 is also displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see.
Next, as shown in Fig. 172 (23), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the SPSP reach image 509 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114 in a size smaller than the display size during the execution of the SP reach effect (see Fig. 172 (21)). At this time, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is started again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (24), the deciding button operation presentation starts and a button operation image 510 is displayed.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the decide button operation effect, the three decorative symbols 41, "343," descend at a slow speed, as shown in FIG. 173 (25). At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are not temporarily stopped. That is, with the display of the center decorative symbol 41, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (26), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 173 (27), the second transitional image 504 is displayed. As the second transitional image 504 is displayed, the three decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see.

173 (28), the second transition image 504 disappears, and the stage image 61 and the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 is resumed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (29), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 174 is a chart showing the flow of the operational display of the presentation image performed in variable presentation example 22.
Figure 174 shows the flow of the display of the performance image in variable performance example 22.
Although not shown in the figure, in the variable performance example 22, first, display of the left number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 45th operation mode are started.

Next, at time T1, the display of the character portion 571 of the pseudo-repeated pattern 57 in the 48th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 170(6) starts.
Next, at time T2, the display of the character portion 571 of the pseudo-repeated pattern 57 in the 48th operation mode, the display of the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode, the display of the left number portion 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration portion 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the left second number decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the left first character decoration portion 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration portion 416 in the 45th operation mode end. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 170(7) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the pseudo-continuous pattern 57 displays one or more cycles in the 48th operating mode of the character section 571, one or more cycles in the 49th operating mode of the frame section 572, one or more cycles in the 6th operating mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode of the left first number decoration section 412, and one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode of the left first character decoration section 415, while the left second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the second character decoration section 416 does not display one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode.
Also, although not shown in the figure, after this, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed again (see Figure 171 (11) and (12)).

Next, at time T3, the display of the left number section 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, and the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 171 (13) starts.
Next, at time T4, the display of the character portion 581 in the zone design 58 in the 50th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (18) starts.

Next, at time T5, the display of the character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode end. At this time, the display of the band portion 591 in the zone execution image 59 in the 52nd operation mode and the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode begin. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (19) begins.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the character portion 581 displays one or more cycles of the 50th operation mode, and the frame portion 582 displays one or more cycles of the 51st operation mode.

At time T6, the display of the band portion 591 in the 52nd operation mode, the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode, the display of the left number portion 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the left first number decorative portion 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the left second number decorative portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, and the display of the left first character decorative portion 415 in the 37th operation mode all end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (20) starts.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the band portion 591 displays one or more cycles of the 52nd operation mode, and the decorative portion 592 displays one or more cycles of the 53rd operation mode.
In addition, during the period from time T3 to time T6, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, the left first number decoration section 412 displays for one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, the left second number decoration section 413 displays for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, and the left first character decoration section 415 displays for one or more cycles in the thirty-seventh operating mode.
Also, although not shown, the SP reach effect (see Figure 172 (21)) and the SPSP reach effect (see Figure 172 (23)) are executed after this.

Next, at time T7, the following operations are started: display of the three number portions 411 in the 6th operation mode, display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the 13th operation mode, display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 45th operation mode, display of the left and right first character decorative portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the center first character decorative portion 415 in the 39th operation mode. In addition, the temporary stop mode of the right decorative pattern 41 at time T7 is the same as that of the left decorative pattern 41 shown at time T7.
Also, time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 173 (28) begins.

Next, at time T8, the display of the three number portions 411 in the 6th operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the 13th operation mode, the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 45th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character decorative portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decorative portion 415 in the 39th operation mode are completed. In addition, the mode of temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 41 at time T8 (the operation mode at the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as that shown for the mode of temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 at time T8.
Also, time T8 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 173 (29) begins.

Here, during the period from time T7 to time T8, the three number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the 6th operating mode, the three first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the 13th operating mode, the left and right first character decoration sections 415 display one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, and the center first character decoration section 415 display one or more cycles in the 39th operating mode, while the three second number decoration sections 413 do not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the three second character decoration sections 416 do not display one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode.

In addition, in variable performance example 22, the temporary stopping mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 during execution of the SP reach performance (operation mode during temporary stopping, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as that shown at times T7 to T8 in Figure 146 for the temporary stopping mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41.
In addition, in the variation performance example 22, the manner in which the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped during the execution of the SPSP reach performance (the operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as that shown at time points T9 to T12 in Fig. 146 for the manner in which the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In other words, a common SPSP reach performance may be executed in the first stage and the second stage.

Furthermore, Figure 174 does not show the specific manner in which the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops during the execution of a normal reach effect. Here, the manner in which the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops during the execution of a normal reach effect (the operating manner in which the temporary stop occurs, whether the temporary stop occurs for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) is the same as the manner in which the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops at time T6 in Figure 174.

(Variation example 23)
175 and 176 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 23) will be described with reference to Figures 175 and 176. Variable effect example 23 is an example of a jackpot variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 23 is a variable performance that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable presentation examples and modified examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 170 (1) to (8), Figures 171 (9) to (16), and Figures 172 (17) to (23) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 175 (1), the deciding button operation effect begins and button operation image 510 is displayed.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the first jackpot highlight image 511 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 175 (2). At this time, the special effect is executed, and the middle movable special object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 175(3), the decorative symbol 41 of "333" is displayed in a smaller size than before the start of the reach effect in the variable effect (see Fig. 171(13)). At this time, the second jackpot highlight image 550 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(4), the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers is enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(5), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(6), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the second jackpot highlight image 550 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(7), a right-hit image 512 and a jackpot start image 513 are displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 175 (8), the jackpot game begins, and the round number image 514 and the round in progress image 515 are displayed. In the example shown, the round number image 514 displays the text "Round 1." At this time, the decorative pattern 41, "3," is also displayed, and a temporary stop is initiated.

Next, the big win game ends, and a time-saving start image 516 is displayed as shown in FIG. 176(9). At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is no longer displayed.
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 176 (10), the image display unit 114 displays the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness and the small symbol 56 "333". At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving gaming state. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121 displays "1". Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.

In addition, in variation presentation example 23, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (the operating manner during temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation to the start of the final button operation presentation is the same as in variation presentation example 22. In other words, in variation presentation example 23, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped may be the same as that shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 174, times T7 to T8 in FIG. 146, times T9 to T12 in FIG. 146, and times T7 to T8 in FIG. 174.

In addition, in variation presentation example 23, the manner in which the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start of the decide button operation presentation (see FIG. 175 (1)) until the end of the jackpot game is the same as the manner in which the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped as shown at times T1 to T5 in FIG. 149. In other words, when a jackpot variation presentation is executed in the first stage and when a jackpot variation presentation is executed in the second stage, the decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped in a common manner in the SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, and jackpot game.

Furthermore, the variable performances shown in variable performance example 22 and variable performance example 23 may be variable performances that are performed after a variable performance in which a pre-determination performance (such as a pre-start operation performance, a role performance, the display of role performance first effect image 505, and a chance eye performance) is performed, as in variable performance example 11 (see Figure 139) (a variable performance in which the operation display of the stopped performance pattern is limited for more than one cycle after the start of a specific performance).

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 70 ) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 69 ) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when the performance symbols are stopped during execution of variable performances, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during execution of variable performances. Examples of specific performances include a performance that stops the left decorative symbol 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-in performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number, and a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a double number.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects of the effect symbols according to the effect situation during the execution of the variable effect. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in FIG. 70) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in FIG. 69) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when the performance symbols are stopped during execution of the variable performance, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during execution of the variable performance. Examples of specific performances include a performance in which the left decorative symbol 41 is stopped, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, it is possible to realize a diversification of the effects by the effect symbols according to the effect situation during the execution of the variable effect. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can control performance modes including a first performance mode (for example, the first stage) and a second performance mode (for example, the second stage) different from the first performance mode, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 70) different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the effect symbols according to the effect mode. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can control performance modes including a first performance mode (for example, the first stage) and a second performance mode (for example, the second stage) different from the first performance mode, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 65) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in FIG. 70) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the effect symbols according to the effect mode. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The form of the decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned example.
For example, even in the first stage, the decoration pattern of the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, character portion 414, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416), the operation pattern at the temporary stop, and the period of the temporary stop may be the same as in the second stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may be capable of displaying less than one cycle in any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped while a variable performance is being executed based on the number of reserved symbols in the second stage being a first specific number (for example, "3") (see Figure 161, etc.), and may be capable of displaying more than one cycle in the left decorative pattern 41 by the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411, less than one cycle by the thirteenth operation mode of the first number decoration portion 412, less than one cycle by the seventeenth operation mode of the second number decoration portion 413, less than one cycle by the thirty-seventh operation mode of the first character decoration portion 415, and less than one cycle by the forty-fifth operation mode of the second character decoration portion 416 while a variable performance is being executed based on the number of reserved symbols in the first stage being a first specific number.
Furthermore, during the execution of the variable presentation based on the fact that the reserved number in the second stage is a second specific number (for example, "2"), the presentation control unit 300 displays, among the left decorative pattern 41, one or more cycles of the number portion 411 in the sixth operation mode, one or less cycles of the first number decorative portion 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, one or less cycles of the second number decorative portion 413 in the seventeenth operation mode, one or less cycles of the first character decorative portion 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode, and one or less cycles of the second character decorative portion 416 in the forty-fifth operation mode. During the execution of the variable performance based on the fact that the reserved number in the first stage is the second specific number, it may be possible to execute the following among the left decorative pattern 41: display of one or more cycles by the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411; display of one or more cycles by the thirteenth operation mode of the first number decoration portion 412; display of less than one cycle by the seventeenth operation mode of the second number decoration portion 413; display of less than one cycle by the thirty-seventh operation mode of the first character decoration portion 415; and display of less than one cycle by the forty-fifth operation mode of the second character decoration portion 416.
Furthermore, during the execution of the variable presentation based on the fact that the reserved number in the second stage is a second specific number (for example, "2"), the presentation control unit 300 displays, among the left decorative pattern 41, one or more cycles of the number portion 411 in the sixth operation mode, one or less cycles of the first number decorative portion 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, one or less cycles of the second number decorative portion 413 in the seventeenth operation mode, one or less cycles of the first character decorative portion 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode, and one or less cycles of the second character decorative portion 416 in the forty-fifth operation mode. During the execution of the variable performance based on the fact that the reserved number in the first stage is the second specific number, it may be possible to execute the following among the left decorative pattern 41: display of one or more cycles by the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411; display of less than one cycle by the thirteenth operation mode of the first number decoration portion 412; display of less than one cycle by the seventeenth operation mode of the second number decoration portion 413; display of one or more cycles by the thirty-seventh operation mode of the first character decoration portion 415; and display of less than one cycle by the forty-fifth operation mode of the second character decoration portion 416.

In the above example, it has been explained that the character part 414 does not temporarily stop during the execution of the normal reach effect in the second stage (FIGS. 163 to 165), but this is not limiting. During the execution of the normal reach effect in the second stage, the character part 414 may temporarily stop (for example, a periodic display in the same operating mode of the character part 414 as during the execution of the normal reach effect in the first stage).
In this case, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a predetermined presentation (reach presentation) while a variable presentation is being executed, and before the start of the predetermined presentation while the variable presentation is being executed, it can make at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the character portion 414) still (not display any movement) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (see FIGS. 163 to 165, etc.), and after the start of the predetermined presentation while the variable presentation is being executed, it is possible to not make any part of the decorative pattern 41 still (make any part of the decorative pattern 41 display any movement) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to switch between making any part of the decorative pattern 41 easy for the player to notice, or varying the degree of emphasis depending on the components of the decorative pattern 41, depending on the progress of the variable presentation.
Furthermore, in a first variable effect (e.g., a reach variable effect), the effect control unit 300 can keep any part of the decorative pattern 41 still (all parts of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in motion) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and in a second variable effect (e.g., a miss variable effect), it can keep at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (e.g., the character portion 414) still (no motion is displayed) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In this case, it is possible to switch between making any part of the decorative pattern 41 easy for the player to notice, or varying the degree of emphasis depending on the components of the decorative pattern 41, depending on the variable effect.

(Variation example 24)
FIG. 177 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 177, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 24) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable effect example 24 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the second start opening 122 in a time-saving game state. Also, variable effect example 24 is a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the second start opening 122 being "1".
The variable effect shown in Figure 177 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.
In addition, each of the change presentation examples from change presentation example 24 to change presentation example 31 described later is a change presentation example when the change begins in the third stage.

As shown in Figure 177 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, a less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, right-hit image 512, and a stage image 61 corresponding to the third stage (third performance mode). At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122.

Next, as shown in Figure 177 (2), the special symbol starts to change, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 change at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177(3), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. That is, all three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Although variation effect example 24 has been described as a random miss variation effect based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-saving play state, it is not limited to this. The same variation effect as variation effect example 24 may be executed regardless of the value (any value from "1" to "4") of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 in the time-saving play state. In other words, in a random miss variation effect based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-saving play state, the decorative pattern 41 may not be temporarily stopped, regardless of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one or more cycles while a variable performance is being performed in a specific performance mode (for example, the third stage).
In this case, in a specific presentation mode, it becomes possible to execute a variable presentation with a short execution time, which gives the player a sense of speed in the variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in the variable performance in the third stage, no temporary stop is executed for any of the decorative symbols 41. That is, the performance control unit 300 can restrict the temporary stop of any of the three decorative symbols 41 during the execution of the variable performance in a specific performance mode (for example, the third stage).
In this case, the execution time of the variable effect in the third stage can be shortened by the time required for the temporary stop, thereby giving the player a stronger sense of speed in the variable effect.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 24)
In the above example, it was explained that in the scattered miss variable presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without stopping temporarily (see Figure 177 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
Figure 178 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 24.

178(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "137", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 178 (2), the special symbol starts to change, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 change at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.

Next, as shown in Fig. 178 (3), the three decorative patterns 41, "314," begin to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustration is omitted, at this time, the display of the three number portions 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the twentieth operation mode (see Fig. 84) begin.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(4), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
In this modified example, in any part of the three decorative patterns 41 where temporary stops are made, temporary stops are made for less than one cycle.

In this way, even in the case of a scattered miss variable effect based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped.
178 shows a variation effect of a random miss based on the reserved number for winning into the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened game state, but is not limited to this. In the variation effect of a random miss based on the reserved number for winning into the second start port 122 being any value (any value from "1" to "4") in the time-shortened game state, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while executing a variable performance based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number in a specific performance mode (for example, the third stage) (see Figure 178).
In this case, in a specific presentation mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopped decorative pattern 41 and to realize a speedy changing presentation.

(Variation example 25)
FIG. 179 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
179, a specific description will be given of a variation effect (variation effect example 25) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variation effect example 25 is an example of a random miss variation effect based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 179 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

179(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "137", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 179 (2), the special symbol starts to change, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 change at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(3), a first tilt-up image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 179 (4), the three decorative patterns 41, "314", begin to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustration is omitted, at this time, the display of the three number portions 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the twentieth operation mode begin.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
Note that, in the variation presentation example 25, a random miss variation presentation is shown based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened game state, but is not limited to this. The same presentation as the variation presentation example 25 may be executed even if the random miss variation presentation is based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being any value (any value from "1" to "4") in the time-shortened game state. However, in the variation presentation example 25, a display of less than one cycle is performed in any part of the decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped.

As described above, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 in the variable presentation in the time-shortened game state, but limits the temporary stop to more than one cycle.
In this case, even in the variable presentation during the time-shortened game state, it is possible to realize diversification of the presentation by the decorative pattern 41, while preventing the variable presentation from becoming redundant.

(Variation example 26)
FIG. 180 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 180, a specific description will be given of a variation effect (variation effect example 26) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variation effect example 26 is an example of a random miss variation effect based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 180 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH5" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

180(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "137", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 180 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(3), a second tilt image 518 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180(4), the three decorative patterns 41 "314" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180(5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 181 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 26.
Figure 181 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 26.
First, at time T1, the display of the three number portions 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the twentieth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 180(4) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three number portions 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the twentieth operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 180(5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the three number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, while the three first number decoration sections 412 do not display one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, and the three second number decoration sections 413 do not display one or more cycles in the twentieth operating mode.

Note that, while variation presentation example 26 shows a random miss variation presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning at second start port 122 being "1" in the time-saving play state, this is not limited to this. The same presentation as variation presentation example 26 may be executed regardless of the value of the reserved balls for winning at second start port 122 being "1" in the time-saving play state (any value between "1" and "4").

As described above, the presentation control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles even in the variable presentation during the time-saving game mode.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 even during the variable presentation in the time-saving game state.

In addition, during the execution of a variable presentation in the time-shortened game state, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle if a predetermined presentation (for example, display of the first teasing image 517) is performed (see Figure 179), and can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 for one cycle or more if a specific presentation (for example, display of the second teasing image 518) is performed (see Figure 180), and can limit the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 if neither the predetermined presentation nor the specific presentation is performed (see Figure 177).
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects of the decorative symbols 41 depending on whether or not there is an effect during the execution of the variable effect in the time-saving game state.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying at least one cycle of two operating modes with different periods (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 70 and the operating mode shown in Figure 77) while a variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode (any of the first to third stages) (see Figure 157, etc.), and is capable of displaying at least one cycle of one operating mode of two operating modes with different periods (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 70 and the operating mode shown in Figure 77) and displaying less than one cycle of the other operating mode while a variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode (any of the first to third stages that is different from the first performance mode) (see Figure 181, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between making the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 easier for the player to recognize, or preventing the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 from drawing excessive attention from the player, depending on the presentation mode.

The operational modes of the performance symbols include a first operational mode (e.g., the operational mode shown in FIG. 70) that can be repeated by a first part (e.g., the number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative symbol 41, and a second operational mode (e.g., the operational mode shown in FIG. 77) that can be repeated by a second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) that is different from the first part of the decorative symbol 41. The performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operational mode of the first part and one cycle or more of display by the second operational mode of the second part during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode (any of the first to third stages) (see FIG. 157, etc.), and can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operational mode of the first part and one cycle or less of display by the second operational mode of the second part during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode (one of the first to third stages that is different from the first performance mode) (see FIG. 181, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between making the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 easier for the player to recognize, or preventing the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 from drawing excessive attention from the player, depending on the presentation mode.

(Variation example 27)
FIG. 182 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
182, a specific description will be given of a variation effect (variation effect example 27) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variation effect example 27 is an example of a random miss variation effect based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 182 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH6" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

182(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "137", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 182 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. In addition, the two reserved images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 182 (3), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner that causes them to sway up and down. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are not temporarily stopped.
182(4), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed again in a high-speed variably manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314," are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the special symbol. That is, all three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

(Variation example 28)
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
183, a specific description will be given of a variation effect (variation effect example 28) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variation effect example 28 is an example of a random miss variation effect based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 183 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH7" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

First, the same effect as shown in Figure 182 (1) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 183 (1), the variable effect begins as the special symbol begins to change, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 are displayed changing at high speed. In addition, two pending images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, with the first pending image 52 moving to the display position of the changing image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 183 (2), a reach prompting effect is performed. In the reach prompting effect, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed as if they are swaying up and down. At this time, the left decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at this time, the left number portion 411 begins to display in the sixth operation mode, the left first number decorative portion 412 begins to display in the thirteenth operation mode, and the left second number decorative portion 413 begins to display in the twentieth operation mode.

183(3), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed again in a high-speed variably manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 183(4), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in variation performance example 28, the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In this case, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle (a display of less than one cycle will be performed).

(Variation example 29)
FIG. 184 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
184, a specific description will be given of a variation effect (variation effect example 29) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variation effect example 29 is an example of a random miss variation effect based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 184 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

First, the same effect as shown in Figure 182 (1) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 184 (1), the variable effect begins as the special symbol begins to change, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 are displayed changing at high speed. In addition, two pending images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, with the first pending image 52 moving to the display position of the changing image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 184 (2), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (3), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the right decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in a high-speed varying manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(4), the right decorative pattern 41 "4" and the center decorative pattern 41 "1" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (5), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 185 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 29.
Figure 185 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 29.
First, at time T1, the display of the left numeral section 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the left first numeral decoration section 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the left second numeral decoration section 413 in the twentieth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 184 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the right number section 411 and the center number section 411 start to display in the sixth operating mode, the right first number decoration section 412 and the center first number decoration section 412 start to display in the thirteenth operating mode, and the right second number decoration section 413 and the center second number decoration section 413 start to display in the twentieth operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 184 (4) starts.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three number portions 411 in the sixth operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the thirteenth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the twentieth operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 184 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, and the left first number decoration section 412 displays one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, while the left second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the twentieth operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right after a specific provocative presentation (such as a reach provocative presentation) has failed during the execution of a variable presentation in the time-saving game state.
In this case, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop, the player can be made to recognize that a specific promotional effect has failed.

In addition, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of executing a temporary stop of at least one cycle or more of at least a portion of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting presentation (such as a reach exciting presentation) has failed during the execution of a variable presentation in a time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of restricting the provisional stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 after a specific provocative presentation (such as a reach provocative presentation) has failed during execution of a variable presentation in the time-shortened gaming state. Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of restricting the provisional stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 during a variable presentation in which a specific provocative presentation (such as a reach provocative presentation) has failed during the time-shortened gaming state.

In addition, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using the middle decorative pattern 41 after a specific exciting presentation (such as a reach exciting presentation) has failed during the execution of a variable presentation in the time-shortened game state.
In this case, even if a specific promotional effect fails, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of executing a temporary stop of at least one cycle by at least a part of the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) after a specific exciting presentation (such as a reach exciting presentation) has failed during the execution of a variable presentation in a time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of restricting the temporary stopping of the middle decorative pattern 41 after a specific exciting presentation (such as a reach exciting presentation) has failed during execution of a variable presentation in the time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of restricting the temporary stopping of the middle decorative pattern 41 during a variable presentation in which a specific exciting presentation (such as a reach exciting presentation) has failed during the time-shortened game state.

(Variation example 30)
186 and 187 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
186 and 187, a specific description will be given of a variation effect (variation effect example 30) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variation effect example 30 is a variation effect based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 in a time-saving game state, and is an example of a miss variation effect in which an SPSP reach effect is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 186 and 187 are variable effects that are executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

186(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "137", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 186 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. In addition, the two reserved images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 186 (3), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (4), a reach effect is executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect is successful. In this case, the reach-time action effect is started. In the example shown, in the reach-time action effect, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed in an action extending in the vertical direction in the figure. Also, at this time, the right decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186 ( 5 ), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size and are moved toward the upper left side of the image display section 114 .
186(6), the SPSP reach effect starts, and an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the image display section 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(7), the deciding button operation presentation starts and a button operation image 510 is displayed.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect, a post-button image 519 is displayed as shown in Fig. 186 (8). At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(9), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number "343" starts to temporarily stop.

187(10), a third transitional image 520 is displayed. In addition, with the display of the third transitional image 520, the decorative symbols 41 of the missing combination and the SPSP reach image 509 are no longer displayed.
187(11), the missing decorative symbol 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed again. Also, the missing decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (12), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 188 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 30.
Figure 188 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 30.
The temporary stop state shown at time T1 is the temporary stop state of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T1, the display of the left first numeral decorative portion 412 in the 13th operation state and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 20th operation state are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 186 (3) starts.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T2, display by the operation mode of the left number portion 411 begins. Also, at this time, display by the 20th operation mode of the left second number decorative portion 413 ends, and display by the 21st operation mode of the left second number decorative portion 413 begins. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 186 (4) begins.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left second numeral decoration portion 413 does not display for more than one cycle in the twentieth operation mode.
Also, although not shown in the figure, at time T2, display in the sixth operating mode of the right numeral section 411, display in the thirteenth operating mode of the right first numeral decoration section 412, and display in the twenty-first operating mode of the right second numeral decoration section 413 begin.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the sixth operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the thirteenth operation state, and the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the twenty-first operation state end. Also, at this time, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the fourth operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the eleventh operation state, and the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the eighteenth operation state begin. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 186 (6) begins.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the sixth operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the thirteenth operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the twenty-first operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413.

The temporary stop state shown at time T4 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the fourth operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the eleventh operation state, and the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the eighteenth operation state end. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 186 (8) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the left and right number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the fourth operating mode, the left and right first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the 11th operating mode, and the left and right second number decoration sections 413 display one or more cycles in the 18th operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T5 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T5, the display of the three number sections 411 in the fourth operation state, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the eleventh operation state, and the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the eighteenth operation state begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (9) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T6 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T6, the display of the three number portions 411 in the fourth operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the eleventh operation state, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the eighteenth operation state end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 187 (10) starts.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the three number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the fourth operating mode, and the three first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the eleventh operating mode, while the three second number decoration sections 413 do not display one or more cycles in the eighteenth operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T7 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T7, display of the three number sections 411 in the sixth operation state, display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the thirteenth operation state, and display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the twentieth operation state begin. Time T7 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (11) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T8 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T8, the display of the three number portions 411 in the sixth operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the thirteenth operation state, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the twentieth operation state end. Time T8 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 187 (12) starts.
Here, during the period from time T7 to time T8, the three number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the sixth operating mode, and the three first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the thirteenth operating mode, while the three second number decoration sections 413 do not display one or more cycles in the twentieth operating mode.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while a variable performance is being executed, can limit the display of the stopped performance symbols for at least one cycle or more before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can execute the display of the stopped performance symbols for at least one cycle or more after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include reach stimulation performances, zone stimulation performances, zone performances, pseudo consecutive stimulation performances, pseudo consecutive performances, performances in which the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, reach performances, etc.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using effect symbols according to the effect situation during the execution of the variable effect. Also, since the effect symbols are more likely to be noticed by the player after the start of the predetermined effect than before the start of the predetermined effect, it is possible to increase the interest in the game as the variable effect progresses.

In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during execution of a variable effect in the time-saving game state, the effect control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 from the time when the middle decorative symbol 41 starts to be displayed (see Figure 187 (9)).

In addition, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 70) and a second operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 81), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of displaying the decorative pattern 41 in at least a first operating mode and a third operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 84).
In this case, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operating mode makes it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the presentation mode, and the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the second operating mode and the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the third operating mode can achieve diversification of presentations according to the presentation mode.

In particular, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing at least a display of the first part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 70) and a display of the second part (e.g., the second number decorative part 413) in a second operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 81), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), is capable of executing at least a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode and a display of the second part in a third operating mode (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 84).
In this case, the operation display of the first part makes it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the presentation mode, and the operation display of the second part makes it possible to diversify the presentation according to the presentation mode.

In addition, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing at least an operation display based on the first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 70) of the decorative pattern 41 and an operation display based on the second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 81), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of executing at least an operation display based on the first cycle of the decorative pattern 41 and an operation display based on the third cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 84).
In this case, the operation display based on the first cycle of the decorative pattern 41 makes it easier for the player to recognize the status of the presentation regardless of the presentation mode, and the operation display based on the second cycle of the decorative pattern 41 and the operation display based on the third cycle of the decorative pattern 41 can realize diversification of presentations according to the presentation mode.

In particular, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing at least an operation display based on the first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 70) of the first part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 and an operation display based on the second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 81) of the second part (e.g., the second number decorative part 413), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of executing at least an operation display based on the first cycle of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 and an operation display based on the third cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 84) of the second part.
In this case, the operation display of the first part makes it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the presentation mode, and the operation display of the second part makes it possible to diversify the presentation according to the presentation mode.

In addition, the variable performances that the performance control unit 300 can execute in one performance mode (for example, the third stage) include a variable performance (see Figure 177) that can limit the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 while the variable performance is being executed, a variable performance (see Figure 178) that can execute a temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while the variable performance is being executed, and a variable performance (see Figures 186 to 188) that can execute a temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 for one cycle or more while the variable performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to diversify temporary stops in one presentation mode without complicating the presentation.

(Variation example 31)
189-1 and 189-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, referring to Figures 189-1 and 189-2, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 31) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 31 is an example of a jackpot variable effect based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effects shown in Figures 189-1 and 189-2 are variable effects that are executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 186(1) to (6) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 189-1(1), the deciding button operation effect begins and a button operation image 510 is displayed.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decision button operation effect, a success image 521 is displayed as shown in FIG. 189-1(2).
Next, as shown in FIG. 189-1 (3), the third jackpot highlight image 522 is displayed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 189-1 (4), the decorative pattern 41 of the same number "333" is displayed in a size smaller than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the start of the reach performance (see Figure 186 (3)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 189-1(5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189-1(6), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189-1 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the third jackpot highlight image 522 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189-1 (8), a jackpot start image 513 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189-2(9), a jackpot game starts, and a round number image 514 and a round-in-progress image 515 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the round number image 514 displays the text "Round 1." At this time, the decorative symbol 41, "3," is displayed, and a temporary stop is initiated.

Next, the big win game ends, and the time-saving start image 516 is displayed as shown in FIG. 189-2 (10). At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed.
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness and the small symbol 56, "333," are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 189-2 (11). In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "1."

Figure 190 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 31.
Figure 190 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 31.
Although not shown in the drawings, in the variation performance example 31, the SPSP reach performance starts after the reach performance. When the SPSP reach performance starts, the display of the left and right number parts 411 in the fourth operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration parts 412 in the eleventh operation mode, and the display of the left and right second number decoration parts 413 in the eighteenth operation mode start.

The temporary stop state shown at time T1 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the fourth operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the eleventh operation state, and the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the eighteenth operation state end. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 189-1 (3) starts.
Here, during the period from the start of the SPSP reach performance to time T1, one or more cycles of display are made by the fourth operation mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are made by the eleventh operation mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are made by the eighteenth operation mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413.

The temporary stop state shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the three number portions 411 in the seventh operating state (see Figure 71), the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the fourteenth operating state (see Figure 78), and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the twenty-second operating state (see Figure 86) begin. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 189-1 (6) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the three number portions 411 in the seventh operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the fourteenth operation state, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the twenty-second operation state end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 189-1 (7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the three number sections 411 in the seventh operating mode, one or more cycles of display are performed by the three first number decoration sections 412 in the fourteenth operating mode, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the three second number decoration sections 413 in the twenty-second operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 189-2(9) starts.
Next, at time T5, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 189-2 (10) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the eighth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.

In addition, in variable performance example 31, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) from the start of the variable performance until the start of the SPSP reach performance is the same as in variable performance example 30 (see Figure 188). In other words, in variable performance example 31, the decorative pattern 41 may temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T3 in Figure 188, and then temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T5 in Figure 190.

Furthermore, the manner in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the third stage is not limited to the example shown in FIG.
During the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in the jackpot variation presentation in the third stage, the number section 411 may display one or more cycles in the seventh operation mode, and the first number decorative section 412 may display one or more cycles in the fourteenth operation mode, while the second number decorative section 413 may display less than one cycle in the 22nd operation mode.
In addition, while the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the jackpot variation presentation in the third stage, a temporary stop (movement display) is performed by the number section 411 and the first number decorative section 412, while the temporary stop by the second number decorative section 413 is restricted (stationary).

Next, a modified example of the timing of the temporary stop by the decorative symbol 41 of double numbers will be described.
FIG. 191 shows a modified example of the timing of temporary stop by the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 186(1) to (6) and Figures 189(1) and (2) are performed, and then the third jackpot highlight image 522 is displayed as shown in Figure 191(1). At this time, the bonus effect is executed, and the middle movable bonus object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 191 (2), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "333" is displayed in a size smaller than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the start of the reach effect (see Figure 186 (3)). At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the display of the three number portions 411 in the seventh operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the fourteenth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the twenty-second operation mode begin (see time point T2 in Figure 190).

Next, as shown in Fig. 191(3), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the doublet decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in Fig. 191(4), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the doublet decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 189-1 (7) and (8) and Figure 189-2 (9) to (11) are performed.
In this way, the temporary stop by the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be started when the doublet decorative pattern 41 starts to be displayed (while the display size is changing).

Next, a modified example of the presentation mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable presentation starts in the time-shortened game state will be described.
Figure 192 shows a modified example of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable presentation starts in the time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 192 (1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "137" are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting slot 122 shows "2."

Next, as shown in Figure 192 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the small symbol 56 is displayed variable at high speed. In addition, the two reserved images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
At this time, a start-up action effect is performed. In the start-up action effect, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an upward motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 192(3), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a rapidly changing manner.

In this way, even in the time-saving game state, the start-up action presentation may be executed in the variable presentation.
In addition, in the normal game state, the display of the operation mode when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped may be performed as the start-up operation effect (see Figure 150 (2)), whereas in the time-saving game state, the display of the operation mode when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped is not performed as the start-up operation effect.

(Aspects of the display of the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance)
Next, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed while the customer waiting performance is being performed will be described.
Figure 193 shows the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed while the customer waiting performance is being performed.

As shown in Figure 193 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 also displays the hold number display 55, small symbol 56, and stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage (first performance mode). In addition, the hold number display 55 of the first start gate 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second start gate 122 both show "0".

Then, when the time-out period (e.g., 10 seconds) elapses after the start of the stop display of the special symbol without a game ball entering either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and a customer waiting effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 193 (2). While the customer waiting effect is being executed, no sound is output from the speaker 156. Furthermore, with the start of the customer waiting effect, the three decorative symbols 41 begin to display their movements.
Next, after the customer waiting performance has started, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed during which no game ball has entered either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the decorative pattern 41 will cease to display motion and will become stationary, as shown in Figure 193 (3).

Next, when a specific time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 came to a standstill without a game ball entering either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the decorative pattern 41 will again begin to display movement, as shown in Figure 193 (4).
After this, the effects shown in Figures 193 (3) and (4) are repeated as time passes after the customer waiting effect has started and no game ball has entered either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122.

Figure 194 is a chart showing the flow of action displays performed during the customer waiting performance.
Figure 194 shows the flow of action display in the customer waiting performance.
First, at time T1, the display of the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92) of the left character section 414, the 38th operation mode (see FIG. 102) of the left first character decoration section 415, and the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416 are initiated. Also at this time, the display of the 31st operation mode (see FIG. 95) of the right character section 414, the 40th operation mode (see FIG. 104) of the right first character decoration section 415, and the 43rd operation mode of the right second character decoration section 416 are initiated. Also at this time, the display of the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89) of the center character section 414, the 36th operation mode (see FIG. 100) of the center first character decoration section 415, and the 43rd operation mode of the center second character decoration section 416 are initiated. Also at time T1, the effect shown in FIG. 193 (2) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display by the 28th operation mode of the left character section 414, the display by the 38th operation mode of the left first character decoration section 415, and the display by the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416 end. Also at this time, the display by the 31st operation mode of the right character section 414, the display by the 40th operation mode of the right first character decoration section 415, and the display by the 43rd operation mode of the right second character decoration section 416 end. Also at this time, the display by the 25th operation mode of the middle character section 414, the display by the 36th operation mode of the middle first character decoration section 415, and the display by the 43rd operation mode of the middle second character decoration section 416 end. Also, time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 193 (3) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 28th operating mode of the left character section 414, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 38th operating mode of the left first character decoration section 415, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 43rd operating mode of the left second character decoration section 416.
In addition, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the right character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 31st operating mode, the right first character decoration section 415 displays for one or more cycles in the 40th operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 25th operation mode of the middle character section 414, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 36th operation mode of the middle first character decoration section 415, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 43rd operation mode of the middle second character decoration section 416.

As described above, during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the effect pattern has a portion that does not display an action (e.g., the number portion 411) and a portion that displays an action (e.g., the character portion 414). That is, the effect control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., the number portion 411) in the effect pattern and a second element (e.g., the character portion 414) that is different from the first element, and in a specific effect state (e.g., the customer waiting state), it can limit the display of the action of one of the first and second elements for one or more cycles, and can display the action of the other element for one or more cycles.
In this case, in a specific presentation state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the other of the first and second elements, which is capable of performing an action display for one or more cycles, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., number portion 411) in the performance pattern and a second element (e.g., character portion 414) different from the first element, and the performance states in which a performance can be executed include a first performance state (e.g., a state waiting for customers) and a second performance state different from the first performance state (e.g., a state in which a variable performance is being executed).In the first performance state, the performance control unit 300 can limit the operation display of one of the first and second elements for one or more cycles and execute the operation display of the other element for one or more cycles, and in the second performance state, can execute the operation display of the first element for one or more cycles and the operation display of the second element for one or more cycles.
In this case, the player can be drawn to the presentation image that can be periodically displayed in both the first presentation state and the second presentation state, and by varying the degree of emphasis of the first element and the second element depending on the presentation state, it is possible to achieve a variety of presentations according to the presentation state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Modification of the display mode of the decorative pattern)
Next, modified examples of the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
The display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is not limited to that shown in Figures 64-1 and 64-2.
Figure 195 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the decorative pattern 41.

In this modified example, in the first stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 195 (1).
In this modification, the first numeral decorative portion 412 of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 has a sawtooth-shaped outer shape and is white, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 has a cross-shaped outer shape and is white.
In addition, the number section 411, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 have the same display form as the number section 411, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 shown in association with the "first stage" in Figures 64-1 and 64-2.
In addition, among the highly decorative decorative patterns 41 displayed in the first stage, the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, and the second character decorative portion 416 have a common display mode regardless of the numbers of the decorative patterns 41.

In a modified example, a less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 195 (2). This less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41, and in the time-saving game state (third stage), etc.
In this modified example, the number portion 411 in the less decorative design 41 is displayed in a different manner from the number portion 411 in the more decorative design 41. That is, the number portion 411 in the more decorative design 41 (see FIG. 195(1)) and the number portion 411 in the less decorative design 41 are displayed in different manners even though they represent a common number ("1" in the illustrated example).
In this modification, the first numeral decorative portion 412 in the less decorative design 41 is circular and blue, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 is cross-shaped, with each end of the cross being circular.
In addition, among the less decorative decorative patterns 41, the first number decorative portion 412 and the second number decorative portion 413 have a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in a modified example, in the second stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 195 (3).
Here, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 have the same display form as the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 shown in association with the "second stage" in Figures 64-1 and 64-2.
In addition, among the highly decorative patterns 41 displayed in the second stage, the first number decoration portion 412, the second number decoration portion 413, and the second character decoration portion 416 have a common display mode regardless of the numbers of the decorative patterns 41.

In this way, the display mode of the first numeral decorative portion 412 and the display mode of the second numeral decorative portion 413 in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 may be different between the first stage and the second stage.
Furthermore, the display mode of the number portion 411, the display mode of the first number decorative portion 412, and the display mode of the second number decorative portion 413 may differ between a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and a less decorative decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in one stage (first stage, second stage), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 195(4). In the example shown in FIG. 195(4), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 195(1), and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 195(2). That is, the display manner of the first number decorative portion 412 and the display manner of the second number decorative portion 413 may be different between the first decorative pattern 41 (e.g., the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41) and the second decorative pattern 41 (e.g., the middle decorative pattern 41) of the three decorative patterns 41.
In addition, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be provided with a character portion 414, a first character decorative portion 415, and a second character decorative portion 416, while the middle decorative pattern 41 may not be provided with the character portion 414, the first character decorative portion 415, and the second character decorative portion 416.

Even when decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 195, the manner of temporary stop (operational manner during temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as that explained in each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples and modified examples.

Next, a modified example of the manner of temporary stopping by the number portion 411 will be described.
In the above example, when the number portion 411 is displayed in one operating mode during a temporary stop, it is displayed in a common operating mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
Fig. 196 is a diagram showing a modified example of the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411. In the example shown in Fig. 196, the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411 of "4" which is the decorative design 41 will be described.

In this modified example, at the start of the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode, as shown in FIG. 196(1), the luminous image simulating light is not displayed.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses, an illuminating image simulating light is displayed below the number portion 411, as shown in FIG. 196(2).
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses further, as shown in Fig. 196(3), the luminous image rises in the number section 411. More specifically, the luminous image rises from the display area shown in Fig. 196(2) beyond a portion of the number section 411 in the vertical direction.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses further, the luminous image rises further in the number section 411 as shown in FIG. 196(4).

Furthermore, as the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode progresses further, the illuminated image disappears as shown in FIG. 196 (5), thereby completing one cycle of display in the sixth operation mode of the number section 411. Furthermore, even after this, while the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode continues, the illuminated image will repeatedly be displayed in the operation modes shown in FIG. 196 (2) to (5), thereby periodically causing the temporary stop in the sixth operation mode of the number section 411.

In this way, when the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed, the illuminated image rises continuously (see (2) to (4) in Figure 70), whereas when the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed, the illuminated image rises discontinuously (see (2) to (4) in Figure 196). In other words, the sixth operation mode of the number portion 411 differs depending on the number of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the operating mode of the first number decoration portion 412 during a temporary stop may also differ depending on the number of the decorative pattern 41 displayed. As an example, the operating mode may differ between a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., the ninth operating mode) by the first number decoration portion 412 on the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") and a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., the ninth operating mode) by the first number decoration portion 412 on the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4").

Furthermore, the operating mode of the second number decoration portion 413 in the temporary stop may differ depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41. As an example, the operating mode may differ between a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., 16th operating mode) by the second number decoration portion 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") and a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., 16th operating mode) by the second number decoration portion 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4").

Furthermore, the operation mode of the second character decoration section 416 at the temporary stop may differ depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41. As an example, the operation mode may differ between a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., 43rd operation mode) by the second character decoration section 416 at the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") and a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., 43rd operation mode) by the second character decoration section 416 at the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4").

Furthermore, the operational mode of the temporary stop may differ for the entire decorative pattern 41 depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41. For example, the operational mode may differ between a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., 46th operational mode) due to the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") and a temporary stop in a specific mode (e.g., 46th operational mode) due to the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4").

Furthermore, even if the operational mode of the temporary stop of one mode performed by the common parts (number portion 411, first number decorative portion 412, second number decorative portion 413, second character decorative portion 416, entirety) is different between the decorative pattern 41 of the first number and the decorative pattern 41 of the second number, the period of the temporary stop of this one mode may be the same. As an example, the period of the temporary stop by the sixth operational mode (see FIG. 196) of the number portion 411 of the "4" decorative pattern 41 is 1.25 seconds, the same as the period of the temporary stop by the sixth operational mode (see FIG. 70) of the number portion 411 of the "1" decorative pattern 41.

Next, a modified example of the manner in which the second numeral decorative portion 413 is temporarily stopped will be described.
In the above example, when the second number decorative part 413 is displayed in one operating mode during a temporary stop, it is displayed in an operating mode according to a common cycle regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
Figure 197 is a diagram showing a modified example of the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. In the example shown in Figure 197, the 17th operation mode by the second numeral decoration part 413 of "7" which is the decorative pattern 41 will be described. In addition, in the modified example, the display by the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413 is performed in a 4-second cycle.

In this modification, at the start of the temporary stop in the seventeenth operation mode, the second numeral decorative portion 413 is displayed at the position shown in Fig. 197 (1). Also, in the modification, as shown in the figure, the second numeral decorative portion 413 of the decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in a display mode different from the second numeral decorative portion 413 of the decorative pattern 41, which is a number other than "7" (see Fig. 81).
197(1) is the initial position of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the seventeenth operation mode. When the second numeral decoration part 413 is in the initial position, one tip 4131 of the second numeral decoration part 413 is located at the upper right side of the second numeral decoration part 413.

Furthermore, as the temporary stop according to the 17th operating mode progresses, as shown in Figure 197 (2), the second number decorative part 413 rotates counterclockwise, and one tip part 4131 is positioned on the upper left side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 17th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 197 (3), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower left side of the second number decorative part 413.
Furthermore, as the temporary stop due to the 17th operating mode progresses further, the second number decorative part 413 rotates further counterclockwise, as shown in Figure 197 (4), so that one tip part 4131 is positioned on the lower right side of the second number decorative part 413.

197(2) to (5), the second numeral decoration part 413 returns to the initial position by further rotating counterclockwise, thereby completing one cycle of display by the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413. After this, while the temporary stop by the 17th operation mode continues, the second numeral decoration part 413 repeats the display by the operation modes shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, the time for the operation display of the second number decoration part 413 in the modes shown in Figures 197 (1) to (5), i.e., the period of temporary stop in the 17th operation mode of the second number decoration part 413, is 4 seconds, as described above.

As such, the period of temporary stops due to the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the decorative pattern 41 "1" is 8 seconds (see Figure 81), whereas the period of temporary stops due to the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decoration part 413 in the decorative pattern 41 "7" is 4 seconds. In other words, the period of temporary stops of the second numeral decoration part 413 differs depending on the number in the decorative pattern 41.

In the above example, the 17th operation mode of the second numeral decorative portion 413 is a common operation mode for the "1" and "7" decorative patterns 41, but is not limited to this. The 17th operation mode of the second numeral decorative portion 413 may be different operation modes for the "1" and "7" decorative patterns 41.
In the above example, the second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in different manners for the "1" and "7" decorative patterns 41 in one stage, but this is not limiting. The second number decorative portion 413 may be displayed in the same manner for the "1" and "7" decorative patterns 41.

Furthermore, the period of the temporary stop in the number section 411 may also differ depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41. For example, the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the first operation mode) by the number section 411 in the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") may differ from the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the first operation mode) by the number section 411 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4"). In this case, the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the first operation mode) by the number section 411 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first number (e.g., "3") and the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the first operation mode) by the number section 411 in the decorative pattern 41 of the second number (e.g., "4") may be the same or different operation modes.
Furthermore, in one stage (first stage, second stage, third stage), the display mode (decorative mode) of the number portion 411 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first number (e.g., "3") and the number portion 411 in the decorative pattern 41 of the second number (e.g., "4") may be the same or different.

Furthermore, the period of the temporary stop may also differ depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41 in the first numeral decoration portion 412. For example, the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the ninth operation mode) by the first numeral decoration portion 412 in the decorative pattern 41 of a first numeral (e.g., "3") may differ from the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the ninth operation mode) by the first numeral decoration portion 412 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second numeral (e.g., "4"). In this case, the operation mode may be the same or different between the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the ninth operation mode) by the first numeral decoration portion 412 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first numeral (e.g., "3") and the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the ninth operation mode) by the first numeral decoration portion 412 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second numeral (e.g., "4").
Furthermore, in one stage (first stage, second stage, third stage), the display mode (decorative mode) of the first number decorative part 412 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first number (e.g., "3") and the first number decorative part 412 in the decorative pattern 41 of the second number (e.g., "4") may be the same or different.

Furthermore, the period of the temporary stop of the second numeral decoration portion 413 may also differ depending on the numeral of the displayed decorative pattern 41. For example, the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 16th operation mode) by the second numeral decoration portion 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of a first numeral (e.g., "3") may differ from the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 16th operation mode) by the second numeral decoration portion 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second numeral (e.g., "4"). In this case, the operation mode may be the same or different between the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 16th operation mode) by the second numeral decoration portion 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first numeral (e.g., "3") and the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 16th operation mode) by the second numeral decoration portion 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of the second numeral (e.g., "4").
Furthermore, in one stage (first stage, second stage, third stage), the display mode (decorative mode) of the second number decorative part 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first number (e.g., "3") and the second number decorative part 413 in the decorative pattern 41 of the second number (e.g., "4") may be the same or different.

Furthermore, the period of the temporary stop in the second character decoration unit 416 may also differ depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41. For example, the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 43rd operation mode) by the second character decoration unit 416 in the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") may differ from the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 43rd operation mode) by the second character decoration unit 416 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4"). In this case, the operation mode may be the same or different between the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 43rd operation mode) by the second character decoration unit 416 in the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") and the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., the 43rd operation mode) by the second character decoration unit 416 in the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4").
Furthermore, in one stage (first stage, second stage, third stage), the display mode (decorative mode) of the second character decorative part 416 in the decorative pattern 41 of the first number (e.g., "3") and the second character decorative part 416 in the decorative pattern 41 of the second number (e.g., "4") may be the same or different.

Furthermore, the period of the temporary stop may differ for the entire decorative pattern 41 depending on the number of the displayed decorative pattern 41. For example, the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., 46th operation mode) by the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") may be different from the period of the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., 46th operation mode) by the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4"). In this case, the operation mode may be the same or different for the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., 46th operation mode) by the decorative pattern 41 of a first number (e.g., "3") and the temporary stop of a specific mode (e.g., 46th operation mode) by the decorative pattern 41 of a second number (e.g., "4").

(Example of what happens when a command is not received correctly)
Next, an example of a presentation when the presentation control unit 300 fails to properly receive a command sent from the game control unit 200 will be described.
Figure 198 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which the presentation control unit 300 receives a change stop command for the next change display without receiving a change stop command for the change display of the special pattern corresponding to change presentation example 4 (change presentation shown in Figure 124).

In the example shown in FIG. 198, after the start of the first variable effect (variable effect shown in FIG. 124) and before the special symbol stops, the game control board 200B (see FIG. 2) and the effect control board 300B are in a disconnected state, where they are not electrically connected. One example of a case in which the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are in a disconnected state is when the connector 200C connecting the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B becomes detached from the game control board 200B or the effect control board 300B. Another example of a case in which the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are in a disconnected state is when chattering occurs in the connector 200C (chattering between the game control board 200B and the connector 200C, or chattering between the effect control board 300B and the connector 200C).
In addition, in the example shown in Figure 198, after the start of the next variable display after the first special pattern variable display and before the stop display, the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a connected state in which they are electrically connected.

First, as shown in Figure 198 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the four reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 198 (4), three decorative patterns 41 "314" stop, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, while the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected, so the variable stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 198 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 begin to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at this time, the following begins: display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode; display of the three second character decorative sections 416 in the 43rd operating mode; display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operating mode; display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operating mode; and display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operating mode.

After this, the display of the next special symbol begins to change. However, because the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected, the change start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the three decorative symbols 41 remain temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 198 (6).

Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are electrically connected. The special symbol is then displayed as a stopped symbol, and a variable stop command is received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 198 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed.

After this, the variable display of the next special symbol begins. Also, because the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, a variable start command is received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 198 (8), the third reserved image 52 is hidden, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, a start-up action presentation is performed using the three decorative symbols 41, "314."

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 if the variation stop command is not received normally.
In this case, even in an abnormal situation where the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300, the presentation using the decorative pattern 41 can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In particular, the variation effect in variation effect example 4 is a variation effect in which the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without a temporary stop (see FIG. 124). Even in this case, if the variation stop command is not received normally, the performance control unit 300 can execute the "temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41," which would not have been executed if the variation stop command had been received normally.
That is, when the performance control unit 300 normally receives a stop command for the special symbol corresponding to a specific variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 4), it can restrict the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41 in this specific variable performance, and when the stop command for the special symbol corresponding to this specific variable performance is not normally received, it can temporarily stop the decorative symbol 41 in this specific variable performance. In other words, when the performance control unit 300 normally does not receive a stop command for the special symbol corresponding to the specific variable performance, it can display the decorative symbol 41 in a specific operating mode that is not executed when the stop command for the special symbol corresponding to the specific variable performance is normally received. In further other words, when the performance control unit 300 normally receives a stop command for the special symbol corresponding to the specific variable performance, it can restrict the display of the decorative symbol 41 in a specific operating mode, and when the stop command for the special symbol corresponding to the specific variable performance is not normally received, it can display the decorative symbol 41 in a specific operating mode.
Furthermore, looking at the above characteristic configuration from another perspective, when the performance control unit 300 has successfully received a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, it can restrict the periodic operation display of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41, and when it has not successfully received a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, it can execute the periodic operation display of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41.
In this case, even in the abnormal event that the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300, the presentation of the decorative pattern 41, which would not normally be executed (if the fluctuation stop command is received normally), is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

It should be noted that there may be a variation start command but no variation stop command depending on the pachinko gaming machine 100. For example, if the variation start command includes information indicating the execution time of the special symbol variation display that is to be started, even if there is no variation stop command, the performance control unit 300 can, by receiving the variation start command, fix and stop the decorative symbol 41 in accordance with the stop of the special symbol variation.
In a pachinko gaming machine 100 that does not have a variation stop command, the presentation control unit 300 may successfully receive a variation start command for the special symbol corresponding to variation presentation example 4, but may fail to successfully receive a variation start command for the next special symbol variation display. In this case, after the same presentation as shown in FIGS. 124(1) to (5) is performed, the presentation control unit 300 may temporarily stop the three decorative symbols 41 as shown in FIGS. 198(5) and (6) in response to the failure to successfully receive the variation start command. Then, if the presentation control unit 300 successfully receives a variation start command for the next special symbol variation display, it may hide the third reserved image 52, move the second reserved image 52 to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and move the first reserved image 52 to the display position of the variable image 51, as shown in FIG. 198(8), and perform a start-up action presentation using the three decorative symbols 41, "314."
In other words, in a pachinko game machine 100 in which there is no fluctuation stop command, if the performance control unit 300 does not normally receive a fluctuation start command related to the next fluctuation display of a special pattern corresponding to a specific fluctuation performance (for example, fluctuation performance example 4), it can execute a ``temporary stop of decorative pattern 41'' which would not normally be executed (if the fluctuation start command had been received normally).

Furthermore, if the performance control unit 300 successfully receives a predetermined signal (a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, or a command to start the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance), it may be able to execute a temporary stop (operation display) of less than one cycle without temporarily stopping (operation display) the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 for one cycle or more, and may be able to execute a temporary stop (operation display) of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 for one cycle or more if the predetermined signal is not successfully received.

Figure 199 shows an example of a presentation in which the presentation control unit 300 receives a stop command for the next variable display without receiving a stop command for the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to variable presentation example 3 (see Figure 122).
In the example shown in Fig. 199, after the start of the first variable effect and before the special symbol stops, the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are in a disconnected state. Also, in the example shown in Fig. 199, after the start of the next variable effect after the first special symbol stops, the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are in a connected state where they are electrically connected.

First, as shown in Figure 199 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, three reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "3."

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are moved and displayed, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the start-up action effect by the three decorative symbols 41 is also performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199(3), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a rapidly changing manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 199 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 "3" stops, and a stop action performance is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 199(5), the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops, and a motion effect is performed when the right decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 199(6), the right decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop. Also, the center decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and a motion effect is performed when the center decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 199(7), the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, while the special symbol is displayed as stopped, the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected, so the variable stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 199 (8), the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 continues.
After this, the next special symbol starts to change. Meanwhile, since the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B are not connected, the performance control unit 300 does not receive the change start command. In this case, as shown in Figure 200 (9), the three decorative symbols 41 continue to be temporarily stopped.

Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are electrically connected. The special symbol is then displayed as a stopped symbol, and a variable stop command is received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 200 (10), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed.

After this, the variable display of the next special symbol begins. Also, because the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, a variable start command is received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 200 (11), the second reserved image 52 is hidden, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, a start-up action presentation is performed using the three decorative symbols 41, "314."

Figure 201 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 3.
Figure 201 (1) shows the flow of temporary stop when the fluctuation stop command of the special pattern corresponding to the fluctuation performance example 3 is received normally (see Figure 122). Also, Figure 201 (2) shows the flow of temporary stop when the fluctuation stop command of the special pattern corresponding to the fluctuation performance example 3 is not received normally (see Figures 199 and 200).

First, we will explain the flow of temporary stopping when a command to stop the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to fluctuation performance example 3 shown in Figure 201 (1) is received normally.
At time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. At this time, the left number section 411 is displayed in its initial position in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65(1)). The left character section 414 is displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operation mode (see FIG. 90(1)). The left second character decoration section 416 is displayed with the initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode (see FIG. 107(1)).
Also, time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 122 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command. At this time, the display of the left number unit 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character unit 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 122 (8) begins.
Also, at this time, the left number section 411 is displayed at the first non-initial position in the first operating mode. An example of the first non-initial position is the position of the number section 411 shown in FIG. 65 (2). Also, the left character section 414 is displayed in the first non-initial display area in the 26th operating mode. An example of the first non-initial display area is the display area of the character section 414 shown in FIG. 90 (2). Also, the left second character decoration section 416 is displayed at the first non-initial transparency in the 43rd operating mode. An example of the first non-initial transparency is the transparency of the second character decoration section 416 shown in FIG. 107 (2).
Furthermore, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, and the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, while the left second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Next, we will explain the flow of temporary stopping when the command to stop the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to fluctuation performance example 3 shown in Figure 201 (2) is not received normally.
At time T1', the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode begin. At this time, the left number section 411 is displayed in its initial position in the first operation mode. The left character section 414 is displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operation mode. The left second character decoration section 416 is displayed with the initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode.
Also, time T1' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 199 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2', the game control unit 200 sends a fluctuation stop command to the presentation control unit 300, but the presentation control unit 300 is unable to receive the fluctuation stop command properly. At this time, the display of the left number unit 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character unit 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode continue.
Also, at this time, the left number section 411 is displayed in the first non-initial position in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 is displayed in the first non-initial display area in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 is displayed with the first non-initial transparency in the 43rd operating mode.
Also, time T2' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 199 (8) begins.

Next, at time T3', the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command. At this time, the display of the left number unit 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character unit 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T3' is the time when the performance shown in Figure 200 (10) begins.
At this time, the display position of the left number section 411 switches from the second non-initial position, which was displayed as the display position in the first operating mode, to the first non-initial position. An example of the second non-initial position is the position of the number section 411 shown in FIG. 65 (4). The display area of the left character section 414 switches from the second non-initial display area, which was displayed as the display area in the 26th operating mode, to the first non-initial display area. An example of the second non-initial display area is the display area of the character section 414 shown in FIG. 90 (3). At this time, the transparency of the left second character decoration section 416 switches from the second non-initial transparency, which was displayed as the transparency in the 43rd operating mode, to the first non-initial transparency. An example of the second non-initial transparency is the transparency of the second character decoration section 416 shown in FIG. 107 (3).
In addition, during the period from time T1' to time T3', the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

As described above, when the performance control unit 300 successfully receives the second fluctuation stop command without successfully receiving the first fluctuation stop command, it can switch the performance mode to the same mode as when the first fluctuation stop command is successfully received. More specifically, when the performance control unit 300 successfully receives the second fluctuation stop command without successfully receiving the first fluctuation stop command, it can switch the display mode (e.g., display position, display area, transparency, etc.) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped from a display mode (second non-initial position, second non-initial display area, second non-initial transparency) different from the display mode when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped when the first fluctuation stop command is successfully received to the display mode (first non-initial position, first non-initial display area, first non-initial transparency) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped when the first fluctuation stop command is successfully received. An example of the first fluctuation stop command is a fluctuation stop command related to the variable display of a special pattern corresponding to fluctuation performance example 3. Additionally, the second variation stop command may be a variation stop command for the variation display following the variation display of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3.

In this case, even in the event of an abnormality where the second fluctuation stop command is received successfully without the first fluctuation stop command being received successfully, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the same display mode as in the normal event where the first fluctuation stop command is received successfully, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when an abnormality occurs.

Note that while Figure 201 describes the state of the left decorative pattern 41, the state of the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 is the same as the state of the left decorative pattern 41. In other words, when the performance control unit 300 successfully receives the second variation stop command without successfully receiving the first variation stop command, it is possible to switch the display state (e.g., display position, display area, transparency, etc.) when the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixed and stopped from a display state different from that when the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixed and stopped when the first variation stop command is successfully received to the same display state as that when the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixed and stopped when the first variation stop command is successfully received.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 201, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command to stop the variation of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the left number section 411 is displayed in the first non-initial position in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 is displayed in the first non-initial display area in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 is displayed with the first non-initial transparency in the 43rd operating mode, but this is not limited to this.
When the performance control unit 300 receives a command to stop the variation of the special pattern corresponding to the variation performance example 3, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the left number section 411 may be displayed in the initial position in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 may be displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 may be displayed with the initial transparency in the 43rd operating mode. Then, when the performance control unit 300 successfully receives a change stop command related to the next change display of the special pattern corresponding to change performance example 3 without successfully receiving a change stop command related to the change display of the special pattern corresponding to change performance example 3, the display mode (e.g., display position, display area, transparency, etc.) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped may be switched from a display mode (non-initial position, non-initial display area, non-transparency) different from when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped when the first change stop command is successfully received to the same display mode (initial position, initial display area, initial transparency) as when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped when the change stop command related to the change display of the special pattern corresponding to change performance example 3 is successfully received.
That is, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command to stop the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the variation performance example 3, when the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, the decorative symbol 41 (number portion 411, character portion 414, second character decorative portion 416) is displayed in the first display mode (first non-initial position, first non-initial display area, first non-initial transparency, initial position, initial display area, initial transparency),
If a change stop command for the change display next to the change display of the special pattern corresponding to change performance example 3 is received successfully without a change stop command for the change display of the special pattern corresponding to change performance example 3 being received successfully, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, character section 414, second character decorative section 416) can be switched from the second display mode (second non-initial position, second non-initial display area, second non-initial transparency, non-initial position, non-initial display area, non-transparency) to the first display mode.

FIG. 202 shows a modified example of the rendering example shown in FIGS. 199 and 200.
In this modified example, first, the same effects as those shown in Figures 199(1) to (6) are performed, and then the middle decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop as shown in Figure 202(1).

Next, while the special symbol is displayed as stopped, the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected, so the stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, in a modified example, as shown in Figure 202 (2), the three decorative symbols 41 end their temporary stop and become stationary. Meanwhile, the small symbol 56 continues to be displayed as a change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 202(3), the three decorative patterns 41 start to temporarily stop again.

After this, the display of the next special symbol begins to change. However, because the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected, the change start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the three decorative symbols 41 remain temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 202 (4).

Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are electrically connected. The special symbol is then displayed as a stopped symbol, and a variable stop command is received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 202 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed.

After this, the variable display of the next special symbol begins. Also, because the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, a variable start command is received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, as shown in Figure 202 (6), the second reserved image 52 is hidden, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, a start-up action presentation is performed using the three decorative symbols 41, "314."

FIG. 203 is a chart showing the flow of the temporary stop shown in FIG. 202.
First, at time T1', the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode begin. At this time, the left number section 411 is displayed in its initial position in the first operation mode. Also, the left character section 414 is displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operation mode. Also, the left second character decoration section 416 is displayed with the initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 199 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2', the game control unit 200 sends a fluctuation stop command to the presentation control unit 300, but the presentation control unit 300 is unable to receive the fluctuation stop command correctly. At this time, the display in the first operation mode of the left number unit 411, the display in the 26th operation mode of the left character unit 414, and the display in the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decoration unit 416 end. Time T2' is the time when the presentation shown in Figure 202 (2) begins.
Also, at this time, the left number section 411 is displayed in the first non-initial position in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 is displayed in the first non-initial display area in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 is displayed with the first non-initial transparency in the 43rd operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T1' to time T2', the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, and the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, while the left second character decoration section 416 does not display for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Next, at time T3', the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode are resumed. At this time, the left number portion 411 is displayed in the first non-initial position in the first operation mode. Also, the left character portion 414 is displayed in the first non-initial display area in the 26th operation mode. Also, the left second character decoration portion 416 is displayed at the first non-initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode. In other words, the left decoration pattern 41 resumes its temporary stop from the display mode in which it stopped at time T2'.
Also, time T3' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 202 (3) begins.

Next, at time T4', the performance control unit 300 receives a change stop command. At this time, the display of the left number unit 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left character unit 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T4' is the time when the performance shown in Figure 202 (5) begins.
At this time, the display position of the left number portion 411 switches from the second non-initial position (see FIG. 65(4)), which was displayed as the display position in the first operating mode, to the first non-initial position (see FIG. 65(2)). The display area of the left character portion 414 switches from the second non-initial display area (see FIG. 90(3)), which was displayed as the display area in the 26th operating mode, to the first non-initial display area (see FIG. 90(2)). The transparency of the left second character decoration portion 416 switches from the second non-initial transparency (see FIG. 107(3)), which was displayed as the transparency in the 43rd operating mode, to the first non-initial transparency (see FIG. 107(2)).
In addition, during the period from time T3' to time T4', the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode.

Note that while Figure 203 describes the state of the left decorative pattern 41, the state of the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 is similar to that of the left decorative pattern 41. That is, if the first variation stop command is not received correctly, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41, and then temporarily stops them again. Then, if the performance control unit 300 receives the second variation stop command correctly, the performance control unit 300 can switch the display state (e.g., display position, display area, transparency, etc.) when the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixed and stopped from a display state different from that when the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixed and stopped when the first variation stop command is received correctly to the same display state as when the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixed and stopped when the first variation stop command is received correctly. An example of the first variation stop command is a variation stop command related to the variable display of a special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3. Additionally, the second variation stop command may be a variation stop command for the variation display following the variation display of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 203, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command to stop the variation of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the left number section 411 is displayed in the first non-initial position in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 is displayed in the first non-initial display area in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 is displayed with the first non-initial transparency in the 43rd operating mode, but this is not limited to this.
In the case where the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command for the special symbol corresponding to variation performance example 3, when the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, the left number portion 411 may be displayed in the initial position in the first operation mode, the left character portion 414 may be displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operation mode, and the left second character decorative portion 416 may be displayed with the initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode. In the case where the performance control unit 300 does not normally receive a variation stop command for the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to variation performance example 3, the performance control unit 300 may temporarily stop the three decorative symbols 41 when the left number portion 411 is displayed in the initial position in the first operation mode, the left character portion 414 is displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operation mode, and the left second character decorative portion 416 is displayed with the initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 resumes the temporary stop of the three decorative patterns 41 from a state in which the left number portion 411 is displayed in the initial position in the first operation mode, the left character portion 414 is displayed in the initial display area in the 26th operation mode, and the left second character decorative portion 416 is displayed at the initial transparency in the 43rd operation mode. Then, when the performance control unit 300 normally receives a variation stop command related to the next variation display of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3, the performance control unit 300 may switch the display mode (e.g., display position, display area, transparency, etc.) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped from a display mode (non-initial position, non-initial display area, non-transparency) different from the display mode when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped when the first variation stop command is normally received to the display mode (initial position, initial display area, initial transparency) the same as the display mode when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped when the variation stop command related to the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3 is normally received.
In other words, when the performance control unit 300 receives a command to stop the variation of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3, it displays the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, character portion 414, second character decoration portion 416) in the first display mode (first non-initial position, first non-initial display area, first non-initial transparency, initial position, initial display area, initial transparency) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and when it successfully receives a command to stop the variation of the next variation display of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3 without successfully receiving a command to stop the variation of the special pattern corresponding to variation performance example 3, it switches the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, character portion 414, second character decoration portion 416) from the second display mode (second non-initial position, second non-initial display area, second non-initial transparency, non-initial position, non-initial display area, non-transparency) to the first display mode when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

Figure 204 is a diagram showing the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 204 shows the first to thirteenth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 204 will now be described in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is when a reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, the stage image 61 is displayed as the background of the decorative symbols 41, etc., and is a situation (state) other than a normal reach miss. A normal reach miss means that the decorative symbols 41 of the misses stop in a variable presentation in which a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed. The first presentation situation includes when a random miss variable presentation is being executed, before the reach presentation starts in a reach variable presentation, and after the second transition image 504 (see FIG. 130 (5)) is displayed in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, etc.

The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is a situation (state) in which a normal reach presentation is being executed or a normal reach has failed during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is the situation (state) in which the SP reach presentation is being executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the first stage or the second stage.
The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is the situation (state) in which the SPSP reach presentation is being executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the first stage to the third stage.
The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of a variable presentation in the first or second stage, the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is temporarily stopped, and an SP reach image 503 or an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage or the second stage.
The seventh presentation situation (seventh presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.

The eighth presentation situation (eighth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage, the reach presentation is not being executed and the stage image 61 is being displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The ninth presentation situation (ninth presentation state) is the situation (state) in which a normal reach presentation is being executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the third stage.
The 10th presentation situation (10th presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is temporarily stopped and the SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The 11th presentation situation (11th presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the variable presentation is being executed in the third stage.
The twelfth presentation situation (twelfth presentation state) is the situation (state) during which a jackpot game is being played.
The thirteenth performance situation (thirteenth performance state) is the situation (state) during which the customer waiting performance is being executed in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the cycle and operation mode of the action display that can be performed in the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 204 shows the cycle and operation mode of the action display that can be performed for each presentation situation by the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.
In addition, the diagonal lines shown in Figure 204 mean that in the corresponding performance situation, a temporary stop will not be executed at the target location of the decorative pattern 41.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the first operation mode at a cycle of 1 second. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the 23rd operation mode, the 26th operation mode, the 29th operation mode, and the 32nd operation mode, all at a cycle of 2 seconds. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode at a cycle of 2.5 seconds.

Furthermore, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.1 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 16th operation mode at a cycle of 1.5 seconds. Furthermore, in the second performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character section 414 in the 24th operation mode, the 27th operation mode, the 30th operation mode, and the 33rd operation mode, all at a cycle of 3 seconds. Furthermore, in the second performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration section 416 in the 44th operation mode at a cycle of 4 seconds.

In addition, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.75 seconds, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the tenth operation mode at a cycle of 0.95 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the seventeenth operation mode at a cycle of 8 seconds.
In addition, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the fourth operation mode at a cycle of 0.5 seconds, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the eleventh operation mode at a cycle of 0.7 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the eighteenth operation mode at a cycle of 5 seconds.
In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 in the 46th operation mode at a cycle of 1.65 seconds, and the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 in the 47th operation mode at a cycle of 1.85 seconds.
In addition, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the fifth operating mode at a cycle of 1.3 seconds, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the twelfth operating mode at a cycle of 1.4 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the 19th operating mode at a cycle of 3.5 seconds.

Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the sixth operation mode at a 1.25-second cycle, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the thirteenth operation mode at a 1.6-second cycle, and the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the seventeenth operation mode at an eight-second cycle. Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the thirty-fifth operation mode, the thirty-seventh operation mode, the thirty-ninth operation mode, and the forty-first operation mode, all at a 1.35-second cycle. Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the forty-fifth operation mode at a 3.25-second cycle.

In addition, in the eighth performance situation (eighth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number section 411 in the sixth operating mode at a cycle of 1.25 seconds, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the thirteenth operating mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the twentieth operating mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds.
In addition, in the 9th performance situation (9th performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the 6th operation mode at a cycle of 1.25 seconds, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the 13th operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the 21st operation mode at a cycle of 1.75 seconds.
In addition, in the 10th performance situation (10th performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the fourth operating mode at a cycle of 0.5 seconds, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the 11th operating mode at a cycle of 0.7 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the 18th operating mode at a cycle of 5 seconds.

In addition, in the 11th performance situation (11th performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number unit 411 in the 7th operating mode at a cycle of 0.9 seconds, display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the 14th operating mode at a cycle of 1.45 seconds, and display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the 22nd operating mode at a cycle of 1.55 seconds.
In addition, in the 12th performance situation (12th performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number unit 411 in the 8th operating mode at a 10-second cycle, and can execute display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the 15th operating mode at a 7.5-second cycle.

Furthermore, in the 13th performance situation (13th performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the 25th operation mode, the 28th operation mode, the 31st operation mode, and the 34th operation mode, all at a cycle of 3.75 seconds. Furthermore, in the 13th performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode, the 38th operation mode, the 40th operation mode, and the 42nd operation mode, all at a cycle of 2.65 seconds. Furthermore, in the 13th performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode, all at a cycle of 2.5 seconds.

As described above, the presentation modes that can be controlled by the presentation control unit 300 include the first presentation mode (any of the first to third stages) and the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to third stages). In the second presentation mode, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop based on a period that is not performed in the first presentation mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations according to the presentation mode, and to increase the degree of emphasis on the temporary stop in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance (for example, a performance that displays decorative pattern 41 with a miss) while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in FIG. 107).The performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of displaying decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and less than one cycle of displaying decorative pattern 41 in the second operation mode while a specific performance is being executed while a variable performance is being executed (see time T14 in FIG. 146, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in motion even while a specific effect is being executed, and to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the display of the decorative pattern 41 in motion, thereby allowing the player to focus on the specific effect.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance (for example, a performance that displays a decorative pattern 41 with a miss) while a variable performance is being executed, and the operational modes of the performance patterns include a first operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 65) that can be repeated by a first portion (for example, the number portion 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, and a second operational mode (for example, the operational mode shown in FIG. 107) that can be repeated by a second portion (for example, the second character decorative portion 416) that is different from the first portion of the decorative pattern 41. Then, during execution of a specific performance during execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operational mode of the first portion and less than one cycle of display by the second operational mode of the second portion (see time T14 in FIG. 146, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the first part of the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in motion even while a specific effect is being executed, and to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the display of the second part of the decorative pattern 41 in motion, thereby allowing the player to focus on the specific effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute an operation display while the customer waiting performance is being executed in the first performance mode (first stage), and can restrict the operation display while the customer waiting performance is being executed in the second performance mode (second stage, third stage).
In this case, whether to make it easier for the player to notice the decorative pattern 41 even during the execution of the customer waiting performance or to emphasize performances other than the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the customer waiting performance can be varied depending on the performance mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the above example, an example of a specific effect is described as an effect that displays the decorative pattern 41 of a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The specific effect may be a reach prompting effect. That is, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of executing at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of a reach prompting effect while a variable effect is being executed (see FIG. 134 (2)). Also, during the execution of a reach prompting effect while a variable effect is being executed, it may be capable of executing at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the first part and less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the second part.
The specific effect may also be an effect that displays a doublet decorative pattern 41. That is, while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is being displayed during execution of the variable effect (see FIG. 147 (5)), the effect control unit 300 may be capable of at least one cycle of display using a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in FIG. 69 ) and less than one cycle of display using a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in FIG. 83 ) that is different from the first cycle. Also, while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is being displayed during execution of the variable effect, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of at least one cycle of display using a first operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in FIG. 69 ) of the first section (e.g., the number section 411) and less than one cycle of display using a second operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in FIG. 83 ).
Furthermore, in the first presentation mode, during execution of a specific presentation (e.g., a reach-inducing presentation, a presentation displaying decorative symbols 41 of losing numbers, a presentation displaying decorative symbols 41 of double numbers, etc.) during execution of a variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of at least one cycle of display by a first operation mode of the first section (e.g., the number section 411) and one cycle of display by a second operation mode of the second section (e.g., the second number decorative section 413). In the second presentation mode, during execution of a specific presentation during execution of a variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of at least one cycle of display by a first operation mode of the first section and less than one cycle of display by a second operation mode of the second section. Examples of the first presentation mode include a normal game state. The first presentation mode may be any one of the first to third stages. Examples of the second presentation mode include a time-saving game state. The second presentation mode may be a stage of the first to third stages that is different from the first presentation mode.

In the above example, it has been explained that, during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, and the second number decoration section 413 do not display movement, and the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 display movement, but this is not limiting. During the execution of the customer waiting effect, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, and the second number decoration section 413 may also display movement.
Furthermore, even during the execution of the customer waiting effect in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 (the number portion 411, the first number portion 412, the second number portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character portion 415, and the second character portion 416) may display an operation. In this case, the operation mode in the operation display may be different between a specific component (any portion among the number portion 411, the first number portion 412, the second number portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character portion 415, and the second character portion 416) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting effect in the first stage and a specific component (the same portion as the specific component in the first stage) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting effect in the second stage, but the period of the operation display may be the same. In addition, the operating mode and the period of the operating display may be different between a specific component (any part of the number section 411, first number decorative section 412, second number decorative section 413, character section 414, first character decorative section 415, second character decorative section 416) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance in the first stage and a specific component (the same element as the specific component in the first stage) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance in the second stage.

Furthermore, during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the operation display may be executed in a manner corresponding to the stage being controlled.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, character section 414, second character decorative section 416) may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of Figure 204.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416) may be displayed in operation according to the operational mode that can be executed in the "seventh performance situation" of Figure 204.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decorative section 412, second number decorative section 413) may be displayed in operation according to the operational mode that can be executed in the "eighth performance situation" of Figure 204.
Furthermore, even when the customer waiting performance is being performed on any stage, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be performed (may be limited).

In the above example, it has been described that the number section 411 and the first number decoration section 412 are displayed in motion while the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 are not displayed in motion during a jackpot game, but this is not limiting. During a jackpot game, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 may also be displayed in motion.
In addition, when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first stage with a specific number (any number from 1 to 9) lining up, and when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second stage with a specific number (the same number as the specific number in the first stage) lining up, the operating mode and period of the operating display of the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, character portion 414, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416) during the execution of the jackpot game are the same.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that during the execution of the variable presentation, a display of less than one cycle may be performed in the operating mode shown in Figures 65 to 109-3.
Here, the display according to each operation mode shown in Figures 65 to 109-3 includes not only the display according to all modes shown in Figures 65 to 109-3, but also the display of an operation including any mode shown in Figures 65 to 109-3. For example, the display according to the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 includes not only the display according to all modes shown in Figures 65(1) to (5), but also the display according to any operation mode of the modes shown in Figures 65(1) to (5) (for example, only the operation modes shown in Figures 65(2) and (3)).

Furthermore, in the above example, it was explained that the "variation pattern""PR4"("variation presentation pattern""ER4") can be selected when the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 in normal game mode is any of "1" to "4" (see Figures 27 and 59), but this is not limited to this.
The "variation pattern""PR4" (the "variation presentation pattern""ER4") may be selectable only when the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in normal game play is "2".

Furthermore, in the above example, it was explained that the "variation pattern""PR2" (the "variation presentation pattern""ER2") can be selected when the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in normal game play is "2" or "3" (see Figures 27 and 59), but this is not limited to this.
The "variation pattern""PR2" (the "variation presentation pattern""ER2") may be selectable only when the number of reserved winnings for the first starting port 121 in normal game play is "3".

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 and the zone pattern 58 are also examples of performance patterns.
Here, the operation display of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 (display by the 48th operation mode, display by the 49th operation mode) and the operation display of the zone pattern 58 (display by the 50th operation mode, display by the 51st operation mode) are also regarded as a temporary stop of the performance pattern.

Also, in the above-mentioned example, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the jackpot game does not have the second number decorative portion 413 (see Figure 147 (8) and Figure 175 (8)), but this is not limited to this.
The decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided with a second number decorative portion 413. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may have the same decorative form as the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of an SP reach in the normal game state, during the execution of an SPSP reach in the normal game state, and in the time-saving game state.

In the above example, the SPSP reach image 509 is displayed in the same display mode in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limiting. The SPSP reach image 509 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.
Also, in the above-mentioned example, in the time-shortened gaming state, after the start of the normal reach effect, the SPSP reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect, but this is not limited to this. In the time-shortened gaming state, as in the normal gaming state, after the start of the normal reach effect, the SPSP reach effect may be executed via the SP reach effect. Also, in the time-shortened gaming state, the SPSP reach effect may not be executed. In this case, the SPSP reach effect described in the variable effect example in the time-shortened gaming state may be regarded as the SP reach effect.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the situation during which a normal reach is missed in the first stage corresponds to the second presentation situation (see Figure 204), but this is not limited to this.
The situation during a normal reach miss in the first stage may correspond to the first performance situation. That is, the temporary stops that can be performed during a normal reach miss in the first stage may be only the first operation mode with a 1-second cycle of the number portion 411, the 23rd operation mode with a 2-second cycle, the 26th operation mode with a 2-second cycle, the 29th operation mode with a 2-second cycle, and the 32nd operation mode with a 2-second cycle of the character portion 414, and the 43rd operation mode with a 2.5-second cycle of the second character decoration portion 416.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the situation during the execution of the normal reach effect in the first stage corresponds to the second effect situation (see Figure 204), but this is not limited to this.
The situation during execution of the normal reach presentation in the first stage may correspond to the first presentation situation. In other words, the temporary stops that can be executed during execution of the normal reach presentation in the first stage may be only the first operation mode with a 1-second cycle of the number section 411, the 23rd operation mode with a 2-second cycle, the 26th operation mode with a 2-second cycle, the 29th operation mode with a 2-second cycle, and the 32nd operation mode with a 2-second cycle of the character section 414, and the 43rd operation mode with a 2.5-second cycle of the second character decoration section 416.

In the above example, it has been explained that the first operation mode (see FIG. 65) to the forty-seventh operation mode (see FIG. 109-3) in the temporary stop all have different periods of the temporary stop, but this is not limited to this.
The first operation mode (see FIG. 65) to the forty-seventh operation mode (see FIG. 109-3) may all have different operation modes but the same temporary stop period (for example, one-second period).

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the first operation mode (see FIG. 65) to the forty-seventh operation mode (see FIG. 109-3) in the temporary stop are all different operation modes in the temporary stop, but this is not limited to this.
The first operation mode (see FIG. 65) to the forty-seventh operation mode (see FIG. 109-3) may all have different periods of temporary stops, but may be the same operation mode (for example, all may be the horizontal oscillation shown in FIG. 65).

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly focuses on differences from the first embodiment described above, and explanations of similarities with the first embodiment may be omitted.

Figure 205 is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the second embodiment.
In the second embodiment, in the first stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 205(1). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 205(1) has the same decorative manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 195(1).

In the second embodiment, in the second stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 205 (2). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 205 (2) has a number portion 411, a first number portion 412, a second number portion 413, a third number portion 417, a fourth number portion 418, a character portion 414, a first character portion 415, and a second character portion 416.
The number section 411, first number decoration section 412, second number decoration section 413, character section 414, first character decoration section 415 and second character decoration section 416 shown in Figure 205 (2) have the same decorative pattern as the number section 411, first number decoration section 412, second number decoration section 413, character section 414, first character decoration section 415 and second character decoration section 416 shown in Figure 195 (3).

The third numeral decoration portion 417 is a portion that decorates the numeral portion 411. Although not shown in the drawings, the third numeral decoration portion 417 is displayed in a layer behind the second numeral decoration portion 413 on the image display unit 114. However, the third numeral decoration portion 417 may be drawn so as to be displayed behind the second numeral decoration portion 413 while being displayed in the same layer as the second numeral decoration portion 413 on the image display unit 114.
Furthermore, the third numeral decorative portion 417 is displayed in a region that partially overlaps with the first numeral decorative portion 412. In the illustrated example, the third numeral decorative portion 417 is formed in a band shape extending in the left-right direction, and is displayed in white in a region that extends from the region that overlaps with the first numeral decorative portion 412 to the right of the first numeral decorative portion 412. The third numeral decorative portion 417 can also be considered as a decorative portion that decorates the identification portion.

The fourth numeral decoration portion 418 is a portion that decorates the numeral portion 411. Although not shown, the fourth numeral decoration portion 418 is displayed in a layer behind the second numeral decoration portion 413 and the third numeral decoration portion 417 in the image display unit 114. However, the fourth numeral decoration portion 418 may be displayed in the same layer as the second numeral decoration portion 413 in the image display unit 114, while being drawn so as to be displayed behind the second numeral decoration portion 413. Furthermore, the fourth numeral decoration portion 418 may be displayed in the same layer as the third numeral decoration portion 417 in the image display unit 114, while being drawn so as to be displayed behind the third numeral decoration portion 417.
Furthermore, the fourth numeral decorative portion 418 is displayed in an area where a part of it overlaps with the first numeral decorative portion 412. In the illustrated example, the third numeral decorative portion 417 is formed in a band shape extending in the left-right direction, and is displayed in blue in an area extending from the area where it overlaps with the first numeral decorative portion 412 to the left of the first numeral decorative portion 412. The fourth numeral decorative portion 418 can also be regarded as a decorative portion that decorates the identification portion.

In the second embodiment, a less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 205(3). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 205(3) has a numeral portion 411, a first numeral decorative portion 412, a second numeral decorative portion 413, a third numeral decorative portion 417, and a fourth numeral decorative portion 418. The decorative pattern 41 (numeral portion 411, first numeral decorative portion 412, second numeral decorative portion 413, third numeral decorative portion 417, fourth numeral decorative portion 418) shown in Fig. 205(3) has the same decorative manner as the numeral portion 411, first numeral decorative portion 412, second numeral decorative portion 413, third numeral decorative portion 417, and fourth numeral decorative portion 418 shown in Fig. 205(2).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 205 (3) is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state (first stage, second stage), and in the time-saving game state (third stage), etc.

Figures 206-1 and 206-2 are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 in this embodiment for each stage.
As shown in Fig. 206-1, the number section 411 is displayed in a common display format regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 3) being controlled. The number section 411 shown in Fig. 206-1 has the same display format as the number section 411 shown in Fig. 64-1.
The first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage or any one of the second stage and the third stage.
The second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second or third stage.

The third number decorative portion 417 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. Moreover, the third number decorative portion 417 is displayed in a common decorative mode regardless of whether the controlled stage is the second stage or the third stage.
The fourth number decorative portion 418 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. Moreover, the fourth number decorative portion 418 is displayed in a common decorative mode regardless of whether the controlled stage is the second stage or the third stage.

As shown in Fig. 206-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to whether the controlled stage is Stage 1 or Stage 2. The character portion 414 shown in Fig. 206-2 has the same display mode as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 64-2.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 206-2 has the same display manner as the first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 64-2.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 206-2 has the same display manner as the second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 64-2.

Note that the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 206-1 and 206-2 are the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance begins for each stage. Therefore, depending on the progress of the variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a mode different from the combination of stage and display mode associated in Figures 206-1 and 206-2.

Figure 207 is a diagram showing the operating modes in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation in the second embodiment.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 207 shows the first to ninth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.
Here, in the second embodiment, the operational state of the decorative pattern 41 in the operational display for each performance situation is different from that in the first embodiment. Also, in the second embodiment, the relationship between the operational state of the decorative pattern 41 in the operational display and the period of the operational display is different from that in the first embodiment.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 207 will now be described in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the first to third stages, the SP reach presentation is being executed or the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is temporarily stopped, and the SP reach image 503 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is the situation (state) in which the SPSP reach presentation is being executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the first stage or the second stage.
The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number is temporarily stopped during the execution of a variable presentation in the first or second stage, and an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage to the third stage.

The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The seventh presentation situation (seventh presentation state) is a situation (state) in which a reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The eighth presentation situation (eighth presentation state) is the situation (state) during which a jackpot game is being played.
The ninth performance situation (ninth performance state) is the situation (state) during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the period of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed in the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 207 shows the period of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed for each presentation situation using the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the third number decoration section 417, the fourth number decoration section 418, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode (see Figure 67) at one-second intervals, of displaying the number unit 411 in the first operation mode (see Figure 65) at one-second intervals, of displaying the first number decoration unit 412 in the ninth operation mode (see Figure 73) at one-second intervals, and of displaying the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode (see Figure 107) at one-second intervals.
In addition, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode at a 1-second cycle, can display the first number decoration unit 412 in the 10th operation mode (see Figure 74) at a 1.5-second cycle, can display the second number decoration unit 413 in the 16th operation mode (see Figure 80) at a 1.5-second cycle, can display the third number decoration unit 417 in the 17th operation mode (see Figure 81) at a 1-second cycle, and can display the fourth number decoration unit 418 in the 16th operation mode at a 12-second cycle.

In addition, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode at a 1-second cycle, can display the first number decoration unit 412 in the 10th operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, can display the second number decoration unit 413 in the 16th operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, can display the third number decoration unit 417 in the 17th operation mode at a 1-second cycle, and can display the fourth number decoration unit 418 in the 16th operation mode at a 12-second cycle.
In addition, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operating mode at one-second intervals, of displaying the first number decoration unit 412 in the 11th operating mode (see Figure 75) at one-second intervals, and of displaying the second number decoration unit 413, the third number decoration unit 417 and the fourth number decoration unit 418 in the 18th operating mode (see Figure 82) at one-second intervals.
In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode at a 1-second cycle, can display the first number decoration unit 412 in the 10th operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, can display the second number decoration unit 413 in the 16th operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, can display the third number decoration unit 417 in the 17th operation mode at a 1-second cycle, and can display the fourth number decoration unit 418 in the 16th operation mode at a 12-second cycle.

Furthermore, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a one-second cycle, the display of the first numeral decoration unit 412 in the tenth operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, the display of the second numeral decoration unit 413 in the sixteenth operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, the display of the third numeral decoration unit 417 in the seventeenth operation mode at a one-second cycle, and the display of the fourth numeral decoration unit 418 in the sixteenth operation mode at a 12-second cycle.Furthermore, in the sixth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the twenty-third operation mode (see FIG. 87), the twenty-sixth operation mode (see FIG. 90), the twenty-ninth operation mode (see FIG. 93), and the thirty-second operation mode (see FIG. 96), all at one-second cycles. Additionally, in the sixth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute display in the 45th operating mode (see FIG. 109-1) of the second character decoration unit 416 at one-second intervals.

In addition, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a one-second cycle, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the tenth operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the sixteenth operation mode at a 1.5-second cycle, the display of the third number decoration unit 417 in the seventeenth operation mode at a one-second cycle, and the display of the fourth number decoration unit 418 in the sixteenth operation mode at a 12-second cycle.
In addition, in the eighth performance situation (eighth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number section 411 in the eighth operating mode (see Figure 72) at a cycle of 10 seconds, and can execute display of the first number decoration section 412 in the fifteenth operating mode (see Figure 79) at a cycle of 7.5 seconds.

Furthermore, in the ninth performance situation (ninth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89), the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92), the 31st operation mode (see FIG. 95), and the 34th operation mode (see FIG. 98), all at a cycle of 3.75 seconds. Furthermore, in the ninth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode (see FIG. 100), the 38th operation mode (see FIG. 102), the 40th operation mode (see FIG. 104), and the 42nd operation mode (see FIG. 106), all at a cycle of 2.65 seconds. Furthermore, in the thirteenth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode, all at a cycle of 2.5 seconds.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, it can display a specific part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) that is at least a part of the performance pattern in motion for at least a first period (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and it can display a specific part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418) that is at least a part of the performance pattern and different from the specific part in motion for at least a second period (e.g., 12 seconds) (see the second performance situation in Figure 207). Then, after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, the performance control unit 300 can display a specific part in motion for at least a first period, and it can display a specific part in motion for at least a third period (e.g., 1 second) (see the third performance situation in Figure 207). Examples of predetermined performances include normal reach performances and SP reach performances.
In other words, "after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, the specific part can be displayed in operation for at least the first cycle, and the predetermined part can be displayed in operation for at least the third cycle" includes the fact that the third cycle allows the specific part to be displayed in operation before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, and that the specific part can be displayed in operation even after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, and before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, it can display a specific part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) that is at least a part of the performance pattern in at least a first operation mode (e.g., the tenth operation mode), and it can display a specific part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418) that is at least a part of the performance pattern and is different from the specific part in at least a second operation mode (e.g., the sixteenth operation mode) (see the second performance situation in FIG. 207). Then, after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display the specific part in at least a first operation mode, and can display the specific part in at least a third operation mode (e.g., the first operation mode) (see the third performance situation in FIG. 207). Examples of predetermined performances include normal reach performances and SP reach performances.
In other words, "after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, the specific part can be displayed in at least a first operating mode, and the predetermined part can be displayed in at least a third operating mode" includes the fact that the predetermined part can be displayed in operation even after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, using the third operating mode that can be displayed in operation before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion for at least a first period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed (see the second performance situation in FIG. 207), and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion for at least a second period (e.g., 1 second) that is shorter than the first period after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed (see the third performance situation in FIG. 207). Examples of predetermined performances include a reach stimulation performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone stimulation performance, a zone performance, a role performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is stopped.
In other words, "after the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of the variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion at least in a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle" includes the fact that the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion even after the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of the variable performance using the second cycle in which the decorative pattern 41 could be displayed in motion before the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of the variable performance.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 1 in the second embodiment. The variation presentation example 1 in the second embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 1 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 1 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 1 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (1).

Figure 208 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 of the second embodiment.
Figure 208 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left first number portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left second character portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the right number portion 411 is displayed in the first operation mode, the right first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the right second character decorative portion 416 is displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (6) begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, first middle character decorative portion 415, second middle character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the first middle number decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the second middle character decorative portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode begin. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number section 412, left second number section 413, left character section 414, left first character section 415, left second character section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left first number section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the right number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the right first number decorative section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the right second character decorative section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T4 are all in the first performance state (see Figure 207).

As described above, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number portion 411) showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., character portion 414) displayed behind the first image, and is capable of periodically displaying the first image in at least a first operating mode (e.g., the first operating mode shown in Figure 207), and is capable of periodically displaying the second image in at least a second operating mode (e.g., the third operating mode shown in Figure 207) different from the first operating mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the first image and the second image are displayed in the same operating mode, it is easier for the player to distinguish between the first image and the second image, and it is easier for the player to recognize both the operating display of the first image and the operating display of the second image, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207), and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the ninth operation mode shown in FIG. 207), and the performance symbols include a first performance symbol that can be stopped at a predetermined timing in the variable performance (for example, the left decorative symbol 41), and a second performance symbol that can be stopped at a timing different from the first performance symbol in the variable performance (for example, the right decorative symbol 41).The performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode, and can display the second performance symbol at least in the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the presentation using presentation patterns according to the progress of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the first operation mode shown in Figure 207), and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the ninth operation mode shown in Figure 207).The performance symbols include a first performance symbol having a first number (for example, "3") and a second performance symbol having a second number (for example, "4") that is different from the first number.During the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode (for example, the first stage), the first performance symbol can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and the second performance symbol can be displayed at least by the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects according to the effect patterns with different numbers, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Example of variation 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 2 in the second embodiment. The variation presentation example 2 in the second embodiment, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "2". Also, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 2 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 2 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (1).
In addition, in the variation performance example 2 in the second embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as the variation performance example 1 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 208). In other words, in the variation performance example 2 in the second embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variation example 3)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 3 in the second embodiment. The variation presentation example 3 in the second embodiment, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "3". Also, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 3 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 3 is the same as that shown in Figures 122 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 3 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (1).

Figure 209 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 3 in the second embodiment.
Figure 209 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 3.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left first number portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left second character portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 122 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the right number portion 411 is displayed in the first operation mode, the right first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the right second character decorative portion 416 is displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 122 (6) begins.
Next, at time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, first middle character decorative portion 415, second middle character decorative portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the middle number portion 411 is displayed in the first operation mode, the first middle number decorative portion 412 is displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the middle second character decorative portion 416 is displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 122 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 122 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T4 are all in the first performance state (see Figure 207).

(Variation example 4)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 4 in the second embodiment. Variation presentation example 4 in the second embodiment, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4". Also, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 4 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 4 is the same as variable presentation example 3 in the second embodiment (the presentation shown in Figures 122 (1) to (8)), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (1) and there is one more hold number display 55 and hold image 52 for the first starting port 121.
In addition, in the variation performance example 4 in the second embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as the variation performance example 3 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 209). In other words, in the variation performance example 4 in the second embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, can execute specific variable performances in which specific performances are not executed while variable performances are being executed, and can limit the operation display of the stopped performance symbols for one cycle or more while specific variable performances are being executed (see FIG. 209). Examples of specific variable performances include reach stimulation performances, normal reach performances, pseudo consecutive stimulation performances, pseudo consecutive performances, zone stimulation performances, zone performances, role-playing performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances, button operation performances, performances in which decorative symbols 41 with double numbers are stopped, and the like. Examples of specific variable performances include random miss fluctuation performances.
In this case, in the case of specific variable presentations, by preventing the player from focusing too much on the presentation patterns, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the player focusing on the presentation patterns even in variable presentations in which specific presentations are not executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the variable performance includes a first variable performance and a second variable performance that is different from the first variable performance, and the performance control unit 300 can limit the operation display of the stopped performance pattern for at least one cycle or more during the execution of the first variable performance (see Figure 209), and can execute the operation display of the stopped performance pattern for at least one cycle or more during the execution of the second variable performance (see Figure 208).
In this case, the player can pay attention to whether or not the periodic movement display of the performance pattern is performed according to the variable performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, while a variable performance is being performed based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop for one or more cycles on any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped.
In this case, the player can easily recognize the operation display of each part of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped without missing it.
In addition, while the performance control unit 300 is executing a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), if it is possible to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles in any of the parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped, there may be parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped where a temporary stop for one or more cycles is not executed (a temporary stop for less than one cycle is executed).

In addition, while a variable presentation is being executed based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles in any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped.
In this case, the player can easily recognize the temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 41 without missing it.

In addition, during execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for one cycle or more in any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too much on the parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped, and thereby failing to recognize other effects.

In addition, during execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "1"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for more than one cycle in any part of the middle decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped.
In this case, the variable effect can be prevented from becoming redundant in order to ensure the temporary stopping time of the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop on at least a portion of the middle decorative pattern 41 while a variable performance is being performed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "1").
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the provisional stop and the definite stop of the middle decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 increases the number of parts of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped and that limit temporary stops for one cycle or more when a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a second specific number (e.g., "3") that is greater than the first specific number, compared to when a variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being a first specific number (e.g., "1").
In this case, it is possible to diversify the presentation using the right decorative pattern 41 according to the number of reserved balls.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop on at least a portion of the left decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411, character portion 414, second character decorative portion 416) while a variable performance is being executed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "3").
In this case, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41.

In addition, during execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "3"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for more than one cycle in any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped.
In this case, in order to ensure the temporary stop time of the right decorative pattern 41, it is possible to prevent the variable presentation based on the reserved number being a specific number from becoming redundant.

In addition, during the execution of a variable performance based on the reserved number being a specific number (for example, "4"), the performance control unit 300 can limit temporary stopping for more than one cycle in any of the parts of the three decorative patterns 41 that can be temporarily stopped.
In this case, in order to ensure the temporary stopping time of the three decorative patterns 41, it is possible to prevent the variable presentation based on the reserved number being a specific number from becoming redundant.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop on at least some of the three decorative patterns 41 while a variable performance is being performed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "4").
In this case, even if a variable effect is performed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that one of the decorative symbols 41 has temporarily stopped.

(Variation example 5)
Next, variation presentation example 5 in the second embodiment will be explained. Variation presentation example 5 in the second embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 5 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 5 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 128 (variable presentation example 5 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (1) and the presentation shown in Figure 210-1 is performed.
More specifically, in the variation effect example 5 in the second embodiment, first, the same effects as those shown in Figures 127 (1) to (6) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 210-1 (1), a reach line image 501 is displayed. At this time, a reach-time action effect is performed. In this embodiment, in the reach-time action effect, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, and left and right second character decorative portions 416) move so as to tilt clockwise in the figure. At this time, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 ends.

Next, as shown in Fig. 210-1 (2), the reach-time action effect is displayed so that the tilt of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, and left and right second character decorative portions 416) is restored. At this time, a separation effect is also performed, and the left decorative pattern 41 moves to the left, and the right decorative pattern 41 moves to the right.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 128 (9) to (13) are performed.

Figure 210-2 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5 in the second embodiment.
Figure 210-2 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left first number portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left second character portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the right number section 411 begins to be displayed in the first operation mode, the right first number decorative section 412 begins to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the right second character decorative section 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-third operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (6) begins.

In addition, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left first number decorative section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character sections 415, left and right second character sections 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left and right first number sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 210-1 (1) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left first number decorative section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.

Next, at time T4, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character sections 415, left and right second character sections 416) are displayed in the third operation mode, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed in the first operation mode, the left and right first number sections 412 are displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second character sections 416 are displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, first middle character decorative portion 415, second middle character decorative portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the middle number portion 411 begins to be displayed in the first operation mode, the first middle number decorative portion 412 begins to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the middle second character decorative portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-third operation mode. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character decorative sections 415, left and right second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left and right first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second character decorative sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decoration portion 412, middle second number decoration portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decoration portion 415, middle second character decoration portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the middle number portion 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the middle first number decoration portion 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the middle second character decoration portion 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T6 are all in the first performance state (see Figure 207).

As described above, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number portion 411) showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., first number decorative portion 412) displayed behind the first image, and is capable of displaying the first image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second), and is capable of displaying the second image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a second cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the first image and the second image are displayed in motion at the same cycle, it is easier for the player to distinguish between the first image and the second image, and it is easier for the player to recognize both the motion display of the first image and the motion display of the second image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of periodically displaying the performance pattern in a first operating mode (for example, the first operating mode shown in Figure 207), and is capable of periodically displaying the performance pattern in a second operating mode (for example, the third operating mode shown in Figure 207) that is different from the first operating mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the operation mode of the effect symbols that can be displayed periodically is a single operation mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice both the display by the first operation mode of the effect symbols and the display by the second operation mode. Also, since the display by the first operation mode of the effect symbols and the display by the second operation mode of the effect symbols are both performed periodically, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display by the first operation mode of the effect symbols and the display by the second operation mode of the effect symbols, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the performance pattern in a specific operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in Figure 207) at a specific timing (for example, before the start of the reach performance) during the execution of a specific variable performance (for example, a reach variable performance), and is capable of restricting the display of the performance pattern in a specific operation mode at a predetermined timing after the specific timing during the execution of the specific variable performance (for example, during the execution of the reach-time operation performance).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the performance symbols at specific timing. Also, at a predetermined timing, by suppressing the performance symbols from excessively drawing the player's attention, it is possible to emphasize a performance that is different from the display of the performance symbols, which makes it possible to diversify the performance according to the progress of the variable performance, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance pattern operation modes include a first operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the third operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and the performance patterns include a first performance pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 41) that can be stopped at a predetermined timing in the variable performance, and a second performance pattern (for example, the middle decorative pattern 41) that can be stopped at a timing different from the first performance pattern in the variable performance. Then, the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance pattern at least in the first operation mode, and the second performance pattern at least in the second operation mode, after the start of the specific performance during execution of the variable performance. Specific effects include an effect that stops the left decorative pattern 41, a reach stimulation effect, a normal reach effect, a pseudo consecutive stimulation effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a zone stimulation effect, a zone effect, a role effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a button operation effect, an effect that stops the decorative pattern 41 of a losing number, etc.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the presentation using presentation patterns according to the progress of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the variable performances include a first variable performance in which specific performances are not executed while variable performances are being executed, and a second variable performance in which specific performances are executed while variable performances are being executed, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the third operation mode shown in FIG. 207), and the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol 41) and a second performance symbol (for example, the right decorative symbol 41) that can be stopped after the first performance symbol stops in the variable performance. The performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol in at least the first operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during execution of the first variable performance, and can display the first performance symbol in at least the second operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during execution of the second variable performance. The specific effects include a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, an effect in which a decorative pattern 41 of a missing number is displayed, an effect in which a decorative pattern 41 of a double number is displayed, and the like.
In this case, the player can pay attention to which operation mode the first performance pattern will be displayed in for each variable performance after the second performance pattern stops, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop of at least a portion of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number portion 411) for one or more cycles before the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.
In this case, before the player focuses on the right decorative pattern 41, the player can be made aware of the series of action displays when the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may prevent temporary stops of any part of the left decorative pattern 41 from occurring for more than one cycle before the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, while the random miss variable performance is being executed (whether the random miss variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being "1,""2,""3," or "4").
In this case, the way in which the left decorative pattern 41 is focused on until the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops can be made different between the scattered miss variation presentation and the reach variation presentation.

In addition, during the execution of the reach variation presentation, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of at least a part of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) for one or more cycles before the start of the reach operation presentation.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the series of action displays when the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped before the player focuses on the reach-time action presentation.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the reach-time operation performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the action presentation at the time of reaching a winning state.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the distance performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the separation effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the close performance is being performed.
In this case, even when the proximity effect is being executed, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) while the close-up performance is being performed.
In this case, even when the close-range effect is being executed, it is possible to make the player easily aware that the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can display the identification unit in operation in at least a first operating mode (for example, the first operating mode shown in Figure 207), and can display the decorative unit (for example, the first number decorative unit 412, the second number decorative unit 413, etc.) in operation in at least a second operating mode (for example, the third operating mode shown in Figure 207).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the identification portion and the decorative portion, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to notice both the operation display of the identification portion and the operation display of the decorative portion.

The appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the timing at which the temporary stop begins after the start of the reach performance is the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. After the start of the reach performance, the temporary stop of the identification part may begin after the temporary stop of the decorative part of the decorative pattern 41 has begun.

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the reach variation effect is executed, the temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative symbols 41 may not be executed (may be restricted) during the execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may perform a temporary stop by a first part (e.g., an identification part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the close-up performance, and may not perform (restrict) a temporary stop by a second part (e.g., a decorative part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) that is different from the first part.

(Example of variation 6)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 6 in the second embodiment. Variation presentation example 6 in the second embodiment, like variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed. Also, like variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 6 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 6 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 130 (variable presentation example 6 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 207), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (1), and in the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (3), and the presentation shown in Figures 210-1 and 211-1 is performed.
More specifically, in the variation effect example 6 in the second embodiment, first, the same effects as those shown in Figures 127 (1) to (6), Figures 210-1 (1) to (2), and Figures 130 (1) to (3) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 211-1 (1), the three decorative symbols 41, "343", descend at a slow speed. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are not temporarily stopped. In other words, with the display of the center decorative symbol 41, the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41 ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 211-1(2), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number starts to temporarily stop.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 130 (5) to (7) are performed.

Figure 211-2 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the second embodiment.
Figure 211-2 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
The temporary stop state shown at time T1 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, and left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 130(3) starts.

The temporary stop state shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 211-1 (1) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left and right first number portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode, the left and right second number portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode, the left and right third number portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, and the left and right fourth number portions 418 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 211-1 (2) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T4 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three third number decorative portions 417, and three fourth number decorative portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the three first number decorative portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode, the three second number decorative portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode, and the three third number decorative portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode. On the other hand, the three fourth number decorative portions 418 are not displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T5 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T5, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation state, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation state, and the display of the three second character portions 416 in the 43rd operation state begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (6) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T6 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T6, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the three second character decorative sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T4 are the second performance status (see Figure 207), and time points T5 to T6 are the first performance status.

211-2, the temporary stop state from the start of the variable performance until the end of the normal reach performance (the start of the SP reach performance) is omitted from the illustration. Here, the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start of the variable performance in variable performance example 6 until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 210-2.
Additionally, in the variation performance example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 130(2)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 210-2, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the variation performance in the variation performance example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 shown at time points T1 to T6 in FIG. 210-2. That is, in this embodiment, in a losing variation performance in which an SP reach performance is executed in the first stage, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time points T1 to T6 in FIG. 210-2, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time points T1 to T6 in FIG. 211-2.

As described above, when an SP reach performance is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 at a period (for example, 1.5 seconds) that was not performed before the start of the SP reach performance.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the uniqueness of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 due to the execution of the SP reach presentation.

In addition, when an SP reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 using an operation mode (for example, the 10th operation mode shown in Figure 207) that had not been performed before the start of the SP reach performance.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the uniqueness of the presentation of the decorative pattern 41 due to the execution of the SP reach presentation.

In addition, when an SP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles while the SP reach image 503 is being displayed.
In this case, even while the SP reach image 503 is being displayed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, when the performance control unit 300 executes an SP reach performance during the execution of a variable performance, it can execute a temporary stop of at least one cycle by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) after the second transition image 504 is displayed.
In this case, even if the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see and then becomes visible again, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

(Example of variation 7)
Next, variation presentation example 7 in the second embodiment will be explained. Variation presentation example 7 in the second embodiment is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 9 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 7 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 9 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 7 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 and 136 (variable presentation example 9 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (1) and the presentation shown in Figure 212-1 is performed.
More specifically, in the variation effect example 7 in the second embodiment, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120(1), (2), and 136(1) are first performed, and then the reach stimulation effect is performed as shown in Figure 212-1(1). In the reach stimulation effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up and down swinging motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212-1 (2), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left decorative symbol 41 "3", the right decorative symbol 41 "4", and the center decorative symbol 41 "1" start to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 212-1 (3), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 212-2 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 7 of the second embodiment.
Figure 212-2 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 7.
First, at time T1, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 212-1 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 212-1 (3) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the three second character decorative sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.
Furthermore, time points T1 and T2 are both in the first performance state (see Figure 207).

In the variation effect example 7, the temporary stopping of the left decorative pattern 41 is initiated after the end of the reach stimulation effect, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation performance example 7, the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started simultaneously with the start of the reach prompting performance. Also, the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started before the reach prompting performance starts. Also, the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 may be started after the reach prompting performance starts and before the end.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right after a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance or a pseudo consecutive exciting performance) has failed during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop, the player can be made to recognize that a specific promotional effect has failed.

In addition, during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles using at least a portion of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting effect (such as a reach exciting effect or a pseudo consecutive exciting effect) has failed.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop using the middle decorative pattern 41 after a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance or a pseudo consecutive exciting performance) has failed during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, even if a specific promotional effect fails, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles using at least a portion of the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting effect (such as a reach exciting effect or a pseudo consecutive exciting effect) has failed during the execution of a variable effect.

(Example of variation 8)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 8 in the second embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 8 is the same as that shown in Figures 141 to 144 (variable presentation example 12 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 207), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (1), and in the second to fourth presentation situations, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (3), and the presentation shown in Figure 213-1 is performed.

We will now explain in detail the variable presentation example 8 in the second embodiment that is different from variable presentation example 12 in the first embodiment.
In the variation performance example 12 in the first embodiment, when the pseudo consecutive patterns 57 are periodically displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed (see Fig. 141 (6) and Fig. 142 (11)). In contrast, in the variation performance example 8 in the second embodiment, as shown in Fig. 213-1 (1), when the pseudo consecutive patterns 57 are periodically displayed, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see (is not displayed).
In the variable performance example 8 in the second embodiment, the same performance is performed as shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), 142 (9) to (16), 143 (17) to (24), and 144 (25) to (29), except that the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see (not displayed) when the pseudo-consecutive pattern 57 displays a periodic movement.

Figures 213-2 and 214 are charts showing the flow of the operational display of the performance image performed in variable performance example 8 of the second embodiment.
Figures 213-2 and 214 show the flow of the display of the performance images in variable performance example 8.
The temporary stop state of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 213-2 is the temporary stop state of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character decorative portion 415, left second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation state, the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation state, the display of the left first number decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation state, and the display of the left second character decorative portion 416 in the 43rd operation state are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 141 (4) starts.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T2, display of the character portion 571 in the pseudo-repeated pattern 57 in the 48th operation mode (see FIG. 111) and display of the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode (see FIG. 112) begin. Also, at this time, display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decoration portion 412, left second number decoration portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character decoration portion 415, left second character decoration portion 416) in the 3rd operation mode, display of the left number portion 411 in the 1st operation mode, display of the left first number decoration portion 412 in the 9th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time point T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 141 (6), in other words, the effect shown in Figure 213-1 (1), begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number section 412, left second number section 413, left character section 414, left first character section 415, left second character section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left first number section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of character portion 571 in the 48th operation mode and the display of frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 141(7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, one or more cycles of display in the 48th operation mode of the character portion 571 and one or more cycles of display in the 49th operation mode of the frame portion 572 are performed.

Although not shown in the figure, after this, a temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 is initiated (see Figure 141 (8)), a temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 41 is initiated (see Figure 141 (9)), and the pseudo-consecutive performance is executed again (see Figure 142 (11)), after which the pseudo-consecutive pattern 57 is no longer displayed (see Figure 142 (12)). Here, from the time the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 begins until the cyclical display of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 begins (see Figure 142 (11) and Figure 213-1 (1)), the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character sections 415, left and right second character sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left and right first number sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second character sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode (see FIG. 113) and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode (see FIG. 114) in the zone design 58 begin. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 142 (14) begins.
Next, at time T5, the display of the character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode end. At this time, the display of the band portion 591 in the 52nd operation mode (see FIG. 115) and the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode (see FIG. 116) in the zone execution image 59 begin. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 142 (15) begins.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the character portion 581 displays one or more cycles of the 50th operation mode, and the frame portion 582 displays one or more cycles of the 51st operation mode.

Although not shown in the figures, the reach effect is then executed (see Figure 143 (18)). Furthermore, when the reach effect begins (the reach action effect ends), the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, left and right second character decorative portions 416) are displayed in the third action mode, the left and right number portions 411 are displayed in the first action mode, the left and right first number decorative portions 412 are displayed in the ninth action mode, and the left and right second character decorative portions 416 are displayed in the 43rd action mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T6 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T6, the display of the band portion 591 in the 52nd operation mode, the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, left and right second character decorative portions 416) in the 3rd operation mode, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the 1st operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the 9th operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (20) begins.

Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the band portion 591 displays one or more cycles of the 52nd operation mode, and the decorative portion 592 displays one or more cycles of the 53rd operation mode.
In addition, during the period from when the reach performance begins (when the reach-time operation performance ends) to time T6, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decoration sections 412, left and right second number decoration sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character decoration sections 415, left and right second character decoration sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left and right first number decoration sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second character decoration sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T7 in Figure 214 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T7, the following begins: display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation mode; display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation mode; display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode; display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation mode; and display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T7 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 143 (23) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T8 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T8, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, and left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation mode, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation mode, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, the display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation mode, and the display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation mode end. Time T8 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (25) starts.
Here, during the period from time T7 to time T8, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left and right first number portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode, the left and right second number portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode, the left and right third number portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, and the left and right fourth number portions 418 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T9 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T9, the following operations begin: display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three third number decorative portions 417, and three fourth number decorative portions 418) in the first operation mode, display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the 11th operation mode, display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 18th operation mode, display of the three third number decorative portions 417 in the 18th operation mode, and display of the three fourth number decorative portions 418 in the 18th operation mode. Time T9 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 144 (26) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T10 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T10, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the 11th operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the 18th operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the 18th operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the 18th operation state end. Time T10 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (27) starts.
Here, during the period from time T9 to time T10, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, the three second number decorative portions 413, the three third number decorative portions 417, and the three fourth number decorative portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the three first number decorative portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 11th operating mode, the three second number decorative portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 18th operating mode, the three third number decorative portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 18th operating mode, and the three fourth number decorative portions 418 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 18th operating mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T11 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T11, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode begin. Time T11 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 144 (28) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T12 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T12, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T12 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 144 (29) begins.

Here, during the period from time T11 to time T12, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the three second character decorative sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.
Furthermore, times T1 to T6 shown in Figure 213-2 are all the first presentation situation (see Figure 207), times T7 to T8 shown in Figure 214 are the third presentation situation, times T9 to T10 are the fourth presentation situation, and times T11 to T12 are the first presentation situation.

Note that Figures 213-2 and 214 omit illustration of the specific manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start of the effect shown in Figure 142 (16) until the end of the SP reach effect in Variable Presentation Example 8. Here, in Variable Presentation Example 8, the manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start of the effect shown in Figure 142 (16) until the end of the SP reach effect may be the same as the content shown at times T1 to T6 in Figure 210-2 and times T1 to T2 in Figure 211-2.

In addition, in the variation performance example 8, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown in time T6 in FIG. 210-2, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 8, from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as that shown in time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 210-2 for the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41.
Also, in the variation performance example 8, the SP reach performance starts at the timing shown in time T1 in Figure 211-2 (see 143 (21)), and the development performance (see 143 (22)) may be executed at the timing shown in time T2. In this case, in the variation performance example 8, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start of the SP reach performance to the end of the SP reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as that shown in Figure 211-2 for the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from time T1 to time T2.
In other words, in a miss-changing performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T6 in Figure 210-2 and times T1 to T2 in Figure 211-2, and then temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T7 to T12 in Figure 214.

As described above, the period of the operation display by the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 and the zone symbols 58 is different from the period of the temporary stop by the decorative symbols 41. In other words, the performance symbols include predetermined performance symbols (for example, decorative symbols 41) and specific performance symbols (for example, pseudo consecutive symbols 57) that are different from the predetermined performance symbols, and the performance control unit 300 can display the predetermined performance symbols in operation at a predetermined period (for example, one second), and can limit the operation display of the specific performance symbols at a predetermined period while a variable performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more easily aware that the specific performance pattern is a performance pattern different from the predetermined performance pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the operation modes of the pseudo consecutive symbols 57 and the zone symbols 58 are different from the operation mode in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41. That is, the performance symbols include predetermined performance symbols (for example, decorative symbol 41) and specific performance symbols (for example, pseudo consecutive symbols 57) that are different from the predetermined performance symbols, and the performance control unit 300 can periodically display the predetermined performance symbols in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207), and can limit the operation display of the specific performance symbols in the predetermined operation mode for one cycle or more during the execution of the variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more easily aware that the specific performance pattern is a performance pattern different from the predetermined performance pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a specific image (e.g., zone execution image 59) while the variable performance is being executed, and is capable of displaying the performance pattern in a first operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second), and is capable of displaying the specific image in a second operating mode that can be repeated at least in a second cycle (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 115) that is different from the first cycle.
In this case, it is possible for the player to easily distinguish between the performance pattern and the specific image, and it is also possible for the player to easily recognize both the display of the performance pattern in the first operating mode and the display of the specific image in the second operating mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
In the above example, it has been described that a specific image is displayed during the execution of a zone effect during the execution of a variable effect, but this is not limited to this. The specific image may be periodically displayed (displayed in the manner and cycle shown in FIGS. 115 and 116) during the execution of a variable effect, during the execution of a normal reach effect, during the execution of an SP reach effect, or during the execution of an SPSP reach effect. The specific image displayed in this case may be an image that gives the expectation that a jackpot game will be played, and may be an image unrelated to the zone effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance (for example, a reach-time action performance) that displays a performance pattern in motion when a reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, and the specific performances that can be executed in one performance mode (for example, the first stage) include a first specific performance in which a performance pattern having a specific number (for example, "3") is displayed in a first action mode (for example, the action mode shown in Figure 210-1 (7)), and a second specific performance in which a performance pattern having a specific number is displayed in a second action mode that is different from the first action mode (for example, the action mode shown in Figure 143 (18)).
In this case, even in one presentation mode, it is possible to realize diversification of presentations by presentation symbols according to the reach presentations that are executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can restrict the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time when the display of the middle decorative pattern 41 (the decorative pattern 41 of a miss) begins (see Figure 144 (25) etc.).
In this case, when the SPSP reach performance is executed and the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, when an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 may be able to continue temporarily stopping the left and right decorative patterns 41 even when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25) etc.).In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 may be able to temporarily stop the middle decorative pattern 41 when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25)).

In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop (periodic temporary stop) of the middle decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles while the SPSP reach image 509 is being displayed.
In this case, even while the SPSP reach image 509 is being displayed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the middle decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, when the performance control unit 300 executes an SPSP reach performance during the execution of a variable performance, it is capable of executing a temporary stop of at least one cycle by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) after the display of the second transition image 504.
In this case, even if the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see and then becomes visible again, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can perform a temporary stop using at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number section 411) while a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance, a pseudo consecutive exciting performance, or a zone exciting performance) is being performed during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, even during the execution of a specific promotional effect, it is possible to make the player more aware that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
Note that, while a specific hype performance is being performed, the performance control unit 300 may be capable of temporarily stopping at least a portion of the decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles. Also, while a specific hype performance is being performed, the performance control unit 300 may be capable of restricting temporary stopping of at least a portion of the decorative pattern 41 for one or more cycles. Also, while a specific hype performance is being performed, there may be a portion (or the entirety) of the decorative pattern 41 where temporary stopping is performed for one or more cycles, and a portion (or the entirety) where temporary stopping is restricted for one or more cycles.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may be able to restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the character unit 414) during the execution of a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance, a pseudo consecutive exciting performance, or a zone exciting performance) during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too locally on the decorative pattern 41 while a specific provocative effect is being performed, making it easier for the player to focus on the specific provocative effect.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying specific performance patterns (e.g., pseudo-consecutive patterns 57, zone patterns 58, etc.) at least at a cycle that is not performed when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (e.g., the cycle shown in Figure 111).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the specific performance pattern and the decorative pattern 41, and also to increase the degree of emphasis on the specific performance pattern.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying specific performance patterns (e.g., pseudo-consecutive patterns 57, zone patterns 58, etc.) at least in an operating mode that is not performed when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (e.g., the operating mode shown in Figure 111).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to distinguish between the specific performance pattern and the decorative pattern 41, and also to increase the degree of emphasis on the specific performance pattern.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing at least a display in a first operation mode (e.g., the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) and a display in a second operation mode (e.g., the eleventh operation mode shown in FIG. 207) using a first performance pattern having a first number (e.g., "3"), and is capable of executing at least a display in a first operation mode and a display in a third operation mode (e.g., the eighteenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) using a second performance pattern having a second number (e.g., "4").
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations according to the numbers of the presentation patterns, while preventing the player from mistaking that the presentation situation is different when the first presentation pattern is displayed and when the second presentation pattern is displayed.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion for at least a first period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion for at least a second period (e.g., 1 second) that is shorter than the first period after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a reach stimulation performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone stimulation performance, a zone performance, a role performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, the player can be more excited as the variable presentation progresses, and the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game can be increased.

In the variable performance example 8, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the reach-time operation performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 8, as in variable performance example 5, temporary stopping by any of the components of the decorative pattern 41 may not be performed (restricted) during the execution of the reach-time action performance.

In the above example, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect is smaller in display size than during the execution of the SP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Also, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect.

(Example of variation 9)
Next, a variation presentation example 9 in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 9 in the second embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the first stage. Similar to variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 9 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 59, and is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59. Furthermore, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 39 is the variation presentation shown in FIGS. 139(1) to (6) (the same variation presentation as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern").

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 9 is the same as that shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), 142 (9) to (16), 143 (17) to (23), 147 (1) to (8), and 148 (9), (10) (variable presentation example 13 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 207), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (1), and in the second to fifth presentation situations and the eighth presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (3).

Figure 215 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 9 of the second embodiment.
Figure 215 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 9.
Although not shown, in variable performance example 13, after the normal reach performance and the SP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance begins, and the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413, left and right third number decorative sections 417, left and right fourth number decorative sections 418) are displayed in the first operation mode, the left and right first number decorative sections 412 are displayed in the tenth operation mode, the left and right second number decorative sections 413 are displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the left and right third number decorative sections 417 are displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, and the left and right fourth number decorative sections 418 are displayed in the sixteenth operation mode.

The temporary stop state of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 215 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T1 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (2) begins.

Here, during the period from the start of the SPSP reach performance to time T1, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left and right first number portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operation mode, the left and right second number portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operation mode, the left and right third number portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operation mode, and the left and right fourth number portions 418 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operation mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the following operations begin: display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three third number decorative portions 417, and three fourth number decorative portions 418) in the first operation mode, display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the tenth operation mode, display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, display of the three third number decorative portions 417 in the seventeenth operation mode, and display of the three fourth number decorative portions 418 in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (5) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, the three second number decorative portions 413, the three third number decorative portions 417, and the three fourth number decorative portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the three first number decorative portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode, the three second number decorative portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode, the three third number decorative portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, and the three fourth number decorative portions 418 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (8) starts.
Next, at time T5, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 148 (9) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the eighth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.

In addition, in Variation Presentation Example 9, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation until the start of the SPSP reach presentation is the same as in Variation Presentation Example 8. In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 9, the decorative pattern 41 may temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 213-2, and then temporarily stop in the manner shown at times T1 to T5 in FIG. 149.

Also, in the variation performance example 9, the specific mode of the temporary stop from the start of the performance shown in Figure 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance is omitted from the illustration. Here, in the variation performance example 9, the mode of the temporary stop from the start of the performance shown in Figure 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in Figure 210-2.
In addition, in the variation performance example 9, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 210-2, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 9, from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach, the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41 (the operation mode of the decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 210-2.

In addition, in the variation performance example 9, the specific mode of the temporary stop from the start to the end of the SP reach performance is omitted from the illustration. Here, in the variation performance example 9, the mode of the temporary stop from the start to the end of the SP reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T2 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 9, the display of the second role effect image 508 (see FIG. 143 (22)) may be started at the timing shown at time T2 in FIG. 211-2, and the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 9, the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach performance (the operation mode of the decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T2 in FIG. 211-2.
That is, in the jackpot variation presentation in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 may temporarily stop in the manner shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 210-2, then temporarily stop in the manner shown at time T1 to time T2 in FIG. 211-2, and then temporarily stop in the manner shown at time T1 to time T5 in FIG. 215.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated at a first cycle (e.g., 1-second cycle) and a second operation mode that can be repeated at a second cycle (e.g., 1.5-second cycle) that is different from the first cycle. After the specific performance starts while variable performances are being executed, the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in the first operation mode and display the performance symbols in the second operation mode. Specific performances include a performance that stops the left decorative symbol 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number, and a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a double number.
In this case, since the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the effect symbols in the second operation mode are both performed after the start of the specific effect, the impact of the operation of the effect symbols after the start of the specific effect can be increased. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the effect symbols in the second operation mode can both be easily noticed by the player without being overlooked, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display performance symbols in the first operation mode and can display performance symbols in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance while variable performances are being executed. Examples of specific performances include a performance that stops a left decorative symbol 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number, and a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a double number.
In this case, since the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the second operation mode are both performed after the start of the specific effect, the impact of the operation of the effect symbols after the start of the specific effect can be increased. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, the display of the effect symbols in the first operation mode and the display of the second operation mode can be easily noticed by the player without being overlooked, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while the variable performance is being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance that stops the right decorative symbol 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops the decorative symbol 41 of a losing number, and a performance that stops the decorative symbol 41 of a double number.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects of the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols according to the first operation mode and the display of the effect symbols according to the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute predetermined performances during the execution of variable performances, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode (e.g., the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of variable performances, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of variable performances. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which the left decorative symbol 41 stops, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number stops, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number stops.
In this case, it is possible to realize a diversification of the effects by the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, 1.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of variable performances, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a performance symbol that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of variable performances (for example, when a decorative symbol 41 of a miss is displayed, or when a decorative symbol 41 of a doublet is displayed). Specific effects include an effect that stops the left decorative pattern 41, a reach prompting effect, a normal reach effect, a pseudo consecutive prompting effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a zone prompting effect, a zone effect, a role effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a button operation effect, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a double number, and the like.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Furthermore, it is possible to particularly emphasize the effect symbols that suggest the results of the judgment, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a performance symbol that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance (for example, when a decorative pattern 41 of a miss is displayed, or when a decorative pattern 41 of a doublet is displayed). Specific effects include an effect that stops the left decorative pattern 41, a reach prompting effect, a normal reach effect, a pseudo consecutive prompting effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a zone prompting effect, a zone effect, a role effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a button operation effect, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number, an effect that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a double number, and the like.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using the effect symbols according to the progress of the variable effects. Furthermore, it is possible to particularly emphasize the effect symbols that suggest the results of the judgment, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, 10 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The effect control unit 300 can display the effect symbols at least in the first operation mode when a variable effect is being performed, and can display the effect symbols at least in the second operation mode when a variable effect is not being performed.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the display pattern regardless of whether or not a variable display is being executed, and the display can be diversified by the display pattern depending on whether or not a variable display is being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in Fig. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the eighth operation mode shown in Fig. 207) that is different from the first operation mode. The effect control unit 300 can display the effect symbols at least in the first operation mode when a variable effect is being performed, and can display the effect symbols at least in the second operation mode when a variable effect is not being performed.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the display pattern regardless of whether or not a variable display is being executed, and the display can be diversified by the display pattern depending on whether or not a variable display is being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, 1.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The effect control unit 300 can display a specific part (for example, the first number decoration part 412) that is at least a part of the effect symbol in the first operation mode, and can display the specific part in the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect symbols. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the ninth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The effect control unit 300 can display a specific part (for example, the first number decorative part 412) that is at least a part of the effect symbol in the first operation mode, and can display the specific part in the second operation mode.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect symbols. Also, since the first and second operation modes are different operation modes and both can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while the variable performance is being executed, and the performance pattern operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display a specific portion, which is at least a part of the performance pattern, in at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, and can display the specific portion in at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance that stops the right decorative pattern 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number, and a performance that stops a decorative pattern 41 with a double number.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect patterns according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute predetermined performances during the execution of variable performances, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode (e.g., the ninth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display a specific portion, which is at least a part of the performance symbol, using at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of variable performances, and can display the specific portion using at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of variable performances. Examples of predetermined performances include a performance in which the right decorative symbol 41 stops, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive inducing performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number stops, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number stops.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using common parts in the effect patterns according to the progress of the variable effects. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and when executing specific performances while variable performances are being executed, it can restrict the display of the performance symbols for one or more cycles at specific timing after the start of the specific performance (for example, the execution timing of the performance shown in FIG. 210-1 (1)).Specific performances include a performance that stops the left decorative symbol 41, a reach prompting performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive prompting performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone prompting performance, a zone performance, a role-playing performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops the decorative symbol 41 of a losing number, a performance that displays the decorative symbol 41 of a double number, and the like.
In this case, depending on whether it is a specific timing or not, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the periodic movement display of the performance pattern or emphasizing another effect different from the periodic movement display of the performance pattern, which makes it possible to diversify the effects according to the progress of the variable effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can limit the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed (see Figure 147 (4)).
In this case, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the double-digit decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 can periodically display the effect symbols in motion during the execution of a jackpot game.
In this case, even during the execution of a jackpot game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the displayed effect symbols.

Furthermore, during the execution of a jackpot game, the effect control unit 300 can display the effect symbols in a cycle (for example, 7.5 seconds) that is not performed during the execution of a variable effect.
In this case, the player can be given a sense of superiority by winning the big win game.

In addition, during the execution of a jackpot game, the presentation control unit 300 can display the presentation pattern in an operation mode (for example, the eighth operation mode shown in Figure 207) that was not performed during the execution of a variable presentation.
In this case, the player can be given a sense of superiority by winning the big win game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion for at least a first period (for example, 1 second) before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the decorative pattern 41 in motion for at least a second period (for example, 1.5 seconds) longer than the first period after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include a reach stimulation performance, a normal reach performance, a pseudo consecutive stimulation performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a zone stimulation performance, a zone performance, a role performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, as the variable presentation progresses, the series of actions displayed by the decorative symbols can be more easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute the first and second action performances of the decorative pattern 41 during execution of the variable performance, can restrict temporary stops during execution of the first action performance, and can execute temporary stops during execution of the second action performance. Examples of the first action performance include a start action performance, an effect in which the decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed as a double-digit number, an action performance when a win is reached, a distance performance, etc. Examples of the second action performance include a proximity performance, a reach-teasing performance, etc.
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped even while the action presentation is being performed, and making it easier for the player to focus on the action presentation by preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stop, depending on the type of action presentation.

It should be noted that the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the first stage of this embodiment is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (1) and the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (3), and other than that, as an action presentation when a reach occurs, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same manner as shown in Figures 153 (1) to (7).
Also, for example, in the first stage, a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (3), but during the execution of the SP reach performance, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same manner as shown in Figures 154 (1) to (5).
Also, for example, in the first stage, in addition to the less decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (3), when a decorative pattern 41 with a miss is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same manner as shown in Figures 155 (1) to (3).

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a repeatable operating mode in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second), and then display it in a repeatable operating mode in a second cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and can display a second part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part, in a repeatable operating mode in a first cycle, and then display it in a repeatable operating mode in a third cycle (e.g., 12 seconds) (see Figures 207, 215, etc.).
In other words, "during the execution of the variable performance, the first part, which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, can be displayed in an operation mode that is repeatable in a first cycle, and then in an operation mode that is repeatable in a second cycle" includes the case where, when the first part is displayed in an operation mode that is repeatable in a second cycle, the first part is also displayed in an operation mode that is repeatable in a first cycle.
Furthermore, "the second part can be displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a first period, and then in an operating mode repeatable in a third period" includes the case where, when the second part is displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a third period, the second part is also displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a first period.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a first operating mode (e.g., the first operating mode), and then display it in a second operating mode (e.g., the tenth operating mode), and can display a second part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part, in the first operating mode, and then display it in a third operating mode (e.g., the sixteenth operating mode) (see Figures 207, 215, etc.).
In other words, "the first part can be displayed in the first operating mode and then in the second operating mode" includes the case where the first part is also displayed in the second operating mode when the first part is displayed in the first operating mode.
Furthermore, "the second part can be displayed in the first operating mode and then in the third operating mode" includes the case where the first part is also displayed in the third operating mode when the second part is displayed in the first operating mode.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a repeatable operating mode in a first cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and then display it in a repeatable operating mode in a second cycle (e.g., 1 second), and can display a second part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part, in a repeatable operating mode in a third cycle (e.g., 12 seconds), and then display it in a repeatable operating mode in the second cycle (see Figures 207, 215, etc.).
In other words, "the first part can be displayed in an operating mode that is repeatable in a first period, and then in an operating mode that is repeatable in a second period" includes the case where, when the first part is displayed in an operating mode that is repeatable in a second period, the first part is also displayed in an operating mode that is repeatable in a first period.
Furthermore, "the second part can be displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a third cycle, and then displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a second cycle" includes the case where, when the second part is displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a third cycle, the second part is also displayed in an operating mode repeatable in a second cycle.

Furthermore, during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, in a first operating mode (e.g., the tenth operating mode), and then display it in a second operating mode (e.g., the first operating mode), and can display a second part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and is different from the first part, in a third operating mode (e.g., the sixteenth operating mode), and then display it in the second operating mode (see Figures 151, 127 to 129, etc.).
In other words, "the first part can be displayed in the first operating mode and then in the second operating mode" includes the case where the first part is also displayed in the second operating mode when the first part is displayed in the first operating mode.
Furthermore, "the second part can be displayed in the third operating mode and then in the second operating mode" includes the first part being displayed in the second operating mode when the second part is being displayed in the third operating mode.

(Variation example 10)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 10 in the second embodiment. The variation presentation example 10 in the second embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "1", just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 10 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 10 is the same as that shown in Figures 156 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 14 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (2).

Figure 216 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 10 in the second embodiment.
Figure 216 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 10.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral portion 412, left second numeral portion 413, left third numeral portion 417, left fourth numeral portion 418, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode; display of the left first numeral portion 412 in the tenth operation mode; display of the left second numeral portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode; display of the left third numeral portion 417 in the seventeenth operation mode; display of the left fourth numeral portion 418 in the sixteenth operation mode; display of the left character portion 414 in the twenty-sixth operation mode; and display of the left second character portion 416 in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number portion 412, right second number portion 413, right third number portion 417, right fourth number portion 418, right character portion 414, right first character portion 415, right second character portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the right first number portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode, the right second number portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the right third number portion 417 begins to be displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the right fourth number portion 418 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the right character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the twenty-ninth operation mode, and the right second character portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number portion 412, second middle number portion 413, third middle number portion 417, fourth middle number portion 418, middle character portion 414, first middle character portion 415, second middle character portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the first middle number portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode, the second middle number portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the third middle number portion 417 begins to be displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the fourth middle number portion 418 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the middle character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the twenty-third operation mode, and the second middle character portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three third number decorative sections 417, three fourth number decorative sections 418, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the tenth operating mode, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the seventeenth operating mode, the display of the three fourth number decorative sections 418 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three second character decorative sections 416 in the forty-fifth operating mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the twenty-sixth operating mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the twenty-ninth operating mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the twenty-third operating mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral portion 412, left second numeral portion 413, left third numeral portion 417, left fourth numeral portion 418, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) displays for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left first numeral portion 412 displays for one or more cycles in the tenth operation mode, the left second numeral portion 413 displays for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operation mode, the left third numeral portion 417 displays for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operation mode, the left character portion 414 displays for one or more cycles in the twenty-sixth operation mode, and the left second character portion 416 displays for one or more cycles in the forty-fifth operation mode, while the left fourth numeral portion 418 does not display for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operation mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right third number decorative section 417, right fourth number decorative section 418, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the right third number decorative section 417 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, the right character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 29th operation mode, and the right second character decorative section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 45th operation mode. On the other hand, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right first number decoration part 412 does not display for more than one cycle in the 10th operating mode, the right second number decoration part 413 does not display for more than one cycle in the 16th operating mode, and the right fourth number decoration part 418 does not display for more than one cycle in the 16th operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the ninth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display a specific part of the performance symbol (for example, the first number decorative part 412) at least in the first operation mode during execution of a variable performance in the first performance mode (for example, the first stage), and can display the specific part in at least the second operation mode during execution of a variable performance in the second performance mode (for example, the second stage).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the effect symbols according to the effect mode. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display by the first operation mode of the specific part and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Variation example 11)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 11 in the second embodiment. The variation presentation example 11 in the second embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "2", just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 11 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 158 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 15 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (2).
In addition, in the variation performance example 11 in the second embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as that of the variation performance example 10 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 216). In other words, in the variation performance example 11 in the second embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variation example 12)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 12 in the second embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the second embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "3". Also, similar to the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 12 is the same as that shown in Figures 160 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 16 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (2).

Figure 217 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 12 in the second embodiment.
Figure 217 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 12.
First, at time T1, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral portion 412, left second numeral portion 413, left third numeral portion 417, left fourth numeral portion 418, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the first left numeral portion 412 is displayed in the tenth operation mode, the second left numeral portion 413 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the third left numeral portion 417 is displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the fourth left numeral portion 418 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the left character portion 414 is displayed in the twenty-sixth operation mode, and the second left character portion 416 is displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160(5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number portion 412, right second number portion 413, right third number portion 417, right fourth number portion 418, right character portion 414, right first character portion 415, right second character portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the right first number portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode, the right second number portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the right third number portion 417 begins to be displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the right fourth number portion 418 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the right character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the twenty-ninth operation mode, and the right second character portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number portion 412, second middle number portion 413, third middle number portion 417, fourth middle number portion 418, middle character portion 414, first middle character portion 415, second middle character portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the first middle number portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode, the second middle number portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the third middle number portion 417 begins to be displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the fourth middle number portion 418 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the middle character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the twenty-third operation mode, and the second middle character portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160 (7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three third number decorative sections 417, three fourth number decorative sections 418, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the tenth operating mode, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the seventeenth operating mode, the display of the three fourth number decorative sections 418 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three second character decorative sections 416 in the forty-fifth operating mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the twenty-sixth operating mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the twenty-ninth operating mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the twenty-third operating mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left third number decorative section 417, left fourth number decorative section 418, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left third number decorative section 417 is displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operation mode, the left character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the twenty-ninth operation mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-fifth operation mode. On the other hand, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the left first numeral decoration part 412 does not display for more than one cycle in the tenth operating mode, the left second numeral decoration part 413 does not display for more than one cycle in the sixteenth operating mode, and the left fourth numeral decoration part 418 does not display for more than one cycle in the sixteenth operating mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

(Variation example 13)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 13 in the second embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 13 in the second embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "4". Also, similar to the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 13 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the variable presentation example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 160 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 16 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (2) and there is one more hold number display 55 and hold image 52 for the first starting port 121.

Figure 218 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 13 in the second embodiment.
Figure 218 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 13.
First, at time T1, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral portion 412, left second numeral portion 413, left third numeral portion 417, left fourth numeral portion 418, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the first left numeral portion 412 is displayed in the tenth operation mode, the second left numeral portion 413 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the third left numeral portion 417 is displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the fourth left numeral portion 418 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the left character portion 414 is displayed in the twenty-sixth operation mode, and the second left character portion 416 is displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160(5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number portion 412, right second number portion 413, right third number portion 417, right fourth number portion 418, right character portion 414, right first character portion 415, right second character portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the right first number portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode, the right second number portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the right third number portion 417 begins to be displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the right fourth number portion 418 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the right character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the twenty-ninth operation mode, and the right second character portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number portion 412, second middle number portion 413, third middle number portion 417, fourth middle number portion 418, middle character portion 414, first middle character portion 415, second middle character portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the first middle number portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode, the second middle number portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the third middle number portion 417 begins to be displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the fourth middle number portion 418 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the middle character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the twenty-third operation mode, and the second middle character portion 416 begins to be displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160 (7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three third number decorative sections 417, three fourth number decorative sections 418, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the tenth operating mode, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the seventeenth operating mode, the display of the three fourth number decorative sections 418 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the three second character decorative sections 416 in the forty-fifth operating mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the twenty-sixth operating mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the twenty-ninth operating mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the twenty-third operating mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while executing a variable performance based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "4") (see Figure 218).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopped decorative pattern 41, and also to prevent the variable presentation from becoming redundant.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, 1 second), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, 12 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. In a specific variable effect (for example, variable effect example 12), the effect control unit 300 can at least display the decorative symbol 41 for one cycle or more using the first operation mode, and display the decorative symbol 41 for less than one cycle using the second operation mode (see FIG. 217, etc.).
In this case, one variable presentation can make it easier for the player to recognize the series of action displays by the decorative pattern 41, and can also attract the player's interest in the display of more than one cycle by the second action mode of the decorative pattern 41.

In particular, the operation mode of the effect symbols includes a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds). In the first variable effect (e.g., variable effect example 12), the effect control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, and less than one cycle of display by the third operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 217, etc.). In the second variable effect (e.g., variable effect example 11), the effect control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the decorative symbol 41, and more than one cycle of display by the third operation mode of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 216, etc.).
In this case, the player can be interested in which operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed for one or more cycles for each variable performance.

The operational modes of the performance symbols include a first operational mode (for example, the 17th operational mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated by a first part (for example, the third number decorative part 417) that is at least a part of the decorative symbol 41, and a second operational mode (for example, the 16th operational mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated by a second part (for example, the fourth number decorative part 418) that is different from the first part of the decorative symbol 41. In a specific variable performance (for example, variable performance example 12), the performance control unit 300 can at least execute a display of one or more cycles by the first operational mode of the first part and a display of less than one cycle by the second operational mode of the second part (see FIG. 217, etc.).
In this case, one variable presentation can make it easier for the player to recognize the series of action displays by the first part, and also attract the player's interest in the display of one or more cycles by the second action mode of the second part.

In particular, the operational mode of the performance pattern includes a third operational mode (for example, the tenth operational mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated by the third part (first number decorative part 412), which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41. The performance control unit 300 can execute, in the first variable performance (for example, variable performance example 12), at least one cycle of display by the first operational mode of the first part, less than one cycle of display by the second operational mode of the second part, and less than one cycle of display by the third operational mode of the third part (see FIG. 217, etc.). The performance control unit 300 can also execute, in the second variable performance (for example, variable performance example 11), at least one cycle of display by the first operational mode of the first part, less than one cycle of display by the second operational mode of the second part, and more than one cycle of display by the third operational mode of the third part (see FIG. 216, etc.).
In this case, the player can be interested in which part of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed for one or more cycles in which operating mode for each variable performance.

In addition, in a specific variable performance (for example, a random miss variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 121 being "1"), in the first variable performance (for example, the variable performance shown in Figure 151), the performance control unit 300 may be able to prevent at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the character part 414, etc.) from being displayed in motion (keeping all parts of the decorative pattern 41 still) while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to notice any part of the decorative pattern 41, or varying the degree of emphasis depending on the components of the decorative pattern 41, depending on the variable presentation.

(Variation example 14)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 14 in the second embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 14 in the second embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the second stage. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 14 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 14 is the same as that shown in Figures 163 and 164 (variable presentation example 18 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 205 (2) and the presentation shown in Figure 219-1 is performed.
More specifically, in the variation effect example 14 in the second embodiment, first, the same effects as those shown in Figures 163(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 219-1(1), the reach line image 501 is displayed and the reach-time action effect starts. At this time, the right decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219-1 (2), the reach action presentation ends and the separation presentation begins.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 164(9) and (10) are performed, and then the close-up effect is performed as shown in Figure 219-1(3). In this embodiment, when the close-up effect starts, the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219-1 (4), after the special symbol stops and the proximity effect ends, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "343", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 219-2 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 14 in the second embodiment.
Figure 219-2 shows the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 14.
First, at time T1, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral portion 412, left second numeral portion 413, left third numeral portion 417, left fourth numeral portion 418, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the first left numeral portion 412 is displayed in the tenth operation mode, the second left numeral portion 413 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the third left numeral portion 417 is displayed in the seventeenth operation mode, the fourth left numeral portion 418 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, the left character portion 414 is displayed in the twenty-sixth operation mode, and the second left character portion 416 is displayed in the forty-fifth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 163(5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the first left numeral decoration section 412 in the tenth operating mode, the display of the second left numeral decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the third left numeral decoration section 417 in the seventeenth operating mode, the display of the fourth left numeral decoration section 418 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the twenty-sixth operating mode, and the display of the second left character decoration section 416 in the forty-fifth operating mode end. Also, at this time, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right numeral section 411, first right numeral decoration section 412, second right numeral decoration section 413, third right numeral decoration section 417, fourth right numeral decoration section 418, right character section 414, first right character decoration section 415, second right character decoration section 416) in the third operating mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 219-1 (1) begins.

Next, at time T3, the following displays begin: the left and right first number decoration parts 412 in the 10th operating mode, the left and right second number decoration parts 413 in the 16th operating mode, the left and right third number decoration parts 417 in the 17th operating mode, the left and right fourth number decoration parts 418 in the 16th operating mode, the left and right character parts 414 in the 26th operating mode, and the left and right second character decoration parts 416 in the 45th operating mode. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 164 (9) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character portions 415, left and right second character portions 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operating mode, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operating mode, the display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operating mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the twenty-sixth operating mode, and the display of the left and right second character portions 416 in the forty-fifth operating mode are completed.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413, left third number decorative portion 417, left fourth number decorative portion 418, left character portion 414, left first character decorative portion 415, left second character decorative portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right third number decorative portion 417, right fourth number decorative portion 418, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the left and right first number decoration parts 412 display for one or more cycles in the 10th operating mode, the left and right second number decoration parts 413 display for one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left and right third number decoration parts 417 display for one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, the left and right character parts 414 display for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left and right second character decoration parts 416 display for one or more cycles in the 45th operating mode, while the left and right fourth number decoration parts 418 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

Furthermore, during execution of a variable performance in the first performance mode (e.g., the first stage), the performance control unit 300 can display the first part (e.g., the second number decorative part 413) and the second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 in at least a first operating mode (the third operating mode shown in Figure 207), and during execution of a variable performance in the second performance mode (e.g., the second stage), the performance control unit 300 can display the first part in at least a second operating mode (e.g., the sixteenth operating mode shown in Figure 207) and the second part in at least a third operating mode (e.g., the tenth operating mode shown in Figure 207).
In this case, it is possible to switch between presenting the first and second parts in a unified manner or making it easier to distinguish between the first and second parts, depending on the presentation mode.
The first and second operation modes may be the same, or the first and third operation modes may be the same, i.e., the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific action performances using the decorative symbols 41 while variable performances are being executed, and can restrict the temporary stopping of the decorative symbols 41 while the specific action performance is being executed in the first performance mode (any of the first to third stages) (see FIG. 210-1(1)), and can execute the temporary stopping of the decorative symbols 41 while the specific action performance is being executed in the second performance mode (one of the first to third stages that is different from the first performance mode) (see, for example, FIG. 219-1(1)). Examples of specific action performances include a start action performance, a reach-inducing performance, a reach-in action performance, and an effect in which the doublet decorative symbols 41 are enlarged.
In this case, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped even while a specific action presentation is being executed, and making it easier for the player to focus on the specific action presentation by preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the temporary stop, depending on the presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, and can display a specific portion (e.g., number portion 411) that is at least a part of the performance pattern in at least a first operation mode (e.g., the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) before the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of the variable performance, and can display a specific portion (e.g., first number decorative portion 412) that is at least a part of the performance pattern and different from the specific portion in at least a second operation mode (e.g., the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207). Then, after the start of the predetermined performance during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can display the specific portion in at least the first operation mode, and can display the specific portion in at least a third operation mode (e.g., the eleventh operation mode shown in FIG. 207) (see FIG. 131, etc.). Examples of predetermined performances include normal reach performances and SP reach performances.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the effects of the specific part regardless of the progress of the variable effects, and to achieve a diversification of the effects of the specified part according to the progress of the variable effects.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances while variable performances are being executed, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when the performance symbols are stopped during execution of the variable performance, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during execution of the variable performance. Specific performances include a performance that stops the left decorative symbol 41, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number, and a performance that stops a decorative symbol 41 with a double number.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects of the effect symbols according to the effect situation during the execution of the variable effect. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute specific performances during the execution of variable performances, and the performance symbol operation modes include a first operation mode (e.g., the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., the tenth operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when the performance symbols are stopped during the execution of variable performances, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of variable performances. Examples of specific performances include a performance in which the left decorative symbol 41 is stopped, a reach-inducing performance, a normal reach-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a pseudo-consecutive-inducing performance, a zone-inducing performance, a zone performance, a role-playing device performance, an SP reach-in performance, an SPSP reach-in performance, a button operation performance, a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a missing number is stopped, and a performance in which a decorative symbol 41 with a double number is stopped.
In this case, it is possible to realize a diversification of the effects by the effect symbols according to the effect situation during the execution of the variable effect. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can control performance modes including a first performance mode (e.g., first stage) and a second performance mode (e.g., second stage) different from the first performance mode, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) different from the first cycle. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the effect symbols according to the effect mode. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are operation modes that can be repeated at different cycles, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can control performance modes including a first performance mode (for example, the first stage) and a second performance mode (for example, the second stage) different from the first performance mode, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (for example, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (for example, the third operation mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the effect symbols according to the effect mode. Also, since the first operation mode and the second operation mode are different operation modes and both are operation modes that can be displayed periodically, it is possible to make it easy for the player to notice the display of the effect symbols by the first operation mode and the display by the second operation mode without missing them, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the manner in which the temporary stops during the execution of the SP Reach performance, the temporary stops during the execution of the SPSP Reach performance, and the temporary stops during the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (the operating manner of the temporary stops, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) are the same as the manner in which the temporary stops during the execution of the SP Reach performance, the temporary stops during the execution of the SPSP Reach performance, and the temporary stops during the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in the first stage.

Furthermore, the form of the decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41's decorative mode, operation mode at temporary stop, and period of temporary stop may be the same as those in the second stage.

(Variation example 15)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 15 in the second embodiment. Similar to variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 15 in the second embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at second starting port 122 in the third stage is "1". Also, similar to variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 15 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 15 is the same as that shown in Figures 177 (1) to (3) (variable performance example 24 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (3).
That is, in the variable performance example 15 in the second embodiment, all three decorative patterns 41 stop definitively without any temporary stop.

In addition, while variation presentation example 15 in the second embodiment has been described as a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened play state, it is not limited to this. The same variation presentation as variation presentation example 15 may be executed regardless of the value (any value from "1" to "4") of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state. In other words, in a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state, the decorative pattern 41 may not be temporarily stopped, regardless of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one or more cycles while a variable performance is being performed in a specific performance mode (for example, the third stage).
In this case, in a specific presentation mode, it becomes possible to execute a variable presentation with a short execution time, which gives the player a sense of speed in the variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in the variable performance in the third stage, no temporary stop is executed for any of the decorative symbols 41. That is, the performance control unit 300 can restrict the temporary stop of any of the three decorative symbols 41 during the execution of the variable performance in a specific performance mode (for example, the third stage).
In this case, the execution time of the variable effect in the third stage can be shortened by the time required for the temporary stop, thereby giving the player a stronger sense of speed in the variable effect.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 24)
In the above example, it was explained that in the scattered miss variable presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without stopping temporarily (see Figure 177 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
Even in the case of a random miss variation effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state, the decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 178(1) to (4). Also, even in the case of a random miss variation effect based on the value of the reserved number for a win at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state (any value from "1" to "4"), the decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped. Even in this case, in the case of a random miss variation effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state, none of the three decorative symbols 41 that were temporarily stopped will be displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while a variable performance is being executed based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number in a specific performance mode (for example, the third stage).
In this case, in a specific presentation mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopped decorative pattern 41 and to realize a speedy changing presentation.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 in the variable presentation in the time-shortened game state, but limits the temporary stop to one cycle or more.
In this case, even in the variable presentation during the time-shortened game state, it is possible to realize diversification of the presentation by the decorative pattern 41, while preventing the variable presentation from becoming redundant.

(Variation example 16)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 16 in the second embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 16 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage, and is an example of a miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 16 in the second embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 16 is the same as that shown in Figures 186 and 187 (variable presentation example 30 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 205 (3), the presentation shown in Figure 220-1 is performed, and an SP reach presentation is performed instead of an SPSP reach presentation (SP reach image 503 instead of SPSP reach image 509).
More specifically, in the variation effect example 16 in the second embodiment, the same effects as those shown in Figures 186(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 220-1(1), a reach-stimulating effect is performed. In the reach-stimulating effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up-and-down motion. Also, at this time, neither of the left nor right decorative symbols 41 is temporarily stopped.

Next, the reach effect shown in FIG. 220-1 (2) is executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect is successful. In this case, the reach-time action effect is started. In the example shown, in the reach-time action effect, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right third number decorative portions 417, and left and right fourth number decorative portions 418) are displayed in an action extending in the vertical direction in the figure.
Next, as shown in FIG. 220-1(3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size and are moved toward the upper left side of the image display section 114.

Furthermore, after this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 186 (6) to (8) and Figures 187 (9) to (12) are performed, except that the SP Reach effect is performed instead of the SPSP Reach effect (SP Reach image 503 instead of SPSP Reach image 509).

Figure 220-2 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 16 in the second embodiment.
Figure 220-2 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 16.
The temporary stop state shown at time T1 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, and left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 186 (6) starts.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) in the first operation mode, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation mode, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, the display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation mode, and the display of the left and right fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation mode end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 186 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right third number portions 417, left and right fourth number portions 418) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left and right first number portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode, the left and right second number portions 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode, the left and right third number portions 417 are displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode, and the left and right fourth number portions 418 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (9) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T4 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 187 (10) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, none of the three decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped are displayed for more than one cycle.

The temporary stop state shown at time T5 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T5, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (11) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T6 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T6, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, and three fourth number portions 418) in the first operation state, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the tenth operation state, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state, the display of the three third number portions 417 in the seventeenth operation state, and the display of the three fourth number portions 418 in the sixteenth operation state end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 187 (12) starts.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, none of the three decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped are displayed for more than one cycle.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances while a variable performance is being executed, can limit the display of the stopped performance symbols for at least one cycle or more before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can execute the display of the stopped performance symbols for at least one cycle or more after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Examples of predetermined performances include reach stimulation performances, zone stimulation performances, zone performances, pseudo consecutive stimulation performances, pseudo consecutive performances, performances in which the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, reach performances, etc.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects by using effect symbols according to the effect situation during the execution of the variable effect. Also, since the effect symbols are more likely to be noticed by the player after the start of the predetermined effect than before the start of the predetermined effect, it is possible to increase the interest in the game as the variable effect progresses.

In addition, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during execution of a variable effect in the time-saving game state, the effect control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 from the time when the middle decorative symbol 41 starts to be displayed (see Figure 187 (9)).

In addition, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode (e.g., the first operating mode shown in Figure 207) and a second operating mode (e.g., the third operating mode shown in Figure 207), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of displaying the decorative pattern 41 in at least a first operating mode and a third operating mode (e.g., the tenth operating mode shown in Figure 207).
In this case, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operating mode makes it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the presentation mode, and the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the second operating mode and the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the third operating mode can achieve diversification of presentations according to the presentation mode.

In particular, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing at least a display of the first part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode (e.g., the first operating mode shown in Figure 207) and a display of the second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) in a second operating mode (e.g., the ninth operating mode shown in Figure 207), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), is capable of executing at least a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode and a display of the second part in a third operating mode (e.g., the tenth operating mode shown in Figure 207).
In this case, the operation display of the first part makes it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the presentation mode, and the operation display of the second part makes it possible to diversify the presentation according to the presentation mode.

In addition, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying an action based on the first cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the decorative pattern 41 and a second cycle (e.g., 1 second), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of displaying an action based on the first cycle of the decorative pattern 41 and a third cycle (e.g., 12 seconds).
In this case, the operation display based on the first cycle of the decorative pattern 41 makes it easier for the player to recognize the status of the presentation regardless of the presentation mode, and the operation display based on the second cycle of the decorative pattern 41 and the operation display based on the third cycle of the decorative pattern 41 can realize diversification of presentations according to the presentation mode.

In particular, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the second stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing at least an action display based on the first period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the first part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 and an action display based on the second period (e.g., 1 second) of the second part (e.g., the fourth number decorative part 418), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of executing at least an action display based on the first period of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 and an action display based on the third period (e.g., 12 seconds) of the second part.
In this case, the operation display of the first part makes it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the presentation mode, and the operation display of the second part makes it possible to diversify the presentation according to the presentation mode.

In addition, the variable performances that the performance control unit 300 can execute in one performance mode (for example, the third stage) include a variable performance that can limit the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 while the variable performance is being executed, a variable performance that can execute a temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while the variable performance is being executed, and a variable performance that can execute a temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 for one cycle or more while the variable performance is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to diversify temporary stops in one presentation mode without complicating the presentation.

In addition, the manner in which the temporary stop occurs during the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop occurs for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) is the same as the manner in which the temporary stop occurs during the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the first stage.

In addition, the manner in which the operation display is performed during the customer waiting effect in the first stage (the manner in which the operation display is temporarily stopped, and whether the operation display is performed for one or more cycles or less than one cycle) is the same as the manner in which the operation display is performed during the customer waiting effect in the first embodiment (see Figures 193 and 194).

As described above, during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the effect pattern has a portion that does not display an action (e.g., the number portion 411) and a portion that displays an action (e.g., the character portion 414). That is, the effect control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., the number portion 411) in the effect pattern and a second element (e.g., the character portion 414) that is different from the first element, and in a specific effect state (e.g., the customer waiting state), it can limit the display of the action of one of the first and second elements for one or more cycles, and can display the action of the other element for one or more cycles.
In this case, in a specific presentation state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the other of the first and second elements, which is capable of performing an action display for one or more cycles, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., number portion 411) in the performance pattern and a second element (e.g., character portion 414) different from the first element, and the performance states in which a performance can be executed include a first performance state (e.g., a state waiting for customers) and a second performance state different from the first performance state (e.g., a state in which a variable performance is being executed).In the first performance state, the performance control unit 300 can limit the operation display of one of the first and second elements for one or more cycles and execute the operation display of the other element for one or more cycles, and in the second performance state, can execute the operation display of the first element for one or more cycles and the operation display of the second element for one or more cycles.
In this case, the player can be drawn to the presentation image that can be periodically displayed in both the first presentation state and the second presentation state, and by varying the degree of emphasis of the first element and the second element depending on the presentation state, it is possible to achieve a variety of presentations according to the presentation state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, the presentation modes that can be controlled by the presentation control unit 300 include the first presentation mode (any of the first to third stages) and the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to third stages). In the second presentation mode, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop based on a period that is not performed in the first presentation mode.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of presentations according to the presentation mode, and to increase the degree of emphasis on the temporary stop in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance (for example, a performance that displays a decorative pattern 41 that is a miss) while a variable performance is being executed, and the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (for example, 12 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. During execution of a specific performance during execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can at least display the decorative pattern 41 for one cycle or more using the first operation mode, and display the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle using the second operation mode (see time T4 in FIG. 216 ).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in motion even while a specific effect is being executed, and to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the display of the decorative pattern 41 in motion, thereby allowing the player to focus on the specific effect.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances (such as a performance that displays a decorative pattern 41 with a miss) while a variable performance is being executed, and the operational modes of the performance patterns include a first operational mode (such as the 17th operational mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated by a first part (such as the third number decorative part 417) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41, and a second operational mode (such as the 16th operational mode shown in FIG. 207) that can be repeated by a second part (such as the fourth number decorative part 418) that is different from the first part of the decorative pattern 41. During execution of a specific performance during execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can execute at least one cycle or more of display by the first operational mode of the first part and less than one cycle of display by the second operational mode of the second part (see time T14 in FIG. 146, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the first part of the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in motion even while a specific effect is being executed, and to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the display of the second part of the decorative pattern 41 in motion, thereby allowing the player to focus on the specific effect.

In the above example, an example of a specific effect is described as an effect that displays the decorative pattern 41 of a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The specific effect may be a reach prompting effect. That is, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of executing at least one cycle or more of display by a first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and less than one cycle of display by a second operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of a reach prompting effect in the execution of a variable effect. Also, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of executing at least one cycle or more of display by a first operation mode of the first part and less than one cycle of display by a second operation mode of the second part during the execution of a reach prompting effect in the execution of a variable effect.
The specific effect may also be an effect that displays a doublet decorative pattern 41. That is, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of at least displaying one or more cycles of a first operation mode that is repeatable in a first cycle, and displaying less than one cycle of a second operation mode that is repeatable in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is being displayed during the execution of the variable effect. The effect control unit 300 may also be capable of at least displaying one or more cycles of a first operation mode in a first part, and displaying less than one cycle of a second operation mode in a second part, while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is being displayed during the execution of the variable effect.
Furthermore, in the first presentation mode, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of executing at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the first part and one cycle or more of display by the second operation mode of the second part during execution of a specific presentation (e.g., a reach-inducing presentation, a presentation displaying decorative symbols 41 with missing numbers, a presentation displaying decorative symbols 41 with double numbers, etc.) during execution of a variable presentation; and in the second presentation mode, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of executing at least one cycle or more of display by the first operation mode of the first part and less than one cycle of display by the second operation mode of the second part during execution of a specific presentation during execution of a variable presentation. An example of the first presentation mode is a normal game state. The first presentation mode may be any one of the first to third stages. The second presentation mode may be, for example, a time-saving game state. The second presentation mode may be a stage of the first to third stages that is different from the first presentation mode.

In the above example, it has been explained that during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, and the second number decoration section 413 do not display movement, and the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416 display movement, but this is not limiting. During the execution of the customer waiting effect, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, etc. may also display movement.
Furthermore, even during the execution of the customer waiting effect in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 (the number portion 411, the first number portion 412 to the fourth number portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character portion 415, and the second character portion 416) may display an operation. In this case, the operation mode in the operation display may be different between a specific component (any portion among the number portion 411, the first number portion 412, the second number portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character portion 415, and the second character portion 416) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting effect in the first stage and a specific component (the same portion as the specific component in the first stage) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting effect in the second stage, but the period of the operation display may be the same. In addition, the operating mode and the period of the operating display may be different between a specific component (any part of the number section 411, first number decorative section 412, second number decorative section 413, character section 414, first character decorative section 415, second character decorative section 416) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance in the first stage and a specific component (the same element as the specific component in the first stage) in the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance in the second stage.

Furthermore, during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the operation display may be executed in a manner corresponding to the stage being controlled.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of Figure 207.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "sixth performance situation" of Figure 207.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational manner that can be executed in the "seventh performance situation" of Figure 207.
Furthermore, even when the customer waiting performance is being performed on any stage, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be performed (may be limited).

In the above example, it has been explained that the number portion 411 and the first number decoration portion 412 are temporarily stopped while the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 are not temporarily stopped during the execution of a jackpot game, but this is not limiting. During the execution of a jackpot game, the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 may also be temporarily stopped.
In addition, when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (any number from 1 to 9) is lined up is executed in the first stage, and when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (the same number as the specific number in the first stage) is lined up is executed in the second stage, the operating mode and period of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decoration section 412 to fourth number decoration section 418, character section 414, first character decoration section 415, second character decoration section 416) during the execution of the jackpot game are the same.

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 and the zone pattern 58 are also examples of performance patterns.
Here, the operation display of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 (display by the 48th operation mode, display by the 49th operation mode) and the operation display of the zone pattern 58 (display by the 50th operation mode, display by the 51st operation mode) are also regarded as a temporary stop of the performance pattern.

In addition, in the above example, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the jackpot game does not have the second number decorative portion 413, but this is not limited to this.
The decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided with a second number decorative portion 413 to a fourth number decorative portion 418. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may have the same decorative form as the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of an SP reach in the normal game state, during the execution of an SPSP reach in the normal game state, and in the time-saving game state.

In the above example, the SP reach image 503 is displayed in the same display mode in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limiting. The SP reach image 503 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.
In the above example, the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this. In the time-saving gaming state, the SPSP reach effect may be executed after the start of the SP reach effect, just like in the normal gaming state. In addition, the SPSP reach effect may not be executed in the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the SP reach effect described in the variable effect example in the time-saving gaming state may be regarded as the SPSP reach effect.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly focuses on differences from the first and second embodiments, and explanations of commonalities with the first and second embodiments may be omitted.

Figure 221 is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, in the first stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 221 (1). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 221 (1) has the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 63 (1).

In the third embodiment, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second stage in the manner shown in Fig. 221 (2). This decorative pattern 41 has a number portion 411, a first number portion 412, a second number portion 413, a third number portion 417, a character portion 414, a first character portion 415, and a second character portion 416.
The number portion 411, the character portion 414, the first character decorative portion 415, and the second character decorative portion 416 of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 221 (2) have the same display mode as the number portion 411, the character portion 414, the first character decorative portion 415, and the second character decorative portion 416 of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 195 (3). Also, the first number decorative portion 412 and the second number decorative portion 413 of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 221 (2) have the same display mode as the first number decorative portion 412 and the second number decorative portion 413 of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 195 (1).

221(2) is displayed in a layer behind the second numeral decoration part 413 in the image display unit 114. However, the third numeral decoration part 417 may be drawn so as to be displayed behind the second numeral decoration part 413 while being displayed in the same layer as the second numeral decoration part 413 in the image display unit 114.
Furthermore, the third numeral decorative portion 417 is displayed in an area where a part of it overlaps with the first numeral decorative portion 412. In the illustrated example, the third numeral decorative portion 417 is formed in a band shape extending in the left-right direction, and is displayed in black in an area extending from the area where it overlaps with the first numeral decorative portion 412 to the right of the first numeral decorative portion 412. The third numeral decorative portion 417 can also be regarded as a decorative portion that decorates the identification portion.

In the third embodiment, a less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 221 (3). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 221 (3) has a numeral portion 411, a first numeral decorative portion 412, a second numeral decorative portion 413, and a third numeral decorative portion 417. Of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 221 (3), the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, the second numeral decorative portion 413, and the third numeral decorative portion 417 have the same decorative manner as the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, the second numeral decorative portion 413, and the third numeral decorative portion 417 shown in Fig. 221 (1).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 221 (3) is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state (first stage, second stage), and in the time-saving game state (third stage, fourth stage), etc.

In the third embodiment, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third stage in the manner shown in Fig. 221 (4). This decorative pattern 41 has a number portion 411, a first number decorative portion 412, a second number decorative portion 413, a third number decorative portion 417, a character portion 414, and a first character decorative portion 415.
Of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 221 (4), the number portion 411, the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, and the third number decorative portion 417 have the same decorative pattern as the number portion 411, the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, and the third number decorative portion 417 shown in Figure 221 (1).
Also, the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(4) has the same form as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(1), but is displayed in a different color (e.g., blue) from the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(1). In other words, the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(4) has a different display form from the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(1).

In the third embodiment, in the fourth stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 221 (5). This decorative pattern 41 has a number portion 411, a first number portion 412, a second number portion 413, a third number portion 417, a character portion 414, and a first character portion 415. As will be described later, the fourth stage is a stage controlled in the time-saving game mode.
Of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 221 (5), the number portion 411, the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, and the third number decorative portion 417 have the same decorative pattern as the number portion 411, the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, and the third number decorative portion 417 shown in Figure 221 (1).
Also, the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(5) has the same form as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(1), but is displayed in a different color (e.g., blue) from the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(1). In other words, the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(5) has a different display form from the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 221(1).

Figures 222-1 and 222-2 are diagrams showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 of this embodiment for each stage.
As shown in Fig. 222-1, the number section 411 is displayed in a common display format regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 4) being controlled. The number section 411 shown in Fig. 222-1 has the same display format as the number section 411 shown in Fig. 64-1.

The first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the fourth stage, or the second stage.
The second number decoration portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the second number decoration portion 413 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the fourth stage, or the second stage.
The third number decorative portion 417 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the third number decorative portion 417 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the fourth stage, or the second stage.

222-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to whether the controlled stage is Stage 1 to Stage 4. Furthermore, the character portion 414 in each stage is displayed in a display mode that differs depending on the number of the decorative pattern 41.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the fourth stage, or the second stage. Furthermore, the first character decoration portion 415 in each stage is displayed in a different display mode depending on the number of the decoration pattern 41.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 222-2 has the same display manner as the second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 64-2. Furthermore, the second character decoration portion 416 is not provided in the decoration pattern 41 of the third stage and the fourth stage.

Note that the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 222-1 and 222-2 are the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance begins for each stage. Therefore, depending on the progress of the variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a mode different from the combination of the associated stage and display mode shown in Figures 222-1 and 222-2.

Figure 223 is a diagram showing the operating modes in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation in the third embodiment.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 223 shows the first to eighth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.
Here, in the third embodiment, the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation is different from that in the first embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, the relationship between the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display is different from that in the first embodiment.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 223 will now be explained in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is a situation (state) during which a variable presentation is being executed in the first or second stage, during which an SP reach presentation is being executed, when a decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is temporarily stopped and an SP reach image 503 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, or when a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is temporarily stopped.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is a situation (state) in which, during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is a situation (state) when a reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of a variable presentation in the third stage, when a normal reach presentation is being executed, or when an SP reach presentation is being executed.

The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the variable presentation is being executed in the third stage.
The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the reach presentation is not being executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the fourth stage.
The seventh presentation situation (seventh presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the variable presentation is being executed in the fourth stage.
The eighth presentation situation (eighth presentation state) is the situation (state) during which a jackpot game is being played.

Next, we will explain the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 223 shows the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation, using the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the third number decoration section 417, the character section 414, and the second character decoration section 416.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number section 411 in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65) at a 1-second cycle, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode (see FIG. 80) at an 8-second cycle, the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode (see FIG. 81) at a 5-second cycle, and the display of the third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode at an 8-second cycle. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode (see FIG. 87), the 26th operation mode (see FIG. 90), the 29th operation mode (see FIG. 93), and the 32nd operation mode (see FIG. 96), all at a 2-second cycle. Additionally, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute display using the 43rd operating mode (see FIG. 107) of the second character decoration unit 416 at one-second intervals.

Furthermore, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the first operating mode at a 1-second cycle, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the 16th operating mode at an 8-second cycle, the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the 17th operating mode at a 5-second cycle, and the display of the third number decoration unit 417 in the 16th operating mode at an 8-second cycle.

Furthermore, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number section 411 in the first operation mode at a 1-second cycle, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode at an 8-second cycle, the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode at a 5-second cycle, and the display of the third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode at a 4-second cycle. Furthermore, in the third performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character section 414 in the 24th operation mode (see FIG. 88), the 27th operation mode (see FIG. 91), the 30th operation mode (see FIG. 94), and the 33rd operation mode (see FIG. 97), all at a 2-second cycle.

Furthermore, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number section 411 in the first operation mode at a 1-second cycle, display of the first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode at an 8-second cycle, display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode at a 5-second cycle, display of the third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode at an 8-second cycle, and display of the character section 414 in the 25th operation mode (see Figure 89) at a 2-second cycle.

In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number portion 411, which is a number other than "7," in the first operation mode at a one-second interval, and the display of the number portion 411, which is "7," in the second operation mode (see FIG. 65), at a two-second interval. In addition, in the fifth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the 16th operation mode at an eight-second interval, the display of the second number decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode at a five-second interval, and the display of the third number decoration portion 417 in the 16th operation mode at an eight-second interval. In addition, in the fifth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character portion 414, which is "7," in the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92), at a two-second interval. In addition, in the fifth performance situation, the character portion 414, which is a number other than "7," does not temporarily stop in its own mode.

In addition, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operating mode (see Figure 67) at intervals of 0.7 seconds.

Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number portion 411, which is a number other than "7," in the first operation mode at one-second intervals, and the display of the number portion 411, which is "7," in the second operation mode at two-second intervals. Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the 16th operation mode at eight-second intervals, the display of the second number decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode at five-second intervals, and the display of the third number decoration portion 417 in the 16th operation mode at eight-second intervals. Furthermore, in the fifth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character portion 414, which is a number other than "7," in the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89) at two-second intervals, and the display of the character portion 414, which is "7," in the 28th operation mode at two-second intervals.

Furthermore, in the eighth performance situation (eighth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number unit 411 in the first operation mode at one-second intervals, the display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the sixteenth operation mode at eight-second intervals, the display of the second number decoration unit 413 in the seventeenth operation mode at five-second intervals, and the display of the third number decoration unit 417 in the sixteenth operation mode at eight-second intervals. Furthermore, in the eighth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414, which is "7," in the twenty-eighth operation mode (see Figure 92), at two-second intervals. Note that in the eighth performance situation, temporary stops in unique modes are not performed for character units 414 that are numbers other than "7."

(Example of variation 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 1 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 1 in the third embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 1 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 1 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 1 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (1).

Figure 224 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 in the third embodiment.
Figure 224 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the following operations are started: display of the right number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the right third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the right character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the following operations are started: display of the middle number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the middle third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the middle character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, and display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (7) starts.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operation mode all end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode. On the other hand, the left first number decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left second number decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the left third number decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 displays one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode. On the other hand, the right first numeral decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the right second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, the right third numeral decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, and the right character section 414 does not display one or more cycles in the 23rd operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

(Example of variation 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 2 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 2 in the third embodiment, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "2". Also, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 2 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 2 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (1).
In addition, in the variation performance example 2 in the third embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as the variation performance example 1 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 224). In other words, in the variation performance example 2 in the third embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variation example 3)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 3 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 3 in the third embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "3". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 3 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 3 is the same as that shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 4 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (1) and the number of reserved balls displayed 55 and reserved image 52 for the first starting gate 121 is one less. That is, in the third embodiment, in the scattered miss variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning at the first starting gate 121 being "3" in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

(Variation example 4)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 4 in the third embodiment. Variation presentation example 4 in the third embodiment, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4". Also, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 4 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 4 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (1). That is, in the third embodiment, in the scattered miss variable presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved winnings for the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4", the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without stopping provisionally.

(Variation examples of variation presentation example 3 and variation presentation example 4)
Next, we will explain modified examples of variable presentation example 3 and variable presentation example 4.
In the first stage of this embodiment, the scattered miss variable effect based on the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 being "3" or "4" is not limited to a variable effect in which the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

In the modified examples of Variable Presentation Example 3 and Variable Presentation Example 4, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (8) (Variable Presentation Example 1 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (1) and the number of reserved balls displayed 55 and reserved ball images 52 for the first starting port 121 is two or three more.

Figure 225 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in modified examples of Variation Presentation Example 3 and Variation Presentation Example 4.
Figure 225 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in modified examples of variable performance example 3 and variable performance example 4.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operating mode, and the display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operating mode end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left second number decoration section 413 displays one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode. On the other hand, the left first number decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, and the left third number decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

(Variation example 5)
Next, variation presentation example 5 in the third embodiment will be explained. Variation presentation example 5 in the third embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 5 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the third embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 5 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 128 (variable performance example 5 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (1).

Figure 226 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5 in the third embodiment.
Figure 226 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the following operations begin: display of the right number section 411 in the first operating mode, display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, display of the right third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode, display of the right character section 414 in the 26th operating mode, and display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 127 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the first operation mode and the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 displays one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode. On the other hand, the left first numeral decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the left second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, the left third numeral decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, and the left character section 414 does not display one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

Next, at time T4, the left and right number sections 411 begin to display in the first operation mode, and the left and right character sections 414 begin to display in the 26th operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the middle number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the middle third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the middle character section 414 in the 29th operating mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operating mode begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operation mode all end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T6, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 16th operating mode of the left first number decoration unit 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the left second number decoration unit 413, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left third number decoration unit 417, and one or more cycles of display by the 43rd operating mode of the left second character decoration unit 416.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T6, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 16th operating mode of the right first number decoration unit 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the right second number decoration unit 413, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the right third number decoration unit 417, and one or more cycles of display by the 43rd operating mode of the right second character decoration unit 416.
Furthermore, during the period from time T4 to time T6, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the left and right character sections 414 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may prevent temporary stops of any part of the left decorative pattern 41 from occurring for more than one cycle before the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, while the random miss variable performance is being executed (whether the random miss variable performance is being executed based on the reserved number being "1,""2,""3," or "4").
In this case, the way in which the left decorative pattern 41 is focused on until the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops can be made different between the scattered miss variation presentation and the reach variation presentation.

Furthermore, the appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the timing at which the temporary stop begins after the start of the reach performance is the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. After the start of the reach performance, the temporary stop of the identification part may begin after the temporary stop of the decorative part of the decorative pattern 41 has begun.

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the reach variation effect is executed, the temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative symbols 41 may not be executed (may be restricted) during the execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may perform a temporary stop by a first part (e.g., an identification part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the close-up performance, and may not perform (restrict) a temporary stop by a second part (e.g., a decorative part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) that is different from the first part.

(Example of variation 6)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 6 in the third embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 6 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 130 (variable presentation example 6 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 223), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (1), and in the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (3).

Figure 227 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the third embodiment.
Figure 227 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, and display of the left and right third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the middle number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, and the display of the middle third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode begin. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, and the display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operating mode end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the first operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413, and one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left and right third number decoration sections 417.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the first operation mode of the middle numeral portion 411. On the other hand, one or more cycles of display are not performed by the 16th operation mode of the middle first numeral decoration portion 412, one or more cycles of display are not performed by the 17th operation mode of the middle second numeral decoration portion 413, and one or more cycles of display are not performed by the 16th operation mode of the middle third numeral decoration portion 417.

Next, at time T4, the following operations begin: display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode, display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 26th operation mode, and display of the center character section 414 in the 29th operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (6) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second character decoration portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the center character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode all end. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, none of the three decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped are displayed for more than one cycle.

227 does not show the temporary stop state from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect (the start of the SP reach effect). Here, the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right from the start of the variable effect in variable effect example 6 until the end of the normal reach effect may be the same as that shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
Additionally, in variation presentation example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 130(2)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 226, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the variation presentation in variation presentation example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether a temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 226. In other words, in a losing variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 226, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T5 in FIG. 227.

(Example of variation 7)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 7 in the third embodiment. Variation presentation example 7 in the third embodiment is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 8 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 7 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 8 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the third embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 7 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 and 134 (variable performance example 8 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (1).

Figure 228 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 7 of the third embodiment.
Figure 228 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 7.
First, at time T1, the display of the left numeral section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left first numeral decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left second numeral decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, and the display of the left third numeral decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 134 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the left character section 414 begins to be displayed in the 26th operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 begins to be displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 134 (3) begins.

Next, at time T3, display begins in the first operation mode of the right numeral section 411, the 16th operation mode of the right first numeral decoration section 412, the 17th operation mode of the right second numeral decoration section 413, the 16th operation mode of the right third numeral decoration section 417, the 23rd operation mode of the right character section 414, and the 43rd operation mode of the right second character decoration section 416. Also at this time, display begins in the first operation mode of the middle numeral section 411, the 16th operation mode of the middle first numeral decoration section 412, the 17th operation mode of the middle second numeral decoration section 413, the 16th operation mode of the middle third numeral decoration section 417, the 29th operation mode of the middle character section 414, and the 43rd operation mode of the middle second character decoration section 416.
Also, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 134 (4) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, one or more cycles of display are performed in the first operation mode of the left numeral section 411. On the other hand, one or more cycles of display are not performed in the 16th operation mode of the left first numeral decoration section 412, one or more cycles of display are not performed in the 17th operation mode of the left second numeral decoration section 413, and one or more cycles of display are not performed in the 16th operation mode of the left third numeral decoration section 417.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the left second character decoration unit 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode, while the left character unit 414 does not display for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

In the variation effect example 7, temporary stopping of part of the left decorative pattern 41 is initiated after the end of the reach stimulation effect, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation performance example 7, a temporary stop may be started for all parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped simultaneously with the start of the reach encouraging performance. Also, a temporary stop may be started for all parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped before the reach encouraging performance starts. Also, a temporary stop may be started for all parts of the left decorative pattern 41 that can be temporarily stopped after the reach encouraging performance starts and before the end.

In addition, during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles using at least a portion of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting effect (such as a reach exciting effect or a pseudo consecutive exciting effect) has failed.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute a temporary stop for one or more cycles using at least a portion of the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number portion 411) after a specific exciting effect (such as a reach exciting effect or a pseudo consecutive exciting effect) has failed during the execution of a variable effect.

(Example of variation 8)
Next, a description will be given of a variation effect example 8 in the third embodiment. Similar to the variation effect example 13 in the first embodiment, the variation effect example 8 in the third embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation effect based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the first stage. Also, similar to the variation effect example 13 in the first embodiment, the variation effect example 8 in the third embodiment is a variation effect executed after the variation effect executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern" in FIG. 59, and is a variation effect executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. Furthermore, the variation effect executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern" in FIG. 39 is the variation effect shown in FIGS. 139(1) to (6) (the same variation effect as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination effect pattern"), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in FIG. 221(1).

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 8 is the same as that in Figures 141 to 143, 147 and 148 (variable presentation example 13 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 223), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (1), and in the second and eighth presentation situations, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (3), and the presentation shown in Figure 229-1 is performed.
More specifically, in the variable performance example 8 in the third embodiment, first, the same performance as shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), 142 (9) to (16), and 143 (17) to (21) is performed, and then the deciding button operation performance is started as shown in Figure 229-1 (1), and the button operation image 510 is displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 147 (2) to (8) and Figures 148 (9) and (10) are performed.

Figure 229-2 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 8 of the third embodiment.
Figure 229-2 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 8.
The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, and display of the left and right third number portions 417 in the 16th operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (21) starts.

The temporary stop state shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the first operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the left and right second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the left and right third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (2) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left and right numeral sections 411 display one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left and right first numeral decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left and right second numeral decoration sections 413 display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the left and right third numeral decoration sections 417 display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation state, display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, and display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (5) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T4 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (6) begins.

Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the left and right numeral sections 411 display one or more cycles in the first operating mode. On the other hand, the left and right first numeral decoration sections 412 do not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left and right second numeral decoration sections 413 do not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the left and right third numeral decoration sections 417 do not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, and the display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operating mode begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (8) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, and the display of the third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 148 (9) begins.

Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the number section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the first number decoration section 412 displays one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the second number decoration section 413 displays one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the third number decoration section 417 displays one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

In addition, the specific form of the temporary stop from the start of the variable performance to the end of the normal reach performance is not shown in the figure in the variable performance example 8. Here, in the variable performance example 8, the form of the temporary stop from the start of the variable performance to the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 8, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in Fig. 226, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 8, the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41 from the start of the variation performance to the end of the normal reach performance (the operation mode of the decorative patterns 41 and whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 226.

It should be noted that the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the first stage of this embodiment is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (1) and the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (3), and other than that, as an action presentation when a reach occurs, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same manner as shown in Figures 153 (1) to (7).
Also, for example, in the first stage, a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (3), but during the execution of the SP reach performance, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same manner as shown in Figures 154 (1) to (5).
Also, for example, in the first stage, a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (3), and when a decorative pattern 41 with a miss is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the same manner as shown in Figures 155 (1) to (3).

(Example of variation 9)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 9 in the third embodiment. Similar to variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 9 in the third embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, similar to variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 9 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 9 is the same as that shown in Figures 156 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 14 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (2).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the mode of the temporary stop in variable performance example 9 (operation mode at the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the mode of the temporary stop in variable performance example 1 of the third embodiment (see Figure 224), except that the operation mode at the temporary stop of the character part 414 is different (the character part 414 has an operation mode according to the third performance situation).

(Variation example 10)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 10 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 10 in the third embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "2", just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 10 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 158 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 15 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (2).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the mode of the temporary stop in variation performance example 9 (operation mode at the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the mode of the temporary stop in variation performance example 2 of the third embodiment (see Figure 224), except that the operation mode at the temporary stop of the character part 414 is different (the character part 414 has an operation mode according to the third performance situation).

(Variation example 11)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 11 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 11 in the third embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "3", just like the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 11 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 162 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 17 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (2) and there is one less reserved number display 55 and reserved image 52 for the first starting port 121. In other words, in variable presentation example 11, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

(Variation example 12)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 12 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 12 in the third embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "4", just like the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 12 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the variation effect example 12 is the same as that shown in Figures 162 (1) to 162 (5) (variation effect example 17 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (2). That is, in the variation effect example 12, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without being temporarily stopped.

(Variation examples of variation presentation example 11 and variation presentation example 12)
Next, we will explain modified examples of variable presentation example 11 and variable presentation example 12.
In the second stage of this embodiment, the scattered miss variable effect based on the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 being "3" or "4" is not limited to a variable effect in which the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

In the modified examples of variable performance example 11 and variable performance example 12, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 is the same as that shown in Figures 156 (1) to (8), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (2) and the number of reserved balls displayed 55 and reserved ball images 52 for the first starting port 121 is two or three more.

Figure 230 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in modified examples of Variation Presentation Example 11 and Variation Presentation Example 12.
Figure 230 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in modified examples of variable performance example 11 and variable performance example 12.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, and display of the left character section 414 in the 27th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode, and the display of the left character section 414 in the 27th operating mode end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 156 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the left third numeral decoration section 417 displays one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, and the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 27th operating mode. On the other hand, the left first numeral decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, and the left second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode.

(Variation example 13)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 13 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 13 in the third embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the second stage, just like the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 13 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 163 and 164 (variable performance example 18 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (2).
In addition, in the third embodiment, the mode of temporary stop in variable performance example 13 (operation mode at temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the mode of temporary stop in variable performance example 5 of the third embodiment (see Figure 226), except that the operation mode at temporary stop of character part 414 is different (character part 414 has an operation mode according to the third performance situation).

In addition, the manner in which the temporary stops are made during the execution of the SP Reach performance and while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second stage (the operating manner of the temporary stops, whether a temporary stop is made for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) is the same as the manner in which the temporary stops are made during the execution of the SP Reach performance and while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first stage.

As described above, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second) and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 8 seconds) that is different from the first cycle, and the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode while a variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode (e.g., first stage), and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode while a variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode (e.g., second stage) (see second performance situation in Figure 223).
That is, "during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least a first operation mode" includes that the first operation mode of the performance pattern that can be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode can also be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode. Also, "during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least a second operation mode" includes that the second operation mode of the performance pattern that can be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode can also be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first operation mode (e.g., first operation mode) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., 16th operation mode) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and the performance control unit 300 can display the performance patterns in at least the first operation mode during execution of a variable performance in the first performance mode (e.g., first stage), and can display the performance patterns in at least the second operation mode during execution of a variable performance in the second performance mode (e.g., second stage) (see second performance situation in Figure 223).
That is, "during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least a first operation mode" includes that the first operation mode of the performance pattern that can be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode can also be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode. Also, "during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least a second operation mode" includes that the second operation mode of the performance pattern that can be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode can also be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.

(Modification of temporary stop after execution of SP reach effect)
Next, we will explain a modified example of the temporary stop that is performed after the execution of the SP reach effect in the variable effect in the second stage.
In addition, in the variable presentation in this modified example, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 is the same as that shown in Figures 166 (1) to (7), except that in the third presentation situation (see Figure 223), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (2), and in the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 221 (3).

FIG. 231 is a chart showing the flow of temporary suspension performed in the modified example.
Figure 231 shows the flow of temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 in a modified example.
At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left and right third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, and display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 27th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 166 (6) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the left and right third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, and the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 27th operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 166 (7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left and right number portions 411 display one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the left and right character portions 414 display one or more cycles in the 27th operation mode. On the other hand, the left and right first number decoration portions 412 do not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the left and right second number decoration portions 413 do not display one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the left and right third number decoration portions 417 do not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

(Variation example 14)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 14 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 14 in the third embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the second starting port 122 in the third stage is "1", just like the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 14 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 61, just like the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 14 is the same as that shown in Figures 177 (1) to (3) (variable performance example 24 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (4).
That is, in the variable performance example 14 in the third embodiment, all three decorative patterns 41 stop definitively without any temporary stop.

In addition, while variation presentation example 14 in the third embodiment has been described as a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened play state, this is not limited to this. The same variation presentation as variation presentation example 14 may be executed regardless of the value (any value from "1" to "4") of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state. In other words, in a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state, the decorative pattern 41 may not be temporarily stopped, regardless of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122.

(Variation example 15)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 15 in the third embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 29 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 15 in the third embodiment is an example of a scattered miss variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 29 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 15 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH9" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.
In addition, in the third embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 15 is the same as that shown in Figures 184 (1) to (5) (variable performance example 29 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (4).

Figure 232 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stops performed in variation performance example 15.
Figure 232 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 15.
At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left number section 411 in the first operation mode, display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, and display of the left character section 414 in the 25th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 184 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the right second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the right third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode, and the display of the right character section 414 in the 25th operating mode begin. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 184 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the left and right second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the left and right third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operating mode, and the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 25th operating mode end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 184 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode. On the other hand, the left first numeral decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the left second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the left third numeral decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the right numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the right character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode. On the other hand, the right first numeral decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the right second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the right third numeral decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

(Variation example 16)
Next, a variation presentation example 16 in the third embodiment will be explained. Similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 16 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage, and is an example of a miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 16 in the third embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 16 is the same as that shown in Figures 186 and 187 (variable presentation example 30 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 221 (4), an SP reach presentation is performed instead of an SPSP reach presentation (SP reach image 503 instead of SPSP reach image 509), and the parts described below using Figure 233.

Figure 233 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 16 in the third embodiment.
Figure 233 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 16.
The temporary stop mode shown at time T1 is the temporary stop mode of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T1, the display of the left number portion 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the left first number decorative portion 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left second number decorative portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, and the display of the left third number decorative portion 417 in the 16th operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 186 (3) starts.

The temporary stop state shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T2, the display of the left number section 411 in the first operation state, the display of the left first number section 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the left second number section 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the left third number section 417 in the 16th operation state end. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 186 (4) begins. In other words, in variable effect example 16 in the third embodiment, temporary stops are not performed (are limited) in the reach-time operation effect.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles in the first operating mode. On the other hand, the left first numeral decoration section 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left second numeral decoration section 413 does not display one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode, and the left third numeral decoration section 417 does not display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T3, display of the left and right number sections 411 in the first operation state, display of the left and right first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, display of the left and right second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, and display of the left and right third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 186 (6) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T4 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the left and right third number decorative portions 417 in the 16th operation state end. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 186 (8) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, one or more cycles of display are performed by the first operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413, and one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left and right third number decoration sections 417.

The temporary stop state shown at time T5 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T5, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (9) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T6 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T6, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the three third number decorative portions 417 in the 16th operation state end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 187 (10) starts.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the three number portions 411 display one or more cycles in the first operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration portions 412 do not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration portions 413 do not display one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration portions 417 do not display one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

The temporary stop state shown at time T7 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T7, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state, and the display of the three character sections 414 in the 25th operation state begin. Time T7 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (11) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T8 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T8, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation state, the display of the three third number decorative portions 417 in the 16th operation state, and the display of the three character portions 414 in the 25th operation state end. Time T8 is the time when the performance shown in FIG. 187 (12) starts.
Here, during the period from time T7 to time T8, the three number portions 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the three character portions 414 display for one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration portions 412 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration portions 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration portions 417 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

In addition, the manner of temporary stopping during the display of the decorative pattern 41 of a number other than "7" (the operating mode during temporary stopping, whether the temporary stop is for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) in the third stage is the same as the manner of temporary stopping during the display of the decorative pattern 41 of a number other than "7" during the first stage, except that the operating mode during temporary stopping of the number section 411 and the period of the temporary stop are different (the number section 411 displays in a two-second cycle according to the second operating mode).

(Variation example 17)
234-1 and 234-2 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Figures 234-1 and 234-2, a specific description will be given of a variation presentation example 17 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 17 in the third embodiment is an example of a big win variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage.
The variable effects shown in Figures 234-1 and 234-2 are variable effects that are executed when "EF8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

As shown in Fig. 234-1 (1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "137", are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 234-1 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed variably at high speed. In addition, the two reserved images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 234-1 (3), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up and down swaying motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234-1 (4), a reach effect is executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect is successful. In this case, a reach-time action effect is started. In the example shown, in the reach-time action effect, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right third number decorative portions 417, left and right character portions 414, and left and right first character decorative portions 415) are displayed in an action extending in the vertical direction in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 234-1(5), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size with a less decorative display mode, and are also displayed moving toward the upper left side of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234-1 (6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 503 is displayed. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114. Also, the left and right decorative symbols 41 start to be temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 234-1(7), the deciding button operation presentation starts and a button operation image 510 is displayed.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect, the third jackpot highlight image 522 is displayed as shown in FIG. 234-1 (8). At this time, the special feature effect is executed, and the middle movable special feature 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 234-2 (9), the decorative pattern 41 of the double number "777" is displayed in a highly decorative manner and in a size smaller than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the start of the reach performance (see Figure 234-1 (3)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 234-2(10), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234-2 (11), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234-2 (12), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "777", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the third jackpot highlight image 522 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 234-2 (13), a jackpot start image 513 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234-2 (14), a jackpot game starts, and a round number image 514 and a round-in-progress image 515 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the round number image 514 displays the text "Round 1." At this time, the decorative symbol 41, "7," is displayed, and a temporary stop is initiated.

Next, the big win game ends, and the time-saving start image 516 is displayed as shown in FIG. 234-2 (15). At this time, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed.
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 234-2 (16), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56, "777," are fixed and stopped. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "1."

Figure 235 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 17 in the third embodiment.
Figure 235 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 17.
The temporary stop state shown at time T1 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation state, display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the 16th operation state, display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation state, and display of the left and right third number decorative portions 417 in the 16th operation state are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 234-1(6) starts.

The temporary stop state shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the first operation state, the display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation state, and the display of the left and right third number decorative portions 417 in the 16th operation state end. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 234-1 (7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the first operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413, and one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the left and right third number decoration sections 417.

The temporary stop state shown at time T3 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative sections 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative sections 413 in the 17th operation state, the display of the three third number decorative sections 417 in the 16th operation state, and the display of the three character sections 414 in the 28th operation state begins. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 234-2 (11) begins.

The temporary stop state shown at time T4 is the temporary stop state of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation state, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the 16th operation state, the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 17th operation state, the display of the three third number decorative portions 417 in the 16th operation state, and the display of the three character portions 414 in the 28th operation state end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in FIG. 234-2 (12) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the three number portions 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the three character portions 414 display for one or more cycles in the 28th operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration portions 412 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration portions 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration portions 417 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

Next, at time T5, the display of the number section 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operating mode, and the display of the character section 414 in the 28th operating mode begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 234-2 (14) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the number section 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the third number decoration section 417 in the 16th operation mode, and the display of the character section 414 in the 28th operation mode end. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 234-2 (15) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the first operating mode of the number section 411, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the first number decoration section 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the second number decoration section 413, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operating mode of the third number decoration section 417, and one or more cycles of display by the 28th operating mode of the character section 414.

As described above, the operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (e.g., 1 second), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (e.g., 8 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. The effect control unit 300 is capable of displaying the effect symbols in at least the first operation mode when a variable effect is being performed (see the first operation state in FIG. 223), and is capable of displaying the effect symbols in at least the second operation mode when a variable effect is not being performed (see the eighth operation state in FIG. 223). In other words, "capable of displaying the effect symbols in at least the first operation mode when a variable effect is being performed" includes the fact that the first operation mode that can be displayed by the effect symbols when a variable effect is not being performed can also be displayed when a variable effect is being performed. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the effect symbols in at least the second operation mode when a variable effect is not being performed" includes the fact that the second operation mode that can be displayed by the effect symbols when a variable effect is being performed can also be displayed when a variable effect is not being performed.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (e.g., first operation mode) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., sixteenth operation mode) that is different from the first operation mode, and the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a variable performance is being executed (see first performance situation in Figure 223), and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a variable performance is not being executed (see eighth performance situation in Figure 223).
That is, "when a variable performance is being performed, the performance pattern can be displayed by at least a first operation mode" includes the first operation mode that can be displayed by the performance pattern when the variable performance is not being performed, and can also be displayed when the variable performance is being performed. Also, "when a variable performance is not being performed, the performance pattern can be displayed by at least a second operation mode" includes the second operation mode that can be displayed by the performance pattern when the variable performance is being performed, and can also be displayed when the variable performance is not being performed.

(Variation example 18)
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 236, a specific description will be given of the variation presentation example 18 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 18 in the third embodiment is an example of a big win variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage.
The variable effect shown in Figure 236 is the variable effect that is executed when "EF6" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 234-1 (1) to (7) are performed, except that the left and right decorative symbols 41 are "3". Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the decide button operation effect, the decorative symbol 41 with a miss, "343", begins to temporarily stop, as shown in Figure 236 (1). At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a less decorative manner, and the center decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a more decorative manner.

236(2), a third transitional image 520 is displayed. In addition, with the display of the third transitional image 520, the decorative symbol 41 of the missing combination and the SP reach image 503 are no longer displayed.
236(3), the highly decorative out-of-slot decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed again. Also, the temporary stopping of the out-of-slot decorative pattern 41 is started again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 236(4), a restored image 524 is displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 234-1 (8) and Figure 234-2 (9) to (16) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 is "3".

Figure 237 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 18 in the third embodiment.
Figure 237 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 18.
At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the three third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, and display of the center character portion 414 in the 25th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 236 (1) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, and the display of the center character portion 414 in the 25th operation mode end. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 236 (2) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the three number sections 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the center character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration sections 412 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration sections 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration sections 417 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

Next, at time T3, the following begins: display of the three number sections 411 in the first operation mode, display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operation mode, display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left and right character sections 414 in the 25th operation mode, and display of the center character section 414 in the 28th operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 236 (3) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 25th operation mode, and the display of the center character portion 414 in the 28th operation mode all end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 236 (4) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the three number sections 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode, and the center character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration sections 412 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration sections 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration sections 417 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

(Variation example 19)
Figure 238 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 238, a specific description will be given of a variation effect example 19 in the third embodiment. The variation effect example 19 is a variation effect example based on a game ball entering the second start opening 122 in a time-saving game state. The variation effect example 19 is also a random miss variation effect based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the second start opening 122 being "1".
The variable effect shown in Figure 238 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 19 to change presentation example 21 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the fourth stage.

As shown in FIG. 238(1), as the performance control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, the highly decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, right-hit image 512, and stage image 61 corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth performance mode). At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 indicates "1," which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122.
Next, as shown in Figure 238 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Fig. 238 (3), the three decorative symbols 41, "314," begin to temporarily stop. Although detailed illustration is omitted, at this time, the entire three decorative symbols 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three third number decorative portions 417, three character portions 414, and three first character decorative portions 415) begin to be displayed in the third operation mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238(4), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Note that, although variation presentation example 19 shows a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-saving play state, this is not limited to this. The same presentation as variation presentation example 19 may be executed regardless of the random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being any value (any value from "1" to "4") in the time-saving play state. However, in variation presentation example 19, a display of less than one cycle is performed for any part of the three decorative patterns 41 that was temporarily stopped (the entire three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, the three second number decorative portions 413, the three third number decorative portions 417, the three character portions 414, and the three first character decorative portions 415)).

(Variation example 20)
Figure 239 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 239, a specific description will be given of a variation presentation example 20 in the third embodiment. The variation presentation example 20 is an example of a big win variation presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in a time-saving game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 239 is the variable effect that is executed when "EF7" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.

239(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 239 (3), the three decorative patterns 41 "314" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 239(4), the three decorative patterns 41 are again changed at high speed.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (5), the three decorative patterns 41 "333" begin to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 239(6), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 234-2 (13) to (16) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the jackpot game is "3" and the effects shown in Figure 239 (6) are performed after the execution of the jackpot game.

Figure 240 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 20 in the third embodiment.
Figure 240 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 20.
At time T1, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, three character portions 414, and three first character portions 415) in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 239(3) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, the three second number portions 413, the three third number portions 417, the three character portions 414, and the three first character portions 415) in the third operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 239 (4) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three third number decorative sections 417, three character sections 414, and three first character decorative sections 415) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three number sections 411 in the first operating mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operating mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operating mode, the display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operating mode, and the display of the three character sections 414 in the 25th operating mode begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 239 (5) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number portions 411 in the first operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, and the display of the three character portions 414 in the 25th operation mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 239 (6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three number portions 411 display for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, and the three character portions 414 display for one or more cycles in the 25th operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration portions 412 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration portions 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration portions 417 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

As described above, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the display of the movement of at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the first number decorative unit 412) for one or more cycles while the jackpot variable presentation is being executed.
In this case, even in the case of a big win variation effect, a variation effect with a sense of speed can be realized.

(Variation example 21)
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Figure 241, a specific description will be given of a variation effect example 21 in the third embodiment. The variation effect example 21 is an example of a big win variation effect based on a game ball entering the second start hole 122 in a time-saving game state.

241(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 241 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 241 (3), the three decorative patterns 41 "314" begin to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 241(4), the three decorative patterns 41 are again changed at high speed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 241(5), the three decorative patterns 41 "777" begin to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 241(6), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "777", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 234-2 (13) to (16) are performed, except that the effects shown in Figure 241 (6) are performed after the big win game is executed.

Figure 242 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 21 in the third embodiment.
Figure 242 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 21.
At time T1, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three third number portions 417, three character portions 414, and three first character portions 415) in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 241 (3) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, the three second number portions 413, the three third number portions 417, the three character portions 414, and the three first character portions 415) in the third operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 241 (4) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three third number decorative sections 417, three character sections 414, and three first character decorative sections 415) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration sections 417 in the 16th operation mode, and the display of the three character sections 414 in the 28th operation mode begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 241 (5) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the three third number decoration portions 417 in the 16th operation mode, and the display of the three character portions 414 in the 28th operation mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 241 (6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three number portions 411 display for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, and the three character portions 414 display for one or more cycles in the 28th operation mode. On the other hand, the three first number decoration portions 412 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the three second number decoration portions 413 do not display for one or more cycles in the 17th operation mode, and the three third number decoration portions 417 do not display for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode.

As described above, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (e.g., the third operation mode) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., the second operation mode) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode; the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (e.g., the left decorative symbol 41) and a second performance symbol (e.g., the right decorative symbol 41) that can be stopped after the first performance symbol stops in the variable performance; the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during the execution of the first variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 19), and can display the first performance symbol at least in the second operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during the execution of the second variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 21) (see Figures 223, 238, and 241).
In other words, "a second performance symbol that can be stopped after the first performance symbol has stopped" also includes a second performance symbol that can be stopped simultaneously with the stopping of the first performance symbol. Also, "the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least a second operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance" includes the ability to display the first performance symbol in the first and second operation modes after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance. Also, "the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least a second operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance" includes the ability to display the first performance symbol in at least a second operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped for the first time during the execution of the second variable performance in a case where the second performance symbol changes and stops multiple times in one variable performance.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in motion while the customer waiting performance is being performed.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational manner that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of FIG.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "third performance situation" of Figure 223.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational manner that can be executed in the "fourth performance situation" of Figure 223.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the fourth stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational manner that can be executed in the "sixth performance situation" of Figure 223.
Furthermore, even when the customer waiting performance is being performed on any stage, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be performed (may be limited).

In the above example, the SP reach image 503 is displayed in the same display mode in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limiting. The SP reach image 503 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.
In the above example, the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this. In the time-saving gaming state, the SPSP reach effect may be executed after the start of the SP reach effect, just like in the normal gaming state. In addition, the SPSP reach effect may not be executed in the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the SP reach effect described in the variable effect example in the time-saving gaming state may be regarded as the SPSP reach effect.

(Fourth embodiment)
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly focuses on differences from the first to third embodiments, and explanations of points that are the same as any of the first to third embodiments may be omitted.

Figure 243 is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, in the first stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 243(1). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 243(1) has the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 63(1).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the second stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 243 (2). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 243 (2) has the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 195 (1).

In the fourth embodiment, a less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 243(3). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 243(3) has a numeral portion 411, a first numeral decorative portion 412, and a second numeral decorative portion 413. The numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 243(3) are in the same decorative manner as the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 243(1).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 243 (3) is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state (first stage, second stage).

In the fourth embodiment, a less decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 243(4). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 243(4) consists of only a number portion 411. The number portion 411 shown in Fig. 243(4) has the same decorative manner as the number portion 411 shown in Fig. 243(1).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 243 (4) is displayed in the time-saving game state (third stage).

Figures 244-1 and 244-2 are figures showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 of this embodiment for each stage.
As shown in Fig. 244-1, the number section 411 is displayed in a common display format regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 3) being controlled. The number section 411 shown in Fig. 244-1 has the same display format as the number section 411 shown in Fig. 64-1.
The first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage.
The second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage.

As shown in Fig. 244-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to whether the controlled stage is Stage 1 or Stage 2. The character portion 414 shown in Fig. 244-2 has the same display mode as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 64-2.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 244-2 has the same display manner as the first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 64-2.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 244-2 has the same display manner as the second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 64-2.

244-1 and 244-2 are the display modes of the decorative patterns 41 when the variable performance starts for each stage. Therefore, depending on the progress of the variable performance, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a mode different from the combination of the associated stage and display mode shown in FIGS.
In addition, the decorative pattern 41 (number portion 411) with low decorativeness displayed in the time-saving game state (third stage) may have a decorative form different from the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the normal game state (first stage, second stage).

Figure 245 is a diagram showing the operating modes in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation in the fourth embodiment.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 245 shows the first to sixth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.
Here, in the fourth embodiment, the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation is different from that in the first embodiment. Also, in the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display is different from that in the first embodiment.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 245 will now be explained in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is when a reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, when a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc., and is a situation (state) other than a normal reach miss.
The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is a situation (state) during which a variable presentation is being executed in the first or second stage, when a normal reach presentation is being executed, when an SP reach presentation is being executed, when an SPSP reach presentation is being executed, when a normal reach is missing in a stage other than the second stage, when a missing decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and an SP reach image 503 or an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., and when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is a situation (state) during which a specific variable presentation is being performed in the first stage or the second stage. Examples of the specific variable presentation include a variable presentation in which a specific reach-inducing presentation is performed, a variable presentation in which a specific SP reach presentation is performed, and the like.

The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which a reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, and a stage image 61 is displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is the situation (state) during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage.
The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is the situation (state) during execution of a jackpot game.
The seventh performance situation (seventh performance state) is the situation (state) during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 245 shows the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation, using the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65) at a 2-second cycle, the display of the number portion 411 in the second operation mode (see FIG. 66) at a 2-second cycle, the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the 9th operation mode (see FIG. 73) at a 2-second cycle, and the display of the second number decoration portion 413 in the 16th operation mode (see FIG. 80) at a 2-second cycle. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character portion 414 in the 23rd operation mode (see FIG. 87), the 26th operation mode (see FIG. 90), the 29th operation mode (see FIG. 93), and the 32nd operation mode (see FIG. 96), all at a 2-second cycle. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 35th operation mode (see FIG. 99), the 37th operation mode (see FIG. 101), the 39th operation mode (see FIG. 103), and the 41st operation mode (see FIG. 105), all within 2 seconds. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode (see FIG. 107) at 2-second intervals.

In addition, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode (see Figure 67) at a one-second cycle, and can display the number section 411 in the second operation mode (see Figure 74) at a two-second cycle.
In addition, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operating mode at a cycle of 0.6 seconds, and can display the number section 411 in the second operating mode at a cycle of 0.6 seconds.
In addition, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.5 seconds, and can display the first number decorative unit 412 in the tenth operation mode (see Figure 74) at a cycle of 0.5 seconds.
In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at one-second intervals, and can display the number section 411, which has the number "7", in the sixth operation mode (see Figure 70) at one-second intervals.
In addition, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number section 411 in the eighth operating mode (see Figure 72) at a cycle of 10 seconds, and can execute display of the first number decoration section 412 in the fifteenth operating mode (see Figure 79) at a cycle of 7.5 seconds.

Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89), the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92), the 31st operation mode (see FIG. 95), and the 34th operation mode (see FIG. 98), all at a cycle of 3.75 seconds. Furthermore, in the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode (see FIG. 100), the 38th operation mode (see FIG. 102), the 40th operation mode (see FIG. 104), and the 42nd operation mode (see FIG. 106), all at a cycle of 2.65 seconds. Furthermore, in the thirteenth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode, all at a cycle of 2.5 seconds.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 1 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 1 in the fourth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 1 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 1 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 1 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (1).

Figure 246 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 in the fourth embodiment.
Figure 246 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the first operation mode, display of the left number portion 411 in the second operation mode, display of the left first number portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, display of the left second number portion 413 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode, display of the left first character portion 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the following operations are started: display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) in the first operation mode, display of the right number portion 411 in the second operation mode, display of the right first number decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, display of the right second number decorative portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, display of the right character portion 414 in the twenty-ninth operation mode, display of the right first character decorative portion 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode, and display of the right second character decorative portion 416 in the forty-third operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the second operation mode begins. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the following operations are completed: display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character sections 415, and left and right second character sections 416) in the first operation mode; display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode; display of the left and right first number sections 412 in the ninth operation mode; display of the left and right second number sections 413 in the 16th operation mode; display of the left and right second character sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode; display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode; display of the left first character section 415 in the 37th operation mode; display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode; and display of the right first character section 415 in the 39th operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number section 412, left second number section 413, left character section 414, left first character section 415, left second character section 416) displays for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left first number section 412 displays for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, the left second number section 413 displays for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, the left first character section 415 displays for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode, and the left second character section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the middle numeral portion 411 does not display for more than one cycle in the second operation mode.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can make the parts that can be temporarily stopped different between the first performance pattern (e.g., left decorative pattern 41) and the second performance pattern (e.g., middle decorative pattern 41) (see Figure 246).
In this case, in one variable performance, a variety of temporary stops can be achieved according to the performance pattern that stops.

(Example of variation 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 2 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 2 in the fourth embodiment, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "2". Also, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 2 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 2 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (1).
In addition, in the variation performance example 2 in the fourth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as the variation performance example 1 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 246). In other words, in the variation performance example 2 in the fourth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variation example 3)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 3 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 3 in the fourth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "3". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 3 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 3 is the same as that shown in Figures 122 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 3 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (1).
In addition, in the variation performance example 3 in the fourth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in temporary stop, whether temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the variation performance example 1 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 246). In other words, in the variation performance example 3 in the fourth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variation example 4)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 4 in the fourth embodiment. Variation presentation example 4 in the fourth embodiment, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4". Also, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 4 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the variable effect example 4 is the same as the variable effect example 4 in the fourth embodiment (the effect shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5)), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (1). That is, in the variable effect example 4 in the fourth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.
In the fourth embodiment, even when a random miss variation effect is executed based on the pending number of winning entries into the first starting port 121 being "4" in the first stage, the decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped. More specifically, an effect in which three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped all at once (see FIG. 125 (5)) may be executed. Furthermore, in a random miss variation effect based on the pending number of winning entries into the first starting port 121 being "4" in the first stage, the three number portions 411 are displayed for less than one cycle in the second operation mode, and the temporary stopping of components other than the number portions 411 of the three decorative symbols 41 may be limited.

(Variation example 5)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 5 in the fourth embodiment. Variation presentation example 5 in the fourth embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 5 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 5 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 128 (variable presentation example 5 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (1).

Figure 247 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5 in the fourth embodiment.
Figure 247 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the first operation mode, display of the left number portion 411 in the second operation mode, display of the left first number portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, display of the left second number portion 413 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode, display of the left first character portion 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 127(5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the following operations begin: display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) in the first operation mode; display of the right number section 411 in the second operation mode; display of the right first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operation mode; display of the right second number decorative section 413 in the 16th operation mode; display of the right character section 414 in the 26th operation mode; display of the right first character decorative section 415 in the 37th operation mode; and display of the right second character decorative section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 127 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character portions 415, left and right second character portions 416) in the first operation mode, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the 9th operation mode, the display of the left and right second number portions 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 127(7) begins.
That is, in the fourth embodiment, the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted during the execution of the reach-time operation presentation.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.

Next, at time T4, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character sections 415, left and right second character sections 416) begin to be displayed in the third operation mode, and the left and right number sections 411 begin to be displayed in the second operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the middle number section 411 begins to display in the second operating mode. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character sections 415, left and right second character sections 416) in the third operation mode ends, and the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode ends. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character decorative sections 415, left and right second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the middle numeral section 411 displays one or more cycles of the second operation mode.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute a temporary stop for the second period (e.g., 2 seconds) of the second performance pattern (e.g., right decorative pattern 41) while executing a temporary stop for the first period (e.g., 1 second) of the first performance pattern (e.g., left decorative pattern 41) (see Figures 245 and 247).
In other words, "when a temporary stop is being executed for the first cycle of the first performance pattern, a temporary stop for the second cycle of the second performance pattern can be executed" includes the fact that a temporary stop for the first cycle that is possible with the second performance pattern can also be executed with the first performance pattern, and the fact that a temporary stop for the second cycle that is possible with the first performance pattern can also be executed with the second performance pattern.

The appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the timing at which the temporary stop begins after the start of the reach performance is the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. After the start of the reach performance, the temporary stop of the identification part may begin after the temporary stop of the decorative part of the decorative pattern 41 has begun.

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the reach variation effect is executed, the temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative symbols 41 may not be executed (may be restricted) during the execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may perform a temporary stop by a first part (e.g., an identification part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the close-up performance, and may not perform (restrict) a temporary stop by a second part (e.g., a decorative part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) that is different from the first part.

(Example of variation 6)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 6 in the fourth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 6 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 130 (variable presentation example 6 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 245), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (1), and during the execution of the SP reach presentation in the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (3).

Figure 248 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the fourth embodiment.
Figure 248 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413) begins to be displayed in the third operating mode, and the middle number portion 411 begins to be displayed in the second operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number section 411, middle first number decorative section 412, middle second number decorative section 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the middle number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the following operations begin: display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the first operation mode; display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode; display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode; display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode; display of the three second character portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode; display of the left and right character portions 414 in the twenty-sixth operation mode; display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode; display of the center character portion 414 in the twenty-ninth operation mode; and display of the center first character portion 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 130 (6) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the first operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, the display of the three second character portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the twenty-sixth operation mode, the display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode, the display of the center character portion 414 in the twenty-ninth operation mode, and the display of the center first character portion 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode all end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three The second number decoration section 413 displays one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the three second character decoration sections 416 display one or more cycles in the 43rd operating mode, the left and right character sections 414 display one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, the left and right first character decoration sections 415 display one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, the center character section 414 displays one or more cycles in the 29th operating mode, and the center first character decoration section 415 displays one or more cycles in the 39th operating mode.

248 does not show the temporary stop state from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect (the start of the SP reach effect). Here, the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect in variable effect example 6 may be the same as that shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
Additionally, in variation presentation example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 130(2)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 247, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start of the variation presentation in variation presentation example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 247. In other words, in a miss variation presentation in which the SP reach presentation is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 247, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 248.

(Variation of temporary stop in variation performance example 6)
Figure 249 is a chart showing a modified example of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the fourth embodiment.
The flow of temporary stop in the variation performance example 6 of the fourth embodiment is not limited to the example shown in Figure 248.
In this modified example, it is assumed that a specific variable effect (see Figure 245) that results in the third effect situation is being executed.

At time T1 in Figure 249, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) begin to be displayed in the first operating mode, and the left and right number sections 411 begin to be displayed in the second operating mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) begins to be displayed in the first operating mode, and the middle number portion 411 begins to be displayed in the second operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode and the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (5) starts.
In addition, at time T1 to time T3 shown in Fig. 248, a temporary stop is executed according to the second performance situation (see Fig. 245). On the other hand, at time T1 to time T3 shown in Fig. 249, a temporary stop is executed according to the third performance situation.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in a first operating mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in a second operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number section 411, middle first number decorative section 412, middle second number decorative section 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, and the middle number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.
In addition, the mode of temporary stop shown at time T4 to time T5 in Figure 249 (the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the mode of temporary stop shown at time T4 to time T5 in Figure 248.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, both the change presentation based on the temporary stop state shown in FIG. 248 and the change presentation based on the temporary stop state shown in FIG. 249 may be executable.

(Example of variation 7)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 7 in the fourth embodiment. Variation presentation example 7 in the fourth embodiment is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 7 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 7 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 7 in the first embodiment.
In addition, the variable performance example 7 in the fourth embodiment is a specific variable performance (see Figure 245) that results in the third performance situation.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 7 is the same as that shown in Figure 132 (variable presentation example 7 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (1) as a highly decorative display form, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (3) as a less decorative display form.

Figure 250 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 7 of the fourth embodiment.
Figure 250 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 7.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (the left numeral portion 411, the left first numeral decorative portion 412, and the left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the first operation mode and the display of the left numeral portion 411 in the second operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 132 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display in the second operation mode of the right number section 411 and the display in the second operation mode of the center number section 411 start. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 132 (4) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (the left numeral portion 411, the left first numeral decorative portion 412, and the left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the first operation mode and the display of the three numeral portions 411 in the second operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 132 (5) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, and the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the right numeral section 411 does not display for more than one cycle in the second operation mode, and the center numeral section 411 does not display for more than one cycle in the second operation mode.

(Example of variation 8)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 8 in the fourth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 8 is the same as that shown in Figures 141 to 144 (variable presentation example 12 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 245), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (1), and in the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (3).

Figures 251 and 252 are charts showing the flow of the operational display of the performance image performed in variable performance example 8 of the fourth embodiment.
Figures 251 and 252 show the flow of the display of the performance images in variable performance example 8.
The temporary stop state of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in FIG. 251 is the temporary stop state of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number section 412, left second number section 413, left character section 414, left first character section 415, left second character section 416) in the first operation mode, display of the left number section 411 in the second operation mode, display of the left first number section 412 in the ninth operation mode, display of the left second number section 413 in the 16th operation mode, display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, display of the left first character section 415 in the 37th operation mode, and display of the left second character section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 141 (4) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the character portion 571 in the 48th operation mode (see FIG. 111) and the display of the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode (see FIG. 112) in the pseudo-repeated pattern 57 are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 141(6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the character portion 571 in the 48th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 572 in the 49th operation mode end. Also, at this time, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character decorative portion 415, left second character decorative portion 416) in the first operation mode, the display of the left numeral portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first numeral decorative portion 412 in the 9th operation mode, the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left first character decorative portion 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decorative portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 141 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) displays for one or more cycles in the first operation mode, the left number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left first number decorative section 412 displays for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, the left second number decorative section 413 displays for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, the left character section 414 displays for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, the left first character decorative section 415 displays for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode, and the left second character decorative section 416 displays for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the character portion 571 displays one or more cycles in the 48th operation mode, and the frame portion 572 displays one or more cycles in the 49th operation mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode (see FIG. 113) and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode (see FIG. 114) in the zone design 58 begin. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 142 (14) begins.
Next, at time T5, the display of the character portion 581 in the 50th operation mode and the display of the frame portion 582 in the 51st operation mode end. At this time, the display of the band portion 591 in the 52nd operation mode (see FIG. 115) and the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode (see FIG. 116) in the zone execution image 59 begin. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 142 (15) begins.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the character portion 581 displays one or more cycles of the 50th operation mode, and the frame portion 582 displays one or more cycles of the 51st operation mode.

Although not shown in the figures, the reach effect is then executed (see Figure 143 (18)). Furthermore, when the reach effect begins (the reach action effect ends), the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, left and right second character decorative portions 416) begin to be displayed in the third action mode, and the left and right number portions 411 begin to be displayed in the second action mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T6 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T6, the display of the band portion 591 in the 52nd operation mode, the display of the decorative portion 592 in the 53rd operation mode, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, left and right second character decorative portions 416) in the 3rd operation mode, and the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the 2nd operation mode end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 143 (20) begins.

Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the band portion 591 displays one or more cycles of the 52nd operation mode, and the decorative portion 592 displays one or more cycles of the 53rd operation mode.
In addition, during the period from when the reach performance begins (when the reach-time operation performance ends) to time T6, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decoration sections 412, left and right second number decoration sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character decoration sections 415, left and right second character decoration sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode.

Next, at time T7 shown in Figure 252, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) begin to be displayed in the third operation mode, and the left and right number sections 411 begin to be displayed in the second operation mode. Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (23) begins.

Next, at time T8, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode are completed. Time T8 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 144 (25) starts.
Here, during the period from time T7 to time T8, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.

Next, at time T9, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode are started. Time T9 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (26) starts.
Next, at time T10, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode are completed. Time T10 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (27) starts.

Here, during the period from time T9 to time T10, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.

Next, at time T11, the following operations begin: display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the first operation mode; display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode; display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode; display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode; display of the three second character portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode; display of the left and right character portions 414 in the twenty-sixth operation mode; display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode; display of the center character portion 414 in the twenty-ninth operation mode; and display of the center first character portion 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode. Time T11 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (28) begins.

Next, at time T12, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number sections 412, three second number sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character sections 415, and three second character sections 416) in the first operation mode, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number sections 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, the display of the three second character sections 416 in the forty-third operation mode, the display of the left and right character sections 414 in the twenty-sixth operation mode, the display of the left and right first character sections 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode, the display of the center character section 414 in the twenty-ninth operation mode, and the display of the center first character section 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode all end. Time T12 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (29) begins.

Here, during the period from time T11 to time T12, the three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode, the three number portions 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative portions 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three At least one cycle of display is performed by the 16th operating mode of the two second number decoration units 413, at least one cycle of display is performed by the 43rd operating mode of the three second character decoration units 416, at least one cycle of display is performed by the 26th operating mode of the left and right character units 414, at least one cycle of display is performed by the 37th operating mode of the left and right first character decoration units 415, at least one cycle of display is performed by the 29th operating mode of the center character unit 414, and at least one cycle of display is performed by the 39th operating mode of the center first character decoration unit 415.

251 and 252 omit illustration of the specific mode of temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance in the variable performance example 8. Here, in the variable performance example 8, the mode of temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 8, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in Fig. 247, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 8, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start of the performance shown in Fig. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as that shown at time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 247 for the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41.

251 and 252 omit illustration of the specific manner of temporary stops by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach presentation in variation presentation example 8. Here, in variation presentation example 8, the manner of temporary stops by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach presentation may be the same as the contents shown at time points T1 to T3 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 8, the display of the second role effect image 508 (see FIG. 143 (22)) may be started at the timing shown at time T3 in Fig. 248, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach performance (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T3 in Fig. 248.

Furthermore, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 may be able to continue the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 even when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25) etc.).Furthermore, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 may be able to temporarily stop the middle decorative pattern 41 when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25)).

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may be able to restrict temporary stopping by at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the character unit 414) during the execution of a specific exciting performance (such as a reach exciting performance, a pseudo consecutive exciting performance, or a zone exciting performance) during the execution of a variable performance.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too locally on the decorative pattern 41 while a specific provocative effect is being performed, making it easier for the player to focus on the specific provocative effect.

In the above example, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect is smaller in display size than during the execution of the SP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Also, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect.

(Example of variation 9)
Next, a variation presentation example 9 in the fourth embodiment will be described. Similar to variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 9 in the fourth embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the first stage. Similar to variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 9 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 59, and is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59. Furthermore, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 39 is the variation presentation shown in FIGS. 139(1) to (6) (the same variation presentation as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern").

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 9 is the same as that shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), 142 (9) to (16), 143 (17) to (23), 147 (1) to (8), and 148 (9), (10) (variable presentation example 13 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 245), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (1), and in the second, fourth, and sixth presentation situations, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (3).

Figure 253 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 9 of the fourth embodiment.
Figure 253 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 9.
Although not shown in the figure, in variable performance example 9, after the normal reach performance and the SP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance begins, and the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed in the third operation mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed in the second operation mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 253 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) in the third operation mode, and the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the second operation mode, end. Time T1 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (2) begins.

Here, during the period from when the SPSP reach effect begins until time T1, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, and the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) in the third operation mode, and the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, begin. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (5) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T3 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (8) starts.
Next, at time T5, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 148 (9) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the eighth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.

In addition, in Variation Presentation Example 9, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation until the start of the SPSP reach presentation is the same as in Variation Presentation Example 8. In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 9, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 247, times T1 to T3 in FIG. 248, and time T7 in FIG. 252.

(Variation example 10)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 10 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 10 in the fourth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "1", just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 10 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 10 is the same as that shown in Figures 156 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 14 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (2).

Figure 254 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 10 in the fourth embodiment.
Figure 254 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 10.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode, and the display of the left first number portion 412 in the tenth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, and the right first number decorative portion 412 begins to be displayed in the tenth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character portions 415, left and right second character portions 416) in the third operation mode ends, and the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the tenth operation mode ends. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 156 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the left first number decorative section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the right first number decorative portion 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the tenth operating mode.
As described above, in the variable performance example 10 of the fourth embodiment, the middle decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

(Variation example 11)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 11 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 11 in the fourth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "2", just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 11 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 158 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 15 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (2).
In addition, in the variation performance example 11 in the fourth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as that of the variation performance example 10 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 254). In other words, in the variation performance example 11 in the fourth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T3 in FIG.

(Variation example 12)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 12 in the fourth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the fourth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "3". Also, similar to the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 12 is the same as that shown in Figures 160 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 16 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 243 (2).
In addition, in the variation performance example 12 in the fourth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in temporary stop, whether temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the variation performance example 10 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 254). In other words, in the variation performance example 12 in the fourth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T3 in FIG.

(Variation example 13)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 13 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 13 in the fourth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "4", just like the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 13 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 162 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 17 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 243 (2). In other words, in variable presentation example 13 in the fourth embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop in a fixed manner without any provisional stops.

In addition, the manner in which temporary stops during the execution of normal reach presentations, temporary stops during the execution of SP reach presentations, temporary stops during the execution of SPSP reach presentations, and temporary stops during the display of double-digit decorative symbols 41 in the second stage (operational manner in temporary stops, whether a temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) are made is the same as the manner in which temporary stops during the execution of normal reach presentations, temporary stops during the execution of SP reach presentations, temporary stops during the execution of SPSP reach presentations, and temporary stops during the display of double-digit decorative symbols 41 in the first stage.

Furthermore, the form of the decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first stage, the decorative mode of the decorative pattern 41, the operation mode at the temporary stop, and the period of the temporary stop may be the same as those in the second stage.

(Variation example 14)
FIG. 255 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 14 in the fourth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 14 in the fourth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the second starting port 122 in the third stage is "1". Also, similar to the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 14 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

As shown in Figure 255 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, a less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, right-hit image 512, and a stage image 61 corresponding to the third stage (third performance mode). At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122.

Next, as shown in Figure 255 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
Next, as shown in Figure 255 (3), the left decorative pattern 41, "3", begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 255 (4), the right decorative pattern 41, "4", begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (5), with the special symbol stopping, the middle decorative symbol 41 "1" is displayed, and the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56 "314" are fixed and stopped. That is, the middle decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 256 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 14 in the fourth embodiment.
Figure 256 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 14.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode is started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 255(3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (the right numeral portion 411, the right first numeral decorative portion 412, and the right second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 255(4) begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 255 (5) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413) is not displayed for more than one cycle in the third operating mode.

Note that while variation presentation example 14 in the fourth embodiment has been described as a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened play state, this is not limited to this. The same variation presentation as variation presentation example 14 may be executed regardless of the value (any value from "1" to "4") of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state. In other words, in a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily stopped, while the center decorative pattern 41 may not be temporarily stopped, regardless of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122.

(Variation example 15)
FIG. 257 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 15 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 15 in the fourth embodiment is a jackpot variation presentation based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the third stage. The variation presentation example 15 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EF7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

As shown in Figure 257 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, a decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 257 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
Next, as shown in Figure 257 (3), the left decorative pattern 41, "3", begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 257 (4), the right decorative pattern 41 "3" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 257(5), the middle decorative pattern 41 "3" starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 257(6), three decorative symbols 41 and a small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbol. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 147 (7) and (8), and Figures 148 (9) and (10) are performed.

Figure 258 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 15 in the fourth embodiment.
Figure 258 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 15.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode is started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 257 (3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (the right numeral portion 411, the right first numeral decorative portion 412, and the right second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 257 (4) begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire central decorative pattern 41 (the central numeral portion 411, the first central numeral decorative portion 412, and the second central numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode is started. At time T2, the effect shown in FIG. 257(5) is started.
Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, and the three second number portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 257(6) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) is not displayed for more than one cycle in the third operating mode.

(Variation example 16)
Figure 259 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 16 in the fourth embodiment. The variation presentation example 16 in the fourth embodiment is a big win variation presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the third stage.

As shown in Figure 259 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, a decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 259 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
Next, as shown in Figure 259 (3), the left decorative pattern 41 "7" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 259 (4), the right decorative pattern 41 "7" begins to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 259(5), the middle decorative pattern 41 "7" starts to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 259(6), three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "777", are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbol. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 147 (7), (8), 148 (9), and (10) are performed, except that a "7" is displayed instead of a "3" as decorative pattern 41.

Figure 260 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 16 in the fourth embodiment.
Figure 260 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 16.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode is started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 257 (3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (the right numeral portion 411, the right first numeral decorative portion 412, and the right second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 257 (4) begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire central decorative pattern 41 (the central numeral portion 411, the first central numeral decorative portion 412, and the second central numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode is started. At time T2, the effect shown in FIG. 257(5) is started.
Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, and the three second number portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 257(6) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

In the fourth embodiment, during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the operation display may be executed in a manner corresponding to the stage being controlled.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of FIG.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "fourth performance situation" of Figure 245.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational manner that can be executed in the "fifth performance situation" of Figure 245.
In addition, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be executed (restricted) even during the execution of the customer waiting performance on any stage.

In the above example, it has been explained that the number portion 411 and the first number decoration portion 412 are temporarily stopped while the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 are not temporarily stopped during the execution of a jackpot game, but this is not limiting. During the execution of a jackpot game, the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 may also be temporarily stopped.
In addition, when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (any number from 1 to 9) is lined up is executed in the first stage, and when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (the same number as the specific number in the first stage) is lined up is executed in the second stage, the operating mode and period of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decoration section 412 to fourth number decoration section 418, character section 414, first character decoration section 415, second character decoration section 416) during the execution of the jackpot game are the same.

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 and the zone pattern 58 are also examples of performance patterns.
Here, the operation display of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 (display by the 48th operation mode, display by the 49th operation mode) and the operation display of the zone pattern 58 (display by the 50th operation mode, display by the 51st operation mode) are also regarded as a temporary stop of the performance pattern.

Furthermore, in the above example, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game does not have the second number decorative portion 413, but this is not limited to this.
The decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided with a second number decorative portion 413 to a fourth number decorative portion 418. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may have the same decorative form as the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of an SP reach in the normal game state, during the execution of an SPSP reach in the normal game state, and in the time-saving game state.

In the above example, the SP reach image 503 is displayed in the same display mode in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limiting. The SP reach image 503 may be displayed in different display modes in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.
In the above example, the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this. In the time-saving gaming state, the SPSP reach effect may be executed after the start of the SP reach effect, just like in the normal gaming state. In addition, the SPSP reach effect may not be executed in the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the SP reach effect described in the variable effect example in the time-saving gaming state may be regarded as the SPSP reach effect.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly describes the differences from the first to fourth embodiments, and explanations of the commonalities with any of the first to fourth embodiments may be omitted.

Figure 261 is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, in the first stage, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 261 (1). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 261 (1) has the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 63 (1).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in the second stage, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 261 (2). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 261 (2) has the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 195 (1).

In the fifth embodiment, a less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 261 (3). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 261 (3) has a numeral portion 411, a first numeral decorative portion 412, and a second numeral decorative portion 413. The numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 261 (3) are in the same decorative manner as the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 261 (1).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 261 (3) is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state (first stage, second stage), and in the time-saving game state (third stage).

Figures 262-1 and 262-2 are figures showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 of this embodiment for each stage.
As shown in Fig. 262-1, the number section 411 is displayed in a common display format regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 3) being controlled. The number section 411 shown in Fig. 262-1 has the same display format as the number section 411 shown in Fig. 64-1.
The first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the second stage.
The second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the second stage.

As shown in Fig. 262-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to whether the controlled stage is Stage 1 or Stage 2. The character portion 414 shown in Fig. 262-2 has the same display mode as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 64-2.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 262-2 has the same display manner as the first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 64-2.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 262-2 has the same display manner as the second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 64-2.

262-1 and 262-2 are the display modes of the decorative patterns 41 when the variable performance starts for each stage. Therefore, depending on the progress of the variable performance, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a mode different from the combination of the associated stage and display mode shown in FIGS.
In addition, the number portion 411 of the less decorative decorative pattern 41 displayed in the time-saving game state (third stage) may be decorated in a different manner from the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the normal game state (first stage, second stage).

Figure 263 is a diagram showing the operating modes in the operating display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operating display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation in the fifth embodiment.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 263 shows the first to ninth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation is different from that in the first embodiment. Also, in the fifth embodiment, the relationship between the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display is different from that in the first embodiment.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 263 will now be explained in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, the reach-inducing presentation and the reach presentation are not being executed or when the normal presentation is being executed, and the stage image 61 is being displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is the situation (state) in which a reach-inducing presentation is being executed while a variable presentation is being executed in the first stage.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is a situation (state) when the SP reach presentation is being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the first or second stage, and when the decorative pattern 41 of the miss is temporarily stopped and the SP reach image 503 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.

The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage or the second stage.
The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is being displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is a situation (state) when a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed during the execution of a variable presentation in the third stage.
The seventh presentation situation (seventh presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the variable presentation is being executed in the third stage.
The eighth presentation situation (eighth presentation state) is the situation (state) during which a jackpot game is being played.
The ninth performance situation (ninth performance state) is the situation (state) during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed in the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 263 shows the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed for each presentation situation using the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode (see FIG. 67) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds, and can execute the display of the number portion 411 in the second operation mode (see FIG. 66) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character portion 414 in the 23rd operation mode (see FIG. 87), the 26th operation mode (see FIG. 90), the 29th operation mode (see FIG. 93), and the 32nd operation mode (see FIG. 96), all at a cycle of 2 seconds. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can display the first character decoration unit 415 in the 35th operation mode (see FIG. 99), the 37th operation mode (see FIG. 101), the 39th operation mode (see FIG. 103), or the 41st operation mode (see FIG. 105), all within 2 seconds.

In addition, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds, and can display the second number decorative unit 413 in the 16th operation mode (see Figure 80) at a cycle of 1 second.
In addition, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the three decorative patterns 41 in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. In addition, in the third performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the middle decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds.
In addition, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the first operating mode at a cycle of 1.5 seconds.
In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds.
In addition, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. In addition, in the sixth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second number decorative portion 413 in the even-numbered decorative pattern 41 in the seventeenth operation mode (see FIG. 81 ) at a cycle of 8 seconds.

In addition, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. In addition, in the sixth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second number decorative portion 413 in the odd-numbered decorative pattern 41 in the 18th operation mode (see FIG. 82) at a cycle of 1 second, and the display of the second number decorative portion 413 in the even-numbered decorative pattern 41 in the 17th operation mode at a cycle of 8 seconds.
In addition, in the eighth performance situation (eighth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number section 411 in the eighth operating mode (see Figure 72) at a cycle of 10 seconds, and can execute display of the first number decoration section 412 in the fifteenth operating mode (see Figure 79) at a cycle of 7.5 seconds.
In addition, in the ninth performance situation (ninth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89), the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92), the 31st operation mode (see FIG. 95), and the 34th operation mode (see FIG. 98), all at a 3.75-second cycle. In the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode (see FIG. 100), the 38th operation mode (see FIG. 102), the 40th operation mode (see FIG. 104), and the 42nd operation mode (see FIG. 106), all at a 2.65-second cycle. In the thirteenth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode (see FIG. 107), all at a 2.5-second cycle.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 1 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 1 in the fifth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 1 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 1 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 1 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (1).

Figure 264 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 264 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left first character portion 415 in the 37th operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the right character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the right first character decorative portion 415 in the 39th operation mode begin. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (6) begins.
Next, at time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number section 411, middle first number decorative section 412, middle second number decorative section 413, middle character section 414, middle first character decorative section 415, middle second character decorative section 416) is displayed in the third operating mode, the middle character section 414 is displayed in the 23rd operating mode, and the middle first character decorative section 415 is displayed in the 35th operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number sections 412, three second number sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character sections 415, and three second character sections 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left first character section 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, the display of the right first character section 415 in the 39th operation mode, the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and the display of the center first character section 415 in the 35th operation mode all end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, and the left first character decorative section 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the right character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 29th operation mode, and the right first character decorative section 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 39th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

(Example of variation 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 2 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 2 in the fifth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "2". Also, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 2 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 2 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (1).
In addition, in the variation performance example 2 in the fifth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in temporary stop, whether temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the variation performance example 1 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 264). In other words, in the variation performance example 2 in the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variations of temporary stops in variation performance example 1 and variation performance example 2)
Figure 265 is a chart showing a modified example of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 and variable performance example 2 of the fifth embodiment.
The flow of temporary stopping in the variation presentation example 1 and variation presentation example 2 of the fifth embodiment is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 264 .

First, at time T1 shown in Figure 265, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number section 412, left second number section 413, left character section 414, left first character section 415, left second character section 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 begins to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left character section 414 begins to be displayed in the 26th operation mode, and the left first character section 415 begins to be displayed in the 37th operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) is displayed in the third operation mode, the right number portion 411 is displayed in the second operation mode, the right character portion 414 is displayed in the 29th operation mode, and the right first character decorative portion 415 is displayed in the 39th operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (6) begins.
Next, at time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number section 411, middle first number decorative section 412, middle second number decorative section 413, middle character section 414, middle first character decorative section 415, middle second character decorative section 416) is displayed in the third operating mode, the middle number section 411 is displayed in the second operating mode, the middle character section 414 is displayed in the 23rd operating mode, and the middle first character decorative section 415 is displayed in the 35th operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number sections 412, three second number sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character sections 415, and three second character sections 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left first character section 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the right character section 414 in the 29th operation mode, the display of the right first character section 415 in the 39th operation mode, the display of the center character section 414 in the 23rd operation mode, and the display of the center first character section 415 in the 35th operation mode all end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, and the left first character decorative section 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the right number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operation mode. On the other hand, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decoration section 412, right second number decoration section 413, right character section 414, right first character decoration section 415, right second character decoration section 416) does not display for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the right character section 414 does not display for one or more cycles in the 29th operation mode, and the right first character decoration section 415 does not display for one or more cycles in the 39th operation mode.

Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the middle number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operation mode. On the other hand, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number section 411, first middle number decoration section 412, second middle number decoration section 413, middle character section 414, first middle character decoration section 415, second middle character decoration section 416) does not display for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the middle character section 414 does not display for one or more cycles in the 23rd operation mode, and the first middle character decoration section 415 does not display for one or more cycles in the 35th operation mode.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 has a first variation performance (the variation performance shown in FIG. 264) and a second variation performance (the variation performance shown in FIG. 265) for the scattered miss variation performance based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is a specific number (for example, 1 or 2). In the second variation performance, a temporary stop is possible by an operation mode (for example, the second operation mode of the number section 411) that is not performed in the first variation performance.
In this case, even if the same number of reserved balls with a scattered miss variable effect is executed multiple times, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the effects of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, both the change presentation based on the temporary stop mode shown in Figure 264 and the change presentation based on the temporary stop mode shown in Figure 265 may be executable.
In addition, the temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 265 may be executed in a reach miss variation presentation, or in a jackpot variation presentation.

(Variation example 3)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 3 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 3 in the fifth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "3". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 3 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 3 is the same as that shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 4 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 261 (1) and that there is one less hold number display 55 and hold image 52 for the first starting port 121. In other words, in variable presentation example 3 in the fifth embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop for a fixed period without any provisional stops.

(Variation example 4)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 4 in the fifth embodiment. Variation presentation example 4 in the fifth embodiment, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4". Also, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 4 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 4 is the same as variable presentation example 4 in the fifth embodiment (the presentation shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5)), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (1). In other words, in variable presentation example 4 in the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without any temporary stop.

(Variation example 5)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 5 in the fifth embodiment. Variation presentation example 5 in the fifth embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 5 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 5 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 128 (variable performance example 5 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (1).

Figure 266 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 266 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left character portion 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left first character portion 415 in the 37th operation mode begin. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the right character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the 26th operation mode, and the right first character decorative portion 415 begins to be displayed in the 37th operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character portions 415, left and right second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, and the display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the 37th operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (7) begins.
That is, in the fifth embodiment, the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted during the execution of the reach-time operation presentation.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the left character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operating mode, and the left first character decorative section 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the right character section 414 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, and the right first character decorative section 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode.

Next, at time T4, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character portions 415, left and right second character portions 416) are displayed in the third operation mode, the left and right character portions 414 are displayed in the 26th operation mode, and the left and right first character portions 415 are displayed in the 37th operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the middle character portion 414 begins to be displayed in the 29th operation mode, and the middle first character decorative portion 415 begins to be displayed in the 39th operation mode. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the center character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center first character portion 415 in the 39th operation mode all end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413, left and right character sections 414, left and right first character decorative sections 415, left and right second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right character sections 414 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, and the left and right first character decorative sections 415 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.

The appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the timing at which the temporary stop begins after the start of the reach performance is the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. After the start of the reach performance, the temporary stop of the identification part may begin after the temporary stop of the decorative part of the decorative pattern 41 has begun.

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the reach variation effect is executed, the temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative symbols 41 may not be executed (may be restricted) during the execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may perform a temporary stop by a first part (e.g., an identification part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the close-up performance, and may not perform (restrict) a temporary stop by a second part (e.g., a decorative part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) that is different from the first part.

(Example of variation 6)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 6 in the fifth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 6 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 130 (variable presentation example 6 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 263), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (1), and in the third presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (3).

Figure 267 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the fifth embodiment.
Figure 267 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, and left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) begins.

Next, at time T2, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) begins to be displayed in the first operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode ends. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the center character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center first character portion 415 in the 39th operation mode begin. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (6) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right character portions 414 in the 26th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the center character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode, and the display of the center first character portion 415 in the 39th operation mode all end. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413, left and right character portions 414, left and right first character decorative portions 415, left and right second character decorative portions 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right character portions 414 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 26th operation mode, and the left and right first character decorative portions 415 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode. On the other hand, none of the temporarily stopped parts of the central decorative pattern 41 are displayed for one or more cycles.

267 does not show the temporary stop state from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect (the start of the SP reach effect). Here, the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right from the start of the variable effect in variable effect example 6 until the end of the normal reach effect may be the same as that shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
Additionally, in variation presentation example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 130(2)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 266, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the variation presentation in variation presentation example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether a temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 266. In other words, in a losing variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T6 in FIG. 266, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at times T1 to T5 in FIG. 267.

(Variation of temporary stop in variation performance example 6)
Figure 268 is a chart showing a modified example of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the fifth embodiment.
The flow of temporary stop in the variation performance example 6 of the fifth embodiment is not limited to the example shown in Figure 267.

At time T1 in Figure 268, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) begins.
Next, at time T2, the display of the entire central decorative pattern 41 (the central numeral portion 411, the first central numeral decorative portion 412, and the second central numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode is started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 130(4) starts.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413) in the first operation mode and the display of the entire center decorative pattern 41 (center number portion 411, center first number portion 412, center second number portion 413) in the third operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (5) starts.
In addition, from time T2 to time T3 shown in Fig. 267, the display of the first operation mode of the middle decorative pattern 41 is executed. On the other hand, from time T2 to time T3 shown in Fig. 268, the display of the third operation mode of the middle decorative pattern 41 is executed.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, the mode of temporary stop shown at time T4 to time T5 in Figure 268 (the operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the mode of temporary stop shown at time T4 to time T5 in Figure 267.

Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T3 corresponds to the third performance situation.
Furthermore, the period from time T4 to time T4 is the first performance situation.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, both the change presentation based on the temporary stop state shown in FIG. 267 and the change presentation based on the temporary stop state shown in FIG. 268 may be executable.

(Example of variation 7)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 7 in the fifth embodiment. Variation presentation example 7 in the fifth embodiment is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 7 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 7 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 7 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 7 is the same as that shown in Figure 132 (variable presentation example 7 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (1) as a highly decorative display form, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (3) as a less decorative display form.

Figure 269 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 7 of the fifth embodiment.
Figure 269 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 7.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 132 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the 16th operation mode ends, and the display of the left character section 414 in the 26th operation mode and the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode begin. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 132 (3) begins.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the left second numeral decoration portion 413 displays one or more periods in the 16th operation mode.

Next, at time T3, the following operations begin: display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode; display of the right character portion 414 in the 29th operation mode; display of the right first character decorative portion 415 in the 39th operation mode; display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode; display of the middle character portion 414 in the 23rd operation mode; and display of the middle first character decorative portion 415 in the 35th operation mode. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 132 (4) begins.

Next, at time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three right first number decorative sections 412, three right second number decorative sections 413, three right character sections 414, three right first character decorative sections 415, and three right second character decorative sections 416) are displayed in the third operation mode, the left character section 414 is displayed in the 26th operation mode, the left first character decorative section 415 is displayed in the 37th operation mode, the right character section 414 is displayed in the 29th operation mode, the right first character decorative section 415 is displayed in the 39th operation mode, the center character section 414 is displayed in the 23rd operation mode, and the center first character decorative section 415 is displayed in the 35th operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 132 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left and right first number decorative section 412, left and right second number decorative section 413, left and right character section 414, left and right first character decorative section 415, left and right second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the left character section 414 displays one or more cycles of the 26th operation mode, and the left first character decoration section 415 displays one or more cycles of the 37th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, neither the right decorative pattern 41 nor the center decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is displayed for more than one cycle.

Also, time T1 is the second performance situation.
Furthermore, the period from time T2 to time T4 is the first performance situation.

(Example of variation 8)
Next, a variation presentation example 8 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Similar to variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 8 in the fifth embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the first stage. Similar to variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 8 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 59, and is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59. Furthermore, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 39 is the variation presentation shown in FIGS. 139(1) to (6) (the same variation presentation as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern").

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 8 is the same as variable presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 263), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 261 (1), and in the third and fourth presentation situations, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 261 (3), and the SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
More specifically, in variable presentation example 8 in the fifth embodiment, the same presentations are performed as those shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), Figures 142 (9) to (16), Figures 143 (17) to (21), Figures 147 (2) to (8), and Figures 148 (9) and (10).

Figure 270 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 8 of the fifth embodiment.
Figure 270 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 8.
Although not shown in the figure, in variable performance example 8, the SP reach performance starts after the normal reach performance, and the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) start to be displayed in the first operating mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 270 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode ends. Time T1 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (2) begins.

Here, during the period from the start of the SP reach performance to time T1, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (5) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T3 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode ends. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in FIG. 147(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, and three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (8) starts.
Next, at time T5, the display of the number portion 411 in the eighth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 148 (9) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the eighth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.

Also, time T1 is the third performance situation.
Furthermore, the period from time T2 to time T3 is the fourth performance situation.
Furthermore, the period from time T4 to time T5 is the eighth performance situation.

In addition, in Variation Presentation Example 8, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped from the start of the variation presentation until the start of the SP reach presentation (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) is the same as in Variation Presentation Example 7. In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 8, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily stopped in the manner shown at time T1 in Figure 266 or Figure 267.

(Example of variation 9)
Next, a variation presentation example 9 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. The variation presentation example 9 in the fifth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "1", just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 9 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 9 is the same as that shown in Figures 156 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 14 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (2).

Figure 271 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 9 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 271 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 9.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (6) begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode begins. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (7) begins.
Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode ends. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (8) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) is not displayed for more than one cycle in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) is not displayed for more than one cycle in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T4 corresponds to the sixth performance situation.

(Variation example 10)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 10 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 10 in the fifth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "2", just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 10 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 10 is the same as that shown in Figures 158 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 15 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (2).
In addition, in the variation performance example 10 in the fifth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as the variation performance example 9 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 271). In other words, in the variation performance example 10 in the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T4 in FIG.

(Variation example 11)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 11 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 11 in the fifth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "3", just like the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 11 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 162 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 17 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 261 (2) and there is one less hold number display 55 and hold image 52 for the first starting port 121. In other words, in variable presentation example 11 in the fifth embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop for a fixed period without any provisional stops.

(Variation example 12)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 12 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 12 in the fifth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "4", just like the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 12 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 12 is the same as that shown in Figures 162 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 17 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (2). In other words, in variable presentation example 12 in the fifth embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop in a definite manner without any provisional stops.

(Variation example 13)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 13 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 13 in the fifth embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the second stage, just like the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 13 in the fifth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 163 and 164 (variable presentation example 18 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 261 (2).

Figure 272 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 13 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 272 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 13.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character decorative portion 415, left second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (5) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (6) begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (7) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) is not displayed for more than one cycle in the third operating mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, and left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 164 (9) begins.
Next, at time T5, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode begins. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 164 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of all three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operating mode ends. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 164 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decorative portion 415, middle second character decorative portion 416) is not displayed for more than one cycle in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T6 corresponds to the fifth performance situation.

In addition, the manner in which the temporary stops during the execution of the SP Reach performance and the temporary stops during the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (the operating manner of the temporary stops, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) are the same as the manner in which the temporary stops during the execution of the SP Reach performance and the temporary stops during the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the first stage.

Furthermore, the form of the decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first stage, the decorative mode of the decorative pattern 41, the operation mode at the temporary stop, and the period of the temporary stop may be the same as those in the second stage.

(Variation example 14)
273 and 274 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 14 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 14 in the fifth embodiment is an example of a big win variation presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the third stage.

As shown in Figure 273 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, a less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays two reserved images 52, a reserved number display 55, a small symbol 56, a right-hit image 512, and a stage image 61 corresponding to the third stage (third performance mode). At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 shows "2", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122.

Next, as shown in Figure 273 (2), the special symbol starts to change, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 change at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.
Next, as shown in Figure 273 (3), the reach effect starts, and the reach-time action effect starts. In the example shown, in the reach-time action effect, the left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed in their entirety so as to extend in the vertical direction in the figure. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 start to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 273 (4), the reach action presentation ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 273 (5), the third jackpot highlight image 522 is displayed. At this time, the special feature effect is executed, and the middle movable special feature 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 273 (6), the decorative pattern 41 of the double number "333" is displayed in a size smaller than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the start of the reach performance (see Figure 273 (1)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 273(7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 273 (8), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is initiated.
Next, as shown in FIG. 274(9), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the third jackpot highlight image 522 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 189-1 (8) and Figure 189-2 (9) to (11) are performed.

Figure 275 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 14 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 275 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 14.
The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 275 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 273 (3) begins.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T2, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 273 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T3 is a temporary stop mode of three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 18th operation mode, begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 273 (8) begins.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T4 is a temporary stop mode of three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the 18th operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 274 (9) begins.

Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 18th operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 corresponds to the sixth performance situation, and the period from time T3 to time T4 corresponds to the seventh performance situation.

(Variation example 15)
FIG. 276 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 15 in the fifth embodiment. A variation presentation example 14 in the fifth embodiment is an example of a random miss variation presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the third stage.
In addition, the variable performance example 15 in the fifth embodiment is a variable performance that is executed when "EH6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 61.

276(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114, and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "2."
Next, as shown in Figure 276 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, and the first reserved image 52 reaches the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 276 (3), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (4), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach effect fails. In this case, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "314", are fixed and stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 277 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 15 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 277 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 15.
At time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the seventeenth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 277(3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 17th operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 277 (4) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, while the left second number decorative portion 413 is not displayed for one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 is the sixth performance situation.

In addition, while it has been explained that variation presentation example 15 in the fifth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the number of reserved prizes for winning at second start port 122 being "2" in the time-saving game state, it is not limited to this. The same variation presentation as variation presentation example 15 may be executed regardless of the value of the reserved prizes for winning at second start port 122 in the time-saving game state (any value from "1" to "4").

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can temporarily stop the decorative pattern 41 for less than one cycle while executing a variable performance based on the number of reserved symbols being a specific number (for example, "2") (see Figure 277).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopped decorative pattern 41, and also to prevent the variable presentation from becoming redundant.
Furthermore, the variable effect capable of executing a temporary stop of less than one cycle of the decorative pattern 41 may be executable at least in a variable effect based on the reserved number being a specific number. In other words, the variable effect capable of executing a temporary stop of less than one cycle of the decorative pattern 41 may be executable in a variable effect based on the reserved number being a number different from the specific number.

(Variation example 16)
Figure 278 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 16 in the fifth embodiment. The variation presentation example 16 in the fifth embodiment is a big win variation presentation based on winning into the second starting hole 122 in the third stage.

278(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed in a moving manner, and the first reserved image 52 reaches the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, as shown in Figure 278 (3), a reach-inducing effect is performed. In the reach-inducing effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a swinging motion up and down. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 starts to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 278 (4), the reach-prompting effect is successful, and the reach effect starts. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 "4" which are reach eyes start to temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 278 (5), the third jackpot highlight image 522 is displayed. At this time, the special feature effect is executed, and the middle movable special feature 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 278 (6), the decorative pattern 41 of the same number "444" is displayed in a size smaller than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 before the start of the reach performance (see Figure 277 (1)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 278(7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278(8), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is initiated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279(9), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "444", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the third jackpot highlight image 522 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 189-1 (8) and Figures 189-2 (9) to (11) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 displayed is "4".

Figure 280 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 16 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 280 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 16.
The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 is the temporary stop mode of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 17th operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 278 (3) starts.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the left decorative pattern 41. At time T2, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the 17th operation mode end. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 278 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number decorative portion 412, left second number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, and the left second number decorative portion 413 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 17th operating mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T3 is a temporary stop mode of three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the seventeenth operation mode are started. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 278 (8) starts.
The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T4 is a temporary stop mode of three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the seventeenth operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 279 (9) starts.

Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, while the three second number decorative sections 413 are not displayed for one or more cycles in the seventeenth operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 corresponds to the sixth performance situation, and the period from time T3 to time T4 corresponds to the seventh performance situation.

In the fifth embodiment, during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the operation display may be executed in a manner corresponding to the stage being controlled.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of FIG.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "fifth performance situation" of Figure 263.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "sixth performance situation" of Figure 263.
Furthermore, even when the customer waiting performance is being performed on any stage, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be performed (may be limited).

In the above example, it has been explained that the number portion 411 and the first number decoration portion 412 are temporarily stopped while the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 are not temporarily stopped during the execution of a jackpot game, but this is not limiting. During the execution of a jackpot game, the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 may also be temporarily stopped.
In addition, when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (any number from 1 to 9) is lined up is executed in the first stage, and when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (the same number as the specific number in the first stage) is lined up is executed in the second stage, the operating mode and period of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decoration section 412 to fourth number decoration section 418, character section 414, first character decoration section 415, second character decoration section 416) during the execution of the jackpot game are the same.

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 and the zone pattern 58 are also examples of performance patterns.
Here, the operation display of the pseudo consecutive pattern 57 (display by the 48th operation mode, display by the 49th operation mode) and the operation display of the zone pattern 58 (display by the 50th operation mode, display by the 51st operation mode) are also regarded as a temporary stop of the performance pattern.

In addition, in the above example, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the jackpot game does not have the second number decorative portion 413, but this is not limited to this.
The decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided with a second number decorative portion 413 to a fourth number decorative portion 418. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may have the same decorative form as the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of an SP reach in the normal game state, during the execution of an SPSP reach in the normal game state, and in the time-saving game state.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly describes the differences from the first to fifth embodiments, and explanations of the commonalities with any of the first to fifth embodiments may be omitted.

Figure 281 is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth embodiment.
In the sixth embodiment, in the first stage, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 281 (1). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 281 (1) has the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 63 (1).
In the sixth embodiment, in the second stage, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 281 (2). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 281 (2) is the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 195 (1).

In the sixth embodiment, a less decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 281 (3). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 281 (3) has a numeral portion 411, a first numeral decorative portion 412, and a second numeral decorative portion 413. The numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 281 (3) have the same decorative manner as the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 281 (1).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 281 (3) is displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state (first stage, second stage) and in the time-saving game state (third stage).

Figures 282-1 and 282-2 are figures showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 of this embodiment for each stage.
As shown in Fig. 282-1, the number section 411 is displayed in a common display format regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 3) being controlled. The number section 411 shown in Fig. 282-1 has the same display format as the number section 411 shown in Fig. 64-1.
The first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the second stage.
The second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a different display mode depending on whether the controlled stage is the first stage, the third stage, or the second stage.

As shown in Fig. 282-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to whether the controlled stage is Stage 1 or Stage 2. The character portion 414 shown in Fig. 282-2 has the same display mode as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 64-2.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 282-2 has the same display manner as the first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 64-2.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 282-2 has the same display manner as the second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 64-2.

282-1 and 282-2 are the display modes of the decorative patterns 41 when the variable performance starts for each stage. Therefore, depending on the progress of the variable performance, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a mode different from the combination of the associated stage and display mode shown in FIGS.
In addition, the number portion 411 of the less decorative decorative pattern 41 displayed in the time-saving game state (third stage) may be decorated in a different manner from the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the normal game state (first stage, second stage).

Figure 283 is a diagram showing the operating modes in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation in the sixth embodiment.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 283 shows the first to tenth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.
Here, in the sixth embodiment, the operational state of the decorative pattern 41 in the operational display for each performance situation is different from that in the first embodiment. Also, in the sixth embodiment, the relationship between the operational state of the decorative pattern 41 in the operational display and the period of the operational display is different from that in the first embodiment.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 283 will now be explained in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is being displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of a variable presentation in the first stage or the second stage, an SP reach presentation is being executed or the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is temporarily stopped, and an SP reach image 503 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of a variable presentation in the first or second stage, an SPSP reach presentation is being executed or the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is temporarily stopped, and an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.

The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage or the second stage.
The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal reach presentation is being executed, and a stage image 61 is being displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is the situation (state) when the reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage.
The seventh presentation situation (seventh presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage, the SPSP reach presentation is being executed or the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is temporarily stopped, and the SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The eighth presentation situation (eighth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped while the variable presentation is being executed in the third stage.
The ninth presentation situation (ninth presentation state) is the situation (state) during which a jackpot game is being played.
The tenth performance situation (tenth performance state) is the situation (state) during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the period of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 283 shows the period of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed for each presentation situation using the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number section 411 of the decorative pattern 41 in the second operating mode (see Figure 66) at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operating mode (see Figure 73) at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and the display of the second character decoration section 416 in the forty-third operating mode (see Figure 107) at a cycle of 1.6 seconds.
In addition, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 in the third operation mode (see Figure 67) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 in the fourth operation mode (see Figure 68) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds, the display of the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, the display of the first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and the display of the second character decorative section 416 in the 43rd operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds.
In addition, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in a third operation mode at a one-second cycle.

In addition, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a 1-second cycle, can display the number unit 411 in the second operation mode at a 1.6-second cycle, can display the first number decoration unit 412 in the 9th operation mode at a 1.6-second cycle, and can display the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode at a 1.6-second cycle.
In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number unit 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 44th operation mode (see Figure 108) at a cycle of 0.6 seconds.
In addition, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a one-second cycle.

In addition, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 in the first operating mode (see Figure 65) at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and can display the entire middle decorative pattern 41 in the third operating mode at a cycle of 1 second.
In addition, in the eighth performance situation (eighth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of one second, the display of the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds, and the display of the second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode at a cycle of 1.6 seconds.
In addition, in the 9th performance situation (9th performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number unit 411 in the 10th operating mode (see Figure 74) at a 2-second cycle, and can execute display of the first number decoration unit 412 in the 15th operating mode (see Figure 79) at a 2-second cycle.

In addition, in the tenth performance situation (tenth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the character unit 414 in the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89), the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92), the 31st operation mode (see FIG. 95), and the 34th operation mode (see FIG. 98), all at a cycle of 3.75 seconds.In addition, in the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can display the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode (see FIG. 100), the 38th operation mode (see FIG. 102), the 40th operation mode (see FIG. 104), and the 42nd operation mode (see FIG. 106), all at a cycle of 2.65 seconds. Additionally, in the 13th performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operating mode (see Figure 107) at 2.5 second intervals.

As described above, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode (e.g., the second operation mode) and the second operation mode (e.g., the ninth operation mode) (see the fourth presentation situation in Figure 283), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and the third operation mode (e.g., the third operation mode) (see the eighth presentation situation in Figure 283).
In other words, "in the second presentation mode, at least the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and the display in the third operation mode can be executed" includes the fact that the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode, which can be executed in the first presentation mode, can also be executed in the second presentation mode.

In particular, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying the first part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode (e.g., the second operating mode) and the second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) in a second operating mode (e.g., the ninth operating mode) (see the fourth presentation situation in Figure 283), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of displaying at least the first part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operating mode and the second part in a third operating mode (e.g., the third operating mode) (see the eighth presentation situation in Figure 283).
In other words, "in the second presentation mode, at least the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode of the first part and the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode of the second part can be executed" includes the fact that the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode, which can be executed in the first presentation mode, can be executed by the second part in the second presentation mode.

In addition, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying an action based on the first cycle (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the decorative pattern 41 and a second cycle (e.g., 12 seconds) (see the second presentation situation in Figure 207), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of displaying an action based on the first cycle of the decorative pattern 41 and a third cycle (e.g., 1 second) (see the seventh presentation situation in Figure 207).
In other words, "in the second presentation mode, at least the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion according to the first cycle and the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion according to the third cycle" includes the decorative pattern 41 being able to be displayed in motion also in the second presentation mode according to the third cycle in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion in the first presentation mode.

In particular, in the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing at least an action display based on the first period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the first part (first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 and an action display based on the second period (e.g., 12 seconds) of the second part (fourth number decorative part 418) (see the second presentation situation in Figure 207), and in the second presentation mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of executing at least an action display based on the first period of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 and an action display based on the third period (e.g., 1 second) of the second part (see the seventh presentation situation in Figure 207).
In other words, "in the second presentation mode, at least the first part of the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion at the first cycle and the second part can be displayed in motion at the third cycle" includes the fact that the second part of the decorative pattern 41 can also be displayed in motion in the second presentation mode by the third cycle in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in motion in the first presentation mode.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 1 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 1 in the sixth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 1 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 1 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (6) and (8), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (1).

Figure 284 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 284 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the left number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-third operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 118(5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the right number section 411 begins to display in the second operating mode, the right first number decoration section 412 begins to display in the ninth operating mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 begins to display in the forty-third operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (6) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode are completed. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.
In this way, in the variable performance example 1 of the sixth embodiment, the middle decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Also, time points T1 to T3 are the first performance situation (see Figure 283).

(Example of variation 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 2 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 2 in the sixth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "2". Also, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 2 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 (1) to (6) and (8), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (1).
In addition, in the variation performance example 2 in the sixth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in temporary stop, whether temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the variation performance example 1 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 284). In other words, in the variation performance example 2 in the sixth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T3 in FIG.

(Variation example 3)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 3 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 3 in the sixth embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "3". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 3 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 3 is the same as that shown in Figures 122 (1) to (6) and (8), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (1).

Figure 285 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 3 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 285 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 3.
First, at time T1, the left number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-third operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 122 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left number portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration portion 416 in the forty-third operation mode end. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 122 (8) starts.
In this way, in the variable performance example 3 of the sixth embodiment, the right decorative pattern 41 and the middle decorative pattern 41 stop definitively without temporarily stopping.
Furthermore, during the period from time T1 to time T2, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Also, the period from time T1 to time T2 is the first performance situation (see Figure 283).

(Variation example 4)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 4 in the sixth embodiment. Variation presentation example 4 in the sixth embodiment, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4". Also, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 4 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 4 is the same as variable presentation example 4 in the sixth embodiment (the presentation shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5)), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (1). In other words, in variable presentation example 4 in the sixth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without any temporary stop.

(Variation example 5)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 5 in the sixth embodiment. Variation presentation example 5 in the sixth embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 5 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 5 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 128 (variable presentation example 5 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (1).

Figure 286 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 286 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the left number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-third operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 127(5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the forty-third operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (7) starts.
That is, in the sixth embodiment, the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted during the execution of the reach-time operation presentation.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 43rd operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.

Next, at time T4, the left and right number sections 411 begin to display in the second operating mode, the left and right first number decoration sections 412 begin to display in the ninth operating mode, and the left and right second character decoration sections 416 begin to display in the 43rd operating mode. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the middle number section 411 begins to be displayed in the second operating mode, the middle first number decoration section 412 begins to be displayed in the ninth operating mode, and the middle second character decoration section 416 begins to be displayed in the 43rd operating mode. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decoration sections 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operation mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 43rd operation mode of the left and right second character decoration sections 416.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Also, time points T1 to T6 are the first performance situation (see Figure 283).

The appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the timing at which the temporary stop begins after the start of the reach performance is the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. After the start of the reach performance, the temporary stop of the identification part may begin after the temporary stop of the decorative part of the decorative pattern 41 has begun.

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the reach variation effect is executed, the temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative symbols 41 may not be executed (may be restricted) during the execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may perform a temporary stop by a first part (e.g., an identification part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the close-up performance, and may not perform (restrict) a temporary stop by a second part (e.g., a decorative part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) that is different from the first part.

(Example of variation 6)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 6 in the sixth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 6 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 130 (variable presentation example 6 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (1). That is, in the sixth embodiment, even during the execution of the SP reach presentation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative display manner. Note that in the sixth embodiment, during the execution of the SP reach presentation, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the display size and display area shown in Figures 130 (3) and (4).

Figure 287-1 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the sixth embodiment.
Figure 287-1 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413) is displayed in the fourth operation mode, the middle number portion 411 is displayed in the second operation mode, the first middle number decorative portion 412 is displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the second middle character decorative portion 416 is displayed in the 43rd operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decorative portion 412, middle second number decorative portion 413) in the fourth operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode all end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left and right first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second character decorative sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in the fourth operation mode, the middle number portion 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the first middle number decorative portion 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the second middle character decorative portion 416 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 43rd operation mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decoration portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (6) starts.
Next, at time T5, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decoration portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode are completed. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 130(7) starts.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, none of the three decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped are displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T3 are the second performance status (see Figure 283), and time points T4 to T5 are the first performance status.

287-1 does not show the temporary stop state from the start of the variable performance until the end of the normal reach performance (the start of the SP reach performance). Here, the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right from the start of the variable performance in variable performance example 6 until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
Additionally, in variation presentation example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 130(2)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 286, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the variation presentation in variation presentation example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 and whether a temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative symbols 41 shown at time points T1 to T6 in FIG. 286. In other words, in a losing variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time points T1 to T6 in FIG. 286, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time points T1 to T5 in FIG. 287-1.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative display mode (see Figure 281 (1)) during the execution of the SP reach presentation in the normal game state, but this is not limited to this.
During the execution of the SP Reach effect in the normal gaming state, the decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 281 (3)). In this case, the mode of the temporary stop during the execution of the SP Reach effect is the same as the mode of the temporary stop in the second effect state shown in FIG. 283, except that the second character decoration part 416 is not temporarily stopped.

(Example of variation 7)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 7 in the sixth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 7 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 7 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 7 is the same as that shown in Figures 141 to 144 (variable presentation example 12 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 283) and the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (1), and in the third presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (3).

Figure 287-2 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 7 of the sixth embodiment.
Figure 287-2 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 7.
At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, and left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (23) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (25) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (26) begins.
Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (27) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, and three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decoration portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode are started. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (28) starts.
Next, at time T6, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decoration portions 416 in the forty-third operation mode are completed. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (29) starts.

Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, none of the three decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped are displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T4 are the third performance situation (see Figure 283), and time points T5 to T6 are the first performance situation.

287-2 does not show the specific mode of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance in the variable performance example 7. Here, in the variable performance example 7, the mode of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 7, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown in time T6 in Fig. 286, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 7, from the start of the performance shown in Fig. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as that shown in time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 286 for the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41.

287-2 does not show the specific aspects of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach performance in the variation performance example 7. Here, in the variation performance example 7, the aspects of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach performance may be the same as the contents shown at time points T1 to T3 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 7, the display of the second role effect image 508 (see FIG. 143 (22)) may be started at the timing shown at time T3 in FIG. 287-1, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach performance (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T3 in FIG. 287-1.

Furthermore, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 may be able to continue the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 even when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25) etc.).Furthermore, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 may be able to temporarily stop the middle decorative pattern 41 when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25)).

In the above example, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect is smaller in display size than during the execution of the SP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Also, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect.

(Example of variation 8)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 8 in the sixth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the sixth embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the first stage. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 59, and is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 39 is the variation presentation shown in FIGS. 139(1) to (6) (the same variation presentation as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern").

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 8 is the same as variable presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 283) and the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (1), and in the third presentation situation and the fourth presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (3), and the presentation shown in Figure 288 is performed.

More specifically, in variable performance example 8 in the sixth embodiment, the same performances as those shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), 142 (9) to (16), 143 (17) to (23), and 147 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 288 (1), the decorative pattern 41 of the double digits is displayed in a reduced size and a temporary stop is initiated.
Next, as shown in Figure 288 (2), the second transitional image 504 is displayed. As the second transitional image 504 is displayed, the three decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see.

288(3), the second transition image 504 disappears, and the stage image 61 and the highly decorative double-digit decorative pattern 41 are displayed again. At this time, the temporary stop of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is started again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 288(4), with the special symbol being stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "333", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 147 (7) and (8), and Figures 148 (9) and (10) are performed.

Figure 289 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 8 of the sixth embodiment.
Figure 289 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 8.
Although not shown in the figure, in variable performance example 8, after the normal reach performance and the SP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance begins, and the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) begin to be displayed in the third operation mode.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 289 is the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T1 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (2) starts.
Here, during the period from the start of the SP reach performance to time T1, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T2 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T2, display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode begins. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 288 (1) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T3 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in FIG. 288 (2) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, and three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T4 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, three second number decorative portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character decorative portions 415, and three second character decorative portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decorative portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode begin. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 288 (3) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T5 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T5, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number portions 411, three first number portions 412, three second number portions 413, three character portions 414, three first character portions 415, and three second character portions 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character portions 416 in the 43rd operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 288 (4) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, three second number decorative sections 413, three character sections 414, three first character decorative sections 415, and three second character decorative sections 416) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the three second character decorative sections 416 are displayed for one or more cycles in the forty-third operation mode.

Next, at time T6, the display of the number portion 411 in the tenth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode are started. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (8) starts.
Next, at time T7, the display of the number portion 411 in the tenth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 148 (9) starts.
Here, during the period from time T6 to time T7, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the tenth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.
Furthermore, time T1 is the third presentation situation, time T2 to time T5 are the fourth presentation situation, and time T6 to time T7 are the ninth presentation situation.

In addition, in Variation Presentation Example 8, the manner in which the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation until the start of the SPSP reach presentation is the same as in Variation Presentation Example 7. In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 8, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T6 in Figure 286, times T1 to T3 in Figure 287-1, and time T1 in Figure 287-2.

(Example of variation 9)
Next, a variation presentation example 9 in the sixth embodiment will be explained. The variation presentation example 9 in the sixth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "1", just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 9 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 14 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 9 is the same as that shown in Figures 156 (1) to (8) (variable performance example 14 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (2).

Figure 290 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 9 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 290 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 9.
First, at time T1, the left number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-fourth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the forty-fourth operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 156(6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 44th operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 156 (8) starts.
In this way, in the variable performance example 9 of the sixth embodiment, the middle decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operating mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operating mode of the left first number decoration section 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 44th operating mode of the left second character decoration section 416.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the right second character decoration portion 416 displays one or more cycles in the 44th operation mode. On the other hand, the right number portion 411 does not display one or more cycles in the 2nd operation mode, and the right first number decoration portion 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 9th operation mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T3 corresponds to the fifth performance situation.

(Variation example 10)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 10 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 10 in the sixth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "2", just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 10 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 15 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 10 is the same as that shown in Figures 158 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 15 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (2).
In addition, in the variation performance example 10 in the sixth embodiment, the manner of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (operation manner in the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or for less than one cycle) is the same as the variation performance example 9 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 290). In other words, in the variation performance example 10 in the sixth embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T3 in FIG.

(Variation example 11)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 11 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 11 in the sixth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "3", just like the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 11 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 16 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 160 (1) to (8) (variable presentation example 16 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (2).

Figure 291 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 11 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 291 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 11.
First, at time T1, the left number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-fourth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160(5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the right number section 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the right first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the right second character decoration section 416 in the forty-fourth operation mode are started. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 160(6) starts.
Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second character decoration portions 416 in the 44th operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 160 (8) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left second character decoration portion 416 displays one or more cycles in the 44th operation mode. On the other hand, the left number portion 411 does not display one or more cycles in the 2nd operation mode, and the left first number decoration portion 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 9th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T3 corresponds to the fifth performance situation.

(Variation example 12)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 12 in the sixth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the sixth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the second stage is "4". Also, similar to the variation presentation example 17 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 12 is the same as that shown in Figures 162 (1) to (5) (variable presentation example 17 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (2). In other words, in variable presentation example 12 in the sixth embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop in a definite manner without any provisional stops.

(Variation example 13)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 13 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 13 in the sixth embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the second stage, just like the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 13 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 18 in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 163 and 164 (variable presentation example 18 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (2) and the temporary stop continues during the execution of the reach-time action presentation.

Figure 292 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 13 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 292 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 13.
First, at time T1, the left number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the left first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the left second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-fourth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 163 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the right number section 411 starts to be displayed in the second operation mode, the right first number decoration section 412 starts to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the right second character decoration section 416 starts to be displayed in the forty-fourth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 163(6) starts.
Also, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 163 (7) begins.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the left second character decoration portion 416 displays one or more cycles in the 44th operation mode. On the other hand, the left number portion 411 does not display one or more cycles in the 2nd operation mode, and the left first number decoration portion 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 9th operation mode.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the right second character decoration portion 416 displays one or more cycles in the 44th operation mode. On the other hand, the right number portion 411 does not display one or more cycles in the 2nd operation mode, and the right first number decoration portion 412 does not display one or more cycles in the 9th operation mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the middle number section 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the middle second character decoration section 416 in the forty-fourth operation mode are started. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 164 (11) starts.
Next, at time T5, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second character decoration portions 416 in the forty-fourth operation mode are completed. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 164 (13) starts.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T5, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 44th operation mode of the left second character decoration section 416.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T5 corresponds to the fifth performance situation.

In addition, the manner in which the temporary stops during the execution of the SP Reach performance, the temporary stops during the execution of the SPSP Reach performance, and the temporary stops during the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (the operating manner of the temporary stops, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) are the same as the manner in which the temporary stops during the execution of the SP Reach performance, the temporary stops during the execution of the SPSP Reach performance, and the temporary stops during the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in the first stage.

Furthermore, the form of the decorative pattern 41 in the normal gaming state is not limited to the example described above.
For example, in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41's decorative mode, operation mode at temporary stop, and period of temporary stop may be the same as those in the second stage.
Also, for example, in the second stage, the decorative mode of the decorative pattern 41, the operation mode at the temporary stop, and the period of the temporary stop may be the same as in the first stage.

(Variation example 14)
Figure 293 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 14 in the sixth embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 14 in the sixth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the second starting port 122 in the third stage is "1". Also, similar to the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 14 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

As shown in Figure 293 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, a less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, right-hit image 512, and a stage image 61 corresponding to the third stage (third performance mode). At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting gate 122.

Next, as shown in Figure 293 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed at high speed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
Next, as shown in FIG. 293(3), the left decorative symbol 41, "3", stops. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 is not temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 293(4), the right decorative symbol 41, "4", stops. At this time, the right decorative symbol 41 is not temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 293 (5), as the special symbol stops, the medium decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56 "314" stop. In other words, the three decorative symbols 41 stop without any temporary stops. In addition, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed.

Note that while variation presentation example 14 in the sixth embodiment has been described as a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened play state, this is not limited to this. The same variation presentation as variation presentation example 14 may be executed regardless of the value (any value from "1" to "4") of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state. In other words, in a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state, the three decorative symbols 41 may stop fixedly without temporarily stopping, regardless of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122.

(Variation example 15)
Figure 294 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 15 in the sixth embodiment. The variation presentation example 15 in the sixth embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on winning the second starting hole 122 in the third stage. The variation presentation example 15 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 293(1) and (2) are performed, and then a reach-inducing effect is performed as shown in Figure 294(1). In the reach-inducing effect, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are displayed in an up and down swaying motion.
Next, as shown in Figure 294 (2), the reach effect is not executed. In other words, the reach-inducing effect fails. In this case, the left decorative pattern 41 "3" and the right decorative pattern 41 "4" start to temporarily stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 294 (3), with the special symbol being stopped, the middle decorative symbol 41 "1" stops, and the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56 "314" are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Figure 295 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 15 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 295 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 15.
First, at time T1, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the third operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 294 (2) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the third operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 294 (3) starts.
During the period from time T1 to time T2, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed in the third operation mode for one or more periods.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 is the sixth performance situation.

(Variation example 16)
Next, a variation presentation example 16 in the sixth embodiment will be explained. Similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 16 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage, and is an example of a miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 16 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 16 is the same as that shown in Figures 186 and 187 (variable presentation example 30 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 281 (3) and that a temporary stop is not performed (is restricted) until the SPSP reach presentation begins.

Figure 296 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 16 in the sixth embodiment.
Figure 296 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 16.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right numeral portions 411, left and right first numeral decorative portions 412, and left and right second numeral decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 186 (6) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the first operation mode ends. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 186 (8) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the first operating mode.

Next, at time T3, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) are displayed in the first operating mode, and the entire center decorative pattern 41 (center number portion 411, center first number decorative portion 412, center second number decorative portion 413) is displayed in the third operating mode. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 187 (9) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the entire left and right decorative pattern 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number portions 412, left and right second number portions 413) in the first operation mode, and the display of the entire center decorative pattern 41 (center number portion 411, center first number portion 412, center second number portion 413) in the third operation mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 187 (10) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in a first operating mode, and the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number section 411, middle first number decorative section 412, middle second number decorative section 413) is displayed for one or more cycles in a third operating mode.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode is started. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 187 (11) starts.
Next, at time T6, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode ends. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 187 (12) starts.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the entire three decorative patterns 41 (three number sections 411, three first number decorative sections 412, and three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T4 correspond to the seventh performance situation, and time points T5 to T6 correspond to the sixth performance situation.

(Variation example 17)
Next, a variation presentation example 17 in the sixth embodiment will be described. Similar to variation presentation example 31 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 17 in the sixth embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage. Also, similar to variation presentation example 31 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 17 in the sixth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 17 is the same as that shown in Figures 189-1 and 189-2 (variable presentation example 31 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 281 (3) and that a temporary stop is not performed (is restricted) until the SPSP reach presentation begins.
In addition, in the variation performance example 17, the mode of the temporary stop (operation mode in the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) from the start of the variation performance to the end of the SPSP reach performance is the same as the mode of the temporary stop (see time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 296) from the start of the variation performance to the end of the SPSP reach performance in the variation performance example 16. In addition, in the variation performance example 17, the mode of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 of the doublets during the execution of the variation performance (operation mode in the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle is performed) is the same as the mode of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 of the doublets during the execution of the variation performance in the variation performance example 8 (see time T2 to time T3 in FIG. 289).

In the sixth embodiment, during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the operation display may be executed in a manner corresponding to the stage being controlled.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of FIG.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the second stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "fifth performance situation" of Figure 283.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "sixth performance situation" of Figure 283.
Furthermore, even when the customer waiting performance is being performed on any stage, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be performed (may be limited).

In the above example, it has been explained that the number portion 411 and the first number decoration portion 412 are temporarily stopped while the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 are not temporarily stopped during the execution of a jackpot game, but this is not limiting. During the execution of a jackpot game, the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 may also be temporarily stopped.
In addition, when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (any number from 1 to 9) is lined up is executed in the first stage, and when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (the same number as the specific number in the first stage) is lined up is executed in the second stage, the operating mode and period of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decoration section 412 to fourth number decoration section 418, character section 414, first character decoration section 415, second character decoration section 416) during the execution of the jackpot game are the same.

Furthermore, in the above example, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game does not have the second number decorative portion 413, but this is not limited to this.
The decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided with a second number decorative portion 413. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may have the same decorative form as the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of an SP reach in the normal game state, during the execution of an SPSP reach in the normal game state, and in the time-saving game state.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. Note that the following mainly describes the differences from the first to sixth embodiments, and explanations of the commonalities with any of the first to sixth embodiments may be omitted.

Figure 297 is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 in the seventh embodiment.
In the seventh embodiment, in the first and second stages, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 297(1). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 297(1) is the same display manner as the decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 63(1).
In the seventh embodiment, a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 297(2). The decorative pattern 41 shown in Fig. 297(2) has a numeral portion 411, a first numeral decorative portion 412, and a second numeral decorative portion 413. The numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 297(2) are in the same decorative manner as the numeral portion 411, the first numeral decorative portion 412, and the second numeral decorative portion 413 shown in Fig. 297(1).
The decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness shown in Figure 297 (2) is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect in the normal game state (first stage, second stage), during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, and in the time-saving game state (third stage).

Figures 298-1 and 298-2 are figures showing the display modes of the components of the decorative pattern 41 in this embodiment for each stage.
As shown in Fig. 298-1, the number section 411 is displayed in a common display format regardless of the stage (stage 1 to stage 3) being controlled. The number section 411 shown in Fig. 298-1 has the same display format as the number section 411 shown in Fig. 64-1.
The first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first number decorative portion 412 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the stage (first stage to third stage) to be controlled.
The second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the number of the decorative pattern 41. In addition, the second number decorative portion 413 is displayed in a common display mode regardless of the stage (first stage to third stage) to be controlled.

As shown in Fig. 298-2, the character portion 414 is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to whether the controlled stage is Stage 1 or Stage 2. The character portion 414 shown in Fig. 298-2 has the same display mode as the character portion 414 shown in Fig. 64-2.
The first character decoration portion 415 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 298-2 has the same display manner as the first character decoration portion 415 of the first stage and the second stage shown in Fig. 64-2.
The second character decoration portion 416 is displayed in a decoration manner according to whether the controlled stage is the first stage or the second stage. The second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 298-2 has the same display manner as the second character decoration portion 416 of the first stage and the second stage shown in FIG. 64-2.

298-1 and 298-2 are the display modes of the decorative patterns 41 when the variable performance starts for each stage. Therefore, depending on the progress of the variable performance, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in a mode different from the combination of the associated stage and display mode shown in FIGS. 298-1 and 298-2.
In addition, the number portion 411 of the less decorative decorative pattern 41 displayed in the time-saving game state (third stage) may be decorated in a different manner from the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the normal game state (first stage, second stage).

Figure 299 is a diagram showing the operating modes of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation in the seventh embodiment.
The "presentation status (presentation state)" shown in Figure 299 shows the first to eighth presentation statuses as the status (state) of the presentation being executed.
Here, in the seventh embodiment, the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 for each performance situation is different from that in the first embodiment. Also, in the seventh embodiment, the relationship between the operation mode in the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 and the period of the operation display is different from that in the first embodiment.

The "performance status" shown in Figure 299 will now be explained in detail.
The first presentation situation (first presentation state) is a situation (state) when a reach presentation is not being executed or a normal presentation is being executed during the execution of a variable presentation in the first or second stage, and a stage image 61 is being displayed as a background for decorative patterns 41, etc.
The second presentation situation (second presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of a variable presentation in the first stage or the second stage, an SP reach presentation is being executed or the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is temporarily stopped, and an SP reach image 503 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.
The third presentation situation (third presentation state) is a situation (state) when, during the execution of a variable presentation in any of the first to third stages, an SPSP reach presentation is being executed or the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is temporarily stopped, and an SPSP reach image 509 is displayed as the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc.

The fourth presentation situation (fourth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage or the second stage.
The fifth presentation situation (fifth presentation state) is the situation (state) when the reach presentation is not being executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the third stage.
The sixth presentation situation (sixth presentation state) is a situation (state) in which the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers is temporarily stopped while the variable presentation is being executed in the third stage.
The seventh presentation situation (seventh presentation state) is the situation (state) during execution of a jackpot game.
The ninth performance situation (ninth performance state) is the situation (state) during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation (presentation state). Figure 299 shows the periodicity of temporary stops and the operational modes of temporary stops that can be performed on the decorative pattern 41 for each presentation situation, using the entire decorative pattern 41, the number section 411, the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.

In the first performance situation (first performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the number section 411 in the second operation mode (see FIG. 66) at intervals of 1.9 seconds, the display of the first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode (see FIG. 73) at intervals of 1.9 seconds, and the display of the second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode (see FIG. 80) at intervals of 1.9 seconds. Furthermore, in the first performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character section 414 in the thirty-fifth operation mode (see FIG. 99), the thirty-seventh operation mode (see FIG. 101), the thirty-ninth operation mode (see FIG. 103), and the forty-first operation mode (see FIG. 105), all at intervals of 1.9 seconds.

In addition, in the second performance situation (second performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode (see Figure 67) at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, can display the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, can display the first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, and can display the second number decorative section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds.
In addition, in the third performance situation (third performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 1 second, the display of the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, the display of the first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, and the display of the second number decorative section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds.

In addition, in the fourth performance situation (fourth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at either a 1-second cycle or a 1.9-second cycle, can display the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a 1.9-second cycle, can display the first number decorative section 412 in the 9th operation mode at a 1.9-second cycle, and can display the second number decorative section 413 in the 16th operation mode at a 1.9-second cycle.
In addition, in the fifth performance situation (fifth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can display the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, can display the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, can display the first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, and can display the second number decorative section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds.

In addition, in the sixth performance situation (sixth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the entire decorative pattern 41 in the third operation mode at a cycle of 1 second, the display of the number section 411 in the second operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, the display of the first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds, and the display of the second number decorative section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode at a cycle of 1.9 seconds.
In addition, in the seventh performance situation (seventh performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute display of the number section 411 in the tenth operating mode (see Figure 74) at two-second intervals, and can execute display of the first number decoration section 412 in the fifteenth operating mode (see Figure 79) at two-second intervals.

In addition, in the eighth performance situation (eighth performance state), the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the character unit 414 in the 25th operation mode (see FIG. 89), the 28th operation mode (see FIG. 92), the 31st operation mode (see FIG. 95), and the 34th operation mode (see FIG. 98), all at a cycle of 3.75 seconds. In the seventh performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the first character decoration unit 415 in the 36th operation mode (see FIG. 100), the 38th operation mode (see FIG. 102), the 40th operation mode (see FIG. 104), and the 42nd operation mode (see FIG. 106), all at a cycle of 2.65 seconds. In the thirteenth performance situation, the performance control unit 300 can execute the display of the second character decoration unit 416 in the 43rd operation mode (see FIG. 107), all at a cycle of 2.5 seconds.

As described above, the predetermined performance patterns include the predetermined performance pattern (decorative pattern 41) and a specific performance pattern (small pattern 56) that is different from the predetermined performance pattern. The performance control unit 300 can display the predetermined performance pattern in motion at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.9 seconds), and can limit the display of the specific performance pattern in motion at a predetermined cycle while a variable performance is being executed. In other words, the specific performance patterns also include the small pattern 56.

As described above, the predetermined performance patterns include the predetermined performance pattern (decorative pattern 41) and a specific performance pattern (small pattern 56) that is different from the predetermined performance pattern. The performance control unit 300 can display the predetermined performance pattern in a predetermined operating mode (for example, the third operating mode), and can limit the display of the specific performance pattern in the predetermined operating mode for more than one cycle while a variable performance is being executed. In other words, the specific performance patterns also include the small pattern 56.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode (e.g., a second operation mode) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., a third operation mode) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and the performance control unit 300 can display a specific part of the performance pattern (e.g., the number part 411) at least in the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode (first stage), and can display the specific part at least in the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode (second stage) (see the second performance situation in Figure 299).
That is, "the specific part of the performance pattern can be displayed in at least a first operation mode during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode" includes the fact that the first operation mode of the specific part that can be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode can be displayed by the specific part even during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode. Also, "the specific part can be displayed in at least a second operation mode during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode" includes the fact that the second operation mode of the specific part that can be displayed during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode can be displayed by the specific part even during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can display an identification unit (e.g., the number unit 411) that can identify a pattern in operation for at least a first period (e.g., 1.9 seconds), and can display an ornamental unit (e.g., the first number ornamental unit 412, the second number ornamental unit 413, etc.) that decorates the identification unit in operation for at least a second period (e.g., 1 second).
In other words, "the decorative part can be displayed in motion at least in the second cycle" includes the decorative part being capable of being displayed in motion in the second cycle that can be displayed in motion by the identification part.

Furthermore, during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode (e.g., the first stage), the performance control unit 300 can display the first part (e.g., the number part 411) and the second part (e.g., the first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 in at least a first operating mode (e.g., the third operating mode), and during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode (e.g., the third stage), the first part can be displayed in at least a second operating mode (e.g., the second operating mode) and the second part can be displayed in at least a third operating mode (e.g., the ninth operating mode).
That is, "during the execution of the variable performance in the first presentation mode, the first and second parts of the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed by at least a first operation mode" includes "during the execution of the variable performance in the first presentation mode, the first and second parts of the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed by a first operation mode that can be displayed by the first and second parts during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode." Also, "during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode, the first part can be displayed by at least a second operation mode" includes "during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode, the first part can be displayed by the first part during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode by a second operation mode that can be displayed by the first part during the execution of the variable performance in the first presentation mode." Also, "during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode, the second part can be displayed by at least a third operation mode" includes "during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode, the second part can be displayed by the second part during the execution of the variable performance in the second presentation mode by a third operation mode that can be displayed by the second part during the execution of the variable performance in the first presentation mode."

(Example of variation 1)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 1 in the seventh embodiment. The variation presentation example 1 in the seventh embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "1". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 1 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.
Also, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 1 is the same as that shown in Figures 118 (1) to (8).

Figure 300 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 300 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, and the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the right number section 411 starts to display in the second operating mode, the right first number decoration section 412 starts to display in the ninth operating mode, the right second number decoration section 413 starts to display in the sixteenth operating mode, and the right first character decoration section 415 starts to display in the thirty-ninth operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (6) starts.

Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number section 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, and the display of the middle first character decoration section 415 in the thirty-fifth operating mode begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 118 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display by the ninth operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operation mode of the left second number decoration section 413, and one or more cycles of display by the 37th operation mode of the left first character decoration section 415.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Also, time points T1 to T4 are the first performance situation (see Figure 299).

(Example of variation 2)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 2 in the seventh embodiment. The variation presentation example 2 in the seventh embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "2". Also, like the variation presentation example 2 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 2 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.
In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 2 is the same as that shown in Figures 120 (1) to (8), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 297 (1).

Figure 301 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 1 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 301 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 1.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the left second number decoration portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, and the display of the left first character decoration portion 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the right number section 411 starts to display in the second operating mode, the right first number decoration section 412 starts to display in the ninth operating mode, the right second number decoration section 413 starts to display in the sixteenth operating mode, and the right first character decoration section 415 starts to display in the thirty-ninth operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (6) starts.

Next, at time T3, the display of the middle number section 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, and the display of the middle first character decoration section 415 in the thirty-fifth operating mode begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 120 (7) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 37th operation mode, the display of the right first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 35th operation mode end. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 120 (8) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T4, any part of the left decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T4, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, during the period from time T3 to time T4, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Also, time points T1 to T4 are the first performance situation (see Figure 299).

(Variation example 3)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 3 in the seventh embodiment. The variation presentation example 3 in the seventh embodiment is, like the variation presentation example 3 in the first embodiment, a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "3". Also, like the variation presentation example 1 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 3 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 3 is the same as that shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 297 (1) and there is one less reserved number display 55 and reserved image 52 for the first starting port 121. In other words, in variable presentation example 3 in the seventh embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop for a fixed period without any provisional stops.

(Variation example 4)
Next, a description will be given of variation presentation example 4 in the seventh embodiment. Variation presentation example 4 in the seventh embodiment, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is "4". Also, like variation presentation example 4 in the first embodiment, variation presentation example 4 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 4 is the same as variable presentation example 4 in the seventh embodiment (the presentation shown in Figures 124 (1) to (5)), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 297 (1). In other words, in variable presentation example 4 in the seventh embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 stops definitively without temporarily stopping.

(Variation example 5)
Next, variation presentation example 5 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. Variation presentation example 5 in the seventh embodiment is an example of a reach miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment. Also, variation presentation example 5 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like variation presentation example 5 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 5 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 128 (variable presentation example 5 in the first embodiment), except that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 297 (1) and that a temporary stop is not performed (is limited) during the execution of the reach-time action presentation.

Figure 302 is a chart showing the flow of operation of the decorative pattern 41 performed in variable performance example 5 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 302 shows the flow of movement of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 5.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number section 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the left second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, and the display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (5) starts.

Next, at time T2, the right number section 411 starts to display in the second operating mode, the right first number decoration section 412 starts to display in the ninth operating mode, the right second number decoration section 413 starts to display in the sixteenth operating mode, and the right first character decoration section 415 starts to display in the thirty-seventh operating mode. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 127 (6) starts.

Next, at time T3, the display of the left and right number sections 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the left and right second number decoration sections 413 in the 16th operating mode, and the display of the left and right first character decoration sections 415 in the 37th operating mode end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 127 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left number section 411, one or more cycles of display by the ninth operation mode of the left first number decoration section 412, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operation mode of the left second number decoration section 413, and one or more cycles of display by the 37th operation mode of the left first character decoration section 415.
Furthermore, during the period from time T2 to time T3, any part of the right decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped will not be displayed for more than one cycle.

Next, at time T4, the left and right number sections 411 begin to display in the second operating mode, the left and right first number decoration sections 412 begin to display in the ninth operating mode, the left and right second number decoration sections 413 begin to display in the sixteenth operating mode, and the left and right first character decoration sections 415 begin to display in the thirty-seventh operating mode. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 128 (9) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the middle number section 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the middle first number decoration section 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the middle second number decoration section 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, and the display of the middle first character decoration section 415 in the thirty-ninth operating mode begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character decoration sections 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode all end. Time T6 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 128 (13) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T6, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operation mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display by the ninth operation mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, one or more cycles of display by the 16th operation mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413, and one or more cycles of display by the 37th operation mode of the left and right first character decoration sections 415.
Furthermore, during the period from time T5 to time T6, any part of the intermediate decorative pattern 41 that was temporarily stopped is not displayed for more than one cycle.
Also, time points T1 to T6 are the first performance situation (see Figure 299).

The appearance of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the reach-time action presentation is not limited to the example described above.
During the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be restricted, while a temporary stop by the number section 411 may be executed (continued). Also, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, neither a temporary stop by the number section 411 nor a temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (restricted).
Furthermore, during the execution of the reach-time action presentation, both the temporary stop by the number section 411 and the temporary stop by the character section 414 may be executed (continued). In this case, in the reach-time action presentation, the number section 411 may perform a tilting action, while the character section 414 may not perform a tilting action. Furthermore, in the reach-time action presentation, the character section 414 may perform a tilting action, while the number section 411 may not perform a tilting action.

In addition, in variable performance example 5, the timing at which the temporary stop begins after the start of the reach performance is the same for each component of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. After the start of the reach performance, the temporary stop of the identification part may begin after the temporary stop of the decorative part of the decorative pattern 41 has begun.

In addition, in the variable performance example 5, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be temporarily stopped while the close-up performance is being executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the reach variation effect is executed, the temporary stopping of at least some of the decorative symbols 41 may not be executed (may be restricted) during the execution of the proximity effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may perform a temporary stop by a first part (e.g., an identification part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the close-up performance, and may not perform (restrict) a temporary stop by a second part (e.g., a decorative part) of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41) that is different from the first part.

(Example of variation 6)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 6 in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 6 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 6 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 6 is the same as that shown in Figures 127 and 130 (variable presentation example 6 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 297 (1), and in the second presentation situation, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative form shown in Figure 297 (2).

Figure 303 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 6 of the seventh embodiment.
Figure 303 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variable performance example 6.
At time T1, the following operations are started: display of the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (3) starts.

Next, at time T2, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413) is displayed in the third operation mode, the middle number portion 411 is displayed in the second operation mode, the first middle number decorative portion 412 is displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the second middle number decorative portion 413 is displayed in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (4) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operating mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operating mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operating mode all end. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (5) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left and right decorative patterns 41 (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left and right number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left and right first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operation mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, first middle number decorative portion 412, second middle number decorative portion 413) displays for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the middle number portion 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the middle first number decorative portion 412 displays for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, and the middle second number decorative portion 413 displays for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operation mode.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character decoration sections 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode begin. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (6) begins.

Next, at time T5, the display of the three number sections 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration sections 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration sections 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character decoration sections 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decoration section 415 in the 39th operation mode begin. Time T5 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 130 (7) begins.

Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the three number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, the three second number decoration sections 413 display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left and right first character decoration sections 415 display one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, and the middle first character decoration section 415 display one or more cycles in the 39th operating mode.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T3 are the second performance status (see FIG. 299), and time points T4 to T5 are the first performance status.

303, the temporary stop state from the start of the variable effect until the end of the normal reach effect (the start of the SP reach effect) is omitted from the illustration. Here, the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the variable effect in variable effect example 6 until the end of the normal reach effect may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 6, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 130(2)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in FIG. 302, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start of the variation performance in the variation performance example 6 to the end of the normal reach (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop is performed for one cycle or more or less than one cycle) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 302. In other words, in a losing variation performance in which the SP reach performance is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG. 302, and then temporarily stopped in the mode shown at time T1 to time T5 in FIG. 303.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number section 411) showing the numbers in the performance pattern, and a second image (e.g., character section 414) displayed behind the first image, and it is possible to make the execution times of the action displays that can be repeated periodically during the execution of the variable performance different between the first image and the second image (see Figures 127, 128, 130, 299, 302, and 303).
Here, "it is possible to make the execution time of the periodically repeatable action display different between the first image and the second image during the execution of the variable performance" also includes the case where one of the first image and the second image has an execution time of 0 seconds for the periodically repeatable action display during the execution of the variable performance (no periodically repeatable action display is performed during the execution of the variable performance). Also, "it is possible to make the execution time of the periodically repeatable action display different between the first image and the second image during the execution of the variable performance" includes the case where a period occurs during which one of the first image and the second image is displaying an action while the other is not.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode (e.g., a second operation mode) that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode (e.g., a third operation mode) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode; the performance symbols include a first performance symbol (e.g., a left decorative symbol 41) and a second performance symbol (e.g., a right decorative symbol 41) that can be stopped after the first performance symbol stops in the variable performance; the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during the execution of the first variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 1), and can display the first performance symbol at least in the second operation mode after the second performance symbol stops during the execution of the second variable performance (e.g., variable performance example 6) (see Figures 299, 300, and 303).
In other words, "the first performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operating mode after the second performance pattern stops during the execution of the second variable performance" includes the first performance pattern being displayable in the first operating mode and the second operating mode after the second performance pattern stops during the execution of the second variable performance.

(Example of variation 7)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 7 in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 7 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, and is an example of a reach miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 12 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 7 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 7 is the same as that shown in Figures 141 to 144 (variable presentation example 12 in the first embodiment), except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 299), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 297 (1), and in the second and third presentation situations, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 297 (2).

Figure 304 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 7 of the seventh embodiment.
Figure 304 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 7.
At time T1, the left and right number portions 411 start to display in the second operation mode, the left and right first number decoration portions 412 start to display in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second number decoration portions 413 start to display in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 143 (23) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 143 (25) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the sixteenth operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413.

Next, at time T3, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number portions 411, three first number decorative portions 412, and three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode begin. Time T3 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 144 (26) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, and the three second number portions 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (27) starts.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

Next, at time T5, the following operations are started: display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, display of the left and right first character decoration portions 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode, and display of the center first character decoration portion 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 144 (28) starts.
Next, at time T6, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the 16th operation mode, the display of the left and right first character decoration portions 415 in the 37th operation mode, and the display of the center first character decoration portion 415 in the 39th operation mode are completed. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 144 (29) starts.

Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the three number sections 411 display one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decoration sections 412 display one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, the three second number decoration sections 413 display one or more cycles in the 16th operating mode, the left and right first character decoration sections 415 display one or more cycles in the 37th operating mode, and the middle first character decoration section 415 display one or more cycles in the 39th operating mode.
Furthermore, time points T1 to T4 are the third performance situation (see FIG. 299), and time points T5 to T6 are the first performance situation.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number portion 411) showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., first number decorative portion 412) displayed behind the first image, and is capable of displaying the first image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first period (e.g., one of 1 second and 1.9 seconds, etc.), and is capable of displaying the second image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a second period (a period different from the first period of 1 second and 1.9 seconds, etc.) (see Figures 299 and 304).
That is, "capable of displaying the first image in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first cycle" includes "capable of displaying both the first image and the second image in an operating mode that can be repeated in a first cycle," and "capable of displaying the second image in an operating mode that can be repeated in at least a second cycle" includes "capable of displaying both the first image and the second image in an operating mode that can be repeated in a second cycle."

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image (number portion 411) indicating numbers in the performance pattern and a second image (e.g., first number decorative portion 412) displayed behind the first image, and is capable of periodically displaying the first image in at least a first operating mode (e.g., one of the second operating mode and the third operating mode, etc.), and is capable of periodically displaying the second image in at least a second operating mode (e.g., an operating mode different from the first operating mode among the third operating mode and the ninth operating mode) (see Figures 299 and 304).
That is, "capable of periodically displaying the first image in at least the first operating mode" includes "capable of periodically displaying both the first image and the second image in the first operating mode," and "capable of periodically displaying the second image in at least the second operating mode" includes "capable of periodically displaying both the first image and the second image in the second operating mode."

304 does not show the specific mode of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance in the variable performance example 7. Here, in the variable performance example 7, the mode of the temporary stop by the left and right decorative symbols 41 from the start of the performance shown in FIG. 142 (16) until the end of the normal reach performance may be the same as the content shown at time T1 to time T6 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 7, the display of the first transition image 502 (see FIG. 143 (20)) may be started at the timing shown at time T6 in Fig. 302, so that the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily ended. In this case, in the variation performance example 7, from the start of the performance shown in Fig. 142 (16) to the end of the normal reach, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as that shown at time T1 to time T6 in Fig. 302 for the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41.

304 does not show the specific manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start to the end of the SP reach effect in the variation effect example 7. Here, in the variation effect example 7, the manner in which the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped from the start to the end of the SP reach effect may be the same as the contents shown at time points T1 to T3 in FIG.
In addition, in the variation performance example 7, the display of the second role effect image 508 (see FIG. 143 (22)) may be started at the timing shown at time T3 in Fig. 303, thereby temporarily ending the temporary stop of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In this case, the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 from the start to the end of the SP reach performance (the operation mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more or less than one cycle is performed) will be the same as the temporary stop mode of the left and right decorative patterns 41 shown at time T1 to time T3 in Fig. 303.

Furthermore, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 may be able to continue the temporary stopping of the left and right decorative patterns 41 even when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25) etc.).Furthermore, when an SPSP reach effect is executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 may be able to temporarily stop the middle decorative pattern 41 when the middle decorative pattern 41 (the missing decorative pattern 41) starts to be displayed (see Figure 144 (25)).

In the above example, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect is smaller in display size than during the execution of the SP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Also, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same during the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the SPSP reach effect.

(Example of variation 8)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 8 in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the seventh embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the first stage. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 8 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 59, and is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 59. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 39 is the variation presentation shown in FIGS. 139(1) to (6) (the same variation presentation as when "AH5" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern").

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 8 is the same as variable presentation example 13 in the first embodiment, except that in the first presentation situation (see Figure 299), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 297 (1), and in the second to fourth presentation situations, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the decorative manner shown in Figure 297 (3), and the presentation shown in Figure 305-1 is performed.

More specifically, in the variable performance example 8 in the seventh embodiment, the same performances as those shown in Figures 141 (1) to (8), 142 (9) to (16), and 143 (17) to (23) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 305-1 (1), the deciding button operation performance begins and the button operation image 510 is displayed.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decision button operation effect, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the same display size as the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right, as shown in Figure 305-1 (2), and a temporary stop is initiated.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 147 (2) to (8) and Figures 148 (9) and (10) are performed.

Figure 305-2 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 8 of the seventh embodiment.
Figure 305-2 shows the flow of temporary stopping in variation performance example 8.

The temporary stop state of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T1 in Figure 305-2 is the temporary stop state of the left and right decorative patterns 41. At time T1, display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation state, display of the left and right first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation state, and display of the left and right second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation state begin. Time T1 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 143 (23) begins.

The temporary stop state of the decorative pattern 41 shown at time T2 is the temporary stop state of three decorative patterns 41. At time T1, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, and left and right second number sections 413) begin to be displayed in a one-second cycle in the third operation mode. Also, although not shown, at this time, display of the middle number section 411 in the second operation mode, display of the middle first number section 412 in the ninth operation mode, and display of the middle second number section 413 in the sixteenth operation mode begin. Time T2 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 305-1 (2) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T3 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T3, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, and left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode at one-second intervals, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode end. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147(2) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T4 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number sections 412, left and right second number sections 413) are displayed in a 1.9 second cycle in the third operation mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed in the second operation mode, the three first number sections 412 are displayed in the ninth operation mode, and the three second number sections 413 are displayed in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T4 is the time when the performance shown in Figure 147 (5) begins.

The temporary stop mode shown at time T5 is the temporary stop mode of the three decorative patterns 41. At time T5, the display of the entire three decorative patterns 41 (left and right number portions 411, left and right first number decorative portions 412, and left and right second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode at a 1.9 second cycle, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode end. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T4 to time T5, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (left and right number sections 411, left and right first number decorative sections 412, left and right second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

Next, at time T6, the display of the number portion 411 in the tenth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode are started. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 147 (8) starts.
Next, at time T7, the display of the number portion 411 in the tenth operation mode and the display of the first number decoration portion 412 in the fifteenth operation mode end. Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 148 (9) starts.
Here, during the period from time T6 to time T7, the numeral portion 411 displays one or more cycles in the tenth operation mode, and the first numeral decoration portion 412 displays one or more cycles in the fifteenth operation mode.
Furthermore, time T1 is the third performance situation, time T2 to time T5 are the fourth performance situation, and time T6 to time T7 are the seventh performance situation.

In addition, in Variation Presentation Example 8, the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (the operating manner during the temporary stop, whether the temporary stop is for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation until the start of the SPSP reach presentation is the same as in Variation Presentation Example 7. In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 8, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be temporarily stopped in the manner shown at times T1 to T6 in Figure 302 and times T1 to T3 in Figure 303.

(Example of variation 9)
Next, a variation presentation example 9 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. The variation presentation example 9 in the seventh embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage, just like the variation presentation example 9 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 9 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 59, just like the variation presentation example 9 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 9 is the same as that shown in Figures 136 (1) to (4) (variable presentation example 9 in the first embodiment).

Figure 306 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 9 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 306 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 9.
First, at time T1, the display of the left number portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first number decoration portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the left second number decoration portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, and the display of the left first character decoration portion 415 in the thirty-seventh operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 136 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number portion 411, left first number portion 412, left second number portion 413, left character portion 414, left first character portion 415, left second character portion 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number portion 412, middle second number portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character portion 415, middle second character portion 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the middle first number portion 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the middle second number portion 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, and the display of the middle first character portion 415 in the thirty-fifth operating mode begin. Also, although not shown, at this time, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) begins to be displayed in the third operation mode, the right number portion 411 begins to be displayed in the second operation mode, the right first number decorative portion 412 begins to be displayed in the ninth operation mode, the right second number decorative portion 413 begins to be displayed in the sixteenth operation mode, and the right first character decorative portion 415 begins to be displayed in the thirty-ninth operation mode. Time point T2 is the time point at which the effect shown in Figure 136 (3) begins.

Next, at time T3, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) in the third operating mode, the display of the left number section 411 in the second operating mode, the display of the left first number decorative section 412 in the ninth operating mode, the display of the left second number decorative section 413 in the sixteenth operating mode, and the display of the left first character decorative section 415 in the thirty-seventh operating mode are completed. Also, at this time, the display of the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decoration portion 412, middle second number decoration portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decoration portion 415, middle second character decoration portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the middle number portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the middle first number decoration portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the middle second number decoration portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, and the display of the middle first character decoration portion 415 in the thirty-fifth operation mode are completed. Also, although not shown, at this time, the display of the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number portion 411, right first number decorative portion 412, right second number decorative portion 413, right character portion 414, right first character decorative portion 415, right second character decorative portion 416) in the third operation mode, the display of the right number portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the right first number decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, the display of the right second number decorative portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode, and the display of the right first character decorative portion 415 in the thirty-ninth operation mode all end. Time point T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 136 (4) begins.

Here, during the period from time T1 to time T3, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left number section 411, left first number decorative section 412, left second number decorative section 413, left character section 414, left first character decorative section 415, left second character decorative section 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the left number section 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the left first number decorative section 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, the left second number decorative section 413 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, and the left first character decorative section 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 37th operation mode.
In addition, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the entire middle decorative pattern 41 (middle number portion 411, middle first number decoration portion 412, middle second number decoration portion 413, middle character portion 414, middle first character decoration portion 415, middle second character decoration portion 416) is displayed for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the middle number portion 411 is displayed for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the middle first number decoration portion 412 is displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, the middle second number decoration portion 413 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, and the middle first character decoration portion 415 is displayed for one or more cycles in the 35th operation mode.
Also, although not shown in the figure, during the period from the time when the right decorative pattern 41 begins to temporarily stop (time T2) to time T3, the entire right decorative pattern 41 (right number section 411, right first number decorative section 412, right second number decorative section 413, right character section 414, right first character decorative section 415, right second character decorative section 416) displays for one or more cycles in the third operation mode, the right number section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operation mode, the right first number decorative section 412 displays for one or more cycles in the ninth operation mode, the right second number decorative section 413 displays for one or more cycles in the 16th operation mode, and the right first character decorative section 415 displays for one or more cycles in the 39th operation mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T3 corresponds to the first performance situation.

In this embodiment, the manner of temporary stops in the second stage variation presentation is the same as the manner of temporary stops in the first stage variation presentation. In other words, in the second stage variation presentation, the decorative pattern 41 can be temporarily stopped in the manner shown in Variation Presentation Examples 1 to 9.

(Variation example 10)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 10 in the seventh embodiment. The variation presentation example 10 in the seventh embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for winning in the second starting port 122 in the third stage is "1", just like the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 10 in the fourth embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 61, just like the variation presentation example 24 in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 10 is the same as that shown in Figures 177 (1) to (3) (variable presentation example 24 in the first embodiment). That is, in variable presentation example 10 in the seventh embodiment, the three decorative patterns 41 stop definitively without any provisional stops.

In addition, while it has been explained that variation presentation example 10 in the seventh embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 being "1" in the time-shortened play state, this is not limited to this. The same variation presentation as variation presentation example 10 may be executed regardless of the value (any value from "1" to "4") of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state. In other words, in a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state, the three decorative symbols 41 may stop definitively without temporarily stopping, regardless of the reserved number for winning at the second start port 122.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 10)
Next, a modified example of the variation effect example 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the above example, in the scattered miss variation effect based on winning into the second start port 122 in the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 is stopped in a fixed state without being temporarily stopped, but this is not limiting.
In addition, in a modified example of variable performance example 10 in the seventh embodiment, the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable performance example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 179 (1) to (5).

Figure 307 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in a modified example of variable performance example 10 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 306 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in a modified example of variable performance example 10.
First, at time T1, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 179 (4) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decoration portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 179 (5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, none of the three decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped are displayed for more than one cycle.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 is the fifth performance situation.

(Variation example 11)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 11 in the seventh embodiment. The variation presentation example 11 in the seventh embodiment is a random miss variation presentation based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the third stage, just like the variation presentation example 29 in the first embodiment. Also, the variation presentation example 11 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH9" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 61, just like the variation presentation example 29 in the first embodiment.
Also, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the variable presentation example 11 is the same as that shown in Figures 184 (1) to (3) and (5).

Figure 308 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variable performance example 11 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 308 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 11.
First, at time T1, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the left numeral portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first numeral decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 184 (2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral portion 411, left first numeral decorative portion 412, left second numeral decorative portion 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the left numeral portion 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left first numeral decorative portion 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left second numeral decorative portion 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 184 (5) starts.
In this way, in the variation performance example 11, the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 are fixedly stopped without being temporarily stopped. However, in the variation performance example 11, the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped.

In addition, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the entire left decorative pattern 41 (left numeral section 411, left first numeral decorative section 412, left second numeral decorative section 413) displays for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the left numeral section 411 displays for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the left first numeral decorative section 412 displays for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the left second numeral decorative section 413 displays for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 is the fifth performance situation.

As described above, in the first variable performance (for example, a modified example of variable performance example 10) and the second variable performance (for example, variable performance example 11), during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, the performance control unit 300 can make the state of a specific part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 the same (for example, both are the second operation state), and can make the state of a predetermined part (for example, the entire decorative pattern 41) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the specific part different (for example, no temporary stop in the modified example of variable performance example 10, but temporary stop in variable performance example 11 using the third operation state).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop has been made regardless of the variable performance being executed, and to realize a variety of decorative patterns 41 in accordance with the variable performance.

(Variation example 12)
Next, a variation presentation example 12 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. Similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage, and is an example of a miss variation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 30 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 12 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 12 is the same as that shown in Figures 186 and 187 (variable presentation example 30 in the first embodiment), except that a temporary stop is not performed (is limited) until the SPSP reach presentation begins.

Figure 309 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 12 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 309 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 12.
First, at time T1, the left and right number portions 411 start to display in the second operation mode, the left and right first number decoration portions 412 start to display in the ninth operation mode, and the left and right second number decoration portions 413 start to display in the sixteenth operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 186(6) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left and right number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the left and right first number decoration portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the left and right second number decoration portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 186 (8) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the second operating mode of the left and right number sections 411, one or more cycles of display are performed by the ninth operating mode of the left and right first number decoration sections 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the sixteenth operating mode of the left and right second number decoration sections 413.

Next, at time T3, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number sections 412, and three second number sections 413) are displayed in a one-second cycle in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed in the second operating mode, the three first number sections 412 are displayed in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number sections 413 are displayed in the sixteenth operating mode. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 187 (9) begins.

Next, at time T4, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, and the three second number portions 413) in the third operation mode at one-second intervals, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 187 (10) begins.
Here, during the period from time T3 to time T4, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

Next, at time T5, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (three number sections 411, three first number sections 412, and three second number sections 413) are displayed in a 1.9-second cycle in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed in the second operating mode, the three first number sections 412 are displayed in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number sections 413 are displayed in the sixteenth operating mode. Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 187 (11) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number portions 412, and the three second number portions 413) in the third operation mode with a 1.9-second cycle, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 187 (12) begins.
Here, during the period from time T5 to time T6, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T4 corresponds to the sixth performance situation, and the period from time T5 to time T6 corresponds to the fifth performance situation.

(Variation example 13)
Next, a description will be given of a variation presentation example 13 in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the variation presentation example 31 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 13 in the seventh embodiment is an example of a jackpot variation presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 122 in the third stage. Also, similar to the variation presentation example 31 in the first embodiment, the variation presentation example 17 in the seventh embodiment is a variation presentation that is executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61.
Also, in the seventh embodiment, the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in variable presentation example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 189-1 and 189-2 (variable presentation example 31 in the first embodiment), except that a temporary stop is not performed (is restricted) until the SPSP reach presentation begins.

Figure 310 is a chart showing the flow of temporary stopping performed in variation performance example 13 in the seventh embodiment.
Figure 310 shows the flow of temporary stopping of decorative pattern 41 in variable performance example 13.
First, at time T1, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are started. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 189-1(6) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number portions 411, the three first number decorative portions 412, and the three second number decorative portions 413) in the third operation mode, the display of the three number portions 411 in the second operation mode, the display of the three first number decorative portions 412 in the ninth operation mode, and the display of the three second number decorative portions 413 in the sixteenth operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 189-1 (7) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole (the three number sections 411, the three first number decorative sections 412, and the three second number decorative sections 413) are displayed for one or more cycles in the third operating mode, the three number sections 411 are displayed for one or more cycles in the second operating mode, the three first number decorative sections 412 are displayed for one or more cycles in the ninth operating mode, and the three second number decorative sections 413 are displayed for one or more cycles in the sixteenth operating mode.

In addition, in variation presentation example 13, the manner of the temporary stop (operational manner during the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle) from the start of the variation presentation to the end of the SPSP reach presentation is the same as the manner of the temporary stop from the start of the variation presentation to the end of the SPSP reach presentation in variation presentation example 12 (see time points T1 to T6 in FIG. 309). In addition, in variation presentation example 13, the manner of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of a jackpot game (operational manner during the temporary stop, whether a temporary stop of one cycle or more is performed or a temporary stop of less than one cycle) is the same as the manner of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of a jackpot game in variation presentation example 8 (see time points T6 to T7 in FIG. 305-2).

In the seventh embodiment, during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the operation display may be executed in a manner corresponding to the stage being controlled.
For example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first and second stages, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational manner that can be executed in the "first performance situation" of FIG. 299.
Also, for example, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in an operational state that can be executed in the "fifth performance situation" of FIG.
Furthermore, even when the customer waiting performance is being performed on any stage, the operation display of the number section 411 may not be performed (may be limited).

In the above example, it has been explained that the number portion 411 and the first number decoration portion 412 are temporarily stopped while the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 are not temporarily stopped during the execution of a jackpot game, but this is not limiting. During the execution of a jackpot game, the second number decoration portion 413 to the fourth number decoration portion 418, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416 may also be temporarily stopped.
In addition, when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (any number from 1 to 9) is lined up is executed in the first stage, and when a jackpot variation effect in which a specific number (the same number as the specific number in the first stage) is lined up is executed in the second stage, the operating mode and period of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 (number section 411, first number decoration section 412 to fourth number decoration section 418, character section 414, first character decoration section 415, second character decoration section 416) during the execution of the jackpot game are the same.

In addition, in the above example, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game does not have the second number decorative portion 413, but this is not limited to this.
The decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided with a second number decorative portion 413. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed during the execution of a jackpot game may have the same decorative form as the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of an SP reach in the normal game state, during the execution of an SPSP reach in the normal game state, and in the time-saving game state.

(Characteristic configuration common to the first to seventh embodiments)
In the above-mentioned examples, it has been explained that in a scattered miss variation effect in which a reach stimulation effect is not executed, the operation display of a specific part of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 (for example, the second character decorative part 416) may not be performed for more than one cycle (see Figures 122, 123, etc.), and that in a scattered miss variation effect in which a reach stimulation effect is executed, the operation display of a specific part of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 may be performed for more than one cycle (see Figures 134, 135, etc.).
Here, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier to display the operation of a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern for one or more cycles when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach stimulation presentation is executed is executed in a specific presentation mode than when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach stimulation presentation is not executed is executed.
In this case, even if a scattered miss variable effect is executed, the player can be made to expect that a series of effects of a specific section will be performed in the variable effect in which a reach stimulation effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
The specific presentation mode may be the first stage, the second stage, or the third stage. The specific portion may be the number portion 411. The specific portion may be the first number decoration portion 412 or the second number decoration portion 413. The specific portion may be the character portion 414. The specific portion may be the first character decoration portion 415 or the second character decoration portion 416. The specific portion may be the entire decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed, it is more likely that the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will display an operation for one or more cycles than when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed, including the fact that when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed in a specific presentation mode, the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will not display an operation for one or more cycles (0%), and that when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed in a specific presentation mode, the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will always display an operation for one or more cycles (100%).
Furthermore, if, in a specific presentation mode, it is more likely that the operation display of a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will be one cycle or more when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed than when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is not executed is executed, then it may be possible that the operation display of a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will be one cycle or more even when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is not executed is executed in a specific presentation mode, and it may be possible that the operation display of a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will not be one cycle or more even when a random miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the presentation control unit 300 may be configured to make it easier for a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern to be displayed in operation for one or more cycles when a scattered miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed in the second presentation mode (e.g., the second stage or the third stage) than when a scattered miss variation presentation in which a reach encouraging presentation is executed is executed in the first presentation mode (e.g., the first stage).
In this case, the way in which expectations are raised for a series of specific section effects to be performed in the variable effects in which the reach stimulation effects are executed can be varied depending on the stage, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The specific part may be the first numeral decoration part 412 or the second numeral decoration part 413. The specific part may be the character part 414. The specific part may be the first character decoration part 415 or the second character decoration part 416. The specific part may be the entire decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the fact that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is more likely to display one or more cycles of operation when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed is executed in the second performance mode than when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed in the first performance mode includes the fact that when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed is executed in the first performance mode, the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will not display one or more cycles of operation (0%), and when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed in the second performance mode, the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will always display one or more cycles of operation (100%).
Furthermore, if it is easier for the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern to display one or more cycles of operation when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed is executed in the second performance mode than when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed in the first performance mode, then it is possible that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will not display one or more cycles of operation even when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed is executed in the first performance mode, and it is also possible that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will not display one or more cycles of operation even when a random miss variation effect in which a reach encouraging performance is executed in the second performance mode.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for the specific part of the (stopped) performance symbol to display one or more cycles of motion when a random miss variation effect in which a reach stimulation effect is executed is executed in the first performance mode than when a random miss variation effect in which a reach stimulation effect is executed in the second performance mode. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for the specific part of the (stopped) performance symbol to display one or more cycles of motion when a random miss variation effect in which a reach stimulation effect is executed is executed in the first performance mode and when a random miss variation effect in which a reach stimulation effect is executed in the second performance mode.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that in the first stage, in the scattered miss variation performance based on the reserved number being "1", the movement display of a specific part of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 may be performed for more than one cycle (see Figures 118, 119, etc.), and in the third stage, in the scattered miss variation performance based on the reserved number being "1", the movement display of a specific part of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 may not be performed for more than one cycle (see Figure 177).
Here, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the performance control unit 300 may make it easier to display the operation of a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern for one or more cycles when a random miss variation performance is executed based on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121) being a specific number in the second performance mode (first stage) than when a random miss variation performance is executed based on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 in the second stage, and the number of reserved balls for the second start port 122 in the third stage) being a specific number in the first performance mode (second stage, third stage).
In this case, depending on the stage, the way in which expectations are raised for a series of specific part presentations to be performed in the scattered miss variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls being a specific number can be varied, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
The specific number may be 1, 2, 3, or 4. An example of the specific portion is the numeral portion 411. The specific portion may be the first numeral decorative portion 412 or the second numeral decorative portion 413. The specific portion may be the entire decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the fact that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is more likely to display movement for one cycle or more when a random miss variation effect based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode than when a random miss variation effect based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode includes the fact that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will not display movement for one cycle or more (0%) when a random miss variation effect based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode, and the fact that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will always display movement for one cycle or more (100%) when a random miss variation effect based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode.
Furthermore, if it is easier for the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern to display its operation for one cycle or more when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode than when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode, then it is possible that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will display its operation for one cycle or more even when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode, and it is also possible that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will not display its operation for one cycle or more even when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that in the first stage, a specific part of the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped in a random miss variable performance based on the reserved number being "1" (see Figures 118, 119, etc.), and that in the third stage, a specific part of the decorative pattern 41 may not be temporarily stopped in a random miss variable performance based on the reserved number being "1" (see Figure 177).
Here, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier to temporarily stop a specific part of the presentation pattern when a random miss variation presentation is executed in the second presentation mode (first stage) based on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 121) being a specific number, than when a random miss variation presentation is executed in the first presentation mode (second stage, third stage) based on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 121 in the second stage, and the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 122 in the third stage).
In this case, depending on the stage, the expectation for the specific part to be displayed in operation in the scattered miss variable presentation based on the reserved number being a specific number can be made different, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
The specific number may be 1, 2, 3, or 4. An example of the specific portion is the numeral portion 411. The specific portion may be the first numeral decorative portion 412 or the second numeral decorative portion 413. The specific portion may be the entire decorative pattern 41.

In addition, the fact that a specific part of the performance pattern is more likely to be temporarily stopped when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode than when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode includes the fact that a specific part of the performance pattern will not be temporarily stopped (0%) when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode, and the fact that a specific part of the performance pattern will always be temporarily stopped (100%) when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode.
Furthermore, if a temporary stop of a specific part of the performance pattern is more likely to occur when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode than when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode, then a temporary stop of a specific part of the performance pattern may occur even when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the first performance mode, and a temporary stop of a specific part of the performance pattern may not occur even when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a specific number is executed in the second performance mode.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that in a random miss variation effect based on the number of reserved symbols being 1 in the first stage, the specific part of the (stopped) decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in motion for more than one cycle (see Figures 118 and 119), and that in a random miss variation effect based on the number of reserved symbols being 3 in the first stage, the specific part of the (stopped) decorative symbol 41 may not be displayed in motion for more than one cycle (see Figures 122 and 123).
Here, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier to display the operation of one or more cycles of the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern when, in a specific presentation mode, a random miss variable presentation is executed based on the reserved number being a second specific number that is less than the first specific number, than when a random miss variable presentation is executed based on the reserved number being a first specific number.
In this case, the expectation for a series of specific part presentations to be performed in the scattered miss variable presentation can be varied depending on the number of reserved balls, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
The specific presentation mode may be the first stage, the second stage, or the third stage. The first specific number may be 2, 3, or 4. The second specific number may be any value that is smaller than the first specific number. An example of the specific portion is the number portion 411. The specific portion may be the first number decorative portion 412 or the second number decorative portion 413. The specific portion may be the entire decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the fact that the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern is more likely to display one or more cycles of operation when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a second specific number less than the first specific number is executed than when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a first specific number includes the fact that when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a first specific number is executed in a specific presentation mode, the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will not display one or more cycles of operation (0%), and the fact that when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a second specific number less than the first specific number is executed in a specific presentation mode, the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will always display one or more cycles of operation (100%).
Furthermore, if, in a specific presentation mode, it is more likely that the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will display one or more cycles of operation when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a second specific number that is less than the first specific number is executed than when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a first specific number is executed, then it may be that the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will display one or more cycles of operation even when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a first specific number is executed in a specific presentation mode, or it may be that the specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern will not display one or more cycles of operation even when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a second specific number that is less than the first specific number is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier to temporarily stop a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern in a specific presentation mode when a random miss variable presentation is executed based on the reserved number being a second specific number that is less than the first specific number, than when a random miss variable presentation is executed based on the reserved number being a first specific number.
In this case, the expectation of a specific part being displayed in motion during the scattered miss variable presentation can be varied depending on the number of reserved balls, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The specific presentation mode may be the first stage, the second stage, or the third stage. The first specific number may be 2, 3, or 4. The second specific number may be any value that is smaller than the first specific number. An example of the specific portion is the number portion 411. The specific portion may be the first number decorative portion 412 or the second number decorative portion 413. The specific portion may be the entire decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the fact that a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern is more likely to be temporarily stopped when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a second specific number less than the first specific number is executed than when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a first specific number includes the fact that a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern is not temporarily stopped (0%) when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a first specific number is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a specific part of the (stopped) presentation pattern is always temporarily stopped (100%) when a random miss variation presentation based on the reserved number being a second specific number less than the first specific number is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, if a temporary stop of a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is more likely to occur when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a second specific number less than the first specific number is executed in a specific performance mode than when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a first specific number is executed, then a temporary stop of a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern may occur even when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a first specific number is executed in a specific performance mode, or a temporary stop of a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern may not occur even when a random miss variation performance based on the reserved number being a second specific number less than the first specific number is executed in a specific performance mode.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that in the first stage, a specific part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 (which has been stopped) may be displayed in motion for one or more cycles before the start of the reach performance (see Figures 127, 129, etc.).
Here, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the presentation control unit 300 may be configured so that it is easier for the specific part of the presentation pattern (which has been stopped) to display one or more cycles of operation before the start of a specific presentation when a variable presentation in which a specific presentation is executed is performed in the second presentation mode (first stage) than when a variable presentation in which a specific presentation is executed is performed in the first presentation mode (second stage, third stage).
In this case, whether or not the player is made to expect a series of specific section presentations to be performed even before the specific presentation starts can be varied depending on the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
An example of the specific effect is a reach effect. The specific effect may also be an SP reach effect. The specific effect may also be an SPSP reach effect. The specific effect may also be a role object effect. The specific effect may also be a button operation effect. An example of the specific part is the number part 411. The specific part may also be a first number decoration part 412 or a second number decoration part 413. The specific part may also be a character part 414. The specific part may also be a first character decoration part 415 or a second character decoration part 416. The specific part may also be the entire decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, the fact that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is more likely to display one or more cycles of movement before the start of a specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode than when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the first performance mode includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the first performance mode, the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will never display one or more cycles of movement before the start of the specific performance (0%), and that when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode, the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will always display one or more cycles of movement before the start of the specific performance (100%). Furthermore, if it is more likely that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will display one or more cycles of movement before the start of a specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode than when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in the first performance mode, then even when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the first performance mode, it is possible that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will display one or more cycles of movement before the start of the specific performance, and even when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode, it is possible that the specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern will not display one or more cycles of movement before the start of the specific performance.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that in the first stage, a specific part of the decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number part 411) may be temporarily stopped before the start of the reach performance (see Figures 127, 129, etc.).
Here, in any of the first to seventh embodiments, the performance control unit 300 may be configured to make it easier to temporarily stop the specific part of the performance pattern (that has been stopped) before the start of the specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode (first stage) than when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the first performance mode (second stage, third stage).
In this case, whether or not the player is made to expect that the specific part will be temporarily stopped even before the specific presentation starts can be varied depending on the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
An example of the specific effect is a reach effect. The specific effect may also be an SP reach effect. The specific effect may also be an SPSP reach effect. The specific effect may also be a role object effect. The specific effect may also be a button operation effect. An example of the specific part is the number part 411. The specific part may also be a first number decoration part 412 or a second number decoration part 413. The specific part may also be a character part 414. The specific part may also be a first character decoration part 415 or a second character decoration part 416. The specific part may also be the entire decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is more likely to be temporarily stopped before the start of a specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode than when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the first performance mode includes the fact that a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is not temporarily stopped before the start of the specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the first performance mode (0%), and that a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern is always temporarily stopped before the start of the specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed is performed in the second performance mode (100%). Furthermore, if it is easier for a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern to be temporarily stopped before the start of a specific performance when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in the second performance mode is performed than when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in the first performance mode, then even when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in the first performance mode, it is acceptable for a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern to be temporarily stopped before the start of the specific performance, and even when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in the second performance mode, it is acceptable for a specific part of the (stopped) performance pattern to not be temporarily stopped before the start of the specific performance.

(Variation 1 of the display of the decorative pattern 41 while waiting for customers)
Next, a modified example of the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance will be described.
Figures 193 and 194 show the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed while the customer waiting effect is being executed, but the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed while the customer waiting effect is being executed is not limited to the example described above.
311 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the manner of displaying the operation of the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting performance. FIG. 311 shows the relationship between the manner of displaying the operation performed during the customer waiting performance in the first stage and the manner of displaying the operation performed during the customer waiting performance in the third stage.

First, the manner of the action display performed during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage will be described.
In the first stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 311 (A-1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 both show "0".

Then, when the time period mentioned above (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern stopped display began without the game ball entering either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the pachinko game machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and as shown in Figure 311 (A-2), the customer waiting performance begins, and the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display movement.
Next, after the customer waiting performance has started, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed during which no game ball has entered either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the decorative pattern 41 will cease to display motion and will become stationary, as shown in Figure 311 (A-3).

Here, it is assumed that the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state. When the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state, if a specific time (e.g., 5 seconds after the decorative pattern 41 becomes stationary) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting presentation, and a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the display of the next special pattern begins to change. However, because the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state at this time, the change start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 remains stationary, as shown in FIG. 311 (A-4).

Next, the manner of the action display performed during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage will be described.
In the third stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the less decorative decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 311 (B-1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 both show "0".

Then, when the time period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the special pattern has started to be displayed and no game ball has entered either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the pachinko game machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and as shown in Figure 311 (B-2), the customer waiting performance begins and the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display in motion.
Next, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting performance began without a game ball entering either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the decorative pattern 41 will cease to display motion and will become stationary, as shown in Figure 311 (B-3).

Here, it is assumed that the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state. When the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state, if a specific time (e.g., 5 seconds after the decorative pattern 41 comes to a standstill) has elapsed since the customer waiting presentation began and a gaming ball enters the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122, the display of the next special pattern begins to change. However, because the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state at this time, the change start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 displays movement, as shown in Figure 311 (B-4).

As described above, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed in motion if the change start command is not received by the performance control unit 300. On the other hand, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion if the change start command is not received by the performance control unit 300.
That is, the performance control unit 300 can display a first element (for example, the number part 411) in the performance pattern and a second element different from the first element (for example, an element different from the number part 411 of the decorative pattern 41), and when a predetermined time has elapsed since a specific performance (for example, a customer waiting performance) was started in the first performance mode (for example, the first stage) (when the time-up time and the predetermined time have elapsed since the previous variable performance ended), if the performance control unit 300 does not receive a variable start command, the second element (for example, the first number decoration It is possible to restrict the display of the operation of the second element (e.g., first number decoration part 412, second number decoration part 413, character part 414, first character decoration part 415, second character decoration part 416), and when a predetermined time has elapsed since a specific performance (e.g., customer waiting performance) was started in the second performance mode (e.g., the third stage) (when the time-up time and a predetermined time have elapsed since the previous performance ended), the display of the operation of the second element (e.g., first number decoration part 412, second number decoration part 413) can be executed.
In this case, the degree of emphasis of the second element when the variation start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 can be varied depending on the presentation mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a connection means (such as another connector) other than the connector 200C as a connection means for connecting the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B. In this case, even if an event occurs in which the connector 200C becomes detached from the game control board 200B or the presentation control board 300B, the presentation control unit 300 will receive a signal transmitted from the game control unit 200 via the other connection means. The game control unit 200 may also transmit a specific signal via the other connection means when transmitting a fluctuation start command via the connector 200C. If the presentation control unit 300 receives the specific signal without receiving the fluctuation start command, it can determine that the fluctuation start command transmitted by the game control unit 200 was not received. This may realize a configuration in which, during the execution of the customer waiting presentation in the third stage, if the fluctuation start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion.

(Modification 2 of operation display while waiting for customers)
312 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the manner of displaying the operation of the decorative pattern 41 during the customer waiting effect. FIG. 312 shows the relationship between the manner of displaying the operation performed during the execution of the customer waiting effect in the first stage and the manner of displaying the operation performed during the execution of the customer waiting effect in the third stage.

First, the manner of the action display performed during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage will be described.
In the first stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 312 (A-1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 both show "0".

Then, when the time period mentioned above (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern stopped display began without the game ball entering either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the pachinko game machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and as shown in Figure 312 (A-2), the customer waiting performance begins, and the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display movement.
Next, after the customer waiting performance has started, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed during which no game ball has entered either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the decorative pattern 41 will cease to display motion and become stationary, as shown in Figure 312 (A-3).

Here, it is assumed that the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state. When the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state, if a specific time (e.g., 5 seconds after the decorative pattern 41 becomes stationary) has elapsed since the customer waiting presentation began and a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, the display of the next special pattern begins to change. However, because the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state at this time, the change start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 remains stationary, as shown in FIG. 312 (A-4).

Next, the manner of the action display performed during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage will be described.
In the third stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the less decorative decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 312 (B-1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 both show "0".

Then, when the aforementioned time-up time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol began to be displayed and no game ball has entered either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and as shown in Figure 312 (B-2), the customer waiting performance begins, and the three decorative symbols 41 begin to display in motion.

Next, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting effect began without a game ball entering either the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122, the decorative pattern 41 will continue to be displayed in motion, as shown in Figure 312 (B-3).

Here, it is assumed that the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state. When the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state, if a specific time (e.g., 5 seconds after the decorative pattern 41 comes to a standstill) has elapsed since the customer waiting presentation began and a gaming ball enters the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122, the display of the next special pattern begins to change. However, because the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state at this time, the change start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 continues to display movement, as shown in FIG. 311 (B-4).

In this way, in the third stage, the operation display may not be restricted even if a predetermined time has passed since the customer waiting performance began.
In addition, in the third stage, after a specific time has elapsed since the customer waiting effect began (after the decorative pattern 41 begins to be displayed in motion while the customer waiting effect is being executed), the decorative pattern 41 may continue to be displayed in motion until the variable effect begins when a game ball enters either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, regardless of the length of time that has elapsed.

Figure 313 is a chart showing the flow of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 performed in the customer waiting performance shown in Figure 312.
Fig. 313(1) shows the flow of the operation display performed during the execution of the customer waiting effect in the first stage, and Fig. 313(2) shows the flow of the operation display performed during the execution of the customer waiting effect in the third stage.
First, as shown in Fig. 313(1), at time T1, the following operations are started: display of the left first numeral decoration section 412 in the 10th operation mode, display of the left second numeral decoration section 413 in the 17th operation mode, display of the left character section 414 in the 28th operation mode, display of the left first character decoration section 415 in the 38th operation mode, and display of the left second character decoration section 416 in the 43rd operation mode. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Fig. 312(A-2) starts.

Next, at time T2, the display of the left first numeral decoration portion 412 in the 10th operation mode, the display of the left second numeral decoration portion 413 in the 17th operation mode, the display of the left character portion 414 in the 28th operation mode, the display of the left first character decoration portion 415 in the 38th operation mode, and the display of the left second character decoration portion 416 in the 43rd operation mode are completed. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 312 (A-3) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1 to time T2, one or more cycles of display are performed by the 10th operating mode of the left first number decoration unit 412, one or more cycles of display by the 17th operating mode of the left second number decoration unit 413, one or more cycles of display by the 28th operating mode of the left character unit 414, one or more cycles of display by the 38th operating mode of the left first character decoration unit 415, and one or more cycles of display by the 43rd operating mode of the left second character decoration unit 416.

Next, at time T3, the state in which the display of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted continues. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 312 (A-4) begins.

Also, as shown in Figure 313 (2), at time T1', the display of the left first numeral decoration part 412 in the 13th operating mode and the display of the left second numeral decoration part 413 in the 20th operating mode begin. Time T1' is the time when the performance shown in Figure 312 (B-2) begins.

Next, at time T2', the display of the left first numeral decoration part 412 in the 13th operation mode and the display of the left second numeral decoration part 413 in the 20th operation mode are continued. Time T2' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 312 (B-3) starts.
Here, during the period from time T1' to time T2', one or more cycles of display are performed by the 13th operating mode of the left first number decoration part 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 20th operating mode of the left second number decoration part 413.

Next, at time T3', the display of the decorative pattern 41 continues. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 312 (B-4) starts.
Furthermore, the period from time T1 to time T2 shown in FIG. 313(1) and the period from time T1' to time T2' shown in FIG. 313(2) are the same length of time.
Furthermore, the period from time T2 to time T3 shown in Fig. 313(1) and the period from time T2' to time T3' shown in Fig. 313(2) are the same length of time. In other words, the period from time T1 to time T3 shown in Fig. 313(1) and the period from time T1' to time T3' shown in Fig. 313(2) are the same length of time.

As described above, during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, the operational display of the started decorative pattern 41 is restricted, and during the execution of the customer waiting performance in the third stage, the operational display of the started decorative pattern 41 is continued. More specifically, the performance control unit 300 can restrict the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting performance in the first stage, and can continue the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting performance in the third stage. In other words, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in the performance pattern (e.g., the number portion 411) and a second element different from the first element (e.g., an element different from the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41), and is capable of restricting the display of the operation of the second element (e.g., the first number decoration portion 412, the second number decoration portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, the second character decoration portion 416) when a predetermined time has elapsed since a specific performance (e.g., a customer waiting performance) started in the first performance mode (e.g., the first stage) (when the time-up time and the predetermined time have elapsed since the previous variable performance ended), and is capable of continuing the display of the operation of the second element (e.g., the first number decoration portion 412, the second number decoration portion 413) when a predetermined time has elapsed since a specific performance (e.g., a customer waiting performance) started in the second performance mode (e.g., the third stage) (when the time-up time and the predetermined time have elapsed since the previous variable performance ended).
In this case, the degree of emphasis on the second element can be varied depending on the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when the operation display shown in Figure 311 is performed as the operation display during the execution of the customer waiting performance of the third stage, at the time T1' shown in Figure 313 (2), display in the 13th operation mode of the left first number decoration part 412 and display in the 20th operation mode of the left second number decoration part 413 begin.
Next, at time T2' shown in Figure 313 (2), the display by the 13th operation mode of the left first numeral decoration part 412 and the display by the 20th operation mode of the left second numeral decoration part 413 end.
Here, during the period from time T1' to time T2', one or more cycles of display are performed by the 13th operating mode of the left first number decoration part 412, and one or more cycles of display are performed by the 20th operating mode of the left second number decoration part 413.

Next, at time T3' shown in Figure 313 (2), display of the left first numeral decoration part 412 using the 13th operating mode and display of the left second numeral decoration part 413 using the 20th operating mode begin again.

In addition, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the first embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation in Figure 204, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the eighth performance situation in Figure 204, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the second embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation in Figure 207, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the seventh performance situation in Figure 207, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the third embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation of Figure 223, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the fourth performance situation of Figure 223, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the fourth embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation of Figure 245, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the fifth performance situation of Figure 245, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the fifth embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation of Figure 263, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the sixth performance situation of Figure 263, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the sixth embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation of Figure 283, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the sixth performance situation of Figure 283, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, when the performance shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the seventh embodiment, the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the first stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the first performance situation of Figure 299, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted, and the manner of operation display during the customer waiting performance in the third stage may be the same as the manner of operation display in the fifth performance situation of Figure 299, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the presentation shown in Figures 311 and 312 is performed using the first to seventh embodiments, each action display performed during the customer waiting presentation may be performed for more than one cycle, as shown in Figure 313.

(Operation display after non-clear recovery)
Next, the manner of operation display after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored without clearing the RAM will be described.
Figure 314 is a diagram showing the state of the display of the decorative pattern 41 after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored without clearing the RAM.
In addition, hereinafter, the return of power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 without clearing the RAM after it has been cut off may be referred to as a non-clear return.

First, in the first stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the highly decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and displayed, as shown in Figure 314 (1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and "0" is displayed in both the reserved number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting gate 122.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 goes out as shown in FIG. 314 (2).
Next, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on without executing the RAM clear. That is, a non-clear recovery is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 314 (3), a recovery in progress image 524 is displayed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the decorative pattern 41, the number of reserved games display 55, the small pattern 56 and the stage image 61 are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 314 (4).
Next, after the pachinko game machine 100 has returned to a non-clear state and a first specific time has elapsed since the display of the decorative pattern 41 began, the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display in motion in the customer waiting performance, as shown in Figure 314 (5).
Next, when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 began to display motion, the motion display of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted in the customer waiting performance, as shown in FIG. 314 (6).

(Operation display after clear recovery)
Next, the manner of operation display after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then returned with RAM cleared will be described.
Figure 315 is a diagram showing the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored with the RAM cleared.
In addition, the return of power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 after it has been shut off and accompanied by RAM clearing may be referred to as a clear return below.

First, in the first stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the highly decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and displayed, as shown in Figure 315 (1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and "0" is displayed in both the reserved number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting gate 122.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 goes out as shown in FIG. 315 (2).
Next, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on with the RAM clear switch in the ON state (RAM clearing is performed). In other words, a clear reset is performed. In this case, an initialization in progress image 525 is displayed as shown in FIG. 315 (3).

Next, when the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is completed, the decorative pattern 41, the number of reserved symbols 55, the small symbols 56 and the stage image 61 are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 315 (4).
Next, after the pachinko game machine 100 has returned to a clear state and a second specific time has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 began to be displayed, the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display in motion in the customer waiting performance, as shown in Figure 315 (5).
Next, when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 began to display motion, the motion display of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted in the customer waiting performance, as shown in FIG. 315 (6).

(Operation display after fluctuation stops)
Next, the manner of operation display after the decorative pattern 41 stops changing (after the change performance ends) will be explained.
Figure 316 is a diagram showing the manner of operation display after the decorative pattern 41 stops changing (after the change performance ends).

First, in the first stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the highly decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and displayed, as shown in Figure 316 (1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and "0" is displayed in both the reserved number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting gate 122.

Next, when a third specific time has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed (the variable performance has ended), the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display movement in the customer waiting performance, as shown in Figure 316 (2).
Next, when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 began to display motion, the motion display of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted in the customer waiting performance, as shown in FIG. 316 (3).

(Operation display after the demo performance ends)
Next, the manner of operation display after the demo screen 523 is hidden will be described.
Figure 317 is a diagram showing the manner in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed after the demo screen 523 is no longer displayed.
In the following, the effect of displaying the demo screen 523 may be referred to as the demo effect.

First, in the first stage, when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed, the highly decorative symbol 41 "314" is fixed and displayed, as shown in Figure 317 (1). At this time, the reserved image 52 is not displayed, and "0" is displayed in both the reserved number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting gate 122.

Next, if a period of time passes (for example, 40 seconds pass) after the special symbol stops and no game balls enter either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, a demo screen 523 is displayed (the demo performance begins) in the customer waiting performance, as shown in Figure 317 (2). Furthermore, as the demo screen 523 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 becomes difficult or impossible to see.

Next, when the demo performance ends, as shown in Figure 317 (3), in the customer waiting performance, the demo screen 523 is hidden and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed again.
Next, after the demo performance ends and a fourth specific time has elapsed since the display of the decorative pattern 41 began, the three decorative patterns 41 begin to display in motion in the customer waiting performance, as shown in Figure 317 (4).
Next, when a fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative pattern 41 began to display motion, the motion display of the decorative pattern 41 is restricted in the customer waiting performance, as shown in FIG. 317 (5).

Figure 318 is a chart showing the flow of the decorative pattern 41 in the performance shown in Figures 314 to 317.
Fig. 318(1) shows the flow of the decorative pattern 41 after the non-clear return shown in Fig. 314. Fig. 318(2) shows the flow of the decorative pattern 41 after the clear return shown in Fig. 315. Fig. 318(3) shows the flow of the decorative pattern 41 after the change of the decorative pattern 41 stops (the change effect ends) shown in Fig. 316. Fig. 318(4) shows the flow of the decorative pattern 41 after the demo effect ends.

First, as shown in Fig. 318(1), at time T1, the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Fig. 314(4) begins.
Next, at time T2, the display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 314(5) begins.
Here, the time from time T1 to time T2, that is, the time from when the decorative pattern 41 starts to be displayed (stopped, still) until the moving display starts in the case of a non-clear return, is the first specific time Ti1.

Next, at time T3, the display of the decorative symbols 41 ends. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 314(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T2 to time T3, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion for one or more cycles.
The time from time T2 to time T3, that is, the time from the start to the end of the temporary stop in the case of non-clear return, is the first predetermined time Tp1.
In addition, the time from time T1 to time T3 (the time from when the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to when the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 ends in the case of a non-clear return), i.e., the total time of the first specific time Ti1 and the first predetermined time Tp1, is the first total time Tt1.

318(2), at time T11, the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T11 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 315(4) begins.
Next, at time T12, the display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T12 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 315(5) begins.
Here, the time from time T11 to time T12, that is, the time from when the decorative pattern 41 starts to be displayed (stopped, still) to when the decorative pattern 41 starts to be displayed in motion in the case of a clear return, is the second specific time Ti2.

Next, at time T13, the display of the decorative symbols 41 ends. Time T13 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 315(6) starts.
Here, during the period from time T12 to time T13, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion for one or more cycles.
Furthermore, the time from time T12 to time T13, that is, the time from when the display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to when it ends in the case of a clear return, is the second predetermined time Tp2.
In addition, the time from time T11 to time T13 (the time from when the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to when the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 ends in the case of a clear return), i.e., the total time of the second specific time Ti2 and the second predetermined time Tp2, is the second total time Tt2.

318(3), at time T21, the display of the decorative pattern 41 (stopped, still), i.e., the stopping (fixed stopping) of the change of the decorative pattern 41, begins (the change effect ends). Time T21 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 316(1) begins.
Next, at time T22, the display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T22 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 316(2) begins.
Here, the time from time T21 to time T22, that is, the time from when the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to when the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 starts in the case of a clear return, is the third specific time Ti3.

Next, at time T23, the display of the decorative pattern 41 ends. Time T23 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 316(3) starts.
Here, during the period from time T22 to time T23, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion for one or more cycles.
Furthermore, the time from time T22 to time T23, that is, the time from when the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to when it ends in the case of a clear return, is the third predetermined time Tp3.
In addition, the time from time T21 to time T23 (the time from when the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 starts to when the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 ends in the case of a clear return), i.e., the total time of the third specific time Ti3 and the third predetermined time Tp3, is the third total time Tt3.

318(4), at time T31, the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T31 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 317(3) begins.
Next, at time T32, the display of the decorative pattern 41 begins. Time T32 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 317(4) begins.
Here, the time from time T31 to time T32, that is, the time from when the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 begins until the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 begins when the demo performance ends, is the fourth specific time Ti4.

Next, at time T33, the display of the decorative symbols 41 ends. Time T33 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 317(5) starts.
Here, during the period from time T32 to time T33, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion for one or more cycles.
Furthermore, the time from time T32 to time T33, that is, the time from when the display of the decorative pattern 41 begins to when it ends when the demo performance ends, is the fourth predetermined time Tp4.
In addition, the time from time T31 to time T33 (the time from when the (stopped, still) display of the decorative pattern 41 begins to when the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 ends when the demo performance ends), i.e., the total time of the fourth specific time Ti4 and the fourth predetermined time Tp4, is the fourth total time Tt4.

The first specific time Ti1 is longer than the fourth specific time Ti4. The first specific time Ti1 and the second specific time Ti2 are the same length of time. The third specific time Ti3 is longer than the first specific time Ti1 (second specific time Ti2).
Furthermore, the second predetermined time Tp2 is longer than the first predetermined time Tp1, the fourth predetermined time Tp4 is longer than the second predetermined time Tp2, and the third predetermined time Tp3 is longer than the fourth predetermined time Tp4.
Furthermore, the second total time Tt2 is longer than the first total time Tt1, the fourth total time Tt4 is longer than the second total time Tt2, and the third total time Tt3 is longer than the fourth total time Tt4.

In addition, the operation mode and operation display cycle of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the operation mode and cycle corresponding to the first to seventh embodiments.
For example, in the first embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 204, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 207, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
In addition, in the third embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 223, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 245, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 263, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 283, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 314 to 318 may be the same as the operation mode and period of the operation display of the decorative pattern 41 in the first performance situation of Figure 299, except that the operation display of the number section 411 is restricted.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the effects shown in Figures 314 to 317 are performed using the first to seventh embodiments, each operation display of the decorative pattern 41 may be performed for more than one cycle, as shown in Figure 318.

Furthermore, the relationship between the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4 is not limited to the example described above.
The first specific time Ti1 and the second specific time Ti2 may be different times. Furthermore, the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4 may all be different times.
Furthermore, among the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4, only the first specific time Ti1 may be a time that is different from the other specific times (the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4).
Furthermore, among the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4, only the second specific time Ti2 may be a time that is different from the other specific times (the first specific time Ti1, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4).
Furthermore, among the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4, only the third specific time Ti3 may be a time that is different from the other specific times (the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, and the fourth specific time Ti4).
Furthermore, among the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4, only the fourth specific time Ti4 may be a time that is different from the other specific times (the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, and the third specific time Ti3).

Furthermore, the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, and the third specific time Ti3 may be longer than 0 seconds, whereas the fourth specific time Ti4 may be 0 seconds. In other words, when the demo effect ends, the display of the decorative pattern 41 may start simultaneously with the start of display of the decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, the third specific time Ti3, and the fourth specific time Ti4 may all be 0 seconds. That is, when a non-clear return is performed, when a clear return is performed, when the variation of the decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the demo effect ends, the display of the decorative pattern 41 (stopped or still) may start simultaneously with the start of the display of the decorative pattern 41. In this case, the length relationships among the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4 are the same as the length relationships among the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4.
Alternatively, the first specific time Ti1, the second specific time Ti2, and the fourth specific time Ti4 may all be 0 seconds, while the third specific time Ti3 may be longer than 0 seconds.

Furthermore, the relationship between the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4 is not limited to the example described above.
The first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4 may all be different times, and the length relationship may be reversed from that shown in the example.
Furthermore, the first predetermined time Tp1 may be the same as the second predetermined time Tp2, but may be different from both the third predetermined time Tp3 and the fourth predetermined time Tp4.
Furthermore, among the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4, only the first predetermined time Tp1 may be a time that is different from the other predetermined times (the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4).
Furthermore, among the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4, only the second predetermined time Tp2 may be a time that is different from the other predetermined times (the first predetermined time Tp1, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4).
Furthermore, among the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4, only the third predetermined time Tp3 may be a time that is different from the other predetermined times (the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4).
Furthermore, among the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, the third predetermined time Tp3, and the fourth predetermined time Tp4, only the fourth predetermined time Tp4 may be a time that is different from the other predetermined times (the first predetermined time Tp1, the second predetermined time Tp2, and the third predetermined time Tp3).

Furthermore, the relationship between the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4 is not limited to the example described above.
The first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4 may all be different times, and the long/short relationship may be reversed from that in the illustrated example.
Furthermore, the first total time Tt1 may be the same as the second total time Tt2, but may be different from both the third total time Tt3 and the fourth total time Tt4.
Furthermore, among the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4, only the first total time Tt1 may be a time that is different from the other total times (the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4).
Furthermore, among the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4, only the second total time Tt2 may be a time that is different from the other total times (the first total time Tt1, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4).
Furthermore, among the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4, only the third total time Tt3 may be a time that is different from the other total times (the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, and the fourth total time Tt4).
Furthermore, among the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, the third total time Tt3, and the fourth total time Tt4, only the fourth total time Tt4 may be a time that is different from the other total times (the first total time Tt1, the second total time Tt2, and the third total time Tt3).

As described above, the display state in which the display symbol is displayed in a stopped state includes a first display state and a second display state different from the first display state. The display control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., the number portion 411) in the display symbol and a second element (e.g., the first number decorative portion 412 or the character portion 414) different from the first element. The time (specific time) from when the display symbol is stopped (still) to when the second element begins to be displayed can be different between the first display state and the second display state. Examples of the first display state include a non-clear return state, a clear return state, a state in which the fluctuating decorative pattern 41 is stopped, and a state in which the demo display has ended. Examples of the second display state include a non-clear return state, a clear return state, a state in which the fluctuating decorative pattern 41 is stopped, and a state in which the demo display has ended, which are different from the first display state.
In this case, the ease with which the player can recognize that the performance pattern is displayed stationary and the degree of emphasis that the second element is displayed in motion can be varied depending on the performance state, making it easier for the player to recognize the controlled performance state.

Furthermore, the presentation state in which the presentation symbol is displayed in a stopped state includes a first presentation state and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state. The presentation control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., the number portion 411) in the presentation symbol and a second element (e.g., the first number decorative portion 412 or the character portion 414) different from the first element. The first presentation state and the second presentation state can have different times (predetermined times) from when the display of the second element begins to end (limit). Examples of the first presentation state include a non-clear return state, a clear return state, a state in which the fluctuating decorative symbol 41 has stopped, and a state in which the demo presentation has ended. Examples of the second presentation state include a presentation state different from the first presentation state, among a non-clear return state, a clear return state, a state in which the fluctuating decorative symbol 41 has stopped, and a state in which the demo presentation has ended.
In this case, the degree of emphasis on the second element being displayed in motion can be varied depending on the presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize the presentation state being controlled.

In addition, the presentation state in which the presentation symbol is displayed in a stopped state includes a first presentation state and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state. The presentation control unit 300 can display a first element (e.g., the number portion 411) in the presentation symbol and a second element (e.g., the first number decorative portion 412 or the character portion 414) different from the first element. The first presentation state and the second presentation state can have different times (total times) from when the presentation symbol is displayed in a stopped (still) state to when the display of the second element is terminated (limited). Examples of the first presentation state include a non-clear return state, a clear return state, a state in which the fluctuating decorative symbol 41 is stopped, and a state in which the demo presentation has ended. Examples of the second presentation state include a presentation state different from the first presentation state, among the non-clear return state, the clear return state, a state in which the fluctuating decorative symbol 41 is stopped, and a state in which the demo presentation has ended.
In this case, the ease with which the player can recognize that the display pattern is stopped and the degree of emphasis that the second element is displayed in motion can be varied depending on the display state, making it easier for the player to recognize the controlled display state.

Furthermore, in the above example, when no variable performance is being performed, the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed as an action display, but this is not limited to this.
The decorative patterns 41 that can be displayed in motion when a variable effect is not being executed may be two of the three decorative patterns 41 (for example, the left and right decorative patterns 41), or may be only one decorative pattern 41. Also, the only decorative pattern 41 that can be displayed in motion when a variable effect is not being executed may be the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, or the center decorative pattern 41.

Figure 319 is a diagram showing a modified example of the components of the decorative pattern 41.
As shown in FIG. 319 (1), in a modified example, a pattern decoration portion 419 is provided on the decorative pattern 41. The pattern decoration portion 419 decorates the decorative pattern 41. In other words, the pattern decoration portion 419 decorates the number portion 411, the first number decoration portion 412, the second number decoration portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416. In addition, the pattern decoration portion 419 has a lower display priority on the image display unit 114 than the number portion 411, the first number decoration portion 412, the second number decoration portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character decoration portion 415, and the second character decoration portion 416. However, the pattern decoration section 419 may have a lower display priority than the number section 411, but may have a higher display priority than the first number decoration section 412, the second number decoration section 413, the character section 414, the first character decoration section 415, and the second character decoration section 416.

As shown in Figure 319 (1), the pattern decoration portion 419 is displayed in a common decoration mode regardless of the stage (first stage to third stage) being controlled. Furthermore, the pattern decoration portion 419 is displayed in different decoration modes when the decorative pattern 41 contains the number "3" and when it contains the number "7". Furthermore, the pattern decoration portion 419 is not provided for decorative patterns 41 containing numbers other than "3" and "7".

Fig. 319(2) shows a display example of a modified decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114. More specifically, Fig. 319(2) displays three decorative patterns 41, "137."
Here, the left decorative pattern 41, "1," has a number portion 411, a first number decorative portion 412, a second number decorative portion 413, a character portion 414, a first character decorative portion 415, and a second character decorative portion 416. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern 41, "1," does not have a pattern decorative portion 419 (see FIG. 319(1)).
In addition, the middle decorative pattern 41, "3", has a number portion 411, a first number decorative portion 412, a second number decorative portion 413, a character portion 414, a first character decorative portion 415, a second character decorative portion 416, and a pattern decorative portion 419.
The right decorative pattern 41, "7," has a number portion 411, a first number decorative portion 412, a second number decorative portion 413, a character portion 414, a first character decorative portion 415, a second character decorative portion 416, and a pattern decorative portion 419. In this case, the pattern decorative portion 419 of the right decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a different display mode from the pattern decorative portion 419 of the center decorative pattern 41.

Here, when a reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the likelihood of a jackpot game occurring may be higher when the pattern decorative portion 419 corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed than when the pattern decorative portion 419 corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 may not display a specific decorative part (pattern decorative part 419) when displaying a specific decorative pattern 41 (such as numbers other than 3 or 7), and may display a specific decorative part when displaying a specific decorative pattern 41 (such as 3 or 7).
In this case, no matter which decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the player's sense of excitement can be increased more when a specific decorative pattern 41 is displayed than when a specific decorative part is displayed.
The pattern decoration portion 419 may be a decoration portion that decorates the number portion 411 without decorating the character portion 414. The pattern decoration portion 419 may be a decoration portion that decorates the character portion 414 without decorating the number portion 411.

FIG. 320 is a diagram showing the relationship between the performance status and the performance mode by the speaker 156.
FIG. 320 shows the performance mode by the speaker 156 according to the performance situation for each stage.
The performance control unit 300 outputs the first to fourteenth BGMs as performance sounds according to the performance situation from the speaker 156. Here, the first to fourteenth BGMs are all different BGMs (performance sounds).

The relationship between the performance situation and the performance mode by the speaker 156 will be specifically described.
The performance control unit 300 outputs the first BGM from the speaker 156 when the reach performance is not being executed during the execution of the variable performance in the first stage.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the second BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the first stage and during the execution of the normal reach performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the third BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the first stage and during the execution of the SP reach performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the fourth BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the first stage and during the execution of the SPSP reach performance.
In addition, during the execution of the variable presentation in the first stage, after the second transition image 504 (see Figure 130 (5) etc.) that is displayed when an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is performed is displayed, the presentation control unit 300 does not audibly output background music (presentation sound) from the speaker 156.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the fifth BGM from the speaker 156 while the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers is displayed in a stopped state during the execution of the variable performance in the first stage.
In addition, the presentation control unit 300 outputs the sixth BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variable presentation in the first stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 does not audibly output background music (performance sounds) from the speaker 156 while the customer waiting performance is being performed in the first stage.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the eighth BGM from the speaker 156 when the reach performance is not being executed during the execution of the variable performance in the second stage.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the ninth BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the second stage and during the execution of the normal reach performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the third BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the second stage and during the execution of the SP reach performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the fourth BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the second stage and during the execution of the SPSP reach performance.
In addition, during the execution of the variable presentation in the second stage, after the second transition image 504, which is displayed when an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is performed, is displayed, the presentation control unit 300 does not audibly output background music (presentation sound) from the speaker 156.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the fifth BGM from the speaker 156 while the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers is displayed in a stopped state during the execution of the variable performance in the second stage.
In addition, the presentation control unit 300 outputs the sixth BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variable presentation in the second stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 does not audibly output background music (performance sounds) from the speaker 156 while the customer waiting performance is being performed in the second stage.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the tenth BGM from the speaker 156 when the reach performance is not being executed during the execution of the variable performance in the third stage.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the 11th BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the third stage and during the execution of the normal reach performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the 12th BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the variable performance in the third stage, when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is being executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the 10th BGM from the speaker 156 after displaying the third transition image 520 (see Figure 187 (10) etc.), which is displayed when an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is performed during the execution of the variable performance in the third stage.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 outputs the 13th BGM from the speaker 156 while the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers is displayed in a stopped state during the execution of the variable performance in the third stage.
In addition, the presentation control unit 300 outputs the 14th BGM from the speaker 156 during the execution of the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variable presentation in the third stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 does not audibly output background music (performance sounds) from the speaker 156 while the customer waiting performance is being performed in the third stage.

Here, depending on which stage it is, different background music is output when a reach effect is not being executed during execution of a variable effect or when a normal reach effect is being executed.
In addition, the background music output during the execution of the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, the stopping of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, etc. is common to the first stage and the second stage, but is different between the normal game state (first stage, second stage) and the time-saving game state (third stage).
Furthermore, in the first and second stages, no sound effect is audibly output after the transition image (second transition image 504) is displayed during the execution of the variable effect, whereas in the third stage, sound effect is output after the transition image (third transition image 520) is displayed during the execution of the variable effect.
In addition, the same background music is output during the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variation presentation in the first stage and the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variation presentation in the second stage. On the other hand, different background music is output during the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variation presentation in the normal game state (first stage, second stage) and the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variation presentation in the time-saving game state (third stage).
Furthermore, on either stage, no sound effects are audibly output from the speaker 156 while the customer waiting effect is being performed.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 performs temporary stop and outputs performance sounds according to the performance situation.
As an example, after the variable presentation starts, the presentation control unit 300 changes the background music output from the speaker 156 and changes the mode of temporary stop according to the change in the presentation situation, such as when the reach presentation is not being executed, when a normal reach presentation is being executed, when an SP reach presentation is being executed, or when an SPSP reach presentation is being executed (first presentation situation to fourth presentation situation in Figure 204).
In this case, diversification of the presentation according to the progress of the presentation situation can be realized through both visual and auditory presentation.

In addition, in the first or second stage, after the second transition image 504 is displayed during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 does not audibly output the performance sound, but enables a temporary stop to be executed (see the first performance situation and the seventh performance situation in Figure 204).
In this case, even when flashy effects are restricted to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing after the display of the decorative pattern 41 of the losing combination, the player can be made to easily recognize the temporary stop.

In addition, while the customer waiting performance is being performed, the performance control unit 300 does not audibly output the performance sound, but can perform periodic operation display of the stopped performance pattern (see the 13th performance situation in Figure 204).
In this case, suppressing the sound effects makes it easier for the player to recognize that no game is being played, and it is possible to realize an effect that catches the player's attention even when no game is being played.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern by an operating mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and can display the performance pattern by an operating mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle.
Here, the element of the effect pattern displayed by the operation mode repeatable in the first cycle and the element of the effect pattern displayed by the operation mode repeatable in the second cycle may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element of the effect pattern displayed by the operation mode repeatable in the first cycle or the element of the effect pattern displayed by the operation mode repeatable in the second cycle may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
Furthermore, the display using an operation mode that can be repeated in the first cycle of the performance pattern and the display using an operation mode that can be repeated in the second cycle of the performance pattern may be performed at the same timing, at different timings, or in different variable performances.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in the first operation mode and can display the performance pattern in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
The display in the first operation mode and the display in the second operation mode may be performed at the same timing or at different timings.
Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed in the first operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, and the performance pattern can be displayed in the second operation mode" includes displaying the performance pattern for one or more cycles in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying the performance pattern for less than one cycle in the first operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, and displaying the performance pattern for one or more cycles in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying the performance pattern for less than one cycle in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed in a first operating mode before the start of the specified performance and the variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed in a second operating mode after the start of the specified performance may be the same variable performance or different variable performances.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode when the performance pattern is stopped while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
Furthermore, "when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is "when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the first operation mode when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is "when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which the display is made in a first operating mode of the performance pattern when the performance pattern is stopped during execution of the variable performance, and the variable performance in which the display is made in a second operating mode of the performance pattern when a specific performance is being executed may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being executed while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode when a performance pattern suggesting the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a performance pattern suggesting the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the first operation mode when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the second operation mode when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which the display is made in a first operating mode of the performance pattern when a specific performance is being performed, and the variable performance in which the display is made in a second operating mode of the performance pattern when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed, may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols in at least the first operation mode when a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance symbols in at least the second operation mode when a variable performance is not being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
Furthermore, "when a variable performance is being performed, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first and second operation modes when a variable performance is being performed. Furthermore, "when a variable performance is not being performed, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first and second operation modes when a variable performance is not being performed.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display a specific part that is at least a part of the performance pattern in the first operation mode, and can display a specific part in the second operation mode.
Here, the specific part may be the entire performance pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
Furthermore, the display by the first operating mode of the specific part and the display by the second operating mode of the specific part may be performed at the same timing, or at different timings, or in different variable presentations.
Also, for example, the specific part displayed by the first operation mode may be the character part 414 in the first stage, and the specific part displayed by the second operation mode may be the character part 414 in the second stage. In other words, the specific part displayed by the first operation mode and the specific part displayed by the second operation mode may be corresponding components of the performance pattern, and do not have to be the same display mode.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a specific part, which is at least a part of the performance pattern, using at least the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, and is capable of displaying the specific part using at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed.
Here, the specific part may be the entire performance pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific part, which is at least a part of the performance pattern, in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the specific part in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the specific part in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the specific part in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific part that is at least a part of the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the specific part in the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific part in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the specific part in the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which a display is made in a first operating mode of the specific part before the start of the specified performance and the variable performance in which a display is made in a second operating mode of the specific part after the start of the specified performance may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can control performance modes including a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle. It has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols at least in the first operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can display the performance symbols at least in the second operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may be the same or different, that is, the first and second operation modes may have different display cycles regardless of whether they are the same or different.
Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the first performance mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the first performance mode. Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the second performance mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the second performance mode.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern by at least the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern by the first operation mode at any timing regardless of whether "variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern by the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern by at least the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern by the second operation mode at any timing regardless of whether "variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern by the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of restricting the display of at least a portion of the stopped performance pattern for one cycle or more before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, "being able to limit the display of at least one cycle of at least a portion of the stopped performance pattern before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the operation of at least a portion of the stopped performance pattern for less than one cycle before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, and not displaying the operation of the stopped performance pattern before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, can execute a specific variable performance in which a specific performance is not executed while a variable performance is being executed, and can limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one or more cycles while a specific variable performance is being executed.
Here, "being able to limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one cycle or more while the specific variable performance is being executed" includes the display of the stopped performance pattern for less than one cycle while the specific variable performance is being executed, and the display of the stopped performance pattern not being displayed while the specific variable performance is being executed.

It was also explained that the variable performance includes a first variable performance and a second variable performance that is different from the first variable performance, and that the performance control unit 300 can restrict the operation display of at least one cycle of the stopped performance pattern during the execution of the first variable performance, and can execute the operation display of at least one cycle of the stopped performance pattern during the execution of the second variable performance.
Here, "it is possible to limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for at least one cycle or more during the execution of the first variable performance" includes displaying the stopped performance pattern for less than one cycle during the execution of the first variable performance, and not displaying the stopped performance pattern in motion during the execution of the first variable performance.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of restricting the display of the stopped performance pattern to at least one cycle or more of motion before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of executing the display of the stopped performance pattern to at least one cycle or more of motion after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element of the performance pattern that is displayed in motion may be the entire performance pattern or a part of the performance pattern.
Furthermore, "being able to limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for at least one cycle or more before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the stopped performance pattern for less than one cycle before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, not displaying the stopped performance pattern in motion before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, and not stopping the performance pattern before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.

It has also been explained that the performance control unit 300 can limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one or more cycles while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode.
Here, "being able to limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one or more cycles while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode" includes displaying the stopped performance pattern for less than one cycle while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode, and not displaying the stopped performance pattern in motion while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the performance pattern in a specific operating mode at a specific timing during the execution of a specific variable performance, and is capable of restricting the display of the performance pattern in a specific operating mode at a predetermined timing after the specific timing during the execution of a specific variable performance.
Here, the element of the performance pattern that is displayed by a specific operation mode may be the entire performance pattern or a part of the performance pattern.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and when a specific performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, it can limit the display of the performance pattern for one or more cycles at a specific timing after the start of the specific performance.
Here, "it is possible to limit the display of the performance pattern for one cycle or more at a specific timing after the start of a specific performance" includes the display of the performance pattern for less than one cycle at a specific timing, and the display of the performance pattern not being displayed at a specific timing.

It was also explained that the presentation control unit 300 can execute specific presentations depending on the results of advance judgment by the game control unit 200, and can limit the display of the stopped presentation pattern for one or more cycles after the start of a specific presentation during the execution of a variable presentation.
Here, "being able to limit the display of the stopped performance pattern for one cycle or more after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the stopped performance pattern for less than one cycle after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, and not displaying the stopped performance pattern in motion after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance.

In addition, it was explained that there are predetermined performance patterns and specific performance patterns that are different from the predetermined performance patterns, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the predetermined performance patterns in motion at a predetermined cycle, and can restrict the display of the specific performance patterns in motion at a predetermined cycle while the variable performance is being executed.
Here, "being able to limit the display of a specific performance pattern at a predetermined cycle while a variable performance is being performed" includes the display of a specific performance pattern at a cycle of less than one cycle while a variable performance is being performed, the display of a specific performance pattern at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle while a variable performance is being performed, and the display of a specific performance pattern not being displayed while a variable performance is being performed.
In addition, the predetermined period may be any one of the periods of the action display that can be repeated by the predetermined effect pattern. In other words, when the specific effect pattern is periodically displayed in an action, the period of the action display by the specific effect pattern may be different from the predetermined period, and may be the same as a period different from the predetermined period of the action display that can be repeated by the predetermined effect pattern.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can periodically display the performance pattern in a first operating mode, and can periodically display the performance pattern in a second operating mode that is different from the first operating mode.
Here, the element of the effect pattern that can be periodically displayed by the first operation mode and the element that can be periodically displayed by the second operation mode may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element of the effect pattern that can be periodically displayed by the first operation mode or the element of the effect pattern that can be periodically displayed by the second operation mode may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
Furthermore, the periodic display of the performance pattern due to the first operating mode and the periodic display of the performance pattern due to the second operating mode may be performed at the same timing, at different timings, or in different variable performances.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in the first operation mode and can display the performance pattern in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, the display of the performance pattern in the first operating mode and the display of the performance pattern in the second operating mode may be performed at the same timing or at different timings.
Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed in the first operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, and the performance pattern can be displayed in the second operation mode" includes displaying the performance pattern for one or more cycles in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying the performance pattern for less than one cycle in the first operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, and displaying the performance pattern for one or more cycles in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying the performance pattern for less than one cycle in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether the display cycles are the same or different.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed in a first operating mode before the start of the specified performance and the variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed in a second operating mode after the start of the specified performance may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode when the performance pattern is stopped while a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, "when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is "when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the first operation mode when the performance pattern is stopped during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is "when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the second operation mode when a specific performance is being executed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which the display is made in a first operating mode of the performance pattern when the performance pattern is stopped during execution of the variable performance, and the variable performance in which the display is made in a second operating mode of the performance pattern when a specific performance is being executed may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being executed while a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the performance pattern in at least the second operation mode when a performance pattern suggesting the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern in the first operation mode and the second operation mode when a performance pattern suggesting the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the first operation mode when a specific performance is being performed during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance," and displaying less than one cycle of the performance pattern in the second operation mode when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which the display is made in a first operating mode of the performance pattern when a specific performance is being performed, and the variable performance in which the display is made in a second operating mode of the performance pattern when a performance pattern that suggests the result of the judgment is being displayed, may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

It was also explained that the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically and a second operation mode that is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols at least in the first operation mode when a variable performance is being executed, and can display the performance symbols at least in the second operation mode when a variable performance is not being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
Furthermore, "when a variable performance is being performed, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first and second operation modes when a variable performance is being performed. Furthermore, "when a variable performance is not being performed, the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first and second operation modes when a variable performance is not being performed.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles. That is, the first and second operation modes only need to be different operation modes. The second operation mode does not need to be displayed periodically.

The operation modes of the effect symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. The effect control unit 300 can display a specific portion that is at least a part of the effect symbol in the first operation mode, and can display the specific portion in the second operation mode.
Here, the specific part may be the entire performance pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether the display cycles are the same or different.
Furthermore, the display by the first operating mode of the specific part and the display by the second operating mode of the specific part may be performed at the same timing, or at different timings, or in different variable presentations.
Also, for example, the specific part displayed by the first operation mode may be the character part 414 in the first stage, and the specific part displayed by the second operation mode may be the character part 414 in the second stage. In other words, the specific part displayed by the first operation mode and the specific part displayed by the second operation mode may be corresponding components of the performance pattern, and do not have to be the same display mode.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing a predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a specific part, which is at least a part of the performance pattern, at least in the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of displaying the specific part in at least the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the specific part may be the entire performance pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific part, which is at least a part of the performance pattern, in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the specific part in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the specific part in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying the specific part in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific part that is at least a part of the performance pattern in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the specific part in the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific part in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether it is "after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" or not, and displaying less than one cycle of the specific part in the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, the variable performance in which a display is made in a first operating mode of the specific part before the start of the predetermined performance and the variable performance in which a display is made in a second operating mode of the specific part after the start of the predetermined performance may be the same variable performance or may be different variable performances.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can control performance modes including a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode, and the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode. It has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols at least in the first operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can display the performance symbols at least in the second operation mode during execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the first performance mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the first performance mode. Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the second performance mode" includes the performance pattern being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the second performance mode.
Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed by at least the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode" includes the fact that the performance pattern is displayed for less than one cycle by the first operation mode at some timing regardless of whether or not "the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode", and the performance pattern is displayed for less than one cycle by the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode. Furthermore, "the performance pattern can be displayed by at least the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode" includes the fact that the performance pattern is displayed for more than one cycle by the second operation mode at some timing regardless of whether or not "the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode", and the fact that the performance pattern is displayed for less than one cycle by the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance symbols include a first performance pattern that can be stopped at a predetermined timing in the variable performance, and a second performance pattern that can be stopped at a timing different from the first performance pattern in the variable performance, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance pattern at least by the first operation mode, and can display the second performance pattern at least by the second operation mode.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether the display cycles are the same or different.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the first effect symbol at least in the first operation mode" includes the first effect symbol being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the second effect symbol at least in the second operation mode" includes the second effect symbol being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of any performance symbol in the first operation mode, and displaying less than one cycle of the first performance symbol in the first operation mode. Furthermore, "capable of displaying the second performance symbol at least in the second operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of any performance symbol in the second operation mode, and displaying less than one cycle of the second performance symbol in the second operation mode.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance symbols include a first performance symbol that can be stopped at a predetermined timing in the variable performance, and a second performance symbol that can be stopped at a timing different from the first performance symbol in the variable performance, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance symbol at least in the first operation mode and the second performance symbol at least in the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles. That is, the first and second operation modes may have different operation modes, regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, "after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least the first operation mode, and the second performance symbol can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes a display of less than one cycle of the first performance symbol in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance, the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least the first operation mode, and the second performance symbol can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes a display of the second performance symbol in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "the first performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode and the second performance pattern can be displayed in at least the second operation mode after the start of the specific performance during the execution of the variable performance" includes displaying the performance pattern for one or more cycles in the first operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is after the start of the specific performance during the execution of the variable performance, and displaying the first performance pattern for less than one cycle in the first operation mode after the start of the specific performance during the execution of the variable performance, and displaying the performance pattern for one or more cycles in the second operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is after the start of the specific performance during the execution of the variable performance, and displaying the second performance pattern for less than one cycle in the second operation mode after the start of the specific performance during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and the performance symbols include a first performance symbol having a first number, and a second performance symbol having a second number that is different from the first number, and during execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode, the first performance symbol can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and the second performance symbol can be displayed at least by the second operation mode.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether the display cycles are the same or different.
Furthermore, "during the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode, the first performance symbol can be displayed by at least a first operation mode, and the second performance symbol can be displayed by at least a second operation mode" includes the first performance symbol being displayed by the first operation mode and the second operation mode during the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode. Furthermore, "during the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode, the first performance symbol can be displayed by at least a first operation mode, and the second performance symbol can be displayed by at least a second operation mode" includes the second performance symbol being displayed by the first operation mode and the second operation mode during the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode.
Furthermore, "during the execution of a variable performance in a specific performance mode, the first performance pattern can be displayed in at least a first operation mode, and the second performance pattern can be displayed in at least a second operation mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the first operation mode at any time regardless of whether or not a variable performance in a specific performance mode is being executed, and displaying less than one cycle of the first performance pattern in the first operation mode while the variable performance in a specific performance mode is being executed, and displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern in the second operation mode at any time regardless of whether or not a variable performance in a specific performance mode is being executed, and displaying less than one cycle of the second performance pattern in the second operation mode while the variable performance in a specific performance mode is being executed.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance while a variable performance is being executed, and that the variable performance includes a first variable performance in which a specific performance is not executed while the variable performance is being executed, and a second variable performance in which a specific performance is executed while the variable performance is being executed, that the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, that the performance patterns include a first performance pattern and a second performance pattern that can be stopped after the first performance pattern stops in the variable performance, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the first performance pattern at least in the first operation mode after the second performance pattern stops during the execution of the first variable performance, and can display the first performance pattern at least in the second operation mode after the second performance pattern stops during the execution of the second variable performance.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles. That is, the first and second operation modes may have different operation modes, regardless of whether they have the same display cycle or not.
Furthermore, "the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least the first operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the first variable performance" includes the first performance symbol being displayed in the first and second operation modes after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the first variable performance. Furthermore, "the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least the second operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance" includes the second performance symbol being displayed in the first and second operation modes after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance.
Furthermore, "the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least the first operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the first variable performance" includes a display of one or more cycles of the performance symbol in the first operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the first variable performance, and a display of less than one cycle of the first performance symbol in the first operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the first variable performance. Furthermore, "the first performance symbol can be displayed in at least the second operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance" includes a display of one or more cycles of the performance symbol in the second operation mode at any timing regardless of whether it is after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance, and a display of less than one cycle of the second performance symbol in the second operation mode after the second performance symbol has stopped during the execution of the second variable performance.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 can display a specific part of the performance pattern at least in the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode, and can display the specific part at least in the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode.
Here, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first operation mode and the second operation mode may have different operation modes regardless of whether the display cycles are the same or not.
Furthermore, "the specific part of the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the first performance mode" includes the specific part being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the first performance mode. Furthermore, "the specific part can be displayed in at least the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the second performance mode" includes the specific part being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode while the variable performance is being performed in the second performance mode.
Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific portion of the performance pattern by at least a first operation mode while a variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern by the first operation mode at any timing regardless of whether or not the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode, and displaying less than one cycle of the specific portion by the first operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the first performance mode. Furthermore, "capable of displaying a specific portion by at least a second operation mode while a variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode" includes displaying one or more cycles of the performance pattern by the second operation mode at any timing regardless of whether or not the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode, and displaying less than one cycle of the specific portion by the second operation mode while the variable performance is being executed in the second performance mode.

It was also explained that there are predetermined performance patterns and specific performance patterns that are different from the predetermined performance patterns, and that the performance control unit 300 can periodically display the predetermined performance patterns in a predetermined operating mode, and can limit the display of the specific performance patterns in a predetermined operating mode for more than one cycle while the variable performance is being executed.
Here, "being able to restrict the display of a specific performance pattern in a predetermined operating mode for more than one cycle while a variable performance is being performed" includes displaying a specific performance pattern in a predetermined operating mode for less than one cycle while a variable performance is being performed, displaying a specific performance pattern in an operating mode different from the predetermined operating mode (for more than one cycle or less than one cycle) while a variable performance is being performed, and not displaying a specific performance pattern in an operating mode while a variable performance is being performed.
In addition, the predetermined operation mode may be any one of the operation modes that can be repeatedly displayed by the predetermined effect pattern. In other words, when a specific effect pattern is displayed in an operation, the operation mode of the specific effect pattern may be the same as an operation mode that is different from the predetermined operation mode among the operation modes that can be repeatedly displayed by the predetermined effect pattern.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in which a performance pattern is displayed in motion when a reach performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed, and the specific performances that can be executed in one performance mode (for example, the first stage) include a first specific performance in which a performance pattern having a specific number is displayed in a first operation mode, and a second specific performance in which a performance pattern having a specific number is displayed in a second operation mode that is different from the first operation mode.
Here, the element displayed by the first operation mode and the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the same element or different elements. Also, the element displayed by the first operation mode among the effect patterns or the element displayed by the second operation mode among the effect patterns may be the entire effect pattern or a part of the effect pattern.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the second performance symbol (e.g., middle decorative symbol 41, right decorative symbol 41) in the second operation mode when the first performance symbol (e.g., left decorative symbol 41) is displayed in the first operation mode.
Here, "when the first performance pattern is displayed in the first operating mode, the second performance pattern can be displayed in the second operating mode" includes when the first performance pattern is displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode, the second performance pattern is displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the second performance symbol (e.g., middle decorative symbol 41, right decorative symbol 41) in the second operation mode when the first performance symbol (e.g., left decorative symbol 41) is displayed in the first operation mode.
Here, "when the first performance pattern is displayed in the first operating mode, the second performance pattern can be displayed in the second operating mode" includes when the first performance pattern is displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode, the second performance pattern is displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode.

It has also been explained that the operation modes of the display patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and that in the first display mode (e.g., the second stage), the display control unit 300 is capable of at least displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in Figure 70) and in the second operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in Figure 81), and that in the second display mode (e.g., the third stage), it is capable of displaying the decorative pattern 41 in at least the first operation mode and in the third operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in Figure 84).
Here, "at least a display by the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and a display by the second operation mode can be executed in the first presentation mode" includes "at least a display by the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and a display by the second operation mode and a display by the third operation mode can be executed in the first presentation mode." Also, "at least a display by the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and a display by the third operation mode can be executed in the second presentation mode" includes "at least a display by the first operation mode of the decorative pattern 41 and a display by the second operation mode and a display by the third operation mode can be executed in the second presentation mode."

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode, and it has been explained that in the first performance mode (e.g., the second stage), the performance control unit 300 can at least execute a display of the first part (e.g., the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in Figure 70) and a display of the second part (e.g., the second number decorative part 413) in a second operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in Figure 81), and that in the second performance mode (e.g., the third stage), it can at least execute a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in a first operation mode and a display of the second part in a third operation mode (e.g., the operation mode shown in Figure 84).
Here, "in the first presentation mode, at least a display by the first operation mode of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 and a display by the second operation mode of the second part can be executed" includes "in the first presentation mode, a display by the first operation mode of the first part of the decorative pattern 41, a display by the second operation mode of the second part, and a display by the third operation mode of the entire decorative pattern 41 or any of its constituent elements" and "in the second presentation mode, at least a display by the first operation mode of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 and a display by the third operation mode of the second part can be executed" includes "in the second presentation mode, a display by the first operation mode of the first part of the decorative pattern 41, a display by the third operation mode of the second part, and a display by the second operation mode of the entire decorative pattern 41 or any of its constituent elements" and "in the second presentation mode, at least a display by the first operation mode of the first part of the decorative pattern 41, a display by the third operation mode of the second part, and a display by the second operation mode of the entire decorative pattern 41 or any of its constituent elements can be executed ...

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 70), a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 81), and a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle different from the second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 84), and it has been explained that in the first performance mode (for example, the second stage), the performance control unit 300 can display at least the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and in the second performance mode (for example, the third stage), the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed at least in the first operation mode and the third operation mode.
Here, "in the first presentation mode, at least the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode" includes the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode in the first presentation mode. Also, "in the second presentation mode, at least the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in the first operation mode and the third operation mode" includes the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode in the second presentation mode.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 70), a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 81), and a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle different from the second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 84).It has been explained that in the first performance mode (for example, the second stage), the performance control unit 300 can at least display the first part (for example, the number part 411) of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and the second part (for example, the second number decorative part 413) in the second operation mode, and that in the second performance mode (for example, the third stage), it can at least display the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and the second part in the third operation mode.
Here, "being able to execute at least a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and a display of the second part in the second operation mode in the first presentation mode" includes being able to execute a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode, a display of the second part in the second operation mode, and a display of the entire decorative pattern 41 or any of its constituent elements in the third operation mode in the first presentation mode. Also, "being able to execute at least a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode and a display of the second part in the third operation mode in the second presentation mode" includes being able to execute a display of the first part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode, a display of the second part in the third operation mode, and a display of the entire decorative pattern 41 or any of its constituent elements in the second operation mode in the second presentation mode.

In addition, it has been explained that the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 66), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 73), and that the performance control unit 300 can display an identification section (for example, the number section 411) that can identify the pattern at least in the first operation mode, and can display an ornamental section (for example, the first number ornamental section 412, the second number ornamental section 413, etc.) that decorates the identification section at least in the second operation mode.
Here, "capable of displaying the indicator in at least the first operating mode" includes the indicator being displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode, and "capable of displaying the decorative portion in at least the second operating mode" includes the decorative portion being displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode.

Furthermore, it has been explained that the operating modes of the performance symbols include a first operating mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 66), and a second operating mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operating mode (for example, the operating mode shown in Figure 73), and that the performance control unit 300 can display the identification unit at least in the first operating mode, and can display the decorative unit (for example, the first number decorative unit 412, the second number decorative unit 413, etc.) in at least the second operating mode.
Here, "capable of displaying the indicator in at least the first operating mode" includes the indicator being displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode, and "capable of displaying the decorative portion in at least the second operating mode" includes the decorative portion being displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 81), a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 70), and a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle different from the second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 67), and it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, etc.) while a variable performance is being executed, and before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, a specific part (for example, the second number decorative part 413) that is at least a part of the performance symbol can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and a specific part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the performance symbol and different from the specific part can be displayed at least by the second operation mode (see Figure 165, etc.), and after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, a specific part can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and a specific part can be displayed at least by the third operation mode (see Figure 131, etc.).
Here, the specific portion and the predetermined portion include a part of the effect pattern and the entire effect pattern.
Furthermore, "before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, a specific portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes the specific portion being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, a specific portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode, and a specific portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern and is different from the specific portion can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes the specific portion being displayed in the first operation mode, and the specific portion being displayed in the second operation mode and the third operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "the specific part can be displayed in at least the first operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance" includes the specific part being displayed in the first operation mode and the third operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "the specific part can be displayed in at least the first operation mode, and the specific part can be displayed in at least the third operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance" includes the specific part being displayed in the first operation mode, and the specific part being displayed in the second operation mode and the third operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 81), a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 70), and a third operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 67), and it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute a predetermined performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, etc.) while a variable performance is being executed, and before the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, a specific part that is at least a part of the performance symbol (for example, the second number decorative part 413) can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and a specific part that is at least a part of the performance symbol and is different from the specific part (for example, the number part 411) can be displayed at least by the second operation mode (see Figure 165, etc.), and after the start of the predetermined performance while a variable performance is being executed, a specific part can be displayed at least by the first operation mode, and a specific part can be displayed at least by the third operation mode (see Figure 131, etc.).
Here, the specific portion and the predetermined portion include a part of the effect pattern and the entire effect pattern.
Furthermore, "before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, a specific portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode" includes the specific portion being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance, a specific portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern can be displayed in at least the first operation mode, and a specific portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern and is different from the specific portion can be displayed in at least the second operation mode" includes the specific portion being displayed in the first operation mode, and the specific portion being displayed in the second operation mode and the third operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.
Furthermore, "the specific part can be displayed in at least the first operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance" includes the specific part being displayed in the first operation mode and the third operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance. Furthermore, "the specific part can be displayed in at least the first operation mode, and the specific part can be displayed in at least the third operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance" includes the specific part being displayed in the first operation mode, and the specific part being displayed in the second operation mode and the third operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during execution of a variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 65), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (the cycle shown in Figure 66) that is shorter than the first cycle, and the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances (reach prompting performance, normal reach performance, pseudo consecutive prompting performance, pseudo consecutive performance, zone prompting performance, zone performance, role device performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, button operation performance, performance that stops decorative patterns 41 of missing numbers, performance that stops decorative patterns 41 of double numbers, etc.) while the variable performance is being executed, and it has been explained that the decorative patterns 41 can be displayed at least in the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, and the decorative patterns 41 can be displayed at least in the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed.
Here, "the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Also, "the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 68), and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle (the cycle shown in Figure 69) that is longer than the first cycle, and the performance control unit 300 can execute predetermined performances (reach prompting performance, normal reach performance, pseudo consecutive prompting performance, pseudo consecutive performance, zone prompting performance, zone performance, role device performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, button operation performance, performance that stops decorative patterns 41 of missing numbers, performance that stops decorative patterns 41 of double numbers, etc.) while the variable performance is being executed, and it has been explained that the decorative patterns 41 can be displayed at least in the first operation mode before the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed, and the decorative patterns 41 can be displayed at least in the second operation mode after the start of the predetermined performance while the variable performance is being executed.
Here, "the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in at least the first operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance. Also, "the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in at least the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance" includes the decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode after the start of a predetermined performance during the execution of a variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a third operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the second operation mode, and the performance control unit 300 can display the first part (e.g., number part 411) and the second part (e.g., character part 414) of the performance symbol in the first operation mode during a predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed (e.g., while the reach performance is being executed) (see Figure 152), and can display the first part in the second operation mode and the second part in the third operation mode during a specific period different from the predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed (e.g., before the reach performance starts).
Here, the second operation mode includes the first operation mode. That is, the second operation mode may be the same as the first operation mode as long as it is different from the third operation mode.
The third operation mode includes the first operation mode. That is, the third operation mode may be the same as the first operation mode as long as it is different from the second operation mode.
Furthermore, "the first part can be displayed in the second operating mode, and the second part can be displayed in the third operating mode during a specific period different from the predetermined period during which the variable performance is being executed" includes the first part and the second part being displayed in the second operating mode and the third operating mode during a specific period during which the variable performance is being executed.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance symbols include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically, a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically, and a third operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the second operation mode, and it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display the first part (e.g., number part 411) and the second part (e.g., character part 414) of the performance symbol in the first operation mode during the execution of the first variable performance (e.g., reach variable performance) (see Figure 152), and that during the execution of the second variable performance (e.g., miss variable performance), the first part can be displayed in the second operation mode and the second part can be displayed in the third operation mode.
Here, the second operation mode includes the first operation mode. That is, the second operation mode may be the same as the first operation mode as long as it is different from the third operation mode.
The third operation mode includes the first operation mode. That is, the third operation mode may be the same as the first operation mode as long as it is different from the second operation mode.
Furthermore, "while the second variable performance is being executed, the first part can be displayed in the second operating mode, and the second part can be displayed in the third operating mode" includes the first part and the second part both being displayed in the second operating mode and the third operating mode while the second variable performance is being executed.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 65), a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 66), and a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle that is different from the second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 73).It has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and a second part (for example, the first number decorative part 412) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part in the first operation mode during a predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed, and can display the first part in the second operation mode and the second part in the third operation mode during a specific period that is different from the predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed (see Figures 151, 127 to 129, etc.).
Here, "the first part can be displayed in the second operating mode and the second part can be displayed in the third operating mode during a specific period different from the predetermined period during the execution of the variable performance" includes both the first part and the second part being displayed in the second operating mode and the third operating mode during a specific period during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 65), a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 66), and a third operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 73).It has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and a second part (for example, the first number decorative part 412) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and is different from the first part using the first operation mode during a predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed, and can display the first part using the second operation mode and the second part using the third operation mode during a specific period that is different from the predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed (see Figures 151, 127 to 129, etc.).
Here, "the first part can be displayed in the second operating mode and the second part can be displayed in the third operating mode during a specific period different from the predetermined period during the execution of the variable performance" includes both the first part and the second part being displayed in the second operating mode and the third operating mode during a specific period during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode (operation mode shown in Figure 151 (3)) that can be repeated periodically, a second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 70) that can be repeated periodically, and a third operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 77) that can be repeated periodically and is different from the second operation mode, and it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display the first part (for example, the number part 411) and the second part (for example, the first number decorative part 412) of the decorative pattern 41 at least in the first operation mode during the execution of a variable performance in the first performance mode (for example, the first stage), and can display the first part in at least the second operation mode and the second part in at least the third operation mode during the execution of a variable performance in the second performance mode (for example, the second stage).
Here, the second operation mode includes the first operation mode. That is, the second operation mode may be the same as the first operation mode as long as it is different from the third operation mode.
The third operation mode includes the first operation mode. That is, the third operation mode may be the same as the first operation mode as long as it is different from the second operation mode.
Furthermore, "during the execution of the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, the first part can be displayed in at least the second operating mode, and the second part can be displayed in at least the third operating mode" includes the fact that during the execution of the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, both the first part and the second part are displayed in the second operating mode and the third operating mode.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance pattern include a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 65), a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle different from the first cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 90), and a third operation mode that can be repeated in a third cycle different from the first cycle or the second cycle (for example, the cycle shown in Figure 67), and it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (for example, number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode during a predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed, and can display a second part (for example, character part 414) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and different from the first part in the second operation mode, and can display the first and second parts in the third operation mode during a specific period different from the predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed (see Figures 127 to 129, Figure 152, etc.).
Here, the third operation mode may have the same period as either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, as long as the period is different from either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. In other words, the third operation mode includes either the first operation mode or the second operation mode.
Furthermore, "during a predetermined period during the execution of the variable performance, a first part which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first operating mode, and a second part which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and is different from the first part can be displayed in a second operating mode" includes that during a predetermined period during the execution of the variable performance, both the first part and the second part are displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode.

In addition, the operation modes of the performance patterns include a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 65), a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 90), and a third operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode or the second operation mode (for example, the operation mode shown in Figure 67), and it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first part (for example, the number part 411) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 in the first operation mode during a predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed, and can display a second part (for example, the character part 414) that is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and is different from the first part in the second operation mode, and can display the first and second parts in the third operation mode during a specific period that is different from the predetermined period while the variable performance is being executed (see Figures 127 to 129, Figure 152, etc.).
Here, the third operation mode may be the same as either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, as long as it is different from either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. In other words, the third operation mode includes either the first operation mode or the second operation mode.
Furthermore, "during a predetermined period during the execution of the variable performance, a first part which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first operating mode, and a second part which is at least a part of the decorative pattern 41 and is different from the first part can be displayed in a second operating mode" includes that during a predetermined period during the execution of the variable performance, both the first part and the second part are displayed in the first operating mode and the second operating mode.

In addition, it was explained that the operation modes of the performance symbols include specific operation modes (first operation mode to forty-seventh operation mode) that can be repeated periodically, and that the performance control unit 300 can display the performance symbols using specific operation modes.
Here, "the effect pattern can be displayed by a specific operation mode" includes the effect pattern being displayed for less than one cycle by a specific operation mode of the effect pattern. In other words, "the effect pattern can be displayed by a specific operation mode" means that the effect pattern can be displayed for less than one cycle by a specific operation mode of the effect pattern, as long as the effect pattern is displayed for at least one cycle by a specific operation mode of the effect pattern.

It was also explained that there are multiple operation modes of the performance symbols that can be repeated at different cycles (for example, a first operation mode that can be repeated at a first cycle and a second operation mode that can be repeated at a second cycle that is different from the first cycle).
Here, the multiple motion patterns that can be repeated at different cycles include multiple motion patterns that have different cycles but a common motion (for example, the same up-and-down swing, the same left-and-right swing, etc.).

It was also explained that there are multiple operation modes of the performance symbols that can be repeated periodically but have different operation modes (for example, a first operation mode that can be repeated periodically and a second operation mode that can be repeated periodically and is different from the first operation mode).
Here, the multiple operation modes that can be repeated periodically and have different operation modes include multiple operation modes that have different operations but a common period.

It has also been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display performance symbols in specific operating modes (first operating mode to forty-seventh operating mode). Here, being able to display performance symbols in specific operating modes includes displaying the entire performance symbol in a specific operating mode, and displaying some of the components of the performance symbol (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, character portion 414, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416) in a specific operating mode.

It has also been explained that the effect control unit 300 is capable of (periodic) displaying the motion of the effect patterns. Here, being capable of (periodic) displaying the motion of the effect patterns includes (periodic) displaying the motion of the entire effect pattern, and (periodic) displaying the motion of some of the components of the effect pattern (number portion 411, first number decoration portion 412, second number decoration portion 413, character portion 414, first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416).

In the above example, the stage image 61 is reproduced in a loop.
Here, the stage image 61 continues to be played in a loop both when the variable effect is being performed and when the variable effect is not being performed. Furthermore, while any effect is being performed by the effect control unit 300, the stage image 61 continues to be played in a loop without any restrictions as long as it is displayed. Therefore, when the variable effect is not being performed (when the customer waiting effect is being performed), the stage image 61 displays its motion for one or more cycles. Furthermore, the stage image 61 displays its motion for one or more cycles from before the variable effect ends (during execution) until after the variable effect ends (when the variable effect is not being performed, during execution of the customer waiting effect). Furthermore, the stage image 61 displays its motion for one or more cycles from when the variable effect is not being performed (during execution of the customer waiting effect) until after the variable effect starts (during execution). In this case, the period from before the end of the variable performance (during execution) to after the end of the variable performance (when the variable performance is not being executed, while the customer waiting performance is being executed) in which the stage image 61 displays its movement for one cycle or more, and the period from when the variable performance is not being executed (when the customer waiting performance is being executed) to after the start of the variable performance (during execution) in which the stage image 61 displays its movement for one cycle or more, are included in one performance state.
In addition, in the scattered miss variation effect, the stage image 61 is looped from the start to the end of the scattered miss variation effect, but there is a period during which the scattered miss variation effect is not temporarily stopped. Therefore, in the scattered miss variation effect, the stage image 61 has a longer execution time for the periodically repeatable action display than any part of the decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, even in a reach-miss variable performance in which a normal reach performance is performed but an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stage image 61 is looped from the start to the end of this variable performance, but there is a period during which a temporary stop is not performed during the execution of this variable performance. Therefore, in a reach-miss variable performance in which a normal reach performance is performed but an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stage image 61 has a longer execution time of the periodically repeatable action display than any part of the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, the cycle at which the stage images 61 are looped (displayed in motion) may differ for each stage (performance mode). For example, the stage images 61 in the first stage may be looped (displayed in motion) every 30 seconds, the stage images 61 in the second stage may be looped (displayed in motion) every 20 seconds, and the stage images 61 in the third stage may be looped (displayed in motion) every 15 seconds.
In addition, the stage image 61 in the first stage may be looped (displayed in motion) at 30-second intervals, the stage image 61 in the second stage may be looped (displayed in motion) at 35-second intervals, and the stage image 61 in the third stage may be looped (displayed in motion) at 40-second intervals.
Furthermore, the stage image 61 in the first stage and the stage image 61 in the second stage may be loop-played (movingly displayed) at the same cycle.

The movement mode of the stage image 61 may also differ from stage to stage. In this case, for example, the stage image 61 in the first stage, as described above, is in a movement mode in which it moves left and right along the overall stage image 610 (see FIG. 117(2)) drawn in a strip extending left and right. Also, for example, the stage image 61 in the second stage may be in a movement mode in which it moves up and down along the overall stage image 610 drawn in a strip extending up and down. Also, for example, the stage image 61 in the third stage may be in a movement mode in which the whale (see FIG. 177(1)) shown as the stage image 61 periodically splashes water.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in a performance pattern and a second element different from the first element, and that in a specific performance state, it is possible to restrict the display of one of the first and second elements for one or more cycles of motion, and to execute the display of the other element for one or more cycles of motion.
Here, the second element also includes the stage image 61 .

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in the performance pattern and a second element different from the first element, and that the performance states in which a performance can be executed include a first performance state and a second performance state different from the first performance state, and that in the first performance state, the performance control unit 300 is capable of restricting the operation display of one of the first and second elements for one or more cycles and executing the operation display of the other element for one or more cycles, and that in the second performance state, it is capable of executing the operation display of the first element for one or more cycles and the operation display of the second element for one or more cycles.
Here, the second element also includes the stage image 61 .

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image displayed behind the first image, and that the first image can be displayed in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a first cycle, and that the second image can be displayed in an operating mode that can be repeated at least in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle.
Here, the second image also includes a stage image 61 .

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image showing the numbers in the performance pattern and a second image displayed behind the first image, and that the execution times of the action displays that can be repeated periodically during the execution of the variable performance can be made different between the first image and the second image.
Here, the second image also includes a stage image 61 .
Furthermore, the periodic display of the second image may be performed when the variable effect is not being executed, may be performed from when the variable effect is being executed until when the variable effect is not being executed, or may be performed from when the variable effect is not being executed until when the variable effect is being executed. In other words, it is sufficient that the display of the second image is performed while the variable effect is being executed, and the display of the second image does not need to be performed for more than one cycle.

It was also explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first image showing numbers in the performance pattern and a second image displayed behind the first image, and that the first image is capable of being displayed periodically in at least a first operating mode, and that the second image is capable of being displayed periodically in at least a second operating mode different from the first operating mode.
Here, the second image also includes a stage image 61 .
The first and second operation modes may have the same display cycle or different display cycles, i.e., the first and second operation modes may be different operation modes regardless of whether the display cycles are the same or different.

It has also been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first element indicating a number in the performance pattern and a second element displayed behind the first element.
Here, the second element also includes the stage image 61 .

It has also been explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first element in the performance pattern and a second element that is different from the first element.
Here, the second element also includes the stage image 61 .

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute the operation display of the stopped performance pattern, and that the performance control unit 300 can limit the operation display of the stopped performance pattern.
Here, "stopped effect patterns" include effect patterns that are temporarily stopped, and effect patterns that are displayed in a different manner from the temporary stop after being temporarily stopped. Also, "stopped effect patterns" include effect patterns that are fixedly stopped, and effect patterns that are displayed in a different manner from the temporary stop after being fixedly stopped. Also, "stopped effect patterns" include effect patterns that are currently being executed as an effect when stopped (see FIG. 118 (4) etc.), and effect patterns that are displayed in a different manner from the effect when stopped after the effect when stopped is executed. In other words, "stopped effect patterns" include effect patterns that occur after the movement in a predetermined direction (scrolling direction) during the change has been stopped, regardless of whether or not the effect display by the effect pattern is currently being executed.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the presentation control unit 300 can (periodically) display the presentation pattern in motion when the variable presentation is not being executed (such as when the customer waiting presentation is being executed, when a jackpot game is being executed, etc.).
Here, the behavior of the performance symbols when the variable performance is not being executed may be considered as a behavior different from a temporary stop.

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 limits the motion display of the performance pattern (at least a part of the performance pattern) for more than one cycle.
Here, limiting the display of the performance pattern (at least a part of the performance pattern) for one cycle or more includes displaying the performance pattern (at least a part of the performance pattern) for less than one cycle, and not displaying the performance pattern (at least a part of the performance pattern) in motion.

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can limit the operation display of a specific performance pattern at a predetermined cycle.
Here, being able to limit the operation display of a specific performance pattern in a predetermined cycle includes not displaying the specific performance pattern in a predetermined cycle while displaying the specific performance pattern in a cycle different from the predetermined cycle. Also, being able to limit the operation display of a specific performance pattern in a predetermined cycle includes not displaying the specific performance pattern in a periodic cycle.

In addition, in the above example, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can limit the display of a specific performance symbol for one or more cycles according to a predetermined operation mode.
Here, being able to limit the operation display of a specific performance pattern for one cycle or more according to a predetermined operation mode includes making the specific performance pattern operate for less than one cycle according to a predetermined operation mode. Also, being able to limit the operation display of a specific performance pattern for one cycle or more according to a predetermined operation mode includes making the specific performance pattern operate periodically according to an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode, and not making the specific performance pattern operate periodically.

In the above example, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 limits the motion display (display according to the motion mode) of the displayable element for one or more cycles.
Here, limiting the motion display (display in a motion mode) of a displayable element for one or more cycles includes displaying a displayable element for less than one cycle, and not displaying a displayable element for one cycle.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that "when the performance control unit 300 successfully receives a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, it can limit the periodic operation display of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41."
Here, "when the performance control unit 300 has normally received a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, the performance control unit 300 can restrict the periodic display of the (stopped) decorative pattern 41" includes "when the performance control unit 300 has normally received a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 is displayed in operation for less than one cycle, but is not displayed in operation for more than one cycle" and "when the performance control unit 300 has normally received a command to stop the change of the special pattern corresponding to the specific change performance, the (stopped) decorative pattern 41 is not displayed in operation."

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation depending on the results of a prior determination by the game control unit 200, and can limit the display of the stopped presentation pattern for one or more cycles after the start of a specific presentation during the execution of a variable presentation.
Here, the specific effects that can be executed depending on the results of the advance determination by the game control unit 200 include a first specific effect and a second specific effect that is different from the first specific effect. The variable effects include a first variable effect in which the second specific effect is executed without the first specific effect, and a second variable effect in which the first specific effect is executed without the second specific effect. The effect control unit 300 can execute one or more cycles of motion display of the stopped effect symbols after the start of the first specific effect during the execution of the first variable effect, and can also limit one or more cycles of motion display of the stopped effect symbols after the start of the first specific effect during the execution of the second variable effect. Examples of the first specific effects include chance eye effects. Examples of the second specific effects include pre-start motion effects, role effect effects, and display of role effect first effect image 505.

In the above example, it has been explained that the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are executed.
Here, both the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect may be regarded as "a reach effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot game being executed than a normal reach effect." In other words, there is no need to distinguish between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. The SPSP reach effect may also be regarded as an SP reach effect. The SP reach effect may also be regarded as an SPSP reach effect. The normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect may also be regarded as a first reach effect, a second reach effect, and a third reach effect, respectively.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that there is a variable effect in which a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 is initiated without the stop operation effect of the decorative pattern 41 being executed (see Figure 141 (4) etc.), but this is not limited to this.
Regardless of which variation effect is executed, the stop action effect may be executed before the decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop.
In addition, in the time-saving game state, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 is started without the stop action effect of the decorative pattern 41 being executed, whereas in the normal game state, the stop action effect may be executed before the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 is started.
In addition, in one of the first and second stages, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped without the decorative pattern 41 performing the stop action effect, while in the other stage, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped before the decorative pattern 41 performs the stop action effect.

In the above example, it has been explained that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41 may not be executed (may be limited) during the execution of a specific effect accompanied by the motion display of the decorative symbol 41. Examples of specific effects include the shaking of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach-inducing effect (see FIG. 182(3) and the like), the motion effect when the symbol 41 stops, the motion effect when the symbol 41 reaches, the distance effect, the proximity effect, the effect of lowering the decorative symbol 41 of a missing number during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, and the enlarged display of the decorative symbol 41 of a double number (see FIG. 147(4) and the like).
Here, the specific effects may be regarded as temporary stops. In addition, the displays according to the operation modes shown in Figures 65 to 109-3 can be regarded as temporary stops that can be periodically repeated. The specific effects can be regarded as temporary stops that are not periodically repeated.

In the above example, it was explained that in a scattered miss variation effect, the left decorative pattern 41 "3" temporarily stops, in a reach miss variation effect, the left and right decorative patterns 41 "3" temporarily stop, and in a jackpot variation effect, etc., the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "3" temporarily stops, but this is not limited to this.
Any number may be temporarily stopped as the left decorative symbol 41 in a random miss variation effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 in a reach miss variation effect, or the double-digit decorative symbol 41 in a jackpot variation effect. In this case, the overall decorative symbol 41, the number portion 411, the first number decorative symbol 412, and the second number decorative symbol 413 do not change their behavior during the temporary stop depending on the number of the decorative symbol 41, while the character portion 414, the first character decorative symbol 415, and the second character decorative symbol 416 are displayed in behaviors corresponding to the number of the decorative symbol 41 (FIGS. 87 to 106). Furthermore, regardless of which number is temporarily stopped as the decorative symbol 41 in each variation effect, whether the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops for one or more cycles or for less than one cycle during the execution of the variation effect is the same as in the above-described examples where the decorative symbol 41, "3," is temporarily stopped.

Also, in Figures 65 to 109-3, it has been explained that specific components of the decorative pattern 41 or the entire decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a specific motion mode.
Here, the elements of the decorative pattern 41 that are displayed in the operational modes shown in Figures 65 to 109-3 are not limited to the examples described above. The elements that are displayed in the operational modes shown in Figures 65 to 109-3 may be the entire decorative pattern 41, the number portion 411, the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, the character portion 414, the first character decorative portion 415, or the second character decorative portion 416.

In the above example, it was explained that various effect images (decorative symbol 41, small symbol 56, stage image 61, pseudo consecutive symbol 57, zone symbol 58, and zone execution image 59) can be displayed in a cyclical motion. Among the effect images described above, images not described as being displayed in a cyclical motion (effect images other than decorative symbol 41, small symbol 56, stage image 61, pseudo consecutive symbol 57, zone symbol 58, and zone execution image 59) may also be displayed in a unique motion pattern. More specifically, of the above-mentioned effect images, images that do not describe periodic operation display (effect images other than decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56, stage image 61, pseudo consecutive pattern 57, zone pattern 58, and zone execution image 59) can be displayed in an operation mode (for example, a fade-in or fade-out operation mode) that is different from the operation images that can be displayed in periodic operation (decorative pattern 41, small pattern 56, stage image 61, pseudo consecutive pattern 57, zone pattern 58, and zone execution image 59), but this operation mode is not repeated (they are not displayed in periodic operation) and are hidden.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the parts that decorate the number portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 (the first number decorative portion 412, the second number decorative portion 413, etc.) have a common display mode regardless of the number portion 411, but this is not limited to this.
The portions (first numeral decorative portion 412, second numeral decorative portion 413, etc.) that decorate the numeral portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 may have different display modes for each numeral in the numeral portion 411.
Furthermore, the portions (first numeral decorative portion 412, second numeral decorative portion 413, etc.) decorating the numeral portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 may have different display modes for odd numbers and even numbers in the numeral portion 411. That is, the portions (first numeral decorative portion 412, second numeral decorative portion 413, etc.) decorating the numeral portion 411 of the decorative pattern 41 may have the same display mode for odd numbers (e.g., 3 and 7) or even numbers (e.g., 2 and 4) in the numeral portion 411.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the parts that decorate the character part 414 of the decorative pattern 41 (first character decoration part 415, second character decoration part 416, etc.) have different display modes for each number part 411, but this is not limited to this.
The parts that decorate the character part 414 of the decorative pattern 41 (first character decoration part 415, second character decoration part 416, etc.) may be in a common display mode regardless of the number part 411.
Furthermore, the portions (first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416, etc.) decorating the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 may have different display modes for odd numbers and even numbers in the number portion 411. In other words, the portions (first character decoration portion 415, second character decoration portion 416, etc.) decorating the character portion 414 of the decorative pattern 41 may have the same display mode for odd numbers (e.g., 3 and 7) or even numbers (e.g., 2 and 4) in the number portion 411.

Furthermore, in the above example, the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the center decorative pattern 41 are displayed in the same display size, but this is not limited to this.
The display size of the central decorative pattern 41 may be smaller than that of the left and right decorative patterns 41, or the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be smaller than that of the central decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the center decorative pattern 41 may all be displayed in different display sizes.

Furthermore, in the above example, the operational mode of the character portion 414 as a temporary stop when the decorative patterns 41 "1," "3," "4," and "7" are displayed was explained. And, although explanation was omitted in the above example, even when the decorative patterns 41 "2," "5," "6," "8," and "9" are displayed, the character portion 414 may be temporarily stopped in a different operational mode depending on the number of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the "period 0" shown in each drawing showing the flow of the action display of the performance image means that the action display was performed periodically (the action display was performed for one or more cycles), but this is not limited to this.
Furthermore, the "period 0" shown in each drawing showing the flow of the motion display of the effect image may mean that the motion display has been performed for more than one cycle (the second cycle of the motion display has started), and the "period x" shown in the drawing may mean that the motion display has been performed for one cycle or less (the second cycle of the motion display has not been started).
Furthermore, the "period 0" shown in each drawing showing the flow of the motion display of the effect image may mean that the motion display has been performed for more than one cycle (the second cycle of the motion display has started), and the "period x" shown in the drawing may mean that the motion display has not been performed periodically (the motion display has been performed for less than one cycle).

Furthermore, the "period 0" shown in each drawing showing the flow of the motion display of the effect image may mean that more than two cycles of the motion display have been performed (two cycles of the motion display have been completed). And the "period x" shown in the drawing may mean that more than two cycles of the motion display have not been performed (two cycles of the motion display have not been completed (less than two cycles of the motion display have been performed)).
Furthermore, the "period 0" shown in each drawing showing the flow of the motion display of the effect image may mean that more than two cycles of the motion display have been performed (two cycles of the motion display have been completed), and the "period x" shown in the drawing may mean that one cycle or less of the motion display has been performed (the second cycle of the motion display has not started).
Furthermore, the "period 0" shown in each drawing showing the flow of the motion display of the effect image may mean that the motion display has been performed for more than two cycles (two cycles of the motion display have been completed), and the "period x" shown in the drawing may mean that the motion display has not been performed periodically (less than one cycle of the motion display has been performed).

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that during the execution of the variable effect, the temporary stop begins after the stop operation effect has ended (see Figures 118 (4), (5), etc.), but this is not limited to this.
The temporary stop may be started during the execution of the stop-time action presentation during the execution of the variable presentation. In this case, the temporary stop may be started simultaneously with the start of the stop-time action presentation. Alternatively, the temporary stop may be started after the start of the stop-time action presentation but before its end.

In the above example, it has been explained that the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion as the stop operation effect.
Here, at the timing when the stop-time action effect is executed, an emphasis image may be displayed that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 for which the stop-time action effect is executed. The emphasis image is, for example, a light-emitting image that imitates light, which is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 for which the stop-time action effect is executed or in an area that overlaps with this decorative pattern 41.

In the above example, it was explained that the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped and then restarted (see Figures 130 (4) to (6), and time points T3 and T4 in Figure 131, etc.). Here, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped by the decorative pattern 41 becoming invisible, or by the decorative pattern 41 continuing to be displayed but another effect image being displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114, making the decorative pattern 41 difficult to see.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in the performance pattern and a second element different from the first element, and is capable of limiting the operation display of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific performance in the first performance mode, and is capable of continuing the operation display of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific performance in the second performance mode (see Figures 311 to 313).
Here, the second element includes the stage image 61. In other words, "being able to limit the display of the movement of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect in the first effect mode, and being able to continue the display of the movement of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect in the second effect mode" includes limiting the display of the movement of the stage image 61 (e.g., loop playback) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect (e.g., a customer waiting effect) in the first effect mode (e.g., the first stage), and continuing the display of the movement of the stage image 61 (e.g., loop playback) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect (e.g., a customer waiting effect) in the second effect mode (e.g., the third stage).
Even in this case, the degree of emphasis of the stage image 61 (second element) can be varied depending on the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in the performance pattern and a second element different from the first element, and that the time (predetermined time) from the start to the end (limit) of the operation display of the second element can be made different between the first performance state and the second performance state (see Figures 314 to 318).
Here, the second element includes the stage image 61. In other words, "the time (predetermined time) from the start of the motion display of the second element to the end (limitation) can be made different between the first and second performance states" includes the time from the start of the motion display (e.g., loop playback) of the stage image 61 to the end (limitation) being different between the first and second performance states.
Even in this case, the degree of emphasis on the stage image 61 (second element) being displayed in motion can be varied depending on the presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize the presentation state being controlled.
It should be noted that the predetermined times (first predetermined time Tp1, second predetermined time Tp2, third predetermined time Tp3, fourth predetermined time Tp4) described using Figures 314 to 318 can also be understood as the time from when the action display (e.g., loop playback) of the stage image 61 starts to when it ends (is limited).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in the performance pattern and a second element different from the first element, and that the time (total time) from when the performance pattern is displayed stopped (still) to when the operational display of the second element is terminated (limited) can be made different between the first performance state and the second performance state (see Figures 314 to 318).
Here, the second element includes the stage image 61. In other words, "it is possible to make the time (total time) from when the effect pattern is stopped (still) displayed until the motion display of the second element is ended (limited) different between the first effect state and the second effect state" includes that the time from when the effect pattern is stopped (still) displayed until the motion display (e.g., loop playback) of the stage image 61 is ended (limited) different between the first effect state and the second effect state.
Even in this case, the ease with which the player can recognize that the performance pattern is displayed stationary and the degree of emphasis that the stage image 61 is displayed in motion can be varied depending on the performance state, making it easier for the player to recognize the controlled performance state.
In addition, the total times (first total time Tt1, second total time Tt2, third total time Tt3, fourth total time Tt4) explained using Figures 314 to 318 can also be understood as the time from when the performance pattern is displayed stopped (still) to when the moving display (e.g., loop playback) of the stage image 61 is ended (limited).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a first element in the performance pattern and a second element (a component of the performance pattern, stage image 61) different from the first element, and is capable of limiting the operation display of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since a specific performance began in the first performance mode, and is capable of continuing the operation display of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since a specific performance began in the second performance mode (see Figures 311 to 313).
Here, "being able to limit the display of the operation of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect in the first effect mode" includes limiting the display of the operation of the second element in the first effect mode because the second element (a component of the effect pattern, stage image 61) becomes difficult to see or is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect (see time point T2 in Figures 311 (A-3), 312 (A-3), and 313). Examples of the second element becoming difficult to see or is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect in the first effect mode include the second element becoming difficult to see when demo screen 523 is displayed on a layer in front of the second element in image display unit 114 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect, and the second element becoming hidden when demo screen 523 is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific effect.
Furthermore, "being able to continue displaying the operation of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the specific presentation in the second presentation mode" includes the fact that, in the second presentation mode, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the specific presentation (see time point T2' in Figures 311(B-3), 312(B-3), and 313), the second element is visible and therefore the operation of the second element is continued. "Being able to view the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the specific presentation in the second presentation mode" includes the fact that, in the second presentation mode, the second element is visible because demo screen 523 is not displayed.
In other words, being able to restrict the display of the operation of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific performance in the first performance mode, and being able to continue the display of the operation of the second element when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific performance in the second performance mode includes making the second element difficult to see or hidden by displaying demo screen 523 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific performance in the first performance mode, and continuing the display of the operation of the second element by not displaying demo screen 523 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific performance in the second performance mode.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first element in the performance pattern and a second element (a component of the performance pattern, stage image 61) that is different from the first element, and that the time (predetermined time) from the start to the end (limit) of the operation display of the second element can be made different between the first performance state and the second performance state (see Figures 314 to 318).
Here, the end of the display of the operation of the second element (a component of the performance pattern, stage image 61) (see time points T3, T13, T23, and T33 in FIGS. 314(6), 315(6), 316(3), 317(5), and 318) may be performed so that the second element becomes difficult to see or is hidden. Examples of the second element becoming difficult to see include the second element becoming difficult to see when the demo screen 523 is displayed on a layer in front of the second element in the image display unit 114 at the timing when the performance shown in FIGS. 314(6), 315(6), 316(3), 317(5), and 318 is performed at time points T3, T13, T23, and T33, and the second element becoming hidden as the demo screen 523 is displayed.
In other words, the "time (predetermined time) from the start of the operation display of the second element to the end (limitation)" includes the "time from the start of the operation display of the second element to the display of the demo screen 523."

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 can display a first element in the performance pattern and a second element (a component of the performance pattern, stage image 61) that is different from the first element, and that the time (total time) from when the performance pattern is displayed stopped (still) to when the operational display of the second element is terminated (limited) can be made different between the first performance state and the second performance state (see Figures 314 to 318).
Here, the end of the display of the operation of the second element (constituent element of the performance pattern, stage image 61) (see time points T3, T13, T23, and T33 in FIGS. 314(6), 315(6), 316(3), 317(5), and 318) may be performed so that the second element becomes difficult to see or is hidden. Examples of the second element becoming difficult to see or is hidden include the second element becoming difficult to see when the demo screen 523 is displayed on a layer in front of the second element in the image display unit 114 at the timing when the performance shown in FIGS. 314(6), 315(6), 316(3), 317(5), and 318 is performed at time points T3, T13, T23, and T33, and the second element becoming hidden as the demo screen 523 is displayed.
In other words, the "time (total time) from when the performance pattern is displayed in a stopped (still) state to when the operational display of the second element is terminated (restricted)" includes the "time from when the performance pattern is displayed in a stopped (still) state to when the demo screen 523 is displayed."

Furthermore, the display priority of each component of the decorative pattern 41 is not limited to the example described above.
For example, the character portion 414 may have a higher display priority than the first numeral decoration portion 412, the second numeral decoration portion 413, and the first character decoration portion 415. Furthermore, the first character decoration portion 415 and the second character decoration portion 416 may have a higher display priority than the first numeral decoration portion 412 and the second numeral decoration portion 413. Furthermore, even in these cases, the numeral portion 411 may have a higher display priority than any component of the decorative pattern 41 that is different from the numeral portion 411.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 in a common manner, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may temporarily stop specific parts (number part 411, first number decorative part 412, second number decorative part 413, character part 414, first character decorative part 415, second character decorative part 416) in different modes for the left decorative part 41 and the right decorative part 41 in the decorative part 41 of a reach pattern (for example, 3-tenpai). In this case, the left decorative part 41 and the right decorative part 41 may perform temporary stops in which the specific parts have different operation modes but a common cycle, or temporary stops in which the specific parts have a common operation mode but different cycles, or temporary stops in which both the operation mode and cycle of the specific parts are different.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that a temporary stop is performed between the time when the second transition image 504 is displayed and the time when the variable effect ends (see Figure 130 (6) etc.).
Here, the performance control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 seconds). The performance control unit 300 may be capable of displaying the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in one or more cycles from the time the second transition image 504 is displayed until the variable performance ends, in both the first stage and the second stage. The performance control unit 300 may also be capable of limiting the display of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in one or more cycles (being capable of displaying the variable image in less than one cycle) from the time the second transition image 504 is displayed until the variable performance ends, in both the first stage and the second stage.

In the above example, it has been explained that the temporary stop is started from a common display mode regardless of which of the three decorative patterns 41 is temporarily stopped. As an example, when a temporary stop is made by the first operation mode (see FIG. 65), the temporary stop is started from the display mode shown in FIG. 65(1) regardless of which of the three decorative patterns 41 is temporarily stopped.
Here, the display mode of a portion or the entire decorative pattern 41 when the temporary stop is initiated may differ depending on which of the three decorative patterns 41 is temporarily stopped. For example, when a temporary stop is initiated in the first operation mode, the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped in the display mode shown in FIG. 65(1), the number portion 411 of the right decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped in the display mode shown in FIG. 65(2), and the number portion 411 of the middle decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped in the display mode shown in FIG. 65(3). Even in this case, the performance control unit 300 may switch the display mode of the number portion 411 of the right decorative pattern 41 and the number portion 411 of the middle decorative pattern 41 from the display mode at the start of the temporary stop to the same display mode as the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41, thereby synchronously displaying the number portions 411 of the three decorative patterns 41.

In the above example, it has been explained that the temporary stop is started from a common display mode regardless of the variation effect. For example, when a temporary stop is made in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65), the temporary stop is started from the display mode shown in FIG. 65(1) regardless of the variation effect.
Here, the performance control unit 300 may change the display mode of part or all of the decorative pattern 41 when the temporary stop is started depending on the variable performance. For example, in a first variable performance, the temporary stop of the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41 may start from the display mode shown in Figure 65(1), and in a second variable performance different from the first variable performance, the temporary stop of the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41 may start from the display mode shown in Figure 65(2).

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may change the display mode of part or all of the decorative pattern 41 when the temporary stop (variation performance) ends, depending on the variation performance. For example, when a temporary stop is performed in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65 ), in the first variation performance, the temporary stop (variation performance) in the first operation mode ends when the temporary stop of the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41 is in the display mode shown in FIG. 65 (5), and in a second variation performance different from the first variation performance, the temporary stop (variation performance) in the first operation mode ends when the temporary stop of the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41 is in the display mode shown in FIG. 65 (4).
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the display mode of part or all of the decorative pattern 41 when the (variation performance) ends common regardless of the variation performance. As an example, when a temporary stop is performed in the first operation mode (see FIG. 65), the temporary stop (variation performance) in the first operation mode may end when the temporary stop of the number portion 411 of the left decorative pattern 41 is in the display mode shown in FIG. 65 (5), regardless of which variation performance is performed.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings (Figs. 321 to 547). Note that the following mainly describes the differences from the above-described embodiments, and explanations of the commonalities with any of the above-described embodiments may be omitted.

Furthermore, the configurations described above in the first to seventh embodiments may correspond to the configurations described later. More specifically, the left movable role piece 1151 described above corresponds to the left movable role piece 115A described later. Furthermore, the center movable role piece 1152 described above corresponds to the center movable role piece 115B described later. Furthermore, the right movable role piece 1153 described above corresponds to the right movable role piece 115C described later.
Furthermore, the second transition image 504 described above corresponds to the switching image 586 described later. Furthermore, the demo screen 523 described above corresponds to the demo image 506 described later. Furthermore, the right hit image 512 described above corresponds to the first right hit image 503 described later. Furthermore, the recovery in progress image 524 described above corresponds to the preparation in progress image 627 described later. Furthermore, the SP reach image 503 described above corresponds to the SP reach image 552 described later. Furthermore, the button operation image 510 described above corresponds to the button image 509 described later. Furthermore, the second role effect image 508 described above corresponds to the development emphasis image 554 described later. Furthermore, the first jackpot emphasis image 511 described above corresponds to the first jackpot emphasis image 566 described later. Furthermore, the third jackpot emphasis image 522 described above corresponds to the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 described later.

The corresponding configurations of the first to seventh embodiments and the eighth embodiment may be interchanged, or the configurations included in the first to seventh embodiments may be added to the corresponding configurations of the eighth embodiment.

An example will be described in which the configurations included in the first to seventh embodiments are added to the corresponding configuration of the eighth embodiment.
For example, the configuration of the decorative pattern 41 described in the eighth embodiment may be the same as the configuration of the decorative pattern 41 described in the first to seventh embodiments.
Furthermore, the operational display (operation display such as temporary stop) of the decorative pattern 41 in a specific performance situation described in the eighth embodiment may be the same operational mode as the operational display (operation display such as temporary stop (see FIG. 204, etc.)) performed according to the performance situation in the first to seventh embodiments. As an example, the operational mode of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the SP reach performance described in the eighth embodiment (operation mode of the temporary stop, period of the temporary stop, etc.) may be the same as the operational mode of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 during the execution of the SP reach performance described in the first to seventh embodiments (operation mode of the temporary stop, period of the temporary stop, etc.).

[Example of setting a fluctuation pattern]
An example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in Figure 15 will be described.
Figure 321 is a diagram showing an example of setting the fluctuation pattern and table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in Figure 15. In addition, Figure 321 shows a setting example when the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed based on winning into the first start port 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 321, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 in FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, if the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern random number is "51," this matches the variation pattern random number range of "50 to 69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. 321, and therefore "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time for this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds."

Furthermore, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a miss (when both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the reach random number value acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" allocated to the "miss" reserved number "1", or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, if the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 59", so "PR10" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.
Note that the "..." shown in the "Variation Pattern" in Figure 321 means that a variation pattern that is not shown in the figure is provided.

322 is a diagram showing an example of setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 322 shows an example of setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.
The table shown in Figure 322 provides a variation pattern according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the pending number U2 for the second special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number.
Note that the "..." shown in the "Variation Pattern" in Figure 322 means that a variation pattern that is not shown in the figure is provided.

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used to select the special symbol variation pattern based on whether the gaming ball has entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 and the game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained when the gaming ball entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, and conditions such as the presence or absence of a reach effect and the number of reserved balls. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is then included in a variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300. As described below, the presentation control unit 300 selects and executes, as the presentation when the special symbol varies, a presentation that corresponds to (can be executed within) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command.

[Example of setting a pre-determination pattern]
Next, an example of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG. 28 will be described.
Fig. 323 is a diagram showing an example of setting the pre-determination pattern and table used in the pre-determination process shown in Fig. 28. Fig. 323 shows an example of setting when the special symbol is changed based on winning the first start slot 121 in the normal gaming state.

In the table shown in Figure 323, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines the expected fluctuation pattern and the pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination results of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.
The "..." shown in the "Pre-determination pattern" in FIG. 323 means that a pre-determination pattern not shown is provided.

324 is a diagram showing an example of a setting of a pre-determination pattern and a table used in the pre-determination process. In addition, FIG. 324 shows an example of a setting when a special symbol is changed based on a winning into the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
The table shown in Figure 324 associates "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""planned variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern."

[Pre-determined effect pattern table]
325 and 326 are diagrams showing examples of pre-determination effect patterns and table settings used in pre-determination effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-determination effect selection process of FIG. 33(a). Note that FIG. 325 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, FIG. 326 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.

The pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 325, which is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in normal gaming mode, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JA1" to "JA8," "JB1" to "JB6," and "JR1" to "JR21" set using Figure 323 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AA1" to "AA8," "AB1" to "AB6," and "AR1" to "AR21."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 326, the pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JF1" to "JF5," "JG1" to "JG3," and "JH1" to "JH11" set using Figure 324 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AF1" to "AF3," "AG1" to "AG3," and "AH1" to "AH11."

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect that is performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, the pre-determined effect patterns shown in the figures include "reserved image,""displaycolor,""chanceeye,""zone,""gimmick," and "vibration." Note that "-" in each column of the table shown in the figures indicates that the corresponding effect will not be executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. The reserved image will be described in detail later.
"Display color" refers to the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, the display color of the reserved image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "white,""blue,""green,""red," and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored reserved image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Chance Eye" indicates the type of chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect that displays a chance eye based on the result of a preliminary determination process. The chance eye is three decorative symbols that are a combination of symbols of the same predetermined color and that include different numbers. The chance eye effect, for example, notifies or suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special symbol variation that follows the special symbol variation that initiated the chance eye effect. Furthermore, the chance eye effect may be performed multiple times in multiple variation effects. In the illustrated example, one of "RO1" to "RO3" is executed as the type of chance eye effect. Furthermore, the higher the number in the order of "RO1,""RO2," and "RO3," the higher the expectation level.
The chance eye may be any three specific decorative patterns 41 that notify or suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that started the chance eye performance, and the three decorative patterns 41 do not have to be the same color.

"Zone" refers to a zone effect. A zone effect is, for example, an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes. A zone effect that is performed based on a pre-determination result may be an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes that initiated the zone effect, or an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes after the special symbol change that initiated the zone effect.

"Gem" refers to a gem effect. A gem effect is an effect in which the movable gem 115 operates. The gem effect, which is performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, may be an effect that gives the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that started the gem effect, or an effect that gives the player hope for a jackpot in the special pattern variation that follows the special pattern variation that started the gem effect.

"Vibration" refers to a vibration effect. A vibration effect is an effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates. The vibration effect, which is performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, is an effect that raises the expectation that a jackpot will occur in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the vibration effect.

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determination performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 325 and 326. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determination performance pattern corresponding to the pre-determination pattern set in the pre-determination process (see Figure 28) based on the tables shown in Figures 325 and 326.
For example, in FIG. 325, if the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-determination pattern is "JR6,""AR6" is selected as the pre-determination effect pattern. In this pre-determination effect pattern "AR6," a "reserved image," a "display color," a "chance eye," a "zone," and a "gimmick" are set. That is, in the pre-determination effect pattern "AR6," a "reserved image" is displayed, the "display color" becomes "blue,""RO1" is executed as the "chance eye," a zone effect is executed, and "CH1" is executed as the "gimmick."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is no pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. In other words, in this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, no pre-determination effect is performed. However, there may be a pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. The effect control unit 300 may then use this pre-determination effect pattern table to perform a pre-determination effect when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state.

[Variable performance pattern table]
327 and 328 are diagrams showing examples of variable presentation patterns and table settings used in variable presentation pattern selection (S3813) in the presentation selection process of Fig. 38(b). Fig. 327 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the first start port 121 in the normal gaming state. Fig. 328 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.

As shown in Figure 327, the variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on a win at the first starting slot 121 during normal game play has multiple variable effect patterns set. The variable effect patterns "PA1" to "PA8," "PB1" to "PB6," and "PR1" to "PR21" set using Figure 321 above are associated one-to-one with the variable effect patterns "EA1" to "EA8," "EB1" to "EB6," and "ER1" to "ER21."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 328, the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state has multiple variable presentation patterns set. Variable presentation patterns "PF1" to "PF5," "PG1" to "PG3," and "PH1" to "PH11" set using Figure 322 above are associated one-to-one with variable presentation patterns "EF1" to "EF5," "EG1" to "EG3," and "EH1" to "EH11."

Here, the variable effect is an effect that notifies the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) in a dramatic manner by displaying a variable effect pattern and then displaying it in a stationary state.
In addition, the variable presentation patterns shown in the figure include the following settings: "final display color,""pseudoexcitement,""pseudo consecutive number of times,""reachexcitement,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""zoneexcitement,""zone,""developmentexcitement,""development,""gimmick,""button,""vibration,""promotionexcitement,""promotion," and "revival." Note that a "-" in each column of the table shown indicates that the corresponding presentation will not be executed.

Here, "final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described below). In this embodiment, the display color of the variable image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In the example shown, one of "white," "blue," "green," "red," or "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Pseudo-stimulation" refers to a pseudo-sequential stimulation effect. A pseudo-sequential stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a pseudo-sequential effect (pseudo-sequential effect). A pseudo-sequential effect is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple decorative pattern changes are being displayed during the display of one change of a special pattern (one change effect). In a pseudo-sequential effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before entering a reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then resumes the display of the decorative pattern changes. In other words, in a pseudo-sequential effect, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern temporarily stops and changes again a set number of times, and then stops to complete the display of one change of the special pattern. Here, a temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality, the pattern is slightly fluctuating. In other words, a temporary stop of the pattern is treated as a continuous change in terms of game control. Here, the term "stop" includes not only a fixed stop but also a provisional stop. The fixed stop of the symbol refers to a state in which the special symbol stops as a fixed symbol in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol.
In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display), the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" refers to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are performed. In the example shown, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is also set in relation to the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which one can expect to win. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation.

"Reach stimulation" indicates the type of reach stimulation effect. A reach stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a reach effect. In the example shown, either "RE1" or "RE2" is executed as the type of reach stimulation effect. Furthermore, in the order of "RE1" and "RE2", the larger the number, the higher the expectation level when a reach effect is executed (when the reach stimulation effect is successful).
"Normal" indicates the type of normal reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the reach effect type. In addition, the higher the number in the order of "N1", "N2", and "N3", the higher the expectation level.
"SP Reach" indicates the type of SP Reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP Reach effect. In addition, the higher the number in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the higher the expectation level.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the SPSP Reach performance.

"Zone hype" refers to a zone hype effect. The zone hype effect is an effect that hypes up the execution of a zone effect.
"Zone" indicates a zone effect.
"Development provocation" refers to a development provocation effect. The development provocation effect is an effect that encourages the execution of a development effect. The development effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game will develop into an SPSP reach.
"Development" indicates developmental performance.

"Gem" refers to a gem performance. More specifically, "before temporary stop" in a "gem" refers to a gem performance that takes place before the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a variable performance, and "after temporary stop" in a "gem" refers to a gem performance that takes place after the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a variable performance.

"Button" refers to a button effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "button" refers to a button effect that occurs before a decorative symbol temporarily stops in a variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of "button" refers to a button effect that occurs after a decorative symbol temporarily stops in a variable effect. Furthermore, a button effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. The button effect may be executed based on the results of a pre-determination process. The button effect executed based on the results of a pre-determination may be an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that initiated the button effect, or an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation that initiated the button effect.

"Vibration" refers to a vibration effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" in "vibration" refers to a vibration effect that occurs before the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" in "vibration" refers to a vibration effect that occurs after the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the variable effect. Furthermore, a vibration effect is an effect that vibrates the effect button 161. A vibration effect may be executed based on the results of a pre-determination process. A vibration effect that is executed based on the results of a pre-determination process is an effect that creates anticipation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation that initiated the vibration effect. In other words, the vibration effect may be an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of expectation in one or more variable effects.

The "promotion teaser" refers to a promotion teaser effect. The promotion teaser effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbol is changed to a decorative symbol indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state.
"Promotion" means a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative symbol indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state. In this promotion effect, for example, after the decorative symbol "444" is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol "777" is displayed as the stopped symbol.
The "revival" refers to a revival effect. The revival effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 41 of the losing numbers are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols 41 of the double numbers are stopped.

The performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 327 and 328. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 327 and 328.
For example, in FIG. 327, when the "jackpot symbol" is "jackpot symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PA1", "EA1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variation effect pattern "EA1", "pseudo-stimulation", "reach stimulation", "zone stimulation", "promotion", and "revival" are set to "-". In other words, when "EA1" is selected as the variation effect pattern, the pseudo-stimulation effect, reach stimulation effect, zone stimulation effect, promotion effect, and revival effect are not executed. Furthermore, in the variable presentation pattern "EA1,""red" is displayed as the "final display color,""2" is executed as the "pseudo consecutive number of times,""N2" is executed as "normal,""SP2" is executed as the "SP reach,""SPSPreach" is executed, "zone" is executed, "development teaser" and "development" are executed, "devices""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop" are executed, "buttons""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop" are executed, "vibration""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop" are executed, and "promotion teaser" is executed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the performance control unit 300 controls one of multiple stages (performance modes), but the same variable performance pattern tables shown in Figures 327 and 328 are used regardless of the stage. However, different variable performance pattern tables may be used for each stage.

[Produced image]
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
329, under the control of the performance control unit 300, a performance image is displayed on the image display unit 114. In this embodiment, the performance images displayed on the image display unit 114 include a decorative pattern 41, a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a variable number image 502. In addition, the image display unit 114 displays a first right-hit image 503, a time-saving remaining number image 504, a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, a menu promotion image 46, a menu image 505, a demo image 506, a first left-hit image 47, a second left-hit image 48, a second right-hit image 507, a first precursory emphasis image 508, a button image 509, a first post-operation emphasis image 510, a second post-operation emphasis image 511, a third post-operation emphasis image 512, a second precursory emphasis image 513, a first operation-in-progression emphasis image 514, a fourth After-operation emphasized image 515, fifth after-operation emphasized image 516, sixth after-operation emphasized image 517, third omen-enhanced image 518, seventh after-operation emphasized image 519, eighth after-operation emphasized image 520, ninth after-operation emphasized image 521, tenth after-operation emphasized image 522 , 11th post-operation emphasized image 523, 12th post-operation emphasized image 524, 13th post-operation emphasized image 525, 14th post-operation emphasized image 526, 4th omen emphasized image 527, 15th post-operation emphasized image 528, 16th post-operation emphasized image 529, 5th strong omen Adjustment image 530, second operation in-progression emphasis image 531, seventeenth operation post-progression emphasis image 532, eighteenth operation post-progression emphasis image 533, sixth precursor emphasis image 534, nineteenth operation post-progression emphasis image 535, first zone start image 536, first zone execution image 537, second zone start image 538, second zone execution image 613, reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, first reach eye emphasis image 542, second reach eye emphasis image 543, third reach eye emphasis image 544 , 4th reach eye emphasis image 545, 5th reach eye emphasis image 546, 6th reach eye emphasis image 547, 7th reach eye emphasis image 548, 8th reach eye emphasis image 549, 9th reach eye emphasis image 550, 1st role emphasis image 551, SP reach image 552, development image 584, development emphasis image 554, 2nd role emphasis image 555, SPSP start image 556, 1st start emphasis image 557, 2nd start emphasis image 558, 3rd start emphasis image 559, 4th start emphasis image 560, SP SP suggestion image 561, first execution highlight image 562, second execution highlight image 563, third execution highlight image 564, fourth execution highlight image 565, first jackpot highlight image 566, second jackpot highlight image 567, third jackpot highlight image 568, fourth jackpot highlight image 569, fifth jackpot highlight image 570, first button post image 571, first stop highlight image 572, second stop highlight image 573, third stop highlight image 574, fourth stop highlight image 575, second button post image 57 6, image after third button 577, image after fifth stop emphasis 578, image after sixth stop emphasis 579, image after fourth button 580, pseudo consecutive image 581, pseudo consecutive image emphasis 582, re-change notification image 583, image after first development emphasis 585, switching image 586, image after chance highlight 587, image after first start emphasis 588, image after fifth button 589, image after sixth button 590, image after first double number highlight 591, image after promotion highlight 592, image after big win start 593, image after number of rounds 594, image after round Image in the middle 595, image of start of time reduction 596, image emphasizing the first reach tease 597, image emphasizing the second doublet 598, revival image 599, image of special effect 600, image after seventh button 601, image emphasizing the seventh stop 602, image emphasizing the eighth stop 603, image emphasizing the ninth stop 604, image emphasizing the tenth stop 605, image after eighth button 606, image after ninth button 607, image emphasizing the eleventh stop 608, image emphasizing the twelfth stop 609, image emphasizing the second development tease 610, image emphasizing the second start 611, image emphasizing the first An image after pressing the 0 button 612, a third doublet emphasis image 614, a fourth doublet emphasis image 615, a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, a second reach teaser emphasis image 617, a first transition image 618, an image after pressing the eleventh button 619, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620, an image after pressing the twelfth button 621, a second transition image 622, a result image 623, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, a third reach teaser emphasis image 625, a sixth doublet emphasis image 626, a preparation in progress image 627, and a jackpot notification image 628 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 329 (1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When describing each of the three decorative symbols 41 individually, the symbol located on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative symbol 41," the symbol located in the center as the "middle decorative symbol 41," and the symbol located on the right side as the "right decorative symbol 41." When describing the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative symbols 41." When describing the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, left and right decorative symbols 41 with matching numbers, i.e., left and right decorative symbols 41 for which a reach has been achieved, may be referred to as "reach-eye decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, three decorative symbols 41 with different numbers may be referred to as "missing-eye decorative symbols 41." Furthermore, three decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as "double-digit decorative patterns 41."

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode in which character images are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers (see Figures 329 (1) and (3)), and a less decorative display mode in which letters such as numbers are displayed as the main feature (see Figures 329 (5) and (7), Figure 439 (18), etc.). The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 41, and the pattern can be identified by the images of these characters and the like. Furthermore, the less decorative decorative pattern 41 has a higher proportion of the area occupied by the characters in the decorative pattern 41 compared to the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 41 is switched according to changes in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. Although the details will be described later, for example, decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the time-saving game state, etc., and decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed in other cases.
In addition to characters such as numbers, simple pictures, images of characters, etc. may also be displayed on the less decorative decorative patterns 41. In other words, the "less decorative decorative patterns 41" shown in Figures 329(5), (7), 439(18), etc. may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative patterns 41" shown in Figures 329(1), (3), etc.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays three decorative patterns 41 in a variable manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "4"), then temporarily stops the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "2"), and then temporarily stops the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "1"). After all decorative patterns 41 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative patterns 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. Note that the combination "412" of stopped decorative patterns 41 shown in Figure 329 (1) is an example of a combination when the special pattern lottery result is a losing one. The decorative patterns 41 are also an example of a presentation pattern.

(Volume image 42)
329(1), a volume image 42 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The volume image 42 is an image that indicates the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156, which is set in the performance control unit 300. The volume image 42 will be described in detail later.

(Light intensity image 43)
329(1), a light intensity image 43 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The light intensity image 43 is an image showing the size set in the performance control unit 300 as the light intensity of the light emitted by the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable role object 115, and the performance button 161. The light intensity image 43 will be described in detail later.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in Figure 329 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed (the performance symbol is being displayed) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see Figure 6, etc.). In other words, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. When the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114), and disappears when the special symbol is displayed in a static state. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, a variable base is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.
The variable image 51 may be erased (not displayed) when the variable performance ends, or may be erased (not displayed) before the variable performance ends (during the variable performance).

The variable image 51 also changes its display mode, such as its color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than if the result is a loss.

(Pending image 52)
As shown in FIG. 329(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved image 52 based on information in a memory area in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.) corresponding to the currently reserved ball. In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the result of the preliminary determination process.
The display size of the reserved image 52 is smaller than that of the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved base is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable base of the variable image 51 and the reserved base of the variable image 52 are displayed in different ways.

When the colors of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are set to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow, they may be set so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. Furthermore, the expectation of a rainbow-colored variable image 51 or a rainbow-colored reserved image 52 may be 100%. Note that, hereinafter, the display mode of the white variable image 51 and the display mode of the white reserved image 52 may be referred to as the normal display mode.

As described above, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52. Therefore, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52 being displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 generated by a win at the first starting port 121 are displayed in an area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position further away, that is, from right to left.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are also generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 52 generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from left to right.
In this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. Furthermore, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the first starting port 121 may be displayed in a different form from the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the second starting port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the up to four pending images 52 that are displayed may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," "second pending image 52," "third pending image 52," and "fourth pending image 52," in order of their proximity to the variable image 51.

(Pending number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 329(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in the memory area corresponding to the reserved balls in RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number depending on the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. In the reserved number display 55, the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
329(1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.) based on winning at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122. The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed stationary in accordance with the stationary display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As mentioned above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in either a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of text. However, the small patterns 56 may also be displayed in a display mode that displays images such as pictures and characters in addition to text. In other words, the small patterns 56 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.

The small symbols 56 are displayed (vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122. As the small symbols 56 scroll, number images are displayed in increments of one from "1" to "9," and then the numbers are displayed again in increments of one from "1." When the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the small symbols 56 are also displayed in a static state. In the example shown, the number indicated by the statically displayed small symbols 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbols 41. To explain further, in the example of Figure 329 (1), the number corresponding to "412" on the decorative symbols 41 is displayed as the small symbols 56. The small symbols 56 can also be considered as performance symbols.

(Stage image 61)
329(1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc. This stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idols, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61.
Furthermore, the stage image 61 in this embodiment is an image that is played in a loop. More specifically, an image within a partial area (selected area) of the entire image (entire image) that forms the background of the decorative pattern 41, etc., is displayed on the image display unit 114 as the stage image 61. The selected area then moves in one direction over time, and when it reaches the edge of the entire image, it moves in the opposite direction, repeating this (looping). As a result, the stage image 61 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes over time, and the same image is repeated at regular intervals.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 selects one of the presentation modes and executes a variable presentation in the selected presentation mode. The presentation control unit 300 then displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the selected presentation mode. In this embodiment, a presentation mode is provided for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Each time the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation mode corresponding to the changed game state and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the set presentation mode. Furthermore, when a variable presentation in one presentation mode has been performed a predetermined number of times, the presentation control unit 300 switches the presentation mode and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the switched presentation mode. Therefore, the presentation mode can also be considered as the stage displayed in the stage image 61. The stage image 61 (the display mode of the stage image 61) may also be switched when a specific variable presentation (e.g., a variable presentation in which an SP reach or SPSP reach presentation is performed) is performed.
In this embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed on a layer behind other performance images such as the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, variable image 51, hold image 52, hold number display 55, small pattern 56, etc.

(Stage notification image 501)
329(1), a stage notification image 501 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The stage notification image 501 is an image that notifies or suggests the stage that has been set in the performance control unit 300. In the example shown, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Space" that notifies or suggests the stage that has been set in the performance control unit 300.

(Change count image 502)
329(1), a variation count image 502 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The variation count image 502 is an image that notifies or suggests the number of times the variation effect has been executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the special symbol has changed). In the illustrated example, the variation count image 502 displays the text "10 games," which includes the number of times the variation effect has been executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the special symbol has changed).

(First right-hand hit image 503)
As shown in FIG. 329 (5), a first right-hit image 503 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first right-hit image 503 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the example shown, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the first right-hit image 503. The first right-hit image 503 is displayed, for example, during a jackpot game and in a time-saving game state. The first right-hit image 503 will be described in detail later.

(Remaining time-saving number image 504)
As shown in Fig. 329 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a time-saving remaining number image 504. The time-saving remaining number image 504 is an image indicating the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the time-saving game state (the remaining number of variable effects in the time-saving game state). In the illustrated example, the time-saving remaining number image 504 displays the text "90 more," indicating that the remaining number of special symbol lotteries in the special time-saving game state is 90.

(Image 44 of waiting customer volume)
338(2), a customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The customer waiting volume image 44 is an image that indicates the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 when the restaurant is in a customer waiting state, which is set in the performance control unit 300. The customer waiting volume image 44 will be described in detail later.

(Image 45 of light intensity while waiting for customers)
As shown in Fig. 338 (2), a customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The customer waiting light intensity image 45 is an image that indicates the size set in the performance control unit 300 as the light intensity of the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable prop 115, and performance button 161 when the machine is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting light intensity image 45 will be described in detail later.

(Menu promotion image 46)
As shown in FIG. 338 (2), a menu promotion image 46 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu promotion image 46 is an image that prompts the user to perform an operation to display a menu image 505, which will be described later. In the example shown, the menu promotion image 46 displays an image that resembles the effect button 161 and the text "Display menu by operation." The menu promotion image 46 will be described in detail later.

(Menu image 505)
As shown in Fig. 338 (6), a menu image 505 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu image 505 is an image showing the items of effects that can be set in the effect control unit 300. The menu image 505 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the menu image 505 may be displayed in a portion of the display area of the image display unit 114 and not in the other portion.

(Demo image 506)
As shown in FIG. 338 (8), a demo image 506 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The demo image 506 is an image for advertising the pachinko gaming machine 100 when it is in a waiting state for customers. The demo image 506 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. However, the demo image 506 may be displayed in a portion of the display area of the image display unit 114 and not in the other portion. The demo image 506 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the demo image 506.

(First left-handed image 47)
As shown in FIG. 340 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a first left-hit image 47. The first left-hit image 47 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the first left-hit image 47. The first left-hit image 47 will be described in detail later.

(Second left-handed image 48)
As shown in FIG. 340 (8), the image display unit 114 displays a second left-handed hit image 48. The second left-handed hit image 48 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the second left-handed hit image 48. The second left-handed hit image 48 is also larger in display size than the first left-handed hit image 47. The second left-handed hit image 48 will be described in detail later.

(Second right-hand hit image 507)
As shown in FIG. 344 (2), a second right-hit image 507 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second right-hit image 507 is an image for urging the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the example shown, the text "right hit" is displayed as the second right-hit image 507. The second right-hit image 507 is also larger in display size than the first right-hit image 503. The second right-hit image 507 will be described in detail later.

(First precursor-enhanced image 508)
As shown in Figure 346 (1), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first precursor emphasis image 508 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, the first precursor emphasis image 508 is an image that emphasizes that a button image 509 (see Figure 346 (2)), which will be described later, will be displayed as a precursor to the display of the button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the first precursor emphasis image 508.

(Button image 509)
As shown in FIG. 346 (2), a button image 509 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button image 509 is an image that emphasizes the promotion of operating the effect button 161. The button image 509 is displayed when a button effect is being executed. The display of this button image 509 allows the player to recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the example shown, the button image 509 displays an image that resembles the effect button 161 and a gauge that indicates the valid operation period. The valid operation period is the period during which operation of the effect button 161 is accepted by the effect control unit 300 as valid. The button image 509 is displayed during the valid operation period, and if the effect button 161 is operated between the display of the button image 509 and the expiration of the valid operation period, a predetermined effect is executed. The button image 509 will be described in detail later.

(Highlighted image 510 after first operation)
As shown in Fig. 347 (10), a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the first post-operation emphasis image 510 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the first post-operation emphasis image 510.

(Second post-operation emphasized image 511)
As shown in Fig. 347 (11), a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second post-operation emphasis image 511 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the second post-operation emphasis image 511 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the second post-operation emphasis image 511.

(Highlighted image 512 after third operation)
As shown in Fig. 347 (12), a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the third post-operation emphasis image 512 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the third post-operation emphasis image 512.

(Second precursory enhanced image 513)
As shown in FIG. 349 (1), second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed on image display unit 114. Second precursor emphasis image 513 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, second precursor emphasis image 513 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as second precursor emphasis image 513.

(First operation highlight image 514)
As shown in FIG. 349 (4), a first operation highlight image 514 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first operation highlight image 514 is an image that highlights that the effect button 161 is being operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the first operation highlight image 514 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The first operation highlight image 514 is displayed around the display area of the button image 509 (the area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41) and in the area that overlaps with the display area of the button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the first operation highlight image 514.

(Fourth post-operation emphasized image 515)
As shown in Fig. 350 (10), a fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515.

(Fifth post-operation emphasized image 516)
As shown in Fig. 352 (10), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516.

(Sixth post-operation emphasized image 517)
As shown in Fig. 355 (10), a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517.

(Third precursor-enhanced image 518)
As shown in FIG. 356 (1), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed on image display unit 114. Third precursor emphasis image 518 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, third precursor emphasis image 518 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as third precursor emphasis image 518.

(7th post-operation emphasized image 519)
As shown in FIG. 357 (10), a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed over the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519.

(Eighth post-operation emphasized image 520)
As shown in FIG. 357 (11), an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed over the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520.

(9th post-operation emphasized image 521)
As shown in Fig. 363 (11), a ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521.

(10th post-operation emphasized image 522)
As shown in Fig. 366 (11), a tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522.

(Eleventh post-operation emphasized image 523)
366 (12), an eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523.

(12th post-operation emphasized image 524)
As shown in Fig. 366 (13), a twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524.

(13th post-operation emphasized image 525)
366 (14), a thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525.

(14th post-operation emphasized image 526)
368 (11), a fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526.

(Fourth precursory image 527)
As shown in FIG. 369 (1), fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed on image display unit 114. Fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is an image that emphasizes that button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the display of button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as fourth precursor emphasis image 527.

(15th post-operation emphasized image 528)
As shown in Fig. 370 (10), a fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528.

(16th post-operation emphasized image 529)
As shown in Fig. 370 (11), a sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529.

(Fifth precursory image 530)
As shown in FIG. 375 (1), a fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, the fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is an image that emphasizes that the button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the button image 509 being displayed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the fifth precursor emphasis image 530.

(Second operation highlight image 531)
As shown in FIG. 375 (6), a second operation highlight image 531 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second operation highlight image 531 is an image that highlights that the effect button 161 is being operated when the button effect is being executed. In other words, the second operation highlight image 531 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when the button effect is being executed. The second operation highlight image 531 is displayed around the display area of the button image 509 (the area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41) and in the area that overlaps with the display area of the button image 509. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the second operation highlight image 531.

(17th post-operation emphasized image 532)
As shown in FIG. 378 (25), a 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532.

(18th post-operation emphasized image 533)
382 (25), an 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light is displayed as the 18th post-operation emphasis image 533.

(Sixth precursory image 534)
As shown in FIG. 384 (1), a sixth precursor emphasis image 534 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth precursor emphasis image 534 is an image that emphasizes that a button effect will be executed as a precursor to the button effect. In other words, the sixth precursor emphasis image 534 is an image that emphasizes that the button image 509 will be displayed as a precursor to the button image 509 being displayed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the sixth precursor emphasis image 534.

(19th post-operation emphasized image 535)
385 (14), a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated when a button effect is being executed. In other words, the 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is an image that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when a button effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the 19th post-operation emphasis image 535.

(Zone 1 start image 536)
As shown in FIG. 388(1), a first zone start image 536 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first zone start image 536 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect will begin when the image stops. In the illustrated example, the first zone start image 536 displays the text "X Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Image 537 of first zone in action)
388(2), a first zone execution image 537 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first zone execution image 537 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the first zone execution image 537 displays the text "X Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Zone 2 start image 538)
As shown in FIG. 389(1), a second zone start image 538 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second zone start image 538 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect will begin. The second zone start image 538 has a different outline than the first zone start image 536 (see FIG. 388(1)). In the illustrated example, the second zone start image 538 displays the text "Y Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Second zone execution image 613)
As shown in FIG. 389 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a second zone execution image 613. The second zone execution image 613 is an image that notifies or suggests that a zone effect is being executed. The second zone execution image 613 has a different outline than the first zone execution image 537. In the illustrated example, the second zone execution image 613 displays the text "Y Zone," which includes the type of zone effect.

(Reach line image 539)
390(2), a reach line image 539 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach line image 539 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed in white as the reach line image 539.

(Reach suggestion image 540)
As shown in FIG. 390 (2), a reach suggestion image 540 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach suggestion image 540 is an image that notifies or suggests that a reach has been achieved. In this embodiment, when a reach effect is executed, the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed, thereby notifying or suggesting to the player that a reach has been achieved. In the example shown, the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "reach." Note that the reach suggestion image 540 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41, and may be displayed on a layer in front of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41.

(Reach-emphasized image 541)
As shown in FIG. 390 (2), a reach emphasis image 541 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach emphasis image 541 is an image that emphasizes the reach suggestion image 540. In other words, the reach emphasis image 541 is an image that emphasizes that a reach effect will be executed (a reach effect). In the example shown, an image that imitates light is displayed as the reach emphasis image 541 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reach suggestion image 540, on a layer in front of the reach suggestion image 540.

(First reach-eye emphasized image 542)
As shown in Fig. 390 (2), a first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the first reach-eye emphasis image 542, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Second reach-eye emphasized image 543)
As shown in Fig. 391 (2), a second reach-eye emphasis image 543 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reach-eye emphasis image 543 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The second reach-eye emphasis image 543 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the second reach-eye emphasis image 543, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Third reach-eye emphasized image 544)
As shown in Fig. 392 (2), a third reach-eye emphasis image 544 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reach-eye emphasis image 544 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The third reach-eye emphasis image 544 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the third reach-eye emphasis image 544, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Fourth reach-eye emphasized image 545)
As shown in Fig. 393 (2), a fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(5th reach-eye emphasized image 546)
As shown in Fig. 394 (2), a 5th reach-eye emphasis image 546 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 5th reach-eye emphasis image 546 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The 5th reach-eye emphasis image 546 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the 5th reach-eye emphasis image 546, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(6th reach-eye emphasized image 547)
As shown in Fig. 395 (2), a sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(7th reach-eye emphasized image 548)
As shown in Fig. 396 (2), a seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed as the seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548, surrounding the decorative pattern 41.

(Eighth reach-eye emphasized image 549)
As shown in Fig. 397 (4), an eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 as the eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549.

(9th reach-eye emphasized image 550)
As shown in FIG. 398 (2), a 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is displayed for each of the left and right decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 as the 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550.

(First highlighted image of reel 551)
As shown in FIG. 400 (3), a first reel emphasis image 551 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reel emphasis image 551 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A (reel performance). In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the first reel emphasis image 551 is displayed around the area of the display area of the image display unit 114 that overlaps with the left movable reel 115A.

(SP reach image 552)
As shown in FIG. 401 (1), an SP reach image 552 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This SP reach image 552 is an image indicating that an SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 552 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. In this embodiment, the SP reach image 552 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the SP reach image 552 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41 or the like, instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SP reach image 552 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when an SP reach effect is being executed.

(Advanced image 584)
As shown in FIG. 401(1), a development image 584 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development image 584 is an image that notifies or suggests that a development effect will be executed when it stops. In the example shown, the development image 584 displays the text "Development." As will be described later, the development image 584 is displayed as a variable display or a stationary display as part of the middle decorative pattern 41. Therefore, the development image 584 can also be considered as an effect pattern in a broad sense.

(Development-enhanced image 554)
As shown in FIG. 401 (4), a development emphasis image 554 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development emphasis image 554 is an image that emphasizes the development effect. The development emphasis image 554 can also be seen as an image that emphasizes the middle movable role object 115B (role object effect). The development emphasis image 554 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114, but may also be displayed partially on one surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the development emphasis image 554.

(Second highlighted image of reel 555)
As shown in Fig. 403 (3), a second reel emphasis image 555 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reel emphasis image 555 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 115A (reel performance). In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the second reel emphasis image 555 is displayed so as to surround the area of the display area of the image display unit 114 that overlaps with the left movable reel 115A.

(SPSP start image 556)
As shown in Fig. 405(1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP start image 556 is an image that is displayed when the SPSP reach effect starts. In the example shown, the SPSP start image 556 is displayed with the text "SPSP" in white.

(First start-up emphasized image 557)
As shown in FIG. 405 (1), a first start emphasis image 557 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first start emphasis image 557 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the first start emphasis image 557 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the example shown, the image that imitates light as the first start emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the SPSP start image 556, on a layer in front of the SPSP start image 556.

(Second start-up emphasized image 558)
As shown in Fig. 406 (1), a second start emphasis image 558 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second start emphasis image 558 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the second start emphasis image 558 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light is displayed around the SPSP start image 556 as the second start emphasis image 558.

(Third start-up emphasized image 559)
As shown in Fig. 408 (2), a third start emphasis image 559 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third start emphasis image 559 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the third start emphasis image 559 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light is displayed around the SPSP start image 556 as the third start emphasis image 559.

(Fourth start-up emphasized image 560)
As shown in FIG. 409 (2), a fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth start emphasis image 560 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In other words, the fourth start emphasis image 560 can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed so as to surround the SPSP start image 556.

(SPSP suggestion image 561)
As shown in Fig. 410 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP suggestion image 561 is an image that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win) from the display mode (display color, content of displayed text, etc.) during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. In the example shown, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in white with the text "Chance!?"

(First execution highlight image 562)
As shown in Fig. 410 (2), a first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first in-execution emphasis image 562 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the first in-execution emphasis image 562 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed around the SPSP suggestion image 561.

(Second execution highlighted image 563)
As shown in FIG. 411 (2), a second in-execution emphasis image 563 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second in-execution emphasis image 563 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the second in-execution emphasis image 563 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the example shown in the figure, an image that imitates light as the second in-execution emphasis image 563 is displayed so as to surround one character of text in the second in-execution emphasis image 563.

(Third execution highlight image 564)
As shown in Fig. 413 (2), a third in-execution emphasis image 564 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third in-execution emphasis image 564 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the third in-execution emphasis image 564 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the third in-execution emphasis image 564 is displayed around the SPSP suggestion image 561.

(Fourth execution highlight image 565)
As shown in Fig. 414 (2), a fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 is an image that emphasizes the SPSP suggestion image 561. In other words, the fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 can also be regarded as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the fourth in-execution emphasis image 565 is displayed around the SPSP suggestion image 561.

(First jackpot emphasis image 566)
As shown in FIG. 416 (5), a first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first jackpot emphasis image 566 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the example shown, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the first jackpot emphasis image 566.

(Second jackpot highlighted image 567)
As shown in FIG. 419 (5), a second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second jackpot emphasis image 567 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the second jackpot emphasis image 567.

(Third jackpot highlighted image 568)
As shown in FIG. 421 (5), a third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third jackpot emphasis image 568 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the example shown, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the third jackpot emphasis image 568.

(Fourth jackpot highlighted image 569)
As shown in FIG. 423 (5), a fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569.

(Fifth jackpot highlighted image 570)
As shown in FIG. 425 (5), a fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot). The fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed in rainbow colors as the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570.

(Image after first button 571)
As shown in FIG. 428 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a post-first button image 571. The post-first button image 571 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-first button image 571 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-first button image 571 displays the text "...", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(First stop-enhanced image 572)
As shown in FIG. 428 (7), a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first stop emphasis image 572 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an even number (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41.

(Second stop-emphasized image 573)
As shown in FIG. 428 (8), a second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second stop emphasis image 573 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that stops. In this embodiment, the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an odd number (1, 3, 5, 9, etc.) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41.

(Third stop-emphasized image 574)
As shown in Fig. 429 (9), a third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third stop emphasis image 574 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed when an even-numbered middle decorative pattern 41 (such as 2, 4, 6, or 8) stops in the first stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Fourth stop-enhanced image 575)
As shown in Fig. 430 (3), a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth stop emphasis image 575 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, in the first stage described below, when an odd-numbered middle decorative pattern 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) stops, the fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Image after second button 576)
As shown in FIG. 431 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a post-second button image 576. The post-second button image 576 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-second button image 576 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-second button image 576 displays the text "Reach?", which notifies or suggests the effect that will be executed.

(Image after third button 577)
As shown in FIG. 432 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a post-third button image 577. The post-third button image 577 is an image that is displayed after the button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-third button image 577 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-third button image 577 displays the text "Go for it!", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Fifth stop-enhanced image 578)
As shown in FIG. 432 (14), a fifth stop emphasis image 578 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth stop emphasis image 578 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the first stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the fifth stop emphasis image 578 is displayed when an odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the fifth stop emphasis image 578 is displayed so as to surround the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Sixth stop-enhanced image 579)
As shown in FIG. 435 (14), a sixth stop emphasis image 579 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth stop emphasis image 579 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the first stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the sixth stop emphasis image 579 is displayed when an even-numbered (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the sixth stop emphasis image 579 is displayed so as to surround the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Image after fourth button 580)
As shown in FIG. 436 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a post-fourth button image 580. The post-fourth button image 580 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-fourth button image 580 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-fourth button image 580 displays the text "X", which indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Pseudo-continuous image 581)
As shown in FIG. 437 (6), a pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive image 581 is an image that notifies or suggests that a pseudo consecutive effect will be performed when it stops. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed instead of the middle decorative pattern 41. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "pseudo consecutive" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive image 581. Note that, as will be described later, the pseudo consecutive image 581 is displayed as a variable display or a stopped display as part of the middle decorative pattern 41. Therefore, the pseudo consecutive image 581 can also be broadly regarded as an effect pattern.

(Pseudo-serial-enhanced image 582)
As shown in Fig. 437 (6), a pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is an image that highlights the pseudo consecutive image 581. In other words, the pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is an image that emphasizes that a pseudo consecutive effect is being executed (pseudo consecutive effect). In the example shown, an image that simulates light as the pseudo consecutive highlight image 582 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 581 and on a layer in front of the pseudo consecutive image 581 that overlaps with the display area of the pseudo consecutive image 581.

(Re-change notification image 583)
As shown in FIG. 437 (8), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 583 is an image that notifies that the decorative pattern 41 will change again due to the pseudo-consecutive effect. In the example shown, the re-change notification image 583 displays the text "x2" indicating the number of times the decorative pattern 41 will change in the change effect due to the re-change.

(First development promotion image 585)
As shown in FIG. 439 (19), a first development provocation emphasis image 585 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first development provocation emphasis image 585 is an image that emphasizes the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41. In other words, the first development provocation emphasis image 585 is an image that emphasizes the development provocation effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the first development provocation emphasis image 585 is displayed around the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Switching image 586)
As shown in FIG. 439 (22), a switching image 586 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The switching image 586 is an image for switching the background (display mode of the stage image 61) of the decorative pattern 41 and the like from the background corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect to the background (display mode of the stage image 61) before the reach effect starts in the variable effect. The switching image 586 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. The switching image 586 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, variable image 51, reserved image 52, stage image 61, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and small pattern 56.

(Chance Eye Emphasis Image 587)
As shown in FIG. 442 (4), a chance eye highlighting image 587 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The chance eye highlighting image 587 is an image that highlights the three decorative patterns 41 that are chance eyes. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the chance eye highlighting image 587 is displayed around the three decorative patterns 41. The chance eye highlighting image 587 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative patterns 41, in a layer in front of the decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the chance eye highlighting image 587 may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative patterns 41, or may be displayed on a layer different from the decorative patterns 41 (a layer behind the decorative patterns 41).

(First start emphasized image 588)
As shown in FIG. 443 (2), a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first start emphasis image 588 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that has started to change. The first start emphasis image 588 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41.

(Image after pressing the fifth button 589)
As shown in FIG. 443 (7), the image display unit 114 displays a post-fifth button image 589. The post-fifth button image 589 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-fifth button image 589 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the example shown, the post-fifth button image 589 displays the text "Super Hot!?" which suggests that there is a high probability (expectation level) that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a big win (small win).

(Image after 6th button 590)
As shown in FIG. 447 (34), the image display unit 114 displays a post-sixth button image 590. The post-sixth button image 590 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-sixth button image 590 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-sixth button image 590 displays the text "Sorry...", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(First doublet-enhanced image 591)
As shown in FIG. 452 (34), a first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative patterns 41. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the example shown, the image simulating light as the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41 and in front of the decorative patterns 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative patterns 41.

(Promotion promotion image 592)
As shown in FIG. 452 (35), a promotion highlighting image 592 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The promotion highlighting image 592 is an image that emphasizes the promotion highlighting effect. In other words, the promotion highlighting image 592 can also be seen as an image that emphasizes the three decorative patterns 41 (double-digit decorative patterns 41) in the promotion highlighting effect. The promotion highlighting image 592 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light is displayed as the promotion highlighting image 592.
The promotion highlight image 592 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. However, the promotion highlight image 592 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41.

(Jackpot start image 593)
As shown in FIG. 453 (42), a jackpot start image 593 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot start image 593 is an image that notifies the user that a jackpot game will start. In the example shown, the text "Bonus!" is displayed as the jackpot start image 593. The jackpot start image 593 indicates the type of jackpot game (for example, the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(Round number image 594)
As shown in FIG. 453 (44), a round number image 594 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 594 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being played in a jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the round number image 594 displays the text "Round 1."

(Round image 595)
As shown in FIG. 453 (44), a round-in-progress image 595 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This round-in-progress image 595 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 595 is displayed during a round in a jackpot game.

(Time-saving start image 596)
As shown in FIG. 453 (45), a time-saving start image 596 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The time-saving start image 596 is an image that notifies the start of a time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving start image 596 displays the text "Special time-saving entry!!" which suggests or notifies that the gaming state will be controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

(First reach teaser image 597)
As shown in Figure 458 (5), a first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is an image that emphasizes the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the reach stimulation effect. In other words, the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is an image that emphasizes the reach stimulation effect. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed so as to surround the left and right decorative patterns 41.

(Second doublet-enhanced image 598)
As shown in FIG. 459 (13), a second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second doublet emphasis image 598 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative patterns 41. The second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41.

(Resurrected image 599)
As shown in FIG. 460 (3), a revival image 599 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The revival image 599 is an image that suggests or notifies that a revival effect will be performed. In the example shown, the revival image 599 displays the text "Revival!!"

(Special effect image 600)
As shown in FIG. 462 (3), a special effect image 600 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The special effect image 600 is an image that is intended to draw the player's attention. The special effect image 600 is larger in display size than the decorative pattern 41. The special effect image 600 may also be displayed over the entire surface of the image display unit 114. The special effect image 600 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the text "!?" is displayed as the special effect image 600.

(Image after seventh button 601)
As shown in FIG. 467 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a seventh button post-image 601. The seventh button post-image 601 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the seventh button post-image 601 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the seventh button post-image 601 displays the text "??", which suggests that the result of the special pattern lottery is a loss.

(Seventh stop-enhanced image 602)
As shown in FIG. 467 (7), a seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh stop emphasis image 602 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an even number (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) stops in the second stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41.

(Eighth stop-enhanced image 603)
As shown in FIG. 467 (8), an eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth stop emphasis image 603 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed when either the left or right decorative pattern 41 that is an odd number (1, 3, 5, 9, etc.) stops in the second stage described below. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41.

(Ninth stop-enhanced image 604)
As shown in FIG. 468 (9), a ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The ninth stop emphasis image 604 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, in the second stage described below, the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed when an even-numbered (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) middle decorative pattern 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Tenth stop-enhanced image 605)
As shown in FIG. 469 (3), a tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth stop emphasis image 605 is an image that emphasizes the stopping decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, in the second stage described below, the tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed when an odd-numbered middle decorative pattern 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) stops. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed around the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Image after 8th button 606)
As shown in FIG. 470 (6), the image display unit 114 displays an eighth button post-image 606. The eighth button post-image 606 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the eighth button post-image 606 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the text "Expectations?" is displayed as the eighth button post-image 606.

(Image after 9th button 607)
As shown in FIG. 471 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a post-ninth button image 607. The post-ninth button image 607 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-ninth button image 607 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-ninth button image 607 displays the text "Can it work?", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Eleventh stop-enhanced image 608)
As shown in FIG. 471 (14), an eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the second stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is displayed when an odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the eleventh stop emphasis image 608 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.

(12th stop-enhanced image 609)
As shown in FIG. 473 (14), a twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In this embodiment, when a normal reach effect in the second stage described below is executed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is not executed, the twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is displayed when an even-numbered (2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) middle decorative symbol 41 stops. In the example shown in the figure, an image that resembles light as the twelfth stop emphasis image 609 is displayed so as to surround the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Second development promotion image 610)
As shown in FIG. 477 (2), a second development promotion emphasis image 610 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second development promotion emphasis image 610 is an image that emphasizes the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41. In other words, the second development promotion emphasis image 610 is an image that emphasizes the development promotion effect. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the second development promotion emphasis image 610 is displayed so as to surround the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41.

(Second start emphasized image 611)
As shown in FIG. 480 (2), a second start emphasis image 611 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second start emphasis image 611 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that will start to change. The second start emphasis image 611 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41.

(Image after 10th button 612)
As shown in FIG. 480 (7), the image display unit 114 displays a post-tenth button image 612. The post-tenth button image 612 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-tenth button image 612 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the example shown, the post-tenth button image 612 displays the text "Big Chance!?" which suggests that there is a high probability (expectation level) that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a big win (small win).

(Third doublet emphasized image 614)
As shown in Fig. 494 (9), a third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third doublet emphasis image 614 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative patterns 41. The third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41.

(Fourth doublet emphasized image 615)
As shown in FIG. 497 (20), a fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative patterns 41. The fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the fourth duplicated number emphasis image 615 is displayed around the decorative patterns 41 and in front of the decorative patterns 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative patterns 41.

(13th stop emphasis image 616)
As shown in FIG. 498 (3), a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopping. The thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In this embodiment, the thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third stage, which will be described later. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed below the decorative pattern 41.

(Second reach teasing emphasis image 617)
As shown in FIG. 500 (3), a second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is an image that emphasizes the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the reach stimulation effect. In other words, the second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is an image that emphasizes the reach stimulation effect. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative patterns 41.

(First transitional image 618)
As shown in FIG. 500 (5), a first transition image 618 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first transition image 618 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect being executed will transition from a normal reach effect to an SPSP reach effect. In this embodiment, the first transition image 618 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the first transition image 618 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the first transition image 618 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when the first transition image 618 is displayed.

(Image 619 after pressing button 11)
As shown in FIG. 501 (11), an eleventh button post-image 619 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh button post-image 619 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the eleventh button post-image 619 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the eleventh button post-image 619 displays the text "No good...", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(5th repeated number emphasized image 620)
As shown in FIG. 503 (14), a fifth duplicated number emphasized image 620 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth duplicated number emphasized image 620 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative pattern 41. The fifth duplicated number emphasized image 620 is displayed for each of three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the fifth duplicated number emphasized image 620 is displayed so as to surround the decorative pattern 41.

(Image after 12th button 621)
As shown in FIG. 505 (6), a post-12th button image 621 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The post-12th button image 621 is an image that is displayed after a button effect is executed. In this embodiment, the post-12th button image 621 is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button effect. In the illustrated example, the post-12th button image 621 displays the text "So close!", which suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Second transitional image 622)
As shown in FIG. 508 (5), a second transition image 622 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second transition image 622 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal game state via the second transition image 622. The second transition image 622 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. The second transition image 622 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, the remaining time-saving number image 504, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56, etc. In the illustrated example, an image resembling a door is displayed as the second transition image 622.

(Result image 623)
As shown in FIG. 508 (5), a result image 623 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The result image 623 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result image 623 is displayed when the second transition image 622 is displayed after a jackpot game has been played. Furthermore, if multiple jackpot games have been played before the second transition image 622 is displayed, the result image 623 shows the cumulative results of these multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 623 displays the text "TOTAL 3 times," which indicates that three jackpot games have been played, and the text "3024 points obtained," which corresponds to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game.

(14th stop-enhanced image 624)
As shown in FIG. 510 (3), a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopping. The fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In this embodiment, the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the fourth stage, which will be described later. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed around the decorative pattern 41.

(Third reach teasing image 625)
As shown in FIG. 515 (4), a third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is an image that emphasizes the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the reach prompting effect. In other words, the third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is an image that emphasizes the reach prompting effect. In the example shown, an image that imitates light as the third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is displayed so as to surround the left and right decorative symbols 41.

(6th doublet emphasized image 626)
As shown in FIG. 516 (12), a sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is an image that emphasizes the duplicated number decorative pattern 41. In this embodiment, when "777", which is a duplicated number decorative pattern 41, stops in the variable performance that started from the fourth stage, the sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed. The sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, an image that simulates light as the sixth duplicated number emphasis image 626 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and is displayed in front of the decorative pattern 41.

(Image 627 in preparation)
As shown in Fig. 528 (9), a preparation image 627 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The preparation image 627 is an image that notifies or suggests that preparation for restoration is underway when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being turned off. The preparation image 627 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the preparation image 627 displays the text "preparing."

(Jackpot notification image 628)
As shown in FIG. 531 (14), a jackpot notification image 628 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot notification image 628 is an image that notifies or suggests that a jackpot game is being played. The jackpot notification image 628 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In the example shown, the text "jackpot in progress" is displayed as the jackpot notification image 628.

In this embodiment, the first aura-enhanced image 508, the second aura-enhanced image 513, the third aura-enhanced image 518, the fourth aura-enhanced image 527, the fifth aura-enhanced image 530, and the sixth aura-enhanced image 534 are each different images (having different display modes).
In addition, in this embodiment, the first post-operation emphasis image 510, the second post-operation emphasis image 511, the third post-operation emphasis image 512, the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515, the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516, the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521, the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522, the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523, the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524, the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532, the eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and the nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 are each different images (having different display modes).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reach eye emphasis image 542, the second reach eye emphasis image 543, the third reach eye emphasis image 544, the fourth reach eye emphasis image 545, the fifth reach eye emphasis image 546, the sixth reach eye emphasis image 547, the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548, the eighth reach eye emphasis image 549, the ninth reach eye emphasis image 550, the first stop emphasis image 572, the second stop emphasis image 573, the third stop emphasis image 574, the fourth stop emphasis image 575, the fifth stop emphasis image 578, the sixth stop emphasis image 579, the pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, the first development tease emphasis image 585, the chance eye emphasis image 587, the first start emphasis image 588, the first doublet emphasis image 590, the Image 591, reach teaser emphasis image 597, second doublet emphasis image 598, seventh stop emphasis image 602, eighth stop emphasis image 603, ninth stop emphasis image 604, tenth stop emphasis image 605, eleventh stop emphasis image 608, twelfth stop emphasis image 609, second development teaser emphasis image 610, second start emphasis image 611, third doublet emphasis image 614, fourth doublet emphasis image 615, thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, second reach teaser emphasis image 617, fifth doublet emphasis image 620, fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, third reach teaser emphasis image 625, and sixth doublet emphasis image 626 are all different images (different display modes).

Furthermore, the first button rear image 571, the second button rear image 576, the third button rear image 577, the fourth button rear image 580, the fifth button rear image 589, the sixth button rear image 590, the seventh button rear image 601, the eighth button rear image 606, the ninth button rear image 607, the tenth button rear image 612, the eleventh button rear image 619, and the twelfth button rear image 621 may all be displayed across the entirety of one layer in the image display unit 114.

In the following description, when the volume image 42 and the customer waiting volume image 44 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as volume images.
In the following description, when the light intensity image 43 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as light intensity images.
In the following, when the first right-hit image 503 and the second right-hit image 507 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as right-hit images.
In the following, when the first left-handed hit image 47 and the second left-handed hit image 48 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as left-handed hit images.

In addition, in the following, when the first aura-enhanced image 508, the second aura-enhanced image 513, the third aura-enhanced image 518, the fourth aura-enhanced image 527, the fifth aura-enhanced image 530, and the sixth aura-enhanced image 534 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as aura-enhanced images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first post-operation emphasis image 510, the second post-operation emphasis image 511, the third post-operation emphasis image 512, the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515, the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516, the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521, the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522, the eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523, the twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524, the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532, the eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and the nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 without making any particular distinction between them, they may be simply referred to as post-operation emphasis images.
In the following description, when the first operation-in-progress highlight image 514 and the second operation-in-progress highlight image 531 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as operation-in-progress highlight images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first button post image 571, the second button post image 576, the third button post image 577, the fourth button post image 580, the fifth button post image 589, the sixth button post image 590, the seventh button post image 601, the eighth button post image 606, the ninth button post image 607, the tenth button post image 612, the eleventh button post image 619, and the twelfth button post image 621 without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as button post images.

Furthermore, in the following, when the first stop emphasis image 572, the second stop emphasis image 573, the third stop emphasis image 574, the fourth stop emphasis image 575, the fifth stop emphasis image 578, the sixth stop emphasis image 579, the seventh stop emphasis image 602, the eighth stop emphasis image 603, the ninth stop emphasis image 604, the tenth stop emphasis image 605, the eleventh stop emphasis image 608, the twelfth stop emphasis image 609, the thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, and the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as stop emphasis images.
In the following description, when the first development promotion emphasis image 585 and the second development promotion emphasis image 610 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as development promotion emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when the first reach-eye emphasis image 542, the second reach-eye emphasis image 543, the third reach-eye emphasis image 544, the fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545, the fifth reach-eye emphasis image 546, the sixth reach-eye emphasis image 547, the seventh reach-eye emphasis image 548, the eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549, and the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach-eye emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when the first doublet emphasized image 591, the second doublet emphasized image 598, the third doublet emphasized image 614, the fourth doublet emphasized image 615, the fifth doublet emphasized image 620, and the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as doublet emphasized images.

In addition, in the following, when the first jackpot emphasis image 566, the second jackpot emphasis image 567, the third jackpot emphasis image 568, the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, and the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as jackpot emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first start-up emphasis image 557, the second start-up emphasis image 558, the third start-up emphasis image 559, and the fourth start-up emphasis image 560 without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as start-up emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when describing the first execution highlight image 562, the second execution highlight image 563, the third execution highlight image 564, and the fourth execution highlight image 565 without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as start-time highlight images.
In the following description, when the first start emphasis image 588 and the second start emphasis image 611 are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be simply referred to as start emphasis images.
In addition, in the following, when the first reach promotion emphasis image 597, the second reach promotion emphasis image 617, and the third reach promotion emphasis image 625 are described without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach promotion emphasis images.
In the following, when the first reel-emphasized image 551 and the second reel-emphasized image 555 are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reel-emphasized images.

(emphasis)
Next, the emphasis effect will be described. In this embodiment, the emphasis effect is executed. The emphasis effect is an effect that emphasizes a specific effect target. Examples of the specific effect target include the decorative pattern 41, the button image 509 (button effect), the reach suggestion image 540, the SPSP start image 556, the SPSP suggestion image 561, the pseudo consecutive image 581, the movable role object 115, the operation of the effect button 161, the operation of the effect button 161, the role object effect, the development effect, the reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (the execution of a jackpot game), the pseudo consecutive effect, and the promotion teasing effect.

When highlighting effects are realized using the image display unit 114, the highlighting effects include the first precursor highlighting image 508, the button highlighting portion 509c of the button image 509, the first post-operation highlighting image 510, the second post-operation highlighting image 511, the third post-operation highlighting image 512, the second precursor highlighting image 513, the first during-operation highlighting image 514, the fourth post-operation highlighting image 515, the fifth post-operation highlighting image 516, the sixth post-operation highlighting image 517, the third precursor highlighting image 518, the seventh post-operation highlighting image 519, the eighth post-operation highlighting image 520, the ninth post-operation highlighting image 521, the tenth post-operation highlighting image 522, the eleventh post-operation highlighting image 523, the twelfth post-operation highlighting image 524, the thirteenth post-operation highlighting image 525, the fourteenth post-operation highlighting image 526, the fourth precursor highlighting image 527, the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528, 16th post-operation emphasis image 529, 5th precursor emphasis image 530, 2nd during-operation emphasis image 531, 17th post-operation emphasis image 532, 18th post-operation emphasis image 533, 6th precursor emphasis image 534, 19th post-operation emphasis image 535, reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, 1st reach eye emphasis image 542, 2nd reach eye emphasis image 543, 3rd reach eye emphasis image 544, 4th reach eye emphasis image 545, 5th reach eye emphasis image 546, 6th reach eye emphasis image 547, 7th reach eye emphasis image 548, 8th reach eye emphasis image 549, 9th reach eye emphasis image 550, 1st role emphasis image 551, development emphasis image 554, 2nd role emphasis image 555, S PSP start image 556, first start emphasis image 557, second start emphasis image 558, third start emphasis image 559, fourth start emphasis image 560, SPSP suggestion image 561, first execution emphasis image 562, second execution emphasis image 563, third execution emphasis image 564, fourth execution emphasis image 565, first jackpot emphasis image 566, second jackpot emphasis image 567, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570, first stop emphasis image 572, second stop emphasis image 573, third stop emphasis image 574, fourth stop emphasis image 575, fifth stop emphasis image 578, sixth stop emphasis image 579, pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, first development teaser emphasis image 585, strong chance eye The image display unit 114 displays a tone image 587, a first start emphasis image 588, a first doublet emphasis image 591, a promotion teaser emphasis image 592, a first reach teaser emphasis image 597, a second doublet emphasis image 598, a seventh stop emphasis image 602, an eighth stop emphasis image 603, a ninth stop emphasis image 604, a tenth stop emphasis image 605, an eleventh stop emphasis image 608, a twelfth stop emphasis image 609, a second development teaser emphasis image 610, a second start emphasis image 611, a third doublet emphasis image 614, a fourth doublet emphasis image 615, a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, a second reach teaser emphasis image 617, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, a third reach teaser emphasis image 625, a sixth doublet emphasis image 626, and the like.

An example of the emphasis effect will be described below. When the emphasis effect is realized by displaying the first stop emphasis image 572 (see FIG. 428 (7)), the target of emphasis (specific target of emphasis) by this emphasis effect is the decorative pattern 41.
In this embodiment, by executing an emphasis effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific effect target.

(Stage-specific production images)
Next, the effect images displayed for each stage (effect mode) will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays a specific performance image in a display mode that corresponds to the stage.
Figure 329 shows the effect images displayed for each stage.
329(1) is a diagram showing the effect image in the first stage. In the first stage, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61. In addition, in the first stage, a girl character is added to the decorative pattern 41, thereby creating a highly decorative decorative pattern 41.

329(2) shows a stage notification image 501 and a change count image 502 in the first stage. The stage notification image 501 is provided with an identifying portion 501a and an emphasizing portion 501b.
The identification section 501a is an image for identifying the stage (performance mode) set by the performance control section 300. The identification section 501a in the first stage is formed in a rectangular shape. The identification section 501a in the first stage also has the text "Space" written in black to identify the stage.
The highlighting portion 501b is an image that highlights the identifying portion 501a. The highlighting portion 501b can also be regarded as an image that highlights the stage notification image 501. The highlighting portion 501b in the first stage is an image in which arch-shaped portions are arranged side by side to surround the identifying portion 501a.

As shown in FIG. 329(2), the variation frequency image 502 is provided with a recognition section 502a and an emphasis section 502b.
The indicator 502a is an image for identifying the number of times the variable effect has been executed in the normal game mode (the number of times the special symbol has changed). The indicator 502a is rectangular and has the text "10 games" to identify the number of times the variable effect has been executed in the normal game mode (the number of times the special symbol has changed).
The highlighting portion 502b is an image that highlights the identification portion 502a. The highlighting portion 502b can also be regarded as an image that highlights the fluctuation count image 502. The highlighting portion 502b is an image that is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame made of solid lines and is arranged so as to surround the identification portion 502a.

Figure 329 (3) is a diagram showing the presentation image in the second stage. In the second stage, a moving image with a sky theme is displayed as the stage image 61. In addition, in the second stage, a girl character is added to the decorative pattern 41, creating a highly decorative decorative pattern 41. The display manner of the decorative pattern 41 differs between the first stage and the second stage in that the decoration of the character added to the decorative pattern 41 is different.

329(4) shows a stage notification image 501 and a change count image 502 in the second stage. The identification portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 in the second stage has the same shape as the identification portion 501a in the first stage. However, the identification portion 501a in the second stage differs from the identification portion 501a in the first stage in that the text "empty" that identifies the stage is displayed in light blue.
The highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 in the second stage is an image in which triangular portions are arranged so as to surround the indicator portion 501a.
Furthermore, the identification portion 502a and the emphasis portion 502b of the change count image 502 in the second stage are displayed in the same manner as the identification portion 502a and the emphasis portion 502b of the change count image 502 in the first stage.

Figure 329 (5) shows the effect image in the third stage. In the third stage, a moving image with a sea theme is displayed as the stage image 61. Also displayed in the third stage are a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, a stage notification image 501, a first right-hit image 503, and a remaining number of times for time-saving play image 504.

329(6) shows a stage notification image 501 and a remaining time-saving number image 504 for the third stage. The indicator 501a of the stage notification image 501 for the third stage has the same shape as the indicator 501a for the first stage and the indicator 501a for the second stage. However, the indicator 501a for the third stage differs from the indicator 501a for the first stage and the indicator 501a for the second stage in that the text "ocean" identifying the stage is displayed in blue.
The highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 in the third stage is a ring-shaped image that surrounds the indicator portion 501a.

As shown in FIG. 329(6), the remaining time-saving number image 504 has an indicator 504a and an emphasis portion 504b.
The indicator 504a is an image for identifying the remaining number of times for special symbol lotteries in the time-shortened game state (the remaining number of variable effects in the time-shortened game state). The indicator 504a is rectangular and has the text "90 more" that identifies the remaining number of times for special symbol lotteries in the time-shortened game state (the remaining number of variable effects in the time-shortened game state).
The highlighting portion 504b is an image that highlights the indicator 504a. The highlighting portion 504b can also be regarded as an image that highlights the remaining time-saving count image 504. The highlighting portion 504b is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame made up of dotted lines and is an image that is arranged to surround the indicator 504a.

Figure 329 (7) shows the effect image in the fourth stage. In the fourth stage, a moving image with a grassland theme is displayed as the stage image 61. Also displayed in the fourth stage are a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, a stage notification image 501, a first right-hit image 503, and a remaining number of times for time reduction image 504. In the third and fourth stages, the decorative pattern 41 and the first right-hit image 503 are displayed in the same manner.

329(8) shows a stage notification image 501 and a remaining time-reduction number image 504 for the fourth stage. The identification portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 for the fourth stage has the same shape as the identification portion 501a for the first stage, the identification portion 501a for the second stage, and the identification portion 501a for the third stage. On the other hand, the identification portion 501a for the fourth stage differs from the identification portion 501a for the first stage, the identification portion 501a for the second stage, and the identification portion 501a for the third stage in that the text "Grassland" identifying the stage is displayed in green.
The highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 in the fourth stage is a rectangular image surrounding the indicator portion 501a.
Furthermore, the indicator 504a and the highlighting portion 504b of the remaining time-saving number image 504 in the fourth stage have the same display form as the indicator 504a and the highlighting portion 504b of the remaining time-saving number image 504 in the third stage.

In addition, in the first to fourth stages, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed in the same manner. However, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56 may be displayed in different manners for each stage.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 have different display sizes in each stage, but are not limited to this. In each stage, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may have the same display size.
In addition, in this embodiment, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 may be displayed, but in the first to fourth stages, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in the same manner.

(Movement of the variable image)
Next, the operation of the variable image 51 will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 in various operation modes according to the display color. More specifically, the performance control unit 300 periodically displays the variable image 51 in various operation modes according to the display color.
Figure 330 is a diagram showing the operating mode of the variable image 51 in the normal display mode.
As shown in FIG. 330(1), the variable image 51 in the normal display mode is formed in a spherical shape. The variable image 51 in the normal display mode periodically rotates clockwise. In this embodiment, the rotation period of the variable image 51 in the normal display mode is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the variable image 51 in the normal display mode may be any time.

The varying image 51 shown in Fig. 330(2) is rotated by a quarter of a rotation relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1). At this time, a quarter of a cycle has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1).
The variable image 51 shown in Fig. 330(3) is rotated halfway relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1). At this time, half a cycle has passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1).
The varying image 51 shown in Fig. 330(4) is rotated by 3/4 of a rotation relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1). At this time, 3/4 of a cycle has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1).

The dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 330(5) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1). At this time, one cycle has passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 330(1). After this, the dynamic image 51 continues to display the movements shown in Figs. 330(2) to (5).
As described above, the variable image 51 in the normal display mode rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 330 (2) to (5).
In addition, the pending image 52 in the normal display mode may also be displayed in the same manner as the variable image 51 in the normal display mode.

Figure 331 is a diagram showing the operating mode of the blue variable image 51.
As shown in Figure 331 (1), a blue variation image 51 has an identification section 51a and an emphasis section 51b.
The identification unit 51a is a portion for identifying the display color of the variable image 51. The identification unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The identification unit 51a periodically rotates in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the identification unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the identification unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is a portion that highlights the identifying portion 51a. The highlighting portion 51b can also be considered as a portion that highlights the varying image 51. The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a crown shape. The highlighting portion 51b periodically oscillates in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. The oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b is 1.5 seconds. That is, the oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the rotation period of the identifying portion 51a. However, the oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the rotation period of the identifying portion 51a.

The identification portion 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Figure 331 (2) is rotated relative to the display mode shown in Figure 331 (1).
The highlighting portion 51b has also moved to the right side relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1). At this point, a quarter of the oscillation period of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1).

The identification portion 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Figure 331 (3) is further rotated relative to the display mode shown in Figure 331 (2).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b moves to the left in the display mode shown in Fig. 331(2) and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 331(1). At this time, a half cycle of the oscillation of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1).

The identification portion 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Figure 331 (4) is further rotated relative to the display mode shown in Figure 331 (3).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b has moved to the left in the display mode shown in Fig. 331(3). At this time, ¾ of a period of the oscillation of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1).

The identification portion 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Figure 331 (5) is further rotated relative to the display mode shown in Figure 331 (4).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b moves to the right in the display mode shown in Fig. 331(4), and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 331(1). At this point, one period of oscillation by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1). After this, the highlighting section 51b continues to repeat the motion display shown in Figs. 331(2) to (5).

The indicator 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 331(6) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1). At this time, one rotation cycle by the indicator 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 331(1). After this, the indicator 51a continues to repeat the operation display shown in Fig. 331(2) to (6). In addition, the highlighting portion 51b has moved to the right relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 331(5).
As described above, in the blue variable image 51, the identification section 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 331 (2) to (6), and the highlighting section 51b oscillates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 331 (2) to (5).

The blue pending image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the blue variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.

Figure 332 is a diagram showing the operating mode of the green variable image 51.
As shown in Figure 332 (1), the green variable image 51 has an identification section 51a and an emphasis section 51b.
The recognition unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The recognition unit 51a rotates periodically in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the recognition unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the recognition unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a crown shape with a curved top, and has a different display form from the highlighting portion 51b of the blue variation image 51. The highlighting portion 51b also moves periodically in the left-right direction. The period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b is 1 second. That is, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the period of rotation by the identification portion 51a. However, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the period of rotation by the identification portion 51a.

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 332(2) has rotated a quarter of a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1). At this time, a quarter of a rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b has moved to the left in the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1). At this time, a half cycle of the movement of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 332(3) has rotated half a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1). At this time, a half cycle of rotation by the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b has been moved to the right in the display mode shown in Fig. 332(2), and is now positioned in the same position as in Fig. 332(1). At this point, one period of movement by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 332(4) has rotated 3/4 of the time from the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1). At this time, 3/4 of the rotation period of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b moves to the left compared to the display mode shown in FIG. 332(3).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 332(5) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1). At this time, one rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b has been moved to the right in the display mode shown in Fig. 332(4), and is now positioned in the same position as in Fig. 332(3). At this point, two periods of movement by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 332(1).
As described above, in the green variable image 51, the identification section 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 332 (2) to (5), and the highlighting section 51b moves periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 332 (2) to (3).

The green pending image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the green variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.

Figure 333 is a diagram showing the operating mode of the red variable image 51.
As shown in Figure 333 (1), a red fluctuation image 51 has an identification section 51a and an emphasis section 51b.
The recognition unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The recognition unit 51a rotates periodically in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the recognition unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the recognition unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a lightning bolt shape and has a display mode different from that of the highlighting portion 51b of the blue variation image 51 and that of the green variation image 51. Furthermore, when the highlighting portion 51b moves from the top to the bottom, the display position is switched to the top and then moved to the bottom again. The highlighting portion 51b operates periodically by repeating this movement and switching of the display position. The operation period of the highlighting portion 51b is 0.5 seconds. That is, the operation period of the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the rotation period of the identification portion 51a. However, the operation period of the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the rotation period of the identification portion 51a.

The identification portion 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Figure 333 (2) is rotated relative to the display mode shown in Figure 333 (1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b has been moved downwards with respect to the display mode shown in FIG. 333(1).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 333(3) is further rotated from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(2), thereby rotating a quarter of the way from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1). At this time, a quarter of a rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is arranged in the same position as in Fig. 333(1) by switching the display position from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(2). At this time, one cycle of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 333(4) has rotated half a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1). At this time, a half cycle of rotation by the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved downward and its display position is switched from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(3) to the same position as in Fig. 333(3). At this time, two periods of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).

The indicator 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 333(5) is rotated 3/4 of the time from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1). At this time, 3/4 of a rotation cycle of the indicator 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved downward and its display position is switched from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(4) to the same position as in Fig. 333(4). At this time, three periods of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 333(6) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1). At this time, one rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved downward and its display position is switched from the display mode shown in Fig. 333(5) to the same position as in Fig. 333(5). At this time, four periods of the operation display by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 333(1).
As described above, in the red variable image 51, the identification unit 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 333 (2) to (6), and the highlighting unit 51b operates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 333 (2) to (3).

The red pending image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the red variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the pending image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.

Figure 334 is a diagram showing the operating mode of the rainbow-colored variable image 51.
As shown in FIG. 334(1), a rainbow-colored variable image 51 has a distinguishing portion 51a and an emphasizing portion 51b.
The recognition unit 51a is formed in a spherical shape. The recognition unit 51a rotates periodically in a clockwise direction. The rotation period of the recognition unit 51a is 2 seconds. However, the rotation period of the recognition unit 51a may be any time period.
The highlighting portion 51b is formed in a spherical shape smaller than the identifying portion 51a, and has a display mode different from the highlighting portion 51b of the blue fluctuation image 51, the highlighting portion 51b of the green fluctuation image 51, and the highlighting portion 51b of the red fluctuation image 51. The highlighting portion 51b periodically moves counterclockwise along the outer periphery of the identifying portion 51a. The period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b is 1 second. That is, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b in this embodiment is shorter than the period of rotation by the identifying portion 51a. However, the period of movement by the highlighting portion 51b may be longer than or the same as the period of rotation by the identifying portion 51a.

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 334(2) has rotated a quarter of a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1). At this time, a quarter of a rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).
The highlighting portion 51b has moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1) and is now positioned below the indicator portion 51a. At this point, a half cycle of the movement of the highlighting portion 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 334(3) has rotated half a turn relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1). At this time, a half cycle of rotation by the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 334(2), and is thus positioned at the same position as in Fig. 334(1). At this time, one period of movement by the highlighting section 51b has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).

The identification unit 51a of the dynamic image 51 shown in Fig. 334(4) has rotated 3/4 of the time from the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1). At this time, 3/4 of the rotation period of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).
Moreover, the highlighting portion 51b is moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in FIG. 334(3), and is thus positioned in the same position as in FIG. 334(2).

The identification unit 51a of the variable image 51 shown in Fig. 334(5) has rotated once relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1). At this time, one rotation cycle of the identification unit 51a has elapsed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).
Moreover, the highlighting section 51b is moved counterclockwise relative to the display mode shown in Fig. 334(4), and is thus positioned at the same position as in Fig. 334(3). At this time, two periods of movement by the highlighting section 51b have passed since the display mode shown in Fig. 334(1).
As described above, in the rainbow-colored variable image 51, the identification section 51a rotates periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 334 (2) to (5), and the highlighting section 51b moves periodically by repeatedly displaying the display modes shown in Figures 334 (2) to (3).

The rainbow-colored reserved image 52 may also be displayed in the same manner as the rainbow-colored variable image 51. In this case, the distinguishing portion 51a and the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51 correspond to the distinguishing portion 52a and the highlighting portion 52b of the variable image 52, respectively. The distinguishing portion 52a of the reserved image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the distinguishing portion 51a of the variable image 51. The highlighting portion 52b of the reserved image 52 is displayed in the same manner at the same cycle as the highlighting portion 51b of the variable image 51.
Furthermore, the period of operation display of the variable image 51 (reserved image 52) in the normal display mode, the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the blue variable image 51 (reserved image 52), the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the green variable image 51 (reserved image 52), the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the red variable image 51 (reserved image 52), and the identification section 51a (identification section 52a) of the rainbow variable image 51 (reserved image 52) may be the same as or different from each other.
Furthermore, the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the blue changing image 51 (reserved image 52), the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the green changing image 51 (reserved image 52), the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the red changing image 51 (reserved image 52), and the highlighting portion 51b (highlighting portion 52b) of the rainbow changing image 51 (reserved image 52) may have the same period of operation display, or may have different periods of operation display.

(Volume and light intensity images)
Next, the volume image and the light intensity image will be described.
335 is a diagram showing the display mode of the volume image 42 in response to the player's operation of the effect key 162. In the example shown in FIG. 335, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbols is stopped (the variation effect is not being executed). Also, in FIG. 335 (1) to (8), the area in the image display section 114 where the volume image 42 is displayed and the surrounding area of this area are shown enlarged.
As shown in FIG. 335(1), a stage image 61 and decorative symbols 41 corresponding to the first stage are displayed. This stage image 61 shows "☆" marks and "◯" marks. At this time, the volume image 42 is not displayed. At this time, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 is set to "4."

Next, when the player presses the upper key of the effect key 162 (see Figure 3 (b)), the volume is set to "5" (the volume increases). In this case, as shown in Figure 335 (2), a volume image 42 is displayed. This volume image 42 has a gauge portion 421, a volume identification portion 422, an object identification portion 423, a frame portion 424, and a background portion 425. At this time, a volume 5 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the volume set in the effect control portion 300 is "5."

The gauge section 421 indicates a number recognizable to the player as the number of levels of volume set by the performance control section 300. In this embodiment, five rectangular frames are displayed as the gauge section 421, so that the player can recognize that there are five levels of volume set by the performance control section 300.
The volume identification section 422 identifies the level of volume set in the performance control section 300. The volume identification section 422 is displayed by filling the inside of the frame displayed as the gauge section 421 in black. In this embodiment, the level of volume set in the performance control section 300 is identified to the player by the number of filled-in areas as the volume identification section 422 among the frames displayed as the gauge section 421. In the example shown in the figure, all five frames of the gauge section 421 are filled in as the volume identification section 421, which allows the player to recognize that the volume set in the performance control section 300 is "5."

The object identifying section 423 identifies an object that is notified or suggested by the volume image 42. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles the speaker 156 is displayed as the object identifying section 423.
The frame portion 424 forms the outer frame of the volume image 42. The frame portion 424 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends in the vertical direction.
The background portion 425 is the background of the volume image 42. In other words, the background portion 425 is the background of the gauge portion 421, the volume identification portion 422, and the object identification portion 423 in the area surrounded by the frame portion 424.

The volume image 42 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 in the image display section 114. Therefore, the stage image 61 and the volume image 42 are displayed in an overlapping manner in the image display section 114.
In this embodiment, the volume identification portion 422 and the target identification portion 423 are displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the volume image 42 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the volume identification portion 422 or the target identification portion 423 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the background portion 425 is displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the volume identification portion 422 and the target identification portion 423. Therefore, even when the volume image 42 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 425 is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 425 is easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the volume identification portion 422 or the target identification portion 423.

Next, when the player presses the upper key of the effect keys 162, the volume remains at "5" (the volume does not change). In this case, as shown in FIG. 335 (3), the display mode of the volume identification unit 422 does not change. Also, at this time, no sound is output to notify the volume set in the effect control unit 300.
Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "4" (the volume decreases). In this case, as shown in FIG. 335 (4), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the uppermost frame of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 4 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "4."

Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "3." In this case, as shown in FIG. 335 (5), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the second box from the top of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 3 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "3."
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the inside of the frame of the gauge section 421 is displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the volume identifier 422 and the target identifier 423. Therefore, when the volume image 42 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 421 and overlaps with a portion where the volume identifier 422 is not displayed (such as the "☆" mark in the stage image 61 shown in FIG. 335 (5)) is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 421 and overlaps with a portion where the volume identifier 422 is not displayed is easier for the player to see than the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps with the volume identifier 422 or the target identifier 423.

Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "2." In this case, as shown in FIG. 335 (6), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the third box from the top of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 2 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify the player that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "2."
Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "1." In this case, as shown in FIG. 335 (7), the volume identification section 422 is hidden in the fourth box from the top of the gauge section 421. At this time, a volume 1 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the volume set in the effect control section 300 is "1."
335(7), even if the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the display mode of the volume identification section 422 does not change, and the volume set in the effect control section 300 remains at "1." In addition, at this time, no notification sound is output to notify the player of the volume set in the effect control section 300.

If the player does not press either the upper or lower key among the effect keys 162 within a predetermined time after pressing either the upper or lower key among the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 will be hidden, as shown in FIG. 335 (8). The predetermined time is five seconds. However, the predetermined time may be any time.
In this way, the volume image 42 is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the volume image 42 was displayed, but if the effect key 162 (the upper key or the lower key) is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the volume image 42 was displayed, the volume image 42 will not be hidden even if the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display of the volume image 42. In other words, the volume image 42 will not be hidden as long as the effect key 162 (the upper key or the lower key) is operated before the predetermined time has elapsed since the most recent operation of the effect key 162 (the upper key or the lower key).

Note that, regardless of when the display of the volume image 42 begins, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of when the display of the volume image 42 begins in each of the variable effect examples described below, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds).

In the following, when volume 1 alert sounds, volume 2 alert sounds, volume 3 alert sounds, volume 4 alert sounds, and volume 5 alert sounds are described without distinction, they may be simply referred to as volume alert sounds.
The volume 1 alert sound, volume 2 alert sound, volume 3 alert sound, volume 4 alert sound, and volume 5 alert sound may all be the same sound. In this case, each volume alert sound may be output at a volume set in the performance control unit 300. In other words, the volume 1 alert sound, volume 2 alert sound, volume 3 alert sound, volume 4 alert sound, and volume 5 alert sound may be louder the later they are in the order.
Furthermore, the volume 1 alert sound, volume 2 alert sound, volume 3 alert sound, volume 4 alert sound, and volume 5 alert sound may be different sounds from each other.
In this embodiment, the output time of the volume notification sound is 0.1 seconds, but the output time of the volume notification sound may be any time.

As described above, in this embodiment, when an upper key among the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume set in the effect control unit 300 increases, with the upper limit being volume "5." Also, when a lower key among the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume set in the effect control unit 300 decreases, with the lower limit being volume "1."
Furthermore, a volume notification sound is output when the volume set in the performance control unit 300 is changed by operating the performance key 162. On the other hand, even when the performance key 162 is operated, if the volume set in the performance control unit 300 is not changed, the volume notification sound is not output, but the volume image 42 is displayed.

336 is a diagram showing the display mode of the light intensity image 43 in response to the player's operation of the effect key 162. In the example shown in FIG. 336, it is assumed that the variation of the special symbols is stopped (the variation effect is not being executed). Also, in FIG. 336 (1) to (8), the area in the image display section 114 where the light intensity image 43 is displayed and the surrounding area of this area are shown enlarged.
As shown in Figure 336 (1), a stage image 61 and decorative pattern 41 corresponding to the first stage are displayed. At this time, the light intensity image 43 is not displayed. At this time, the light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 for the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, movable role object 115, and performance button 161 is set to "4."

Next, when the player presses the right key of the effect key 162 (see Figure 3 (b)), the light intensity is set to "5" (the light intensity increases). In this case, as shown in Figure 336 (2), a light intensity image 43 is displayed. This light intensity image 43 has a gauge portion 431, a light intensity identification portion 432, an object identification portion 433, a frame portion 434, and a background portion 435. At this time, a light intensity 5 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 is "5".

The gauge section 431 indicates the number of light intensity levels that can be set by the performance control section 300 (a number that can be recognized by the player as the number of light intensity levels set by the performance control section 300). In this embodiment, five rectangular frames are displayed as the gauge section 431, which allows the player to recognize that there are five levels in which the light intensity can be set by the performance control section 300.
The light intensity identifying section 432 identifies the level of light intensity set in the performance control section 300. The light intensity identifying section 432 is displayed by filling the frame displayed as the gauge section 431 in brown. In this embodiment, the level of light intensity set in the performance control section 300 is identified to the player by the number of areas of the frame displayed as the gauge section 431 that are filled in as light intensity identifying sections 432. In the example shown in the figure, all five frames of the gauge section 431 are filled in as light intensity identifying sections 432, which allows the player to recognize that the light intensity set in the performance control section 300 is "5" out of five levels. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 336 (1), the player presses the right key of the performance keys 162 to set the light intensity to "5."

The object identification section 433 identifies an object that is notified or suggested by the light amount image 43. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates lighting is displayed as the object identification 433.
The frame portion 434 forms the outer frame of the light quantity image 43. The frame portion 434 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends in the vertical direction.
The background portion 435 is the background of the light amount image 43. In other words, the background portion 435 is the background of the gauge portion 431, the light amount identification portion 432, and the object identification portion 433 in the area surrounded by the frame portion 434.

The light intensity image 43 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 on the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in an overlapping manner on the image display unit 114.
In this embodiment, the light amount identifying portion 432 and the target identifying portion 433 are displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the light amount image 43 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the light amount identifying portion 432 or the target identifying portion 433 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the background portion 435 is displayed in a display mode with higher transparency than the light amount identification portion 432 and the target identification portion 433. Therefore, even when the light amount image 43 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 435 is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps the background portion 435 is easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 that overlap the light amount identification portion 432 or the target identification portion 433.

Next, when the player presses the right key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity does not change. In this case, as shown in FIG. 336 (3), the display mode of the light intensity identifying unit 432 does not change. Also, at this time, the notification sound for notifying the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 is not output.
Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "4" (the light intensity decreases). In this case, as shown in FIG. 336 (4), the light intensity identification section 432 is hidden in the uppermost frame of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light intensity 4 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light intensity set in the effect control section 300 is "4".

Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "3." In this case, as shown in FIG. 336 (5), the light intensity identification section 432 is hidden in the second-top frame of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light intensity 3 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to indicate that the light intensity set in the effect control section 300 is "3."

Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, as shown in Fig. 336 (6), the light amount identifying section 432 disappears in the third frame from the top of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light amount 2 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light amount set in the effect control section 300 is "2".
In this embodiment, the inside of the frame of the gauge section 431 is displayed in a display mode with higher transparency than the light amount indicator section 432 and the target indicator section 433. Therefore, when the light amount image 43 is displayed, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 431 and overlaps with a portion where the light amount indicator section 432 is not displayed (such as the "◯" mark portion of the stage image 61 shown in FIG. 336(6)) is visible to the player. In other words, the portion of the stage image 61 that is within the frame of the gauge section 431 and overlaps with a portion where the light amount indicator section 432 is not displayed is easier for the player to see than the portion of the stage image 61 that overlaps with the light amount indicator section 432 or the target indicator section 433.

Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "1." In this case, as shown in FIG. 336 (7), the light intensity identification section 432 is hidden in the fourth frame from the top of the gauge section 431. At this time, a light intensity 1 notification sound is output from the speaker 156 to notify that the light intensity set in the effect control section 300 is "1."
336(7), even if the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the display mode of the light amount identifying section 432 does not change, and the light amount set in the effect control section 300 remains at "1." In addition, at this time, no notification sound is output to notify the player of the light amount set in the effect control section 300.

If the player does not press either the right or left key among the effect keys 162 within a predetermined time after pressing either the right or left key among the effect keys 162, the light intensity image 43 will be hidden, as shown in FIG. 336 (8). The predetermined time is five seconds. That is, the display time of the light intensity image 43 is the same as the display time of the volume image 42. However, the display time of the light intensity image 43 may be longer or shorter than the display time of the volume image 42.
In this way, the light quantity image 43 becomes invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed since the light quantity image 43 was displayed, but if the effect key 162 (the right-side key or the left-side key) is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the light quantity image 43 was displayed, the light quantity image 43 will not become invisible even if the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display of the light quantity image 43. In other words, the light quantity image 43 will not become invisible as long as the effect key 162 (the right-side key or the left-side key) is operated before the predetermined time has elapsed since the most recent operation of the effect key 162 (the right-side key or the left-side key).

Note that, regardless of when the display of the light intensity image 43 begins, the display time of the light intensity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of when the display of the light intensity image 43 begins in each of the variable effect examples described below, the display time of the light intensity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds).

Furthermore, the light intensity of the image display unit 114 (light intensity of the backlight (not shown) of the image display unit 114 ) does not change depending on the operation of the effect key 162 .
In addition, in the following, when the light quantity 1 alert sound, light quantity 2 alert sound, light quantity 3 alert sound, light quantity 4 alert sound, and light quantity 5 alert sound are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as light quantity alert sounds.
The light quantity 1 alert sound, the light quantity 2 alert sound, the light quantity 3 alert sound, the light quantity 4 alert sound, and the light quantity 5 alert sound may all be the same sound. In this case, each light quantity alert sound may be output at a volume set in the performance control unit 300.
Furthermore, the light quantity 1 notification sound, the light quantity 2 notification sound, the light quantity 3 notification sound, the light quantity 4 notification sound, and the light quantity 5 notification sound may be different sounds from each other.
Furthermore, the sound notifying the amount of light is different from the sound notifying the volume of sound.
In this embodiment, the light amount notification sound is output for 0.1 seconds, but the light amount notification sound may be output for any length of time.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the right key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 increases, with the upper limit being light intensity "5." Also, when the left key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the light intensity set in the effect control unit 300 decreases, with the lower limit being light intensity "1."
Furthermore, a light intensity notification sound is output when the light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 is changed by operating the performance key 162. On the other hand, even when the performance key 162 is operated, if the light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 is not changed, the light intensity notification sound is not output, but the light intensity image 43 is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 have the same display form in the first to fourth stages. More specifically, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge portion 421, volume identification portion 422, object identification portion 423, frame portion 424, and background portion 425 of the volume image 42 have the same display form. Furthermore, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge portion 431, light intensity identification portion 432, object identification portion 433, frame portion 434, and background portion 435 of the light intensity image 43 have the same display form.

Figure 337 is a diagram showing the state when the effect key 162 is operated while the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state (while the changing effect is being executed).
As shown in Figure 337 (1), as the special symbol changes, a change effect is executed, and the decorative symbol 41 changes. At this time, both the volume and the light intensity are set to "3."
In addition, when the drawing shows that the decorative pattern 41 or small pattern 56 is changing (scrolling) particularly quickly and is difficult or impossible to see, the target performance pattern is displayed with an arrow to make it easier to understand.

Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "2" as shown in Fig. 337(2), and the display mode of the volume image 42 (the display mode of the volume identification section 421 (see Fig. 335(2))) is updated. Meanwhile, at this time, the volume notification sound is not output.
Next, when the player presses the lower key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "1" and the display mode of the volume image 42 is updated, as shown in Figure 337 (3). At this time, on the other hand, no volume notification sound is output.
Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "2" as shown in Fig. 337(4), and the display mode of the light intensity image 43 (the display mode of the light intensity identifying section 432 (see Fig. 336(2))) is updated. Meanwhile, at this time, the light intensity notification sound is not output.
Next, when the player presses the left key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "1" and the display mode of the light intensity image 43 is updated, as shown in Fig. 337 (5). At this time, however, the light intensity notification sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 337(6), when the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, if the player presses the upper key or the right key of the effect key 162, the display mode of the volume image 42 and the display mode of the light intensity image 43 are both updated. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
When the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is pressed while the fluctuations are stopped after the fluctuation effect has ended, the display mode of the volume image 42 is updated and a volume notification sound is output. Also, when the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is pressed while the fluctuations are stopped after the fluctuation effect has ended, the display mode of the light quantity image 43 is updated and a light quantity notification sound is output.
In this way, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 limits the output of the volume alert sound and light intensity alert sound while the variable performance is being performed and at the end of the variable performance, even if the performance key 162 is operated.

Figure 338 is a diagram showing the display mode of the volume image and light intensity image when waiting for customers.
As shown in Figure 338 (1), when the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed stopped.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the special symbol stopped (since the variable effect ended), the machine enters a customer waiting state. In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 338(2), a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, and a menu promotion image 46 are displayed.

The customer waiting volume image 44 has a larger display size than the volume image 42 and is displayed at a different position from the volume image 42. The customer waiting volume image 44 also displays a gauge portion 441, a volume identification portion 442, an object identification portion 443, an operation explanation portion 444, a frame portion 445, and a background portion 446.
The gauge portion 441 corresponds to the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 .
The volume identifier 442 corresponds to the volume identifier 422 of the volume image 42. In the illustrated example, the volume identifier 442 is displayed in three of the five frames in the gauge portion 441, which allows the player to recognize that the volume is "3."
The object identification portion 443 corresponds to the object identification portion 423 of the volume image 42. In the illustrated example, the object identification portion 443 is displayed as the text "volume."
The operation explanation section 444 explains the operations required to change the volume. In the illustrated example, an image resembling the effect key 162 is displayed, and the portions resembling the upper and lower keys of the effect key 162 are filled in.
The frame 445 corresponds to the frame 424 of the volume image 42 .
The background portion 446 corresponds to the background portion 425 of the volume image 42 .

The customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, and the customer waiting volume image 44 are displayed overlapping each other in the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the customer waiting volume image 44 is not displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.
In this embodiment, the volume identification portion 442 in the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the volume identification portion 442 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the inside of the frame of the gauge portion 441 and the background portion 446 are displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the volume identifier portion 442. Therefore, even when the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that are within the frame of the gauge portion 441 and overlap with areas where the volume identifier portion 442 is not displayed and the portions that overlap with the background portion 446 are visible to the player. In other words, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that are within the frame of the gauge portion 441 and overlap with areas where the volume identifier portion 442 is not displayed and the portions that overlap with the background portion 446 are easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap with the volume identifier portion 442.

In this embodiment, the gauge portion 441, the volume identification portion 442, and the frame portion 445 of the customer waiting volume image 44 have shapes different from the gauge portion 421, the volume identification portion 422, and the frame portion 424 of the volume image 42, respectively.
However, the customer waiting volume image 44 may have the same display size and the same display format as the volume image 42. Furthermore, the customer waiting volume image 44 may be displayed at the same position as the volume image 42.

The customer waiting light intensity image 45 has a larger display size than the light intensity image 43 and is displayed in a different position from the light intensity image 43. The customer waiting light intensity image 45 also displays a gauge section 451, a light intensity identification section 452, an object identification section 453, an operation explanation section 454, a frame section 455, and a background section 456.
The gauge portion 451 corresponds to the gauge portion 431 of the light quantity image 43 .
The light amount identifying portions 452 correspond to the light amount identifying portions 432 of the light amount image 43. In the illustrated example, the light amount identifying portions 452 are displayed in three of the five frames in the gauge portion 451, which allows the player to recognize that the light amount is "3."
The object identification portion 453 corresponds to the object identification portion 433 of the light amount image 43. In the illustrated example, the object identification portion 453 is displayed as the text "light amount."
The operation explanation section 454 explains the operations required to change the light intensity. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect key 162 is displayed, and the portions imitating the right and left keys of the effect key 162 are filled in.
The frame 455 corresponds to the frame 434 of the light amount image 43 .
The background portion 456 corresponds to the background portion 435 of the light amount image 43 .

The customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed overlapping the customer waiting light intensity image 45 in the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the customer waiting light intensity image 45 is not displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.
In this embodiment, the light intensity identification portion 452 in the customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the customer waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the light intensity identification portion 452 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the inside of the frame of the gauge section 451 and the background section 456 are displayed in a display mode with higher transparency than the light amount identification section 452. Therefore, even when the customer waiting light amount image 45 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative patterns 41 that are within the frame of the gauge section 451 and overlap with areas where the light amount identification section 452 is not displayed and that overlap with the background section 456 are visible to the player. In other words, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative patterns 41 that are within the frame of the gauge section 451 and overlap with areas where the light amount identification section 452 is not displayed and that overlap with the background section 456 are easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative patterns 41 that overlap with the light amount identification section 452.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gauge portion 451, the light amount identification portion 452, and the frame portion 455 of the customer waiting light amount image 45 have shapes different from the gauge portion 431, the light amount identification portion 432, and the frame portion 434 of the light amount image 43, respectively.
However, the customer waiting light intensity image 45 may have the same display size and the same display format as the light intensity image 43. Furthermore, the customer waiting light intensity image 45 may be displayed at the same position as the light intensity image 43.

The menu promotion image 46 displays an operation target identification portion 461, an operation explanation portion 462, a frame portion 463, and a background portion 464.
The operation object identification unit 461 identifies an object that needs to be operated in order to display the menu image 505. In the illustrated example, the operation object identification unit 461 displays an image that resembles the effect button 161, which is an object that needs to be operated in order to display the menu image 505.
The operation explanation section 462 explains the operations required to display the menu image 505. In the illustrated example, the operation explanation section 462 displays the text "Display menu with this operation."
The frame portion 463 forms the outer frame of the menu promotion image 46. The frame portion 463 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends in the vertical direction.
The background portion 464 is the background of the menu promotion image 46. In other words, the background portion 464 is the background of the operation object identification portion 461 and the operation explanation portion 462 in the area surrounded by the frame portion 463.

The menu promotion image 46 is displayed in a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114. Therefore, the stage image 61, the decorative pattern 41, and the menu promotion image 46 are displayed in an overlapping manner in the image display unit 114.
In this embodiment, the operation target identifying portion 461 in the menu prompting image 46 is displayed in a display mode with low transparency. Therefore, when the menu prompting image 46 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the operation target identifying portion 461 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.
On the other hand, the background portion 464 is displayed in a display mode with a higher transparency than the operation object identification portion 461. Therefore, even when the menu promotion image 46 is displayed, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the background portion 464 are visible to the player. In other words, the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the background portion 464 are easier for the player to see than the portions of the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 that overlap the operation object identification portion 461.

Next, when the player presses the upper key of the effect keys 162, the volume is set to "4." In this case, as shown in FIG. 338 (3), a volume identification section 442 is displayed in the second box from the top of the gauge section 441 in the customer waiting volume image 44. At this time, a volume 4 notification sound is output.
Next, when the player presses the right key of the effect keys 162, the light intensity is set to "4." In this case, as shown in FIG. 338 (4), the light intensity identifying section 452 is displayed in the second-top frame of the gauge section 451 in the customer waiting light intensity image 45. At this time, a light intensity 4 notification sound is output.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 161, as shown in Fig. 338 (5), an operation highlighting image 465 is displayed on the menu prompting image 46. At this time, an operation notification sound is output to notify that the effect button 161 has been operated.
The operation emphasis image 465 is an image that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates light as the operation emphasis image 465 is displayed above the operation target identification section 461.

Next, as shown in FIG. 338(6), a menu image 505 is displayed.
Next, when the player operates the effect button 161 again, the stage image 61, decorative pattern 41, customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45 and menu promotion image 46 are displayed again, as shown in Figure 338 (7).
Then, when the machine is waiting for customers and a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed during which the variable effect has not started and the effect key 162 and the effect button 161 have not been operated, a demo image 506 is displayed as shown in Figure 338 (8).

In this embodiment, the customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45, and menu promotion image 46 may be displayed, but in the first to fourth stages, the customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45, and menu promotion image 46 are displayed in the same manner. More specifically, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge section 441, volume identification section 442, object identification section 443, operation explanation section 444, frame section 445, and background section 446 of the customer waiting volume image 44 are displayed in the same manner. In addition, in the first to fourth stages, the gauge section 451, light intensity identification section 452, object identification section 453, operation explanation section 454, frame section 455, and background section 456 of the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are displayed in the same manner. Furthermore, in the first to fourth stages, the operation target identification section 461, operation explanation section 462, frame section 463, background section 464, and operation emphasis image 465 are displayed in the same manner.

In this embodiment, the setting of the performance effect, i.e., the volume output from the speaker 156, is notified by displaying the volume image 42, the customer waiting volume image 44, and the output of the volume notification sound. In addition, the setting of the performance effect, i.e., the light intensity of the light emitted by the board lamp 116, the frame lamp 157, the movable role object 115, and the performance button 161, is notified by displaying the light intensity image 43, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, and the output of the light intensity notification sound.
Therefore, the display of the volume image 42, the display of the light intensity image 43, the display of the customer waiting volume image 44, the display of the customer waiting light intensity image 45, the output of the volume notification sound, and the output of the light intensity notification sound are all regarded as specific notifications related to the performance effects.

Furthermore, when in the waiting state, the waiting volume image 44 and the waiting light intensity image 45 continue to be displayed. Therefore, the display time of the volume image and the light intensity image is longer when in the waiting state than when they are fluctuating (see Figure 337 (4)).

(Modifications of Volume Image and Light Intensity Image)
Next, modified examples of the display mode of the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43 will be described.
FIG. 339 is a diagram showing a display mode as a modified example of the volume image 42 and the light quantity image 43.

(Variation 1)
339(1), when the lower key and the left key of the effect keys 162 are pressed during the execution of the variable effect, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed. At this time, the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are not output.
In Modification Example 1, when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are hidden, as shown in FIG. 339 (2). More specifically, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are hidden when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), regardless of whether the display period has elapsed. Furthermore, even if the effect key 162 is operated at this time, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are not displayed, the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are not output, and neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed (adjusted).
In this way, the performance control unit 300 may limit the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 by hiding the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 when the variable performance ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped).

(Variation 2)
Also, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 339 (3), the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (left decorative pattern 41) during the execution of the variable performance, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are not displayed in an area overlapping with the display area of the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56.
Then, when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), as shown in Figure 339 (4), the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41.
In this way, the performance control unit 300 may limit the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 by changing the display layer of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 when the variable performance ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped).

(Variation 3)
In addition, in variant example 3, when the volume and light intensity are both "2", if the upper key of the effect key 162 is pressed while the variable effect is being executed, the volume image 42 is not displayed, but a volume 3 alarm sound is output, as shown in Figure 339 (5).
Next, when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 stops to be fixed), if the right key of the effect key 162 is pressed, the light quantity image 43 is not displayed, but a light quantity 3 notification sound is output, as shown in Figure 339 (6).
When the machine enters a waiting state, as shown in Fig. 339 (7), a waiting volume image 44, a waiting light intensity image 45, and a menu prompt image 46 are displayed. If the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is pressed at this time, the waiting volume image 44 is displayed in the updated state of the volume identification unit 442, and a volume alert sound is output. Also, if the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is pressed, the waiting light intensity image 45 is displayed in the updated state of the light intensity identification unit 452, and a light intensity alert sound is output.

Furthermore, even if the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is pressed during execution of the variable effect, the light quantity image 43 is not displayed but a light quantity notification sound is output. Also, even if the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is pressed when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume image 42 is not displayed but a volume notification sound is output.
In this way, in variant example 3, when the variable performance is being executed and when the variable performance ends (when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 is restricted, while the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are not restricted.

(Variation 4)
339(8), in the customer waiting state, a volume image 42 is displayed instead of the customer waiting volume image 44, and a light intensity image 43 is displayed instead of the customer waiting light intensity image 45. More specifically, in the customer waiting state, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in a larger size than when the restaurant is not in the customer waiting state.
In this way, the display manner of the volume image and the light intensity image may be displayed in the same decorative manner regardless of whether or not the bar is waiting for customers.

In addition, if the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 and the volume and light intensity notification sounds are restricted when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the timing of this restriction may be immediately before or after the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped). In other words, the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 and the volume and light intensity notification sounds may be restricted as long as it is when the variable effect ends (the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped).

Furthermore, the manner in which the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are output is not limited to the above example.
When the effect key 162 is operated while the variable effect is being performed, a volume alert sound or a light intensity alert sound is output, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed), the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may not be output. Then, when the effect key 162 is operated during a subsequent stop of the variable effect, the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may be output. In other words, the timing when the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound is not output (is limited) when the effect key 162 is operated may be only when the variable effect has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display manner of the volume image and the light intensity image differs between during the variable performance and when waiting for customers, but this is not limited to this.
The display manner of the volume image and the light intensity image may be the same whether the volume is fluctuating or the waiting state. For example, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 may be displayed in the same manner regardless of whether the volume is fluctuating or the waiting state.

Furthermore, while a variable effect is being performed, a volume notification sound may be output when the upper or lower key of the effect keys 162 is operated, while no light intensity notification sound may be output when the right or left key of the effect keys 162 is operated.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may execute vibration performance or gimmick performance (for example, as an example of a performance in a customer waiting state) even when specific notifications (at least one of displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, displaying the customer waiting volume image 44, displaying the customer waiting light intensity image 45, outputting the volume notification sound, and outputting the light intensity notification sound) by operating the performance key 162 are restricted, such as when the variable performance is not being executed (when the fluctuation is stopped).
In this case, the restriction on specific notifications can prevent players from realizing that there is a malfunction in the pachinko gaming machine 100.

(About left-handed hit notification)
Next, the left hit notification will be described. The left hit notification is a notification that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. As will be described later, the left hit notification includes a first left hit notification and a second left hit notification.
Figures 340 and 341 are diagrams showing the manner of left-handed hit notification.
First, as shown in FIG. 340(1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in association with the stopping of the special symbol. At this time, the player launches the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111.

Next, assume that three game balls pass through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. In this case, the performance control unit 300 issues a first left-hit notification, as shown in FIG. 340 (2). In the first left-hit notification, a first left-hit image 47 is displayed, and a first left-hit sound is output to encourage the player to launch the game balls toward the left side of the game area 111. An example of the first left-hit sound is a voice saying, "Please hit left."
In this embodiment, in a normal game state, the first left-hand hit notification is issued on the condition that a total of three game balls pass through gates 124 provided on the right side of game area 111. First left-hand hit image 47 displays a text portion 47a, an arrow portion 47b, an emphasis portion 47c, and a background portion 47d.

The character portion 47a is a character that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the character portion 47a.
The arrow portion 47b indicates the direction in which the game ball is to be launched, and in the illustrated example, the arrow portion 47b points left.
The emphasis portion 47c emphasizes the encouragement to the player to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. In other words, the emphasis portion 47c emphasizes the text portion 47a. The emphasis portion 47c can also be considered to emphasize the first left-hit image 47. In the illustrated example, the image simulating light as the emphasis portion 47c is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the arrow portion 47b and on a layer in front of the arrow portion 47b.
The background portion 47d is the background behind the character portion 47a, the arrow portion 47b, and the highlight portion 47c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340(3), the arrow portion 47b is displayed as moving to the left. More specifically, the arrow portion 47b is displayed as moving to the left within the display area of the background portion 47d. The highlight portion 47c is displayed as moving to the left within the display area of the arrow portion 47b. Meanwhile, the character portion 47a is not displayed as moving. At this time, the output of the first left-hitting sound continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 340(4), the arrow portion 47b is displayed moving to the right within the display area of the background portion 47d, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 340(2). At this time, the highlight portion 47c is no longer displayed. At this time, the first left-hit sound continues to be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340(5), the first left-hit image 47 remains stationary, and the output of the first left-hit sound ends.
After this, the effects shown in (2) to (5) of Figure 340 are performed again. After that, as shown in (6) of Figure 340, the first left-hit image 47 is no longer displayed.
In this way, the arrow portion 47b is displayed in motion to emphasize the arrow portion 47b (first left-hit image 47). Note that the character portion 47a may be displayed in motion without the arrow portion 47b being displayed in motion, thereby emphasizing the character portion 47a (first left-hit image 47). Alternatively, both the character portion 47a and the arrow portion 47b may be displayed in motion.

Next, assume that the player launches a game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and five more game balls pass through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. In this case, the presentation control unit 300 issues a second left-hit notification, as shown in FIG. 340 (7). In the second left-hit notification, a second left-hit image 48 is displayed, and a left-hit warning sound is output to alert the player. Examples of the left-hit warning sound include specific sound effects such as alarms. In this embodiment, in the normal game state, after the first left-hit notification is issued, the second left-hit notification is issued on the condition that five game balls pass through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. Furthermore, after the first second left-hit notification is issued, the second left-hit notification is issued each time a game ball passes through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed as moving from the right side to the left side on the image display section 114 .
At this time, the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 flash in white to indicate a second left-hand hit. In the following description, when the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are collectively described, they may be simply referred to as "lamp L."

Next, as shown in Figure 340 (8), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move further to the left on the image display unit 114, and the entire second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed. At this time, the left-handed hit warning sound continues to be output.
The second left-hand hit image 48 has a larger display size than the first left-hand hit image 47. The second left-hand hit image 48 displays a text portion 48a, an arrow portion 48b, an emphasis portion 48c, and a background portion 48d.

The text portion 48a is text that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. The text portion 48a of the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in a larger size than the text portion 47a of the first left-hand hit image 47. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the text portion 48a.
The arrow portion 48b is an arrow that indicates the direction in which the game ball will be launched, encouraging the player. The arrow portion 48b of the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed larger in size than the arrow portion 47b of the first left-hand hit image 47. In the illustrated example, the arrow portion 48b is shown pointing left.
The emphasis portion 48c emphasizes the encouragement to the player to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. The emphasis portion 48c can be perceived as an image that emphasizes the arrow portion 48b. In other words, the emphasis portion 48c can be perceived as an image that emphasizes the second left-hand hit image 48. In the illustrated example, an image that resembles light as the emphasis portion 48c is displayed around the arrow portion 48b.
The background portion 48d is the background behind the character portion 48a, the arrow portion 48b, and the highlight portion 48c.

Next, as shown in Figure 341 (9), the character section 48a and the arrow section 48b are displayed so as to move leftward within the display area of the background section 48d. The highlight section 48c is also displayed so as to move to the left periphery of the arrow section 48b. At this time, the left-hit warning sound is output and the lamp L continues to flash.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (10), the text portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b are displayed moving to the right within the display area of the background portion 48d, returning to the same display position as in FIG. 340 (8). At this time, the highlighting portion 48c is hidden. At this time, the output of the left-hit warning sound has ended, and the output of a second left-hit sound, which encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111, begins. An example of the second left-hit sound is a sound such as "Please hit left." The second left-hit notification sound is louder than the first left-hit notification sound. More specifically, regardless of the volume setting by operating the effect key 162, the second left-hit notification sound is louder than the first left-hit notification sound.
The second left-hit alert sound may be the same as the first left-hit alert sound, or may be a different sound from the first left-hit alert sound. The second left-hit alert sound may also have the same volume as the first left-hit alert sound.

Next, the display of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figure 340 (8), Figure 341 (9) and (10) is repeated twice.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (11), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed moving to the left on the image display unit 114. At this time, the output of the second left-hit sound ends, and the output of the left-hit warning sound begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 341 (12), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed in such a way that it moves further to the left, and the second left-handed hit image 48 is no longer displayed. At this time, the left-handed hit warning sound continues to be output and the lamp L continues to flash.

Although not shown, after this, the display of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figures 340(7) and (8), the display of the motion of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figures 340(8), 341(9) and (10) are repeated twice, and the display of the motion of the second left-handed hit image 48 shown in Figures 341(11) and (12) are repeated two more times. After that, as the second left-handed hit image 48 disappears, the flashing of the lamp L stops and the second left-handed hit notification ends.
In this way, in the second left-hand hit image 48, the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b are displayed in motion at a specific display position, thereby emphasizing the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b (second left-hand hit image 48). Note that in the second left-hand hit image 48, one of the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b may be displayed in motion, and the other may not be displayed in motion.

In a broad sense, the left-hit warning sound can also be considered as the second left-hit sound. When describing the first left-hit sound and the second left-hit sound without making a distinction between them, they may be simply referred to as the left-hit sound.
In addition, the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is executed in the same manner whether it is executed during the execution of the variable effect or during the stop of the variable effect. In addition, the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is executed in the same manner in the first stage and the second stage.

Figure 342 (1) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the first left-handed hit notification, and Figure 342 (2) is a diagram showing the execution timing of each notification in the second left-handed hit notification.
In the first left-hit notification, as shown in Figure 342 (1), at time T0, the display of the text section 47a, the movement of the arrow section 47b to the left and right, the movement display of the highlight section 47c, and the output of the first left-hit sound begin.
Next, at time T1, the operational display of the highlighting section 47c ends, and the highlighting section 47c becomes invisible.
Next, at time T2, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 47b and the output of the first left-hit sound end.
Next, at time T3, the second left/right movement of the arrow portion 47b, the second movement display of the highlight portion 47c, and the second output of the first left-hit sound are started.

Next, at time T4, the operational display of the highlighting section 47c ends, and the highlighting section 47c becomes invisible.
In this way, in the first left-hand hit notification, the highlighting unit 47c displays the action twice. The highlighting unit 47c displays the action periodically, with one cycle being two seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T3. The total execution time of the action display by the highlighting unit 47c is one second. However, the cycle and execution time of the action display by the highlighting unit 47c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T5, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 47b and the output of the first left-hit sound end.
In this way, in the first left-hand hit notification, the arrow portion 47b displays the movement twice. The movement display of the arrow portion 47b is performed periodically, with one cycle being 2 seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T3. The total execution time of the movement display by the arrow portion 47b is 2 seconds.
In addition, in the first left-hit notification, the first left-hit sound is output twice. The time for outputting the first left-hit sound in the first left-hit notification is 2 seconds.
The period of the action display by the arrow portion 47b, the execution time of the action display, and the execution time of the output of the first left-hit sound may be any time.

Next, at time T6, the display of the character section 47a ends. The display time of the character section 47a in the first left-hand hit notification is 4 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the first left-hand hit notification is 4 seconds.
The timing of displaying the arrow portion 47b and the background portion 47d is the same as the timing of displaying the text portion 47a. The display time of the text portion 47a (the execution time of the first left-hand hit notification) may be any time.

In addition, in the second left-hand hit notification, as shown in Figure 342 (2), at time T0, the display of the character section 48a, the output of the left-hand hit warning sound, and the flashing of the lamp L begin.
Next, at time T1, the arrow portion 48b starts moving left and right and the highlight portion 48c starts moving and displaying.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the highlighting section 48c and the output of the left-hit warning sound end.
Next, at time T3, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends and the output of the second left-hitting sound begins.

Next, at time T4, the arrow portion 48b starts to move left and right a second time, and the highlighting portion 48c starts to display the movement a second time.
Next, at time T5, the operation display of the highlighting section 48c and the output of the second left-hit sound end.
Next, at time T6, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T7, the second output of the left-hand hit warning sound is initiated.
Next, at time T8, the character portion 48a is hidden.
Next, at time T9, the output of the left-hit warning sound ends. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the output of the left-hit warning sound is executed twice. The execution time of the output of the left-hit warning sound in the second left-hit notification is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of the output of the left-hit warning sound may be any time.

Next, at time T10, the second display of the character portion 48a begins.
Next, at time T11, the second output of the second left-hand hit sound is started.
Next, at time T12, the third left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the third movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.
Next, at time T13, the operational display of the highlighting section 48c ends.

Next, at time T14, the output of the second left-hit sound ends. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the output of the second left-hit sound is executed twice. The execution time of the output of the second left-hit sound in the second left-hit notification is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of the output of the second left-hit sound may be any time.
Next, at time T15, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T16, the fourth left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the fourth movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.
Next, at time T17, the operational display of the highlighting section 48c ends.
Next, at time T18, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T19, the character portion 48a is hidden.

Next, at time T20, the third display of the character portion 48a begins.
Next, at time T21, the fifth left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the fifth movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.
Next, at time T22, the operational display of the highlighting section 48c ends.
Next, at time T23, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 48b ends.
Next, at time T24, the sixth left-right movement of the arrow portion 48b and the sixth movement display of the highlight portion 48c are started.

Next, at time T25, the highlighting section 48c ends its motion display. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the highlighting section 48c displays its motion twice each time the text section 48a is displayed. The highlighting section 48c displays its motion periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T4. The text section 48a is displayed three times in the second left-hit notification, so the highlighting section 48c displays its motion a total of six times in the second left-hit notification. The total execution time of the highlighting section 48c's motion display is three seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the highlighting section 48c's motion display may be any length of time.

Next, at time T26, the left-right movement by the arrow section 48b ends. In this way, in the second left-hit notification, the arrow section 48b displays two movements each time the text section 48a is displayed. The movement of the arrow section 48b is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T4. The text section 48a is displayed three times in the second left-hit notification, so the movement of the arrow section 48b is displayed a total of six times in the second left-hit notification. The total execution time of the movement display by the arrow section 48b is six seconds. However, the period of the movement display by the arrow section 48b and the execution time of the movement display may be any time.

Next, at time T27, the display of the text section 48a and the blinking of the lamp L end. In this way, in the second left-hand hit notification, the text section 48a displays three times. The text section 48a is displayed periodically, with one cycle being six seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T10. The total display time of the text section 48a is 12 seconds. In the second left-hand hit notification, the blinking of the lamp L is performed periodically, with one cycle being one second, which is the time from when the lamp L starts to emit light until it goes out and then emits light again. The total blinking time of the lamp L is 18 seconds. However, the display time of the text section 48a and the blinking time of the lamp L may be any time.
The timing at which the arrow portion 48b and the background portion 48d are displayed is the same as the timing at which the text portion 48a is displayed.

Furthermore, the notification time of each notification (display of the character portion, left/right movement of the arrow portion, display of the highlight portion, output of the left-hit sound, blinking of the lamp L) in the above-mentioned left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) may be the time from when the notification starts to when it ends. For example, the time from time T0 (see FIG. 342(1)) when the output of the first left-hit sound starts to time T5 when the output finally ends may be set to 2 seconds, and this time may be considered to be the notification time of the first left-hit sound.
Furthermore, it has been explained that for each notification (display of the text section, left and right movement of the arrow section, display of the highlight section, output of the left-hit sound, flashing of lamp L) in the left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification), there is a period from the start to the end of the notification during which the notification is not executed (for example, the period from time T2 to time T3 for the first left-hit sound), but this is not limited to this, and each notification may continue to be executed from the start to the end of the notification.

In this embodiment, when the execution conditions for a left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) are met, the game control unit 200 sends a specified command to the presentation control unit 300, and when the presentation control unit 300 receives the specified command, the presentation control unit 300 issues a left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification). Therefore, if the specified command sent from the game control unit 200 when the execution conditions for a left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) are met is not properly received by the presentation control unit 300, the left-hit notification (first left-hit notification, second left-hit notification) may be restricted.

(About right-hand hit notification)
Next, the right hit notification will be described. The right hit notification is a notification that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. As will be described later, the right hit notification includes a first right hit notification and a second right hit notification.
Figure 343 is a diagram showing the manner of the first right hit notification.
First, when a predetermined condition is met, a first right-hit notification is issued. The predetermined condition may be when a jackpot game (opening of a jackpot game) is being executed, or when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving game state. Then, in the first right-hit notification, a first right-hit image 503 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 343(1). The first right-hit image 503 displays a text portion 503a, an arrow portion 503b, and a background portion 503c.

The character portion 503a is a character that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit to the right" is displayed as the character portion 503a.
The arrow portion 503b indicates the direction in which the game ball is to be launched, and is directed to the player. In the illustrated example, the arrow portion 503b indicates a right-pointing arrow.
The background portion 503c is the background behind the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 343(2), the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b are displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of the background portion 503c.
Next, as shown in FIG. 343(3), the character section 503a and the arrow section 503b are displayed so as to move to the left within the display area of the background section 503c, thereby returning to the same display position as in FIG. 343(1).
In this embodiment, while the first right-hit image 503 is displayed, the motion displays shown in Fig. 343 (1) to (3) are periodically performed. In this manner, the character portion 503a is displayed in motion, thereby emphasizing the character portion 503a (first right-hit image 503). Furthermore, the arrow portion 503b is displayed in motion, thereby emphasizing the arrow portion 503b (first right-hit image 503).

Figure 344 is a diagram showing the manner of the second right hit notification.
First, when the opening of the jackpot game begins, the second right hit notification is initiated. In the second right hit notification, a second right hit image 507 is displayed as shown in FIG. 344 (1). In the illustrated example, the second right hit image 507 is displayed in motion, moving from left to right on the image display unit 114, thereby starting the display of the second right hit image 507. At this time, the first right hit image 503 is also displayed. In the first right hit image 503, the motion displays shown in FIGS. 343 (1) to (3) are periodically performed.
Next, the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in an operation such that it moves further to the right, and the entire second right-hit image 507 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 344 (2). The second right-hit image 507 is larger in display size than the first right-hit image 503. At this time, a right-hit sound effect is output, which is the sound effect that indicates the second right-hit image 507 is displayed. The second right-hit image 507 displays a text portion 507a, an arrow portion 507b, an emphasis portion 507c, and a background portion 507d.

The text portion 507a is text that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The text portion 507a of the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in a larger size than the text portion 503a of the first right-hit image 503. In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Right" is displayed as the text portion 507a.
The arrow portion 507b is an arrow that indicates the direction in which the game ball will be launched, encouraging the player. The arrow portion 507b of the second right-hit image 507 is displayed larger in size than the arrow portion 503b of the first right-hit image 503. In the illustrated example, the arrow portion 507b shows an arrow pointing to the right.
The emphasis portion 507c emphasizes the encouragement to the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In other words, the emphasis portion 507c emphasizes the arrow portion 507b. The emphasis portion 507c can also be regarded as an image that emphasizes the second right hit image 507 (second right hit notification). In the illustrated example, the image simulating light as the emphasis portion 507c is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the arrow portion 507b, on a layer in front of the arrow portion 507b.
The background portion 507d is the background behind the character portion 507a, the arrow portion 507b, and the highlighted portion 507c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 344(3), the character portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b are displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of the background portion 507d. At this time, the highlight portion 507c is displayed so as to move to the right within the display area of the arrow portion 507b. At this time, the right-hit sound effect continues to be output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 344(4), the text portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b are displayed so as to move to the left within the display area of the background portion 507d, thereby returning to the same display position as in FIG. 344(2). At this time, the highlight portion 507c is no longer displayed. At this time, the output of the right-hit sound effect has ended, and the output of a right-hit sound that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111 begins. An example of the right-hit sound is the voice saying, "Please hit to the right."
Next, as shown in Figure 344 (5), the output of the right-hit sound effect ends. After this, the action display of the second right-hit image 507 shown in Figure 344 (2) to (5) is repeated twice.
Next, as shown in FIG. 344(6), the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 344 (7), the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in an action such that it moves to the right, and the second right-hit image 507 is no longer displayed.
In this way, the second right-hit image 507 is displayed in motion at a specific display position, thereby emphasizing the second right-hit image 507. Note that in the second right-hit image 507, one of the character portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b may be displayed in motion, and the other may not be displayed in motion.

Figure 345 is a diagram showing the display timing of each effect image in the second right-hit image 507 and the output timing of the right-hit sound effect and right-hit sound.
First, at time T0, the display of the text portion 507a begins.
Next, at time T1, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 507b, the movement display of the highlight portion 507c, and the output of the right-hit sound effect are started.
Next, at time T2, the operational display of the highlighting portion 507c ends, and the highlighting portion 507c is no longer displayed.
Next, at time T3, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b and the output of the right-hit sound effect end. The execution time for the output of the right-hit sound effect is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time for the output of the right-hit sound effect may be any time.
Next, at time T4, the output of the right-hit sound begins.

Next, at time T5, the second left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b and the second movement display of the highlight portion 507c are started.
Next, at time T6, the output of the right-hit sound ends. The execution time for outputting the right-hit sound is 0.75 seconds. However, the execution time for outputting the right-hit sound may be any time.
Next, at time T7, the operational display of the highlighting section 507c ends.
Next, at time T8, the left and right movement of the arrow portion 507b ends.
Next, at time T9, the third left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b and the third movement display of the highlight portion 507c are started.

Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighting unit 507c ends. In this way, the highlighting unit 507c displays the motion three times. The motion display of the highlighting unit 507c is performed periodically, with one cycle being 2 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motion display by the highlighting unit 507c is 2.25 seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the motion display by the highlighting unit 507c may be any time.
Next, at time T11, the left-right movement of the arrow portion 507b ends. In this way, the arrow portion 507b displays the movement three times. The movement display of the arrow portion 507b is performed periodically, with one cycle being 2 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the movement display by the arrow portion 507b is 4.5 seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the movement display by the arrow portion 507b may be any time.
Next, at time T12, the text portion 507a is hidden, and the display time of the text portion 507a is 7.5 seconds.
The timing of displaying the arrow portion 507b and the background portion 507d is the same as the timing of displaying the text portion 507a. The display time of the text portion 507a may be any time.

Furthermore, the execution time of each notification (the motion display of the arrow portion 507b and the motion display of the highlighting portion 507c) in the second right-hit notification described above may be the time from when the notification starts to when it ends. For example, the time from time T1 (see FIG. 345) when the motion display of the highlighting portion 507c starts to time T10 when the final motion display ends may be set to 2.25 seconds, and this time may be considered to be the execution time of the motion display of the highlighting portion 507c.
Furthermore, it has been explained that for each notification in the second right-hit notification (the operation display of the arrow section 507b, the operation display of the highlight section 507c), there is a period from the start to the end of the notification during which the notification is not executed (for example, the period from time T2 to time T5 for the operation display of the highlight section 507c), but this is not limited to this, and each notification may continue to be executed from the start to the end of the notification.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the emphasis performance of the left hit notification more times than the emphasis performance of the right hit notification (for example, the emphasis portion 507c of the second right hit image 507 can be displayed three times (see Figure 345), and the emphasis portion 48c of the second left hit image 48 can be displayed six times (see Figure 342 (2))).
Therefore, the left-hand hit notification can urge the user to operate the handle 151 more strongly than the right-hand hit notification.

(Button effect execution mode)
Next, the manner in which button effects are executed will be described.
The button effects in this embodiment include button 1 effects to button 22 effects, and various effects are performed depending on the button effect being executed.
Figures 346 and 347 are diagrams showing how the first button performance, the second button performance, and the third button performance are executed.
When the first button effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 346 (1), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. The first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the first precursor emphasis image 508 is 0.1 seconds. However, the display time of the first precursor emphasis image 508 may be any time.

Next, as shown in Figure 346 (2), the first button effect starts, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a and a gauge portion 509b.
The button section 509a is an image that imitates the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, the button section 509a is displayed in a display mode that imitates the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed.
The gauge section 509b notifies or suggests the valid operation period in the button effect. As the valid operation period in the button effect decreases (passes), the display mode of the gauge section 509b is updated, thereby notifying or suggesting the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. In this embodiment, when the display of the button image 509 starts, the entire gauge section 509b is displayed in white, but as time passes, the white display area in the gauge section 509b decreases and the black display area increases, thereby notifying or suggesting the remaining valid operation period in the button effect.

Next, as shown in Fig. 346 (3), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, a button highlight section 509c is displayed on the button image 509.
The button highlighting section 509c emphasizes the button section 509a (button image 509). In other words, the button highlighting section 509c emphasizes the button effect. In the illustrated example, a white image simulating light as the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button section 509a in a highly transparent display mode. The display layer of the button section 509c may be the same layer as the button section 509a, or may be a layer in front of the button section 509a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 346(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than that shown in Fig. 346(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 346(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 346(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 346 (6), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 346(7), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, the button image 509 is again displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 346(2) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 346 (8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the first button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 347 (9).
On the other hand, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 347 (10). The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the first post-operation emphasis image 510 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time of the first post-operation emphasis image 510 may be any time.

Furthermore, even when the second button effect is executed, the same effect as the first button effect (the effect described above using Figures 346 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the second button effect, the effect shown in Figure 347 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed, as shown in Figure 347 (11). The second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the display time for the second post-operation emphasis image 511 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time for the second post-operation emphasis image 511 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the third button effect is executed, the same effect as the first button effect (the effect described above using Figures 346 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the third button effect, the effect shown in Figure 347 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the third button effect, a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed, as shown in Figure 347 (12). The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the display time for the third post-operation emphasis image 512 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time for the third post-operation emphasis image 512 may be any length of time.

Figure 348 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the first button effect.
In the first button effect, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T3, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.

Next, at time T4, the operation display of button section 509a ends and button highlighting section 509c is hidden. In this way, button section 509a displays its operation twice. The operation display of button section 509a is performed cyclically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T3. The total execution time of the operation display by button section 509a is 1.5 seconds. Button highlighting section 509c displays its operation twice. The display of button highlighting section 509c is performed cyclically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T3. The total display time of button highlighting section 509c is 1.5 seconds. However, the cycle and execution time of the operation display by button section 509a, and the cycle and display time of the display by button highlighting section 509c may be any time.

Next, at time T5, the first button effect ends (the valid operation period for the first button effect has elapsed), and button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden. The display time for button section 509a (button image 509) is 2.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the first button effect and the valid operation period for the first button effect.

The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden. The display time of the button section 509a may be any time.
In addition, the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the second button effect and the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the third button effect are the same as the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the first button effect described using Figure 348.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the first button effect to the third button effect, the effect shown in Figure 348 ends at the time of operation, and an enhanced image is displayed after the operation (see Figures 347 (10) to (12)).

349 and 350 are diagrams showing how the fourth button effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 349 and Fig. 350, it is assumed that the operation of the effect button 161 is performed continuously (repeatedly) during the operation valid period of the fourth button effect.
When the fourth button effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 349 (1), the second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed. The second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the second precursor emphasis image 513 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of the second precursor emphasis image 513 may be any time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 349(2), the fourth button effect is started, and button image 509 is displayed. Button image 509 displays button portion 509a and gauge portion 509b. In the illustrated example, button portion 509a is displayed in a display mode that simulates a mode in which effect button 161 is not pressed. In addition, highlighted character 509d is displayed on button image 509.
The highlighted characters 509d are characters that emphasize the promotion of operating the effect button 161. In other words, the highlighted characters 509d are characters that highlight the button image 509 (button effect). In the illustrated example, the highlighted characters 509d display the text "Repeat!"

Next, as shown in Fig. 349(3), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in white.
Furthermore, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the fourth button effect, a first operation-in-progress highlight image 514 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 349(4). The first operation-in-progress highlight image 514 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. At this time, the highlight character 509d is displayed as if moving to the right, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 349(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 349(5), the first operation highlight image 514 continues to be displayed. Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed in a motion such that it moves further to the right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 349(6), the first operation highlight image 514 is hidden. Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed so as to move to the left, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 349(2).

Next, as shown in Fig. 349 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is hidden. The highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 349(8), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown, thereafter, the display of the button image 509 in the manner shown in Fig. 349(2) to (8) is repeated nine times.
Next, as shown in FIG. 350(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (10), a fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed. The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time of the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the fourth button effect, the first operation highlight image 514 will not be displayed.

351 and 352 are diagrams showing how the fifth button effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 350 and Fig. 351, it is assumed that the operation of the effect button 161 is performed continuously (repeatedly) during the operation valid period of the fifth button effect.
When the fifth button effect is executed, first, a second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed, as shown in Figure 351 (1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 351 (2), the fifth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. A button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted characters 509d are displayed on the button image 509. In the illustrated example, the button portion 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the manner in which the effect button 161 is not pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 351(3), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in white.
Furthermore, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the fifth button effect, the first operation highlight image 514 is displayed as shown in Fig. 351(4). At this time, the highlight character 509d is displayed so as to move to the right, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 351(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 351(5), the first operation highlight image 514 is hidden. Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed as if moving further to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 351(6), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move to the left, returning to the same display position as in FIG. 351(2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 351 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is hidden. The highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 351(8), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown, thereafter, the display of the button image 509 in the manner shown in Fig. 351(2) to (8) is repeated nine times.
Next, as shown in FIG. 352(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (10), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time of the fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the fifth button effect, the first operation highlight image 514 will not be displayed.

Figure 353 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect. Note that the example shown in Figure 353 explains a case where the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect start at the same timing. Furthermore, when the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect start at the same timing, the display timing of the button section 509a (button image 509), the operation display timing of the button section 509a, the display timing of the button highlighting section 509c, and the operation display timing of the highlighted character 509d are the same in the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect.

In the fourth button performance and the fifth button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button performance begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance begins.
Next, at time T4, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance ends.
Next, at time T5, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T6, the display of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect ends. That is, the display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect is longer than that in the fifth button effect.
Next, at time T7, the motion display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c end, and the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.

Next, at time T8, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T9, the second display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button performance begins.
Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T11, the second display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance begins.
Next, at time T12, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T13, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button performance ends.
Next, at time T14, the display of the first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button performance ends.
Next, at time T15, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c end.
Next, at time T16, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.

The button section 509a continues to be displayed after time T16 and is hidden when the button effects (the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect) end. The display time of the button section 509a during the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect is 6 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect and the valid operation period during the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect. However, the display time of the button section 509a during the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect may be any time.
The operation display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T8. The operation display of the button section 509a is also repeated eight times after time T15, for a total of 10 times. The total execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a is four seconds. However, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 0.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T8. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed eight more times after time T15, for a total of 10 times. The total display time of the button highlighting section 509c is four seconds. However, the display time of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

The motion display of the highlighted character 509d is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.4 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T0 to time T7. The motion display of the highlighted character 509d is also repeated 12 times after time T16, for a total of 15 times. The total execution time of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d is 4.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
Furthermore, the display of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect is repeated eight times after time T16, for a total of 10 times. The total display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect is three seconds. However, the display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fourth button effect may be any length of time.
Furthermore, the display of first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button effect is repeated eight times after time T16, for a total of 10 times. The total display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button effect is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of first operation highlight image 514 in the fifth button effect may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

Figures 354 and 355 show how the sixth button effect is executed.
When the sixth button effect is executed, first, the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed as shown in FIG. 354 (1).
Next, as shown in Figure 354 (2), the sixth button effect starts, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a and a gauge portion 509b.
354(3), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent white display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 354(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than that shown in Fig. 354(3).

Next, as shown in Fig. 354(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 354(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 354 (6), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden.
Next, as shown in Fig. 354(7), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, the button image 509 is again displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 354(2) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 354 (8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the sixth button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 355 (9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed as shown in FIG. 355 (10). The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is 0.2 seconds. However, the display time of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 may be any time.
Furthermore, the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the sixth button effect is the same as the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the first button effect described using Figure 348.

Figures 356 and 357 show how the seventh button effect and the eighth button effect are executed.
When the seventh button effect is executed, first, the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed as shown in Figure 356 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 356 (2), the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is enlarged and displayed. The display time of the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the third precursor-enhanced image 518 may be any time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 356(3), the seventh button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Make it!"

Next, as shown in Fig. 356 (4), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. At this time, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a highly transparent white display mode on the button image 509. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that moves upward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 356(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display manner with a lower transparency than Fig. 356(4). Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves downward from the position shown in Fig. 356(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 356(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to the display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 356(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves upward, thereby returning to the display position of Fig. 356(3).

Next, as shown in Fig. 356 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to a display state that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves upward. Although not shown, thereafter, the display of the button image 509 in the manner shown in Fig. 356 (3) to (7) is repeated twice.
Next, as shown in FIG. 356 (8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the seventh button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 357 (9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the seventh button effect, a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed as shown in FIG. 357 (10). The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 may be any time.

Furthermore, even when the eighth button effect is executed, the same effect as the seventh button effect (the effect described above using Figures 356 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, the effect shown in Figure 357 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed, as shown in Figure 357 (11). The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the display time for the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time for the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 may be any length of time.

Figure 358 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the seventh button effect.
In the seventh button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T3, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T4, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T5, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T6, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T7, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T8, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.

Next, at time T9, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T11, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T12, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T13, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T14, the fifth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T15, the fourth operation display of the button section 509a and the fourth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T16, with the end of the seventh button presentation (the expiration of the valid operation period for the seventh button presentation), the button section 509a (button image 509) ceases to display its motion and becomes invisible, the button highlight section 509c becomes invisible, and the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.

The display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the seventh button effect is 5.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the seventh button effect and the valid operation period in the seventh button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the seventh button effect and the valid operation period in the seventh button effect) may be any time.
In the seventh button performance, the button section 509a displays four motions. The motions of the button section 509a are displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the button section 509a is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the button section 509a may be any length of time.
In the seventh button effect, the button highlighting unit 509c displays four times. The button highlighting unit 509c displays periodically, with one cycle being 1.6 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the display by the button highlighting unit 509c is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of the display by the button highlighting unit 509c may be any length of time.
In the seventh button effect, the highlighted character 509d displays five motions. The motions of the highlighted character 509d are displayed periodically, with each cycle being 1.25 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T0 to time T4. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d is 4.4 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

In addition, the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the 8th button effect is the same as the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the 7th button effect described using Figure 358.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the seventh button effect and the eighth button effect, the effect shown in FIG. 358 ends at the time of operation, and an emphasis image is displayed after the operation.

Figures 359 and 360 show how the 9th button effect is executed.
When the ninth button effect is executed, first, the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed, as shown in Figure 359 (1).
Next, as shown in Figure 359 (2), the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359(3), the ninth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Make it!"
359(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent red display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 359(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display mode with a lower transparency than Fig. 359(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves upward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 359(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion that returns to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 359(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion that moves downward, thereby returning to the display position of Fig. 359(4).

Next, as shown in Fig. 359 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion to move downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 359(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the appearance of the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display manner with the same transparency as Fig. 359(4). The highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that moves upward, returning to the same display position as Fig. 359(5). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlight section 509c repeat the displays shown in Figs. 359(5) to (8), and the highlighted characters 509d repeat the displays shown in Figs. 359(3) to (8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 360(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the ninth button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in FIG. 360 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the ninth button effect, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in FIG. 360 (11).

Figure 361 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 9th button effect.
In the ninth button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T3, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T4, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T5, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T6, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T7, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.

Next, at time T8, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T9, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T10, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T11, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T12, the fourth operation display of the button section 509a and the fourth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T13, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T14, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T15, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T16, the fifth operation display of the button section 509a and the fifth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T17, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T18, the fifth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T19, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs five motion displays. The motion displays of the button section 509a are performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T4. The total execution time of the motion displays of the button section 509a is 4.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion displays of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed five times. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T4. The total execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c is 4.5 seconds. However, the execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T20, as the ninth button effect ends (the valid operation period for the ninth button effect has elapsed), the button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden and the display of the highlighted character 509d ceases.
Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the ninth button effect is 5.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the ninth button effect and the valid operation period in the ninth button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the ninth button effect and the valid operation period in the ninth button effect) may be any time.
In the ninth button effect, the highlighted character 509d displays five motions. The motions of the highlighted character 509d are displayed periodically, with each cycle being 1.25 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T6. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d is 4.4 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the ninth button effect, the effect shown in FIG. 361 ends at the time of operation, and a post-operation highlighted image is displayed.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

Figures 362 and 363 show how the 10th button effect is executed.
When the tenth button effect is executed, first, the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed as shown in FIG. 362 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 362(2), the tenth button effect starts, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Press it!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 362(3), the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 362 (4), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. At this time, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a highly transparent red display mode on the button image 509. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that makes it even larger.

Next, as shown in Fig. 362(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display mode with a lower transparency than Fig. 362(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that returns it to the size shown in Fig. 362(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 362(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 362(4). The highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that returns it to the size shown in Fig. 362(2).

Next, as shown in Fig. 362(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns to a display state that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a manner that enlarges it to the size shown in Fig. 362(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 362(8), the highlighted text 509d is displayed so as to expand to the size shown in Fig. 362(4). Although not shown, thereafter the button section 509a and the button highlighting section 509c repeat the displays shown in Fig. 362(2) to (8), and the highlighted text 509d repeats the displays shown in Fig. 362(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in FIG. 363(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 10th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in Figure 363 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the tenth button effect, a ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 363 (11). The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 may be any time.

Figure 364 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 10th button effect.
In the tenth button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T3, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T4, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T5, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T6, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T7, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T8, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs two motion displays. The motion display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed twice. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.25 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time for the display of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T9, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
In this way, the highlighted character 509d displays the motion three times. The highlighted character 509d displays the motion periodically, with one cycle being 0.8 seconds, which is the period from time T0 to time T4. The total execution time of the highlighted character 509d is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.

Next, at time T10, as the tenth button effect ends (the valid operation period for the tenth button effect has elapsed), button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden. The display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the tenth button effect is 2.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the tenth button effect and the valid operation period for the tenth button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the tenth button effect, the valid operation period for the tenth button effect) may be any time.
Furthermore, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 10th button effect, the effect shown in FIG. 364 ends at the time of operation, and the 9th post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

Figures 365 and 366 are diagrams showing how the 11th button effects to the 15th button effects are executed.
When the 11th button effect is executed, first, the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 365 (1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 365(2), the first button effect is started and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a and a gauge portion 509b.
365(3), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent white display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 365(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than that shown in Fig. 365(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 365(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 365(3).

365(6), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden.
Next, as shown in Fig. 365(7), there continues a period in which the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c are not performed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, the button image 509 is again displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 365(2) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 365 (8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 11th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 366 (9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 11th button effect, the 8th post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in FIG. 366 (10).

Furthermore, even when the 12th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 365 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 12th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 366 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 12th button effect, the 10th post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed, as shown in Figure 366 (11). The display time for the 10th post-operation emphasis image 522 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 10th post-operation emphasis image 522 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the 13th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 365 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 13th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 366 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 13th button effect, an 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed, as shown in Figure 366 (12). The display time for the 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the 14th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 365 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 14th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 366 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 14th button effect, a 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed, as shown in Figure 366 (13). The display time for the 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 may be any length of time.

Furthermore, even when the 15th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 11th button effect (the effect described above using Figures 365 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 15th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 366 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 15th button effect, a 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed, as shown in Figure 366 (14). The display time for the 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time for the 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 may be any length of time.

In addition, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 11th button effect through the 15th button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 1st button effect described using Figure 348.

Figures 367 and 368 show how the 16th button effect is executed.
When the 16th button effect is executed, first, the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed, as shown in Figure 367 (1).
Next, as shown in Figure 367 (2), the third precursor-enhanced image 518 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 367(3), the sixteenth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Make it!"
367(4), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic a display state in which the effect button 161 is half-pressed. At this time, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent red display state.
Next, as shown in Fig. 367(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display mode with a lower transparency than Fig. 367(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves upward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 367(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion that returns to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 367(4). The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion that moves downward, returning to the display position of Fig. 367(4).

Next, as shown in Fig. 367 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is hidden. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a motion to move downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 367(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the appearance of the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display manner with the same transparency as Fig. 367(4). The highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that moves upward, returning to the same display position as Fig. 367(5). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlight section 509c repeat the displays shown in Figs. 367(5) to (8), and the highlighted characters 509d repeat the displays shown in Figs. 367(3) to (8).
Next, as shown in FIG. 368(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 16th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 368 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 16th button effect, a 14th post-operation highlighted image 526 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 368 (11). The display time of the 14th post-operation highlighted image 526 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the 14th post-operation highlighted image 526 may be any time.
In addition, the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the 16th button effect is the same as the execution timing (period, execution time) of each effect in the 9th button effect described using Figure 361.

Figures 369 and 370 show how the 17th button effect and the 18th button effect are executed.
When the seventeenth button effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 369 (1), the fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The display time of the fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is one second. However, the display time of the fourth precursor emphasis image 527 may be any time.
Next, as shown in Figure 369 (2), the fourth precursor-enhanced image 527 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 369(3), the seventeenth button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Operate!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 369 (4), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the appearance of the effect button 161 being half-pressed. At this time, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a highly transparent white display mode on the button image 509. Also, a part of the highlight character 509d is displayed in a moving manner. More specifically, the text portion of "!" in the highlight character 509d is displayed in a moving manner so as to move clockwise around the text portion of "operation" in the highlight character 509d.
Next, as shown in Fig. 369(5), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a white display state with a lower transparency than Fig. 369(3). Also, the text portion of the "!" in the highlighted character 509d is displayed in an operational state so as to move clockwise.

Next, as shown in Fig. 369(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a display state with the same transparency as Fig. 369(4). Also, the "!" text portion of the highlight character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves clockwise, and is thus positioned in the same display position as Fig. 369(3).
Next, as shown in FIG. 369(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The text portion of the highlight character 509d, "!", is displayed in a motion to move clockwise, and is thus positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 369(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlighting section 509c repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 369(3) to (7). The highlight character 509d repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 369(5) to (7).
Next, as shown in FIG. 369(8), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 17th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in FIG. 370 (9).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 17th button effect, a 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 370 (10). The 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 may be any time.

Furthermore, even when the 18th button effect is executed, the same effect as the 17th button effect (the effect described above using Figs. 369 (1) to (8)) is performed, and if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period for the 18th button effect, the effect shown in Fig. 370 (9) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 18th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 370 (11). The 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time for the 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time for the 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 may be any length of time.

Figure 371 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 17th button effect.
In the 17th button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlight section 509c start.
Next, at time T2, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T3, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T4, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T5, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T6, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T7, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T8, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T9, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T10, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T11, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T12, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T13, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs three motion displays. The motion display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from time T1 to time T6. The total execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a is 3.3 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed three times. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T6. The total display time of the button highlighting section 509c is 3.3 seconds. However, the display time of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T14, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
In this way, the highlighted character 509d displays its motion four times. The highlighted character 509d displays its motion periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T5. The total execution time of the highlighted character 509d's motion display is 3.6 seconds. However, the execution time of the highlighted character 509d's motion display may be any length of time.

Next, at time T15, as the 17th button effect ends (the valid operation period for the 17th button effect has elapsed), button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden. Button section 509a (button image 509) is displayed for 4.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 17th button effect and the valid operation period for the 17th button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 17th button effect, the valid operation period for the 17th button effect) may be any time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.
In addition, the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 18th button effect is the same as the execution timing (cycle, execution time) of each effect in the 17th button effect described using Figure 371.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 17th button effect and the 18th button effect, the effect shown in Figure 371 ends at the time of operation, and an enhanced image is displayed after the operation (see Figure 370 (10) and (11)).

Figures 372 and 373 show how the 19th button effect is executed.
When the 19th button effect is executed, first, the fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed, as shown in Figure 372 (1).
Next, as shown in Figure 372 (2), the fourth precursor-enhanced image 527 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 372 (3), the 19th button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "You can do it!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 372(4), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in an action such that it moves to the upper left.

Next, as shown in Fig. 372(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. Also, the button image 509 has a button highlight section 509c displayed in a highly transparent red display mode. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves it to the lower right, returning it to the same display position as in Fig. 372(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 372(6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 is fully pressed. Also, the button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display mode with a lower transparency than Fig. 372(4). Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves further to the lower right.
Next, as shown in Fig. 372(7), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion that returns to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a red display state with the same transparency as Fig. 372(5). The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion that moves to the upper left, returning to the display position of Fig. 372(5).

Next, as shown in Fig. 372 (8), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted characters 509d are also displayed in a motion to move to the upper left, thereby reaching the display position shown in Fig. 372 (4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a and the button highlighting section 509c repeat the displays shown in Figs. 372 (3) to (8), and the highlighted characters 509d repeat the displays shown in Figs. 372 (5) to (8).
Next, as shown in FIG. 373 (9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 19th button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 373 (10).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 19th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 373 (11).

Figure 374 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 19th button effect.
In the 19th button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the operation of displaying the button section 509a, the operation of displaying the button highlight section 509c, and the operation of displaying the highlighted characters 509d are started.
Next, at time T2, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T3, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T4, the second motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T5, the second operation display of the button section 509a and the second display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T6, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T7, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.

Next, at time T8, the third motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T9, the third operation display of the button section 509a and the third display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T10, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T11, the fourth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T12, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
Next, at time T13, the fourth operation display of the button section 509a and the fourth display of the button highlighting section 509c are started.
Next, at time T14, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T15, the fifth motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.

Next, at time T16, the operation display of the button section 509a ends, and the button highlighting section 509c goes invisible.
In this way, the button section 509a performs four motion displays. The motion display of the button section 509a is performed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a is 3.2 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting section 509c is displayed four times. The button highlighting section 509c is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 1.1 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T5. The total execution time of the button highlighting section 509c is 3.2 seconds. However, the execution time of the button highlighting section 509c may be any length of time.

Next, at time T17, as the 19th button effect ends (the valid operation period for the 19th button effect has elapsed), the button section 509a (button image 509) is hidden and the display of the highlighted character 509d ceases.
Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the 19th button effect is 4.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 19th button effect and the valid operation period in the 19th button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 19th button effect and the valid operation period in the 19th button effect) may be any time.
In the 19th button effect, the highlighted character 509d displays five motions. The motions of the highlighted character 509d are displayed periodically, with one cycle being one second, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T4. The total execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d is 4.2 seconds. However, the execution time of the motions displayed by the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

375 to 378 are diagrams showing how the 20th button effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 375 to 378, it is assumed that the operation of the effect button 161 is continued during the operation valid period of the 20th button effect.
When the 20th button effect is executed, first, as shown in Figure 375 (1), the 5th premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed with high transparency.
Next, as shown in FIG. 375 (2), a fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 is displayed with low transparency. The display time of the fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 is 0.3 seconds. However, the display time of the fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 may be any time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 375(3), the 20th button effect starts, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Press as much as you want!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 375(4), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the upper right side.
Next, as shown in Fig. 375(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in white on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the lower left, returning it to the same display position as in Fig. 375(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 375(6), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further to the lower left side, and a second highlighted image 531 during operation is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 375(7), the highlighted character 509d is displayed moving upward to the upper right, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 375(5). Also, the second highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 375(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 375(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the display shown in FIG. 375(3) to (8). The highlighting character 509d repeats the display shown in FIG. 375(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in Figure 376(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 375(7).

Next, as shown in Fig. 376 (10), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in blue on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in an operational state so as to move to the upper right, and is thus positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 375 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 376(11), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 376(9). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 376 (12), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further to the lower left, and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 375 (6). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 376 (13), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 376 (11). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 376 (9) to (13). The highlighting character 509d repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 376 (10) to (13).
Next, as shown in Figure 376 (14), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 376 (12).

Next, as shown in Fig. 376 (15), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in green on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 376 (13).
Next, as shown in Fig. 376 (16), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 376 (10). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (17), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 376 (15). Also, the second highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (18), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the lower left, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 376 (14). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 376 (14) to (16), 377 (17), and (18). The highlighting character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 376 (15), (16), 377 (17), and (18).
Next, as shown in Figure 377 (19), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 376 (18).

Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (20), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in red on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 377 (17).
Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (21), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 377 (18). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 377 (22), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 377 (20). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 continues to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (23), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 are also hidden. The highlighting character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the upper right, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 376 (16). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation-in-progress highlighting image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 377 (19) to (23). The highlighting character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 377 (20) to (23).
Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (24), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 378 (25), a 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is 0.35 seconds. However, the display time of the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 20th button effect, the second operation highlight image 531 will not be displayed.

379 to 382 are diagrams showing how the button 21 effect is executed. In the examples shown in Fig. 379 to 382, it is assumed that the effect button 161 is continuously operated during the operation valid period of the button 21 effect.
When the 21st button effect is executed, first, as shown in Figure 379 (1), the fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed with high transparency.
Next, as shown in Figure 379 (2), a fifth precursor-enhanced image 530 is displayed with low transparency.
Next, as shown in FIG. 379(3), the 21st button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 displays a button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d. In the illustrated example, the highlighted text 509d reads "Press as much as you want!"
Next, as shown in FIG. 379(4), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the upper right side.
Next, as shown in Fig. 379(5), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in white on the button image 509. Also, the highlighted character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the lower left, returning it to the same display position as in Fig. 379(3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 379(6), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further downward to the left, and a second highlighted image 531 during operation is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 379(7), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, returning to the same display position as in Fig. 379(5). Also, the second in-operation highlighted image 531 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 379(8), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 379(4). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the display shown in FIG. 379(3) to (8). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the display shown in FIG. 379(5) to (8).
Next, as shown in Figure 380(9), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 379(7).

Next, as shown in Fig. 380 (10), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in blue on the button image 509. Also, the highlight character 509d is displayed in a manner that moves to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in Fig. 379 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 380(11), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 380(9). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 380(12), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move further to the lower left, and is thus positioned in the same position as in Fig. 379(6). Also, the second highlighted image 531 during operation is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 380 (13), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 380 (11). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the display shown in FIG. 380 (9) to (13). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the display shown in FIG. 380 (10) to (13).
Next, as shown in Fig. 380(14), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 380(12).

Next, as shown in Fig. 380 (15), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in green on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 380 (13).
Next, as shown in Fig. 380(16), the highlighted character 509d is displayed in such a way that it moves to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 380(10). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 381 (17), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 380 (15). Also, the second highlighted image 531 during operation is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (18), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the lower left, thereby being positioned in the same display position as in FIG. 380 (14). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 380 (14) to (16), 381 (17), and (18). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the displays shown in FIGS. 380 (15), (16), 381 (17), and (18).
Next, as shown in Figure 381 (19), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates the decrease in the remaining valid operation period in the button effect. Also, the highlighted character 509d is positioned in the same display position as in Figure 380 (18).

Next, as shown in Fig. 381 (20), the button section 509a is displayed in an operational state so as to mimic the display state of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. Also, a button highlight section 509c is displayed in red on the button image 509. Also, a highlight character 509d is located in the same display position as in Fig. 381 (17).
Next, as shown in Fig. 381 (21), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move downward to the left, and is positioned in the same position as in Fig. 381 (18). Also, a second highlighted image 531 during operation is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 381 (22), the highlighted character 509d is displayed so as to move to the upper right side, and is positioned in the same display position as in Fig. 381 (20). Also, the second highlighted image 531 during operation is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (23), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlighting section 509c is also hidden. The highlighted character 509d is also displayed in a motion to move further to the upper right, so that it is located in the same display position as in FIG. 380 (16). Although not shown, thereafter, the button section 509a, the button highlighting section 509c, and the second operation highlighted image 531 repeat the display shown in FIG. 381 (19) to (23). The highlighted character 509d also repeats the display shown in FIG. 381 (20) to (23).
Next, as shown in FIG. 381 (24), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 382 (25), an 18th post-operation emphasized image 533 is displayed. The display time of the 18th post-operation emphasized image 533 is 0.35 seconds. However, the display time of the 18th post-operation emphasized image 533 may be any time.
In addition, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 21st button effect, the second operation highlight image 531 will not be displayed.

Fig. 383 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect. The example shown in Fig. 383 describes a case where the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect start at the same timing. When the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect start at the same timing, the display timing of the button section 509a (button image 509), the display timing of the action of the button section 509a, the display timing of the button highlight section 509c, and the display timing of the action of the highlighted character 509d are the same in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect.
In the twentieth button performance and the twenty-first button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) and the display of the highlighted character 509d in motion are started.
Next, at time T1, the button section 509a starts to be displayed in operation and the button highlight section 509c starts to be displayed in white.
Next, at time T2, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T3, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T4, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T5, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T6, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T7, the display of second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect ends. That is, the display time of second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect is longer than that in the 21st button effect.
Next, at time T8, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlighting section 509c end. Although not shown, from after time T8 to time T9, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in white, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button performance, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button performance are repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in white, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Next, at time T9, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d begins.
Next, at time T10, the operation display of the button section 509a and the blue display of the button highlight section 509c begin.
Next, at time T11, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T12, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T13, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T14, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T15, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T16, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance ends.
Next, at time T17, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlighting section 509c end. Although not shown, from after time T17 to time T18, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in blue, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button performance, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button performance are repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in blue, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Next, at time T18, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T19, the operation display of the button section 509a and the green display of the button highlight section 509c begin.
Next, at time T20, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T21, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T22, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T23, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T24, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T25, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance ends.
Next, at time T26, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlighting section 509c end. Although not shown, from after time T26 to time T27, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in green, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button performance, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button performance are repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlighting section 509c in green, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Next, at time T27, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T28, the button section 509a starts to be displayed in operation and the button highlight section 509c starts to be displayed in red.
Next, at time T29, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance begins.
Next, at time T30, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance begins.
Next, at time T31, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 21st button performance ends.
Next, at time T32, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d ends.
Next, at time T33, the motion display of the highlighted character 509d starts.
Next, at time T34, the display of the second operation highlight image 531 in the 20th button performance ends.
Next, at time T35, the display of the operation of button section 509a and the display of button highlight section 509c end. Although not shown, from time T35 until the end of the button effects, the display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlight section 509c in red, the display of highlighted character 509d, the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 20th button effect, and the display of second operation-in-progress highlighted image 531 in the 21st button effect are all repeated. The display of the operation of button section 509a, the display of button highlight section 509c in red, and the display of highlighted character 509d are all performed periodically.

Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect is 7 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect and the valid operation period in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect and the valid operation period in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect) may be any time.
The button section 509a displays its movements periodically, with one cycle being 0.5 seconds. The total execution time of the button section 509a's movements in the 20th and 21st button effects is 6.3 seconds. However, the execution time of the button section 509a's movements in the 20th and 21st button effects may be any length of time.
The white, blue, green, and red display of button highlighting section 509c are all performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.5 seconds. The total display time of button highlighting section 509c in the 20th and 21st button effects is 6.3 seconds. However, the display time of button highlighting section 509c in the 20th and 21st button effects may be any length of time.

The motion display of highlighted character 509d is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.35 seconds. The total execution time of the motion display of highlighted character 509d in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect is 6.6 seconds. However, the execution time of the motion display of highlighted character 509d in the 20th button effect and the 21st button effect may be any length of time.
Furthermore, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect is 5.6 seconds. However, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 20th button effect may be any time.
Furthermore, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 21st button effect is 2.8 seconds. However, the display time of second operating highlight image 531 in the 21st button effect may be any time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.
In addition, in the 20th button performance and the 21st button performance, the gauge section 509b may not be displayed.

Figures 384 and 385 are diagrams showing how the 22nd button effect is executed.
When the 22nd button effect is executed, first, as shown in Figure 384 (1), the 6th premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in a highly transparent display mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 384 (2), the sixth precursor-enhanced image 534 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in Figure 384 (3), a sixth precursor-emphasized image 534 is displayed in a display mode with lower transparency than that of Figure 384 (2). The display time of the sixth precursor-emphasized image 534 is 1.25 seconds. However, the display time of the sixth precursor-emphasized image 534 may be any time.

Next, as shown in Fig. 384(4), the 22nd button effect is started, and a button image 509 is displayed. A button portion 509a, a gauge portion 509b, and highlighted text 509d are displayed on the button image 509. The button portion 509a in the 22nd button effect is displayed larger than the button portions 509a in the 1st through 21st button effects.
Moreover, the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in rainbow colors. More specifically, the button highlighting section 509c is divided into seven areas of different heights, and the areas are displayed in red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple in that order from the top, so that the entire button highlighting section 509c is displayed in a rainbow-colored visual appearance.
In addition, highlighted text 509d displays seven characters of text, "Congratulations!", in rainbow colors. More specifically, the seven characters of highlighted text 509d are displayed one by one in the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple from the left, so that highlighted text 509d as a whole is displayed in a rainbow-colored visual appearance.

Next, as shown in Figure 384 (5), seven characters that are highlighted 509d are displayed one by one in the colors purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo from the left. That is, the highlighting section 509c is displayed so that the display color of the seven characters changes.
Next, as shown in Fig. 384 (6), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being pressed one-quarter way. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo in order from the top. The seven characters of the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue one by one from the left.

Next, as shown in Fig. 384 (7), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that simulates the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue in order from the top. The seven characters that make up the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors in blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, and green in order from the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 384 (8), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that mimics the display of the effect button 161 being fully pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, and green in order from the top. The seven characters that make up the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors green, blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, and yellow one by one from the left.

Next, as shown in Fig. 385 (9), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating the effect button 161 being half-pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a motion to be displayed in the colors green, blue, indigo, purple, red, orange, and yellow, starting from the top. The seven characters of the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a motion to be displayed in the colors yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, red, and orange, starting from the left.
Next, as shown in Fig. 385 (10), the button section 509a is displayed in a manner that returns it to a display state that simulates the effect button 161 being pressed one-quarter. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a manner that displays the colors yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, red, and orange in order from the top. The seven characters that make up the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in a manner that displays the colors orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, and red one by one from the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 385(11), the button section 509a is displayed in a motion to return to a display state simulating a state in which the effect button 161 is not pressed. The button highlight section 509c is displayed in a motion to be displayed in orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, and red, starting from the top. The seven characters of the highlighted characters 509d are displayed in red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, starting from the left, one character at a time, in the same colors as those shown in FIG. 384(4). Although not shown, the button section 509a, the button highlight section 509c, and the highlighted characters 509d then repeat the displays shown in FIGS. 384(5) through (8) and 385(9) through (11).
Next, as shown in FIG. 385 (12), the gauge section 509b notifies or indicates that the remaining valid operation period for the button effect has run out.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect, the button image 509 will be hidden as shown in Figure 385 (13).
On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect, a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 385 (14).

Figure 386 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the 22nd button effect.
In the 22nd button performance, first, at time T0, the display of the button section 509a (button image 509) begins.
Next, at time T1, the display of the highlighted characters 509d starts, and the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) also starts. The change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) is performed periodically.
Next, at time T2, the operational display of button section 509a is started. Also, the display of button highlighting section 509c is started, and the change in the display mode of button highlighting section 509c (operational display) is started. The operational display of button section 509a and the change in the display mode of button highlighting section 509c (operational display) are periodically performed.
Next, at time T3, one cycle has passed since the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) started, and the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) for the second cycle starts.

Next, at time T4, one cycle has elapsed since the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c began, and the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c for the second cycle begins.
Next, at time T5, two periods have passed since the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) started, and the change in the display mode of the highlighted characters 509d (moving display) for the third period starts.
Next, at time T6, two cycles have passed since the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c began, and the operation display of the button section 509a and the change in the display mode (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c for the third cycle begin.

Next, at time T7, with the end of the 22nd button presentation (the expiration of the valid operation period in the 22nd button presentation), the button section 509a (button image 509) becomes hidden, and the operation display of the button section 509a, the change in the display mode of the button highlight section 509c (operation display), and the change in the display mode of the highlighted character 509d (operation display) end.
Here, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) in the 22nd button effect is 4.5 seconds. This time is the same as the execution time of the 22nd button effect and the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect. However, the display time of button section 509a (button image 509) (the execution time of the 22nd button effect and the valid operation period in the 22nd button effect) may be any time.

The button section 509a periodically displays an operation, with one cycle being 1.4 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T4. The total execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a is 3.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a may be any length of time.
The button highlighting unit 509c periodically changes the display mode (operational display) with one cycle being 1.4 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T2 to time T4. The total execution time of the display mode change (operational display) of the button highlighting unit 509c is 3.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the display mode change (operational display) of the button highlighting unit 509c may be any length of time.
The highlighted character 509d periodically changes its display mode (movement display) with one cycle being 1.2 seconds, which corresponds to the period from time T1 to time T3. The total execution time of the change in display mode (movement display) of the highlighted character 509d is 3.8 seconds. However, the execution time of the change in display mode (movement display) of the highlighted character 509d may be any length of time.
The timings at which the gauge section 509b is displayed and hidden are the same as the timings at which the button section 509a is displayed and hidden.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the button unit 509a in operation in each button performance in a display mode that mimics the mode in which the performance button 161 alternates (periodically) between an operated state and a not-operated state.
In this case, in the button effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he should operate the effect button 161. Also, since the operation display of the button section 509a is repeated, even if the player misses part of the operation display of the button section 509a, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that he should operate the effect button 161.

In this embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed varies depending on the button effect that is executed. More specifically, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 8th button effect and the 11th button effect are executed than when the 1st button effect through the 7th button effect and the 12th button effect through the 15th button effect are executed. Also, the 5th button effect is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 4th button effect is executed.
Furthermore, the ninth, tenth, and sixteenth button effects are more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the first through eighth button effects and the twelfth through fifteenth button effects. In other words, the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in red (see FIG. 359(5) and the like) is more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in white (see FIG. 346(4) and the like).
Furthermore, when the ninth button effect and the sixteenth button effect are performed, a jackpot game is more likely to be executed (there is a higher expectation) than when the tenth button effect is performed.

Furthermore, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 18th button effect is performed than when the 17th button effect is performed. Also, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed (higher expectation) when the 21st button effect is performed than when the 20th button effect is performed.
Furthermore, the button 19 effect, if performed, is more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the button 17 effect and the button 18 effect. In other words, the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in red is more likely to result in a jackpot game (higher expectations) than the button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in white.
Furthermore, among the first button effects to the second button effects, the second button effect is the effect that is most likely to result in a jackpot game (the effect with the highest expectation) when performed. The second button effect may be configured to always result in a jackpot game (the expectation is 100%) when performed.

In the present embodiment, the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in a manner corresponding to the operation display of the button portion 509a in the button effect. In other words, the operation display of the button portion 509a and the display of the button highlighting portion 509c are synchronized in the button effect.
In the button presentation, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlighting section 509c do not have to be completely synchronized. That is, in the button presentation, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display of the button highlighting section 509c only need to be synchronized or approximately synchronized. In other words, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a and the cycle of the display of the button highlighting section 509c only need to be the same or approximately the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button effect, a post-operation emphasized image is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Even if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button effect, the variable effect may proceed without displaying the post-operation emphasis image.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that in each button effect, the transparency of the button highlighting portion 509c changes depending on the lapse of the valid operation period, but this is not limiting.
In each button effect, the display color of the button highlighting section 509c may change as the valid operation period elapses (for example, changing from gray to white to yellow in that order as the valid operation period elapses). In this case, the transparency of the button highlighting section 509c may or may not change as the valid operation period elapses.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the ninth, tenth, sixteenth, and nineteenth button performances, the display color of the button highlighting section 509c changes from red to white (see Figure 359 (6) and (7)), but this is not limited to this. As the valid operation period for the button performance passes, the transparency and display color of the button highlighting section 509c change, but it does not have to return to white. As an example, the display color of the button highlighting section 509c may alternate between dark red and light red as the valid operation period for the button performance passes.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the 4th button effect, the 5th button effect, the 20th button effect, and the 21st button effect are effects that can accept multiple operations (rapid hits) by the player on the effect button 161 during the operation valid period of the button effect, but this is not limited to this.
In addition, the fourth button performance, the fifth button performance, the twentieth button performance, and the twenty-first button performance may be performances that can accept long periods of continuous operation (so-called long press) during the effective operation period of the button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the fourth button presentation, fifth button presentation, twentieth button presentation, and twenty-first button presentation, the presentation mode of the button image 509 (operation display of the button section 509a, display of the button highlight section 509c, etc.) does not change regardless of whether the presentation button 161 is operated during the valid operation period, but this is not limited to this.
In the fourth, fifth, twentieth, and twenty-first button effects, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period, the button portion 509a and the button highlight portion 509c may continue to be displayed in a specific display mode (for example, the button portion 509a may be displayed in a display mode that simulates the effect button 161 being fully pressed, or the button highlight portion 509c may be displayed with low transparency). Even in this case, the periodic motion display of the highlight character 509d may continue. The highlight character 509d may also continue to be displayed in a specific display mode.

Furthermore, in the 20th and 21st button effects, the time from when the button highlighting section 509c starts to display in white to when it starts to display in blue, the time from when the button highlighting section 509c starts to display in blue to when it starts to display in green, and the time from when the button highlighting section 509c starts to display in green to when it starts to display in red may all be different. More specifically, the later the order, the longer the time may be.

Furthermore, the execution time of each of the above-described effects in each button effect (display of button section 509a, display of button section 509a in motion, display of button highlight section 509c, display of highlighted character 509d in motion, and display of highlighted image during operation) may be the time from when the effect starts to when it ends. For example, the time from time T1 (see FIG. 348 ) when display of button highlight section 509c in the first button effect starts to time T4 when the final display ends may be set to 1.5 seconds, and this time may be considered as the execution time of the display of the button highlight section 509c in the first button effect.
Furthermore, it has been explained that in each effect in each button effect (the operation display of button section 509a, the display of button highlight section 509c, the operation display of highlighted character 509d, and the display of an image highlighted during operation), there is a period from the start to the end of the effect during which the effect is not executed (for example, the period from time T2 to time T3 for button highlight section 509c in the first button effect), but this is not limited to this, and each effect may continue to be executed from the start to the end of the effect. Even in this case, the start and end timings of each effect in each button effect are different, and therefore the execution times are different.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the period of the operation display of the button section 509a and the period of the display of the button highlight section 509c are made different from the period of the operation display of the highlight character 509d, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the period of the operation display of the button unit 509a and the period of the display of the button highlight unit 509c, and the period of the operation display of the highlight character 509d, common to each other in each button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a and the execution time of the display of the button highlight section 509c are different from the execution time of the operation display of the highlight character 509d, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the operation display of the button unit 509a, the execution time of the display of the button highlight unit 509c, and the execution time of the operation display of the highlighted character 509d common to each other in each button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a and the cycle of the display of the button highlight section 509c are the same, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the cycle of the operation display of the button unit 509a and the cycle of the display of the button highlight unit 509c different in each button performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in each button performance, the execution time of the action display of the button section 509a and the execution time of the display of the button highlighting section 509c are the same, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the operation display of the button unit 509a different from the execution time of the display of the button highlighting unit 509c in each button performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a may differ depending on the button effect being executed, but this is not limiting. The cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a may be the same regardless of the button effect being executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the display cycle of the button highlighting portion 509c may differ depending on the button effect being executed, but this is not limiting. The display cycle of the button highlighting portion 509c may be the same regardless of the button effect being executed.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the period of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d may differ depending on the button effect being executed, but this is not limiting. The period of the motion display of the highlighted character 509d may be the same regardless of the button effect being executed.

Figure 387 is a diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each effect from the 1st button effect to the 22nd button effect.
Figure 387 shows, for each button effect, the display time of the precursory emphasis image, the display time of the button section 509a (execution time of the button effect, valid operation period for the button effect), the operation display time of the button section 509a, the display time of the button emphasis section 509c, the operation display time of the emphasized character 509d, the display time of the emphasized image during operation, the display time of the emphasized image after operation, the period of the operation display of the button section 509a, the display period of the button emphasis section 509c, and the period of the operation display of the emphasized character 509d.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the display time of the premonition-emphasizing image depending on the button performance to be executed, thereby diversifying the way in which anticipation for the execution of the button performance can be created depending on the button performance to be executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode (action display mode) of the premonition-emphasizing image depending on the button performance to be executed, thereby diversifying the way in which anticipation for the execution of the button performance can be created depending on the button performance to be executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the display mode (operation display mode) of the premonition emphasis image in each button performance, but may share the same execution time. Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the premonition emphasis image in each button performance, but may share the same display mode (operation display mode).
In addition, the display time of the prophecy emphasis image for each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 387.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the operation display of the button unit 509a depending on the button performance to be executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the performance button 161 can be diversified depending on the button performance to be executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the operation mode (cycle) of the operation display of the button unit 509a depending on the button performance to be executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the performance button 161 can be diversified depending on the button performance to be executed.
The performance control unit 300 may set different execution times for the operation display of the button unit 509a in each button performance, but may set the same operation mode (cycle). Also, the performance control unit 300 may set different execution times for the operation display of the button unit 509a in each button performance, but may set the same operation mode (cycle).
Furthermore, the execution time of the operation display of the button section 509a in each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 387. Furthermore, the cycle of the operation display of the button section 509a in each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 387.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the duration of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c depending on the button effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the operation of the effect button 161 is promoted depending on the button effect being executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can vary the operation mode (cycle) of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c depending on the button performance being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the performance button 161 can be diversified depending on the button performance being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle). Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting unit 509c in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle).
The execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting section 509c in each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 387. The execution time of the display (operation display) of the button highlighting section 509c in each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect) may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 387.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the duration of the action display of the highlighted character 509d depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can vary the operation mode (cycle) of the operation display of the highlighted character 509d depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the highlighted character 509d in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle). Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the highlighted character 509d in each button performance, but may share the same operation mode (cycle).
In addition, the execution time of the motion display of highlighted character 509d in each button effect may be the opposite of the length relationship to the example shown in Fig. 387. In addition, the cycle of the motion display of highlighted character 509d in each button effect may be the opposite of the length relationship to the example shown in Fig. 387.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the duration of the display of the highlight image during operation depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the operation highlight image for each button performance (4th button performance, 5th button performance, 20th button performance, 21st button performance), but may make the execution time the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the operation highlight image for each button performance (4th button performance, 5th button performance, 20th button performance, 21st button performance), but make the display format common.
In addition, the execution time for displaying the operation highlight image in each button effect (4th button effect, 5th button effect, 20th button effect, 21st button effect) may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in FIG. 387 .

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the post-operation highlight image depending on the button effect being executed, so that the way of promoting the operation of the effect button 161 can be diversified depending on the button effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the post-operation emphasis image for each button performance, but may make the display time the same.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may vary the display time of the post-operation emphasis image for each button performance, but may make the display format common.
In addition, the execution time for displaying the post-operation emphasis image in each button effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 387.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 differentiates the display time of the button section 509a, the operation display time of the button section 509a, the display time of the button highlight section 509c, and the operation display time of the highlighted character 509d in each button effect, which makes it easier for the player to notice each effect compared to when the execution times of each effect are the same.
In addition, in each button performance, the display time of the button section 509a, the operation display time of the button section 509a, the display time of the button highlight section 509c, and the operation display time of the highlighted character 509d may be in the opposite length relationship to the example shown in Figure 387.

Figure 387 also shows the total execution time of each effect (operation display of button section 509a, display of button highlight section 509c, operation display of highlighted character 509d, and display of highlighted image during operation) that is repeated in each button effect.
Here, in each button effect, each effect (the operation display of the button section 509a, the display of the button highlight section 509c, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d, and the display of the highlighted image during operation) may be performed only once. In this case, the time shown in Fig. 387 may be the execution time of each effect (the operation display of the button section 509a, the display of the button highlight section 509c, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d, and the display of the highlighted image during operation) that is performed only once in each button effect (the first button effect to the twenty-second button effect).

Furthermore, although it has been explained that the display time of the button section 509a, the operation valid period for the button effect, and the execution time for the button effect are the same for each button effect, this is not limited to this.
In each button effect, the display time of the button section 509a, the valid operation period of the button effect, and the execution time of the button effect may be different from each other. In addition, in each button effect, the valid operation period of the button effect may be shorter than the display time of the button section 509a or the execution time of the button effect. Furthermore, in each button effect, the execution time of the button effect may be longer than the display time of the button section 509a.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that there are button effects (for example, the 7th button effect and the 8th button effect) in which the premonition emphasis image and the post-operation emphasis image are different, but the presentation style of the button image 509 in the button effect is common.
Here, button effects in which the precursory emphasis image and post-operation emphasis image are different but the presentation mode of the button image 509 in the button effect is common may be considered to be the same button effect.

(Zone effect execution mode)
Next, the manner in which the zone effects are executed will be described.
The zone effects in this embodiment include a first zone effect and a second zone effect, and various effects are performed depending on the zone effect being executed.
Figure 388 is a diagram showing how the first zone presentation is executed.
In the first zone effect, first, as shown in Figure 388 (1), a first zone start image 536 is displayed. When the first zone start image 536 is displayed, the first zone effect begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 388 (2), the first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In this embodiment, the first zone execution image 537 is displayed in motion. More specifically, in the first zone execution image 537, the displayed image moves from the left to the right on the image display unit 114, and after passing the right edge of the image display unit 114, the image is again displayed at the left edge of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right. In the example shown, the first zone execution image 537 displays, in order from left to right, the marks O, △, □, and ◇. The display of these marks emphasizes the "X Zone" text portion in the first zone execution image 537. In other words, the display of the marks O, △, □, and ◇ emphasizes the first zone execution image 537 (first zone presentation).

Next, as shown in FIG. 388(3), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and the marks ◇, ◯, △, and □ are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537.
Next, as shown in FIG. 388(4), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and marks of □, ◇, ◯, and △ are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537.
Next, as shown in FIG. 388(5), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and marks △, □, ◇, and ◯ are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537.
Next, as shown in Fig. 388(6), the action display of the first zone execution image 537 continues, and marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in order from the left in the first zone execution image 537. Although not shown, thereafter, the first zone execution image 537 repeats the displays shown in Fig. 388(3) to (6).

In this way, the first zone execution image 537 periodically displays the movement, with one cycle being 1.5 seconds, which is the period from the time shown in FIG. 388(2) to the time shown in FIG. 388(6). Note that the cycle of the first zone execution image 537 may be any time.
Additionally, although the text portion of "X Zone" is not displayed in motion in the first zone execution image 537, this is not limiting. The text portion of "X Zone" in the first zone execution image 537 may also be displayed in motion together with the marks "○, △, □, ◇." Furthermore, the period of the display of the motion of the text portion of "X Zone" in the first zone execution image 537 may be the same as or different from the period of the display of the marks "○, △, □, ◇."

Figure 389 is a diagram showing how the second zone presentation is executed.
In the second zone effect, first, as shown in Figure 389 (1), a second zone start image 538 is displayed. When the second zone start image 538 is displayed, the second zone effect starts.
Next, as shown in FIG. 389 (2), a second zone execution image 613 is displayed. In this embodiment, the second zone execution image 613 is displayed in a dynamic manner. More specifically, in the second zone execution image 613, the displayed image moves from the left side to the right side of the image display unit 114, and after passing the right end of the image display unit 114, the image is displayed again at the left end of the image display unit 114 and moves to the right. In the illustrated example, the second zone execution image 613 displays, in order from left to right, the marks ●, ▲, ■, and ◆. The display of these marks emphasizes the text portion of "Y Zone" in the second zone execution image 613. In other words, the display of the marks ●, ▲, ■, and ◆ emphasizes the second zone execution image 613 (the second zone effect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 389(3), the operation display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and the marks ◆, ●, ▲, and ■ are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613.
Next, as shown in FIG. 389(4), the operation display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and marks ■, ◆, ●, and ▲ are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613.
Next, as shown in FIG. 389(5), the operation display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and the marks ▲, ■, ◆, and ● are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613.
Next, as shown in Fig. 389(6), the action display of the second zone execution image 613 continues, and the marks ●, ▲, ■, and ◆ are displayed in order from the left in the second zone execution image 613. Although not shown, thereafter the second zone execution image 613 repeats the displays shown in Fig. 389(3) to (6).

In this way, the second zone execution image 613 periodically displays the movement, with one cycle being one second, which is the period from the time shown in FIG. 389(2) to the time shown in FIG. 389(6). That is, the first zone execution image 537 and the second zone execution image 613 have different movement display cycles. However, the first zone execution image 537 and the second zone execution image 613 may have the same movement display cycle. Furthermore, the second zone execution image 613 may have a longer movement display cycle than the first zone execution image 537.
Furthermore, in the second zone execution image 613, the text portion of "Y zone" is not displayed in motion, but this is not limited to this. The text portion of "Y zone" in the second zone execution image 613 may also be displayed in motion together with the marks "●, ▲, ■, ◆". Furthermore, the period of the motion display of the text portion of "Y zone" in the second zone execution image 613 may be the same as or different from the period of the motion display of the marks "●, ▲, ■, ◆".

Furthermore, when a zone effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 may set a stage (effect mode) according to the zone effect. Therefore, the zone execution images (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) can also be regarded as images that identify the effect mode.

(Execution mode of reach effect)
Next, the manner in which the reach-time effects are executed will be described. The reach-time effects are effects that are executed when the reach-time effects start. The reach-time effects in this embodiment include the first reach-time effect to the ninth reach-time effect, and various effects are executed depending on the reach-time effect that is executed.
Figure 390 shows how the first reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 390 (1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.

Next, the first reach effect begins. In the first reach effect, as shown in Figure 390 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, and a first reach highlight image 542 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in white, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "Reach." Furthermore, when a reach effect is performed, a reach highlight effect is performed to emphasize the reach effect. In the first reach effect, a first reach highlight effect is performed as a reach highlight effect. In the first reach highlight effect, a reach highlight image 541 is displayed. More specifically, an image simulating light as the reach highlight image 541 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the text portion of "Ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, on a layer in front of this text portion. Furthermore, in the first reach effect, a first reach action is performed. In the first reach action, each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is displayed as if raising both hands directly above.

Next, as shown in Fig. 390 (3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps with the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390(4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden and the first reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 390(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the first reach highlight image 542 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 390(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are lowering their hands, and the display returns to the same state as Fig. 390(1), and the first reach action ends. This ends the first reach performance.
Here, in the first reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the first reach emphasis performance) is 1 second, the execution time of the first reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the first reach eye emphasis image 542 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the first reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 391 shows how the second reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 391 (1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the odd number "5" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the second reach effect begins. In the second reach effect, as shown in FIG. 391 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a second reach eye emphasis image 543 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in white, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "reach." In the second reach effect, a second reach emphasis effect is performed. This second reach emphasis effect is the same as the first reach emphasis effect. That is, in the second reach emphasis effect, an image simulating light as the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the text portion of "ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, on a layer in front of this text portion. In addition, in the second reach effect, a second reach action is performed. In the second reach action, each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised horizontally.

Next, as shown in Fig. 391 (3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 391 (4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden and the second reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 391(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the second reach highlight image 543 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 391(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are lowering their hands, returning to the same display mode as Fig. 391(1), and the second reach action ends. This ends the second reach performance.
Here, in the second reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the second reach emphasis performance) is 1 second, the execution time of the second reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the second reach eye emphasis image 543 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the second reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 392 shows how the third reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 392 (1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the third reach effect is started. In the third reach effect, as shown in FIG. 392 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fourth reach eye emphasis image 544 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in red, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "Super Hot!". In addition, in the third reach effect, a third reach emphasis effect is performed. In the third reach emphasis effect, an image resembling a flame is displayed above the reach suggestion image 540 as the reach emphasis image 541. In addition, in the third reach effect, a third reach action is performed. In the third reach action, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an expanding manner.

392(3), in the third reach emphasis effect, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so that the display area thereof becomes wider.
Next, as shown in FIG. 392 (4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the third reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 392(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the third reach highlight image 544 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 392(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, returning to the same display mode as Fig. 392(1), and the third reach operation ends. This ends the third reach performance.
Here, in the third reach performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 2 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 2 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the third reach emphasis performance) is 1.5 seconds, the execution time of the third reach action is 2.5 seconds, and the display time of the third reach eye emphasis image 544 is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the third reach performance may be any time.

Figure 393 shows how the fourth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 393 (1), in the first stage (first presentation mode), the decorative patterns 41 "7" on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the fourth reach effect starts. In the fourth reach effect, as shown in FIG. 393 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, and a fourth reach highlight image 545 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539 is displayed in gold, and the reach suggestion image 540 displays the text "Jackpot!?". In addition, in the fourth reach effect, a fourth reach highlight effect is performed. In the fourth reach highlight effect, the text portion of "Jackpot" in the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in an upward motion, so that it is displayed above the text portion of "Tari!?". In addition, in the fourth reach effect, a fourth reach action is performed. In the fourth reach action, each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a vibrating motion.

393(3), the reach suggesting image 540 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach suggesting image 540 is displayed in motion such that the text portion of "Big Hit" descends and the text portion of "Tari" rises, so that the text portion of "Tari" is positioned above the text portions of "Big Hit" and "!?".
393(4), the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach suggestion image 540 is displayed in motion such that the text portion of "??" is positioned above the text portion of "jackpot" by descending and the text portion of "??" is raised.
Next, as shown in FIG. 393 (5), the reach suggestion image 540 is hidden, and the fourth reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 393(6), the reach line image 539 and the fourth reach-eye emphasis image 545 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 393(7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the same display mode as Fig. 393(1), and the fourth reach action ends. This ends the fourth reach effect.
Here, in the fourth reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 2.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 2 seconds, the display time of the action of the reach suggestion image 540 (execution time of the fourth reach emphasis performance) is 2 seconds, the execution time of the fourth reach action is 3 seconds, and the display time of the fourth reach eye emphasis image 545 is 2.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the fourth reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 394 shows how the fifth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 394 (1), in the second stage (second presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the fifth reach effect begins. In the fifth reach effect, as shown in FIG. 394 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fifth reach eye emphasis image 546 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the reach emphasis image 541 are displayed in the same display manner as in the first reach effect and the second reach effect. Furthermore, in the fifth reach effect, a fifth reach emphasis effect is performed. The fifth reach emphasis effect is the same effect as the first reach emphasis effect and the second reach emphasis effect. That is, in the fifth reach emphasis effect, an image simulating light as the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the text portion of "ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, in a layer in front of this text portion. In addition, in the fifth reach operation, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an upward movement, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a downward movement.

Next, as shown in Fig. 394 (3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps with the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 394 (4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the fifth reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 394(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the 5th reach highlight image 546 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 394(6), the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a descending motion, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an ascending motion, so that the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the same display mode as Fig. 394(1), and the fifth reach motion ends. This ends the fifth reach effect.
Here, in the 5th reach effect, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the 5th reach emphasis effect) is 1 second, the execution time of the 5th reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the 5th reach eye emphasis image 546 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the 5th reach effect may be any time.

Figure 395 shows how the sixth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 395 (1), in the second stage (second presentation mode), the odd number "5" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the sixth reach effect begins. In the sixth reach effect, as shown in FIG. 395 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a sixth reach eye emphasis image 547 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the reach emphasis image 541 are displayed in the same display manner as in the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the fifth reach effect. Furthermore, in the sixth reach effect, a sixth reach emphasis effect is performed. The sixth reach emphasis effect is the same effect as the first reach emphasis effect, the second reach effect, and the fifth reach emphasis effect. That is, in the sixth reach emphasis effect, an image simulating light as the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the text portion of "ri" in the reach suggestion image 540, in a layer in front of this text portion. In addition, in the sixth reach operation, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed as moving down, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed as moving up.

Next, as shown in Fig. 395 (3), the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the reach emphasis image 541 is displayed in motion so as to move to a layer in front of the text portion of "Chi" in the reach suggestion image 540, in an area that overlaps with the display area of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 395 (4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the sixth reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 395(5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the sixth reach highlight image 547 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 395(6), the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an upward motion, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a downward motion, so that the left and right decorative symbols 41 return to the same display mode as Fig. 395(1), and the 6th reach motion ends. This ends the 6th reach effect.
Here, in the 6th reach effect, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 1.5 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 1.5 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the 6th reach emphasis effect) is 1 second, the execution time of the 6th reach action is 2 seconds, and the display time of the 6th reach eye emphasis image 547 is 1.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the 6th reach effect may be any time.

Figure 396 shows how the seventh reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 396 (1), in the second stage (second presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the seventh reach effect begins. In the seventh reach effect, as shown in FIG. 396 (2), a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a seventh reach eye emphasis image 548 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the reach emphasis image 541 are displayed in the same display manner as in the third reach effect. Furthermore, in the seventh reach effect, a seventh reach emphasis effect is performed. The seventh reach emphasis effect is the same effect as the third reach emphasis effect. Furthermore, in the seventh reach action, each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 is displayed to sway in a clockwise and counterclockwise direction.

Next, as shown in Fig. 396(3), the reach emphasizing image 541 is displayed in a dynamic manner. More specifically, the reach emphasizing image 541 is displayed in a dynamic manner so that the display area thereof becomes wider.
Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (4), the reach emphasis image 541 is hidden, and the seventh reach emphasis effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 396 (5), the reach line image 539, the reach suggestion image 540, and the seventh reach highlight image 548 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 396(6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 finish their motion display and return to the same display mode as Fig. 396(1), and the seventh reach motion ends. This ends the seventh reach effect.
Here, in the seventh reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539 is 2 seconds, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 is 2 seconds, the display (action display) time of the reach emphasis image 541 (execution time of the seventh reach emphasis performance) is 1.5 seconds, the execution time of the seventh reach action is 2.5 seconds, and the display time of the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548 is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the seventh reach-time performance may be any time.

Figure 397 shows how the eighth reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 397 (1), in the third stage (third presentation mode), the even number "4" decorative patterns 41 on the left and right are temporarily stopped.
Next, the eighth reach effect starts. In the eighth reach effect, an eighth reach action is performed. In the eighth reach action, as shown in FIG. 397(2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 397(3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 397(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, an eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 397(5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, returning to the same display mode as Fig. 397(1), and the 8th reach operation ends. This ends the 8th reach effect.
Here, in the eighth reach effect, the execution time of the eighth reach action is 2.75 seconds, and the display time of the eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is 2.5 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the eighth reach effect may be any time.

Figure 398 shows how the 9th reach effect is executed.
First, as shown in Figure 398 (1), in the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right, "7", temporarily stop.
Next, the 9th reach effect starts. In the 9th reach effect, a 9th reach action is performed. In the 9th reach action, as shown in FIG. 398 (2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, a 9th reach effect highlight image 550 is displayed.
398(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. In addition, as the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced in size, the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 is also displayed in a shrinking manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 398(4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed so as to expand again. In addition, along with the expansion of the left and right decorative symbols 41, the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 is also displayed so as to expand.

Next, as shown in Fig. 398(5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, returning to the same display mode as Fig. 398(1), and the 8th reach operation ends. Also, the 9th reach-eye emphasis image 550 is no longer displayed. This ends the 9th reach performance.
Here, in the ninth reach effect, the execution time of the ninth reach action is 3.5 seconds, and the display time of the ninth reach-eye emphasis image 550 is 3.25 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the ninth reach effect may be any time.

In the following description, when the first to ninth reach actions are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach actions.
In addition, in the following, when the first reach emphasis effect to the seventh reach emphasis effect are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as reach emphasis effects.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the reach line image 539 is displayed, the reach eye emphasis image is displayed, and the reach action is executed. Here, the display of the reach line image 539, the display of the reach eye emphasis image, and the reach action can also be regarded as effects that emphasize the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the reach line image 539, the display of the reach eye emphasis image, and the reach action can also be regarded as effects that emphasize the reach eye decorative symbol 41.

Figure 399 is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect during each reach effect.
Figure 399 shows, for each reach-time effect, the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the execution time of the reach emphasis effect, the execution time of the reach action, and the display time of the reach eye emphasis image.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the reach line image 539 depending on the reach-time effect being executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the reach line image 539 depending on the reach-time effect being executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the reach line image 539 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display time. Also, the effect control unit 300 may vary the display time of the reach line image 539 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display mode.
In addition, the display time of the reach line image 539 in each reach performance may be reversed from the example shown in Figure 399.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the reach suggestion image 540 depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the reach suggestion image 540 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display time. Also, the effect control unit 300 may vary the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 in each reach-time effect, but may share the display mode.
In addition, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540 in each reach performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example of FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the reach emphasis effect depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the operating mode of the reach emphasis effect depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the operation mode of the reach emphasis performance in each reach performance but may make the execution time the same. Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the reach emphasis performance in each reach performance but may make the operation mode the same.
In addition, the execution time of the reach emphasis effect in each reach effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 399.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the reach action depending on the reach presentation being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach presentation can be diversified depending on the reach presentation being executed.
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the operation mode of the reach action depending on the reach effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach effect can be diversified depending on the reach effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may vary the operation mode of the reach action in each reach-time performance, but may make the execution time the same. Also, the performance control unit 300 may vary the execution time of the reach action in each reach-time performance, but may make the operation mode the same.
In addition, the execution time of the reach action in each reach-time performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 399.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the reach-eye emphasis image depending on the reach-time effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the reach-eye emphasis image depending on the reach-time effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is drawn to the reach-time effect can be diversified depending on the reach-time effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may vary the display mode of the reach-eye emphasis image in each reach-time effect, but may share the display time. Also, the effect control unit 300 may vary the display time of the reach-eye emphasis image in each reach-time effect, but may share the display mode.
In addition, the display time of the reach-eye emphasis image in each reach-time performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 399.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 varies the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the display time of the reach eye emphasis image, the execution time of the reach emphasis effect, and the execution time of the reach action in each reach effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize each effect compared to when the execution time of each effect is the same.
In addition, in each reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the display time of the reach eye emphasis image, the execution time of the reach emphasis performance, and the execution time of the reach action may be reversed from the example shown in Figure 399.
In addition, in each reach-time performance, the display time of the reach line image 539, the display time of the reach suggestion image 540, the display time of the reach eye emphasis image, the execution time of the reach emphasis performance, and the execution time of the reach action may be the same.
Furthermore, each effect in each reach effect is not repeated, but is performed only once.

(Execution mode of the role-playing performance)
Next, the manner in which the special effects are performed will be described.
The role presentation of this embodiment includes first role presentation to third role presentation, and various presentations are performed depending on the role presentation to be executed.
Figure 400 shows how the first role presentation is executed.
When the first role performance starts, first, as shown in Figure 400 (1), the left movable role 115A starts moving downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 400(2), the left movable part 115A moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114. The left movable part 115A also emits white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 400(3), a first highlight image of the reel 551 is displayed. The first highlight image of the reel 551 is displayed so as to rotate clockwise.
Next, as shown in Figure 400 (4), the operation display of the first highlight image 551 of the reel continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 400(5), the first highlight image 551 of the reel continues to be displayed in the same display mode as Fig. 400(3). The first highlight image 551 of the reel is displayed periodically, with one cycle being 0.8 seconds, which is the period from the time of Fig. 400(3) to the time of Fig. 400(5). However, the cycle of the first highlight image 551 of the reel may be any time.
Although not shown in the figure, thereafter, the first highlighted image 551 of the reel repeats periodic movement display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 400(6), the left movable accessory 115A is turned off. Also, the accessory first emphasized image 551 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 400 (7), the left movable part 115A begins to move upward.
Next, as shown in Figure 400 (8), the left movable role piece 115A returns to the position it was in before the start of the first role piece performance, and the first role piece performance ends.
Here, in the first role performance, the display (operation display) time of the role first emphasized image 551 is 2.4 seconds, the light emission time of the left movable role 115A is 2.7 seconds, and the operation time of the left movable role 115A (execution time of the first role performance) is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the first role performance may be any time.

Figures 401 and 402 show how the second role presentation is executed.
When the second role performance is performed, a development image 584 is displayed before the start of the second role performance, as shown in FIG. 401(1). Therefore, the second role performance can also be regarded as a development performance.
Next, as shown in Figure 401 (2), the middle movable part 115B begins to move downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401(3), the middle movable role object 115B moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle movable role object 115B emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (4), a development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In this embodiment, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed in a dynamic manner. More specifically, in the development emphasis image 554, the displayed image moves from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114, and an image that has passed the bottom end of the image display unit 114 is displayed again at the top end of the image display unit 114 and moves downward. In the example shown, marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401(5), the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and in the development emphasis image 554, marks ◇, ◯, △, and □ are displayed in order from top to bottom.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401(6), the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and marks of □, ◇, ◯, and △ are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in FIG. 401 (7), the motion display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and in the development emphasis image 554, marks △, □, ◇, and ◯ are displayed in order from top to bottom.

Next, as shown in Fig. 401(8), the moving display of the development emphasis image 554 continues, and marks of O, △, □, and ◇ are displayed in order from top to bottom in the development emphasis image 554. Although not shown in the figure, thereafter, the development emphasis image 554 repeats the displays shown in Fig. 401(5) to (8).
In this way, the development emphasis image 554 periodically displays a motion, with one cycle being one second, which is the period from the time shown in FIG. 401(4) to the time shown in FIG. 401(8). Note that the cycle of the development emphasis image 554 may be any time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 402(9), the center movable part 115B is turned off. Also, the development highlight image 554 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 402 (10), the middle movable part 115B begins to move upward.
Next, as shown in Figure 402 (11), the middle movable role 115B returns to the position it was in before the start of the second role performance (development performance), and the second role performance (development performance) ends.
Here, in the second role performance (development performance), the display (operation display) time of the development emphasis image 554 is 6 seconds, the light emission time of the middle movable role performance 115B is 6.5 seconds, and the operation time of the middle movable role performance 115B (execution time of the second role performance (development performance)) is 6.7 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the second role performance (development performance) may be any time.

Figure 403 shows how the third role presentation is executed.
When the third role performance starts, first, as shown in Figure 403 (1), the left movable role 115A starts moving downward.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (2), the left movable part 115A moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114. In addition, the left movable part 115A emits white light.

Next, as shown in Fig. 403(3), the second highlight image of the reel 555 is displayed. The second highlight image of the reel 555 is displayed so as to rotate in a clockwise direction.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (4), the motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 403(5), the motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel continues, and is displayed in the same display mode as Fig. 403(3). The motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel is performed periodically, with one cycle being 0.7 seconds, which is the period from the time of Fig. 403(3) to the time of Fig. 403(5). However, the cycle of the motion display of the second highlight image 555 of the reel may be any time.
Although not shown in the figure, thereafter, the second highlighting image 555 of the reel repeats periodic movement display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 403(6), the left movable accessory 115A is turned off. Also, the accessory second emphasized image 555 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (7), the left movable part 115A begins to move upward.
Next, as shown in Figure 403 (8), the left movable role piece 115A returns to the position before the start of the third role piece performance, and the third role piece performance ends. Note that the left movable role piece 115A performs the same operation in the third role piece performance and the first role piece performance (see Figure 400).
Here, in the third role performance, the display (operation display) time of the role second emphasized image 555 is 2.1 seconds, the light emission time of the left movable role 115A is 2.7 seconds, and the operation time of the left movable role 115A (execution time of the third role performance) is 3 seconds. However, the execution time of each performance in the third role performance may be any time.

Figure 404 is a diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the first to third role performances.
Figure 404 shows, for each reel performance, the operating time of the movable reel 115 (execution time of the reel performance), the light emitting time of the movable reel 115, the display (operation display) time of the reel highlight image (first reel highlight image 551, development highlight image 554, second reel highlight image 555), and the period of the operation display.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the operation time of the movable role object 115 depending on the role object performance being executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the ways in which the player focuses on the role object performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the operating time of the movable role object 115 common in each role object performance.
In addition, the operating time of the movable role 115 in each role performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 404.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the light emission time of the movable role object 115 depending on the role object performance being executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the ways in which the player is drawn to the role object performance.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the movable role object 115 common in each role object performance.
In addition, the light emission time of the movable role 115 in each role performance may be reversed from the example shown in Figure 404.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the display time (action display time) of the reel highlighting image depending on the reel performance being executed, thereby diversifying the ways in which the player can focus on the reel performance.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can change the period of the motion display of the reel highlighting image depending on the reel performance being executed, thereby diversifying the ways in which the player can focus on the reel performance.
The performance control unit 300 may make the display time (action display time) of the reel emphasis image in each reel effect the same, but vary the cycle of the action display. The performance control unit 300 may make the operation display cycle of the reel emphasis image in each reel effect the same, but vary the display time (action display time). The performance control unit 300 may make both the operation display cycle and the display time (action display time) of the reel emphasis image in each reel effect the same.
In addition, the display time (action display time) of the reel highlighting image in each reel performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 404. In addition, the period of the action display of the reel highlighting image in each reel performance may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 404.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the operation time of the movable role object 115, the light emission time of the movable role object 115, and the display time of the role object highlighting image different for each role object performance. Therefore, it is possible to make each performance more easily noticeable to the player compared to when the execution time of each performance is the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the operating time of the movable role object 115, the light emission time of the movable role object 115, and the display time of the role object highlighting image common in each role object performance.
Furthermore, in each reel performance, the operating time of the movable reel 115, the light emission time of the movable reel 115, and the display time of the reel highlighting image may be in the opposite long/short relationship to the example shown in Figure 404.

(Execution mode of suggestive performance)
Next, a description will be given of how the suggestion effect is executed. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win).
The suggestive effects in this embodiment include a start suggestive effect and an in-progress suggestive effect. The start suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win) when the SPSP reach effect starts. The in-progress suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the probability (expectation level) that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win (small win) while the SPSP reach effect is being executed (after the SPSP reach effect starts).
In addition, the start suggestion effect of this embodiment has execution modes of first to fifth modes, and various effects are performed depending on the mode of execution.
In addition, the in-execution suggestion effects of this embodiment have execution modes of first to fifth modes, and various effects are performed depending on the mode of execution.

Figure 405 shows the suggestive effects at the start of the first mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the first mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 405 (1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" horizontally in white.
Furthermore, when a start suggestion effect is performed, a start emphasis effect is performed that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The start emphasis effect can also be considered as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP start image 556. In the first form of start suggestion effect, a first start emphasis effect is performed. In the first start emphasis effect, a first start emphasis image 557 is displayed. The first start emphasis image 557 is an area that overlaps with the display area of the "S" which is the leftmost text portion of the SPSP start image 556, and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (2), the first start-up emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the text portion of the SPSP start image 556, which is the second character from the left, "P," and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (3), the first start-up emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the "S" text portion, which is the third character from the left in the SPSP start image 556, and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (4), the first start-up emphasis image 557 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the "P" text portion, which is the rightmost part of the SPSP start image 556, and is displayed on a layer in front of this text portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 405 (5), the first start emphasis image 557 is hidden, and the first start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the first mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 2.5 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the first start emphasis image 557 (execution time of the first start emphasis effect) is 2 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the first mode may be any time.

Figure 406 shows the suggestive effects at the start of the second mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the second mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 406 (1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" horizontally in red.
Furthermore, in the start suggestion effect of the second mode, a second start emphasis effect is performed. In the second start emphasis effect, a second start emphasis image 558 is displayed. The second start emphasis image 558 is displayed above the "P" that is the rightmost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.

Next, as shown in FIG. 406 ( 2 ), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move above the “S” that is the third text portion from the left in the SPSP start image 556 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 406(3), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move above the "P" which is the second character from the left in the text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 406(4), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move above the "S" which is the leftmost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 406 (5), the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed in motion so as to move to the part between the second text character from the left, "P," and the third text character from the left, "S," in the SPSP start image 556.

Next, as shown in FIG. 406(6), the second start emphasis image 558 is hidden, and the second start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the second mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 3.5 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the second start emphasis image 558 (execution time of the second start emphasis effect) is 2.8 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the second mode may be any time.

Figure 407 shows the suggestive effects at the start of the third mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the third mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 407 (1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. In the SPSP start image 556, two "SP" texts are displayed in red, one above the other.

Next, in the start suggestion effect of the third mode, a third start emphasis effect is performed. In the third start emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 407(2), the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in motion. More specifically, the "SP" text portion at the top of the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in motion so as to expand.
Next, as shown in FIG. 407(3), the upper text portion "SP" of the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in a manner that causes the "SP" portion to shrink and the lower text portion "SP" to expand.
Next, as shown in FIG. 407(4), the upper text portion "SP" of the SPSP start image 556 is displayed again in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 407 (5), the upper text portion "SP" and the lower text portion "SP" of the SPSP start image 556 are both displayed in a shrinking manner, and the third start-up emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the third mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the third aspect, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 3.3 seconds, and the execution time of the third start emphasis effect is 2.7 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the third aspect may be any time.

Figure 408 shows the suggestive effects at the start of the fourth mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 408(1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" vertically in white.

Next, in the start suggestion effect of the fourth aspect, a fourth start emphasis effect is performed. In the fourth start emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 408 (2), a third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed around the "S" which is the uppermost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 408(3), the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion so as to move around the "P", which is the second character from the top of the text portion of the SPSP start image 556.
Next, as shown in FIG. 408 ( 4 ), the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion so as to move around the “S” which is the third letter from the top of the text portion of the SPSP start image 556 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 408(5), the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed in motion so as to move around the "P" which is the bottommost text portion of the SPSP start image 556.

Next, as shown in FIG. 408(6), the third start emphasis image 559 is hidden and the fourth start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 2 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the third start emphasis image 559 (execution time of the fourth start emphasis effect) is 1.6 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode may be any time.

Figure 409 shows the suggestive effects at the start of the fifth mode.
When the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 409(1), an SPSP start image 556 is displayed. The SPSP start image 556 displays the text "SPSP" arranged diagonally in white.

Next, in the start suggestion effect of the fifth aspect, a fifth start emphasis effect is performed. In the fifth start emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 409 (2), a fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed so as to cover the SPSP start image 556.
Next, the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed in a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 in an area overlapping the display area of the left decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 409(4), the fourth start emphasis image 560 is hidden, and the fifth start emphasis effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP start image 556 disappears and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode ends.
Here, in the start suggestion effect of the fifth aspect, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 is 1.5 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the fourth start emphasis image 560 (execution time of the fifth start emphasis effect) is 1.1 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the start suggestion effect of the fifth aspect may be any time.

In the following, when the first to fifth start emphasis effects are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as start emphasis effects.
In addition, each effect in the start suggestion effect (display of the SPSP start image 556, execution of the start emphasis effect) is not repeated and is performed only once.

Here, the start suggestion effect indicates the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed depending on the execution mode. In this embodiment, the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode have a higher probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed than the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed is higher when the display color of the SPSP start image 556 is red (see Figures 406 (6) and 407 (5)) than when the display color of the SPSP start image 556 is white (see Figures 405 (5), 408 (6), and 409 (4)).

In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the start-up suggestion effect of the third mode is executed than when the start-up suggestion effect of the second mode is executed, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the start-up suggestion effect of the second mode is executed than when the start-up suggestion effect of the third mode is executed.
Furthermore, in the order of the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the later the order, the higher the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed. Furthermore, in the order of the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the earlier the order, the higher the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed.
Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start-up suggestion effect of the fourth mode and the start-up suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed may be higher than the start-up suggestion effect of the second mode and the start-up suggestion effect of the third mode. In this case, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start-up suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed may be higher than the start-up suggestion effect of the fourth mode, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start-up suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed may be higher than the start-up suggestion effect of the fifth mode.

Here, the SPSP start image 556 and the start emphasis image are regarded as suggestive images that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The SPSP start image 556 is regarded as a specific portion of the suggestive image, and the start emphasis image is regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion in the suggestive image.
Also, like the start suggestion effect of the third aspect, the part of the SPSP start image 556 that displays the action (see Figure 407 (2)) can be seen as an emphasis part that emphasizes a specific part (SPSP start image 556).
That is, in the suggestion image, the specific portion and the highlighting portion may be provided integrally or separately.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the start emphasis image depending on the mode of the SPSP start image 556 to be displayed.
In this case, the variety of aspects of the SPSP start image 556 can be more prominent.

Figure 410 is a diagram showing the first mode of in-play suggestion effect.
When the first mode of the in-play suggestion effect starts, first, as shown in Fig. 410 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Chance!?" in white.
Furthermore, when an in-execution suggestion effect is performed, an in-execution emphasis effect is performed to emphasize the in-execution suggestion effect. The in-execution emphasis effect can also be considered as an effect that emphasizes the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 (SPSP reach effect). In the first type of in-execution suggestion effect, a first in-execution emphasis effect is performed. In the first in-execution emphasis effect, a first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 410 (2). In the illustrated example, the first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed on the left periphery of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561. Furthermore, in the first in-execution emphasis effect, the first in-execution emphasis image 562 is displayed in motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 410(3), the first execution highlight image 562 is displayed in motion so as to move to the right periphery of the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 410(4), the first execution highlight image 562 is hidden, and the first execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the first mode of suggestion during execution ends.
Here, in the first mode of the in-execution suggestion effect, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 1.5 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the first in-execution highlight image 562 (execution time of the first in-execution highlight effect) is 0.6 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode may be any time.

Figure 411 is a diagram showing the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode starts, first, as shown in FIG. 411 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Expectations!" in red.

Next, in the second mode of the in-play suggestion effect, a second in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the second in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 411 (2), a second in-play emphasis image 563 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the second in-play emphasis image 563 is displayed so as to cover the text portion of "期" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (3), the second execution highlight image 563 is displayed so as to move to a position covering the "wait" text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (4), the second execution highlight image 563 is displayed so as to move to a position covering the "!" text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561.

Next, as shown in FIG. 411 (5), the second execution highlight image 563 is hidden, and the second execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the second mode of suggestion during execution ends.
Here, in the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 2 seconds, and the display (action display) time of the second in-execution highlight image 563 (execution time of the second in-execution highlight effect) is 1.2 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode may be any time.

Figure 412 shows the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode.
When the execution suggestion effect of the third mode is started, first, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in red as shown in Fig. 412 (1). More specifically, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in motion so as to move from the left end to the right side of the image display unit 114, and the "DOKI!" text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 412 (2), the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in an action that moves further to the right, and the entire SPSP suggestion image 561, the text "Thump! Thump!", is displayed.
Next, in the third mode of the in-play suggestion effect, a third in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the third in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 412 (3), the text portion "DOKI!" on the left side of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 412 (4), the text portion "Doki!" on the left side of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in an operational manner so that it shrinks and the text portion "Doki!" on the right side expands.
Next, as shown in Figure 412 (5), the text portion "Doki!" on the right side of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed in a shrinking motion, and the third execution highlighting effect ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 412 (6), the suggestion image 561 during SPSP is displayed in an action such that it moves to the right, and only the text portion "Doki!" on the left side of the suggestion image 561 during SPSP is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 412 (7), the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed to move further to the right, causing the SPSP suggestion image 561 to disappear and the third mode of suggestion during execution to end.
Here, in the in-execution suggestion effect of the third aspect, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is 2.5 seconds, and the execution time of the third in-execution highlight effect is 1.4 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the third aspect may be any time.

Figure 413 shows the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode starts, first, as shown in Fig. 413 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Some chance!?" in white.

Next, in the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect, a fourth in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the fourth in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 413 (2), a third in-play emphasis image 564 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the third in-play emphasis image 564 is displayed around the text portion "!?" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 413(3), the third execution highlight image 564 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the periphery of the text portion of "lance" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 413 (4), the third execution highlight image 564 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the periphery of the text portion of the "cha" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 413 (5), the third execution highlight image 564 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the periphery of the text portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561, "ya."

Next, as shown in FIG. 413(6), the third execution highlight image 564 is hidden, and the fourth execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the fourth mode of suggestion during execution ends.
Here, in the fourth mode of the in-execution suggestion effect, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 1.4 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the third in-execution highlight image 564 (execution time of the fourth in-execution highlight effect) is 1.2 seconds. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode may be any time.

Figure 414 shows the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth aspect.
When the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth mode is started, first, as shown in FIG. 414 (1), an SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 displays the text "Maybe!?" More specifically, in the SPSP suggestion image 561, the text portion "Maybe!?" is displayed in white, and the portion "Maybe!?" is displayed in red.

Next, in the fifth aspect of the in-play suggestion effect, a fifth in-play emphasis effect is performed. In the fifth in-play emphasis effect, as shown in FIG. 414 (2), a fourth in-play emphasis image 565 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light as the fourth in-play emphasis image 565 is displayed around the text portion of "good" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.
Next, as shown in FIG. 414 (3), the fourth execution highlight image 565 changes to a display form that resembles a flame, and is displayed in such a way that it covers the text portion of the "mo" in the SPSP suggestion image 561.

Next, as shown in FIG. 414(4), the fourth execution highlight image 565 is hidden, and the fifth execution highlight effect ends.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, the SPSP suggestion image 561 is hidden and the suggestion effect during execution of the fifth mode ends.
Here, in the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth aspect, the display time of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 is 2 seconds, and the display time (action display) of the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 (execution time of the fifth in-execution highlight effect) is 1 second. However, the execution time of each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth aspect may be any time.

In addition, when describing the first to fifth execution emphasis effects without making any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as execution emphasis effects.
In addition, each effect in the in-execution suggestion effect (display of the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561, execution of the in-execution highlight effect) is not repeated, but is performed only once.

Here, the in-play suggestion effect indicates the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed depending on the execution mode. In this embodiment, the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode have a higher probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed than the in-play suggestion effect of the first mode and the in-play suggestion effect of the fourth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when executed is higher when the display color of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is red (see Figures 411 (5), 412 (5), and 414 (4)) than when the display color of the SPSP suggestion image 561 is white (see Figures 410 (4) and 413 (6)).

Note that the earlier the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode are in the order, the higher the probability (expectation) that a jackpot game will be executed when executed. Also, the later the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode are in the order, the higher the probability (expectation) that a jackpot game will be executed when executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode is executed, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the first mode is executed, and the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed than when the in-execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed.

Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the in-play suggestion effect of the second mode, the in-play suggestion effect of the third mode, and the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode is higher than the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, and the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the SPSP in-play suggestion image 561 is displayed in red (see FIGS. 411(5), 412(5), and 414(4)) is higher than when the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in white (see FIGS. 405(5), 408(6), and 409(4)).
Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode is higher than the execution suggestion effect of the first mode and the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode. In other words, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the SPSP start image 556 is displayed in red (see Figures 406 (6) and 407 (5)) is higher than the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the SPSP execution suggestion image 561 is displayed in white (see Figures 410 (4) and 413 (6)). However, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode may be higher than the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode.
Furthermore, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed when the in-play suggestion effect of the fifth mode is executed may be higher than the start suggestion effect of the second mode and the start suggestion effect of the third mode.

In addition, the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the first mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the first mode is executed, or the probability (expectation) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the first mode is executed than when the suggestive effect during execution of the first mode.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the second mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the second mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the third mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the third mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the third mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of execution of the third mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed than when the execution suggestion effect of the fourth mode is executed.
In addition, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect during execution of the fifth mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the fifth mode is executed, or the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when the suggestive effect at the start of the fifth mode is executed than when the suggestive effect at the start of the fifth mode is executed.

The SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution emphasis image are regarded as suggestion images that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The SPSP suggestion image 561 is regarded as a specific part of the suggestion image, and the execution emphasis image is regarded as an emphasis part that emphasizes the specific part in the suggestion image.
Furthermore, like the suggestion effect during execution in the third aspect, the part of the suggestion image 561 during SPSP that displays the action (see Figure 412 (3)) can be regarded as an emphasis part that emphasizes the specific part (suggestion image 561 during SPSP).
That is, in the suggestion image, the specific portion and the highlighting portion may be provided integrally or separately.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the execution highlight image depending on the mode of the SPSP suggestion image 561 to be displayed.
In this case, the variety of aspects of the SPSP suggestion image 561 can be made more prominent.

Figure 415 (1) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the start-up suggestion effects of the first to fifth modes.
Figure 415 (1) shows the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect for each execution mode of the start suggestion effect.
In addition, Figure 415 (2) is a diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the in-progress suggestion effects of the first to fifth modes.
Figure 415 (2) shows the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution time of the execution highlight effect for each execution mode of the execution suggestion effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different between the start-up suggestion performance and the ongoing suggestion performance (see Figures 415 (1) and (2)).
Therefore, the player can feel the variety of ways to focus on the SPSP reach effect depending on the suggestive effect being executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the emphasis performance the same for the start suggestion performance and the ongoing suggestion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary both the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance depending on the execution mode of the start suggestion performance.
Therefore, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways to focus on the SPSP reach effect depending on the execution mode of the start suggestion effect that is executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 the same in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect, and may make the execution time of the start emphasis effect different. Also, in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect, the execution time of the start emphasis effect may be the same in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect, and may make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 different. Also, in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect may both be the same.
In addition, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect may be the opposite of the length relationship in the example shown in Fig. 415(1). In addition, the execution time of the start emphasis effect in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect may be the opposite of the length relationship in the example shown in Fig. 415(1).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary both the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution time of the execution highlighting effect depending on the execution mode of the execution suggestion effect.
Therefore, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways to draw attention to the SPSP reach effect depending on the execution mode of the execution suggestion effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 common to all execution modes of the in-progress suggestion performance, and may make the execution time of the in-progress emphasis performance different. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the in-progress emphasis performance common to all execution modes of the in-progress suggestion performance, and may make the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 different. Also, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the execution time of the in-progress emphasis performance may both be common to all execution modes of the in-progress suggestion performance.
Furthermore, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 in each execution mode of the in-execution suggestion effect may have a length relationship that is the opposite of that in the example shown in FIG. 415(2). Furthermore, the execution time of the in-execution emphasis effect in each execution mode of the in-execution suggestion effect may have a length relationship that is the opposite of that in the example shown in FIG. 415(2). Furthermore, the display time of the SPSP suggestion image 561 in each execution mode of the in-execution suggestion effect and the execution time of the in-execution emphasis effect may have a length relationship that is the opposite of that in the example shown in FIG. 415(2).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance different in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance.
Therefore, compared to when the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect are the same, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on each of the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis performance the same in each execution mode of the start suggestion performance.
Furthermore, the display time of the SPSP start image 556 and the execution time of the start emphasis effect in each execution mode of the start suggestion effect may be in the opposite length relationship to the example shown in Figure 415 (1).

(Execution mode of big win effect)
Next, a description will be given of how the big win effect is executed. The big win effect is an effect that notifies or suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (small win).
The jackpot effects in this embodiment include first to fifth jackpot effects, and various effects are performed depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
Figures 416 and 417 show how the first big win presentation is executed.
When the first jackpot effect is executed, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed before the start of the first jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 416(1).

Next, when the first jackpot presentation starts, as shown in FIG. 416 (2), first, a first jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 416(3), a vibration effect begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 416 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in FIG. 416 (5), a first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed. In the illustrated example, in the first jackpot emphasis image 566, marks are displayed at the four corners of the display area of the image display unit 114. More specifically, marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display unit 114, in that order. Furthermore, the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise.
Next, as shown in FIG. 416 (6), the lamp L begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to display the action, and the ◇, ◯, △, and □ marks are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display section 114, in that order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 416 (7), the bonus feature performance starts, and the middle movable bonus feature 115B starts moving downward. This bonus feature performance can also be considered as the fourth bonus feature performance. In addition, in the first jackpot highlight image 566, the action display continues, and marks of □, ◇, ◯, △ are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display section 114 in this order.
Next, as shown in FIG. 416 (8), the middle movable part 115B moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the middle movable part 115B begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the middle movable part 115B emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the middle movable part 115B appears to be emitting light in rainbow colors. Furthermore, the middle movable part 115B periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Furthermore, in the first jackpot highlight image 566, the operation display continues, and △, □, ◇, and ◯ marks are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display unit 114, in that order.

Next, as shown in Figure 417 (9), the action display continues in the first jackpot emphasis image 566, and marks of circle, triangle, square, and ◇ are displayed in the upper right corner, lower right corner, lower left corner, and upper left corner of the image display section 114, in that order, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 416 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the first jackpot emphasis image 566 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 416(6) to (8) and Figure 417(9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (12), the first jackpot highlight image 566 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 417 (13), the center movable role 115B moves upward and stops. Note that Figure 417 (13) shows the center movable role 115B, but at this time, the center movable role 115B has returned to the position before the role performance started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 417 (14), the output of the first jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 417(15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 417 (16), the center movable part 115B stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out. This ends the first big win effect.

Figure 418 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each effect in the first jackpot effect.
In the first jackpot presentation, first, at time T0, output of a jackpot notification sound (first jackpot notification sound) is started.
Next, at time T1, a vibration effect is started.
Next, at time T2, the effect button 161 begins to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, at time T3, the display of the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566) starts.
Next, at time T4, the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, at time T5, the role effect (fourth role effect) starts.
Next, at time T6, the middle movable part 115B begins to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, at time T7, the vibration effect ends. The execution time of the vibration effect is 13.2 seconds.
Next, at time T8, the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 ends. The cycle of illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until it starts emitting red light again) is 1.5 seconds. The rainbow-colored illumination time of the effect button 161 is 13.5 seconds.
Next, at time T9, the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566) is hidden. The period of the dynamic display of the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is 1.6 seconds. The display (dynamic display) time of the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is 13.8 seconds.

Next, at time T10, the fourth bonus effect ends. The execution time of the fourth bonus effect is 14.1 seconds.
Next, at time T11, the output of the jackpot notification sound (first jackpot notification sound) ends. The output time of the first jackpot notification sound is 15 seconds.
Next, at time T12, the rainbow light emission of the lamp L ends. The cycle of the lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.7 seconds. The rainbow light emission time of the lamp L is 14.7 seconds.
Next, at time T13, the rainbow-colored illumination of the middle movable part 115B ends. The cycle of illumination of the middle movable part 115B in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the middle movable part 115B starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.4 seconds. The rainbow-colored illumination time of the middle movable part 115B is 14.4 seconds.
The execution time and cycle of each effect in the first big win effect may be any time.

Figures 419 and 420 show how the second jackpot presentation is executed.
When the second jackpot effect is executed, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed before the start of the second jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 419(1).
Next, when the second jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 419 (2), first, a second jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 419(3), a vibration effect begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 419 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in FIG. 419 (5), a second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed. In the illustrated example, in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, marks are displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the image display section 114. More specifically, marks ☆ and ▽ are displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the image display section 114, in that order. In addition, the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise.
Next, as shown in FIG. 419(6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the second jackpot highlight image 567 continues to display an operation, and a star and a groove are displayed in the lower right corner and upper left corner of the image display unit 114, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 419 (7), the action display continues in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and ▽ and ☆ marks are displayed in the upper right corner and lower left corner of the image display section 114, respectively.
Next, as shown in Figure 419 (8), the action display continues in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and ▽ and ☆ marks are displayed in the lower right corner and upper left corner of the image display section 114, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 420 (9), the action display continues in the second jackpot emphasis image 567, and the ☆ and ▽ marks are displayed in the upper right corner and lower left corner of the image display section 114, respectively, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 419 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the second jackpot emphasis image 567 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 419(6) to (8) and 420(9).
Next, as shown in Figure 420 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (12), the second jackpot highlight image 567 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420 (13), the output of the second jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 420(14), the lamp L stops emitting rainbow colors and emits white light, thereby ending the second jackpot effect.

Here, the output time of the second big win notification sound is 9 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 7.8 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until when it starts emitting red light again) is 2.1 seconds. The illumination time of the effect button 161 in the rainbow colors is 8.1 seconds.
The period of the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is 2.2 seconds, and the display (movement display) time of the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is 8.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 2.3 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 8.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the second jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the second jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (second jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to emit light in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (second jackpot highlight image 567) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops to emit light in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (second jackpot highlight image 567) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (second jackpot notification sound) stops to be output, and the timing at which the lamp L stops to emit light in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see Figure 418).

Figures 421 and 422 show how the third jackpot presentation is executed.
When the third jackpot effect is executed, a 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed before the start of the third jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 421 (1).
Next, when the third jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 421 (2), first, a third jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 421(3), a vibration effect begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 421 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (5), a third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed. In the example shown, in the third jackpot emphasis image 568, a star mark is displayed in the center of the image display section 114, and a circle mark is displayed in the upper part of the image display section 114. Furthermore, the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed in a motion such that it moves in a clockwise direction.
Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (6), the lamp L begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the third jackpot highlight image 568 continues to display an operation display, and a circle mark is displayed in a layer behind the small symbol 56 in an area overlapping the display area of the small symbol 56. In the illustrated example, the circle mark in the third jackpot highlight image 568 is hidden by the small symbol 56, making it difficult or impossible to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (7), the bonus feature effect starts, and the right movable bonus feature 115C starts moving downward. This bonus feature effect can also be considered as the fifth bonus feature effect. In addition, in the third jackpot highlight image 568, the action display continues, and a circle mark is displayed at the bottom of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 421 (8), the right movable part 115C moves further downward and stops at a position where it overlaps with the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction. The right movable part 115C also begins to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the right movable part 115C emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the right movable part 115C appears to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The right movable part 115C also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In the third jackpot highlight image 568, the action display continues, and a circle mark is displayed on the left side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 422 (9), the action display continues in the third jackpot emphasis image 568, and a circle mark is displayed at the top of the image display section 114, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 421 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the third jackpot emphasis image 568 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 421(6) to (8) and Figure 422(9).
Next, as shown in Figure 422 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 422 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 422 (12), the third jackpot highlight image 568 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 422 (13), the right movable role piece 115C moves upward and stops. Note that Figure 422 (13) shows the right movable role piece 115C, but at this time, the right movable role piece 115C has returned to the position before the role piece performance started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 422 (14), the output of the third jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 422 (15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 422 (16), the right movable accessory 115C stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out. This ends the third big win effect.

Here, the output time of the third jackpot notification sound is 11 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 9.2 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.7 seconds. The illumination time of the rainbow colors of the effect button 161 is 9.5 seconds.
The period of the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is 1.8 seconds, and the display (movement display) time of the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is 9.8 seconds.
The execution time of the fifth special effect is 10.1 seconds.
The cycle of the right movable part 115C emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the right movable part 115C starts emitting light in red until when it starts emitting light in red again) is 1.6 seconds. The time it takes for the right movable part 115C to emit light in the rainbow colors is 10.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.9 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 10.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the third jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the third jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (third jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (third jackpot highlight image 568) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the special feature presentation (fifth special feature presentation) starts, the timing at which the movable feature 115 (right movable feature 115C) starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (third jackpot highlight image 568) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the special feature presentation (fifth special feature presentation) ends, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (third jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, and the timing at which the movable feature 115 (right movable feature 115C) stops light-emitting in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see FIG. 418).

Figures 423 and 424 show how the fourth jackpot presentation is executed.
When the fourth jackpot effect is executed, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed before the start of the fourth jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 423 (1).
Next, when the fourth jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 423 (2), first, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 423(3), a vibration effect begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 423 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in FIG. 423 (5), a fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed. In the illustrated example, in the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, marks of circle, triangle, square, and diamond are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display unit 114. Furthermore, the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is displayed in an operational manner such that the displayed image moves from right to left in the image display unit 114, and the image that has passed the left end of the image display unit 114 is again displayed at the right end of the image display unit 114 and moves left.
Next, as shown in FIG. 423 (6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 continues to display an action, and the following marks are displayed in the lower part of the image display unit 114 in order from right to left: ◇, ◯, △, and □.

Next, as shown in FIG. 423 (7), the bonus feature performance starts, and the three movable bonus features 115 start moving downward. This bonus feature performance can also be considered as the sixth bonus feature performance. In addition, in the fourth jackpot highlight image 569, the action display continues, and the marks □, ◇, ◯, and △ are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 423 (8), the three movable parts 115 move further downward and stop at a position overlapping the vertical center of the image display unit 114. The three movable parts 115 also begin to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the three movable parts 115 emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the three movable parts 115 appear to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The three movable parts 115 also periodically emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. The fourth jackpot highlight image 569 continues to display the action, and the marks △, □, ◇, and ◯ are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 424 (9), the action display continues in the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, and marks of circle, triangle, square, and ◇ are displayed in order from right to left at the bottom of the image display unit 114, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 423 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 423(6) to (8) and Figure 424(9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (12), the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 424 (13), the three movable parts 115 move upward and stop. Note that although Figure 424 (13) shows three movable parts 115, at this time, the three movable parts 115 have returned to the positions before the start of the part performance.
Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (14), the output of the fourth jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 424 (15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 424 (16), the three movable parts 115 stop emitting light in rainbow colors and turn off. This ends the fourth big win effect.

Here, the output time of the fourth jackpot notification sound is 10 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 8.2 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting light in red until when it starts emitting light in red again) is 1.1 seconds. The illumination time of the rainbow colors of the effect button 161 is 8.5 seconds.
The period of the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is 1.2 seconds, and the display (movement display) time of the fourth jackpot emphasis image 569 is 8.8 seconds.
The execution time of the sixth role performance is 9.1 seconds.
The cycle of the three movable parts 115 emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the three movable parts 115 start emitting light in red until when they start emitting light in red again) is 1 second. The duration of the light emission of the three movable parts 115 in the rainbow colors is 9.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 1.3 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 9.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the fourth jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the fourth jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fourth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fourth jackpot highlight image 569) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the special feature presentation (sixth special feature presentation) starts, the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fourth jackpot highlight image 569) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the special feature presentation (sixth special feature presentation) ends, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fourth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, and the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see FIG. 418).

Figures 425 and 426 show how the fifth jackpot presentation is executed.
When the fifth jackpot effect is executed, a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed before the start of the fifth jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 425 (1).
Next, when the fifth jackpot presentation starts, as shown in Figure 425 (2), first, a fifth jackpot notification sound is output to notify or suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot (small jackpot).
Next, as shown in FIG. 425(3), a vibration effect begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 425 (4), the effect button 161 starts to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. More specifically, the effect button 161 emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the effect button 161 appears to emit light in the colors of the rainbow. The effect button 161 also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

Next, as shown in Fig. 425 (5), a fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed. In the example shown, in the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570, a star mark is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114. Furthermore, the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise.
Next, as shown in FIG. 425(6), the lamp L starts to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the lamp L emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the lamp L appears to emit light in rainbow colors. The lamp L also periodically emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. In addition, the fifth jackpot highlight image 570 continues to display the action, and a star mark is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 425 (7), the bonus feature effect starts, and the three movable bonus features 115 start moving downward. This bonus feature effect can also be considered as the seventh bonus feature effect. In addition, in the fifth jackpot highlight image 570, the action display continues, and a star mark is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 425 (8), the three movable parts 115 move further downward and stop at a position where they overlap with the vertical center of the image display unit 114. The three movable parts 115 also begin to emit light in rainbow colors. More specifically, the three movable parts 115 emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple, so that the three movable parts 115 appear to be emitting light in rainbow colors. The three movable parts 115 also periodically emit light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. The fifth jackpot highlight image 570 continues to display the action, and a star (☆) is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 426 (9), the action display continues in the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570, and a ☆ mark is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114, resulting in the same display mode as Figure 425 (5).
Although not shown, thereafter, the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 periodically repeats the operation displays shown in Figures 425(6) to (8) and Figure 426(9).
Next, as shown in Figure 426 (10), the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 426 (11), the effect button 161 stops emitting light in rainbow colors and goes out.
Next, as shown in FIG. 426 (12), the fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 426 (13), the three movable parts 115 move upward and stop. Note that although Figure 426 (13) shows three movable parts 115, at this time, the three movable parts 115 have returned to the positions before the start of the part performance.
Next, as shown in FIG. 426 (14), the output of the fifth jackpot notification sound ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 426 (15), the lamp L stops emitting light in rainbow colors and emits white light.
Next, as shown in Figure 426 (16), the three movable parts 115 stop emitting light in rainbow colors and turn off. This ends the fifth big win effect.

Here, the output time of the fifth jackpot notification sound is 8 seconds.
The vibration effect lasts for 6.2 seconds.
The cycle of the illumination of the effect button 161 in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the effect button 161 starts emitting red light until when it starts emitting red light again) is 0.7 seconds. The illumination time of the rainbow colors of the effect button 161 is 6.5 seconds.
The period of the motion display of the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is 0.8 seconds, and the display (motion display) time of the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is 6.8 seconds.
The execution time of the seventh role performance is 7.1 seconds.
The cycle of the three movable parts 115 emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple (the time from when the three movable parts 115 start emitting light in red until when they start emitting light in red again) is 0.6 seconds. The duration of the light emission of the three movable parts 115 in the rainbow colors is 7.4 seconds.
The cycle of lamp L emitting light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet (the time from when lamp L starts emitting red light to when it starts emitting red light again) is 0.9 seconds, and the duration of lamp L emitting light in the rainbow colors is 7.7 seconds.
In addition, the execution time and cycle of each effect in the fifth jackpot effect may be any time.

In addition, in the fifth jackpot presentation, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fifth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the vibration presentation starts, the timing at which the presentation button 161 starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fifth jackpot highlight image 570) starts to be displayed, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the special feature presentation (seventh special feature presentation) starts, the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the vibration presentation ends, the timing at which the presentation button 161 stops to light up in rainbow colors, the timing at which the jackpot highlight image (fifth jackpot highlight image 570) stops to be displayed, the timing at which the special feature presentation (seventh special feature presentation) ends, the timing at which the jackpot notification sound (fifth jackpot notification sound) starts to be output, the timing at which the lamp L starts to light up in rainbow colors, and the timing at which the movable feature 115 (three movable feature 115) starts to light up in rainbow colors are all the same as in the first jackpot presentation (see FIG. 418).

In the following, when the first to fifth jackpot notification sounds are described without any particular distinction, they may be simply referred to as jackpot notification sounds.
Furthermore, as described above, the various jackpot emphasis images (first jackpot emphasis image 566, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570) are displayed during the execution of the bonus effect. When the various jackpot emphasis images are displayed, the movable bonus object 115 that overlaps with the jackpot emphasis image is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the display of the various jackpot emphasis images can also be considered as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the movable bonus object 115 (bonus effect).

Figure 427 is a diagram showing the execution time and cycle of each effect in the first to fifth jackpot effects.
Figure 427 shows, for each jackpot effect, the output time of the jackpot notification sound (first jackpot notification sound to fifth jackpot notification sound), the rainbow light emission time of lamp L, the rainbow light emission time of movable role device 115, the execution time of role device effects (fourth jackpot effect to seventh role device effect), the display time (operation display time) of the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566 to fifth jackpot emphasis image 570), the rainbow light emission time of effect button 161, the execution time of the vibration effect, the rainbow light emission cycle of lamp L, the rainbow light emission cycle of movable role device 115, the operation display cycle of the jackpot emphasis image (first jackpot emphasis image 566 to fifth jackpot emphasis image 570), and the rainbow light emission cycle of effect button 161.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the type of jackpot notification sound and the output time of the jackpot notification sound depending on the jackpot effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may use the same type of jackpot notification sound for each jackpot performance, but vary the output time of the jackpot notification sound. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same output time of the jackpot notification sound for each jackpot performance, but vary the type of jackpot notification sound. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same type of jackpot notification sound and the same output time of the jackpot notification sound for each jackpot performance.
In addition, the output time of the jackpot notification sound in each jackpot presentation may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 427.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the light emission time and light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L depending on the jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot effect to be executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the lamp L the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L. Also, the effect control unit 300 may make the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission time of the lamp L. Also, the light emission time and the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the lamp L may both be the same for each jackpot effect.
In addition, the light emission time of the lamp L in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 427. In addition, the light emission cycle of the lamp L in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 427.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can vary the light emission time and light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role object 115 depending on the jackpot performance to be executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot performance to be executed.
The performance control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the movable role element 115 common to each other in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance), but may make the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role element 115 different. Also, the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role element 115 common to each other in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance), but may make the light emission time of the movable role element 115 different. Also, the light emission time and the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the movable role element 115 may both be common to each other in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance).
In addition, the light emission time of the movable role device 115 in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) may be the opposite of the example shown in Fig. 427. In addition, the light emission cycle of the movable role device 115 in each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) may be the opposite of the example shown in Fig. 427.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the type of bonus effect and the duration of the bonus effect depending on the type of bonus effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the player is made aware that a bonus game is being played depending on the type of bonus effect being executed.
The performance control unit 300 may use the same type of bonus feature performance for each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) but vary the execution time of the bonus feature performance. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same execution time of the bonus feature performance for each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance) but vary the type of bonus feature performance. Alternatively, the performance control unit 300 may use the same type of bonus feature performance and the same execution time of the bonus feature performance for each jackpot performance (first jackpot performance, third jackpot performance to fifth jackpot performance).
In addition, the execution time of the special feature effects in each jackpot effect (first jackpot effect, third jackpot effect to fifth jackpot effect) may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in FIG. 427 .

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the display time of the jackpot highlight image and the cycle of the motion display of the jackpot highlight image depending on the jackpot effect being executed, thereby diversifying the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the display time of the jackpot emphasis image common to each jackpot effect, but vary the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image. Alternatively, the effect control unit 300 may make the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image common to each jackpot effect, but vary the display time of the jackpot emphasis image. Alternatively, the display time of the jackpot emphasis image and the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image may both be common to each jackpot effect.
In addition, the display time of the jackpot emphasis image in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 427. In addition, the period of the motion display of the jackpot emphasis image in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 427.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the light emission time and light emission pattern (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161 depending on the jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot effect to be executed.
The effect control unit 300 may make the light emission time of the effect button 161 the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161. Also, the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161 may be the same for each jackpot effect, but vary the light emission time of the effect button 161. Also, the light emission time and the light emission mode (light emission cycle) of the effect button 161 may both be the same for each jackpot effect.
Furthermore, the light emission time of the effect button 161 in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 427. Furthermore, the light emission cycle of the effect button 161 in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long-short relationship to the example shown in Fig. 427.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the vibration effect depending on the jackpot effect being executed, so that the way in which the player is made aware that a jackpot game is being executed can be diversified depending on the jackpot effect being executed.
In addition, the effect control unit 300 may make the execution time of the vibration effect the same for each jackpot effect.
In addition, the execution time of the vibration effect in each jackpot effect may be the opposite of the long/short relationship shown in the example in Figure 427.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 varies the output time of the jackpot notification sound, the light emission time of the lamp L, the light emission time of the movable role object 115, the execution time of the role object effect, the display time of the jackpot highlighting image, the light emission time of the effect button 161, and the execution time of the vibration effect in each jackpot effect. Therefore, it is easier for the player to notice each effect compared to when the execution time of each effect is the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the output time of the jackpot notification sound, the light-emitting time of the lamp L, the light-emitting time of the movable role device 115, the execution time of the role device performance, the display time of the jackpot highlighting image, the light-emitting time of the performance button 161, and the execution time of the vibration performance common to each jackpot performance.
In addition, in each jackpot performance, the output time of the jackpot notification sound, the light-emitting time of the lamp L, the light-emitting time of the movable device 115, the execution time of the device performance, the display time of the jackpot highlighting image, the light-emitting time of the performance button 161, and the execution time of the vibration performance may have a reversed long/short relationship to the example shown in Figure 427.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 differentiates the light emission cycle of the lamp L, the light emission cycle of the movable role object 115, the period of the motion display of the jackpot highlighting image, and the light emission cycle of the effect button 161 in each jackpot effect. Therefore, it is possible to make each effect more easily noticeable to the player compared to when the execution time of each effect is the same.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make the light emission cycle of the lamp L, the light emission cycle of the movable role object 115, the cycle of the operation display of the jackpot highlight image, and the light emission cycle of the performance button 161 the same for each jackpot performance.
In addition, in each jackpot performance, the light emission period of the lamp L, the light emission period of the movable device 115, the period of the operation display of the jackpot emphasis image, and the light emission period of the performance button 161 may have a length relationship that is reversed from the example shown in Figure 427.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second big win presentation does not include the execution of the role presentation and the illumination of the movable role 115 in rainbow colors, but this is not limited to this.
In the second jackpot performance, the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 may also be executed. In this case, the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 may both be common performance modes in the first jackpot performance and the second jackpot performance. Also, the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 may both be different performance modes in the first jackpot performance and the second jackpot performance. Also, the first jackpot performance and the second jackpot performance may have one of the role performance and the rainbow-colored light emission of the movable role device 115 in the common performance mode, and the other performance mode may be different.

Furthermore, the start timing of each effect in each big win effect is not limited to the above example.
In each jackpot effect, the vibration effect may start after the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 has started. Also, in each jackpot effect, the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 and the vibration effect may start simultaneously.
In addition, in each jackpot effect, the output of a jackpot notification sound may begin after the rainbow-colored illumination or vibration effect of the effect button 161 begins.
In addition, in each jackpot presentation, the display of a jackpot highlighting image may begin after the lamp L starts emitting light in rainbow colors.
In addition, in each big win performance, the lamp L may start emitting light in rainbow colors after the special feature performance or the movable special feature 115 starts emitting light in rainbow colors.
Furthermore, in each jackpot effect, the timing at which the frame lamp 157 starts to emit light in rainbow colors and the timing at which the board lamp 116 starts to emit light in rainbow colors may be simultaneous or may be different. More specifically, the board lamp 116 may start to emit light in rainbow colors after the frame lamp 157 starts to emit light in rainbow colors. Furthermore, the frame lamp 157 may start to emit light in rainbow colors after the board lamp 116 starts to emit light in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the timing at which each effect in each big win effect ends is not limited to the above example.
In each jackpot effect, the vibration effect may end after the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 has ended. Also, in each jackpot effect, the rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161 and the vibration effect may end simultaneously.
In addition, in each big win effect, the effect that ends first among the effects may be the output of a big win notification sound.
In each jackpot presentation, the presentation that finishes last may be a bonus presentation. In each jackpot presentation, the presentation that finishes last may be the display of a jackpot highlighting image. In each jackpot presentation, the presentation that finishes last may be the output of a jackpot notification sound.
Furthermore, in each jackpot effect, the timing at which the rainbow-colored light emission of the frame lamp 157 ends and the timing at which the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 116 ends may be simultaneous or different. More specifically, the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 116 may end after the rainbow-colored light emission of the frame lamp 157 ends. Furthermore, the rainbow-colored light emission of the frame lamp 157 may end after the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 116 ends.

Furthermore, the relationship between the start timing of each effect in the jackpot effect may be the same or different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the relationship between the end timing of each effect in the big win effect may be the same or different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state.

(Example of variation 1)
428 and 429, a specific description will be given of a variable presentation (variable presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 1 is an example of a random miss variable presentation, which is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 428 and 429 are variable effects that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, each of the variation effects from variation effect example 1 to variation effect example 15 described below is an example of a variation effect when the variation effect starts in the first stage.

In addition, in each of the following variable effect examples (Variable effect example 1 to Variable effect example 38), the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are continuously displayed when the player repeatedly presses the lower and left keys of the effect key 162 (for example, once every second).

As shown in FIG. 428 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the reserve number display 55, small symbol 56, stage image 61, stage notification image 501, and change count image 502. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage, with the stage notification image 501 displaying the text "Space" and the change count image 502 displaying the text "0 games." The first stage is a normal game mode. At this time, the reserve number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "0," which is the reserve number for winning at the first start gate 121, and the reserve number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserve number for winning at the second start gate 122.
Furthermore, as described above, when the player repeatedly presses the lower and left keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Figure 428 (2), the special symbol begins to change, and the change effect begins. At this time, the change image 51 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 also begin to change. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the center decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 each change by repeatedly displaying the numbers "1" through "9" in sequence. That is, in this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the center decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 each have individually variable numbers. The left decorative symbol 41, the center decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. At this time, background music (BGM), which is a sound effect corresponding to the change effect currently being performed, is output from the speaker 156. Although not shown in the figures, in each of the variation presentation examples described below, background music continues to be output from the start to the end of the variation presentation, unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, there are cases where a game ball enters the first starting port 121 when there is no reservation for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 and the special symbol has not changed. In this case, first, a reservation for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 occurs. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 321). Therefore, when a variation pattern is selected, the "reservation number" is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reservation number for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 is subtracted.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the first starting port 121 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the first starting port 121, and the reservation image 52 is also displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the first starting port 121. Furthermore, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51 (moving animation is performed), and the changing image 51 is displayed.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where there is no reservation for a winning entry at the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, a reservation for a winning entry at the second start port 122 is first made. Then, in this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "reservation number" when a variation pattern is selected is "1". Then, when a variation pattern is selected, the reservation number for a winning entry at the second start port 122 is subtracted.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the second start port 122, and the reservation image 52 is also displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the second start port 122. Furthermore, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed.

In addition, the pending image 52 in the normal display mode and the variable image 51 in the normal display mode displayed in each variable performance example are displayed in motion in the manner described using Figure 330.

Next, as shown in FIG. 428 (3), a first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed. The first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A first foreshadowing emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first foreshadowing emphasis image 508 is displayed, is output. The first foreshadowing emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed. The output time of the first foreshadowing emphasis sound is 0.08 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 428 (4), the first button effect is started, and the button image 509 is displayed. The button image 509 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using FIGS. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The first button emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the first button emphasis sound is 0.1 seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 428 (5). The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A first post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed, is output. The first post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the first post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 428 (6), a first-button post-image 571 is displayed. The first-button post-image 571 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the first-button post-image 571 is 2.5 seconds. In addition, a first-button post-emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first-button post-image 571 is displayed, is output. The output time of the first-button post-emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 428 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and a first stop-time action, which is the action taken when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops, is performed. The first stop-time action is performed when an even-numbered decorative symbol 41 (such as 2, 4, 6, or 8) temporarily stops in the first stage. The first stop-time action is the decorative symbol 41 raising its right hand. At this time, a first stop-time emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. The first stop-time emphasis image 572 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The execution time of the first stop-time action and the display time of the first stop-time emphasis image 572 are both 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the first stop-time action and the display time of the first stop-time emphasis image 572 may differ. Furthermore, the execution time of the first stop-time action and the display time of the first stop emphasis image 572 may be any time. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the stop emphasis image is displayed, is output. The first stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the first stage. The output time of the first stop emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 428 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "1," temporarily stops, and a second stop-time action is performed, which is the action taken when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The second stop-time action is performed when an odd-numbered decorative symbol 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, or 9) temporarily stops in the first stage. The second stop-time action is the decorative symbol 41 raising its left hand. At this time, a second stop-time emphasis image 573 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the second stop-time action and the display time of the second stop-time emphasis image 573 are both 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the second stop-time action and the display time of the second stop-time emphasis image 573 may differ. The execution time of the second stop-time action and the display time of the second stop-time emphasis image 573 may be any time. The first stop-time emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 429 (9), the "2" central decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the first stop-time action is performed. At this time, a third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the central decorative pattern 41. The display time of the third stop emphasis image 574 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the third stop emphasis image 574 may be different from the execution time of the first stop-time action, and may be any time. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 429 (10), the third stop emphasis image 574 is hidden, and the three decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 429 (11), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped with the display of the special symbols. This combination of decorative symbols 41, "421," is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, with the special symbols stopping to fluctuate, three small symbols 56 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, in this fluctuating effect, all small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56, "421," matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. Also, with the end of the fluctuating effect, the fluctuating image 51 is erased (displayed). Also, the fluctuating count image 502 is updated to "1 game."

(Example of variation 2)
Figure 430 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 2) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 430. Variation presentation example 2 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball entering the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variation presentation example 2 is an example of a random miss variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first start opening 121 being "4".
430 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 327. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 430(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in Figure 430 (2), the display of the next special symbol begins, and the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 430 (3), three decorative symbols 41, "472," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform a first stop-time action, and the center decorative symbol 41 performs a second stop-time action. A first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. The display time of the fourth stop emphasis image 575 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the fourth stop emphasis image 575 may be different from the execution time of the second stop-time action and may be any time. A first stop emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "472", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 430(4). Also, the changing image 51 is hidden. Also, the changing count image 502 is updated to "1 game".

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the stop behavior of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the highlighted image in accordance with the characters of the decorative pattern 41 in one stage (see Fig. 428 (8) and Fig. 430 (3)). Therefore, the uniqueness of the performance using the decorative pattern 41 can be enhanced for each character of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved symbols for the first starting port 121 is "4", three decorative symbols 41 can be displayed in a line to be temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the variable performance based on the reservation number for the first starting port 121 being "4", the three decorative symbols 41 "421" may temporarily stop, as in the variable performance example 1. In this case, when the middle decorative symbol 41 "2" temporarily stops, the first stop action of the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed, and the third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.
In addition, in a variable effect based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", three decorative symbols 41, "412", may temporarily stop. In this case, when the middle decorative symbol 41, "1", temporarily stops, the second stop action of the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.
In addition, in a variable presentation based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", three decorative symbols 41, "241", may temporarily stop. In this case, when the middle decorative symbol 41, "4", temporarily stops, the first stop action of the middle decorative symbol 41 is performed, and a third stop emphasis image 574 is displayed around the middle decorative symbol 41.

(Variation example 3)
Figures 431 and 432 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 3) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 431 and 432. Variation presentation example 3 is a variation presentation example in which a reach-miss variation presentation is executed based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, variable performance example 3 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 431 (1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary. In addition, the reserved image 52 moves, and the variable image 51 is displayed.
In each variation performance example, the blue pending image 52 and the blue variation image 51 are displayed in motion in the manner described using Figure 331.

Next, as shown in FIG. 431(3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 431 (4), the second button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed. In the second button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 431 (5). In addition, a second post-operation emphasis sound is output. The second post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the second post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 431(6), a second button post image 576 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 431 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the first stop action is performed. As a result, the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop at the same number, resulting in a reach state. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 432 (9), the first reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed, and the first reach action is performed. In the first reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using FIGS. 390 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the first reach effect, is output. The first reach emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the first reach emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 432 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 432 (11), the third button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed. In the third button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the third button effect, a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 432 (12). The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. The third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. A third post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed, is output. The third post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the third post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 432 (13), a post-third button image 577 is displayed. The display time of the post-third button image 577 is 2.5 seconds. In addition, a post-second button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the post-third button image 577 is displayed, is output. The output time of the post-second button emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 432 (14), the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops, and a third stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The third stop-time action is performed when a normal reach effect is executed and the middle decorative symbol 41, which is an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc.), temporarily stops. The third stop-time action is the action of the decorative symbol 41 shaking both hands up and down. At this time, a fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 is displayed surrounding the middle decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the third stop-time action and the display time of the fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 are both 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the third stop-time action and the display time of the fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 may be different. The execution time of the third stop-time action and the display time of the fifth stop-time emphasis image 578 may be any time. A first stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "454," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 432 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can make the emphasis effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed before the button image 509 is displayed common before and after the start of a specific effect (such as a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 or a reach effect) (see Figure 431 (3) and Figure 432 (10)).
Therefore, regardless of the progress of the variable effect, it is possible to make the player more aware that the button effect will start when the emphasis effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the button effect even before the button effect starts.

Figure 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between images related to the effects used in variable effect example 3.
433(1), when the variable performance is executed by the performance control unit 300, various images constituting the variable performance are displayed on the image display unit 114. In the variable performance example 3 of this embodiment, the image display unit 114 displays the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, the number of times of change image 502, the decorative pattern 41, the post-second operation emphasis image 511, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, the number of reserved images 55, and the small pattern 56, respectively.

433(2), the image display unit 114 displays various images by drawing and superimposing multiple different layers. Here, the multiple layers are defined as upper layers on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, which is on the player's side, and lower layers on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, which is on the opposite side from the player. The multiple layers in this embodiment are configured in the following order from the uppermost layer to the lowermost layer: first layer LA1, second layer LA2, third layer LA3, fourth layer LA4, fifth layer LA5, and sixth layer LA6.
In this embodiment, a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a variable image 51, a hold number display 55, and a small symbol 56 are drawn on the first layer LA1. No images are drawn on the second layer LA2. A second post-operation emphasis image 511 is drawn on the third layer LA3. A decorative symbol 41 is drawn on the fourth layer LA4. A stage notification image 501 and a change count image 502 are drawn on the fifth layer LA5. A stage image 61 is displayed on the sixth layer LA6.

In this embodiment, by drawing each image on multiple layers configured as described above, an image drawn on a higher layer is not obscured by an image drawn on a lower layer even when the image is superimposed on the image drawn on the lower layer.
For example, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are images that notify the player of the results of the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 regarding the presentation effects such as the volume and the light intensity. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when an emphasis image such as the second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are not hidden by this emphasis image.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41, the stage notification image 501, the number of changes image 502 and the stage image 61 may be hidden by the emphasis image when the emphasis image is displayed.

In this embodiment, each precursor emphasis image, each operation emphasis image, each reach eye emphasis image, each role emphasis image, development emphasis image 554, each start emphasis image, each execution emphasis image, each jackpot emphasis image, each stop emphasis image, pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, each development teaser emphasis image, chance eye emphasis image 587, each start emphasis image, each double number emphasis image, promotion teaser emphasis image 592, each reach teaser emphasis image, and button image 509 are drawn on the third layer LA3.
In addition, in this embodiment, each post-operation emphasized image is drawn on the third layer LA3, unless otherwise specified.

(Variation example 4)
Figures 434 and 435 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 4) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 434 and 435. Variation presentation example 4 is an example of a reach miss variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state.
The variation effects shown in Figures 434 and 435 are variation effects that are executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 327. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples will be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 434 (1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in Figure 434 (2), the change performance begins as the special pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 434(3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 434 (4), the second button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed. In the second button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed as shown in Fig. 434 (5). Also, a second post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 434(6), a second button post image 576 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 434 (7), the left decorative pattern 41, "5," temporarily stops and performs a second stop action. At this time, a second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41. The second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 434 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops and performs the second stop action. At this time, the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. In addition, the first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 435 (9), the second reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a second reach eye emphasis image 543 are displayed, and the second reach action is performed. In the second reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 391 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 435 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 432 (11), the second button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed. In the second button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the second button effect, a second post-operation emphasis image 511 is displayed as shown in Fig. 435 (12). Also, a second post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 435 (13), a post-third button image 577 is displayed. Also, a post-second button emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 435 (14), the center decorative symbol 41, "6," temporarily stops, and a fourth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The fourth stop-time action is performed when a center decorative symbol 41 that is an even number (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) temporarily stops when a normal reach effect is executed. The fourth stop-time action is performed when the decorative symbol 41 lowers both hands. At this time, a sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 is displayed surrounding the center decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the fourth stop-time action and the display time of the sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the fourth stop-time action and the display time of the sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 may be different. The execution time of the fourth stop-time action and the display time of the sixth stop-time emphasis image 579 may be any time. A first stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "565," are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 435 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

In the variation effect example 4, the second button effect is executed both before and after the reach effect starts, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation presentation example 4, as in the variation presentation example 3, the second button presentation may be executed before the start of the reach presentation, and the third button presentation may be executed after the start of the reach presentation.
In addition, in the variable performance example 3, the second button performance may be executed both before and after the start of the reach performance.

(Variation example 5)
Figure 436 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 5) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 436. Variation presentation example 5 is an example of a random miss variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable effect shown in Figure 436 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

436(1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."
Next, as shown in Figure 436 (2), the change performance begins as the special pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 436 (3), the second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed. The second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A second foreshadowing emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second foreshadowing emphasis image 513 is displayed, is output. The second foreshadowing emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed. The output time of the second foreshadowing emphasis sound is 0.25 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 436 (4), the fourth button effect begins, and button image 509 is displayed. Furthermore, when effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the fourth button effect, first operation emphasis image 514 is displayed. First operation emphasis image 514 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. First operation emphasis image 514 is displayed in a layer in front of decorative pattern 41 and behind volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. In the fourth button effect, button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using FIGS. 349 (2) to (8) and 350 (9). Furthermore, a second button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that button image 509 is displayed, is output. The second button emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the second button emphasis sound is 1 second.

Then, regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated or not, when the operation valid period for the fourth button effect has elapsed, a fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed as shown in FIG. 436 (5). The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A fourth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth post-operation emphasis image 515 is displayed, is output. The fourth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the fourth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 436 (6), the fourth button post-image 580 is displayed. The fourth button post-image 580 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The display time of the fourth button post-image 580 is 2 seconds. In addition, a third button post-emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth button post-image 580 is displayed, is output. The output time of the third button post-emphasis sound is 0.25 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 436 (7), three decorative symbols 41, "421", are temporarily stopped. On the other hand, no sound effect is output in association with the stopping of the decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "421," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 436 (8). Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "21 games."
In addition, in the variation effect example 5, the action when the decorative pattern 41 stops and the display of the stop emphasis image may not be executed. Also, although the action when the decorative pattern 41 stops and the display of the stop emphasis image are executed, they may be difficult or impossible for the player to see because they are hidden by the after-fourth-button image 580.

(Example of variation 6)
Figures 437 to 439 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to Figures 437 to 439. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 437 to 439 are variable effects that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

437(1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56, "623," are stopped as the previous special pattern is stopped by the performance control unit 300. In addition, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "2."
Next, as shown in Figure 437 (2), the change performance begins as the special pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 437(3), a second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed. Also, a second precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 437 (4), the fifth button effect starts, and button image 509 is displayed. Furthermore, when effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the fifth button effect, first operation highlight image 514 is displayed. In the fifth button effect, button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Figs. 351 (2) to (8) and 352 (9). Furthermore, a second button highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 437 (5), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. A fifth post-operation emphasis sound is output. The fifth post-operation emphasis sound is an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the fifth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.23 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 437 (6), pseudo-continuous hit image 581 and pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 are displayed. Pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of pseudo-continuous hit image 581, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. Furthermore, pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is displayed in a layer in front of pseudo-continuous hit image 581 and in a layer behind volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The display time of pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is 0.4 seconds. However, the display time of pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 may be any length of time. Furthermore, a second stop highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that pseudo-continuous hit highlight image 582 is displayed, is output. The second stop highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes pseudo-continuous hit image 581 (pseudo-continuous hit effect). The output time of the second stop highlight sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 437 (7), the pseudo-series image 581 is enlarged and displayed. The time for which the pseudo-series image 581 is displayed in motion is 0.4 seconds. However, the time for which the pseudo-series image 581 is displayed in motion may be different from the display time of the pseudo-series highlighted image 582, and may be any time.
Next, as shown in Figure 437 (8), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed. The re-change notification image 583 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Figure 438 (9), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again. At this time, the re-change notification image 583 is displayed in a reduced size.
Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (10), the left decorative pattern 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the first stop operation is performed. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41. At this time, a change effect is performed, and the display color of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. A first green emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the variable image 51 has changed to green, is output. The first green emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the green variable image 51 (reserved image 52). The output time of the first green emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds. At this time, the first stop emphasis sound is output, although not shown.
In each example of the change performance, the green pending image 52 and the green change image 51 are displayed in operation in the manner described using Figure 332.

Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (11), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 438 (12), the first reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed, and the first reach action is performed. In the first reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 390 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (13), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 438 (14), the third button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed. In the third button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the third button effect, a third post-operation emphasis image 512 is displayed as shown in Fig. 438 (15). Also, a third post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 438 (16), a post-third button image 577 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (17), the character portion of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is erased, thereby reducing its decorativeness, and the movement is displayed in an enlarged manner. A first movement emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in movement, is output. The first movement emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the movement display of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41. The first movement emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the start of the SP reach-eye effect. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (18), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the output of the first action emphasis sound continues.
The execution time of the action display of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 shown in Figures 439 (17) and (18) is 2.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the action display of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Also, the output time of the first action emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (19), a development teaser effect is executed, displaying the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development teaser highlight image 585. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a swaying motion from side to side. The middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in motion for 3.5 seconds. However, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 may be displayed in motion for any length of time. Furthermore, the first development teaser highlight image 585 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed on a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small symbols 56. The display time of the first development teaser highlight image 585 is 2.5 seconds. However, the display time of the first development teaser highlight image 585 may be any length of time. In addition, a first development provocation emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the first development provocation emphasis image 585 is displayed. The first development provocation emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41 and the development image 584 (development provocation effect). The output time of the first development provocation emphasis sound is 2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (20), the development image 584 is hidden, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed as moving toward the center of the image display unit 114. That is, after the development teasing effect is executed, the development effect is not executed. The execution time of the action display of the middle decorative pattern 41 is 2 seconds. A second action emphasis sound, which is a sound effect of the action display of the middle decorative pattern 41, is output. The second action emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41. The output time of the second action emphasis sound is 1.25 seconds.
Next, as shown in Figure 439 (21), the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (22), a switching image 586 is displayed. The switching image 586 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The switching image 586 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.
439 (23), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the variable count image 502 are redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 439 (24), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "454," are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "21 games."

In addition, in the variable performance example 6, after the switching image 586 is displayed, the output of the performance sound is restricted.
Furthermore, when the switching image 586 is displayed, the variable image 51 may be hidden or may be displayed in a layer behind the switching image 586 .

440 and 441 are diagrams showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in Variation Presentation Example 6. In the following example, in Variation Presentation Example 6, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution conditions for the first left-handed hit notification are met, and the first left-handed hit notification is executed. Then, the execution conditions for the second left-handed hit notification are met, and the second left-handed hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 440 (1), when the second premonition emphasis image 513 is displayed (see FIG. 437 (3)), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed. The second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the second premonition emphasis image 513, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The second left-handed hit image 48 is also drawn on the second layer LA2 (see FIG. 433 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the second premonition emphasis image 513, and on a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

In each variation presentation example, the second left-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figures 340 and 341.
Furthermore, the second left-hit sound is output at a volume of "5" regardless of the volume setting by operating the effect key 162. That is, in the illustrated example, while the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 when the second left-hit notification is being made, the volume of the second left-hit sound is not adjusted.

Next, when the fifth button effect starts, as shown in Fig. 440 (2), while the button image 509 and the first operation highlight image 514 are displayed (see Fig. 437 (4)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the button image 509 and the first operation highlight image 514, and is displayed in a layer in front of the button image 509 and the first operation highlight image 514.
Next, as shown in Fig. 440 (3), when the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582 are displayed (see Fig. 437 (6)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582, and is displayed in a layer in front of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582.

Next, when the first reach performance starts, as shown in Fig. 440 (4), when the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed (see Fig. 438 (12)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and a second left hit sound is output. The second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542, and is displayed on a layer in front of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542.
Next, as shown in Figure 440 (5), when the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed (see Figure 438 (13)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output.

Next, when the third button effect starts, as shown in Figure 440 (6), when the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 438 (14)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, when the SP reach effect starts, as shown in Figure 440 (7), when the middle decorative symbol 41 "5", the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed (see Figure 439 (19)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the middle decorative symbol 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585, and is displayed on a layer in front of the middle decorative symbol 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585.

Next, as shown in Fig. 440 (8), when the switching image 586 is displayed (see Fig. 439 (22)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the switching image 586 and is displayed on a layer in front of the switching image 586.
Next, as shown in Figure 441 (9), when the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (see Figure 439 (23)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 441 (10), when the three decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56 "454" are fixed and stopped as the special pattern stops varying (see Figure 439 (24)), the second left-hit image 48 is no longer displayed and the second left-hit sound is no longer output. More specifically, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the second left-hit notification ends even if it is in the middle of being notified.

As described above, when the second left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 6, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 6 is restricted while the second left-hit notification is being executed.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 6, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 6 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.
In Variation Presentation Example 5, the pseudo consecutive hit effect is not executed after the execution of the fourth button effect. In Variation Presentation Example 6, the pseudo consecutive hit effect is executed after the execution of the fifth button effect. Here, the fourth button effect and the fifth button effect can also be considered as pseudo consecutive hit effect that encourages the execution of the pseudo consecutive hit effect.

In this embodiment, even if the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is in progress, the left hit notification will end midway when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays). Also, even if the execution condition for the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) is met when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays), the left hit notification will not be executed.
However, even when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays), the left hit notification that was in progress may be continued. Also, when the variable effect ends (the special symbol stops and displays), if the execution conditions for the left hit notification (first left hit notification, second left hit notification) are met, the left hit notification may be made.

(Example of variation 7)
Figure 442 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 7) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 442. Variation presentation example 7 is an example of a variation presentation based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 442 is a variable performance that is executed when "AR11" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 325 and "ER4" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 327. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 442(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 442 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 is updated to "1."

Next, when a game ball enters the first start opening 121, as shown in Figure 442 (3), the second reserved image 52 is displayed and the reserved number display 55 for the first start opening 121 is updated to "2". At this time, a change effect is executed, and the first reserved image 52 changes from its normal display state to blue. A first blue emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the variable image 51 has changed to blue, is output. The first blue emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the blue reserved image 52 (variable image 51) in the normal game state. The output time of the first blue emphasis sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 442 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three decorative symbols 41. The chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the chance eye emphasis image 587 is 1.25 seconds. When the chance eye effect is executed, the lamp L may be illuminated in a color corresponding to the chance eye effect. For example, the lamp L may be illuminated in the color of the decorative symbol 41 when the chance eye effect is executed (red in the illustrated example). A first chance eye emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the chance eye emphasis image 587, is output. The first chance eye emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the three decorative symbols 41 in the chance eye effect. The output duration of the first chance eye emphasis sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 442 (5), as the special pattern stops varying, the three decorative patterns 41 and the small pattern 56 "331" are fixed and stopped.
The chance eye effect in the variation effect example 7 is an example of a pre-determination effect. This pre-determination effect is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

(Example of variation 8)
Figures 443 to 447 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 8) will be described with reference to Figures 443 to 447. Variable presentation example 8 is a variable presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, variable presentation example 8 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 7. In other words, variable presentation example 8 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 442 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 7.
443 to 447 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 327. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 443 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 443 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 begin to change. A first start action is performed when the decorative symbol 41 begins to change. The first start action is an action in which the decorative symbol 41 moves upward. The execution time of the first start action is 1.7 seconds. However, the execution time of the first start action may be any time. At this time, a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The first start emphasis image 588 displayed around the left decorative symbol 41 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, and is displayed on a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The display time of the first start emphasis image 588 is 0.8 seconds. However, the display time of the first start emphasis image 588 may be any time. A first start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first start emphasis image 588 is displayed, is output. The first start emphasis sound can also be considered a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that performs the first start action. The output time of the first start emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds. In addition, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 443 (3), the first reel effect begins, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. A first reel emphasis image 551 is also displayed. The first reel emphasis image 551 is displayed in an area where it overlaps with the display areas of the left decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first reel emphasis image 551 is also displayed in a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In the first reel effect, the effect described using FIGS. 400 (1) to (8) is performed. A first reel emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the first reel effect, is also output. The first reel emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the movable reel 115. The output time of the first reel emphasis sound is 0.9 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 443(4), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 443 (5), the sixth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the sixth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 354 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 443 (6). The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the change count image 502, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, and the change image 51. The sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the change count image 502, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, and the change image 51. A sixth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed, is output. The sixth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the sixth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.12 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 443(7), a fifth button post image 589 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 443(8), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, a first green emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 444 (9), a zone promotion effect is executed, and the first zone start image 536 is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in FIG. 444(10), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 444 (11), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In the first zone effect, the effects described using Fig. 388 (2) to (6) are performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 444 (12), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 444 (13), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 444 (14), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 444 (15), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 444 (16), a change effect is executed, and the changing image 51 changes from green to red. In addition, a red emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect when the red changing image 51 is displayed. The red emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) for which a change effect has been executed. The output time of the red emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 445 (17), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 445 (18), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 445 (19), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 445 (20), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 445 (21), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 445 (22), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 445 (23), the first reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a first reach eye emphasis image 542 are displayed, and the first reach action is performed. In the first reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 390 (2) to (6). In addition, a first reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 445 (24), the character portion of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is erased, thereby reducing the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 446 (25), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 446 (26), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 446 (27), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. In addition, a first development emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the development image 584 stops, is output. The first development emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the development image 584. The output time of the first development emphasis sound is 2 seconds.
Next, the development effect (second reel effect) begins, and as shown in FIG. 446 (28), the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. In addition, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In the development effect (second reel effect), the effect described using FIGS. 401 (1) to (8) and 402 (9) to (11) is performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, a second reel emphasis sound, which is a sound effect of the second reel effect, is output. The second reel emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the development effect. The output time of the second reel emphasis sound is 6 seconds.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the first mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 446 (29), an SPSP start image 556 and a first start emphasis image 557 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the effect described using FIGS. 405 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a first start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first start emphasis image 557 is displayed, is output. The first start emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the first start emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.
Next, the first mode of in-execution suggestion effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 446 (30), an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a first in-execution highlight image 562 are displayed. In the first mode of in-execution suggestion effect, the effect described using FIGS. 410 (1) to (3) is performed. In addition, a first in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first in-execution highlight image 562 is displayed, is output. The first in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the first in-execution highlight sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 446 (31), a third portent emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third portent emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third portent emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third portent emphasis image 518 is displayed, is output. The third portent emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes that the button image 509 is displayed. The output time of the third portent emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.
Next, the seventh button effect is started, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in FIG. 446 (32). In the seventh button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 356 (3) to (8). In addition, a third button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The third button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the third button emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the seventh button effect, a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 447 (33). The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. The seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is also drawn on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 433 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. A seventh post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed, is also output. The seventh post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the seventh post-operation emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 447 (34), the sixth button post-image 590 is displayed. The display time of the sixth button post-image 590 is 2.5 seconds. In addition, a fourth button post-emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth button post-image 590 is displayed, is output. The output time of the fourth button post-emphasis sound is 1.6 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 447 (35), three less decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed moving from top to bottom. The emphasis sound after pressing the fourth button continues to be output. Therefore, the emphasis sound after pressing the fourth button can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the three decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Figure 447 (36), three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 447 (37), a switching image 586 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 447 (38), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the change image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 447 (39), the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variation count image 502 is updated to "31 games."

(Example of variation 9)
Figures 448 to 453 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 9) of the variation presentation will be explained with reference to Figs. 448 to 453. Variation presentation example 9 is an example of a jackpot variation presentation that is a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, variation presentation example 9 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 325. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Fig. 325 is the variation presentation shown in Figs. 442 (1) to (5). Also, variation presentation example 9 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 448 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 448 (2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the first start operation is executed. Also, at this time, a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is also executed. While this vibration effect is being executed, the effect button 161 emits light in white. The execution time of this vibration effect is 6 seconds. The effect button 161 starts emitting light in white after the vibration effect starts, and stops emitting light in white before the vibration effect ends, so that the effect button 161 emits light in white for 5.8 seconds during the vibration effect. However, the execution time of this vibration effect and the light-emitting time of the effect button 161 during the vibration effect may be any time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 448 (3), the first role performance starts, and the left movable role 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, a role first emphasis image 551 is displayed. In the first role performance, the performance described using FIGS. 400 (1) to (8) is performed. Also, a first role emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 448(4), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, a first green emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 448(5), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 448(6), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In the first zone effect, the effects described using Fig. 388(2) to (6) are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 448(7), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 448 (8), the sixth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the sixth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 354 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed as shown in Fig. 449 (9). Also, a sixth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 449 (10), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 449(11), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 449 (12), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 449 (13), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 449 (14), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from green to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 449 (15), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 449(16), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (17), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 450 (18), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (19), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (20), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (21), the third reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fourth reach emphasis image 544 are displayed, and the third reach action is performed. In the third reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using FIG. 392 (2) to (6). In addition, a second reach emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the third reach effect, is output. The second reach emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the second reach emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 450 (22), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (23), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (24), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451 (25), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 451 (26), the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Also, the second role emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. Also, the start suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 451 (27), an SPSP start image 556 and a second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using FIG. 406 (1) to (6) is performed. Also, a second start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second start emphasis image 558 is displayed, is output. The second start emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the second start emphasis sound is 2.5 seconds.
Next, the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 451 (28), the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-execution highlight image 563 are displayed. In the in-execution suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using FIG. 411 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a second in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second in-execution highlight image 563 is displayed, is output. The second in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the second in-execution highlight sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in Figure 451 (29), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 451 (30). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 356 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 451 (31). The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. The eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. An eighth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed, is output. The eighth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time after the eighth operation is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451 (32), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position overlapping the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. A first jackpot highlight image 566 is also displayed. The first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. The first jackpot highlight image 566 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIGS. 416 (2) through (8) and 417 (9) through (16) are executed. Furthermore, when the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the first jackpot emphasis image 566.

Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (33), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (34), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative patterns 41 become the same size. The display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 is 2.5 seconds. However, the display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be any time. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the first doublet emphasis image 591 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the first doublet emphasis image 591 may be any time. A first doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed, is also output. The first doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41. The output time of the first doublet emphasis sound is 1.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (35), a promotion promotion effect is executed and a promotion promotion highlight image 592 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (36), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 452 (37). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in FIG. 452 (38). In addition, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (39), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed again. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 452 (40), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative patterns 41 become the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Then, as shown in Figure 453 (41), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 453 (42), a first right hit notification is made and a first right hit image 503 is displayed. Also, a jackpot start image 593 is displayed.
In each variation presentation example, the first right-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figure 343.

Next, as shown in FIG. 453 (43), a second right hit notification is made and a second right hit image 507 is displayed. The second right hit image 507 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, and is displayed on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43.
In each variation presentation example, the second right-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figure 344.

Next, the big win game starts, and as shown in FIG. 453 (44), a round number image 594 and a round in progress image 595 are displayed.
Next, the big win game ends, and a time-saving start image 596 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 453 (45).
Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 453 (46), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped as a sequence of numbers "444," similar to the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. The reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121 displays "1." Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. The stage notification image 501 and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 are also displayed. In the illustrated example, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Ocean," and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 displays the text "100 more."

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of the operation of the effect button 161, and can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change effect includes a first change effect (for example, the operation display of the button emphasis unit 509c) and a second change effect (for example, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The first change effect is performed by the periodic first operation display, and the second change effect is performed by the periodic second operation display.
In this case, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first change effect and the second change effect, and since both change effects are performed periodically, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the change effects.

In particular, in this embodiment, the period of the action display in the first change presentation is made different from the period of the action display in the second change presentation.
Therefore, compared to when the period of the action display in the first change presentation and the period of the action display in the second change presentation are the same, it is easier for the player to recognize that the first change presentation and the second change presentation are different presentations, and the player can feel the diversity of the presentations more.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects in the variable effect, display a button image 509 that emphasizes the need to operate the effect button 161, and execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change effects include a first change effect (e.g., the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change effect (e.g., the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo-consecutive effect. The effect control unit 300 can also vary the execution time of the first change effect and the second change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIGS. 448(8), 451(30), and 387). Therefore, the player can be encouraged to operate the effect button 161 in a manner appropriate to the progress of the variable effect.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation before the start of the specific presentation different, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation before the start of the specific presentation, compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change effect and the execution time of the second change effect after the start of the specific effect different, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change effect and the second change effect after the start of the specific effect, compared to when the execution time of the first change effect and the execution time of the second change effect are the same.

The performance control unit 300 may make one of the performance modes of the first change performance and the second change performance the same before and after the start of the specific performance, and make the other different. The performance control unit 300 may also make both the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance the same before and after the start of the specific performance. The performance mode of the change performance may be any (or all) of the execution time of the change performance, the cycle of the change performance, and the display mode (action display mode) of the change performance.
In particular, the performance control unit 300 may keep the execution time of the change effect the same before the start of a specific performance and after the start of the specific performance, but may vary either the cycle of the change effect or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change effect. Also, the performance control unit 300 may keep the cycle of the change effect the same before the start of a specific performance and after the start of the specific performance, but may vary either the execution time of the change effect or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change effect. Also, the performance control unit 300 may keep the display mode (operation display mode) of the change effect the same before the start of a specific performance and after the start of the specific performance, but may vary either the cycle of the change effect or the execution time of the change effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make the operation effective period for the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) the same before and after the start of the specific performance, and may differ at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common before and after the start of the specific performance, and may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) different.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific performance in the variable performance, and can execute an emphasis performance (illumination of the performance button 161) that emphasizes the performance button 161 when a vibration performance is executed. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the vibration performance different from the execution time of the emphasis performance (see FIG. 387).
Therefore, compared to when the execution time of the vibration effect and the execution time of the emphasis effect are the same, each of the vibration effect and the emphasis effect is more likely to be noticed by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated in the button effect in the SPSP reach effect, the effect control unit 300 can change the execution mode of the emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 depending on whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss or a jackpot (see Figure 447 (33) and Figure 451 (31)).
In this case, it is possible to make the player more easily aware that the effect button 161 has been operated regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery, and it is also possible to make the player more easily aware of the result of the special pattern lottery as soon as possible.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances in variable performances and can execute special device performances. Specific performances include temporary stops of the decorative symbols 41, reach performances, SP reach performances, SPSP reach performances, button performances, and pseudo consecutive performances. The performance control unit 300 changes the operating mode of the movable device 115 in the special device performance before and after the start of the special performance (see (26) and (32) of FIG. 451).
Here, apart from the variable performance example 9, a variable performance may be provided in which the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance is the same before and after the start of the specific performance. As an example, as a modified example of the variable performance example 9, a variable performance may be provided in which, at the timing shown in FIG. 448 (3), a role object performance is executed in which the center movable role object 115 operates in the same manner as that shown in FIG. 451 (32), and the first role object emphasis image 551 is displayed. That is, the performance control unit 300 can make the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance different before and after the start of the specific performance, and can make the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance the same before and after the start of the specific performance. And, while the operating mode of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance is the same before and after the start of the specific performance, the displayed emphasis image is different.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the role effect, and the emphasis effect includes a first emphasis effect (e.g., the light emission of the movable role object 115) and a second emphasis effect (e.g., the display of a role object emphasis image, the display of a jackpot emphasis image). The performance control unit 300 can also change the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect before the start of the specific effect and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 443 (3), FIG. 451 (32), FIG. 404, FIG. 427). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the movable role object 115 in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect different before the start of the specific effect, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect before the start of the specific effect, compared to when the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are the same.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect different from each other after the start of the specific effect, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect after the start of the specific effect, compared to when the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are the same.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change both the display mode (action display mode) and execution time of the second emphasis performance before the start of the specific performance and after the start of the specific performance.
Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference in how the movable device 115 draws the player's attention depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 is capable of executing emphasis performances that emphasize the special device performances, and is capable of executing emphasis performances that have a shorter execution time than the specific notification and emphasis performances that have a longer execution time than the specific notification (see Figure 342 (2), Figure 404, Figure 427).
Therefore, the execution time of the emphasis effect is easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to highlight the variety of ways in which the player can focus on the role-playing effect according to the emphasis effect. Also, the execution time of the specific notification can be set to a time necessary to prompt the player to operate the handle 151, but not to a degree that reduces the player's interest in the game.

The effect control unit 300 can also execute specific effects in variable effects, display a button image 509 that emphasizes the need to operate the effect button 161, and execute change effects that change the display mode of the button image 509. Change effects include the movement display of the button image 509a, the movement display of the button highlighting section 509c, and the movement display of the highlighted text 509d. Specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. The effect control unit 300 can also change the frequency (cycle) of change effects before and after the start of a specific effect. This allows the player to be encouraged to operate the effect button 161 in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect.

454 and 455 are diagrams showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in the variation presentation example 9. In the following example, in the variation presentation example 9, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution conditions for the first left-hand hit notification are met, and the first left-hand hit notification is executed. Then, the execution conditions for the second left-hand hit notification are met, and the second left-hand hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 454 (1), when the first start action is executed and the first start emphasis image 588 is displayed (see FIG. 448 (2)), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hand hit sound is output. The second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the first start emphasis image 588, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. Furthermore, the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the first start emphasis image 588, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in Fig. 454 (2), when the first reel effect starts and the reel first emphasis image 551 is displayed (see Fig. 448 (3)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reel first emphasis image 551 and is displayed on a layer in front of the reel first emphasis image 551.
Next, as shown in Figure 454 (3), when the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed (see Figure 448 (7)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first precursor emphasis image 508, and is displayed in a layer in front of the first precursor emphasis image 508.
Next, as shown in Fig. 454 (4), when the sixth button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Fig. 448 (8)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the button image 509 and is displayed on a layer in front of the button image 509.

Next, as shown in Fig. 454 (5), when the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed (see Fig. 449 (9)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 and is displayed in a layer in front of the sixth post-operation emphasis image 517.
Next, as shown in Fig. 454 (6), when the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582 are displayed (see Fig. 449 (10)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582, and is displayed in a layer in front of the pseudo consecutive hit image 581 and the pseudo consecutive hit highlight image 582.

Next, as shown in Fig. 454 (7), when the third reach effect starts and the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and fourth reach eye emphasis image 544 are displayed (see Fig. 450 (21)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and a second left hit sound is output. The second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and fourth reach eye emphasis image 544, and is displayed in a layer in front of the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and fourth reach eye emphasis image 544.
Next, as shown in Fig. 454 (8), when the middle decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocative emphasis image 585 are displayed (see Fig. 450 (24)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the middle decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocative emphasis image 585, and is displayed on a layer in front of the middle decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the first development provocative emphasis image 585.

Next, as shown in Figure 455 (9), when the development effect (second role effect) starts and the development emphasis image 554 is displayed (see Figure 451 (26)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the development emphasis image 554 and is displayed on a layer in front of the development emphasis image 554.
Next, as shown in Figure 455 (10), when the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed (see Figure 451 (29)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the third precursor emphasis image 518, and is displayed in a layer in front of the third precursor emphasis image 518.
Next, as shown in Figure 455 (11), when the 8th button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 451 (30)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 455 (12), when the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed (see Fig. 451 (31)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 and is displayed in a layer in front of the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520.
Next, as shown in FIG. 455 (13), when the first jackpot effect is executed and the first jackpot emphasis image 566 is displayed (see FIG. 451 (32)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first jackpot emphasis image 566 and is displayed in a layer in front of the first jackpot emphasis image 566.

Next, as shown in Fig. 455 (14), when the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasized image 591 are displayed (see Fig. 452 (34)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasized image 591, and is displayed in a layer in front of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasized image 591.
Next, as shown in Figure 455 (15), when the first button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 452 (37)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 455 (16), when the first double-digit highlight image 591 is displayed (see Figure 452 (40)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are fixed and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern, the second left-hit image 48 is no longer displayed.

As described above, when the second left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 9, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 9 is restricted during the execution of the second left-hit notification.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable performance example 9, each of the performance sounds described in variable performance example 9 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

Furthermore, even when the left-hit notification shown in Figures 454 and 455 is being executed, the illumination of the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115, and the output of the effect sound, as described in Variable Performance Example 9, may continue.
Furthermore, not limited to variation performance example 9, even when a left-hit notification is being executed in each variation performance, the illumination of lamp L, performance button 161, and movable role object 115 and the output of performance sounds may continue. Furthermore, when a first left-hit notification is executed in each variation performance, the illumination of lamp L, performance button 161, and movable role object 115 and the output of performance sounds may continue. Furthermore, when a second left-hit notification is executed in each variation performance, the illumination of lamp L, performance button 161, and movable role object 115 and the output of performance sounds may be limited, and the second left-hit notification may be executed preferentially.

Also, although not shown, when the left decorative pattern 41, "4," temporarily stops, the first stop action is performed, and the first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed (see FIG. 450 (19)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output. At this time, the second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display areas of the left decorative pattern 41 and the first stop emphasis image 572, and is displayed on a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 and the first stop emphasis image 572.

In addition, Figures 454 and 455 show an example of when the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in variable presentation example 9. For example, when a chance eye presentation is being executed, if the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111 and the conditions for executing the second left-hit notification are met, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. In this case, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and chance eye emphasis image 587 (see Figure 442 (4)), in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and chance eye emphasis image 587.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the left-hit notification is executed even after the doublet-number emphasized image is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For a predetermined period after the display of the double-digit emphasis image, the left-hand hit notification may not be executed even if the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111.

(Variation example 10)
Figure 456 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 10) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 456. Variation presentation example 10 is an example of a jackpot variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation performance example 10 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 327. Also, variation performance example 10 is an example of a variation performance that is executed after the variation performance that is executed when "AA2" is selected as the "pre-determination performance pattern" in FIG. 325. Also, the variation performance that is executed when "AA2" is selected as the "pre-determination performance pattern" in FIG. 325 is the variation performance shown in FIG. 442 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 448 (1) to (8), 449 (9) to (16), 450 (17) to (24), and 451 (25) to (27) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 456 (1), the second type of in-execution suggestion effect begins, and the SPSP in-execution suggestion image 561 and the second in-execution highlight image 563 are displayed. In the second type of in-execution suggestion effect, the effects described using Figures 411 (1) to (5) are performed. In addition, a second in-execution highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 456 (2), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the ninth button effect is initiated, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in FIG. 456 (3). In the ninth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 359 (3) to (8) and 360 (9). In addition, a fourth button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The fourth button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the fourth button emphasis sound is 0.6 seconds.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the ninth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 456 (4). In addition, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 456 (5), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable device 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIG. 416 (2) to (8) and FIG. 417 (9) to (16) are executed.
Although not shown in the figures, the same effects as those shown in Figures 452 (33) to (40) and Figures 453 (41) to (46) are then performed.

Furthermore, in variable presentation example 10, if the player continues to fire the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111 and the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 located on the right side of the game area 111, the ninth button presentation starts as shown in FIG. 456 (6), and when the button image 509 is displayed (see FIG. 456 (3)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the button image 509, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in a layer in front of the button image 509 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The output of the fourth button emphasis sound is also limited.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is being executed in variable performance example 10, the fourth button emphasis sound is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

(Variation example 11)
Figure 457 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 11) will be described with reference to Fig. 457. Variable effect example 11 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 11 is a variation presentation executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 327. Also, variation presentation example 11 is an example of a variation presentation executed after the variation presentation executed when "AA3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 325. Also, the variation presentation executed when "AA3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 325 is the variation presentation shown in FIG. 442 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 448(1) to (3) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 457(1), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, a first green emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 457(2), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed, and a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the tenth button effect is initiated, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in FIG. 457 (3). In the tenth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 362 (2) to (8) and 363 (9). In addition, a fifth button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The fifth button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the fifth button emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 457 (4), a ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed. The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, stage notification image 501, number of changes image 502, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, number of reserved times display 55, and small patterns 56. The ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, stage notification image 501, and number of changes image 502, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, number of reserved times display 55, and small patterns 56. A ninth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the ninth post-operation emphasis image 521 is displayed, is output. The ninth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the ninth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.35 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 457(5), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Although not shown, after this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 448 (6) to (8), 449 (9) to (16), 450 (17) to (24), 451 (25) to (32), 452 (33) to (40), and 453 (41) to (46) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects in the variable effects, can display the button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, and can execute change effects that change the display mode of the button image 509. The change effects include a first change effect (e.g., the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change effect (e.g., the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). Specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. The effect control unit 300 can change the execution mode of both the first change effect and the second change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 457 (3), FIGS. 362 (2) to (8), FIG. 451 (30), and FIG. 356 (3) to (8)).
In this case, the uniqueness of how the player focuses on the button image 509 can be enhanced depending on the progress of the variable presentation.

The performance control unit 300 may make the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance common before and after the start of the specific performance. For example, at the time shown in FIG. 457 (3) in variation performance example 11, the eighth button performance is executed, so that the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance may be common before and after the start of the specific performance.
In this case, regardless of the progress of the variable effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the button effect is being executed, and it is possible to further encourage the player to operate the effect button 161.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make one of the execution modes of the first change performance and the second change performance the same and make the other different before and after the start of the specific performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an operation performance that displays a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The operation performance includes a first operation performance (for example, the eighth button performance (see FIG. 451 (30)) and a second operation performance (for example, the tenth button performance (see FIG. 457 (3))), and the change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The performance control unit 300 can make the operation mode of the first change performance and the operation mode of the second change performance different in the first operation performance and the second operation performance (see FIGS. 362 (2) to (8), 356 (3) to (8)).
In this case, the uniqueness of how the player focuses on the button image 509 can be enhanced depending on the operation presentation.
Note that the performance control unit 300 may make either the operation mode of the first change performance or the operation mode of the second change performance different and make the other common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make both the operation mode of the first change performance and the operation mode of the second change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the first change effect and the execution time of the second change effect in the first operation effect and the second operation effect (see FIG. 387 ). Therefore, the player can be encouraged to operate the effect button 161 in a manner appropriate to the type of operation effect.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation in the first operation presentation different from the execution time of the second change presentation, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the first operation presentation compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation in the second operation presentation different from the execution time of the second change presentation, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the second operation presentation compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.

The performance control unit 300 can periodically execute the operation display of the first change performance. The performance control unit 300 can make the period of the operation display of the first change performance different between the first operation performance and the second operation performance (see FIG. 387 ).
Therefore, even with the same first change presentation, a variety of presentations can be realized depending on the operation presentation.

The performance control unit 300 can also periodically execute the operation display of the second change performance. The performance control unit 300 can also make the period of the operation display of the second change performance different between the first operation performance and the second operation performance (see FIG. 387 ).
Therefore, even with the same second change presentation, a variety of presentations can be realized depending on the operation presentation.

Note that the performance control unit 300 may make either the performance mode of the first change performance or the performance mode of the second change performance common to the first operation performance and the second operation performance, and make the other different. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make both the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance common to the first operation performance and the second operation performance. Furthermore, the performance mode of the change performance that is made common or different may be any (or all) of the execution time of the change performance, the cycle of the change performance, and the display mode (action display mode) of the change performance.
In particular, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but vary either the period of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the period of the change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but vary either the execution time of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common between the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but vary either the period of the change performance or the execution time of the change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) common in the first operation performance and the second operation performance, but may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance different.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common to the first operation performance and the second operation performance, and may make the operation effective period (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) in the button performance different.

(Variation example 12)
458 and 459 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 12) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 458 and 459. Variation presentation example 12 is an example of a jackpot variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 12 is a variation presentation executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 327. Also, variation presentation example 12 is an example of a variation presentation executed after the variation presentation executed when "AB1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 325. Also, the variation presentation executed when "AB1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 325 is the variation presentation shown in FIG. 442 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 458(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 displays "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 458 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, a first start operation is performed, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "0". Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 458 (3), a change effect is executed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. In addition, a first rainbow emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the rainbow-colored changing image 51 is displayed, is output. The first rainbow emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) for which the change effect has been executed. The output time of the first rainbow emphasis sound is 2.5 seconds.
In each variation presentation example, the rainbow-colored variation image 51 (rainbow-colored pending image 52) is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figures 334 (1) to (5).

Next, as shown in Figure 458 (4), the left decorative pattern 41, "7," temporarily stops, and a fifth stop-time action, which is the action taken when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, is performed. The fifth stop-time action is performed when the left decorative pattern 41, "7," temporarily stops in the first stage. The fifth stop-time action is an action in which the decorative pattern 41 swings from side to side. The execution time of the fifth stop-time action is 0.6 seconds. However, the execution time of the fifth stop-time action may be any time. A second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed around the left decorative pattern 41. A third stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second stop emphasis image 573 is displayed, is output. The third stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41, "7." The output time of the third stop emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 458 (5), the first reach stimulation effect is executed. In the first reach stimulation effect, a first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed surrounding the left and right decorative symbols 41. The display time of the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is 5.5 seconds. In addition, a first reach stimulation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the first reach stimulation emphasis image 597 is displayed, is output. The first reach stimulation emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the reach stimulation effect. The output time of the first reach stimulation emphasis sound is 5.25 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 458 (6), the fourth reach effect is executed, and a reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, and fourth reach highlight image 545 are displayed. The fourth reach highlight image 545 is displayed in an area overlapping with the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, and light intensity image 43. The fourth reach highlight image 545 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. The fourth reach action is then performed. In the fourth reach effect, the effects described using Figures 393 (2) to (5) are executed. In addition, a third reach highlight sound, which is a sound effect for the fourth reach effect, is output. The third reach highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the third reach highlight sound is 1.75 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 458 (7), the fourth reach effect ends. The first prognosis emphasis image 508 is displayed. The first prognosis emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 458 (8). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the first button effect, the double-digit decorative symbol 41 "777" temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 459 (9). Also, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed. At this time, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are hidden. Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 459 (10), the second jackpot presentation is executed. In the second jackpot presentation, a second jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, and the presentation button 161 and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. In addition, a second jackpot highlight image 567 is displayed. The second jackpot highlight image 567 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. In addition, the second jackpot highlight image 567 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. In the second jackpot presentation, the presentations described using Figures 419 (2) to (8) and Figures 420 (9) to (14) are executed. Furthermore, when the second jackpot emphasis image 567 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the second jackpot emphasis image 567.

459(11), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
459(12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be further enlarged. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 459 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 3.5 seconds. However, the motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. In addition, a second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the second doublet emphasis image 598 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the second doublet emphasis image 598 may be any time. In addition, a second doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed, is output. The second doublet emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the doublet decorative symbols 41, "777." The output time of the second doublet emphasis sound is 1.4 seconds.
459(14), as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "777", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the reach-prompting effect is executed. Here, the reach-prompting effect in the variable effect may be executed more easily with the second left and right decorative symbols 41 (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41 "6") than with the first left and right decorative symbols 41 (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41 "7"). Furthermore, the reach-prompting effect may be executed more easily (the reach-prompting effect is more likely to succeed) when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the second left and right decorative symbols 41 than when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the first left and right decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, the reach-prompting effect may be executed more easily (the likelihood of a jackpot game being higher) when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the first left and right decorative symbols 41 than when the reach-prompting effect is executed with the second left and right decorative symbols 41. In other words, it may be possible to make it easier (higher expectation) for a jackpot game to be executed when the reach encouraging effect using the first left and right decorative patterns 41 is successful than when the reach encouraging effect using the second left and right decorative patterns 41 is successful.
Furthermore, when a reach stimulation effect using the second left and right decorative patterns 41 is executed, the operation display of the left and right decorative patterns 41, the reach stimulation emphasis image, and the reach stimulation emphasis sound may all be different from when a reach stimulation effect using the first left and right decorative patterns 41 is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the decorative pattern 41 is the same character (for example, "7"), the emphasis effect differs between the left decorative pattern 41 and the middle decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 430 (3) and Figure 458 (4)).
Therefore, even if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the way in which the player is drawn to the decorative pattern 41 can be changed depending on the decorative pattern 41 that is displayed.
In addition, in the decorative pattern 41 of a character other than "7" (for example, "4"), the mode of emphasis effect (type of motion when stopped, type of stop emphasis image) may be the same between the left decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41. In this case, it is possible to enhance the special feeling of the decorative pattern 41 of the character in which the mode of emphasis effect differs between the left decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41.

In the variation effect example 12, a button effect is executed, but this is not limited to this.
In the variation effect example 12, the button effect may not be executed. That is, after the reach effect is started, the middle decorative pattern 41 "7" may be temporarily stopped without executing the button effect, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, when the middle decorative pattern 41 "7" temporarily stops, the third stop action may be performed, and the fifth stop emphasis image 578 may be displayed so as to surround the middle decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in the variation effect example 12, the rainbow-colored variation image 51 is displayed, but is not limited to this. In the variation effect example 12, the red variation image 51 may be displayed.
In addition, in the variation presentation example 12, the second jackpot presentation is executed, but this is not limited to this. In the variation presentation example 12, the first jackpot presentation may be executed. In the variation presentation example 12, the variation presentation may end without executing the jackpot presentation.

(Variation example 13)
Figures 460 and 461 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 13) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 460 and 461. Variation presentation example 13 is an example of a jackpot variation presentation, which is a variation presentation based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 13 is a variation presentation executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 327. Also, variation presentation example 13 is an example of a variation presentation executed after the variation presentation executed when "AB2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 325. Also, the variation presentation executed when "AB2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 325 is the variation presentation shown in FIG. 442 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 443 (1) to (8), 444 (9) to (16), 445 (17) to (24), 446 (25) to (32), and 447 (33) to (36) are performed, and then a switching image 586 is displayed, as shown in Figure 460 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 460(2), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the change image 51 is not redisplayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 460(3), a restored image 599 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 460 (4), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIGS. 416 (2) to (8) and 417 (9) to (16) are executed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 460 (5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 460(6), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 460 (7), a promotion promotion effect is executed and a promotion promotion highlight image 592 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 460(8), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 11th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 461 (9). In the 11th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Fig. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the eleventh button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in FIG. 461 (10). In addition, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 461 (11), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a moving manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41. In addition, the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 at this time is smaller than the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 452 (33).
Next, as shown in FIG. 461 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a moving manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41. In addition, the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 at this time is larger than the display size of the doublet decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 452 (33).

Next, as shown in FIG. 461 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 become the same size. Also, a second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, a second doublet emphasis sound is output.
Then, as shown in Figure 461 (14), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "777" stop.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is "777".

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change both the action display and the highlight image of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in one stage depending on the characters of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 (see Figures 452 (39), (40), and Figures 461 (11) to (13)).
In this case, the uniqueness of the presentation using the doublet decorative pattern 41 can be enhanced according to the characters of the doublet decorative pattern 41.

The performance control unit 300 may make the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 the same when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7" and make the doublet emphasis image different. The performance control unit 300 may make the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 the same when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7" and make the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 different. The performance control unit 300 may make both the operation display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the doublet emphasis image the same when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7".
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the display time of the doublet emphasis image the same or different between the cases where the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7". Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 the same and the display time of the doublet emphasis image different between the cases where the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7". Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the display time of the doublet emphasis image the same and the execution time of the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 different between the cases where the doublet decorative pattern 41 is a "4" and a "7".

Note that the variation presentation example 13 is not limited to the above example.
In variation effect example 13, after the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed (see FIG. 461 (10)), a so-called full rotation effect may be executed in which the doublet decorative pattern 41 varies. At this time, a second doublet emphasis image 598 may be displayed as an image that emphasizes the varying doublet decorative pattern 41. Then, when the second left-hit notification is executed while the second doublet emphasis image 598 is displayed, the second left-hit image 48 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the second doublet emphasis image 598, in a layer behind the second doublet emphasis image 598.

(Variation example 14)
Figure 462 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 14) will be described with reference to Fig. 462. Variable effect example 14 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.
462 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 327. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 462 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121.
Next, as shown in Figure 462 (2), as the next special pattern begins to change and display, the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 462 (3), a special effect image 600 is displayed. The special effect image 600 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The special effect image 600 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the variable image 51, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.
When the reserved image 52 is displayed, the special effect image 600 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reserved image 52 and on a layer in front of the reserved image 52.

Next, as shown in Figure 462 (4), the display mode of the stage notification image 501 changes. More specifically, the display mode of the identification section 501a (see Figure 329 (2)) of the stage notification image 501 is the same before and after the special effect image 600 is displayed, but the display mode of the highlighting section 501b is different. Also, the display mode of the stage image 61 is different before and after the special effect image 600 is displayed. More specifically, although a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61, this moving image is different from the image before the special effect image 600 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 462 (5), three decorative symbols 41, "472," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform a first stop action, and the center decorative symbol 41 performs a second stop action. In addition, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Then, as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "472," are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 462(6). The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. The variable count image 502 is updated to "31 games."

(Variation example 15)
Figures 463 to 466 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 15) will be described with reference to Figures 463 to 466. Variable effect example 15 is an example of a jackpot variable effect, which is a variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variation performance example 15 is a variation performance that is executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 327. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 463(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121.
Next, as shown in Figure 463 (2), as the next special pattern begins to change and display, the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 463(3), the display mode of the stage notification image 501 changes. More specifically, the display mode of the identification portion 501a (see FIG. 329(2)) of the stage notification image 501 remains the same, but the display mode of the highlighting portion 501b changes. This highlighting portion 501b is displayed so as to move periodically in a clockwise direction. The period of the highlighting portion 501b is 1.5 seconds. However, the period of the highlighting portion 501b may be any time. Also, the display mode of the stage image 61 is different. More specifically, although a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61, this moving image is different from the moving image shown in FIG. 463(1) and the moving images shown in FIGS. 462(4) to (6).
Next, as shown in FIG. 463(4), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 463 (5), the sixth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the sixth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 354 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the sixth button effect, a sixth post-operation emphasis image 517 is displayed as shown in FIG. 463(6). In addition, a sixth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 463(7), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 463(8), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 464 (9), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 464 (10), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 464 (11), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from the normal display mode to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 464 (12), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 464 (13), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 464 (14), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 464 (15), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 464 (16), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 465 (17), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops and performs the first stop action. At this time, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a first stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 465 (18), the third reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a fourth reach emphasis image 544 are displayed, and the third reach action is performed. In the third reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 392 (2) to (6). In addition, a second reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 465 (19), the character portion of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is erased, reducing its decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the number of changes image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 465 (20), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 465 (21), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 465 (22), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 465 (23), the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 465 (24), the SPSP start image 556 and the second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect explained using FIG. 406 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the second start emphasis sound is output.
Next, the second mode of in-play suggestion effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 466 (25), the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-play highlight image 563 are displayed. In the second mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effect described using FIG. 411 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, the second in-play highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 466 (26), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 466 (27). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Fig. 356 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in FIG. 466 (28). In addition, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 466 (29), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable device 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figures 416 (2) to (8) and Figures 417 (9) to (16) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 466 (30), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 466 (31), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as shown in Figure 466 (32), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "444" stop.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display an identification image (stage notification image 501) that identifies the performance mode, and the identification image has a specification section (identification section 501a) and an emphasis section (emphasis section 501b). The performance control unit 300 can also execute a change performance that changes the emphasis section, and the change performance includes a first change performance (see (2) to (4) in FIG. 462) and a second change performance (see (2) and (3) in FIG. 463). A jackpot game is more likely to be played when the second change performance is executed than when the first change performance is executed (there is a higher expectation of a jackpot game being played).
In this case, the player can be made aware of the degree of expectation according to the change in the highlighting portion 501b, thereby increasing the interest in the change presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when a change effect is executed in which the highlighting part 501b of the stage notification image 501 changes, the identification part 501a does not change (see Figures 462 (2) to (4) and Figures 463 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
When a change effect in which the highlighting portion 501b of the stage notification image 501 changes is executed, the indicator 501a may also change. However, in this case, the indicator 501a changes to a form different from any of the indicators 501a of the stage notification image 501 corresponding to the second to fourth stages. For example, when the change effect shown in FIG. 462(4) is executed, the text in the indicator 501a may change to "Standard Universe," and when the change effect shown in FIG. 463(3) is executed, the text in the indicator 501a may change to "High Expectations Universe."

(Variation example 16)
467 and 468, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 16) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable effect example 16 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for the first start port 121 in the normal game state is "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 467 and 468 are variable effects that are executed when "ER14" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 16 to change presentation example 25 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the second stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 467 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 also displays a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a number of reserved symbols display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a number of variations image 502. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, with the text "empty" displayed on the stage notification image 501 and the text "0 games" displayed on the number of variations image 502. The second stage is the effect mode in the normal game state. Also, at this time, the hold number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the hold number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the hold number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the hold number for winning at the second starting port 122.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 467 (2), the special symbol starts to change and the changing effect starts. At this time, the changing image 51 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 467(3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 467(4), the 12th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 12th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 365(2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the 12th button effect, a tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 467 (5). The tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A tenth post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the tenth post-operation emphasis image 522 is displayed, is output. The tenth post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the tenth post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 467(6), a seventh button post image 601 is displayed. Also, a fifth button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the seventh button post image 601 is displayed. The output time of the fifth button post emphasis sound is 0.21 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 467 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and a sixth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The sixth stop-time action is performed when an even-numbered decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.) temporarily stops in the second stage. The sixth stop-time action involves the decorative symbol 41 swaying up and down. At this time, seventh stop-time emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right sides of the left decorative symbol 41. The seventh stop-time emphasis image 602 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, on a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The execution time of the sixth stop-time action and the display time of the seventh stop-time emphasis image 602 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the sixth stop-time action and the display time of the seventh stop-time emphasis image 602 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the stop-time emphasis image is displayed, is also output. The fourth stop emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. The output time of the fourth stop emphasis sound is 0.18 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 467 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "1," temporarily stops, and a seventh stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The seventh stop-time action is performed when an odd-numbered decorative symbol 41 (such as 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) temporarily stops in the second stage. The seventh stop-time action is an action in which the decorative symbol 41 sways from side to side. At this time, an eighth stop-time emphasis image 603 is displayed below the right decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the seventh stop-time action and the display time of the eighth stop-time emphasis image 603 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the seventh stop-time action and the display time of the eighth stop-time emphasis image 603 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 468 (9), the "2" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is displayed on the left and right of the middle decorative pattern 41. The display time of the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the ninth stop emphasis image 604 may be any time. In addition, the fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 468 (10), the ninth stop emphasis image 604 is hidden, and the three decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 468 (11), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "421", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the change effect, the change image 51 is erased (displayed). Also, the change count image 502 is updated to "1 game."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the behavior of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display mode of the highlighted image different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 428 (7) and Figure 467 (7)).
Therefore, the uniqueness of the presentation using the decorative pattern 41 for each stage can be enhanced.

Fluctuating performance example 16 may be a fluctuating performance that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "fluctuating performance pattern" in Figure 327, that is, a fluctuating performance that is executed when the same fluctuating performance pattern as fluctuating performance example 1 is selected. In this way, even if the same fluctuating performance pattern is selected in the first and second stages, the type of emphasis performance that is executed when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops may be different.

(Variation example 17)
Figure 469 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 17) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 469. Variation presentation example 17 is a random miss variation presentation based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for the first start port 121 in the normal game state is "4".
In addition, the variation performance example 17 is a variation performance that is executed when "ER15" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 327. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 469(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in FIG. 469(2), the display of the next special symbol begins, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 469 (3), three decorative symbols 41, "412," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform the sixth stop action, and the middle decorative symbol 41 performs the seventh stop action. Furthermore, a seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed on the left and right of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a tenth stop emphasis image 605 is displayed on the left and right of the middle decorative symbol 41. The display time of the tenth stop emphasis image 605 is 0.5 seconds. However, the display time of the tenth stop emphasis image 605 may be any time. Furthermore, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 469(4). Also, the changing image 51 is hidden. Also, the changing count image 502 is updated to "1 game".

(Example of variation 18)
Figures 470 and 471 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 18) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 470 and 471. Variation presentation example 18 is an example of a reach-miss variation presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, variable performance example 18 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER16" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 470(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in Figure 470 (2), the change performance begins as the special pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 470(3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 470 (4), the 13th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 13th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the 13th button effect, an 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 470 (5). The 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 11th post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. An 11th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 11th post-operation emphasis image 523, is output. The 11th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 11th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 470(6), the eighth button post image 606 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 470(7), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 470(8), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 471 (9), the 5th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 5th reach emphasis image 546 are displayed, and the 5th reach action is performed. In the 5th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner explained using Fig. 394 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 471 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 471 (11), the 14th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 14th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the 14th button effect, a 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 471 (12). The 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. The 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the variable image 51, and the small pattern 56. A 12th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed, is output. The 12th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 12th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 471 (13), the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. Also, a sixth button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. The output time of the sixth button post emphasis sound is 0.21 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 471 (14), the "5" central decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops, and an eighth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The eighth stop-time action is performed when an odd-numbered central decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 1, 3, 5, 7, 9) temporarily stops when a normal reach effect is executed in the second stage. The eighth stop-time action rotates the decorative symbol 41 clockwise. At this time, an eleventh stop-time emphasis image 608 is displayed around the central decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the eighth stop-time action and the display time of the eleventh stop-time emphasis image 608 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the eighth stop-time action and the display time of the eleventh stop-time emphasis image 608 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 471 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode of the highlighting performance of the left and right decorative patterns 41 after the start of the reach performance different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 432 (9) and Figure 471 (9)), and can make the display mode of the reach line image 539 common.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a reach has been achieved, while also realizing a variety of reach presentations for each stage.

(Example of variation 19)
472 and 473 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 19) will be described with reference to Figures 472 and 473. Variable effect example 19 is an example of a reach-miss variable effect based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state.
The variation effects shown in Figures 472 and 473 are variation effects that are executed when "ER17" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 327. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 472(1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are stopped and fixed by the performance control unit 300 as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in Figure 472 (2), the change performance begins as the special pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 472(3), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 472 (4), the 13th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 13th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 161 in the thirteenth button effect, an eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed as shown in FIG. 472 (5). In addition, an eleventh post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 472(6), the eighth button post image 606 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 472 (7), the left decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops, and the seventh stop action is performed. At this time, the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. The fourth stop emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 472 (8), the right decorative symbol 41, "5," temporarily stops, and the seventh stop action is performed. At this time, the eighth stop emphasis image 603 is displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. In addition, the fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 473 (9), the 6th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 6th reach eye emphasis image 547 are displayed, and the 6th reach action is performed. In the 6th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner explained using Fig. 395 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 473 (10), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 473 (11), the 13th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 13th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the thirteenth button effect, an eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523 is displayed as shown in FIG. 473 (12). In addition, an eleventh post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 473 (13), the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. Also, a sixth button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the ninth button post image 607 is displayed. The output time of the first button post emphasis sound is 0.21 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 473 (14), the "6" central decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops, and a ninth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. The ninth stop-time action is performed when an even-numbered central decorative symbol 41 (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8) temporarily stops when a normal reach effect is executed in the second stage. The ninth stop-time action rotates the decorative symbol 41 counterclockwise. At this time, a twelfth stop-time emphasis image 609 is displayed around the central decorative symbol 41. The execution time of the ninth stop-time action and the display time of the twelfth stop-time emphasis image 609 are 0.5 seconds. However, the execution time of the ninth stop-time action and the display time of the twelfth stop-time emphasis image 609 may be different or may be any time. A fourth stop-time emphasis sound is also output.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "565", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 473 (15). Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

(Variation example 20)
Figures 474 to 476 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 20) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to Figures 474 to 476. Variation presentation example 20 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 474 to 476 are variable effects that are executed when "ER18" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 474(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623," are fixed. In addition, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting slot 121 shows "2."
Next, as shown in Figure 474 (2), the change performance begins as the special pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 begin to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 474(3), a second precursor emphasis image 513 is displayed. Also, a second precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 474 (4), the fifth button effect starts, and button image 509 is displayed. Furthermore, when effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the fifth button effect, first operation highlight image 514 is displayed. In the fifth button effect, button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Figs. 351 (2) to (8) and 352 (9). Furthermore, a second button highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 474(5), a fifth post-operation emphasis image 516 is displayed. Also, a fifth post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 474(6), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 474(7), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 474 (8), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 475 (9), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change again. At this time, the re-change notification image 583 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, a change effect is performed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, a first blue accent sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 475 (10), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 475 (11), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 475 (12), the 5th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 5th reach emphasis image 546 are displayed, and the 5th reach action is performed. In the 5th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner explained using Fig. 394 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 475 (13), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 475 (14), the 14th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 14th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner described using Fig. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the 14th button effect, a 12th post-operation emphasis image 524 is displayed as shown in FIG. 475 (15). In addition, a 12th post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 475 (16), the ninth button post image 607 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 476 (17), the character portion of the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is erased to reduce its decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 476 (18), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 476 (19), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.
476 (20), the development image 584 is hidden, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an action such that it moves toward the center of the image display unit 114. Also, a second action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 476 (21), the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 476 (22), a switching image 586 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 476 (23), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the variable count image 502 are redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 476 (24), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode of the highlighting performance of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figures 428 (7) and 467 (7)), and can make the performance mode of the highlighting performance of the less decorative decorative pattern 41 the same (see Figures 439 (19) and 476 (19)).
Therefore, it is possible to achieve both a variety of effects according to the stage and to make it easy for the player to recognize the object being emphasized by the emphasis effect being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode of the emphasis performance of the middle decorative pattern 41 after the start of the reach performance different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figures 435 (14) and 473 (14)), and can make the performance mode of the emphasis performance of the pseudo-consecutive performance the same (see Figures 437 (6) and 474 (6)).
Therefore, it is possible to achieve both a variety of effects according to the stage and to make it easier for players to recognize specific effects such as pseudo consecutive effects that are emphasized by emphasis effects.

(Variation example 21)
Figures 477 and 478 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 21) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to Figures 477 and 478. Variation presentation example 21 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 477 and 478 are variable effects that are executed when "ER19" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 327.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 474 (1) to (8), 475 (9) to (16), and 476 (17) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 477 (1), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a small size in both upper corners of the image display unit 114. Also, the SP reach effect begins, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 477 (2), a development provocation effect is executed, displaying the "5" center decorative pattern 41, the development image 584, and the second development provocation highlight image 610. In the illustrated example, the development image 584 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the center decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the center decorative pattern 41. In addition, a second development provocation highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second development provocation highlight image 610 is displayed, is output. The second development provocation highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the center decorative pattern 41 and the development image 584 (development provocation effect). The output time of the second development provocation highlight sound is 2.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 477 (3), the development image 584 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and is displayed in a layer behind the middle decorative pattern 41. Also, a second development emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 477(4), the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 are displayed so as to interchange their display positions with each other. Also, a second development emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 477 (5), the development image 584 is hidden, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to move to the center of the image display unit 114. That is, after the development teasing effect is executed, the development effect is not executed. In addition, a third action emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for displaying the action of the middle decorative pattern 41, is output. The third action emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41. The output time of the third action emphasis sound is 1.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in Figure 477 (6), the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 477(7), a switching image 586 is displayed.
477(8), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the variable count image 502 are redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 478(9), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the operation modes of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41, and the development highlight image, in the first and second stages (see Fig. 439 (19) and Fig. 477 (4)). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the SP reach performance according to the stage.
The performance control unit 300 may make the operation modes of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the development promotion emphasis image different. The performance control unit 300 may make the operation modes of the development promotion emphasis image common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the operation modes of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 different.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the SP reach performance, the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41 are displayed in such a manner that their display positions are interchanged with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the SP reach effect in the variation effect example 21, the middle decorative symbols 41 "4" and "5" may be displayed so as to swap their display positions with each other. Even in this case, a common emphasis sound (second development provocation emphasis sound) may be output when the middle decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed on the front layer and when the middle decorative symbol 41 "5" is displayed on the front layer. On the other hand, the middle decorative symbol 41 "4" may be displayed on the front layer and when the middle decorative symbol 41 "5" is displayed on the front layer, and the middle decorative symbol 41 may be displayed so as to have different display modes.

(Variation example 22)
Figure 479 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 22) will be described with reference to Fig. 479. Variable effect example 22 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 479 is a variable performance that is executed when "AR21" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 325 and "ER20" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 327. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 479(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 479 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 is updated to "1."

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 479 (3), the second reserved image 52 is displayed and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting hole 121 is updated to "2." At this time, a change effect is executed, and the first reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, a first blue accent sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 479 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in green. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. A second chance eye emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed, is output. The second chance eye emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the three decorative symbols 41 in the chance eye effect in the second stage. The output time of the second chance eye emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 479 (5), as the special pattern stops varying, three rows of decorative patterns 41 and small patterns 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
The chance eye effect in the variation effect example 22 is an example of a pre-determination effect. This pre-determination effect is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

(Variation example 22)
Figures 480 to 484 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 22) will be described with reference to Figures 480 to 484. Variable presentation example 22 is a variable presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, variable presentation example 22 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 21. In other words, variable presentation example 22 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 479 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 21.
480 to 484 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER21" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 327. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 480(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 480 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. A second start operation is performed when the decorative symbol 41 begins to change. The second start operation is a counterclockwise rotation of the decorative symbol 41. At this time, a second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The second start emphasis image 611 displayed around the left decorative symbol 41 overlaps with the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 and is located in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. A second start emphasis sound, a sound effect indicating the display of the second start emphasis image 611, is output. The second start emphasis sound can also be considered a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 performing the second start operation. The output time of the second beginning emphasis sound is 0.35 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 480 (3), the third reel performance begins, and the left movable reel 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. A second reel emphasis image 555 is also displayed. The second reel emphasis image 555 is displayed in an area where it overlaps with the display areas of the left decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. The second reel emphasis image 555 is also displayed in a layer in front of the left decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In the third reel performance, the performance described using FIGS. 403 (1) to (8) is performed. A third reel emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the third reel performance, is also output. The third reel emphasis sound can also be considered as a performance sound that emphasizes the movable reel 115. The output time of the third reel emphasis sound is 1 second.
Next, as shown in FIG. 480(4), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 480 (5), the 15th button effect is started and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 15th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the 15th button effect, a 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 480 (6). The 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the change count image 502, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the change image 51, and the small pattern 56. The 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the change count image 502, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the change image 51, and the small pattern 56. A 13th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 13th post-operation emphasis image 525, is output. The 13th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 13th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.13 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 480(7), a tenth button post image 612 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 480(8), a zone promotion effect is executed, and the first zone start image 536 is displayed in a manner that causes it to sway up and down.
Next, as shown in FIG. 481(9), the first zone start image 536 stops.
Next, as shown in Fig. 481 (10), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. In the first zone effect, the effects described using Fig. 388 (2) to (6) are performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 481 (11), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 481 (12), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 481 (13), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 481 (14), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 481 (15), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 481 (16), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 482 (17), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 482 (18), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 482 (19), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 482 (20), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 482 (21), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 482 (22), the 5th reach effect starts, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a 5th reach emphasis image 546 are displayed, and the 5th reach action is performed. In the 5th reach effect, the effect is performed in the manner described using Fig. 394 (2) to (6). In addition, a 1st reach emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 482 (23), the character portion of the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is erased to reduce its decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 482 (24), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 483 (25), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 483 (26), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 483 (27), the middle movable role effect 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In the development effect (second role effect), the effect described using FIGS. 401 (1) to (8) and 402 (9) to (11) is performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role effect emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect starts. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the first mode starts, and as shown in FIG. 483 (28), the SPSP start image 556 and the first start emphasis image 557 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the first mode, the effect described using FIG. 405 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, the first start emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first mode of in-play suggestion effect is started, and as shown in Fig. 483 (29), an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a first in-play highlight image 562 are displayed. In the first mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effects described using Fig. 410 (1) to (3) are performed. In addition, a first in-play highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 483 (30), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the seventh button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 483 (31). In the seventh button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 356 (3) to (8). In addition, a third button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the seventh button effect, a seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 is displayed as shown in FIG. 483 (32). In addition, a seventh post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 484 (33), a post-6 button image 590 is displayed. Also, a post-4 button emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 484 (34), three less decorative decorative patterns 41, "454", are displayed in a manner that moves from the top to the bottom.
Next, as shown in Figure 484 (35), three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 484 (36), a switching image 586 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 484 (37), the switching image 586 is hidden, and the three decorative symbols 41, "454," are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the reserved image 52, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the change image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 484 (38), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop varying. Also, the variation count image 502 is updated to "31 games."

(Variation example 23)
Figures 485 to 490 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 22) will be described with reference to Figures 485 to 490. Variable effect example 22 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Note that variation presentation example 23 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA6" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 325. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA6" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 325 is the variation presentation shown in Figures 479 (1) to (5). Also, variation presentation example 23 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA6" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Figure 327. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 485 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 485 (2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, a second start operation is performed. At this time, a second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, a second start emphasis sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is also executed. While this vibration effect is being executed, the effect button 161 emits light in white. The execution time of this vibration effect is 6 seconds. The effect button 161 starts emitting light in white after the vibration effect starts, and stops emitting light in white before the vibration effect ends, so that the effect button 161 emits light in white for 5.8 seconds during the vibration effect. However, the execution time of this vibration effect and the light-emitting time of the effect button 161 during the vibration effect may be any time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 485 (3), the third role performance starts, and the left movable role 115A moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the role second emphasis image 555 is displayed. In the third role performance, the performance described using FIG. 403 (1) to (8) is performed. Also, the third role emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 485(4), a second zone start image 538 is displayed and the second zone presentation begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 485(5), a second zone execution image 613 is displayed. In the second zone effect, the effects explained using Fig. 389(2) to (6) are performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 485(6), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 485 (7), the 15th button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 15th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 365 (2) to (8). In addition, the first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 15th button effect, a 13th post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed as shown in FIG. 485 (8). In addition, a 13th post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 486(9), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 486 (10), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 486 (11), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 486 (12), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 486 (13), a change effect is executed, and the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. Also, a red-emphasizing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 486 (14), a pseudo-continuous image 581 and a pseudo-continuous emphasis image 582 are displayed. Also, a second stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 486 (15), the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 486 (16), a re-change notification image 583 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 487 (17), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 487 (18), the left decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 487 (19), the right decorative symbol 41, "4," temporarily stops, and the sixth stop action is performed. At this time, seventh stop emphasis images 602 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fourth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 487 (20), a seventh reach effect is performed, a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, a reach emphasis image 541, and a seventh reach emphasis image 548 are displayed, and a seventh reach action is performed. In the seventh reach effect, the effects described using Fig. 396 (2) to (6) are performed. In addition, a second reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 487 (21), in the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, the character portion is erased to reduce the decorativeness, and the action is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the stage image 61, the reserved image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are not displayed. Also, a first action emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 487 (22), each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display section 114. Also, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 552 is displayed. Also, the first motion emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 487 (23), a development provocation effect is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 41, "5," the development image 584, and the first development provocation emphasis image 585 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 584 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. In addition, the first development provocation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 487 (24), the "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the development image 584 stops. Also, the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) starts, and as shown in FIG. 488 (25), the middle movable role 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role emphasis sound is output.

Next, the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the start suggestion effect of the second mode is started, and as shown in FIG. 488 (26), the SPSP start image 556 and the second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using FIG. 406 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the second start emphasis sound is output.
Next, the second mode of in-play suggestion effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 488 (27), the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-play highlight image 563 are displayed. In the second mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effects described using FIG. 411 (1) to (5) are performed. In addition, the second in-play highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 488 (28), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 488 (29). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 356 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 488 (30). Also, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 488 (31), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIGS. 416 (2) to (8) and 417 (9) to (16) are executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 488 (32), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 489 (33), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 489 (34), a promotion promotion effect is executed and a promotion promotion highlight image 592 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 489 (35), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 489 (36). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in Fig. 489 (37). Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 489 (38), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed again. At this time, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in an operational manner so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 489 (39), the decorative symbols 41 of the triplet are displayed in a shrinking manner, so that the display areas of the three decorative symbols 41 are all the same size. A first doublet emphasis image 591 is also displayed. A first doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Then, as shown in Figure 489 (40), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 490 (41), a first right hit notification is made and a first right hit image 503 is displayed. Also, a jackpot start image 593 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 490 (42), a second right hit notification is made and a second right hit image 507 is displayed.

Next, the big win game starts, and as shown in FIG. 490 (43), a round number image 594 and a round in progress image 595 are displayed.
Next, the big win game ends, and a time-saving start image 596 is displayed as shown in FIG. 490 (44).
Next, in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 490 (45), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped as a sequence of numbers "444," similar to the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, which is the presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. The reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121 displays "1." Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. The stage notification image 501 and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 are also displayed. In the illustrated example, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Ocean," and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game 504 displays the text "100 more."

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the emphasis performance common to the first and second stages, emphasizing that the button image 509 is displayed before the button image 509 is actually displayed (see Figure 451 (29) and Figure 488 (28)).
Therefore, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make the player more aware that the button effect will start when the highlight effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the button effect even before the button effect starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the operation display of the button emphasis unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the operation display of the emphasized character 509d). The performance control unit 300 can make the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance common to both the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 451 (30), FIG. 488 (29), and FIG. 356 (3) to (8)).
In this case, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make the player more aware that a button effect is being executed, and to further encourage the player to operate the effect button 161.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make either the execution mode of the first change performance or the execution mode of the second change performance common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the other different.

In addition, in the first and second stages, the performance control unit 300 keeps the operation mode (operation speed, position reached by operation, etc.) of the movable role object 115 in the role object performance before the reach performance begins the same, but differs the display mode (operation display mode) of the highlighted image (see Figure 448 (3) and Figure 485 (3)).
Therefore, even when a reel performance with a common operating pattern is executed, it is possible to diversify the ways in which attention is drawn to the movable reel 115.

In Variation Presentation Example 23, the second zone presentation is executed, but this is not limited to this. In Variation Presentation Example 23, the first zone presentation (see Figure 388) may also be executed, as in the first stage.

491 and 492 are diagrams showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in the variation presentation example 23. In the following example, in the variation presentation example 23, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution conditions for the first left-hand hit notification are met, and the first left-hand hit notification is executed. Then, the execution conditions for the second left-hand hit notification are met, and the second left-hand hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 491 (1), when the second start action is executed and the second start emphasis image 611 is displayed (see FIG. 485 (2)), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hand hit sound is output. The second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the second start emphasis image 611, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. Furthermore, the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the second start emphasis image 611, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in Figure 491 (2), when the third reel effect is performed and the reel second emphasis image 555 is displayed (see Figure 485 (3)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the reel second emphasis image 555 and is displayed on a layer in front of the reel second emphasis image 555.
Next, as shown in Figure 491 (3), when the first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed (see Figure 485 (6)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 491 (4), when the 15th button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 485 (7)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 491 (5), when the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 is displayed (see Fig. 485 (8)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525 and is displayed in a layer in front of the thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525.

Next, as shown in Figure 491 (6), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 and the pseudo-continuous highlight image 582 are displayed (see Figure 486 (9)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 491 (7), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 is enlarged and displayed (see Figure 486 (10)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 491 (8), when the re-change notification image 583 is displayed (see Figure 486 (11)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 492 (9), when the pseudo-continuous image 581 and the pseudo-continuous highlight image 582 are displayed (see Figure 486 (14)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 492 (10), when the pseudo-consecutive image 581 is enlarged (see Figure 486 (15)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 492 (11), when the re-change notification image 583 is displayed (see Figure 486 (16)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 492 (12), when the seventh stop emphasis image 602 is displayed (see Fig. 487 (18)), the second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed. The second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the seventh stop emphasis image 602, in a layer in front of the seventh stop emphasis image 602.
Next, as shown in Fig. 492 (13), when the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and seventh reach eye emphasis image 548 are displayed (see Fig. 487 (20)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed. The second left hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548, and is displayed in a layer in front of the seventh reach eye emphasis image 548.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 454 (8) and Figure 455 (9) to (16) are performed.

As described above, when the second left hit notification is executed in variable performance example 23, each of the performance sounds described in variable performance example 23 is restricted while the second left hit notification is being executed.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 23, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 23 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

(Variation example 24)
493 and 494-1 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 24) will be described with reference to Figures 493 and 494-1. Variable presentation example 24 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 24 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EA7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Figure 327. Also, variation presentation example 24 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AA7" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 325. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AA7" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 325 is the variation presentation shown in Figures 479 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 485 (1) to (8), 486 (9) to (16), and 487 (17) to (24) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 493 (1), the development effect (second reel effect) begins, and the middle movable reel 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. In addition, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. In addition, a second reel emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 493 (2), the start suggestion effect of the third mode is performed, and the SPSP start image 556 is displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the third mode, the effect described using FIG. 407 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, a third start emphasis sound, which is an effect sound that emphasizes the start suggestion effect of the third mode, is output. The output time of the third start emphasis sound is 2.3 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 493 (3), the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 is displayed. In the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode, the effect described using FIG. 412 (1) to (7) is performed. In addition, a third in-execution emphasis sound, which is an effect sound that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect of the third mode, is output. The output time of the third in-execution emphasis sound is 0.85 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 493 (4), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 367 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 16th button effect is started, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 493 (5). In the 16th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 367 (3) to (8) and Fig. 368 (9). In addition, a 4th button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the 16th button effect, a 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 493 (6). The 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A 14th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 14th post-operation emphasis image 526, is output. The 14th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 14th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.4 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 493 (7), the third jackpot effect is executed. In the third jackpot effect, a third jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration effect is executed, the right movable role element 115C moves to a position overlapping the display area of the image display unit 114, and the right movable role element 115C, effect button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light. Additionally, a third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed. The third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. Additionally, the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. In addition, in the third jackpot effect, the effects described using FIGS. 421 (2) through (8) and 422 (9) through (16) are executed. Furthermore, when the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the third jackpot emphasis image 568.

Next, as shown in FIG. 493 (8), the decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the display areas of the decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in an enlarged manner so that they are all the same size. However, a portion of the left decorative symbol 41 is made difficult or impossible to see by the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43.
Next, as shown in FIG. 494-1 (9), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 2.5 seconds. However, the motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Furthermore, a third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The display time of the third doublet emphasis image 614 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the third doublet emphasis image 614 may be any time. Furthermore, a third doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third doublet emphasis image 614 is displayed, is output. The third doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. The output time of the third doublet emphasis sound is 1.35 seconds.
Then, as shown in FIG. 494-1 (10), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "444" stop.
Although not shown in the figure, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed after this.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of the operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the operation display of the button emphasis unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the operation display of the emphasized character 509d). The performance control unit 300 can make the execution mode of the first change performance and the execution mode of the second change performance different in the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 457(3), FIG. 362(2) to (8), FIG. 493(5), and FIG. 367(3) to (8)).
In this case, it is possible to increase the uniqueness of how the player focuses on the button image 509 depending on the stage.

In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make either the execution mode of the first change performance or the execution mode of the second change performance common to the first stage and the second stage, and make the other different.
In particular, the performance control unit 300 may make the execution time of the change performance the same in the first stage and the second stage, but vary either the cycle of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the cycle of the change performance the same in the first stage and the second stage, but vary either the execution time of the change performance or the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance. Also, the performance control unit 300 may make the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance the same in the first stage and the second stage, but vary either the cycle of the change performance or the execution time of the change performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) the same in the first stage and the second stage, but may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance different.
In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 may make at least one of the execution time of the change performance, the period of the change performance, and the display mode (operation display mode) of the change performance common to the first stage and the second stage, and may make the operation effective period of the button performance (execution time of the button performance, display time of the button unit 509a) different.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances (temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, pseudo consecutive performance, etc.) in variable performances, and that it is possible to make the button performances performed before the start of the specific performances different in the first and second stages (see Figures 448 (8) and 485 (7)), and to make the button performances performed after the start of the specific performances different (see Figures 451 (30) and 493 (5)).
Here, the performance control unit 300 may make the button performance performed before the start of the specific performance common to the first and second stages (for example, a sixth button performance is performed in both), and may make the button performance performed after the start of the specific performance different (an eighth button performance (see Figure 451 (30)) is performed in the first stage, and a sixteenth button performance (see Figure 493 (5)) is performed in the second stage).
In this case, in the first half of the variable presentation, the player will recognize that a common button presentation will be performed regardless of the stage, while in the second half of the variable presentation, different button presentations will be performed depending on the stage, giving the player a sense of surprise in the presentation.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 24, the same SP reach presentation as in the first stage is executed (see Figures 450 (23), (24), and 451 (25)), but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 24, an SP reach performance unique to the second stage (see Figures 477 (2) to (4)) may be executed.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot game is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effect, accessory effect, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable accessory 115. The effect control unit 300 can either use the same effect pattern for the predetermined emphasis effect in the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 451 (32) and FIG. 488 (31)), or use different effect patterns for the predetermined emphasis effect (see FIG. 493 (7)).
In this case, depending on the variable effect being executed, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed by executing an emphasis effect regardless of the stage, and making the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the stage.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot game is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effect, accessory effect, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable accessory 115. The effect control unit 300 can either make the execution time of the predetermined emphasis effect the same in the first stage and the second stage (see FIG. 451 (32) and FIG. 488 (31)), or make the execution time of the predetermined emphasis effect different (see FIG. 493 (7) and FIG. 427).
In this case, depending on the variable effect being executed, it is possible to switch between making it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed by executing an emphasis effect regardless of the stage, and making the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first stage and the second stage, the form of the predetermined emphasis effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed may be the same (see Figure 451 (32), Figure 488 (31)), or may be different (see Figure 493 (7)).
Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a big win game will be played by executing the highlighting effect regardless of the stage, and to make the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a big win game will be played depending on the stage.

In this embodiment, when a button effect (e.g., the 9th button effect, the 16th button effect) in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same color (e.g., red) is executed in the first and second stages, the same premonition emphasis image (the third premonition emphasis image 518) is displayed (see Figure 456 (2) and Figure 493 (4)), but this is not limited to this.
In the first and second stages, when a button effect is executed in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same color, different precursor emphasis images may be displayed (different operational display modes of the precursor emphasis images, different display times of the precursor emphasis images).

494-2 is a diagram showing an example in which the second left-hit image 48 is displayed in the variation presentation example 24. In the following example, in the variation presentation example 24, the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111, and the game ball continuously passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111.
In this example, first, the execution condition for the first left-handed hit notification is met, and the first left-handed hit notification is executed. After that, the execution condition for the second left-handed hit notification is met, and the second left-handed hit notification is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 494-2(1), when the development emphasis image 554 is displayed (see FIG. 493(1)), the second left-handed hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-handed hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 494-2 (2), when the third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed (see Figure 493 (4)), the second left hit image 48 is displayed and the second left hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 494-2 (3), when the 16th button effect starts and the button image 509 is displayed (see Figure 493 (5)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 494-2 (4), when the 14th post-operation emphasis image 526 is displayed (see Figure 493 (6)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 494-2 (5), when the third jackpot effect is executed and the third jackpot emphasis image 568 is displayed (see Fig. 493 (7)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the third jackpot emphasis image 568 and is displayed in a layer in front of the third jackpot emphasis image 568.
Next, as shown in Figure 494-2 (6), when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion (see Figure 493 (8)), a second left-hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hit sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 494-2(7), when the action display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the third doublet emphasis image 614 are displayed (see Fig. 494-1(9)), the second left-hit image 48 is displayed and the second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 is in an area that overlaps with the display area of the third doublet emphasis image 614 and is displayed in a layer in front of the third doublet emphasis image 614.
Although not shown in the figure, after this, when the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are fixed and stopped along with the stopped display of the special pattern, the second left-hit image 48 is no longer displayed and the output of the second left-hit sound ends.

As described above, when the second left hit notification is executed in variable performance example 24, each of the performance sounds described in variable performance example 24 is restricted while the second left hit notification is being executed.
In addition, when the first left-hit notification is executed in variable presentation example 24, each of the presentation sounds described in variable presentation example 24 is output even while the first left-hit notification is being executed.

(Variation example 25)
Figures 495 to 497 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 25) will be described with reference to Figures 495 to 497. Variable presentation example 25 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state.
Note that variation presentation example 25 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Figure 327. Also, variation presentation example 25 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AB3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 325. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AB3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 325 is the variation presentation shown in Figures 479 (1) to (5).
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Fig. 495(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "331," in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 495 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. A second start operation is also performed. A second start emphasis image 611 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. A second start emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 495(3), a change effect is executed, and the display color of the variable image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. Also, a first rainbow emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 495 (4), the "7" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and a seventh stop action is performed. In addition, eighth stop emphasis images 603 are displayed on the left and right of the left decorative symbol 41. In addition, a fifth stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the stop emphasis image is displayed, is output. The fifth stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the "7" which is the left and right decorative symbol 41 in the second stage. The output time of the fifth stop emphasis sound is 0.6 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 495(5), the right decorative symbol 41, "7," temporarily stops, and the seventh stop action is performed. Also, eighth stop emphasis images 603 are displayed on the left and right of the right decorative symbol 41. Also, a fifth stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 495 (6), the fourth reach effect is executed, and a reach line image 539, a reach suggestion image 540, and a fourth reach highlight image 545 are displayed. Also, a fourth reach action is performed. In the fourth reach effect, the effects described using Fig. 393 (2) to (5) are executed. Also, a third reach highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 495(7), a first precursor emphasis image 508 is displayed. Also, a first precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the first button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 495 (8). In the first button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Fig. 346 (2) to (8). In addition, a first button emphasis sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the first button effect, a first post-operation emphasis image 510 is displayed as shown in Fig. 496 (9). Also, a first post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 496 (10), the development image 584 stops, and the first development emphasis sound is output.
Next, the development effect (second role effect) is started, and as shown in FIG. 496 (11), the middle movable role effect 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. Also, the development emphasis image 554 is displayed. In the development effect (second role effect), the effect described using FIGS. 401 (1) to (8) and 402 (9) to (11) is performed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. Also, the second role effect emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 496 (12), the start suggestion effect of the second mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a second start emphasis image 558 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the second mode, the effect described using Fig. 406 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a second start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 496 (13), the second mode of in-play suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the second in-play emphasis image 563 are displayed. In the second mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effect described using Fig. 411 (1) to (5) is performed. In addition, the second in-play emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 496 (14), a third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed. The third precursor emphasis image 518 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figures 356 (1) and (2). In addition, a third precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 496 (15). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Fig. 356 (3) to (8). In addition, the third button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the eighth button effect, an eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed as shown in Fig. 496 (16). Also, an eighth post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 497 (17), the first jackpot presentation is executed. In the first jackpot presentation, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the center movable role element 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable role element 115B, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed. In the first jackpot presentation, the presentations described using FIGS. 416 (2) to (8) and 417 (9) to (16) are executed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 497 (18), the decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the display areas of the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner so that they are all the same size. The display size of the decorative symbols 41 at this time is the same as that shown in Fig. 493 (8).
Next, as shown in Fig. 497 (19), the doublet decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed so as to be further enlarged. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to have the same display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 497 (20), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 3.5 seconds. However, the motion display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Furthermore, a fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbols 41, the volume image 42, and the light intensity image 43. Furthermore, the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbols 41 and behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. Furthermore, the display time of the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is 1.5 seconds. However, the display time of the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 may be any time. Furthermore, a fourth doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth doublet emphasis image 615 is displayed, is output. The fourth doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes "777", which is the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the second stage. The output time of the fourth doublet emphasis sound is 1.45 seconds.
Then, with the special symbol being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped.
Although not shown in the figures, the same effects as those shown in Figures 453 (42) to (46) are performed after this, except that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are "777".

In addition, in the variable presentation example 25, the SPSP reach presentation similar to that in the first stage is executed (see Figures 450 (23), (24), and 451 (25)), but is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 25, an SPSP reach performance (see Figures 477 (2) to (4)) unique to the second stage may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 is different in the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 428 (1) and Figure 467 (1)), but this is not limited to this.
In the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same. In this case, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the stop emphasis image displayed may be different. Also, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop emphasis image displayed may be the same, but the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. Also, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, both the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the stop emphasis image displayed may be different.
Furthermore, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the displayed stop emphasis image may be the same. In this case, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. In the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. In addition, in the first stage and the second stage, when the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different.
Furthermore, in the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same. In this case, in the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the displayed stop emphasis image may be the same, but the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different. In the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same, but the displayed stop emphasis image may be different. In addition, in the first stage and the second stage, if the decorative pattern 41 has the same character, the displayed stop emphasis image and the display mode of the character of the decorative pattern 41 may be different.

Furthermore, in the variable effect, a stage change may be executed, such as transitioning from the first stage to the second stage, or from the second stage to the first stage. However, even if a stage change is executed, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed does not change. On the other hand, if the background of the stage image 61 changes when a zone effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may increase. In other words, the expectation may be higher when a zone effect is executed than when a stage change is executed.

(Variation example 26)
Next, referring to Fig. 498, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 26) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 26 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the reserved number for winning into the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "1".
In addition, the variable performance example 26 is a variable performance that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 328.
In addition, each of the change presentation examples from change presentation example 26 to change presentation example 33 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the third stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 498 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect control unit 300, a less decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 also displays a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a number of reserved symbols 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, a remaining number of times for time-saving play 504, and a first right-hit image 503. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, with the text "Ocean" displayed on the stage notification image 501 and the text "90 more" displayed on the remaining number of times for time-saving play 504. The third stage is a presentation mode in the special time-saving play state. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the first right-hit notification is executed in the manner described using Figures 343 (1) to (3).

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 498 (2), the special symbol starts to change and the change effect starts. At this time, the change image 51 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. In addition, the remaining number of times for the time reduction 504 is updated to "89 more."
Next, as shown in FIG. 498 (3), the three decorative symbols 41, "412," temporarily stop, and a tenth stop-time action is performed, which is the action performed when the decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop. The tenth stop-time action is performed when the decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop regardless of the number of the decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The tenth stop-time action is also a bouncing action of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, a thirteenth stop-time emphasis image 616 is displayed below each of the three decorative symbols 41. The execution time of the tenth stop-time action and the display time of the thirteenth stop-time emphasis image 616 are 0.1 seconds. However, the execution time of the tenth stop-time action and the display time of the thirteenth stop-time emphasis image 616 may be different or may be any time. A sixth stop-time emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the stop-time emphasis image, is output. The sixth stop-time emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The output time of the sixth stop-time emphasis sound is 0.1 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 498 (4), with the special symbol stopping, three decorative symbols 41 and a small symbol 56, "412," stop. Furthermore, with the end of the variable effect, the variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

It has been explained that the variation effect example 26 is a variation effect based on the hold of the second starting port 122 being "1".
Here, even if the change presentation is based on the reserved number "4" in the second start port 122, a presentation common to the change presentation example 26 may be executed. That is, in both the change presentation based on the reserved number "1" in the second start port 122 and the change presentation based on the reserved number "4" in the second start port 122, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed together.

(Variation example 27)
Figure 499 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 499. Variable effect example 27 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on winning into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.
Incidentally, variation presentation example 27 is a variation presentation that is executed when "AH8" is selected as the "pre-determined presentation pattern" in Fig. 326 and "EH2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Fig. 328. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 499(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "623" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 499 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 is updated to "1." Also, the remaining time-saving number image 504 is updated to "81 remaining."

Next, when a game ball enters the second start slot 122, as shown in Figure 499 (3), the second reserved image 52 is displayed and the reserved number display 55 for the second start slot 122 is updated to "2." At this time, a change effect is executed, and the first reserved image 52 changes from its normal display state to blue. A second blue emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the reserved image 52 has changed to blue, is also output. The second blue emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the blue reserved image 52 (variable image 51) in the special time-saving game state. The output time of the second blue emphasis sound is 0.8 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 499 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. A third chance eye emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed, is output. The third chance eye emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the chance eye decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The output time of the third chance eye emphasis sound is 0.5 seconds.
Next, as shown in Figure 499 (5), as the special pattern stops varying, three rows of decorative patterns 41 and small patterns 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
The chance eye effect in the variation effect example 27 is an example of a pre-determination effect. This pre-determination effect is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

(Variation example 28)
Figures 500 and 501 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 28) will be described with reference to Figures 500 and 501. Variable presentation example 28 is a variable presentation based on winning the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. Also, variable presentation example 28 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 27. In other words, variable presentation example 28 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 499 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 27.
500 and 501 are the variation effects that are executed when "EH8" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 328. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 500(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "331," in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 500(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction 504 is updated to "80 more."

Next, as shown in Figure 500 (3), a second reach promotion effect is performed. In the second reach promotion effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they are swaying up and down, and a second reach promotion emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative symbols 41. The second reach promotion emphasis image 617 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. In addition, a second reach promotion emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the second reach promotion emphasis image 617 is displayed, is output. The second reach promotion emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the left and right decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. The output time of the second reach promotion emphasis sound is 3.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 500 (4), an eighth reach effect is performed, an eighth reach emphasis image 549 is displayed, and an eighth reach action is performed. The eighth reach emphasis image 549 is an area that overlaps with the display areas of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In addition, in the eighth reach effect, the effect described using FIG. 397 (2) to (5) is performed. In addition, a fourth reach emphasis sound, which is a sound effect for the eighth reach effect, is output. The fourth reach emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the fourth reach emphasis sound is 1.25 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 500(5), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of times for time reduction image 504 are hidden. The first transition image 618 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The first transition image 618 is also displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in FIG. 500(6), a fourth mode of start suggestion effect is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the fourth mode of start suggestion effect, the effect described using FIG. 408(1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third start emphasis image 559 is displayed, is output. The fourth start emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the fourth start emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 500 (7), a fourth type of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a third in-execution highlight image 564 are displayed. In the fourth type of in-execution suggestion effect, the effect described using FIG. 413 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a fourth in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the third in-execution highlight image 564 is displayed, is output. The fourth in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the fourth in-execution highlight sound is 0.75 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 500 (8), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 369 (1) and (2). A fourth precursor emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the fourth precursor emphasis image 527, is output. The fourth precursor emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect emphasizing the display of the button image 509. The output time of the fourth precursor emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds.
Next, the 17th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in FIG. 501 (9). In the 17th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 369 (3) to (8). In addition, a 6th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The 6th button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 6th button emphasis sound is 0.8 seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 17th button effect, a 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 501 (10). The 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, number of reserved balls display 55, and small pattern 56. The 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is also drawn on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 433 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, number of reserved balls display 55, and small pattern 56. A 15th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed, is also output. The 15th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound in response to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 15th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 501 (11), an eleventh button post image 619 is displayed. Also, a seventh button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the eleventh button post image 619 is displayed. The output time of the seventh button post emphasis sound is 1.4 seconds.
Next, the first transitional image 618 is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 501(12).
Next, as shown in FIG. 501 (13), the three decorative symbols 41, "454," temporarily stop. Also, the stage notification image 501 and the remaining time-reduction number image 504 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 501 (14), as the special pattern stops changing, three rows of decorative patterns 41 and small patterns 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

In the variable performance example 28, a common first transition image 618 is displayed before the start of the SPSP reach performance and after the execution of the SPSP reach performance, but this is not limited to this.
In the third stage, the display mode of the first transition image 618 may be different before the start of the SPSP reach performance and after the SPSP reach performance is executed.

(Variation example 29)
502 and 503 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 29) will be described with reference to FIGS. 502 and 503. Variable presentation example 29 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state. Also, variable presentation example 29 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 326. Also, the variable presentation executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 326 is the variable presentation shown in FIGS. 499 (1) to (5). Also, variable presentation example 29 is a variable presentation executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in FIG. 328. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly described, and explanations of similarities with the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 502 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 502(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction 504 is updated to "80 more."
Furthermore, a change effect is executed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from blue to green. A second green emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the green changing image 51 is displayed, is output. The second green emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) for which a change effect has been executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The output time of the second green emphasis sound is 1.75 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 502 (3), a second reach stimulation effect is performed. In the second reach stimulation effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up and down swinging motion, and a second reach stimulation emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative symbols 41. In addition, a second reach stimulation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 502 (4), an eighth reach effect is performed, an eighth reach emphasis image 549 is displayed, and an eighth reach action is performed. In the eighth reach effect, the effects described using Fig. 397 (2) to (5) are performed. In addition, a fourth reach emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 502 (5), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of time-saving times image 504 are hidden.

Next, as shown in Fig. 502 (6), the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effect described using Fig. 408 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 502 (7), a fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and an SPSP suggestion image 561 and a fourth in-execution highlight image 565 are displayed. In the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect, the effect described using FIGS. 414 (1) to (4) is performed. In addition, a fifth in-execution highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 is displayed, is output. The fifth in-execution highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the in-execution suggestion effect. The output time of the fifth in-execution highlight sound is 0.95 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 502 (8), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 369 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 18th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 503 (9). In the 18th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 369 (3) to (8). In addition, the 6th button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the 18th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 503 (10). The 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. The 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, hold number display 55, and small pattern 56. A 16th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 16th post-operation emphasis image 529, is output. The 16th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 16th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 503 (11), a fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable role objects 115, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow-colored light, and a fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. The fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed in an area overlapping with the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. Furthermore, the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, reserved number display 55, and small symbol 56. In addition, the fourth jackpot presentation is the presentation described using Figures 423 (2) to (8) and 424 (9) to (16). Furthermore, when the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the fourth jackpot highlight image 569.

Next, as shown in FIG. 503 (12), the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers "444" is displayed so as to move from the top to the center of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 503 (13), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to expand. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 503 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a shrinking motion. The display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is 2 seconds. However, the display time of the doublet decorative symbols 41 may be any time. Furthermore, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbols 56. The display time of the fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is 1 second. However, the display time of the fifth doublet emphasis image 620 may be any time. Furthermore, a fifth doublet emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed, is output. The fifth doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 in the third stage. The output time of the fifth doublet emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds.
Next, as shown in Figure 503 (15), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot game is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effect, accessory effect, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable accessory 115. The effect control unit 300 can make the effect mode of the predetermined emphasis effect the same in the first and second stages (see FIG. 451 (32) and FIG. 488 (31)), and can make the effect mode of the predetermined emphasis effect different in the first and third stages (see FIG. 503 (11)).
In this case, in the normal game state, the emphasis effect is executed regardless of the stage, making it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot game is about to be played. Also, depending on the different game states, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game is about to be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a button effect (e.g., the 8th button effect, the 18th button effect) in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same color (e.g., white) is executed in the first and third stages, the effect control section 300 can change the execution mode of the highlighting effect that emphasizes the display of the button image 509 (see Figure 451 (29), Figure 503 (9)).
Therefore, even if the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is the same depending on the stage, different button effects are performed, allowing the player to feel the diversity of the effects.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change performance includes a first change performance (for example, the display color of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change performance (for example, the action display of the highlighted character 509d). When a button performance is executed in the first stage and the third stage, the performance control unit 300 can make the mode of the first change performance the same (see FIGS. 451 (29) and 503 (9)) and make the mode of the second change performance different (see FIGS. 356 (3) to (8) and 369 (3) to (8)).
Therefore, even if the first change effect is the same depending on the stage, different button effects are performed, allowing the player to feel the diversity of the effects.

The performance control unit 300 may change the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance in the first stage and the third stage. The performance control unit 300 may also make the performance mode of the first change performance and the performance mode of the second change performance the same in the first stage and the third stage. The performance mode of the change performance may be any (or all) of the execution time of the change performance, the cycle of the change performance, and the display mode (action display mode) of the change performance.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the presentation button 161 and can execute a change presentation that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The change presentation includes a first change presentation (e.g., the operation display of the button highlighting unit 509c) and a second change presentation (e.g., the operation display of the highlighted character 509d). The presentation control unit 300 can also vary the execution time of the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the first and third stages (see FIGS. 451 (30), 503 (9), and 387). Therefore, the player can be encouraged to operate the presentation button 161 in a manner appropriate to the stage.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first change presentation in the third stage different from the execution time of the second change presentation, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first change presentation and the second change presentation in the third stage compared to when the execution time of the first change presentation and the execution time of the second change presentation are the same.

The performance control unit 300 can also execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the role effect, and the emphasis effect includes a first emphasis effect (e.g., the light emission of the movable role object 115) and a second emphasis effect (e.g., the display of a role object emphasis image, the display of a jackpot emphasis image). The performance control unit 300 can also vary the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect in the first stage and the third stage (see FIG. 451 (32), FIG. 503 (3), FIG. 427). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the movable role object 115 in a manner appropriate to the stage.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect in the third stage different, which makes it easier for the player to recognize both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect in the third stage compared to when the execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special device effect is being executed in a jackpot effect (see Figure 503 (11)), the effect control unit 300 restricts visibility of the decorative pattern 41, but displays the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 in a manner that allows at least a portion of them to be visible to the player.
Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the big win effect than to the decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, even during the execution of the big win effect, if the effect key 162 is operated by the player, at least a part of the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43 can be made visible to the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling uneasy that the operation of the effect key 162 by the player is not being reflected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can change the display mode (operation display mode) of the jackpot highlight image in the first stage and the third stage (see Figure 451 (32) and Figure 503 (11)).
Therefore, the player can be made to feel the variety of ways in which he or she is made to recognize that a big win game is being executed, depending on the stage in which the game state is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the highlighting performance aspect (light-emitting aspect of the performance button 161) of the performance button 161 when a vibration performance is being executed the same in the first stage and the second stage (see Figures 451 (32) and 488 (31)), and can make the highlighting performance aspect of the performance button 161 when a vibration performance is being executed different in the first stage and the third stage (see Figure 503 (11)).
Therefore, in stages where the game state is the same, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that a jackpot game is being executed. Also, it is possible to make the player feel the variety of ways of making the player recognize that a jackpot game is being executed according to stages where the game state is different.

(Variation example 30)
Figure 504 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 504. Variable effect example 30 is an example of a jackpot variable effect based on winning into the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.
Variation presentation example 30 is an example of a variation presentation that is executed after the variation presentation that is executed when "AF2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 326. Also, the variation presentation that is executed when "AF2" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in Figure 326 is the variation presentation shown in Figures 499 (1) to (5). Also, variation presentation example 30 is a variation presentation that is executed when "EF2" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in Figure 328. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the respective variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 502 (1) to (6) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 504 (1), the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the fourth in-execution highlight image 565 are displayed. In the fifth mode of in-execution suggestion effect, the effects described using Fig. 414 (1) to (4) are performed. In addition, a fifth in-execution highlight sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 504 (2), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 369 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.

Next, a 19th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 504 (3). In the 19th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 372 (3) to (8). In addition, a 7th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The 7th button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 7th button emphasis sound is 1 second.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 19th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed as shown in FIG. 504 (4). In addition, a 16th post-operation emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 504 (5), the fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable parts 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable parts 115, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow colors, and the fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figures 423 (2) to (8) and Figures 424 (9) to (16) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 504(6), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet "444" is displayed so as to move from the top to the center of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 504 (7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to expand. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 504 (8), the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 503 (15) and Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed.

(Variation example 31)
Figures 505 and 506 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 31) will be described with reference to Figures 505 and 506. Variable effect example 31 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
In addition, the variation performance example 31 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH6" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Figure 328. In addition, the variation performance example 31 is an example of a variation performance that is executed after the variation performance shown in the variation performance example 27.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 500 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 505 (1), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the pending image 52, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of times for time reduction image 504 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 505 (2), a start suggestion effect of the fifth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a fourth start emphasis image 560 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the effect described using FIG. 409 (1) to (4) is performed. In addition, a fifth start emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fourth start emphasis image 560 is displayed, is output. The fifth start emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the start suggestion effect. The output time of the fifth start emphasis sound is 0.9 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 505 (3), a fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed. The fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed in an operational manner as shown in Figures 375 (1) and (2). A fifth premonition emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the fifth premonition emphasis image 530 is displayed, is output. The fifth premonition emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect emphasizing the display of the button image 509. The output time of the fifth premonition emphasis sound is 0.8 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 505 (4), the 20th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 and the second operation highlight image 531 are displayed. The second operation highlight image 531 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small pattern 56. The second operation highlight image 531 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved items displayed 55, and the small pattern 56. Note that the 20th button effect is performed as described using FIG. 375 (3) to (8), FIG. 376 (9) to (16), and FIG. 377 (17) to (24). The 8th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the button image 509, is output. The 8th button emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 8th button emphasis sound is 0.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 505 (5), a 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is also drawn on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 433 (2)) in the image display unit 114. That is, the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the first right-hit image 503, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A 17th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 17th post-operation emphasis image 532, is output. The 17th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 17th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 505(6), a 12th button post image 621 is displayed. In addition, a 7th button post emphasis sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the 12th button post image 621 is displayed. The output time of the 7th button post emphasis sound is 1.2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 505(7), a first transitional image 618 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 505(8), the three decorative symbols 41, "454," temporarily stop. Also, the stage notification image 501 and the remaining time-reduction number image 504 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 506 (9), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 32)
Figure 507 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 32) will be described with reference to FIG. 507. Variable presentation example 32 is an example of a jackpot variable presentation based on winning into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state. Variable presentation example 30 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation executed when "AF3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 326. Furthermore, the variable presentation executed when "AF3" is selected as the "pre-determination presentation pattern" in FIG. 326 is the variable presentation shown in FIGS. 499 (1) to (5). Furthermore, variable presentation example 32 is a variable presentation executed when "EF3" is selected as the "variable presentation pattern" in FIG. 328. Furthermore, the following explanation will mainly focus on the differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples, and may omit explanations of the similarities with the variable presentation examples.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 500 (1) to (4) and Figure 505 (1) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 507 (1), the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode is performed, and the SPSP start image 556 and the fourth start emphasis image 560 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fifth mode, the effects described using Figures 409 (1) to (4) are performed. In addition, the fifth start emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 507(2), a fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed. The fifth precursor emphasis image 530 is displayed in an operational manner as shown in Fig. 379(1) and (2). In addition, a fifth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 507(3), the 21st button effect is performed, and the button image 509 and the second operation highlight image 531 are displayed. Note that the 21st button effect is performed as described using Figs. 379(3) to (8), 380(9) to (16), and 381(17) to (24). Also, the 8th button highlight sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 507 (4), an 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed. The 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, pending number display 55, and small pattern 56. The 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, pending number display 55, and small pattern 56. An 18th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the 18th post-operation emphasis image 533 is displayed, is output. The 18th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered an emphasis sound in response to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 18th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.15 seconds.

Next, as shown in Fig. 507 (5), a fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable role objects 115, the presentation button 161, and the lamp L emit light in rainbow colors, and a fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figs. 423 (2) to (8) and Fig. 424 (9) to (16) is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 503 (12) to (15) and Figures 453 (42) to (46) are performed.

(Variation example 33)
Figure 508 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, referring to Fig. 508, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 33) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 33 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the number of reserved prizes for the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "2".
In the variation performance example 33, two variation performances are performed. The first of the two variation performances is a variation performance that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 328. The second of the two variation performances is a variation performance that is executed when "EH9" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in FIG. 328.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Fig. 508(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the less decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The remaining time-saving number image 504 displays the text "1 left." Two reserved images 52 are also displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "2."
Next, as shown in FIG. 508(2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change as the special symbol changes. The remaining time-saving number image 504 is updated to "0 remaining." The reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "1."

Next, as shown in FIG. 508(3), the three decorative symbols 41, "412," are temporarily stopped, and the tenth stop action is performed. In addition, a thirteenth stop emphasis image 616 is displayed below each of the three decorative symbols 41. In addition, a sixth stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 508(4), with the stop display of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 41 and the small symbol 56, "412", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the change effect, the change image 51 is no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 508 (5), the second transition image 622 and result image 623 are displayed. The second transition image 622 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, reserved image 52, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, first right-hit image 503, reserved number display 55, and small pattern 56. Furthermore, the second transition image 622 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, reserved image 52, and first right-hit image 503, and in a layer behind the volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in FIG. 508(6), as the next special symbol begins to change, the small symbol 56 also begins to change. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0."
Next, as shown in FIG. 508(7), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 "623" is fixed and stopped.

Next, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, and as shown in FIG. 508 (8), the decorative symbol 41, stage image 61, stage notification image 501, and variable number image 502 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Space," and the variable number image 502 displays the text "101 Games." Furthermore, a second left-hit notification is executed, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed, and a second left-hit sound is output. The second left-hit image 48 performs the effects described using FIGS. 340 (7), (8), and 341 (9) to (12). The decorative symbol 41 is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the second left-hit image 48.
Furthermore, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the variation start is executed with the second left hit notification being executed. In this case, emphasis effects such as the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image are executed, but since the second left hit image 48 is displayed on a layer in front of the emphasis effects, the emphasis effects become difficult or impossible to see.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a right-hit notification is made, the sound associated with the right-hit notification may not be output (see FIG. 453 (42)). On the other hand, when a left-hit notification is made, the sound associated with the left-hit notification is always output (see FIG. 340 (2), FIG. 454 (1), FIG. 508 (8)).
Therefore, the player can be made aware that a left-hit notification is more of a warning than a right-hit notification.

In this embodiment, the first right-hit image 503 is not displayed when the second transition image 622 and the result image 623 are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the second transition image 622 and the result image 623 are displayed, the first right-hit image 503 continues to be displayed, and the first right-hit image 503 may become invisible as the stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage is displayed.

In addition, in the variable presentation example 33, when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, the second left-hit notification is executed, but this is not limited to this.
When the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state, the first left-hand hit notification may be executed.

(Variation example 34)
Next, referring to Fig. 509, a specific description will be given of the variable effect (variable effect example 34) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. Variable effect example 34 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the second start port 122 in a special time-saving gaming state. Also, variable effect example 34 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for entry into the second start port 122 being "1". Also, variable effect example 34 is a variable effect that is executed when "EH10" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Fig. 328.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 34 to change presentation example 38 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the fourth stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 509 (1), when the effect control unit 300 freezes and displays the previous special symbol, a less decorative symbol 41 is frozen in place on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, a number of reserved symbols 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, a remaining number of times for time-saving play 504, and a first right-hit image 503. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, with the stage notification image 501 displaying the text "Grassland," and the remaining number of times for time-saving play 504 displaying the text "100 more." The fourth stage is a presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a smaller size than in the third stage (see Figure 498 (1)). Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, in the first right-hit image 503, the effects described using Figures 343 (1) to (3) are performed.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 509(2), the special symbol starts to change and the change effect starts. At this time, neither the change image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. In addition, the remaining number of times for the time-saving mode image 504 is updated to "99 more."
Next, as shown in FIG. 509(3), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412," are fixed and stopped. In addition, both the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, a game ball enters the second start hole 122, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start hole 122 is updated to "1."

Next, as shown in FIG. 509(4), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0." Also, the remaining number of times for time reduction 504 is updated to "98 remaining."
Next, as shown in Figure 509 (5), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "731" are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can limit the highlighting effect of the decorative pattern 41 in certain variable effects (see Figures 508 (6) and (7), 509 (2) and (3)). In this embodiment, in the special time-saving gaming state, a variable effect with a shorter execution time is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the highlighting effect of the decorative pattern 41 is limited is executed than when a variable effect in which the highlighting effect of the decorative pattern 41 is executed. In other words, the average execution time of a variable effect in which the highlighting effect of the decorative pattern 41 is limited is shorter than the average execution time of a variable effect in which the highlighting effect of the decorative pattern 41 is executed.
Therefore, when a variable performance with a short execution time is executed, the performance is simplified by limiting the highlighting of the decorative pattern 41, etc., so that the player can enjoy the variable performance with a sense of speed without being confused by the performance.

In the variation performance example 34, the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed, but this is not limiting. In the variation performance example 34, the variation image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed.
Furthermore, in the fourth stage (special time-saving gaming state), if a specific condition is met, the variable effect shown in the variable effect example 34 may be executed. Examples of the specific condition include the remaining number of special symbol variations (variable effects) that can be executed in the special time-saving gaming state being a predetermined number (e.g., 91 times) or more, or the jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (e.g., 3 times) or more in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Variation example 35)
Next, referring to Fig. 510, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 35) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 35 is an example of a random miss variable effect based on the fact that the reserved number for winning into the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is "1".
In addition, the variation performance example 35 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH11" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 328. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 510(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 stops the less decorative symbol 41. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, the small symbol 56, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode image 504, and the first right-hit image 503. The remaining number of times in the time-saving mode image 504 displays the text "90 more." At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning the first start gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning the second start gate 122. The first right-hit image 503 performs the effects described using FIGS. 343(1) to (3).
The decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the same manner as in the third stage (see FIG. 498(1)), but are not limited to this. The decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in a different size or position from those in the third stage.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 510(2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change in accordance with the start of the change display of the special symbol. Also, the change image 51 is displayed. Also, the remaining number of times of the time reduction game 504 is updated to "89 more."
Next, as shown in FIG. 510 (3), three decorative symbols 41, "412," stop. More specifically, the decorative symbols 41 are stationary. Additionally, the decorative symbols 41 are stationary without any temporary stop. Furthermore, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. The display time of the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is 0.05 seconds. However, the display time of the fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 may be any time. Furthermore, a seventh stop emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the stop emphasis image, is output. The seventh stop emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the fourth stage. The output time of the seventh stop emphasis sound is 0.05 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 510(4), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412," stop. Also, the variable image 51 is no longer displayed. At this time, a game ball enters the second start slot 122, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start slot 122 is updated to "1." Also, the reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 510(5), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the changing image 51 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 510(6), three decorative symbols 41, "623," stop. Also, a fourteenth stop emphasis image 624 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, a seventh stop emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 510(7), with the special symbol being stopped, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

(Variation example 36)
Figures 511 and 512 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 36) will be described with reference to Figures 511 and 512. Variable effect example 36 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
Also, the variation performance example 36 is a variation performance that is executed when "EH7" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 328. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 511(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the less decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, the remaining time-saving number image 504 displays the text "81 left." Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 511(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, the changing image 51 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 511(3), a second reach prompting effect is performed, and a second reach prompting emphasis image 617 is displayed around the left and right decorative symbols 41. In addition, a second reach prompting emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 511 (4), an eighth reach effect is performed, an eighth reach-eye emphasis image 549 is displayed, and an eighth reach action is performed. In the eighth reach effect, the effects described using Fig. 397 (2) to (5) are performed. In addition, a fourth reach emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 511 (5), the first transition image 618 is displayed, and the variable image 51, the stage notification image 501, and the remaining number of time-saving times image 504 are hidden.
Next, as shown in Fig. 511 (6), the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effect described using Fig. 408 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 511 (7), the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the third in-play emphasis image 564 are displayed. In the fourth mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effect described using Fig. 413 (1) to (6) is performed. In addition, the fourth in-play emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 511 (8), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 369 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 17th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 512 (9). In the 17th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 369 (3) to (8). In addition, the 6th button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 17th button effect, a 15th post-operation emphasis image 528 is displayed as shown in FIG. 512 (10). In addition, a 15th post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 512 (11), an image 619 after pressing the eleventh button is displayed. Also, an emphasis sound after pressing the sixth button is output.
Next, the first transitional image 618 is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 512(12).
Next, as shown in FIG. 512 (13), the three decorative symbols 41, "454," temporarily stop. Also, the stage notification image 501 and the remaining time-reduction number image 504 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not redisplayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 512 (14), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 37)
Figures 513 and 514 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 37) will be described with reference to Figures 513 and 514. Variable effect example 37 is an example of a jackpot variable effect based on winning into the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In addition, the variation performance example 37 is a variation performance that is executed when "EF4" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 328. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 511 (1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 513 (1), the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode is performed, and an SPSP start image 556 and a third start emphasis image 559 are displayed. In the start suggestion effect of the fourth mode, the effects described using Fig. 408 (1) to (6) are performed. In addition, a fourth start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 513 (2), the fifth mode of in-play suggestion effect is performed, and the SPSP suggestion image 561 and the fourth in-play emphasis image 565 are displayed. In the fifth mode of in-play suggestion effect, the effects described using Figs. 414 (1) to (4) are performed. In addition, the fifth in-play emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 513 (3), a fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed. The fourth precursor emphasis image 527 is displayed in the manner described with reference to Figs. 369 (1) and (2). In addition, a fourth precursor emphasis sound is output.
Next, the 18th button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 513 (4). In the 18th button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 369 (3) to (8). In addition, the 6th button emphasis sound is output.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the 18th button effect, a 16th post-operation emphasis image 529 is displayed as shown in FIG. 513(5). In addition, a 16th post-operation emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 513 (6), a fourth jackpot presentation is performed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, a fourth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to an area overlapping with the image display unit 114, the three movable role objects 115, the presentation button 161, and the lamp L emit light in rainbow colors, and a fourth jackpot highlight image 569 is displayed. In the fourth jackpot presentation, the presentation described using Figs. 423 (2) to (8) and Fig. 424 (9) to (16) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 513(7), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet "444" is displayed so as to move from the top to the center of the image display section 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 513 (8), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to expand. More specifically, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed so that the display area of the center decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the display area of the right decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 514 (9), the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a shrinking manner. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis image 620 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. Also, a fifth doublet emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 514 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed.

(Variation example 38)
Figures 515 to 517 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 38) will be described with reference to Figures 515 to 517. Variable effect example 38 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Also, the variation performance example 38 is a variation performance that is executed when "EF5" is selected as the "variation performance pattern" in Fig. 328. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from each of the variation performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 515(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the previous special symbol, and the less decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. The remaining time-saving number image 504 displays the text "50 more." One reserved image 52 is displayed in blue, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 displays "1."
Next, as shown in FIG. 515(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change. Also, a blue changing image 51 is displayed, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start port 122 is updated to "0." Also, the remaining number of times of time reduction image 504 is updated to "49 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 515(3), a change effect is executed, and the display color of the changing image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. In addition, a second rainbow emphasis sound, which is a sound effect when the rainbow-colored changing image 51 is displayed, is output. The second rainbow emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the changing image 51 (reserved image 52) on which the change effect has been executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The output time of the second rainbow emphasis sound is 2.75 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 515 (4), a third reach prompting effect is executed. In the third reach prompting effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an up-and-down swaying motion, and a third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is displayed surrounding each of the left and right decorative symbols 41. The third reach prompting emphasis image 625 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In addition, a third reach prompting emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the third reach prompting emphasis image 625, is output. The third reach prompting emphasis sound can also be considered as an effect sound that emphasizes the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right in the special time-saving game state. The output time of the third reach prompting emphasis sound is 4.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 515 (5), the 9th reach effect is executed, the 9th reach highlight image 550 is displayed, and the 9th reach action is performed. The 9th reach highlight image 550 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43, and is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43. Note that in the 9th reach effect, the effects described using Figures 398 (1) to (5) are performed. In addition, the 5th reach highlight sound, which is a sound effect for the 9th reach effect, is output. The 5th reach highlight sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the reach effect. The output time of the 5th reach highlight sound is 1.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 515 (6), the sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed. The sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. The sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed in the manner described using Figures 384 (1) to (3). A sixth premonition emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth premonition emphasis image 534 is displayed, is output. The sixth premonition emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect emphasizing the display of the button image 509. The output time of the sixth premonition emphasis sound is 1 second.

Next, as shown in Fig. 515 (7), a 22nd button effect is performed, and the button image 509 is displayed. In the 22nd button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described using Figs. 384 (4) to (8) and Fig. 385 (9) to (12). In addition, a 9th button emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button image 509 is displayed, is output. The 9th button emphasis sound can also be considered as a sound effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). The output time of the 9th button emphasis sound is 1.1 seconds.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the 22nd button effect, a 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 515 (8). The 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. The 19th post-operation emphasis image 535 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and in a layer behind the first right-hit image 503, the variable image 51, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. A 19th post-operation emphasis sound, which is a sound effect indicating the display of the 19th post-operation emphasis image 535, is output. The 19th post-operation emphasis sound can also be considered as an emphasis sound corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161. The output time of the 19th post-operation emphasis sound is 0.3 seconds.

Next, as shown in Figure 516 (9), the fifth jackpot presentation is executed. During the fifth jackpot presentation, a fifth jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration presentation is executed, the three movable role objects 115 move to overlap the image display unit 114, and the three movable role objects 115, presentation button 161, and lamp L emit rainbow colors. Additionally, a fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is displayed. The fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, first right-hit image 503, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small pattern 56. Additionally, the fifth jackpot highlight image 570 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the first right-hit image 503, volume image 42, light intensity image 43, reserved number display 55, and small pattern 56. Furthermore, when the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see because it is covered by the fifth jackpot emphasis image 570.

Next, as shown in Figure 516 (10), the fifth jackpot effect ends.
Next, as shown in FIG. 516 (11), each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner. More specifically, the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner such that the display area of the center decorative symbol 41 is larger than the display area of the left decorative symbol 41 and the display area of the right decorative symbol 41. Additionally, a sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. The sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative symbol 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. Additionally, the sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, and the small symbol 56. Additionally, a sixth doublet highlight sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the sixth doublet highlight image 626 is displayed, is output. The sixth doublet emphasis sound can also be regarded as an effect sound that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" in the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 516 (12), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 516 (10). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in a reduced size. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 516 (13), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 516 (11). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in an enlarged manner. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 516 (14), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 516 (10). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in a reduced size. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 516 (15), the decorative pattern 41 of the doublet is displayed in the same manner as that shown in Fig. 516 (11). The sixth doublet emphasis image 626 is displayed in an enlarged manner. A sixth doublet emphasis sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 516 (16), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 516 (10). The display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 is 3.75 seconds. However, the display time of the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be any time. In addition, the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 is displayed in a shrinking manner. The display time of the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 is 2.75 seconds. However, the display time of the sixth doublet emphasized image 626 may be any time. In addition, a sixth doublet emphasized sound is output. The output time of the sixth doublet emphasized sound is 2.5 seconds.
Then, as shown in Figure 517 (17), as the special pattern stops, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "777" stop.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (42) to (46) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is "777".

As described above, in this embodiment, in each stage (first stage to fourth stage), the number of types of highlighting effects for the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41) is greater than the number of types of highlighting effects for the middle decorative pattern 41. Therefore, even in the early stage of the variable effect, before the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed, it is possible to realize an effect that draws the player's attention to the decorative pattern 41.
In each stage (first to fourth stages), the number of types of highlighting effects for the center decorative pattern 41 may be greater than the number of types of highlighting effects for the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41). In this case, the player can be made to pay more attention to the decorative pattern 41 at the end of the variable effect when the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
That is, in each stage (first stage to fourth stage), the number of types of highlighting effects of the middle decorative pattern 41 and the number of types of highlighting effects of the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41) may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in the same display manner in each presentation (each drawing (Figures 428 to 517) used to explain each variable presentation example) in each variable presentation example (Variable Presentation Example 1 to Variable Presentation Example 38).
In this case, the volume and light intensity notifications are easily recognized by the player regardless of the game situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distance (spacing) between the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 is shorter when the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is "7" (see Figure 515 (5)) than when the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is "6" (see Figure 511 (4)).
In this case, when the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is "7", the player can be made to more clearly recognize that the reach has been achieved.

(Example of performance when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated)
Next, the mode of presentation when the back volume control volume 300S is operated will be described.
Figures 518 and 519 are diagrams showing one form of presentation when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated.
First, in the customer waiting state, as shown in Fig. 518(1), a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, a menu promotion image 46, a stage image 61, and a decorative pattern 41 are displayed. At this time, the volume is set to "3" in the performance control unit 300. At this time, the background volume adjustment volume 300S is set to the volume "5."
In this way, in this embodiment, there may be a case where the volume set in the performance control unit 300 differs from the volume set in the background volume adjustment volume 300S. This difference occurs, for example, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is set to a volume of "5," thereby setting the volume in the performance control unit 300 to "5," and then the performance key 162 is operated to update the volume setting in the performance control unit 300.

518(2), when the background volume control volume 300S is set to volume "6," the volume is set to "6" in the performance control unit 300, and the volume identification unit 442 of the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a manner indicating volume "5." On the other hand, the sound announcing the volume set in the performance control unit 300 is not output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 518(3), when the lower key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume is set to "5" in the effect control unit 300. In this case, the display mode of the customer waiting volume image 44 does not change. Also, the volume notification sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Figure 518 (4), when the lower key of the performance keys 162 is operated, the volume is set to "4" in the performance control unit 300, the volume identification unit 442 of the customer waiting volume image 44 is displayed in a manner indicating the volume "4", and a volume 4 alert sound is output.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 518(5), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 start to change as the special pattern starts to change, and the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, and the menu promotion image 46 are hidden. Also, a blue changing image 51 is displayed. This changing effect is the changing effect shown in the changing effect example 9 (see FIGS. 448 to 453).

Next, as shown in FIG. 518(6), the first big win effect is performed.
518(7), when the back volume control volume 300S is set to volume "5" while the first jackpot effect is being executed, the volume is set to "5" in the effect control unit 300. On the other hand, the volume image 42 is not displayed, and no sound is output to notify the user of the volume set in the effect control unit 300.
Next, as shown in Fig. 518 (8), when the upper key of the effect keys 162 is operated, the volume setting in the effect control unit 300 is maintained at "5" and the volume image 42 is displayed. Also, the volume identification unit 422 is displayed in a manner indicating the volume "5." On the other hand, the volume notification sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Figure 519 (9), when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is set to volume "4," the volume is set to "4" in the performance control unit 300, and the volume identification section 422 of the volume image 42 is displayed in a manner indicating "4." Meanwhile, no volume notification sound is output.

Note that, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated while the first jackpot effect is being executed (see FIG. 518 (7)), the volume image 42 may be displayed but the volume alert sound may not be output. Also, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated while the first jackpot effect is being executed, the volume image 42 may not be displayed but the volume alert sound may be output. In other words, when the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated while the first jackpot effect is being executed, at least one of the display of the volume image 42 and the output of the volume alert sound may not be executed.
Furthermore, when the effect key 162 is operated when a jackpot effect is not being executed in a variable effect, the volume image 42 is displayed and the volume notification sound is output, and when the effect key 162 is operated when a jackpot effect is being executed (see FIG. 518 (8)), the volume image 42 is displayed but the volume notification sound is not output. In other words, it is sufficient to make the notification mode of the specific notification when the effect key 162 is operated different between when a variable effect is not being executed and when a jackpot effect is being executed, and the notification mode of the specific notification may be the same when a variable effect is not being executed and when a jackpot effect is not being executed in a variable effect.

Furthermore, when a variable effect is not being performed, if the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated, a volume notification sound may be output, while the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) may not be displayed. In other words, when a variable effect is not being performed, if the background volume adjustment volume 300S is operated, at least one of the output of the volume notification sound and the display of the volume image may not be performed.
Furthermore, even if the back volume control volume 300S is operated when the volume image 42 is not displayed, the volume image 42 may be displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying an identification image that identifies the performance mode. Examples of the identification image include the stage notification image 501. The identification image has a identification portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the identification portion. Examples of the identification portion include the identification portion 501a. Examples of the emphasis portion include the emphasis portion 501b. The performance control unit 300 is also capable of executing specific notifications related to performance effects. Examples of specific notifications include displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, outputting a volume notification sound, and outputting a light intensity notification sound. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis portion different between the first and second performance modes (see Figures 329 (2) and (4)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only is the specific part emphasized, but by making the highlight part correspond to the presentation mode, the presence of the highlight part can emphasize which presentation mode is in use, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a specific image. The specific image has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image that is different from the first specific image. Here, an example of the first specific image is the stage notification image 501. An example of the second specific image is a left-hit image. An example of the specific portion and emphasis portion of the first specific image is the identification portion 501a and the emphasis portion 501b of the stage notification image 501. An example of the specific portion and emphasis portion of the second specific image is the arrow portion 48b and the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis portion of the first specific image between the first and second performance modes (see Figures 329 (2) and (4)), and can make the display mode of the emphasis portion of the second specific image the same.
In this case, the highlighting portion of the first specific image not only highlights the specific portion of the first specific image, but also realizes diversification of the presentation for each presentation mode, while the second specific image becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped during the variable performance. Examples of the emphasis performance include the operation of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops, and the display of a stop emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode (see Fig. 428 (7) and Fig. 467 (7)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the highlighting effect, but the diversification of the effects for each effect mode can be realized, while the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific notifications regarding operations. Examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the highlighting effect different between the first and second performance modes (see FIG. 428(7) and FIG. 467(7)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the highlighting effect, but the diversification of the effects for each effect mode can be realized, while the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 after the start of a specific performance in a variable performance. Examples of specific performances include reach performances. Examples of emphasis performances include reach actions, the display of reach line images 539, and reach-eye emphasis images. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode (see Figures 432 (9) and 471 (9)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41, but also diversifies the effects for each effect mode, while making specific notifications more easily recognized by players regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41 after the start of a specific performance in a variable performance. Examples of specific performances include reach performances. Examples of emphasis performances include reach actions, the display of reach line images 539, and emphasis images. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode (see Figures 439 (19) and 477 (3)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only emphasizes the middle decorative pattern 41 but also diversifies the effects for each effect mode, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific variable presentation in which a decorative pattern 41 (a missing decorative pattern 41) indicating that a jackpot game will not be played after the start of a reach presentation is initiated, and can execute an emphasis presentation in which the center decorative pattern 41 that is displayed as stopped is emphasized in the specific variable presentation. Examples of the emphasis presentation include the operation of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. The presentation control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis presentation different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (see FIG. 432 (14) and FIG. 471 (14)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the middle decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the highlighting effect, but the diversification of the effects after the start of the reach effect for each effect mode can be realized, while the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance in which the right decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, the display area of the right decorative pattern 41) in the variable performance, and the right decorative pattern 41 includes a first performance pattern and a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern. Examples of the emphasis performance include the operation of the decorative pattern 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. Examples of the first performance pattern include an even-numbered right decorative pattern 41. Examples of the second performance pattern include an odd-numbered right decorative pattern 41. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first performance pattern is displayed and when the second performance pattern is displayed (see Figure 428 (8) and Figure 430 (3)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the right decorative pattern 41, but it is also possible to diversify the effects according to the type of right decorative pattern 41, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of right decorative pattern 41 displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above explanation, it was mentioned that the specified display area is the display area of the right decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed in the specified display area is the right decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The predetermined display area is the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 or the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area may be the left decorative pattern 41 or the middle decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern may be the same decorative pattern 41 among the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41, but may be two decorative patterns 41 with different characters (for example, the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 41 and the "5" of the middle decorative pattern 41).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the left decorative pattern 41, which is displayed stopped in a predetermined display area (for example, the display area of the left decorative pattern 41), after the start of a specific performance, and the left decorative pattern 41 includes a first performance pattern and a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern. Specific performances include reach performances, etc. Emphasis performances include reach actions, the display of reach line images 539, and emphasis images, etc. Examples of first performance patterns include even-numbered left decorative patterns 41, etc. Examples of second performance patterns include odd-numbered left decorative patterns 41, etc. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first performance pattern is displayed and when the second performance pattern is displayed (see Figures 432 (14) and 435 (14)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the left decorative pattern 41, but it is also possible to diversify the effects after the start of the specific effect according to the type of left decorative pattern 41, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of left decorative pattern 41 displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above explanation, it was mentioned that the specified display area is the display area of the left decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed in the specified display area is the left decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The predetermined display area is the display area of the right decorative pattern 41 or the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the performance pattern stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area may be the right decorative pattern 41 or the middle decorative pattern 41. In addition, the first performance pattern and the second performance pattern may be the same decorative pattern 41 among the left decorative pattern 41, the right decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41, but may be two decorative patterns 41 with different characters (for example, the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 41 and the "5" of the middle decorative pattern 41).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, and in the variable performance, it is possible to stop and display the first performance symbol (left decorative symbol 41, right decorative symbol 41) and then stop and display the second performance symbol (middle decorative symbol 41). Examples of the emphasis effect include the operation of the decorative symbol 41 when it stops and the display of a stop emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis effect different when the first performance symbol is displayed and when the second performance symbol is displayed (see Figures 428 (7) and 429 (9)), and it is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the effect pattern, but it is also possible to diversify the effects depending on whether the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is displayed, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the effect pattern displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41) that indicates that a jackpot game will be executed, and the presentation patterns include a first presentation pattern and a second presentation pattern that is different from the first presentation pattern. Examples of the emphasis presentation include the display of a double-digit emphasis image and the motion display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41. Examples of the first presentation pattern include even-numbered decorative patterns 41. Examples of the second presentation pattern include odd-numbered decorative patterns 41. The presentation control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis presentation when the first presentation pattern is displayed and when the second presentation pattern is displayed (see Figures 452 (39) and (40) and Figures 461 (11) to (13)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the double-digit decorative pattern 41 be emphasized by the emphasis effect, but the effects can be diversified depending on whether the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is displayed, and the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect pattern displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the display of the button image 509 before the button image 509 is displayed, and can execute a specific effect in the variable performance. Examples of the emphasis effect include the display of a premonition emphasis image. Examples of the specific effect include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see Figure 448 (7) and Figure 451 (29)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only makes the player anticipate the button image 509 being displayed before it is even displayed, but also diversifies the effects according to the progress of the variable effects. On the other hand, the specific notification becomes more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the display of the button image 509 before the button image 509 is displayed, can execute a specific effect in the variable effect, and can execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of the emphasis effect include the display of a premonition emphasis image. Examples of the specific effect include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. Examples of the specific notification include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see Figures 448 (7) and 451 (29)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification the same (see Figures 454 (3) and 455 (10)).
In this case, the highlighting effect not only makes the player anticipate the button image 509 being displayed before it is even displayed, but also diversifies the effects according to the progress of the variable effects. On the other hand, the specific notification becomes more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the fact that the button image 509 is to be displayed before the button image 509 is actually displayed. An example of the emphasis effect is the display of a premonition emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis effect different between the first performance mode (e.g., the first stage) and the second performance mode (e.g., the third stage) (see FIG. 451 (29) and FIG. 502 (8)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting effect not only makes the player anticipate the button image 509 being displayed before it is actually displayed, but also diversifies the effects for each effect mode. On the other hand, the specific notification becomes more easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode. This increases the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, and can execute a specific effect in the variable effect. Examples of change effects include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the display of the button unit 509a, and the display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 448 (8), FIGS. 348 (2) to (8), FIG. 456 (3), and FIG. 359 (3) to (8)), and it is possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the effects can be diversified according to the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, can execute specific effects in the variable effect, and can execute specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of change effects include the presence or absence of display of the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the display of the button unit 509a, and the display of the highlighted characters 509d. Examples of specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo-consecutive effects. The effect control unit 300 can change the display mode of the change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see FIG. 448(8), FIGS. 348(2) to (8), 456(3), and 359(3) to (8)), and can use the same notification mode for the specific notification (see FIG. 454(4) and FIG. 456(6)).
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the effects can be diversified according to the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Examples of change performance include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changing the display mode, displaying the operation of the button unit 509a, and displaying the operation of the highlighted character 509d. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the change performance different between the first and second performance modes (see FIG. 451 (30), FIG. 356 (3) to (8), FIG. 515 (7), FIG. 384 (4) to (8), and FIG. 385 (9) to (13)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the effects can be diversified for each effect mode, while specific notifications can be more easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when an operation effect (button effect) is being executed, and the operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect that is different from the first operation effect. Examples of the emphasis effect include displaying an emphasis image after the operation. Examples of the first operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated only once during the valid operation period, and a button effect in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is white (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 356). Examples of the second operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated multiple times during the valid operation period, and a button effect in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is red (see (2) to (8) in FIG. 362). The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed (see Figures 357 (11) and 363 (11)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the result of operating the effect button 161, but also allows for diversification of the effects according to the type of operation effect, while making it easier for the player to recognize specific notifications regardless of the type of operation effect executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance in response to the operation of the performance button 161 when an operation performance (button performance) is being executed, and the operation performance includes a first operation performance and a second operation performance different from the first operation performance. Examples of the emphasis performance include displaying an emphasis image after the operation. Examples of the first operation performance include a button performance in which the performance button 161 can be operated only once during the valid operation period, and a button performance in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is white (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 356). Examples of the second operation performance include a button performance in which the performance button 161 can be operated multiple times during the valid operation period, and a button performance in which the display color of the button emphasis section 509c is red (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 367). The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the emphasis performance different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed (see Figure 357 (11) and Figure 368 (11)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common (see Figure 455 (11) and Figure 494-2 (3)).
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the result of operating the effect button 161, but also allows for diversification of the effects according to the type of operation effect, while making it easier for the player to recognize specific notifications regardless of the type of operation effect executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect body, and the vibration effect can be a first vibration effect or a second vibration effect that is different from the first vibration effect. An example of an emphasis effect is an effect in which the effect body is illuminated. Furthermore, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be vibration effects that have different execution times. Furthermore, when the first vibration effect is executed and when the second vibration effect is executed, the effect mode of the emphasis effect can be made different (see FIG. 427), and the notification mode of the specific notification can be made the same (see FIG. 451 (32), FIG. 459 (10)).
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the presentation pattern that is the target of the vibration effect, but also diversifies the presentation according to the type of vibration effect, while making it easier for players to recognize specific notifications regardless of the type of vibration effect being executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot effect is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effects, bonus effect effects, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, or movable bonus effect 115. The effect control unit 300 can change the presentation style of the predetermined emphasis effect between the first and second presentation modes (see FIG. 451 (32) and FIG. 493 (7)), and can use the same presentation style for the specific notification.
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect emphasize that a big win game is being played, but the effects can be diversified for each effect mode, and the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a suggestion image indicating the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The suggestion image has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The display mode of the suggestion image includes a first mode and a second mode that has a higher expectation level than the first mode. Examples of the suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556 and a start-time emphasis image, the SPSP suggestion image 561 and a play-in emphasis image, etc. Examples of the suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556 and the SPSP suggestion image 561, etc. Examples of the emphasis portion include the action-displaying portion of the SPSP start image 556, the start-time emphasis image, the action-displaying portion of the SPSP suggestion image 561, and a play-in emphasis image, etc. Examples of the emphasis portion include a white display mode and a red display mode. The performance control unit 300 can make the display mode of the highlighting section different when the suggestive image is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode (see Figure 446 (29) and Figure 451 (27)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting section not only emphasizes the specific section, but also diversifies the presentation according to the display mode of the suggestive image, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the display mode of the displayed suggestive image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the role device performance, and can execute a specific performance in the variable performance. Examples of the emphasis performance include the display of an emphasis image. Examples of the specific performance include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the emphasis performance before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figure 443 (3) and Figure 446 (28)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the emphasis effect not only emphasizes the special device effect, but also diversifies the effect according to the progress of the variable effect, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of whether it is before or after the start of the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a suggestion image that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. The suggestion image has a specific portion and an emphasis portion that emphasizes the specific portion. The suggestion image includes a first suggestion image and a second suggestion image that is different from the first suggestion image. Examples of the first suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556 and a start-time emphasis image. Examples of the second suggestion image include the SPSP in-progress suggestion image 561 and an execution-time emphasis image. Examples of the specific portion of the first suggestion image include the SPSP start image 556. Examples of the emphasis portion of the first suggestion image include the action-displaying portion of the SPSP start image 556 and the start-time emphasis image. Examples of the specific portion of the second suggestion image include the SPSP in-progress suggestion image 561. Examples of the emphasis portion of the second suggestion image include the action-displaying portion of the SPSP in-progress suggestion image 561 and an execution-time emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can change the display mode of the highlighting section when the first suggestion image is displayed and when the second suggestion image is displayed (see Figures 446 (29) and (30)), and can make the notification mode of the specific notification common.
In this case, the highlighting section not only emphasizes the specific section, but also diversifies the presentation according to the type of suggestive image displayed, while the specific notification becomes easier for the player to recognize regardless of the type of suggestive image displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, and can execute a specific effect in the variable effect. Examples of change effects include whether or not the button highlighting unit 509c is displayed, changes in the display mode, the movement display of the button unit 509a, and the movement display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect. The effect control unit 300 can vary the execution time of the change effect before and after the start of the specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 448 (8) and 451 (30) for the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the sixth button effect and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the eighth button effect in FIG. 387), and can use the same notification time for the specific notification.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the change effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, and can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Examples of change performance include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changing the display mode, displaying the operation of the button unit 509a, and displaying the operation of the highlighted character 509d. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different from the notification time of the specific notification (see Figures 335 (7) and (8), Figures 336 (7) and (8), and Figure 387).
In this case, while the highlighting state of the button image 509 is changed by the change effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the change effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the change effect and the specific notification coincide with each other. This can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the effect button 161, can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509, can execute specific effects in the variable effect, and can execute specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of change effects include whether or not the button highlighting section 509c is displayed, changes in the display mode, the operation display of the button section 509a, and the operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of specific effects include temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. Examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figures 448 (8), 451 (30); for example, see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the sixth button performance and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the eighth button performance in Figure 387), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same (see Figures 454 (4), 455 (11), and 342 (2)).
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the change effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the change effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the performance button 161, can execute a change performance that changes the display mode of the button image 509, and can execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of change performance include whether or not to display the button highlighting unit 509c, changes in the display mode, the display of the operation of the button unit 509a, and the display of the operation of the highlighted character 509d. Also, an example of a specific notification is a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different from the notification time of the specific notification (see Figure 342 (2) and Figure 387).
In this case, while the highlighting state of the button image 509 is changed by the change effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the change effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the change effect and the specific notification coincide with each other. This can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute an operation presentation (button presentation) that displays a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the presentation button 161. In the operation presentation, a change presentation can be executed that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The operation presentation includes a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation that is different from the first operation presentation. Examples of change presentations include the presence or absence of display of the button highlighting section 509c, a change in the display mode, an operation display of the button section 509a, and an operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of the first operation presentation include a button presentation in which the presentation button 161 can be operated only once during the valid operation period, and a button presentation in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is white (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 356). Examples of the second operation presentation include a button presentation in which the presentation button 161 can be operated multiple times during the valid operation period, and a button presentation in which the display color of the button highlighting section 509c is red (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 367). The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change performance different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed (see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the 8th button performance in Figure 387 and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the 16th button performance), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the operation effect being executed, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the operation effect being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an operation effect (button effect) that displays a button image 509 emphasizing the promotion of operation of the effect button 161. In the operation effect, a change effect can be executed that changes the display mode of the button image 509. The operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect that is different from the first operation effect, and specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed. Examples of change effects include the presence or absence of display of the button highlighting section 509c, a change in the display mode, an operation display of the button section 509a, and an operation display of the highlighted character 509d. Examples of the first operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated only once during the operation valid period, and a button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in white (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 356). Examples of the second operation effect include a button effect in which the effect button 161 can be operated multiple times during the operation valid period, and a button effect in which the button highlighting section 509c is displayed in red (see (3) to (8) in FIG. 359). Furthermore, examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification, etc. The presentation control unit 300 can make the execution time of the change presentation different when the first operation presentation is executed and when the second operation presentation is executed (see the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the eighth button presentation and the display time of the button highlighting unit 509c in the ninth button presentation in FIG. 387), and can make the presentation time of the specific notification the same (see FIG. 455 (11), FIG. 456 (6), FIG. 342 (2)).
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the operation effect being executed, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the operation effect being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a button image 509 that emphasizes the promotion of operation of the presentation button 161 in a variation presentation, and can execute a change presentation that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Examples of change presentations include whether or not to display the button highlighting section 509c, changing the display mode, displaying the operation of the button section 509a, and displaying the operation of the highlighted character 509d. It is possible to make the execution time of the change presentation different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (see the display time of the button highlighting section 509c in the eighth button presentation and the display time of the button highlighting section 509c in the sixteenth button presentation in FIGS. 451 (30), 493 (6), and 387), and it is possible to make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting state of the button image 509 be changed by the change effect, but the change effect can also be weighted depending on the effect mode, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the effect mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is capable of displaying a special notification image related to the operation of the handle 151, and is capable of executing an emphasis effect that emphasizes at least a portion of the special notification image, and the special notification images include a first special notification image and a second special notification image that is different from the first special notification image. An example of the first special notification image is a left-hit image, etc. An example of the second special notification image is a right-hit image, etc. An example of an emphasis effect for the first special notification image is the display of the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48, etc. An example of an emphasis effect for the second special notification image is the display of the emphasis portion 507c of the second right-hit image 507, etc. The performance control unit 300 is capable of differentiating the execution time of the emphasis effect when the first special notification image is displayed from when the second special notification image is displayed (see Figure 342 (2) and Figure 345), and it is possible to make the notification time for the specific notification common.
In this case, not only can the special notification image be emphasized by the emphasis effect, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted depending on the special notification image displayed, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a certain notification regardless of the special notification image displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) that indicates that a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, a role-playing device presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, the lamp L, or the movable role-playing device 115. The presentation control unit 300 can also set the execution time of the predetermined emphasis presentation to be different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (see the output time of the jackpot notification sound in the first jackpot presentation and the output time of the jackpot notification sound in the third jackpot presentation in FIGS. 451 (32), 493 (7), and 427, etc.), and can set the notification time of the specific notification to be the same.
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect be used to emphasize that a big win game is being played, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted according to the presentation mode, and the specific notification can be easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the performance object when a vibration performance is executed, and can execute a specific performance in a variable performance. An example of an emphasis performance is a performance that causes the performance object to emit light. Furthermore, examples of specific performances include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, examples of specific notifications include a left-hit notification. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figures 448 (2), 451 (32), and 427), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the presentation element, but the emphasis effect can be weighted according to the progress of the variable presentation, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect body. An example of an emphasis effect is an effect that makes the effect body emit light. The effect control unit 300 can then differentiate the execution time of the emphasis effect from the execution time of the specific notification (see Figs. 335 (7) and (8), Figs. 336 (7) and (8), and Fig. 427).
In this case, while the highlighting effect emphasizes the effect body, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the highlighting effect or the specific notification, which can occur when the start and end timings of the highlighting effect and the specific notification coincide with each other. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect body. An example of an emphasis effect is an effect that makes the effect body glow. The effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis effect different between the first and second effect modes (see FIG. 451 (32), FIG. 493 (7), FIG. 427, etc.), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the highlighting effect emphasize the presentation object, but the emphasis effect can be weighted depending on the presentation mode, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the role device performance, and can execute a specific performance in a variable performance. Examples of emphasis performance include the illumination of the movable role device 115 and the display of an emphasis image. Examples of specific performance include the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see the role device emphasis image display time in the first role device performance and the role device emphasis image display time in the second role device performance in Figure 448 (3), Figure 451 (26), and Figure 404), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same.
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect be used to emphasize the special device effect, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the variable effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the role object performance. Examples of the emphasis effect include illuminating the movable role object 115 and displaying an emphasis image. The performance control unit 300 can also set the execution time of the emphasis effect and the notification time of the specific notification to be different (see Figures 335 (7) and (8), 336 (7) and (8), and 404).
In this case, while the highlighting effect emphasizes the performance object effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the highlighting effect or the specific notification, which can occur when the start and end timings of the highlighting effect and the specific notification are the same. This can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the special feature performance, can execute a specific performance in a variable performance, and can execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means. Examples of the emphasis performance include the illumination of the movable feature 115 and the display of an emphasis image. Examples of the specific performance include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, and a pseudo consecutive performance. Examples of the specific notification include a left-hit notification. The performance control unit 300 can make the execution time of the emphasis performance different before and after the start of the specific performance (see Figures 448 (3), 451 (26), and the display time of the special feature image in the first special feature performance and the display time of the special feature image in the second special feature performance in Figure 404, etc.), and can make the notification time of the specific notification the same (see Figures 454 (2), 455 (9), and 342 (2)).
In this case, not only can the emphasis effect be used to emphasize the special device effect, but the emphasis effect can also be weighted depending on the progress of the variable effect, while the specific notification can be more easily recognized by the player as a fixed notification regardless of the progress of the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display a predetermined notification image (left-hit image) relating to the first game area (e.g., the left side of the game area 111) in the first mode (e.g., normal game mode), and can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes at least a portion of the predetermined notification image. An example of an emphasis effect is the display of the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48. The presentation control unit 300 can then differentiate the execution time of the emphasis effect from the notification time of the specific notification (see Figures 335 (7) and (8), 336 (7) and (8), and 342 (2)).
In this case, while the predetermined notification image is emphasized by the emphasis effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the emphasis effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the emphasis effect and the specific notification are the same, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving game state), the effect control unit 300 can display a predetermined notification image (right-hit image) related to the second game area (the right side of the game area 111), and can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes at least a portion of the predetermined notification image. An example of an emphasis effect is the display of the emphasis portion 507c of the second right-hit image 507. The effect control unit 300 can then make the execution time of the emphasis effect different from the notification time of the specific notification (see Figures 335 (7) and (8), 336 (7) and (8), and 345).
In this case, while the predetermined notification image is emphasized by the emphasis effect, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to recognize either the emphasis effect or the specific notification, which may occur when the start and end timings of the emphasis effect and the specific notification are the same, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) in the variable effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and when a jackpot effect is played, can execute a first emphasis effect and a second emphasis effect that is different from the first emphasis effect. The first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect include two of the following effects: output of a jackpot notification sound, display of a jackpot highlight image, vibration effect, bonus effect, rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, rainbow-colored illumination of the lamp L, and rainbow-colored illumination of the movable bonus object 115. The effect control unit 300 can make the execution time of the first emphasis effect, the execution time of the second emphasis effect, and the notification time of the specific notification different (see FIGS. 335 (7) and (8), 336 (7) and (8), 451 (32), and 427).
In this case, the emphasis effect emphasizes that a jackpot game will be played, while preventing the player from failing to recognize either the emphasis effect or the specific notification, which can occur when the start and end timings of the emphasis effect and the specific notification are the same. Furthermore, both the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect draw the player's attention, further increasing the player's sense of excitement about the jackpot game being played. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects in variable effects and can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific effects. Specific effects include temporary stops of the decorative symbols 41, button effects, reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and pseudo consecutive effects. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 439 (19) and the like).
In this case, the specific effect can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while an emphasis image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the effect of the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 428 (7)).
In this case, the decorative pattern 41 can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while an emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can stop and display the decorative symbols 41 when a specific sequence (double numbers) indicates that a jackpot game will be played, and can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the double numbers of the decorative symbols 41. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 452 (34)).
In this case, the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the performance effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the fact that the button image 509 will be displayed before the button image 509 is displayed. The specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 428(3)).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize that the button image 509 is displayed, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display an emphasis image in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when the button effect is being executed. The specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 428 (5)).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize that the effect button 161 has been operated in the button effect, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasis image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the effect of the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that emphasizes the pseudo consecutive effect. The specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the emphasis image (see FIG. 437(6) etc.).
In this case, the pseudo consecutive effects can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the emphasized image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the effect of the effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) that indicates that a jackpot game will be played, and can display a predetermined emphasized image (jackpot emphasized image) when the jackpot effect is played. The specific notification image can be displayed superimposed on the jackpot emphasized image (see FIG. 451 (32)).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize that a big win game will be played, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while an emphasis image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 can be superimposed on the second left-hit image 48 (see Figure 454 (2)). Here, by displaying the second left-hit image 48 in motion (see Figure 341 (9)), each image in the second left-hit image 48 (text portion 48a, arrow portion 48b, highlight portion 48c, background portion 48d) is superimposed on the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display a special notification image (left-hit image) related to the operation of the handle 151, and can display an emphasis portion that highlights at least a portion of the special notification image. An example of an emphasis portion is the emphasis portion 48c of the second left-hit image 48. Furthermore, the specific notification image can be superimposed on the emphasis portion.
In this case, the special notification image can be emphasized, and even if a specific notification image is displayed while the highlighting section is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the notification regarding the presentation effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the variable presentation, and when a specific effect (SP reach presentation) is executed in the variable presentation, it can display a presentation pattern (decorative pattern 41 with a miss) indicating that a jackpot game will not be executed, and then display a special image. Examples of specific emphasis effects include displaying an emphasis image and an action when the decorative pattern 41 stops. Examples of special images include a switching image 586. In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 may prevent the specific emphasis effect from being executed after the switching image 586 is displayed in the variable presentation. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the specific emphasis effect and execute a specific notification while a special image is being displayed (see FIG. 439 (22)).
In this case, even though a decorative pattern 41 of a losing number is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is emphasized, which prevents a decrease in interest in the game, and the player can be made aware of the specific notification even while a special image is being displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 in the variable performance. Examples of emphasis performance include displaying an emphasis image and operation when the decorative pattern 41 stops. In this embodiment, specific emphasis performances are not executed in specific variable performances such as the variable performances shown in Fig. 509 (2) and (3). In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can restrict emphasis performances and execute specific notifications in specific variable performances.
In this case, it is possible to achieve a greater variety in the variable effects than when emphasis effects are executed in all variable effects, and it is also possible to make the player aware of specific notifications in specific variable effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41 in a specific visual mode that is easy to see during the variable presentation, can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) that suggests a jackpot game will be played during the variable presentation, and can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when the specific presentation is executed. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, role presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, and movable role presentation 115. Furthermore, when the predetermined emphasis presentation is being executed, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the display of the decorative pattern 41 in a specific visual mode and execute a specific notification (see FIG. 451 (32)).
In this case, compared to when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a specific visual mode during the execution of the highlight effect, it is possible to make the player more likely to notice the effects that are unique to the execution of a jackpot game (such as the effects executed during the jackpot effect). Also, even during the execution of the highlight effect, the player can be made to recognize the specific notification. This can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41, and can execute specific notifications regarding the performance effects. Examples of emphasis performance include displaying an emphasis image and operations when the decorative pattern 41 stops. Examples of specific notifications include outputting a volume notification sound or a light intensity notification sound. In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 stops, the performance control unit 300 does not execute an emphasis performance and does not output a volume notification sound or a light intensity notification sound (see FIG. 429 (11)). In other words, the performance control unit 300 can limit the emphasis performance and specific notifications when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed.
In this case, the player is prevented from being distracted by the emphasis effects or specific notifications and losing focus on the stopped display of the decorative pattern 41, and the player can be made to more reliably recognize the end of the variable effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41, and can execute specific notifications regarding the performance effects. Examples of emphasis performance include displaying an emphasis image and an operation when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped. Examples of specific notifications include displaying a volume image 42 or a light intensity image 43. In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the performance control unit 300 does not execute an emphasis performance, but displays the volume image 42 or the light intensity image 43 (see FIG. 429 (11)). In other words, when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed, the performance control unit 300 can limit the emphasis performance and execute specific notifications.
In this case, the player is prevented from being distracted by the emphasis effect and losing focus on the stopped display of the decorative pattern 41, and the player can be made to more reliably recognize the end of the variable effect. Furthermore, by executing a specific notification even at the end of the variable effect, the player can be made to recognize the specific notification and enjoy the next variable effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific effect (jackpot effect) in the variable effect that suggests a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis effect when a jackpot effect is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis effect include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration effects, special effects, and rainbow-colored illumination of the effect button 161, lamp L, and movable special effects 115. The adjustment means operable by the player to adjust the effect include a first adjustment means (effect key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) that is different from the first adjustment means. When a predetermined emphasis effect is being played, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific notification regarding the effect when the first adjustment means is operated (see FIG. 518(8)), and can not execute a specific notification when the second adjustment means is operated (see FIG. 518(7)). Examples of the specific notification include displaying a volume image 42.
In this case, if the first adjustment means is operated by the player while the emphasis effect is being executed, the player can be made aware of the specific notification even while the emphasis effect is being executed. Also, if the second adjustment means is operated by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100 while the emphasis effect is being executed, the specific notification is not executed, so it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect of the execution of the jackpot effect from being interrupted by the specific notification unintended by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in the variable presentation that suggests a jackpot game will be played, can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is played, and can execute a specific notification regarding the presentation effect when an adjustment means operable by the player and used to adjust the presentation effect is operated. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means (presentation key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) different from the first adjustment means. The specific notifications include a first specific notification (display of volume image 42) and a second specific notification (output of volume notification sound) different from the first specific notification. The predetermined emphasis presentations include output of a jackpot notification sound, display of a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, role-play presentation, rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, or movable role-play object 115, etc. The performance control unit 300 is capable of executing the first specific notification and the second specific notification when the first adjustment means is operated (see Figure 335 (2)), and is capable of not executing at least one of the first specific notification and the second specific notification when the second adjustment means is operated while a specified emphasis performance is being executed.
In this case, when the first adjustment means is operated by the player, the specific notification can be made more easily recognizable by the player. Also, when the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100 operates the second adjustment means while the emphasis effect is being executed, at least one of the first specific notification and the second specific notification is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect indicating that the jackpot effect will be executed from being interrupted by a specific notification unintended by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in a variable presentation that suggests a jackpot game will be executed, can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is executed, and can execute a specific notification regarding a presentation effect when the adjustment means (presentation key 162) is operated. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot announcement sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, a role presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, or movable role presentation 115. It is also possible to make the notification mode of the specific notification when the adjustment means is operated different between when a variable presentation is not being executed and when a predetermined emphasis presentation is being executed (see FIG. 335 (2) and FIG. 518 (8)).
In this case, when a predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the notification mode of the specific notification is different from when a variable effect is not being executed, so that the emphasis effect that a big win effect is being executed is easily conveyed to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 during a variable effect, and can execute a specific notification regarding the effect when a player operates an adjustment means operable by the player to adjust the effect. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means (effect key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) different from the first adjustment means. Examples of emphasis effects include displaying an emphasis image and operating the decorative symbol 41 when it stops. Examples of specific notifications include displaying a volume image 42 or a customer waiting volume image 44 and outputting a volume notification sound. The effect control unit 300 can execute a specific notification when the first adjustment means is operated while an emphasis effect is being executed (see FIG. 428 (7)). When a variable effect is not being executed, the notification mode of the specific notification can be different depending on whether the first adjustment means is operated or the second adjustment means is operated (see FIGS. 518 (2) and (4)).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the user of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to recognize whether the specific notification made when the variable effect is not being executed is due to the operation of the first adjustment means or the operation of the second adjustment means. Furthermore, if the first adjustment means is operated while the emphasis effect is being executed, the specific notification can be made recognized by the player even during the execution of the emphasis effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display an emphasis image that highlights the decorative pattern 41 during the variable effect, and can issue a specific notification regarding the effect when a player operates an adjustment means operable by the player to adjust the effect. The adjustment means includes a first adjustment means (effect key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) different from the first adjustment means. The specific notification includes a specific notification image (volume image 42) and a specific notification sound (volume notification sound). The emphasis image reduces the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 without reducing the visibility of the specific notification image (see FIG. 452 (34)). When the specific notification image is displayed, the effect control unit 300 can output the specific notification sound when the first adjustment means is operated, and can suppress the output of the specific notification sound when the second adjustment means is operated (see FIGS. 335 (2) and 519 (9)).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the user of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to recognize whether the first adjustment means or the second adjustment means has been operated while the specific notification image is being displayed. Furthermore, even if an emphasis image is displayed while the specific notification image is being displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize the specific notification, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of what happens when the fluctuation start command is not received)
Next, the mode of presentation when the variation start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 will be described.
Figure 520 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation when the variation start command is not received by the presentation control unit 300.
First, in the customer waiting state, as shown in Fig. 520(1), a customer waiting volume image 44, a customer waiting light intensity image 45, a menu promotion image 46, a stage image 61, and a decorative pattern 41 are displayed. At this time, a special pattern is displayed in a static state on the first special pattern display 221. At this time, the volume and light intensity set in the performance control unit 300 are both set to "3."

Next, as shown in Figure 520 (2), the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B enter a disconnected state, where they are not electrically connected. One example of when the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B enter a disconnected state is when the connector 200C connecting the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B becomes detached from the gaming control board 200B or the presentation control board 300B. Another example of when the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B enter a disconnected state is when chattering occurs in the connector 200C (chattering between the gaming control board 200B and the connector 200C, or chattering between the presentation control board 300B and the connector 200C).

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in Fig. 520 (3), the first special symbol display 221 starts to display a variable special symbol. Meanwhile, the game control board 200B and the performance control board 300B are not connected, and the variable start command is not received by the performance control unit 300. In this case, the variable performance does not start, and the customer waiting volume image 44, customer waiting light intensity image 45, and menu promotion image 46 continue to be displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 520 (4), the variable display of the special symbol continues on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, when the lower key and the left key of the effect keys 162 are operated, the effect control unit 300 sets both the volume and the light intensity to "2." Furthermore, the volume identifier 442 of the customer waiting volume image 44 changes to a display mode indicating the volume "2," and the light intensity identifier 452 of the customer waiting light intensity image 45 changes to a display mode indicating the light intensity "2." Furthermore, a volume 2 alert sound and a light intensity 2 alert sound are output.

Next, as shown in Figure 520 (5), the reason why the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a disconnected state is eliminated, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are in a connected state in which they are electrically connected.
Next, as shown in FIG. 520(6), the special symbol is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, when the variation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300, the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, and the menu promotion image 46 are hidden. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped. More specifically, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped by the arrangement of "412" shown in FIGS. 520(1) to (5). Furthermore, the variation count image 502 is updated to "11 games."

In the state shown in Figure 520 (4), if the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state while the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B remain disconnected, the variation stop command will not be received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the content shown in Figure 520 (4) will continue to be displayed on the image display unit 114.

In addition, when the variable effect is not being performed and an event shown in Figures 520 (2) to (6) occurs before the machine enters the customer waiting state, the effect shown in Figures 520 (2) to (6) is executed using volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 instead of customer waiting volume image 44 and customer waiting light intensity image 45.

(Example of what happens when the fluctuation stop command is not received)
Next, the mode of presentation when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 will be explained.
521 and 522 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300. In the following, it is assumed that the fluctuation performance (see FIGS. 448 to 453) is performed when "EA1" is selected as the "fluctuation performance pattern" in FIG. 327.

First, as shown in Fig. 521(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "331," in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first of the two reserved images 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 521 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to vary. Also, the first start operation is executed. Also, at this time, a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. Also, a vibration effect is executed. Also, a first start emphasis sound is output.
Although not shown, after this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 448 (3) to (8), 449 (9) to (16), 450 (17) to (24), and 451 (25) to (29) are performed.

Next, the eighth button effect starts, and the button image 509 is displayed as shown in Fig. 521 (3). In the eighth button effect, the button image 509 is displayed in motion in the manner described with reference to Figs. 356 (3) to (8).
Furthermore, at this time, the player continues to launch the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111, and the gaming ball continuously passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the gaming area 111, whereby the second left-hit notification is executed after the first left-hit notification is executed, the second left-hit image 48 is displayed, and the second left-hit sound is output. As a result, the operation display of the button image 509 (the operation display of the button portion 509a, the button highlight portion 509c, and the highlight character 509d) becomes difficult or impossible to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 521 (4), the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B are assumed to be in a disconnected state. Even in this case, the display of the second left-hit image 48 and the output of the second left-hit sound continue. Furthermore, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the eighth button effect, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 521(5), the second left-hit notification that was being executed at the time shown in FIG. 521(3) ends, and the second left-hit image 48 disappears and the output of the second left-hit sound ends. Furthermore, the first jackpot effect is executed. In the first jackpot effect, the first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration effect is executed, the center movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, and the center movable device 115B, the effect button 161, and the lamp L emit light in rainbow colors. Furthermore, the first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the player continues to launch the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111, and the gaming ball continuously passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the gaming area 111. However, at this time, the second left-hit image 48 is not displayed and the second left-hit sound is not output. More specifically, even if the condition for executing the second left-hit notification, that is, the gaming ball passes through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the gaming area 111, is met, the second left-hit notification is not executed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 452 (33) to (40) are performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 521(6), the doublet decorative pattern 41 and the first doublet emphasis image 591 are displayed. Also, the first doublet emphasis sound is output.
The special symbol is then displayed as stopped. Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 521 (7), the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are disconnected, and the variable stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the double-digit decorative symbol 41 is not fixedly stopped and remains temporarily stopped. Furthermore, the small symbol 56 continues to display a variable display. Furthermore, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, a jackpot game is started, but on the image display unit 114, as shown in FIG. 521 (8), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped and the small symbols 56 continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Also, at this time, if the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. On the other hand, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
After this, although not shown in the figure, the big win game ends, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled to a special time-saving game state, and the next special symbol begins to change.

Next, while the special symbol is being displayed and changing, the reason why the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are not connected is resolved, and as shown in Figure 522 (9), the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B become connected. Also, at this time, if the player operates the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. However, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the special symbol is displayed as stopped. Also, as shown in Figure 522 (10), a variable stop command is received by the effect control unit 300. In this case, the less decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "444," are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, the stage image 61, first right-hit image 503, stage notification image 501, and remaining time-reduction number image 504 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on both the reserved number display 55 of the first start slot 121 and the reserved number display 55 of the second start slot 122. Also, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed.

After the variable effect has ended, when the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed as shown in Fig. 522 (11). Also, the volume notification sound and the light intensity notification sound are output.
In the examples shown in Figures 521 (7), (8) and 522 (9) to (11), detailed illustrations are omitted, but the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation of the effect key 162 (a display mode indicating the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot receive a variation stop command from the game control unit 200 during a jackpot variation presentation, the jackpot presentation is executed while the left-hit notification is restricted.
In this case, even if the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 during the variable performance, the player can be made aware that a jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to a left-hit notification being issued even though the player has not hit the reel with the left hand.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot receive a fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 200, the restrictions on the output of the volume notification sound and light intensity notification sound, which should be relaxed by the final stop of the decorative pattern 41 (end of the fluctuation presentation), are extended.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by having a volume or light intensity notification sound output even though the fluctuation effect has not ended because the fluctuation stop command has not been received, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the fluctuation effect has not ended even after the original end timing of the fluctuation effect.

In the variable presentation shown in Figures 448 to 453, if the execution condition for the second left-hand hit notification is met at the timing shown in Figure 452 (40), the second left-hand hit notification is issued. If the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B become disconnected before the special symbol fluctuation stops, the fluctuation stop command is not properly received by the presentation control unit 300. In this case, the decorative symbol 41 remains temporarily stopped even after the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 would normally stop has passed. Furthermore, even after the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 would normally stop has passed, the second left-hand hit notification that is already being executed continues until its intended end. After the second left-hand hit notification ends, even if the execution condition for the second left-hand hit notification, namely, the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 located on the right side of the gaming area 111, is met, a new second left-hand hit notification is not executed.
In this case, even if the command is not received correctly by the performance control unit 300, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand that has already been made. Furthermore, after the second left-hit notification has ended, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to a left-hit notification being made even though the player has not hit the left hand.

Also, although Figures 521 and 522 have described the jackpot variable presentation, the present invention is not limited to this.
In a variable presentation in which a pre-determination presentation is executed, if the presentation control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200, the pre-determination presentation may be executed while the left-hit notification is restricted.

Furthermore, in the variable effect shown in Figures 521 and 522, when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see Figures 339 (1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see Figures 339 (3) and (4)) are used, the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 521 (7), (8) and 522 (9). In other words, if the variable stop command is not normally received by the effect control unit 300, the restriction on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the original end timing of the variable effect is relaxed.
521 and 522, when the volume image and light intensity image of modified example 3 (see FIG. 339 (5) to (8)) are used, even if the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 521 (7), (8), or 522 (9), the volume alert sound and light intensity alert sound are output, but the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are not displayed. In other words, if the fluctuation stop command is not normally received by the effect control unit 300, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the original end timing of the fluctuation effect, are extended.
In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the effect key 162 is operated while the variable effect is being executed, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are not output. In this case, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 521 (7), (8), and 522 (9), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output. In other words, if the variable effect stop command is not received correctly by the effect control unit 300, the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound, which are normally limited at the end of the variable effect, is relaxed.

(Performance timing when the fluctuation stop command is not received)
Next, the timing of the performance execution when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300 will be explained.
Fig. 523 is a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300. More specifically, Fig. 523-1 is a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300, and Fig. 523-2 is a timing chart of the performance when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300.
In addition, in each of Figures 523-1 and 523-2, we will explain the change performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "change performance pattern" in Figure 327 (see Figures 443 to 447), and the change performance that is executed when "EA1" is selected (see Figures 448 to 453, Figures 521, and Figure 522).

First, we will explain the case where a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300 in the fluctuation performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "fluctuation performance pattern" shown in Figure 523-1.
First, at time T1, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 443 (2)).
Next, at time T2, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 445 (21)).

Next, at time T3, the effect control unit 300 executes the first reach effect and displays the first reach highlight image 542 (see Figure 445 (23)).
Next, at time T4, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 446 (31)).
Next, at time T5, the effect control unit 300 executes the seventh button effect and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 446 (32)).
Next, at time T6, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 that is a miss (see Figure 447 (38)).
Next, at time T7, the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command and fixes and stops the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 447 (39)). Here, the time from the timing (time T3) when the first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed to the timing (time T7) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t1.

Next, we will explain what happens when a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 300 in the fluctuation performance that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "fluctuation performance pattern" shown in Figure 523-1.
First, at time T11, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 448 (2)).
Next, at time T12, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 450 (19)).
Next, at time T13, the effect control unit 300 executes the third reach effect and displays the fourth reach highlight image 544 (see Figure 450 (21)).
Next, at time T14, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 451 (29)).
Next, at time T15, the performance control unit 300 executes the eighth button performance and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 451 (30)).

Next, at time T16, the effect control unit 300 executes the first jackpot effect and displays the first jackpot highlight image 566 (see FIG. 451 (32)).
Next, at time T17, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the double-digit decorative pattern 41 and displays the first double-digit emphasized image 591 (see Figure 452 (40)).
Next, at time T18, the performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command and fixes and stops the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 453 (41)). Here, the time from the timing (time T17) when the first doublet emphasis image 591 is displayed to the timing (time T18) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t2. This time t2 is shorter than time t1.

Next, we will explain what happens when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 during the fluctuation presentation executed when "ER11" is selected as the "Fluctuation Presentation Pattern" as shown in Figure 523-2. In this example, the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B become disconnected, preventing the presentation control unit 300 from receiving the fluctuation stop command. Furthermore, during the next fluctuation, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B is resolved by the time the next fluctuation stop command is received, and the presentation control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

First, at time T21, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 443 (2)).
Next, at time T22, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 445 (21)).

Next, at time T23, the effect control unit 300 executes the first reach effect and displays the first reach highlight image 542 (see Figure 445 (23)).
Next, at time T24, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 446 (31)).
Next, at time T25, the effect control unit 300 executes the seventh button effect and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 446 (32)).
Next, at time T26, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 that is a miss (see Figure 447 (38)).

Next, at time T27, the performance control unit 300 would normally stop the decorative pattern 41 upon receiving a fluctuation stop command (see FIG. 447 (39)), but in this example, the fluctuation stop command cannot be received. As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not stop the decorative pattern 41, but continues the temporary stop state.
Then, at time T28, the performance control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command and fixes and stops the decorative pattern 41. Here, the time from the timing (time T23) when the first reach-eye emphasis image 542 is displayed to the timing (time T28) when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped is time t3. This time t3 is longer than time t1.

Next, we will explain what happens when the fluctuation stop command is not received by the presentation control unit 300 during the fluctuation presentation executed when "EA1" is selected as the "Fluctuation Presentation Pattern" shown in Figure 523-2. In this example, the presentation control unit 300 is unable to receive the fluctuation stop command because the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B are disconnected. Furthermore, during the next fluctuation, by the time the next fluctuation stop command is received, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the presentation control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command.

First, at time T31, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, starts changing the decorative pattern 41, and displays the first start emphasis image 588 (see Figure 448 (2)).
Next, at time T32, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 and displays the first stop emphasis image 572 (see Figure 450 (19)).
Next, at time T33, the presentation control unit 300 executes the third reach presentation and displays the fourth reach highlight image 544 (see Figure 450 (21)).
Next, at time T34, the performance control unit 300 displays the third precursor emphasis image 518 (see Figure 451 (29)).
Next, at time T35, the performance control unit 300 executes the eighth button performance and displays the button highlighting unit 509c (see FIG. 451 (30)).

Next, at time T36, the effect control unit 300 executes the first jackpot effect and displays the first jackpot highlight image 566 (see FIG. 451 (32)).
Next, at time T37, the performance control unit 300 temporarily stops the double-digit decorative pattern 41 and displays the first double-digit emphasized image 591 (see Figure 452 (40)).
Next, at time T38, the performance control unit 300 would normally stop the decorative pattern 41 upon receiving a fluctuation stop command (see FIG. 453 (41)), but in this example, the fluctuation stop command cannot be received. As a result, the performance control unit 300 does not stop the decorative pattern 41, but continues the temporary stop state (see FIG. 521 (7)).
Then, at time T39, the performance control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command and stops the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 522 (10)).

Here, the time from the timing (time T37) when the first double-digit highlight image 591 is displayed to the timing (time T39) when the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped is time t4. This time t4 is longer than time t3 because it includes the time required to execute a jackpot game, for example. In addition, even if the longest execution time of all the executions is executed as the execution of ...
In this way, if a variation stop command is not received, by executing an effect in which the decorative pattern 41 continues to oscillate (temporarily stopped), continuity with the effects that have been executed up to that point, such as emphasis effects, is ensured, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, by continuing the oscillating state of the decorative pattern 41, when the event in which the effect control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 is resolved and a variation stop command is received, it is possible to execute an effect that is continuous and does not feel uncomfortable to the player, in which the oscillating decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

In addition, in the variable performance shown in Figure 523-2, which is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the restriction on the output of the volume notification sound and light intensity notification sound, which should be relaxed by the confirmed stop of the decorative pattern 41, is extended is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the performance control unit 300 does not receive a variable stop command, the time during which the restriction on the output of the volume and light intensity alarm sounds, which would be relaxed by the fixed stop of the decorative pattern 41, is extended is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

It has also been explained that when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see Figures 339 (1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see Figures 339 (3) and (4)) are used, if the fluctuation stop command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the end timing of the original fluctuation performance are relaxed.
Here, in the variable performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" as shown in Figure 523-2, if a variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are relaxed is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable effect that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern," if the effect control unit 300 does not receive a variable effect stop command, the time during which the restrictions on the display of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are relaxed is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

In addition, it was explained that when the volume image and light intensity image of variant example 3 (see Figures 339 (5) to (8)) are used in the variable performance shown in Figures 521 and 522, if the variable stop command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the original end timing of the variable performance, are extended.
Here, in the variable performance shown in Figure 523-2, which is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which should be relaxed by the fixed stop of the decorative pattern 41, are extended is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable performance executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern," if the performance control unit 300 does not receive a variable stop command, the time during which the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which should be relaxed by the fixed stop of the decorative pattern 41, are extended is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

In addition, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the performance key 162 is operated while the variable performance is being performed, and a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are not output when the performance key 162 is operated when the variable performance has ended (the decorative pattern 41 has stopped being fixed), if the variable stop command is not received properly by the performance control unit 300, the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound, which are normally restricted at the end timing of the variable performance, is relaxed.
Here, in the variable performance that is executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" as shown in Figure 523-2, if a variable stop command is not received by the performance control unit 300, the time during which the output of the volume alert sound and light intensity alert sound is reduced is the time from time T27 to time T28.
Furthermore, in the variable effect that is executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern," if the effect control unit 300 does not receive a variable effect stop command, the time during which the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound is reduced is the time from time T38 to time T39. This time is longer than the time from time T27 to time T28.

Also, although not shown in the figures, even if the change stop command for a variable effect in which a specific pre-determined effect (such as a chance eye effect) is executed is not received correctly by the effect control unit 300, the specific pre-determined effect will be executed, as in the example shown in Figure 523, but the time from when the specific pre-determined effect is executed to when the change of the decorative pattern 41 stops will be longer than when the change stop command for a variable effect in which a specific pre-determined effect is executed is received by the effect control unit 300.

(Performance when fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are not received)
Next, the mode of presentation when the fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are not received by the presentation control unit 300 will be described.
Figures 524 and 525 are diagrams showing one form of presentation when the fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are not received by the presentation control unit 300.
First, as shown in Fig. 524(1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "412," are fixed and stopped with the stop display of the previous special symbol. Also, a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage, a stage notification image 501, a change count image 502, a volume image 42, a light intensity image 43, and four reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in Figure 524 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 begin to change, the first start operation is performed, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Also, a change image 51 is displayed, and the hold number display 55 of the first start slot 121 is updated to "3." At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, causing the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 to be displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor light intensity notification sound is output. Also, the first start emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 524(3), the first zone effect starts, and a first zone execution image 537 is displayed. At this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. On the other hand, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
The first zone effect shown in Figure 524 (3) is an example of a pre-determination effect, which is an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the next variable effect after the variable effect when the pre-determination effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 524 (4), a chance eye effect is executed, and three decorative symbols 41, "113," stop. All three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in green. At this time, a chance eye emphasis image 587 is displayed around the three decorative symbols 41. At this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. In addition, a first chance eye emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 524 (5), as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "113," stop. The variable image 51 is no longer displayed. Meanwhile, the first zone execution image 537 continues to be displayed. At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, causing the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 to be displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 524 (6), the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are disconnected. At this time, when the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Then, the display of the next special symbol begins to change, but as shown in FIG. 524 (7), the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the change start command. In this case, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 do not start changing. The first zone performance continues, and the first zone execution image 537 continues to be displayed. At this time, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed by operating the upper and right keys of the performance keys 162. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the special symbol is displayed as a static symbol, but the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the stop variable command, as shown in FIG. 524 (8). In this case, the first zone effect continues, and the first zone execution image 537 continues to be displayed. At this time, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed by operating the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, as shown in Figure 525 (9). At this time, by operating the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the display of the special symbols begins to change. Then, the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, as shown in FIG. 525 (10).
In this case, the first reserved image 52, which is the reserved image 52 corresponding to the previous variable display of the special symbol, is hidden without being moved. Also, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in the display area of the second reserved image 52 without being moved, and the second reserved image 52 is displayed in the display area of the first reserved image 52 without being moved. More specifically, the display position of the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the display area of the third reserved image 52 is instantly switched to the display area of the second reserved image 52 without any movement animation, and the display position of the reserved image 52 that was displayed in the display area of the second reserved image 52 is instantly switched to the display area of the first reserved image 52 without any movement animation.
Then, the second reserved image 52 (reserved image 52 whose display position has been switched to the display area of the second reserved image 52) is moved and displayed in the display area of the first reserved image 52 (a moving animation is performed from the display area of the second reserved image 52 to the display area of the first reserved image 52), and the first reserved image 52 (reserved image 52 whose display position has been switched to the display area of the first reserved image 52) is moved and displayed in the display area of the variable image 51 (a moving animation is performed from the display area of the first reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51), thereby displaying the first reserved image 52 and the variable image 51.
Here, the time required to hide the first reserved image 52, which is the reserved image 52 corresponding to the previous variable display of the special pattern, the time required to display the third reserved image 52 in the display area of the second reserved image 52 (switching the display position), and the time required to display the second reserved image 52 in the display area of the first reserved image 52 (switching the display position) are all shorter than the time required for the moving display of the reserved image 52 (moving animation from the display area of the second reserved image 52 to the display area of the first reserved image 52, and moving animation from the display area of the first reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51).
Furthermore, the decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56 begin to change, the first start operation is performed, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. The first zone execution image 537 is also hidden. The hold number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated from "3" to "1." At this time, the upper and right keys of the performance keys 162 are operated, causing the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 to be displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor light intensity notification sound is output. The first start emphasis sound is also output.
After this, although not shown in the figure, as the next special symbol starts to change and display, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 525 (11), the decorative pattern 41 is changed at high speed. At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, and the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 525 (12), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, and the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
After the variable effect ends, when the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light amount image 43 are displayed. In addition, a volume notification sound and a light amount notification sound are output.
In the examples shown in Figures 524 (2) to (8) and Figures 525 (9) to (12), detailed illustrations are omitted, but the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation of the performance key 162 (a display mode indicating the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the variable start command for the variable performance in which the first start operation and chance eye performance are executed is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, the first start operation and chance eye performance are restricted, but the zone performance can be executed (see Figure 524 (7)).
Therefore, by limiting the effects that were scheduled to be executed, while preventing the effects from becoming unnatural due to the interruption of the effects that were already being executed, it is possible to indicate to the user of the pachinko game machine 100 that the fluctuation start command was not received properly by the effect control unit 300.

In the example shown in Figure 525, if the change start command for the change performance is not received by the performance control unit 300 and a change start command for the next change performance is received, the first pending image 52 will become hidden without moving, the display positions of the third pending image 52 and the second pending image 52 will switch, and the newly displayed second pending image 52 and first pending image 52 will move (moving animation) due to the switch in display position, and the first pending image 52 and changing image 51 will be displayed, but this is not limited to the above.
When three pending images 52 are displayed, if the change start command for the change performance is not received by the performance control unit 300 and a change start command for the next change performance is received, the third pending image 52 may be hidden without being moved (moving animation). Also, the second pending image 52 and the first pending image 52 may be moved (moving animation), thereby displaying the first pending image 52 and the changing image 51. In this case, there is no need to switch the display position without moving the pending image 52 (moving animation).
In other words, when multiple pending images 52 are displayed, if the change start command for the change performance is not received by the performance control unit 300 but the change start command for the next change performance is received, the pending image 52 displayed in the specific display area farthest from the changing image 51 will be hidden, and the pending image 52 displayed in a display area different from the specific display area will be displayed moving (moving animation) in the next display area.

In addition, when three or more pending images 52 are displayed, the effect control unit 300 may not receive the change start command for the first (first) change effect or the change start command for the next (second) change effect, and may instead receive the change start command for the next (third) change effect. In this case, the pending images 52 displayed in the first specific display area farthest from the change image 51 and the second specific display area next farthest from the change image 51 after the first specific display area will be hidden without being displayed in a moving manner (moving animation), and the pending images 52 displayed in a display area different from either the first or second specific display area will be displayed in a moving manner (moving animation) and displayed in the next display area.

Furthermore, when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see Fig. 339 (1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see Fig. 339 (3) and (4)) are used in the variable effect shown in Fig. 524 and Fig. 525, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Fig. 524 (7) and (8) and Fig. 525 (9) to (11), the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed. In other words, the restriction on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the end timing of the original variable effect (see Fig. 524 (8)) is relaxed.
Furthermore, when the volume image and light intensity image (see (5) to (8) of FIG. 339) of Modification Example 3 are used in the variable performance shown in FIG. 524 and FIG. 525, the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 will not be displayed even if the performance key 162 is operated at the timings shown in (7), (8) of FIG. 524 and (9) to (11) of FIG. 525. In other words, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the end timing of the original variable performance, are extended.
In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the effect key 162 is operated during execution of a variable effect, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect ends (when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are not output. In this case, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 524 (7), (8), and 525 (9) to (11), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output. In other words, the restriction on the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound at the original end timing of the variable effect (see Figure 524 (8)) is relaxed.

Next, we will explain a modified example of the presentation example shown in Figures 524 and 525.
Figure 526 shows a modified example of the rendering example shown in Figures 524 and 525.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 524(1) to (8) and Figures 525(9) and (10) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 526(1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 begin to change as the special pattern begins to change. At this time, the game control board 200B and the effect control board 300B become disconnected.

Next, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, but the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the change stop command, as shown in Figure 526 (2). In this case, the decorative symbol 41 continues to be temporarily stopped, and the small symbol 56 continues to change.
Then, when the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed as shown in Fig. 526 (3). On the other hand, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, the cause of the disconnection between the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B is resolved, and the game control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B are connected, as shown in Figure 526 (4). At this time, when the upper and right keys of the presentation keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. Meanwhile, neither the volume nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, the display of the special symbol begins to change. Then, as shown in FIG. 526 (5), when the performance control unit 300 receives a change start command, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change, the reserved image 52 is hidden, and the changing image 51 is displayed.

Then, as the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 526(6). Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed.
Then, after the variable effect has ended, when the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed, and the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output, as shown in FIG. 526 (7).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the change stop command for the change performance before the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is not received properly by the performance control unit 300, and the change start command for the change performance after the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is received by the performance control unit 300, the change performance will be executed according to the received change start command.
In this case, it is easier for the player to recognize which special pattern change related to which change start command is being executed, compared to when a change start command related to the change performance next to the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is received by the performance control unit 300 and a performance corresponding to the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the change start command for the change performance in which the first start operation is executed is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, and the change start command for the next change performance is received by the performance control unit 300, the first start operation is executed, but the movement pattern of the pending image 52 will be different from normal.
In this case, even if the fluctuation start command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming unnatural. Also, even if the fluctuation start command is not received normally by the performance control unit 300, when the fluctuation start command for the next fluctuation performance is received by the performance control unit 300, the pending image 52 is displayed moving, so it is possible to prevent the number of pending numbers from being misidentified. On the other hand, by making the movement mode of the pending image 52 different between when the fluctuation start command is received normally by the performance control unit 300 and when it is not received normally, it is possible to make the user more reliably recognize that the fluctuation start command was not received normally by the performance control unit 300.

In addition, when the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 1 (see FIGS. 339(1) and (2)) or the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 of modified example 2 (see FIGS. 339(3) and (4)) are used in the variable effect shown in Fig. 526, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Fig. 526(2) to (5), the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 are displayed. In other words, the restriction on the display of the volume image 42 and light intensity image 43 at the end timing of the original variable effect (see Fig. 526(2)) is relaxed.
Furthermore, when the volume image and light intensity image of Modification Example 3 (see (5) to (8) of FIG. 339) are used in the variable effect shown in FIG. 526, the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45 are not displayed even if the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 526. In other words, the restrictions on the customer waiting volume image 44 and the customer waiting light intensity image 45, which are relaxed to the end timing of the original variable effect, are extended.
In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound are output when the effect key 162 is operated while the variable effect is being executed, and when the effect key 162 is operated when the variable effect ends (when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are not output. In this case, when the effect key 162 is operated at the timing shown in Figures 526 (2) to (5), the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output. In other words, the restriction on the output of the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound at the original end timing of the variable effect (see Figure 526 (2)) is relaxed.

(Example of power cut during a variable effect)
Next, a description will be given of the situation in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored during the execution of a variable presentation.
527 to 529 are diagrams showing one mode in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the execution of a variable performance and then restored. In this example, it is assumed that the variable performance (see FIGS. 443 to 447) is performed when "ER11" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 327.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 443 (1) to (8), 444 (9) to (16), and 445 (17) to (22) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 527 (1), the first reach effect begins, with the reach line image 539, reach suggestion image 540, reach emphasis image 541, and first reach eye emphasis image 542 being displayed, and the first reach action being performed. Also, at this time, the central movable role device 115B, lamp L, and effect button 161 are lit in a light-emitting manner that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect. Also, background music (BGM including the first reach emphasis sound, etc.) that corresponds to the progress of the variable effect is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Figure 527 (2), the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. At this timing, the first reach effect continues on the image display unit 114. In addition, the middle movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to light up, and background music continues to be output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Fig. 527 (3), sound is no longer output from the speaker 156. Meanwhile, the first reach effect continues on the image display unit 114. Also, the middle movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to be lit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 527(4), the image display unit 114 turns off (the image is no longer displayed). Meanwhile, the central movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to be lit.
Next, as shown in Figure 527 (5), the effect button 161 is turned off. Meanwhile, the middle movable role object 115B and the lamp L continue to be lit.
Next, as shown in Figure 527 (6), the central movable part 115B is turned off. Meanwhile, the lamp L continues to be lit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 527(7), the lamp L is turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 527 (8), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on again (the power is restored).
Next, as shown in Fig. 528 (9), a preparation image 627 is displayed. Meanwhile, the central movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 are turned off, and no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect key 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 528 (10), the lamp L and effect button 161 begin to light up. More specifically, they light up in a recovery mode (e.g., white) when power is turned on (the power is restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Meanwhile, the central movable role piece 115B is turned off, and no sound is output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 528 (11), the central movable device 115 moves to a position where it overlaps with the image display unit 114 and begins to light up. The movement and lighting of the central movable device 115 occurs in a recovery mode (e.g., red) when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on (power is restored). Meanwhile, no sound is being output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 528 (12), the center movable role object 115 moves upward and stops. Furthermore, no sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, no emphasis sound is output to emphasize the movable role object 115. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol stops (it is displayed as stopped).
Next, as shown in FIG. 528 (13), the preparation image 627 is hidden, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped by "123," which is a return mode associated with the power being turned on (power being restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Also, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, stage image 61, stage notification image 501, and change count image 502 are displayed. Also, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 of the first starting slot 121. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 528 (14), the variable display of the next special symbol begins. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 528 (15), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 begin to change. The changing image 51 is displayed, and the hold number display 55 of the first starting slot 121 is updated to "0." At this time, sound begins to be output from the speaker 156. More specifically, background music is output in accordance with the progress of the change effect. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 528 (16), the variable effect continues. At this time, when the player operates the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. When the effect keys 162 are further operated, the volume and the light intensity are changed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 529 (17), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "623", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "32 games."

530 to 532 are diagrams showing one mode in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the variable performance and then restored. In this example, the variable performance (see FIGS. 448 to 453) is performed when "EA1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in FIG. 327.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 448 (1) to (8), Figures 449 (9) to (16), Figures 450 (17) to (24), and Figures 451 (25) to (31) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 530 (1), in the first jackpot effect, a first jackpot notification sound is output, a vibration effect is executed, the central movable device 115B moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114, the central movable device 115B, effect button 161, and lamp L emit light in rainbow colors, and a first jackpot highlight image 566 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 530 (2), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. At this timing, the display of the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues. Furthermore, the vibration effect, the rainbow-colored illumination of the center movable device 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161, and the output of the first jackpot notification sound continue. Furthermore, the center movable device 115B stops at a position overlapping with the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 530(3), sound is no longer output from the speaker 156. Meanwhile, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to be displayed. The vibration effect continues. The rainbow-colored illumination of the center movable element 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 530(4), the vibration effect ends. Meanwhile, the first jackpot highlight image 566 continues to be displayed. Also, the center movable device 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 530(5), the image display unit 114 turns off (the image is no longer displayed). Meanwhile, the central movable part 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 continue to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 530(6), the effect button 161 is turned off. Meanwhile, the middle movable part 115B and the lamp L continue to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in Figure 530 (7), the middle movable part 115B is turned off. Meanwhile, the lamp L continues to emit light in rainbow colors.
Next, as shown in FIG. 530(8), the lamp L is turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 531 (9), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on again (the power is restored).
Next, as shown in FIG. 531 (10), a preparation image 627 is displayed. Meanwhile, the center movable role object 115B, the lamp L, and the effect button 161 are turned off, and no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect key 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 531 (11), the lamp L and effect button 161 begin to light up. More specifically, they light up in a manner that accompanies the power being turned on (power being restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100. Meanwhile, the central movable device 115B is turned off, and no sound is being output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 531 (12), the central movable device 115 begins to move in a manner associated with the power being turned on (power being restored) to the pachinko gaming machine 100, and begins to light up. Meanwhile, no sound is being output from the speaker 156. Also, at this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume alert sound nor the light intensity alert sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 531 (13), the center movable device 115 moves upward and stops. Furthermore, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity changes, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Furthermore, the special symbol stops fluctuating (is displayed as stopped).
Next, as shown in FIG. 531 (14), the preparation image 627 is hidden, and the jackpot notification image 628 and the first right-hit image 503 are displayed. Meanwhile, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 531 (15), sound is output from the speaker 156. More specifically, background music corresponding to the jackpot game is output. At this time, the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, but neither the volume nor the light intensity is changed, neither the volume image 42 nor the light intensity image 43 is displayed, and neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output.
Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 531 (15), when the player operates the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162, a volume image 42 and a light intensity image 43 are displayed, as shown in Figure 531 (16).

Next, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 532 (17), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness and the small symbol 56 "123" are fixed and stopped. Also, a stage image 61 corresponding to the third stage, a reserved number display 55, a first right-hit image 503, a stage notification image 501, and a time-saving remaining number image 504 are displayed. At this time, if the player operates the upper and right keys of the effect keys 162, the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed. On the other hand, neither the volume notification sound nor the light intensity notification sound is output. Furthermore, when the effect keys 162 are operated, the volume and light intensity are changed.
Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 532 (17), when the player operates the upper key and the right key of the effect keys 162, both the volume and the light intensity are changed, as shown in Figure 532 (18), and the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed, and the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, no settings or notifications regarding the volume and light intensity are made until a predetermined period of time has passed since the power supply was restored, even if the effect key 162 is operated.
In this case, it is possible to prevent confusion as to whether the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored is due to the restoration state or the operation of the effect key 162.

In addition, the timing of the end of each effect when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off during the execution of the variable effects shown in Figures 527 to 529 and Figures 530 to 532 is not limited to the above examples.
If the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while the variable effect is being performed, the image display unit 114 may be turned off (the image will no longer be displayed) after the lamp L is turned off.
Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the lamp L, the movable device 115, and the effect button 161 may be turned off at the same time.
Furthermore, if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the frame lamp 157 may be turned off after the board lamp 116 is turned off. Furthermore, if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the board lamp 116 may be turned off after the frame lamp 157 is turned off. If the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a variable effect is being executed, the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 may be turned off at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off while a jackpot effect is being executed, the lamp L, effect button 161, and movable role device 115 will continue to emit rainbow colors for a predetermined period of time after the power is cut off. In this case, from the time the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off until the various light-emitting devices (lamp L, effect button 161, and movable role device 115) are turned off, the various light-emitting devices may continue to emit rainbow colors by switching the light color, or may continue to emit light in the color that was emitted when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 was cut off.

Furthermore, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, the volume and light intensity may be set to the initial settings (for example, both "3").
Also, for example, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while both the volume and light intensity are "1" in the second stage, it may be set to the first stage and both the volume and light intensity may be set to "3."
Also, for example, if the volume and light intensity are both "1" in the third stage and the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the settings may be maintained in the third stage and both the volume and light intensity may be set to "3."

(Modification of vibration effect)
Figure 533 explains a modified example of vibration effects.
In the present embodiment, the vibration effect is achieved by vibrating the effect button 161. However, the effect body that vibrates in the vibration effect is not limited to the effect button 161.
As shown in FIG. 533 (1), when the variable effect starts, a vibration effect may be executed (see FIG. 448 (2), etc.). In this case, the vibration effect may be realized by vibrating the movable role object 115. In the illustrated example, the vibration effect is executed by vibrating the center movable role object 115.

Also, as shown in Figure 533 (2), a vibration effect may be executed during the first jackpot effect (see Figure 451 (32), etc.). In this case, the vibration effect may be realized by vibrating the movable part 115. In the example shown, the vibration effect is executed by vibrating the central movable part 115 at a position where it overlaps with the image display unit 114.

In this way, the vibrating performance element in the vibration performance may be a movable prop 115.
Although not shown in the figures, in the vibration effect described above, the lamp L (board lamp 116, frame lamp 157) may vibrate instead of the movable prop 115. In other words, the performance object that vibrates in the vibration effect may be the lamp L (board lamp 116, frame lamp 157).

(Modification of left-handed image)
Figure 534 shows a modified example of the left-handed hit image.
In the present embodiment, the left-handed hit image has been described as the first left-handed hit image 47 and the second left-handed hit image 48. However, the display mode of the left-handed hit image is not limited to the above-described example.
As shown in FIG. 534(1), when the special symbol stops, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped. At this time, the player launches the gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111.

Next, when the execution condition for the first left hit notification (three game balls passing through the gate 124 provided on the right side of the game area 111 during normal game play) is met, the first left hit image 47 is displayed as shown in Fig. 534 (2). More specifically, the first left hit image 47 is displayed so as to move from the right side to the left side on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Fig. 534 (3), the first left-hit image 47 is displayed in the image display unit 114 so as to move further to the left, and the entire first left-hit image 47 is displayed. This first left-hit image 47 displays a text portion 47a and an emphasis portion 47c.

In the illustrated example, the text "Hit Left" is displayed as the text portion 47a. In addition, dashed line images extending in the left-right direction are displayed above and below the text portion 47a as the highlighting portion 47c. Even though such decorative images are displayed, they make the text portion 47a (left-hit image) more easily recognizable to the player, and therefore they are perceived as images that emphasize the text portion 47a (left-hit image).
In this way, the left-handed image does not need to have an arrow portion (see FIG. 340(2)). Note that the left-handed image may have an arrow portion but no character portion.

Next, as shown in Figure 534 (4), the first left-hand hit image 47 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move further to the left on the image display unit 114, so that part of the first left-hand hit image 47 is no longer displayed.
Then, as shown in Figure 534 (5), the first left-hand hit image 47 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move further to the left on the image display unit 114, and the first left-hand hit image 47 is no longer displayed.
In addition, even when the first left-hit image 47 shown in FIG. 534 is displayed, the first left-hit sound may be output.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 33)
Figure 535 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 33 (see Figure 508).
Next, a description will be given of a modified example of the variation presentation example 33. In the variation presentation example 33, after 100 variation presentations have been executed in the special time-saving game state, the variation presentation based on the reservation for the second start port 122 is executed without using the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 508 (6)), but this is not limited thereto.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 508 (1) to (4) are performed, and then a second transitional image 622 and a result image 623 are displayed as shown in Figure 535 (1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 535 (2), a stage image 61, a stage notification image 501, and a variation count image 502 are displayed. In the illustrated example, a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the stage notification image 501 displays the text "Space," and the variation count image 502 displays the text "100 games." Furthermore, a second left-hand hit image 48 is displayed and a second left-hand hit sound is output. In the second left decorative pattern 41, the effects described using FIGS. 340 (7), (8), and 341 (9) to (12) are performed. Furthermore, "1" is displayed in the hold number display 55 of the second starting slot 122, but the hold image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 535(3), as the display of the next special symbol begins, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 also begins. The display of the variable image 51 is also displayed. The number of reserved symbols 55 in the second start port 122 is updated to "0."
Next, as shown in FIG. 535(4), three decorative symbols 41, "472," temporarily stop. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 41 perform a first stop action, and the center decorative symbol 41 performs a second stop action. In addition, a first stop emphasis image 572 is displayed around each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, and a fourth stop emphasis image 575 is displayed around the center decorative symbol 41. In addition, a first stop emphasis sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 535(5), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "472", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbol. Also, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Also, the variable count image 502 is updated to "101 games."
535(2) is a variation effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, the left-hit notification may not be executed. Also, even if the variation effect that starts at the timing shown in FIG. 535(2) is a variation effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot (variation effect shown in FIGS. 448 to 453), the second left-hit notification may be executed.

(Modification of prodromal enhancement image)
Next, a modified example of the prognostic-enhanced image will be described.
Fig. 536 shows a modified example of the precursory image. The modified example of the precursory image described below is a modified example of the third precursory image 518 (see Fig. 356 (1) and (2)).

First, before the button effect begins, as shown in FIG. 536 (1), the display of an omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518) begins. In a modified example, a button image 509 is displayed as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518). More specifically, the button image 509 is displayed in an enlarged form as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518). Furthermore, the button image 509 as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518) is displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the decorative pattern 41, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56. Furthermore, the button image 509 as the omen-emphasized image (third omen-emphasized image 518) is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and behind the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the number of reserved balls display 55, and the small pattern 56.

Next, as shown in Fig. 536(2), the button image 509 as the prognosis-enhanced image (third prognosis-enhanced image 518) is displayed in a reduced size, thereby making the left and right decorative patterns 41 easier to see.
Then, as shown in FIG. 536(3), the button image 509 is displayed in a further reduced size until the entire button image 509 is displayed, and the button effect begins.

In this way, the precursor emphasis image may be button image 509. In this case, the display of the precursor emphasis image is regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the display of button image 509 at the same time as button image 509 is displayed. In other words, the timing of displaying the precursor emphasis image need not be just before button image 509 is displayed, but may be any time before button image 509 is displayed.
536 shows an example in which the button image 509 is displayed as a precursor emphasis image by changing its display size, but this is not limiting. The precursor emphasis image may be displayed as a precursor emphasis image by changing its transparency from high to low over time. The precursor emphasis image may be displayed as a precursor emphasis image by increasing the display size of the button image 509 over time.

In addition, when the button image 509 is displayed as an aura-enhanced image, the button image 509 may be displayed in different display or operating modes (different enlarged display modes, different reduced display modes, different transparency change modes, etc.) for each aura-enhanced image (first aura-enhanced image 508, second aura-enhanced image 513, third aura-enhanced image 518, fourth aura-enhanced image 527, fifth aura-enhanced image 530, sixth aura-enhanced image 534).

Furthermore, at the time shown in Figures 536 (1) and (2), although button image 509 is displayed, the button effect has not yet started and the operation valid period for the button effect has not yet begun. Therefore, even if effect button 161 is operated at the time shown in Figures 536 (1) and (2), the operation of effect button 161 is not accepted and the post-operation highlighted image is not displayed.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying an aura-enhancing image simulating light, an aura-enhancing image using button image 509 as shown in FIG. 536 may also be displayed. In this case, the display of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509 may begin after the display of the aura-enhancing image simulating light has begun. Furthermore, the display of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509 may begin after the display of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509 has begun. In other words, if there is a time when both an aura-enhancing image simulating light and an aura-enhancing image using button image 509 are displayed, the display of either of the aura-enhancing images may begin first, or they may begin displaying simultaneously. Furthermore, in this case, the aura-enhancing image using light may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509, in a layer in front of the aura-enhancing image using button image 509.

(Modification of the starting operation)
537 is a diagram showing a modified example of the starting operation. In this modified example, it is assumed that the player repeatedly presses the lower key and the left key of the effect keys 162 (for example, once every second).
First, as shown in Fig. 537(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are fixed and stopped. At this time, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the reserved number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, the stage notification image 501, and the change count image 502 are displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 shows "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 537 (2), a stop action is performed when the change of the decorative pattern 41 is stopped. In the stop action, each character of the three decorative patterns 41 is displayed leaning to the right and waving their right hand up and down. Furthermore, while the change is stopped, the stop action is performed periodically. The period of the stop action is, for example, 0.3 seconds.
In the illustrated example, the entire stopped action is easily visible due to the right decorative pattern 41 and the center decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, in the left decorative pattern 41, a part of the character is covered by the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 (displayed on the rear layer), so the action display of the stopped action is difficult or impossible to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 537(3), the game ball enters the first start opening 121. In this case, the reserved number display 55 of the first start opening 121 is updated to "1" and the reserved image 52 is displayed. Meanwhile, the stopped operation by the three decorative symbols 41 continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 537 (4), the change effect begins with the start of the special symbol change display, the pending image 52 moves to display the change image 51, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "0," and the change by the small symbol 56 begins. Furthermore, with the start of the change effect, the decorative symbols 41 move upward, and a first start emphasis image 588 is displayed around each of the three decorative symbols 41. Meanwhile, the stop action continues. That is, from the time the change is stopped to the start of the change effect, the decorative symbols 41 tilt and the right hand continues to wave (the action is progressing). Thus, in this modified example, the periodic movement display of the decorative symbols 41 that was performed during the change stop continues (continuously) as the start action. Furthermore, a first start emphasis sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 537 (5), a change is started by three decorative symbols 41. In this change effect, any of the change effects described above (the effect after the start of the change effect) may be performed.

(Emphasis on temporary stop)
Next, the temporary stop highlighting effect will be described. The temporary stop highlighting effect is an effect that highlights the decorative symbol 41 while the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped.
538 and 539 are diagrams showing the temporary stop highlighting effect. In addition, in Fig. 538 to Fig. 547, the display area of the decorative pattern 41 on the image display unit 114 and the surrounding area of this area are shown enlarged. Also, in Fig. 538 to Fig. 547, for the sake of simplicity, illustration and explanation of each of the effects described above as being executed in the variable effect are omitted.
First, as shown in Figure 538 (1), in the change performance, three decorative patterns 41 are changed.
Next, as shown in Figure 538 (2), the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 538 (3), the left decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed. Then, a temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 41 begins. In this example, a temporary stop is performed in which the decorative pattern 41 swings up and down. Then, with the start of the temporary stop, a temporary stop highlighting effect begins. In the example shown, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes as a temporary stop highlighting effect. More specifically, the lower part of the letters in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 538 (4), the left decorative pattern 41 descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the portion displayed in a reflected manner in the decorative pattern 41 changes. More specifically, the central portion of the character in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 538 (5), the left decorative pattern 41 further descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the portion of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in a reflected manner changes. More specifically, the upper portion of the characters in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 538(6), the left decorative pattern 41 rises during the temporary stop. Furthermore, as a temporary stop highlight effect, the portion of the decorative pattern 41 displayed in a reflected manner changes. More specifically, the central portion of the characters in the left decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner. The position and display manner of the decorative pattern 41 at this time are the same as those shown in FIG. 538(4). That is, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 due to the temporary stop and the movement display of the decorative pattern 41 due to the temporary stop highlight effect are linked.
In addition, a right decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the right decorative pattern 41 is positioned below the left decorative pattern 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 538 (7), the left decorative symbol 41 rises further during the temporary stop. Furthermore, during the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower part of the characters in the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a reflective manner. After this, the left decorative symbol 41 periodically performs the linked temporary stop and temporary stop highlighting effect until the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped.
In addition, the right decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed and reaches a position where it is aligned vertically with the left decorative pattern 41. Then, the right decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the temporary stop highlighting effect is achieved by displaying the lower part of the characters in the right decorative pattern 41 in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 538 (8), the left and right decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In this way, in this embodiment, the newly temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 is synchronized with the decorative pattern 41 that has already been temporarily stopped, and a temporary stop and temporary stop highlighting effect is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 539 (9), the left and right decorative patterns 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Additionally, to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the letters in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 539 (10), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Also displayed is a center decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, the center decorative pattern 41 is positioned below the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right.

Next, as shown in Fig. 539 (11), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed until it reaches a position where it is aligned with the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the vertical direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the temporary stop highlighting effect is achieved by displaying the lower part of the characters of the middle decorative pattern 41 in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 539 (12), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center of the letters is displayed in a reflected manner.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 539 (13). This ends the temporary stop and the temporary stop highlighting effect, and the display mode of the three decorative symbols 41 returns to the mode before the temporary stop highlighting effect started.

As described above, in this embodiment, emphasis effects are periodically performed using the decorative patterns 41 that are temporarily stopped.
In addition, in the left and right decorative patterns 41, the temporary stop highlighting effect ends after one or more cycles of the action display in the temporary stop highlighting effect, while in the center decorative pattern 41, the temporary stop highlighting effect ends before one cycle of the action display in the temporary stop highlighting effect. However, even in the center decorative pattern 41, one or more cycles of the action display in the temporary stop highlighting effect may be performed before the temporary stop highlighting effect ends.
In addition, the part whose display mode has changed due to the temporary stop highlighting effect (the part displayed in a reflected manner in Figures 538 and 539) may be referred to as the temporary stop highlighting image below.
The period of the action display by the temporary stop highlighting effect is, for example, 1.5 seconds, but the period of the action display by the temporary stop highlighting effect may be any period.

540 is a diagram showing a temporary stop highlighting effect. In the following example, an example of a change effect based on the reservation of the first start port 121 being "4" will be described.
First, as shown in Figure 540 (1), in the change performance, three decorative patterns 41 are changed.

Next, as shown in Figure 540 (2), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 540(3), the three decorative symbols 41 move upward at high speed. Then, the three decorative symbols 41 start to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the lower portions of the characters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 540(4), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the characters are reflected.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 540 (5). This ends the temporary stop and the temporary stop highlighting effect, and the display mode of the three decorative symbols 41 returns to the mode before the temporary stop highlighting effect started.

In this way, in a variable effect based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4", the temporary stop highlight effect ends before one cycle of the action display in the temporary stop highlight effect is completed in the three decorative patterns 41. However, even in a variable effect based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4", one or more cycles of the action display in the temporary stop highlight effect may be performed in the three decorative patterns 41 before the temporary stop highlight effect is completed.
Furthermore, in a scattered variation effect based on the hold of the first starting port 121 being "4", the temporary stop emphasis effect ends before the operation display in the temporary stop emphasis effect of the three decorative patterns 41 completes one cycle, whereas in a miss variation effect in which an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, the temporary stop emphasis effect may end after the display of the switching image 586 (see Figure 439 (23) etc.) after the operation display in the temporary stop emphasis effect of the three decorative patterns 41 completes one cycle or more.
Furthermore, there are cases where the fluctuation stop command for the random fluctuation performance based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4" is not received by the performance control unit 300, and the fluctuation stop command for the next fluctuation performance is received by the performance control unit 300. In this case, in the fluctuation performance based on the hold of the first start port 121 being "4", the operation display in the temporary stop highlight performance of the three decorative patterns 41 may be one cycle or more before the temporary stop highlight performance ends.

In the example shown in Fig. 523-1, the temporary stop highlighting effect using three decorative symbols 41 is executed over the time period from time T6 to time T7. In the example shown in Fig. 523-2, the temporary stop highlighting effect using three decorative symbols 41 is executed over the time period from time T26 to time T28. Here, the time period from time T26 to time T28 is longer than the time period from time T6 to time T7.
Then, from time T6 to time T7 and from time T26 to time T28, the operation display in the temporary stop highlighting effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed for one or more cycles.
The number of periods of the operation display executed as the temporary stop highlighting effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is greater from time T26 to time T28 than from time T6 to time T7.

Figure 541 shows the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts.
First, as shown in Figure 541 (1), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 541 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the start operation is performed, and the three decorative symbols 41 rise. In the illustrated example, the lower parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Then, as shown in Figure 541 (3), the decorative pattern 41 begins to change.
In this way, the temporary stop highlighting image may be displayed during the start operation. That is, the temporary stop highlighting effect may be executed while the start operation is being executed.

Figures 542 and 543 are figures showing the temporary stop highlighting effect after the start of the reach effect.
First, after the reach effect (see FIG. 432 (9)) starts, decorative patterns 41 on the left and right are displayed as shown in FIG. 542 (1).
Next, as shown in Fig. 542(2), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an expanding manner. In this way, the left and right decorative symbols 41 may be expanded after the start of the reach effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 542 (3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 begin to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect begins. In the example shown, the left and right decorative patterns 41 rise, and the lower parts of the characters in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 542 (4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 542 (5), the left and right decorative symbols 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the characters in the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 542 (6), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In addition, a center decorative pattern 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the center decorative pattern 41 is positioned below the left and right decorative patterns 41. In addition, the center decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a smaller display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 542 (7), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. In addition, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed until it reaches a position where it is aligned with the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the vertical direction. Then, the middle decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, the temporary stop highlighting effect is achieved by displaying the lower part of the characters of the middle decorative pattern 41 in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 542 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the letters are reflected.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 543 (9). This ends the temporary stop and the temporary stop highlighting effect, and the display mode of the three decorative symbols 41 returns to the mode before the temporary stop highlighting effect started. In addition, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are reduced in size to return to the display size before the start of the reach effect.

Figure 544 shows a temporary stop highlighting effect when the SP reach effect is being executed.
First, as shown in Fig. 544(1), in the SP reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped and the effect of emphasizing the temporary stop is executed. In the example shown, the effect of emphasizing the temporary stop is displayed by reflecting the upper part of the characters in the left and right decorative symbols 41.
In addition, after the development image 584 (see Figure 439 (19)) is hidden, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a moving manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 544 (2), the left and right decorative patterns 41 rise during the temporary stop. Furthermore, as an emphasis effect during the temporary stop, the center portions of the characters in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reflected manner. Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Fig. 544 (3), the left and right decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. In addition, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower parts of the characters of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In addition, the central decorative pattern 41 moves upward at high speed. Then, the central decorative pattern 41 starts to temporarily stop, and a temporary stop highlighting effect starts. In the illustrated example, as the temporary stop highlighting effect, the lower part of the characters in the central decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 544 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the characters are reflected.
Next, as shown in Fig. 544 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 544 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a manner such that the center portions of the letters are reflected.

Next, as shown in Fig. 544 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the lower parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 439 (22) to (24) are executed.
In this way, in the SP reach effect, the operation display in the temporary stop highlight effect is performed for one cycle or more in the middle decorative pattern 41 before the temporary stop highlight effect ends.

In addition, Figure 544 explains the temporary stop highlighting effect when the SP reach effect is being executed.
Here, even when the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the temporary stop highlight effect shown in Fig. 544 may be executed. More specifically, after the post-sixth button image 590 (see Fig. 447 (34)) is displayed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 of the miss and the temporary stop highlight effect may be executed in the manner shown in Fig. 544.

Figure 545 is a diagram showing a temporary stop highlighting effect using decorative patterns 41 with the same number of digits.
First, an emphasis effect using the doublet decorative symbols 41 (see Fig. 452 (40)) is performed, and then, as shown in Fig. 545 (1), a temporary stop is performed using the doublet decorative symbols 41, and an emphasis effect during the temporary stop is executed. In the illustrated example, as the emphasis effect during the temporary stop, the centers of the characters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 545 (2), the three decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the lower parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 545(3), the three decorative symbols 41 descend during the temporary stop. In addition, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the center portions of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 545 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 further descend during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper parts of the letters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 545 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Furthermore, as a temporary stop highlight effect, the center portions of the characters of the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reflective manner. Thus, for the double-digit decorative symbols 41, the motion display in the temporary stop highlight effect is performed for one or more cycles before the temporary stop highlight effect ends.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 453 (41) to (46) are performed.

In the example shown in Fig. 523-1, the temporary stop highlighting effect using the doublet decorative symbols 41 is executed over a period from time T17 to time T18 (time t2). In the example shown in Fig. 523-2, the temporary stop highlighting effect using the doublet decorative symbols 41 is executed over a period from time T37 to time T39 (time t4).
In this case, the emphasis effect continues even after the timing at which the variable effect would normally end, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, the number of periods of the operation display executed as the temporary stop highlighting effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is greater from time T37 to time T39 than from time T17 to time T18.

(Variations of the temporary stop highlighting effect)
546 is a diagram showing a modified example of the temporary stop highlighting effect. The change in the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 due to the temporary stop highlighting effect is not limited to the above-mentioned example.
As shown in Fig. 546(1), a temporary stop and a temporary stop highlight effect are executed for the decorative pattern 41. In the example shown, in the temporary stop highlight effect, the face of the character in the decorative pattern 41 is hidden by the text.

Next, as shown in Fig. 546 (2), the decorative symbols 41 rise during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the face of the character in the decorative symbols 41 is displayed in motion so as to appear above the text.
Next, as shown in Fig. 546 (3), the decorative symbols 41 rise further during the temporary stop. Also, to emphasize the temporary stop, the face and part of the body of the character in the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action so that they appear above the characters.

Next, as shown in Fig. 546(4), the decorative pattern 41 descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the character's body in the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion so that it is hidden by the text. The display mode of the decorative pattern 41 at this time is the same as that shown in Fig. 546(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 546(5), the decorative pattern 41 further descends during the temporary stop. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the character face of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a motion so that it is hidden by the text. The display mode of the decorative pattern 41 at this time is the same as that shown in Fig. 546(1).
In this way, the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 546 (1) to (5) may be periodically executed as a temporary stop highlighting effect.

(Other variations of the temporary stop highlighting effect)
Figure 547 shows another modified example of a temporary stop highlighting effect.
As shown in Fig. 547(1), a temporary stop and a temporary stop highlight effect are executed for the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, in the temporary stop highlight effect, the center of the characters in the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 547 (2), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the character position does not change, while the letters face left. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the lower part of the letters of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 547 (3), in the temporary stop, the position of the character in the decorative pattern 41 remains unchanged, while the letters face forward. Also, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the center of the letters in the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 547 (4), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the character position does not change, while the letters face to the right. Also, as an effect to emphasize the temporary stop, the upper part of the letters of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reflected manner.
Next, as shown in Fig. 547 (5), in the temporary stop, the position of the character in the decorative pattern 41 remains unchanged, while the letters face forward. Also, in the temporary stop highlighting effect, the center of the letters in the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in a reflected manner.
In this way, the operational display of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 547 (1) to (5) may be periodically executed as a temporary stop highlighting effect.

The temporary stop highlighting effect may be achieved by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 (part of the decorative pattern 41 becomes the display mode of the temporary stop highlighting image), or by adding the temporary stop highlighting image to a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 in the display area of the decorative pattern 41, thereby changing the visibility of the decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, even during execution of the temporary stop highlighting effect, the decorative pattern 41 may overlap with the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a layer behind the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, making the temporary stop highlighting effect difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a stop-time action and a stop emphasis image are displayed. Here, a temporary stop emphasis effect may be started when the stop-time action and the stop emphasis image are being displayed. In this case, if the stop emphasis image is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, the stop emphasis image makes the temporary stop emphasis effect difficult to see or impossible to see. More specifically, in the area of the decorative pattern 41 that overlaps with the stop emphasis image, the temporary stop emphasis effect becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. On the other hand, the visibility of the temporary stop emphasis effect is not affected by the stop-time action.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the start action and the display of the start emphasis image are performed when the decorative pattern 41 begins to change. Here, a temporary stop emphasis effect may be started when the start action and the display of the start emphasis image are being performed. In this case, if the start emphasis image is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the start emphasis image makes the temporary stop emphasis effect difficult to see or impossible to see. More specifically, in the area of the decorative pattern 41 that overlaps with the start emphasis image, the temporary stop emphasis effect becomes difficult to see or impossible to see. On the other hand, the visibility of the temporary stop emphasis effect is not affected by the start action.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect using the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figure 509 is executed, a temporary stop highlighting effect is not executed.
In addition, the temporary stop highlighting effect using a specific decorative pattern 41 (for example, the middle decorative pattern 41) among the three decorative patterns 41 may not be executed.

In this embodiment, the display sizes of the highlighted images are different from each other. Specifically, the ratio of the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 to the decorative pattern 41 is different from each other. Furthermore, the ratio of the display area to the decorative pattern 41 is different from each other.
Here, the temporary stop highlighted image may have the lowest ratio of the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 to the decorative pattern 41 among all the highlighted images. Also, the temporary stop highlighted image may have the lowest ratio of the display area to the decorative pattern 41 among all the highlighted images. Also, the temporary stop highlighted image may have the smallest display size among all the highlighted images.
Furthermore, the chance eye emphasis image 587 may have the highest ratio of the area overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 to the decorative pattern 41 among all the emphasis images. Furthermore, the chance eye emphasis image 587 may have the highest ratio of the display area to the decorative pattern 41 among all the emphasis images. Furthermore, the chance eye emphasis image 587 may have the largest display size among all the emphasis images.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 starts to change, the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 and the start emphasis image gradually decreases (the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 and the start emphasis image increases, the decorative pattern 41 and the start emphasis image become hidden by other effect images, etc.), while the decorative pattern 41 changes at high speed. On the other hand, when the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 gradually decreases and the stopped emphasis image becomes invisible, gradually improving the visibility of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 41 may maintain a high state of visibility from the start of the change until the temporary stop.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a variable effect is performed in which three decorative patterns 41 are displayed together (see Figure 430 (3) and Figure 540 (2)).
In this case, the three decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped simultaneously. Also, the three decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped approximately simultaneously, and do not have to be temporarily stopped at the same timing.
In addition, in a variable effect in which three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, a temporary stop highlight effect may not be executed. In addition, the proportion of the temporary stop highlight image to the decorative symbols 41 in the temporary stop highlight effect may be smaller in a variable effect in which three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop simultaneously or approximately simultaneously than in a variable effect in which three decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop in order.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned change performances, the three decorative patterns 41 may start changing in order (for example, left decorative pattern 41, right decorative pattern 41, middle decorative pattern 41), the three decorative patterns 41 may start changing simultaneously, or the three decorative patterns 41 may start changing approximately simultaneously.
In either manner in which the fluctuation is started, the temporary stop emphasis image may be displayed when the start operation is performed. Also, in the case where three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate simultaneously or three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate approximately simultaneously, the temporary stop emphasis image may not be displayed when the start operation is performed. Furthermore, in the case where three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate simultaneously or three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate approximately simultaneously, the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis image to the decorative patterns 41 in the temporary stop emphasis performance may be smaller when three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate simultaneously or three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate approximately simultaneously than when three decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate in sequence.

In addition, there are variation modes in which the pattern (middle decorative pattern 41, etc.) that starts to change last (temporarily stops) is smaller (or larger) than the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right. In such cases, it is possible to make the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis image of the pattern (middle decorative pattern 41, etc.) that starts to change last (temporarily stops) in the middle decorative pattern 41 smaller (or larger) than the proportion of the temporary stop emphasis images of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the left and right decorative patterns 41.

In addition, the proportion of the temporary stop highlight image in the decorative pattern 41 may be smaller in the time-shortened game state than in the normal game state. In addition, the display size of the temporary stop highlight image may be smaller in the time-shortened game state than in the normal game state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the start emphasis image and the stop emphasis image are displayed not only in areas overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 but also in areas not overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, while the temporary stop emphasis image may be displayed only in areas overlapping with the display area of the decorative pattern 41.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a reach symbol emphasizing image or a double symbol emphasizing image is displayed.
Here, when the reach symbol emphasis image or the doublet symbol emphasis image is displayed, the temporary stop emphasis image may be displayed. In this case, the temporary stop emphasis image is displayed in a layer behind the reach symbol emphasis image or the doublet symbol emphasis image. Therefore, in the part (or the entirety) of the decorative pattern 41 where the reach symbol emphasis image or the doublet symbol emphasis image overlaps, the temporary stop emphasis image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that various operation displays are executed by the decorative symbols 41. Here, among the operation displays of the decorative symbols 41, operation displays other than the temporary stop (start operation, stop operation, reach operation, operation of the decorative symbols 41 with double numbers, etc.) are not executed periodically. In other words, among the operation displays of the decorative symbols 41, operation displays other than the temporary stop (start operation, stop operation, reach operation, operation of the decorative symbols 41 with double numbers, etc.) are not executed repeatedly, but are executed only once.
It has also been described that an emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. Here, the display (operational display) of the emphasis images (start emphasis image, reach symbol emphasis image, doublet emphasis image, stop emphasis image, etc.) other than the provisional stop emphasis image among the various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 is not executed periodically. In other words, the display (operational display) of the emphasis images (start emphasis image, reach symbol emphasis image, doublet emphasis image, stop emphasis image, etc.) other than the provisional stop emphasis image among the various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 is not executed repeatedly, but is executed only once.
Furthermore, the display (operational display) of the precursor emphasis image and the post-operation emphasis image is not performed periodically, i.e., the display (operational display) of the precursor emphasis image and the post-operation emphasis image is not performed repeatedly but is performed only once.
Furthermore, any of the above-described highlighted images may be displayed in motion.

(Volume Limit)
Next, the restriction on the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the present embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 is set to one of a plurality of levels. Here, an upper limit of the volume to be output may be set according to the level of the volume setting.

Let's consider a case where the volume is set to one of seven levels. In this case, if the volume is "7," the upper limit is set to 95 dB. If the volume is "6," the upper limit is set to 90 dB. If the volume is "5," the upper limit is set to 85 dB. If the volume is "4," the upper limit is set to 80 dB. If the volume is "3," the upper limit is set to 75 dB. If the volume is "2," the upper limit is set to 70 dB. If the volume is "1," the upper limit is set to 65 dB.

In addition, the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by the player operating the effect key 162 may be set by an administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 100. For example, the administrator sets the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by operating the effect key 162 to "4." In this case, the volume levels that can be set by operating the effect key 162 are "1," "2," "3," and "4." In other words, the upper limit of the volume that can be set by operating the effect key 162 is 80 dB.

The administrator may set the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by the player operating the effect key 162, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on. More specifically, when the effect button 161 is operated while the preparation image 627 (see FIG. 528 (9)) is displayed, a setting screen may be displayed for setting the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by operating the effect key 162. Then, by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161 on the setting screen, the upper limit of the volume level that can be set by subsequent operation of the effect key 162 may be set.

In this embodiment, it has been described that a start action is executed. Here, the start action may be a movement or movement of the entire decorative pattern 41, or a movement or movement of only the character portion of the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it was explained that a left-hit sound is output when a left-hit notification is executed during a variable effect. In this case, even when a sound effect corresponding to the variable effect is being output, the left-hit sound may be output without restriction.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the identification image or specific image is the stage notification image 501, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The identification image or specific image may be, for example, a zone execution image (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613). In this case, the specific portion of the identification image or specific image may be a text portion of the zone execution image ("X zone", "Y zone"). Furthermore, the highlighting portion of the identification image or specific image may be a mark portion of the zone execution image ("◯, △, □, ◇", "●, ▲, ■, ◆").
In addition, in the identification image or the specific image, the specific portion and the highlighting portion may be provided integrally or separately.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the first left-hand hit image 47 (see Figure 340 (2)), the highlighting portion 47c highlights the arrow portion 47b (first left-hand hit image 47).
When the arrow portion 47b and the background portion 47d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the first left-hit image 47, and as a result, the character portion 47a is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the arrow portion 47b and the background portion 47d can also be regarded as highlighting portions that emphasize the character portion 47a (first left-hit image 47).
Furthermore, when the character portion 47a and the background portion 47d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the first left-hit image 47, and as a result, the player is more likely to notice the arrow portion 47b. Therefore, the character portion 47a and the background portion 47d can also be regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the arrow portion 47b (first left-hit image 47).

In the present embodiment, the highlighting portion 47c is associated with the arrow portion 47b, but is not limited to this. The highlighting portion 47c may be associated with the text portion 47a to emphasize the text portion 47a.
Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the character portion 47 a and the arrow portion 47 b is provided in the first left-hand hit image 47. Furthermore, the first left-hand hit image 47 does not necessarily have to have the highlight portion 47 c or the background portion 47 d.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the second left-handed hit image 48 (see Figure 340 (8)), the highlighting portion 48c highlights the arrow portion 48b (second left-handed hit image 48).
When the arrow portion 48b and the background portion 48d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second left-hit image 48, and as a result, the character portion 48a is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the arrow portion 48b and the background portion 48d can also be regarded as highlighting portions that emphasize the character portion 48a (second left-hit image 48).
Furthermore, when the character portion 48a and the background portion 48d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second left-hit image 48, and as a result, the player is more likely to notice the arrow portion 48b. Therefore, the character portion 48a and the background portion 48d can also be perceived as highlighting portions that emphasize the arrow portion 48b (second left-hit image 48).

In the present embodiment, the highlighting portion 48c is associated with the arrow portion 48b, but is not limited to this. The highlighting portion 48c may be associated with the text portion 48a to emphasize the text portion 48a.
Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the character portion 48a and the arrow portion 48b is provided in the second left-hand hit image 48. Furthermore, the second left-hand hit image 48 does not necessarily have to have the highlight portion 48c or the background portion 48d.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the second left-handed hit notification is the notification described using Figures 340 (7), (8) and Figures 341 (9) to (12), but this is not limited to this.
The notifications described using Figures 340(7) and (8) and 341(9) to (12) may be executed as the first left-handed hit notification. In this case, the left-handed hit notifications shown in Figures 440, 441, 454 to 456, 491, 492, and 494-2 may be the first left-handed hit notification.

Also, in the left hit notifications shown in Figures 440, 441, 454 to 456, 491, 492, and 494-2, the second left hit sound is output, but this is not limited to this.
In the left-handed hit notifications shown in Figures 440, 441, 454 to 456, 491, 492, and 494-2, a left-handed hit warning sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the left-handed hit notification described using Figures 440, 441, 454 to 456, 491, 492, and 494-2 is the left-handed hit notification shown in Figures 340 (7), (8), and 341 (9) to (12), but is not limited to this.
As the left-handed hit notification described using Figures 440, 441, 454 to 456, 491, 492, and 494-2, the left-handed hit notification described using Figures 340 (2) to (6) may be executed instead of the left-handed hit notification shown in Figures 340 (7), (8), and 341 (9) to (12).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the background portion 503c is displayed in the first right-hit image 503 (see Figure 343 (1)).
When the background portion 503c is displayed, the first right-hit image 503 is more likely to be noticed by the player, and as a result, the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b are more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the background portion 503c can also be regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b (first right-hit image 503).
Furthermore, the first right-hit image 503 only needs to have at least one of the character portion 503a and the arrow portion 503b, and does not necessarily need to have the background portion 503c.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the second right-hit image 507 (see Figure 344 (2)), the highlighting portion 507c highlights the arrow portion 507b (second right-hit image 507).
When the arrow portion 507b and the background portion 507d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second right-hit image 507, and as a result, the character portion 507a is more likely to be noticed. Therefore, the arrow portion 507b and the background portion 507d can also be regarded as highlighting portions that emphasize the character portion 507a (second right-hit image 507).
Furthermore, when the character portion 507a and the background portion 507d are displayed, the player is more likely to notice the second right-hit image 507, and as a result, the player is more likely to notice the arrow portion 507b. Therefore, the character portion 507a and the background portion 507d can also be regarded as an emphasis portion that emphasizes the arrow portion 507b (second right-hit image 507).

In the present embodiment, the highlighting portion 507c is associated with the arrow portion 507b, but is not limited to this. The highlighting portion 507c may be associated with the text portion 507a to emphasize the text portion 507a.
Furthermore, the second right-hit image 507 only needs to have at least one of the character portion 507a and the arrow portion 507b, and does not necessarily need to have the highlight portion 507c or the background portion 507d.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second specific images are described as left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48), but this is not limited to this.
The second specific image may be a right-hit image (first right-hit image 503, second right-hit image 507).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is described as being displayed in a stopped state. Here, the "stop display" of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) includes both a provisional stop display and a confirmed stop display.

In the present embodiment, various emphasis images (a reach line image 539, a first reach eye emphasis image 542, a second reach eye emphasis image 543, a third reach eye emphasis image 544, a fourth reach eye emphasis image 545, a fifth reach eye emphasis image 546, a sixth reach eye emphasis image 547, a seventh reach eye emphasis image 548, an eighth reach eye emphasis image 549, a ninth reach eye emphasis image 550, a development emphasis image 554, a first stop emphasis image 572, a second stop emphasis image 573, a third stop emphasis image 574, a fourth stop emphasis image 575, a fifth stop emphasis image 578, a sixth stop emphasis image 579, a pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, a first development teasing emphasis image 585, a chance eye emphasis image 586, a 7, first start emphasis image 588, first doublet emphasis image 591, promotion teaser emphasis image 592, first reach teaser emphasis image 597, second doublet emphasis image 598, seventh stop emphasis image 602, eighth stop emphasis image 603, ninth stop emphasis image 604, tenth stop emphasis image 605, eleventh stop emphasis image 608, twelfth stop emphasis image 609, second development teaser emphasis image 610, second start emphasis image 611, third doublet emphasis image 614, fourth doublet emphasis image 615, thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, second reach teaser emphasis image 617, fifth doublet emphasis image 620, fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, third reach teaser emphasis image 625, and sixth doublet emphasis image 626) are displayed.
Here, various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) may be displayed around (around) the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), and may not be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). Also, various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) may not be displayed around (around) the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), but may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). Also, various emphasis images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) may be displayed around (around) the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) and in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). Furthermore, when various highlighting images that emphasize the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) are displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), these various highlighting images may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern), or on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that each prognostic emphasis image and each post-operation emphasis image are displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Each precursory emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 , while each post-operation emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 .
In addition, each precursory emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, while each post-operation emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops), various emphasis images (first stop emphasis image 572, second stop emphasis image 573, third stop emphasis image 574, fourth stop emphasis image 575, fifth stop emphasis image 578, sixth stop emphasis image 579, pseudo consecutive emphasis image 582, chance number emphasis image 587, first doublet emphasis image 591, second doublet emphasis image 598, seventh stop emphasis image 602, eighth stop emphasis image 603, ninth stop emphasis image 604, tenth stop emphasis image 605, eleventh stop emphasis image 608, twelfth stop emphasis image 609, third doublet emphasis image 614, fourth doublet emphasis image 615, thirteenth stop emphasis image 616, fifth doublet emphasis image 620, fourteenth stop emphasis image 624, sixth doublet emphasis image 626) are displayed.
Here, the display timing of the various highlighted images displayed when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops) may be just before the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops), may be just after the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops), or may be simultaneously with the stopping (temporarily stopping) of the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern). In other words, the display timing of the various highlighted images displayed when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops) may be any timing as long as it is "when the decorative pattern 41 (performance pattern) stops (temporarily stops)."

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 changes the performance mode before the start of a specific performance and after the start of a specific performance (changing the display mode of the highlighting performance, changing the display mode of the changing performance, changing the execution time of the highlighting performance).
Here, the timings at which different types of effects are performed, "before the start of a specific effect" and "after the start of a specific effect," are not limited to times in one variable effect (the same variable effect). In other words, "before the start of a specific effect" and "after the start of a specific effect" may be times in different variable effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in one button performance, change performances that change the display mode of the button image 509 (such as the operation display of the button section 509a, the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c, and the operation display of the highlight character 509d) are repeatedly performed, but this is not limited to this.
For example, in the button presentation, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c may be performed periodically (repeatedly), while the operation display of the highlighted character 509d may not be performed periodically (repeatedly) (performed only once). Furthermore, the operation display of the button section 509a and the display (operation display) of the highlighted character 509d may be performed periodically (repeatedly), while the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c may not be performed periodically (repeatedly) (performed only once). Furthermore, the display (operation display) of the button highlight section 509c and the display (operation display) of the highlighted character 509d may be performed periodically (repeatedly), while the operation display of the button section 509a may not be performed periodically (repeatedly) (performed only once). Furthermore, even in the button presentation in which the highlighted character 509d is not displayed, the same configuration may be used, except that the highlighted character 509d is not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when an operation effect (button effect) is being executed, and it has been explained that examples of the emphasis effect include displaying an emphasis image after the operation.
Here, the emphasis effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161 when the operation effect (button effect) is being executed may be the display of an emphasis image during operation (first emphasis image during operation 514, second emphasis image during operation 531).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button effect, and the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519 (see FIG. 447(33)), the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528 (see FIG. 501(10)), or the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532 (see FIG. 505(5)) is displayed, a jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, the seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, the fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, and the seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532 can also be considered as images suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button effect, if the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520 (see FIG. 451 (31)), the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526 (see FIG. 493 (6)), the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529 (see FIG. 503 (10)), the eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533 (see FIG. 507 (4)), or the nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 (see FIG. 515 (8)) is displayed, a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, the fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, the sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, the eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and the nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535 can also be regarded as images suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the various post-operation emphasis images (first post-operation emphasis image 510, second post-operation emphasis image 511, third post-operation emphasis image 512, fourth post-operation emphasis image 515, fifth post-operation emphasis image 516, sixth post-operation emphasis image 517, seventh post-operation emphasis image 519, eighth post-operation emphasis image 520, ninth post-operation emphasis image 521, tenth post-operation emphasis image 522, eleventh post-operation emphasis image 523, twelfth post-operation emphasis image 524, thirteenth post-operation emphasis image 525, fourteenth post-operation emphasis image 526, fifteenth post-operation emphasis image 528, sixteenth post-operation emphasis image 529, seventeenth post-operation emphasis image 532, eighteenth post-operation emphasis image 533, and nineteenth post-operation emphasis image 535) are images that correspond to the operation of the effect button 161 when the button effect is being executed. Here, the display of various post-operation emphasis images can also be considered as emphasis effects that emphasize the results of operating the effect button 161. In addition, the display of various post-operation emphasis images can also be considered as emphasis effects that emphasize that the effect button 161 has been operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 is capable of executing a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in the variable presentation that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and when the specific presentation is played, it is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis presentation. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include the output of a jackpot notification sound, the display of a jackpot emphasis image, a vibration presentation, a role presentation, and the illumination of the presentation button 161, lamp L, and movable role presentation 115 in rainbow colors. Here, the predetermined emphasis presentation can also be considered as an emphasis presentation that emphasizes the result of the special pattern lottery (that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot). The predetermined emphasis presentation can also be considered as an emphasis presentation that emphasizes that a jackpot game will be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the start suggestion effect and the ongoing suggestion effect are executed in the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
The start suggestion effect and the in-execution suggestion effect may be executed in the SP reach effect. Also, the start suggestion effect and the in-execution suggestion effect may be executed in the normal reach effect. Furthermore, the start suggestion effect and the in-execution suggestion effect may be executed before the start of the normal reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display time (execution time of the button effect, valid operation period for the button effect) of the button section 509a for each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect) has been explained (see Figure 387).
Here, in each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect), the gauge portion 509b of the button image 509 starts to display at the same timing as the button portion 509a, and ends to display at the same timing as the button portion 509a. Therefore, the display time of the button portion 509a in each button effect (first button effect to twenty-second button effect) can also be regarded as the display time of the gauge portion 509b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the specific notification can be a left-handed hit notification. Here, the execution time of the specific notification can be the display time of the left-handed hit image (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48), the output time of the left-handed hit sound (first left-handed hit sound, second left-handed hit sound), the flashing time of the lamp L for the second left-handed hit notification, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed in a layer in front of each effect image when superimposed on each effect image, but this is not limited to this.
When the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are displayed superimposed on each effect image, they may be displayed on a layer behind each effect image.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when various jackpot emphasis images (first jackpot emphasis image 566, second jackpot emphasis image 567, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570) are displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on a layer behind the various jackpot emphasis images, thereby making the decorative pattern 41 difficult or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
When various jackpot emphasis images (first jackpot emphasis image 566, second jackpot emphasis image 567, third jackpot emphasis image 568, fourth jackpot emphasis image 569, fifth jackpot emphasis image 570) are displayed, decorative pattern 41 is not displayed, and thus decorative pattern 41 may be difficult to see or not visible. In other words, when various jackpot emphasis images are displayed, if decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see or not visible, decorative pattern 41 may be displayed or not visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific presentation (jackpot presentation) in a variable presentation that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, and can execute a predetermined emphasis presentation when a jackpot presentation is played. Examples of the predetermined emphasis presentation include outputting a jackpot notification sound, displaying a jackpot emphasis image, vibration presentation, role presentation, and rainbow-colored illumination of the presentation button 161, the lamp L, and the movable role presentation 115. The adjustment means that can be operated by the player and used to adjust the presentation effects include a first adjustment means (presentation key 162) and a second adjustment means (background volume adjustment volume 300S) that is different from the first adjustment means. It has been explained that when a predetermined emphasis presentation is being played, if the first adjustment means is operated, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific notification regarding the presentation effect (see Figure 518 (8)), and if the second adjustment means is operated, the presentation control unit 300 can not execute a specific notification (see Figure 518 (7)). An example of the specific notification is the display of the volume image 42.
Here, the performance control unit 300 may output a volume notification sound when the performance key 162 is operated while a predetermined emphasis performance is being executed, and may not output a volume notification sound when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may output a volume notification sound when the performance key 162 is operated while a predetermined emphasis performance is being performed, and may not display the volume image 42 when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may display a volume image 42 when the performance key 162 is operated while a predetermined emphasis performance is being performed, and may not output a volume notification sound when the back volume adjustment volume 300S is operated. In other words, when a predetermined emphasis performance is being performed,
The "specific notification" that can be executed when the first adjustment means is operated and the "specific notification" that cannot be executed when the second adjustment means is operated may be different specific notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 has been described as making the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image different between the first stage and the second stage when the decorative pattern 41 stops, but is not limited to this. The performance control unit 300 may make one of the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image common and the other different between the first stage and the second stage when the decorative pattern 41 stops.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 has been described as varying both the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image in accordance with the characters of the decorative pattern 41 in one stage, but is not limited to this. The performance control unit 300 may make one of the stop action of the decorative pattern 41 and the display mode of the stop emphasis image common and the other different in accordance with the characters of the decorative pattern 41 in one stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 changes both the action display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 and the double-digit emphasis image depending on the characters of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in one stage, but this is not limited to this.
In one stage, the performance control unit 300 may vary either the action display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 or the double-digit emphasis image according to the characters of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, and may make the other the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the effect key 162 is different from the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the back volume control volume 300S, but this is not limited to this. The number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the effect key 162 and the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the back volume control volume 300S may be the same.
Furthermore, the number of volume levels that can be set by the performance control unit 300 and the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by operating the background volume control volume 300S may be the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the left-hit sounds (first left-hit sound, second left-hit sound, left-hit warning sound) are output at a constant volume regardless of the volume setting made by operating the effect key 162, but this is not limited to this.
The volume of the left-hit sounds (first left-hit sound, second left-hit sound, left-hit warning sound) may be changed by operating the effect key 162. Also, while the volume of the first left-hit sound is changed by operating the effect key 162, the volume of the second left-hit sound and the left-hit warning sound may not be changed even if the effect key 162 is operated.
In addition, the sound (voice, warning sound, etc.) that accompanies the occurrence of an error (magnetic error, etc.) described later in the third embodiment may be output at maximum volume without changing the volume regardless of the state in which the effect key 162 is operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) are displayed on a layer behind the volume image (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and the light intensity image (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45), but are not limited to this.
The left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and light intensity images (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45). Also, the first left-handed hit image 47 may be displayed on a layer behind the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and light intensity images (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45), while the second left-handed hit image 48 may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume images (volume image 42, customer waiting volume image 44) and light intensity images (light intensity image 43, customer waiting light intensity image 45).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the left-handed hit notification is the same in the first stage and the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may change the display mode (operation display mode) of the left-hit notification image between the first stage and the second stage. Also, the left-hit notification sound may be changed between the first stage and the second stage. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may change the notification mode of the left-hit notification between the first stage and the second stage.

Also, in the variation performance example 8, the image 590 after the sixth button is hidden when the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is displayed (see Figures 447 (35) and (36)), but this is not limited to this.
The sixth button post image 590 may be displayed even when the missing decorative pattern 41 is displayed (see Fig. 447 (35) and (36)). In this case, the sixth button post image 590 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the missing decorative pattern 41, and is displayed in a layer behind the missing decorative pattern 41.

Also, in the variable performance example 28, when the image 619 after the 11th button is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is not displayed (see Figure 501 (11)), but this is not limited to this.
Even when the after-11 button image 619 is displayed (see FIG. 501 (11)), the missing decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, the after-11 button image 619 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the missing decorative pattern 41, and is displayed in a layer behind the missing decorative pattern 41.

Also, in the variable performance example 31, when the image 621 after the 12th button is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is not displayed (see Figure 505 (6)), but this is not limited to this.
Even when the post-12th button image 621 is displayed (see FIG. 505(6)), the missing decorative pattern 41 may be displayed. In this case, the post-12th button image 621 is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the missing decorative pattern 41, and is displayed in a layer behind the missing decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, each post-button image may be displayed on the fifth layer LA5 (see FIG. 433 (2)) in the image display unit 114. In other words, the post-button image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, volume image, light intensity image, and various emphasis images.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the background is different between the left-handed hit image (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) and the right-handed hit image (first right-handed hit image 503, second right-handed hit image 507), but this is not limited to this.
The display format of the background may be the same for the left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) and the right-handed hit images (first right-handed hit image 503, second right-handed hit image 507).

Furthermore, the display position and size of the left-hit notification image and the right-hit notification image may differ. For example, the first left-hit image 47 may be displayed in a different position from the first right-hit image 503 and may be larger in display size than the first right-hit image 503.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of effect images with different action display cycles are displayed.
Here, if the period of the motion display of one effect image and the period of the motion display of another effect image are different, the motion speeds are also different. In this case, the motion display of one effect image and the motion display of another effect image can also be considered to have different motion modes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big win effect is executed, the lamp L emits light in response to the big win effect.
Here, when a specific emphasis effect is executed, the lamp L may be configured to emit light in response to this specific emphasis effect. Examples of the specific emphasis effect include a reach effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a button effect, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image and the light intensity image are displayed on the same layer as the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56, but this is not limited to this.
The volume image and light intensity image may be displayed on a layer in front of the pending number display 55 and small pattern 56, or on a layer behind the pending number display 55 and small pattern 56.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the SP reach performance is being executed, a moving image (SP reach image 552) corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background across the entire display area of the image display unit 114.
Here, even when the SPSP reach performance is being executed, a moving image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance may be displayed as a background in the entire display area of the image display unit 114. In this case, the moving image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is displayed in a display mode (operation mode) different from the moving image corresponding to the SP reach performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the volume notification sound and the light amount notification sound are different sounds, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The volume notification sound and the light amount notification sound may be the same sound.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that a special feature performance is executed. Here, the special feature performance can also be understood as the performance of the movable feature 115 from when the movable feature 115 starts to move until when the movable feature 115 returns to its position before the movement.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that even if the characters are the same decorative pattern 41, different stop emphasis images are displayed when the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and when the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, but this is not limited to this.
When the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped and the center decorative pattern 41 have the same character, the same stop emphasis image may be displayed when the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and when the center decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in certain stages (first stage, second stage), the stop action executed when the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and the stop emphasis image displayed are different between the variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the variable performance in which the reach performance is executed, even if the decorative pattern 41 has a common odd or even number (see Figure 429 (9), Figure 435 (14)), but this is not limited to this.
In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, if the decorative pattern 41 has an odd or even number in common with a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed, the stop action executed when the middle decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and the stop emphasis image displayed may be common to the variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that in the variable effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, the promotion teasing effect may not be executed, but this is not limited to this. In the variable effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot, the promotion teasing effect may always be executed.
In addition, in each of the above-mentioned variable effects in which a promotion teasing effect is being executed, the promotion teasing effect may not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, different role effects (different operations of the movable role object 115) are executed when the development effect is executed and when the jackpot effect is executed, but this is not limited to this.
The role effect (the operation of the movable role object 115) may be the same when the development effect is executed and when the big win effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops in the variable performance and then changes and is displayed again, but this is not limited to this.
Even when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the start of the variable performance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop and again display the variable of the decorative pattern 41. Also, when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the start of the variable performance, the variable of the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed again without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the decorative pattern 41 is difficult or impossible to see during the execution of each big win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
While the decorative pattern 41 may be difficult or impossible to see during the first, third, or fifth jackpot effects, the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be easily visible during the second jackpot effect. Specifically, during the second jackpot effect, the second jackpot highlight image 567 may be displayed only on a portion of the image display unit 114, thereby making the doublet decorative pattern 41 easily visible. Furthermore, during the second jackpot effect, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed on a layer in front of the second jackpot highlight image 567, thereby making the doublet decorative pattern 41 easily visible. However, even in this case, when the second left-hit image 48 is displayed during the second jackpot effect, the doublet decorative pattern 41 becomes more difficult to see than when the second left-hit image 48 is not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach effect is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to this.
In the special time-saving gaming state, the SPSP reach effect may not be executed, but the SP reach effect may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that there are SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect may be regarded as a single effect. That is, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect may be collectively referred to as the SP reach effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the button image 509 after displaying the prognosis-emphasizing image, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display the button image 509 while displaying the foreshadowing image. More specifically, the button image 509 may be displayed after the foreshadowing image has started to be displayed but before it has finished. Here, "after the foreshadowing image has started to be displayed but before it has finished" includes a state in which the foreshadowing image has started to be hidden (for example, the transparency of the foreshadowing image has started to increase), but at least a portion of the foreshadowing image is still displayed. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may display the foreshadowing image in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer in front of the button image 509. Alternatively, the foreshadowing image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer behind the button image 509. Alternatively, the foreshadowing image may be displayed in an area including the display area of the button image 509, on the same layer as the button image 509.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the post-operation emphasis image after hiding the button image 509, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display a post-operation emphasis image while displaying the button image 509. More specifically, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. Here, "after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends" includes a state in which the button image 509 starts to be hidden (for example, the transparency of the button image 509 starts to increase) but at least a portion of the button image 509 remains displayed. Furthermore, if the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button performance, the performance control unit 300 may display the post-operation emphasis image after the performance button 161 is operated and after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may display the post-operation emphasis image in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer in front of the button image 509. Furthermore, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer behind the button image 509. The post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in an area including the display area of the button image 509 and on the same layer as the button image 509 .

In addition, the sound output as the big win notification sound may also change in accordance with the change in the display mode of the big win highlight image.
The big win notification sound can also be regarded as a device emphasis sound that emphasizes the movable device 115.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable presentation, background music is output in accordance with the progress of the game.
Here, the background music may be different before and after the start of the reach effect in the variable effect. In addition, the background music may be the same before and after the start of the reach effect, and the background music may be different before and after the output of the first action emphasis sound (before the action display of the left and right decorative patterns 41) and after the output (after the action display).

In addition, in this embodiment, various emphasized sounds are output.
Here, when the various emphasized sounds are output, none of them are output repeatedly, i.e., when the various emphasized sounds are output, they are output only once.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for the button effect, the button image 509 is hidden. Therefore, the button image 509 can be hidden at any time depending on the operation of the effect button 161.

In addition, in this embodiment, an image that imitates the effect button 161 being pressed multiple times (repeated action display) is displayed as the button image 509 in each button effect, but this is not limited to this.
As the button image 509, a button effect (hereinafter referred to as a non-periodic button effect) may be provided in which an image simulating the manner in which the effect button 161 is pressed only once is displayed (no repeated action display, not periodic). Also, a non-periodic button effect may be executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, etc.), and after the start of the specific effect, a button effect may be executed in which an image simulating the manner in which the effect button 161 is pressed multiple times (repeated action display). Also, a non-periodic button effect may be executed in the time-saving game state, and a button effect may be executed in which an image simulating the manner in which the effect button 161 is pressed multiple times (repeated action display) is executed in the normal game state.

In this embodiment, a first mode highlight effect (symbol blackout) can be executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 when the symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped), and a second mode highlight effect (symbol highlight effect other than blackout) can be executed, and there are cases where the first mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 (for example, a symbol blackout followed by a development effect), where the first mode is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 and then the second mode is executed, and where the second mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 (variable miss effect). The expectation of a jackpot game being executed differs between when the first mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41, when the first mode is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41 and then the second mode is executed, and when the second mode highlight effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 41. More specifically, when the first mode emphasis effect is performed on each of the three decorative patterns 41, when the first mode is performed on the three decorative patterns 41 and then the second mode is performed, and when the second mode emphasis effect is performed on each of the three decorative patterns 41, the earlier the effect is performed, the higher the expectation.
Furthermore, in the variable effect, the emphasis effect of the first mode is not executed after the emphasis effect of the second mode is executed. However, if the variable effect in which the emphasis effect of the second mode is executed after the emphasis effect of the first mode is executed more easily than the variable effect in which the emphasis effect of the first mode is executed after the emphasis effect of the second mode, the variable effect in which the emphasis effect of the first mode is executed may be executed after the emphasis effect of the second mode.
Furthermore, the first mode emphasis effect can be executed in either the first stage or the second stage, but the second mode emphasis effect may be executed only in the first stage. In this case, in the second stage, when a variation effect is executed, a third mode emphasis effect different from the second mode may be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the left-hit image is displayed in a layer behind the volume image and the light intensity image, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The left-handed hit images (first left-handed hit image 47, second left-handed hit image 48) may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume image and the light intensity image. Also, the first left-handed hit image 47 may be displayed on a layer behind the volume image and the light intensity image, while the second left-handed hit image 48 may be displayed on a layer in front of the volume image and the light intensity image.

In addition, when the variable effect is not being executed (variation is stopped), the left-hit image may be placed on the decorative pattern 41, while the right-hit image may not be placed on the decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, the left-hit image may be displayed in different display modes in the first stage and the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 are not illuminated in response to the first left-hit notification. This can also be interpreted as limiting the illumination of the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 in the first left-hit notification.
Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 emit light in accordance with the second left-hit notification. Here, the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 emit light in accordance with the second left-hit notification, and the light may be turned off. Also, when the second left-hit notification is executed in the variable performance, the lamp L, the effect button 161, and the movable role object 115 may be turned off.

In the present embodiment, the start emphasis image is displayed when the start action is being performed. In this case, the display of the start emphasis image may start after the start action is started, or the start action may start after the display of the start emphasis image is started. Furthermore, the start emphasis image may be hidden after the start action is completed, or the start action may be completed after the start emphasis image is hidden.
In the present embodiment, the stop emphasis image is displayed when the stop-time action is being executed. In this case, the display of the stop emphasis image may be started after the stop-time action is started, or the stop-time action may be started after the display of the stop emphasis image is started. Furthermore, the stop emphasis image may be hidden after the stop-time action is finished, or the stop-time action may be finished after the stop emphasis image is hidden.
Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that the reach-eye stop emphasis image is displayed when a reach action is being executed. In this case, the display of the reach-eye emphasis image may start after the reach action has started, or the reach action may start after the display of the reach-eye emphasis image has started. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be hidden after the reach action has ended, or the reach action may end after the reach-eye emphasis image has been hidden.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that a doublet emphasis image is displayed when an action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is being executed. In this case, the display of the doublet emphasis image may be started after the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is started, or the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be started after the display of the doublet emphasis image is started. Furthermore, the doublet emphasis image may be hidden after the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 is finished, or the action display using the doublet decorative pattern 41 may be finished after the display of the doublet emphasis image is finished.

Furthermore, when an emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 may be enlarged or reduced. In this case, the display size of the emphasis image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 may also be enlarged or reduced in accordance with the enlargement or reduction of the decorative pattern 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a portion of the doublet decorative pattern 41 may not fit within the display area of the image display unit 114 (see Figure 461 (12)). Here, even when a reach effect is executed, the reach decorative pattern 41 may expand, and a portion of the reach decorative pattern 41 may not fit within the display area of the image display unit 114.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that an image imitating light or the button image 509 may be displayed as the prognostic-enhanced image.
Here, both the image imitating light and button image 509 may be displayed as the prognostic enhancement image. In this case, the image imitating light may be displayed in a layer in front of button image 509 in an area overlapping the display area of button image 509.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that each prognostic-emphasized image is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limiting.
The premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. Also, for example, in a variable effect, before the start of a specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, and after the start of the specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Also, before the start of a specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, and after the start of the specific effect, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41. Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect.
Also, for example, in the first presentation mode (first stage, etc.), the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41, and in the second presentation mode (second to fourth stages, etc.), the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Also, in the first presentation mode, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, and in the second presentation mode, the premonition emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, any of the prognostic emphasis images may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41) that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed, and the effect patterns include a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern that is different from the first effect pattern, and it has been explained that it is possible to make the display mode of the emphasis effect different when the first effect pattern is displayed and when the second effect pattern is displayed (see Fig. 452 (39), (40), Fig. 461 (11) to (13)). It has also been explained that the first effect pattern includes an even-numbered decorative pattern 41, and the second effect pattern includes an odd-numbered decorative pattern 41.
Here, the action display in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 expands (see Figures 452 (33) and (34)) can also be considered as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the double-digit decorative pattern 41. Also, the display mode (action display mode) is different between the left decorative pattern 41 (right decorative pattern 41) and the center decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 452 (33)). Therefore, "making the display mode of the emphasis effect different when the first decorative pattern is displayed and when the second decorative pattern is displayed" also includes the case where the first decorative pattern is the left decorative pattern 41 or the right decorative pattern 41, and the second decorative pattern is the center decorative pattern 41.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the highlighted image is different for each stage. Here, the highlighted image may have a common display size (shape) for each stage, but may have a different display color, resulting in a different display mode for each stage.
The shape of the identifying portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 may also change for each stage. For example, the identifying portion 501a of the stage notification image 501 may be displayed in the same shape as the highlighting portion 501b for each stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can make the performance mode (display mode, execution time, etc.) of a predetermined performance different between two scenes to be compared (such as the first performance mode and the second mode, or before the start of a specific performance and after the start of a specific performance: hereinafter referred to as the first scene and the second scene). Here, "making different" means that the predetermined performance is executed in the first performance mode in the first scene and in the second performance mode in the second scene, and is not limited to providing a performance mode that is executed only in the first scene and a performance mode that is executed only in the second scene as the predetermined performance.
In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can make the performance manner of the predetermined performance common to the two scenes to be compared. Here, "making common" means that the predetermined performance is executed in the same performance manner in the first scene and the second scene, and is not limited to providing only the same performance manner in the first scene and the second scene as the predetermined performance.

In the present embodiment, the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in red or rainbow colors.
Here, in a button effect in which the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in red or rainbow colors, the effect button 161 may protrude, and the amount of operation (distance) of the effect button 161 may be greater than in a normal button effect.
Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with other operating means (for example, a lever that can be pulled by the player) different from the effect button 161. In addition, in a button effect in which the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed in red or rainbow colors, the operation of the other operating means may be promoted. In this case, an image imitating the other operating means may be displayed in motion as the button image 509.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the stage notification image 501 is displayed when the zone execution image (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
By displaying a zone execution image (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) instead of the stage notification image 501, the stage notification image 501 may be hidden while the zone execution image is displayed. In this case, the change from the stage notification image 501 to the zone execution image can also be seen as a change in the identification image that identifies the presentation mode. In the change, the identification section 501a of the stage notification image 501 changes to the text portion of the zone execution image ("X Zone", "Y Zone"), and the highlighting section 501b of the stage notification image 501 changes to the mark portion of the zone execution image ("◯, △, □, ◇", "●, ▲, ■, ◆").

In addition, the mark portions ("○, △, □, ◇", "●, ▲, ■, ◆") in the zone execution images (first zone execution image 537, second zone execution image 613) may be displayed near the text portions ("X Zone", "Y Zone") in the zone execution images to emphasize the text portions.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the display mode of the post-operation emphasis image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. In this case, the display color of the post-operation emphasis image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot game being executed. For example, in a miss variation presentation, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in white or blue, and in a jackpot variation presentation, the post-operation emphasis image may be displayed in red.

Furthermore, in one button effect, whether or not a post-operation emphasis image is displayed may differ depending on the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, when the eighth button effect is executed in a loss variation effect, the post-operation emphasis image (eighth post-operation emphasis image 520) may not be displayed regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for this eighth button effect. And when the eighth button effect is executed in a jackpot variation effect, if the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period for this eighth button effect, the post-operation emphasis image (eighth post-operation emphasis image 520) may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button effect, the post-operation emphasis image is displayed, and when the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button effect, the post-operation emphasis image is not displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Regardless of whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button effect, a post-operation emphasis image may be displayed when the valid operation period in the button effect has elapsed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the display positions of both the right-hit image and the left-hit image move, but this is not limited to this. The display position of the left-hit image may not move, but the display position of the right-hit image may move.

In addition, the highlighted image displayed in the time-saving game mode may overlap with the right-hit image. In this case, the highlighted image is displayed in a layer behind the right-hit image.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the volume of the second left-handed hitting sound cannot be adjusted, but this is not limiting.
The volume of the second left-hit sound may also be adjusted by operating the effect key 162 or the back volume adjustment volume 300S.

In addition, in each of the variable presentation examples in this embodiment (Variable Presentation Example 1 to Variable Presentation Example 38), it has been explained that the player repeatedly presses the lower key and the left key of the presentation key 162 (for example, every second).
Here, in each variable effect example, the player may alternately operate the upper and lower keys of the effect keys 162 (for example, once every second), and may alternately operate the right and left keys of the effect keys 162 (for example, once every second). In this case, the volume and light intensity are adjusted each time the effect key 162 is operated. Furthermore, if a volume alert sound and a light intensity alert sound can be output in the variable effect, the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output each time the effect key 162 is operated. More specifically, the volume alert sound and the light intensity alert sound are output along with the effect sound corresponding to the variable effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that an emphasis effect is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 161 when the operation effect (button effect) is being executed.
In this embodiment, the timing at which a specific image starts to be displayed varies depending on the timing at which the effect button 161 is operated in the button effect. Examples of the specific images include a first button post image 571, a second button post image 576, a third button post image 577, a fourth button post image 580, a fifth button post image 589, a sixth button post image 590, a seventh button post image 601, an eighth button post image 606, a ninth button post image 607, a tenth button post image 612, an eleventh button post image 619, a twelfth button post image 621, a first jackpot highlight image 566, a second jackpot highlight image 567, a third jackpot highlight image 568, a fourth jackpot highlight image 569, and a fifth jackpot highlight image 570. Therefore, the display of the specific images can also be considered as an emphasis effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 161 when the operation effect (button effect) is being executed. In other words, the display of this specific image can be regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the result of operating the effect button 161. In further other words, the display of this specific image can be regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes that the effect button 161 has been operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that each jackpot highlight image is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the normal game mode, the jackpot highlight image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41), and in the time-saving game mode, the jackpot highlight image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41).
In addition, in the normal game state, the jackpot emphasis image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41), and in the time-saving game state, the jackpot emphasis image may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41).
Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, the big win highlight image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41 (double-digit decorative pattern 41).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 may differentiate the notification mode of the left-hit notification between the first stage and the second stage. Here, differentiating the notification mode of the left-hit notification between the first stage and the second stage also includes a first left-hit notification being made in the first stage and a second left-hit notification being made in the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance, the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 are made invisible, making them difficult or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 may be displayed on a layer behind the performance image displayed in accordance with the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance, making the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the SP reach performance, the pending image 52 becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, while the variable image 51 is easy to see, and in the SPSP reach performance, both the pending image 52 and the variable image 51 become difficult to see or impossible to see, but this is not limited to this.
In the SP reach effect, both the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 may be easily visible, or both may be difficult to see or impossible to see. Also, in the SPSP reach effect, both the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 may be easily visible, or the reserved image 52 may be difficult to see or impossible to see, while the variable image 51 may be easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stop emphasis image displayed when the left decorative pattern 41, "7", temporarily stops is different between the first stage and the second stage (see Figure 458 (4) and Figure 495 (4)), but this is not limited to this. The stop emphasis image displayed when the left decorative pattern 41, "7", temporarily stops may be the same between the first stage and the second stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed to highlight the display color of the button portion 509a, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the display color of the button portion 509a itself may be changed. In this case, the button portion 509a may also be regarded as a button highlight portion. That is, the button image 509a and the button highlight portion 509c may be integrated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that at least a portion of the various highlighted images is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, and therefore at least a portion of the highlighted images is visible even when they are displayed while the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43 are being displayed.
Here, because the second left-hit image 48 has a larger display size than the volume image 42 and the light intensity image 43, if various emphasized images are displayed while the second left-hit image 48 is being displayed, the various emphasized images may be difficult to see. Therefore, the second left-hit image 48 may be displayed in a display mode with high transparency. More specifically, the second left-hit image 48 may be displayed with a high transparency so that the effect images displayed on the layer behind the second left-hit image 48 are visible to the player even through the second left-hit image 48. In this case, even when the second left-hit image 48 is being displayed, the player can recognize the various effect images, such as the decorative pattern 41, button image 509, and emphasized images, displayed on the layer behind the second left-hit image 48.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third stage and the fourth stage are described as presentation modes in the special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The third stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state, while the fourth stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state. Also, the fourth stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state, while the third stage may be a presentation mode in a special time-shortened game state. Also, both the third stage and the fourth stage may be presentation modes in a special time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a change effect is executed to change the display mode of the button image 509. It has also been described that the change effect may include whether or not the button highlighting portion 509c is displayed, a change in the display mode, an operation display of the button portion 509a, and an operation display of the highlighted character 509d.
As described above, the display mode of the gauge portion 509b of the button image 509 changes as the effective operation period in the button effect decreases (passes) (see (2) to (8) in FIG. 346). Therefore, the change in the display mode of the gauge portion 509b (operation display) can also be considered as a change effect that changes the display mode of the button image 509. Also, varying the execution time of the change effect at two different times (before the start of the specific effect and after the start of the specific effect, between when the first operation effect is executed and when the second operation effect is executed, and between when the first effect mode and the second effect mode) includes varying the display time of the gauge portion 509b at these two different times.

Furthermore, when the gauge section 509b is displayed, the button image 509 becomes more easily noticed, which in turn encourages the player to operate the effect button 161. Therefore, the gauge section 509b can also be regarded as an emphasis section that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect). Furthermore, the display of the gauge section 509b can also be regarded as an emphasis effect that emphasizes the button image 509 (button effect).
However, unlike the button section 509a, the button highlight section 509c, and the highlight character 509d, the action display of the gauge section 509b is not repeated in one button performance.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode, whether the variable effect starts from the third stage or the fourth stage may be selectable by the player operating the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 during a jackpot game, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the post-button image after hiding the button image 509, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display a button-post image while displaying the button image 509. More specifically, the button-post image may be displayed after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. Here, "after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends" includes a state in which the button image 509 starts to be hidden (for example, the transparency of the button image 509 starts to increase) but at least a portion of the button image 509 is still displayed. Furthermore, if the performance button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button performance, the performance control unit 300 may display the button-post image after the performance button 161 is operated and after the button image 509 starts to be displayed but before it ends. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may display the button-post image in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer in front of the button image 509. Alternatively, the button-post image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the button image 509, on a layer behind the button image 509. The post-button image may be displayed in an area including the display area of the button image 509 and on the same layer as the button image 509 .

Furthermore, each post-button image may be displayed on the entirety of one layer in the image display section 114 .
In addition, each button back image may be displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 41.

In the present embodiment, the specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means includes a left-handed hitting image. In this case, the operating means includes the handle 151.
Here, the effect key 162 is also regarded as an operating means. When the effect key 162 is operated, the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, the volume alert sound, the light intensity alert sound, etc. are displayed as notifications related to the effect. Therefore, the display of the volume image 42, the light intensity image 43, the customer waiting volume image 44, the customer waiting light intensity image 45, the volume alert sound, the light intensity alert sound, etc. are also regarded as specific notifications related to the operation of the operating means.

Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41, and on a layer in front of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed in an area not overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and in an area not overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative patterns 41. Furthermore, the reach-eye emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative patterns 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).
The stop emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The stop emphasis image may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The stop emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The stop emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).
The development provocative emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display areas of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41. The development provocative emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41, or on a layer (a layer behind) different from the development image 584 and the middle decorative pattern 41.
The start emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The start emphasis image may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The start emphasis image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The start emphasis image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).
The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in an area not overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and an area not overlapping the display area of the decorative pattern 41. The doublet emphasis image may be displayed in the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or in a different layer (a layer behind).
Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41, on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the decorative pattern 41 and in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, the reach highlighting image may be displayed on the same layer as the decorative pattern 41, or on a different layer (a layer behind).

It should be noted that, regardless of the timing at which the display of the volume image 42 is started, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of the timing at which the display of the volume image 42 is started in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the display time of the volume image 42 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). Furthermore, regardless of the timing at which the volume notification sound is output in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the output time of the volume notification sound when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (0.1 seconds).
Furthermore, regardless of the timing at which the display of the light quantity image 43 is started, the display time of the light quantity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). In addition, regardless of the timing at which the display of the light quantity image 43 is started in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the display time of the light quantity image 43 when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (5 seconds). Furthermore, regardless of the timing at which the light quantity notification sound is output in each of the above-mentioned variable effect examples, the output time of the light quantity notification sound when the effect key 162 is operated once is constant (0.1 seconds).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the volume image 42 (light intensity image 43) is displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of various emphasized images (omen emphasized image, post-operation emphasized image, during-operation emphasized image, reach mark emphasized image, role emphasized image, development emphasized image, jackpot emphasized image, stop emphasized image, pseudo consecutive emphasized image, development promotion emphasized image, start emphasized image, double number emphasized image, promotion promotion emphasized image, reach promotion emphasized image, etc.), and is displayed in a layer in front of the emphasized images. Here, as described above, the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 (gauge portion 431 of the light intensity image 43) and the background portion 425 (background portion 435) have high transparency. Therefore, an emphasis image (such as a premonition emphasis image, a post-operation emphasis image, an operation emphasis image, a reach symbol emphasis image, a role emphasis image, a development emphasis image, a jackpot emphasis image, a stop emphasis image, a pseudo-consecutive emphasis image, a development teaser emphasis image, a start emphasis image, a double-digit emphasis image, a promotion teaser emphasis image, or a reach symbol emphasis image) displayed behind the volume image 42 (light intensity image 43) may be visible to a player through the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 (gauge portion 431 of the light intensity image 43) or the background portion 425 (background portion 435). Also, when an emphasis image displays an action, the action display of the emphasis image displayed behind the volume image 42 (light intensity image 43) may be visible to a player through the gauge portion 421 of the volume image 42 (gauge portion 431 of the light intensity image 43) or the background portion 425 (background portion 435). In this case, even if the emphasis image is displayed while the volume image 42 or the light amount image 43 is being displayed, the emphasis image can be recognized by the player.
Furthermore, at least a portion of each of the various emphasized images is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the volume image 42 and the light quantity image 43. Therefore, even if an emphasized image is displayed while the volume image 42 or the light quantity image 43 is being displayed, the emphasized image can be recognized by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect key 162 is operated when the volume image or light intensity image is not displayed, the volume or light intensity is changed, and the volume image or light intensity image is displayed and a volume alert sound or light intensity alert sound is output in a manner indicating the changed volume or light intensity, but this is not limited to this.
When the effect key 162 is operated while the volume image or light intensity image is not displayed, the volume or light intensity may not be changed, and the volume image or light intensity image may be displayed and the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may be output in a manner that indicates the set volume or light intensity. When the effect key 162 is operated while the volume image or light intensity image is displayed, the volume or light intensity may be changed, and the volume or light intensity image may be displayed and the volume alert sound or the light intensity alert sound may be output in a manner that indicates the changed volume or light intensity.

In this embodiment, the menu promotion image 46 is displayed while waiting for customers. Here, similar to the button portion 509a of the button image 509, the menu promotion image 46 may also display the operation target identification portion 461 in a display mode that mimics the state in which the effect button 161 alternates (periodically) between an operated state and an unoperated state. Similarly to the button highlighting portion 509c, the menu promotion image 46 may also display an image that mimics light highlighting the operation target identification portion 461 in a periodic manner in accordance with the operation display of the operation target identification portion 461. In this case, the period of the operation display of the operation target identification portion 461 may be different from any of the periods of the operation display of the button portion 509a in each button effect. Furthermore, the period of the operation display of the image highlighting the operation target identification portion 461 may be different from any of the periods of the operation display of the button highlighting portion 509c in each button effect. Furthermore, the menu promotion image 46 can also be broadly considered a button effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that vibration effects and special feature effects may be executed even when specific notifications (at least one of displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, displaying the customer waiting volume image 44, displaying the customer waiting light intensity image 45, outputting the volume notification sound, and outputting the light intensity notification sound) are restricted by operation of the effect key 162, such as when a variable effect is not being executed (when the variable effect is stopped). Here, for example, even during a jackpot game, specific notifications (at least one of displaying the volume image 42, displaying the light intensity image 43, displaying the customer waiting volume image 44, displaying the customer waiting light intensity image 45, outputting the volume notification sound, and outputting the light intensity notification sound) are restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 has been described as setting the volume to one of seven levels, from "1" to "7," but this is not limited to this. The number of volume levels that can be set in the performance control unit 300 may be five levels that can be identified by a volume image. Furthermore, the number of volume levels that can be adjusted by the back volume adjustment volume 300S may also be five levels.

The second left-handed image 48 may also be displayed when any of the above-mentioned highlighted images is displayed. In this case, the second left-handed image 48 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of each highlighted image, on a layer in front of each highlighted image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the emphasis image is displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot emphasis image may be displayed (operationally displayed) in a common display mode in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state. In other words, the emphasis image may be displayed in a common display mode regardless of the game state.

(Characteristic Configuration 1 of the Present Embodiment)
Here, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment described above will be explained. In this embodiment, when the effect symbol temporarily stops, a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect symbol can be executed, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect symbol during temporary stop can be executed, and the form of the first emphasis effect and the form of the second emphasis effect can be made different.
In this case, the performance symbols are emphasized in different ways when they temporarily stop and while they are temporarily stopped, and the interest is increased by adding variations so that the player does not get bored even in the case of an immediate loss variation or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern with an emphasis different from that of the second emphasis effect, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by changing the emphasis area of the effect pattern.
In this case, a natural change different from the temporary stop emphasis is given to the performance pattern during the temporary stop to prevent a monotonous impression and improve interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop.The first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area.
In this case, when the game is temporarily stopped, the performance pattern is emphasized in a single, non-repeated manner, and during the temporary stop, the performance pattern is emphasized periodically and repeatedly, thereby varying the emphasis of the performance pattern and improving interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing the surface area of the effect pattern.
In this case, the area in which the performance pattern can be emphasized is changed between when the ball is temporarily stopped and during the temporary stop, thereby enhancing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during the temporary stop.The first emphasis effect can include an action effect in which a predetermined part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) performs a predetermined action to emphasize the effect pattern, and a first image effect in which a predetermined emphasis image (effect image) is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can include a second image effect in which a specific emphasis image (emphasis image during temporary stop) different from the predetermined emphasis image is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern.
In this case, interest is enhanced by clearly varying the character's movements and effect images when the character is temporarily stopped and while the character is temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and the first and second emphasis effects can include an action effect that emphasizes the effect pattern by causing a predetermined part of the effect pattern (such as a character part) to perform a predetermined action, and an image effect that emphasizes the effect pattern by displaying a predetermined emphasis image, and the action effect and image effect of the first emphasis effect and the action effect and image effect of the second emphasis effect are different from each other.
In this case, by using different emphasis modes, the change is made between when the fluctuation starts and when it stops, which increases interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern while it is temporarily stopped.It is possible to execute the first emphasis effect before starting the display of the change in the effect pattern, end the display of the change, execute the second emphasis effect, and then execute the third emphasis effect.
In this case, no temporary stop emphasis is executed when the fluctuation starts, creating a sense of speed, while temporary stop emphasis is executed when the fluctuation stops, leaving a lingering impression and increasing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during a temporary stop.The first emphasis effect can include an action effect in which a predetermined part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) performs a predetermined action to emphasize the effect pattern, and a first image effect in which a predetermined emphasis image (effect image) is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can include a second image effect in which a specific emphasis image (emphasis image during temporary stop) different from the predetermined emphasis image is displayed to emphasize the effect pattern.
In this case, the character's movement and effect images are clearly changed between when the change starts and when the change is temporarily stopped, thereby enhancing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern during temporary stop, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by emphasizing the surface area of the effect pattern.
In this case, the area where the performance pattern can be emphasized is changed between when the variation starts and when the game is temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern when the effect pattern begins to change, and a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern in a specific state (reach state) that raises expectations for the execution of a special game, and the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence), and the second emphasis effect can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns that make up the specific state.
In this case, the individual effect patterns that start to change are emphasized in the change start emphasis, and the effect patterns that make up the reach eyes are emphasized in the reach emphasis, thereby enhancing the interest by emphasizing in accordance with the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that raises the expectation of the execution of a special game, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern when the effect pattern temporarily stops, and the first emphasis effect can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns that constitute the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence).
In this case, the individual effect symbols that are temporarily stopped are emphasized in the temporary stop emphasis, and the effect symbols that constitute the reach eyes are emphasized in the reach emphasis, thereby enhancing the interest by emphasizing according to the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the first effect pattern when the reel temporarily stops, and a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the second effect pattern during the temporary stop, and it is possible to make the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the first effect pattern different from the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the second effect pattern.
In this case, by making the proportion of the emphasis area different between the temporary stop emphasis and the temporary stop emphasis, the impact (strength) of the emphasis can be changed to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern in the first column (left column) temporarily stops, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and when the performance patterns in the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop and then the performance pattern in the third column (middle column) temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the performance pattern during temporary stop, and after the first emphasis effect is executed for the performance pattern in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern in the third column, and then the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the first column and the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the third column can be executed in synchronization.
In this case, the left and middle images emphasize the temporary stop with a time lag, and then synchronize to emphasize the temporary stop, resulting in a natural flow and a sense of unity.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern in the first column (left column) temporarily stops, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and when the performance pattern in the second column (right column) temporarily stops after the performance pattern in the first column temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the performance pattern, and a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the performance pattern during temporary stop, and after the first emphasis effect is executed for the performance pattern in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern in the second column, and then the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the first column and the third emphasis effect for the performance pattern in the second column can be executed in synchronization.
In this case, the left and right images emphasize the temporary stop with a time difference, and then synchronize to emphasize the temporary stop, resulting in a natural flow and a sense of unity.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that raises the expectation that a special game will be played, and after the first emphasis effect is executed in the specific state, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern that results in a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played.The first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern that constitutes the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect pattern (reach pattern) that constitutes the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern that stops last (reach miss pattern) that constitutes a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played, by emphasizing the effect pattern that stops last.
In this case, the left and right symbols are emphasized together for the reach symbol, and the middle symbol is emphasized for the reach miss symbol, and emphasis is performed according to the situation to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern (mixed missing numbers) that has formed a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed without reaching a specific state; the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern that constitutes a specific state by displaying a first specific image across the effect pattern (reach pattern) that constitutes the specific state, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern (mixed missing numbers) that constitutes a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the effect patterns that stop.
In this case, the left and right patterns are emphasized together for the reach combination, and the left and right center patterns are emphasized for the mixed miss combination, so that emphasis is performed according to the situation to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a specific state (reach state) is reached in which a special game is expected to be played, a first emphasis effect can be executed to highlight a performance pattern that forms a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played, and a second emphasis effect can be executed to highlight a performance pattern (a miss with a combination) that forms a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played without reaching a specific state.The first emphasis effect can highlight a performance pattern (a miss with a reach) that forms a combination that notifies that a special game will not be played by highlighting the performance pattern that stops last, and the second emphasis effect can highlight a performance pattern (a miss with a combination) that notifies that a special game will not be played by highlighting each of the performance patterns that stop.
In this case, the center symbol is emphasized for a reach miss, and the center symbols on the left and right are emphasized for a barrage miss, so that emphasis is performed according to the situation to enhance interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect can include image display and sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include an image display that is different from the image display of the first emphasis effect but does not include sound output, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the effect symbols are emphasized in different modes (images and sound effects) when and while the effect symbols are temporarily stopped, and the interest is increased by providing variations so that the player does not get bored even in the case of an immediate loss variation, while ensuring the visibility of the volume, image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can provide emphasis different from that of the second emphasis effect and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can change the emphasis area of the effect pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the visual effect during the temporary stop is given a natural change that is different from the temporary stop emphasis, etc., to reduce the monotonous impression and improve interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can repeatedly (periodically) change the emphasis area and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, when the game is temporarily stopped, the performance pattern is highlighted in a single, non-repeated manner, and during the temporary stop, the performance pattern is highlighted and displayed periodically and repeatedly without sound, thereby varying the emphasis of the performance pattern to improve interest and ensuring visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize at least the outer area of the effect pattern and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can emphasize the surface area of the effect pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the visibility of the volume image and the like is ensured while increasing interest by varying the area in which the performance pattern can be emphasized and the presence or absence of sound effects between when the game is temporarily stopped and during the temporary stop.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can include an operation display that activates a specific part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) and a specific emphasis display (effect image), and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can include a specific emphasis display (emphasis during temporary stop) that is different from the specific emphasis display, and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the character's movement and effect images are changed and sound effects are changed between when the game is temporarily stopped and during the temporary stop, thereby enhancing interest and ensuring visibility of the volume image and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that starts to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that temporarily stops, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first and second emphasis effects include an image display that can include an action display that moves a specified part of the performance pattern (character part, etc.) and a specified emphasis display, and can include different sound outputs, the action display and emphasis display of the first emphasis effect and the action display and emphasis display of the second emphasis effect are different from each other, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, by differentiating the emphasis modes of the display and sound, the difference between when the fluctuation starts and when it stops is clearly impressed, enhancing interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that starts to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that temporarily stops, a third emphasis effect that emphasizes a change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped (emphasis during temporary stop), and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, the first and second emphasis effects include image display and can include sound output, the third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include image display but not sound output, the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects are different from each other and the sound outputs of the first and second emphasis effects can be different, it is possible to start the display of the changing performance pattern after executing the first emphasis effect, end the display of the changing effect and execute the second emphasis effect before executing the third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop), the specific notifications can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects on the specific notifications.
In this case, when the variation starts, no temporary stop emphasis is executed to give a sense of speed, while when the variation stops, temporary stop emphasis is executed to leave a lingering impression and improve interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that is about to start changing, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can include an operation display that moves a specific part of the performance pattern (character part, etc.) and a specific emphasis display (effect image), and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can include a specific emphasis display (emphasis during temporary stop) that is different from the specific emphasis display and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the character's movement and effect image change when the change starts and during the temporary stop, and the presence or absence of sound effects change, thereby enhancing interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that is about to start changing, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in a performance pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize at least the outer area of the performance pattern and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) includes an image display that can emphasize the surface area of the performance pattern and can not include sound output, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the area in which the performance pattern can be emphasized and the presence or absence of sound effects are changed between when the variation starts and during the temporary stop, thereby enhancing interest, while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that has begun to change, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern in a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding performance effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize performance patterns individually (in sequence) and can include sound output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can simultaneously emphasize performance patterns in a specific state and can include sound output that is different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the individual performance symbols are emphasized in the change start emphasis, and the reach eyes are emphasized together in the reach emphasis (and different sound effects are produced) to increase interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can simultaneously emphasize the effect patterns of specific states and can include an audio output different from the second emphasis effect, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect patterns individually (in sequence) and can include an audio output, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the individual effect symbols are emphasized in the temporary stop emphasis, and the reach emphasis, etc., emphasizes the reach eyes collectively (and different sound effects are produced) to increase interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the first effect pattern that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the second effect pattern during temporary stop, specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation, it is possible to make the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the first effect pattern in the first emphasis effect different from the proportion of the emphasis area relative to the second effect pattern in the second emphasis effect, the first emphasis effect can include image display and sound output, the second emphasis effect can include image display but not sound output, the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, by varying the proportion of the emphasis area between temporary stop emphasis and temporary stop emphasis, the impact (strength) of the emphasis can be varied to increase interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the third column (middle column) that temporarily stops after the effect patterns of the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop, a first emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change of the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, and the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output. The third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include an image display but not an audio output, and after the first emphasis effect is executed for the effect symbols in the first column and then the third emphasis effect is executed, the second emphasis effect can be executed for the effect symbols in the third column, and then the third emphasis effect for the effect symbols in the first column and the third emphasis effect for the effect symbols in the third column can be executed in synchronization, and the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and middle images emphasize the temporary stop with a time difference, and then synchronously emphasize the temporary stop without any sound effects, creating a casual, unified presentation that enhances interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In this embodiment, a first emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern of the second column (right column) that is temporarily stopped after the effect pattern of the first column has temporarily stopped, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can be executed to emphasize the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, and the first and second emphasis effects can include image display and sound output, and the first emphasis effect can be executed. The adjustment effect (emphasis during temporary stop) can include image display but not sound output, and after executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the first column and then the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the second column, the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the second column can be executed in synchronization, and the specific notification can include image display and sound output, and it is possible to limit the effect of the image displays of the first to third emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and right images emphasize a temporary stop with a time difference, and then emphasize the temporary stop without sound effects in synchronization, producing a casual, unified presentation that enhances interest while ensuring the visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and after executing the first emphasis effect in the specific state, it is possible to execute a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a combination that notifies that a special game will not be executed, and it is possible to execute a specific notification (volume/light intensity image, etc.) regarding the effect effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (reach eye) of the specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect pattern, and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (reach miss eye) that notifies that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing the effect pattern that stops last, and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and right patterns are emphasized in the reach pattern, and the missing center pattern is emphasized in the reach miss pattern (and a sound effect different from that for the reach pattern emphasis is produced) to enhance interest while ensuring visibility of the volume image, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a second emphasis effect (missed combination emphasis/active, etc.) that emphasizes the effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed without entering a specific state, and a specific notification (volume/light intensity image, etc.) regarding the effect that can be adjusted according to operation, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (missed combination) of a specific state by displaying a specific image across the effect pattern (reach pattern), and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize the effect pattern (missed combination) that notifies that a special game will not be executed by emphasizing each of the stopping effect patterns, and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the left and right patterns are emphasized for reach patterns, and the left and right center patterns are emphasized for mixed miss patterns (and sound effects different from those for emphasizing reach patterns are produced) to enhance interest while ensuring visibility of volume images, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, a first emphasis effect can be executed that emphasizes an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed, a second emphasis effect can be executed that emphasizes an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed without reaching a specific state, and specific notifications (volume/light intensity images, etc.) regarding effect effects that can be adjusted according to operation can be executed, the first emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed (reach miss) by emphasizing the effect pattern that stops last, and can include an audio output, the second emphasis effect includes an image display that can emphasize an effect pattern that notifies that a special game will not be executed (various miss) by emphasizing each of the effect patterns that stop, and can include an audio output different from the first emphasis effect, the specific notification can include an image display and an audio output, and it is possible to limit the influence of the image displays of the first and second emphasis effects on the specific notification.
In this case, the middle symbol is emphasized for a close miss, and the middle symbols on the left and right are emphasized for a mixed miss (and a different sound effect is generated from that for emphasizing a close miss), thereby ensuring the visibility of the volume image and the like while providing appropriate emphasis.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined image (performance pattern, etc.) related to the change in the performance pattern, and it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method, and while the performance pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification), while it is possible to limit the emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop, etc.).
In this case, during the confirmation stop, the highlighting effect is limited to clearly display the confirmation effect pattern, while the left hit notification allows notification of an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern during a temporary stop, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes an operation prompt image, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method; the first emphasis effect can emphasize the effect pattern by repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area, and the second emphasis effect can emphasize the operation prompt image without repeatedly (periodically) changing the emphasis area; while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification), while the first emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the first emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that enhances the effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed effect pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompt image, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method, and the first emphasis effect can include an action effect that moves at least a part of the effect pattern (character part, etc.) and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image (effect pattern effect), and the second emphasis effect can include an action effect that moves at least a part of the operation prompt image and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image, and while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification), while the first emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the first emphasis effect (temporary stop emphasis, etc.) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the temporarily stopped effect pattern, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the game method, the first emphasis effect can include an action effect that causes at least a portion of the operation prompting image to operate and an image effect that displays a predetermined emphasis image, and the second emphasis effect can include an image effect that displays a specific emphasis image (emphasis image during temporary stop) that is different from the predetermined emphasis image, and while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification), while the second emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the two-emphasis effect (occurring during temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes an operation prompting image, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes a temporary stop effect pattern, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes a change in the effect pattern during temporary stop, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method, the first emphasis effect can emphasize at least the outer area of the area where the operation prompting image is displayed, the second emphasis effect can emphasize at least the outer area of the effect pattern, and the third emphasis effect can emphasize the surface area of the effect pattern, and while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification), while the third emphasis effect is restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the 3-highlight effect (highlighting during temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped, a second emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method, and the first emphasis effect can be executed in the order in which the effect patterns temporarily stop, and then the second emphasis effect can be executed in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped to be confirmed, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left-hit notification).
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the second emphasis effect (synchronizing multiple patterns that have temporarily stopped in sequence to emphasize the temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the left-hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the third column (middle column) that temporarily stops after the effect patterns of the first and second columns (right column) temporarily stop, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes a change in the effect patterns that have temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the player about the playing method.After executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and then the third emphasis effect, it is possible to execute the second emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the third column, and then execute the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the third column in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification) while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, while the third emphasis effect can be restricted.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the third emphasis effect (which is synchronized with the left and center symbols that have been temporarily stopped in order to emphasize the temporary stop) that enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation symbol, while the left hit notification is permitted as an important game method that can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the first column (left column) that temporarily stops, a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern of the second column (right column) that temporarily stops after the effect pattern of the first column has temporarily stopped, a third emphasis effect (emphasis during temporary stop) that emphasizes the change in the effect pattern that has temporarily stopped, and a specific notification (left hit notification) that notifies the user about the playing method. After executing the first emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and then the third emphasis effect, it is possible to execute the second emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the second column, and then execute the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the first column and the third emphasis effect on the effect pattern of the second column in synchronization, and while the effect pattern is stopped in a confirmed state, it is possible to execute a specific notification (left hit notification) while the third emphasis effect is being executed.
In this case, during the confirmed stop, the third emphasis effect (synchronizing the left and right patterns that have temporarily stopped in order to emphasize the temporary stop) which enhances the presentation effect is restricted to clearly display the confirmed presentation pattern, while the notification is permitted for the important game method in which specific notification is executable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific presentation means can execute a specific emphasis presentation that emphasizes a specific image (presentation pattern, etc.) related to the presentation of changing presentation patterns, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method can be executed, and a presentation corresponding to the specific emphasis presentation can be executed in a specific presentation means different from the specific presentation means, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while a specific emphasis presentation (reach emphasis, etc.) is being executed, the specific presentation means can execute a presentation corresponding to the specific emphasis presentation, but can restrict the execution of the presentation corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when the left-hit notification is made on an LCD screen or the like, the device/button will continue to display the effect corresponding to the LCD's highlight effect and will not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means (liquid crystal) is capable of displaying an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the operating means and of executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image, and is capable of executing a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player of a game method, and the operating means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operating means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but is also capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the button continues to display a presentation corresponding to the highlighting of the button image on the liquid crystal display and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined image to notify the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but is also capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on an LCD screen or the like, the buttons continue to display effects corresponding to the LCD's rainbow effect, etc., and do not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the display pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the player of the game method, and the operation means can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if the specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operation means can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but can restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the button does not participate in the left-hit notification by continuing to display effects corresponding to the reach emphasis on the liquid crystal display, etc., thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means is capable of executing a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a display pattern (double numbers) that notifies the execution of a special game, and is capable of executing a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the operation means is capable of executing an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but is also capable of restricting the execution of an effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, when a left-hit notification is made on an LCD screen or the like, the button does not participate in the left-hit notification by continuing to display effects corresponding to the LCD screen highlighting the double numbers, etc., thereby preventing excessive left-hit notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a predetermined image to notify the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the movable device can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the movable device can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, but can restrict the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification.
In this case, for movable devices, when a left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the device continues to display a performance corresponding to the rainbow effect or the like on the liquid crystal display and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes the performance pattern of a specific state (reach state) that anticipates the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the movable role can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if the specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the movable role can execute an effect (role emphasis/action) corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, while the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification can be restricted.
In this case, when the left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the movable device continues to display effects corresponding to the reach emphasis on the liquid crystal display, etc., and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display means can execute a predetermined emphasis effect that emphasizes a display pattern (double numbers) that notifies the execution of a special game, and can execute a specific notification (left-hit notification) that notifies the game method, and the movable role can execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined emphasis effect, and if a specific notification (left-hit notification) is executed while the predetermined emphasis effect is being executed, the movable role can execute an effect (role emphasis/action) that corresponds to the predetermined emphasis effect, while the execution of the effect corresponding to the specific notification can be restricted.
In this case, when the left-hit notification is made on a liquid crystal display or the like, the movable device continues to display effects corresponding to the highlighting of the double numbers on the liquid crystal display, etc., and does not participate in the left-hit notification, thereby preventing excessive left-hit notification.

(Characteristic Configuration 2 of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while the effect pattern is fluctuating, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means, it is possible to execute a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed common between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by using different emphasis sounds for the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by using the same notification sounds for multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern that has been temporarily stopped in a specific area, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound that emphasizes the effect symbol that has stopped in the specific area different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to provide variety to the effect symbol that has stopped in the specific area. On the other hand, by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed when the effect pattern stops, and an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, the effect pattern includes a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and although the display form of the emphasis effect differs between the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, the emphasis sound is common, and the notification sound of the specific notification is common whether the first effect pattern stops or the second effect pattern stops.
In this case, the display mode of the emphasis effect can be different when the first effect symbol stops and when the second effect symbol stops, but the emphasis sound can be the same, so that the effect can be made diverse and the common emphasis sound can be made uniform. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same when the first effect symbol stops and when the second effect symbol stops, the specific notification can be made easy to understand for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed when the effect pattern stops, and an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, and the effect patterns include a first effect pattern, a second effect pattern, and a third effect pattern, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and the emphasis sound is the same for the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, but different for the first effect pattern and the third effect pattern, and the notification sound of the specific notification is the same regardless of which of the first effect pattern to the third effect pattern stops.
In this case, the emphasis sound can be the same when the first effect symbol stops and when the second effect symbol stops, and the emphasis sound can be different between the first effect symbol and the third effect symbol, so that the effect can have uniformity and diversity. On the other hand, by making the notification sound the same regardless of which effect symbol stops, the specific notification can be made easy to understand for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern in the first area and a second emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern in the second area, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, and it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and although the display form is different between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, it is possible to make the emphasis sound common, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed common between the execution of the first emphasis effect and the execution of the second emphasis effect.
In this case, by using different display modes for the highlighting effect for the symbols that stop in the first area and the highlighting effect for the symbols that stop in the second area, it is possible to add variety to the effects, and by outputting the same highlight sound for both highlighting effects, it is possible to add uniformity to the effects. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound during the execution of both highlighting effects, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is established), the second performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is established), an emphasis performance can be executed before the same type of performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area, the performance pattern can be made different between the emphasis performance executed before the first performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area and the emphasis performance executed before the second performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area, specific notifications can be executed regarding the operation of the operating means, and the notification sound output during the specific notification can be made the same during the execution of the emphasis performance before the first performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area and during the execution of the emphasis performance before the second performance pattern stops in the first area and the second area.
In this case, by differentiating the presentation mode between the first symbol and the second symbol, it is possible to provide variety to the presentation and increase the expectation for the reach presentation. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound for the reach presentation using either symbol, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is achieved), the second performance pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area) (reach is achieved), an emphasis performance can be executed for the performance pattern stopped in the first area and the second area, the performance pattern can be made different between the emphasis performance when the first performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area and the emphasis performance when the second performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area, specific notifications can be executed regarding the operation of the operating means, and the notification sound output at the time of the specific notification can be made the same when the first performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area and when the second performance pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area.
In this case, by differentiating the presentation mode of the emphasis presentation when the first symbol is reached and when the second symbol is reached, it is possible to provide variety to the presentation and improve the interest of the subsequent reach presentation. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound when either symbol is reached, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined display pattern can be stopped in the first area (left area) and the second area (right area), and after the predetermined display pattern is stopped in the first and second areas, a special display (reach display) can be executed. After the predetermined display pattern is stopped in the first and second areas, and before the special display is executed, there are times when an emphasis display is executed in a first mode and when an emphasis display is executed in a second mode different from the first mode, and it is possible to make the emphasis sound of the emphasis display different when the emphasis display is executed in the first mode and when the emphasis display is executed in the second mode, and it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to make the notification sound output at the time of the specific notification the same when the emphasis display is executed in the first mode and when the emphasis display is executed in the second mode.
In this case, by performing an emphasis effect when the effect symbols are stopped in the first and second areas and by varying the effect mode of the emphasis effect, it is possible to provide variety to the effect and improve the interest of the subsequent reach effect. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound regardless of the mode in which the emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special effect (reach effect) can be executed by stopping the effect patterns in the first and second areas (left and middle areas), and the special effect includes an early effect and a subsequent late effect, and while the late effect is being executed, a predetermined effect is executed in the third area (middle area) using a first effect pattern that is the same as the effect pattern stopped in the first and second areas and a second effect pattern that is different from the first effect pattern, and an emphasis effect is executed for the effect patterns during the predetermined effect, and an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and the emphasis sound can be made common for the emphasis effect for the first effect pattern and the emphasis effect for the second effect pattern, and the notification sound output during the specific notification can be made common when the emphasis effect for the first effect pattern is being executed and when the emphasis effect for the second effect pattern is being executed.
In this case, in the latter half of the special effect, the predetermined effect using the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol in the second area can be emphasized, thereby increasing the interest of the effect. By making the notification sound common to multiple modes even during the execution of the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special effect (reach effect) can be executed by stopping the effect symbols in the first area and the second area (left area and middle area), and the special effects include a first special effect that is executed by stopping the first effect symbol in the first area and the second area, and a second special effect that is executed by stopping the second effect symbol in the first area and the second area, and when the first effect symbol is stopped in the third area (middle area) in the first special effect, a first emphasis effect can be executed for the first effect symbol, and when the second effect symbol is stopped in the third area (middle area) in the second special effect, a second emphasis effect can be executed for the second effect symbol, specific notifications can be issued regarding operation of the operating means, and the emphasis sound for the emphasis effect can be made different when the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed, and the notification sound output at the time of the specific notification can be made the same when the first emphasis effect is executed and when the second emphasis effect is executed.
In this case, by using different emphasis sounds when the first effect symbol in the third area stops and a jackpot is announced, and when the second effect symbol stops and a jackpot is announced, it is possible to add variety to the presentation. Also, by using the same notification sound when either effect symbol stops, it is possible to make the specific notification of the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed for a display pattern that indicates a jackpot, an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, there are a first mode and a second mode, the emphasis sound can be different between the first mode and the second mode, and the notification sound output when the specific notification is made can be the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized by the emphasis effect and emphasis sound. By using different emphasis sounds in the first and second modes, the effect can be made more diverse. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound in multiple modes, the specific notification can be made easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using a performance pattern, and the special effect is divided into an early effect and a late effect, and in the early effect, a first emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern, and in the late effect, a second emphasis effect can be executed for the performance pattern, and specific notifications regarding operation of the operating means can be executed, and it is possible to make the performance pattern different between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, and it is possible to make the type of specific notification the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.
In this case, by making the presentation style of the emphasis effect different between the early and late special effects, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the style of the specific notification common before and after the special effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the reel, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute specific notifications regarding the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to execute special effects (reach effects) that raise expectations of special games, and the special effects include early stage effects and late stage effects, and the presentation style of the emphasis effect differs when the reel effect is executed in the early stage effect and when the reel effect is executed in the late stage effect, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the reel effect is executed in the early stage effect and when the reel effect is executed in the late stage effect.
In this case, the type of emphasis effect when the role object operates can be made different between the first and second stage effects, which adds variety to the effect. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound regardless of which emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel performance that operates a reel, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance on the reel in the reel performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound different when the reel operates in the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestive effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the suggestive effect has a first form and a second form, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different for the suggestive effect of the first form and the suggestive effect of the second form, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed the same when the suggestive effect of the first form is executed and when the suggestive effect of the second form is executed.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound of the suggestive effect different between the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the notification sound the same regardless of whether the suggestive effect is performed in the first or second mode, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a corresponding display (reserved image 52, variable image 51) corresponding to the game information, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the corresponding display, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the corresponding display has a first state and a second state, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state.
In this case, by using different emphasis sounds when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by using the same notification sound regardless of the mode the icon changes to, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance related to the operation performance when executing the operation performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the emphasis sounds different when executing the operation presentation in the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sounds common across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the operation performance before displaying the operation prompting image, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis performance is executed, the emphasis performance has a first form and a second form, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different when executing the emphasis performance of the first form and when executing the emphasis performance of the second form, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is the same when executing the emphasis performance of the first form and when executing the emphasis performance of the second form.
In this case, by performing the first mode emphasis effect or the second mode emphasis effect before forming the button image, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the notification sound the same regardless of which mode of emphasis effect is performed, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operation means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance that emphasizes the operation prompting image during the operation valid period, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis performance is executed, the operation performance includes a first operation performance that causes operation in a first manner and a second operation performance that causes operation in a second manner, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operation means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed, and it is possible to make the notification sound output when the specific notification is executed the same when the first operation performance is executed and when the second operation performance is executed.
In this case, by making the emphasis sounds of the operation presentation different between the first operation presentation and the second operation presentation, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sounds common to multiple operation presentations, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation effect that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operation means, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the operation prompting image during the operation valid period, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the second operation means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different before and after the execution of a special effect (reach), and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same before and after the execution of the special effect.
In this case, by making the emphasis sounds of the operation effects different before and after the special effects, it is possible to add variety to the effects, while by making the notification sounds the same before and after the special effects, it is possible to make the specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance in response to operation of the first operating means during the operation performance, it is possible to execute a first operation performance at a first timing and a second operation performance at a second timing, it is possible to execute a first emphasis performance in response to operation while the first operation performance is being executed, it is possible to execute a second emphasis performance in response to operation while the second operation performance is being executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different between the first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the first emphasis performance is executed and when the second emphasis performance is executed.
In this case, by making the emphasis sound of the emphasis effect corresponding to the operation different between the first operation effect at the first timing and the second operation effect at the second timing, it is possible to add variety to the effects, while by making the notification sound the same at both timings, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operation means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance in response to operation during the valid operation period, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis performance is executed, and it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operation means, the operation performance including a first operation performance that causes operation in a first manner and a second operation performance that causes operation in a second manner, it is possible to make the emphasis sound different for the emphasis performance that causes operation during the first operation performance and the emphasis performance that causes operation during the second operation performance, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when an emphasis performance that causes operation during the first operation performance is executed and when an emphasis performance that causes operation during the second operation performance is executed.
In this case, the emphasis sound of the emphasis effect executed according to the operation can be made different when the first operation effect is performed and when the second operation effect is performed, thereby providing variety to the effect, while the notification sound can be made common regardless of which operation effect is executed, making it easier for the player to understand the specific notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while the effect pattern is changing, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output during the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using an effect pattern, and the special effect is divided into an early effect and a late effect, and a first emphasis effect can be executed for the effect pattern in the early effect, and a second emphasis effect can be executed for the effect pattern in the late effect, and specific notifications regarding operation of the operating means can be executed, and the length of the emphasis sound in the emphasis effect can be made different between the first emphasis effect and the second emphasis effect, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound of the specific notification the same when the first emphasis effect is being executed and when the second emphasis effect is being executed.
In this case, by making the duration of the emphasis sound different between the early and late stages of the special effect, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the form of the specific notification common before and after the special effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed for a display pattern that indicates a jackpot, an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, and a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and there are a first mode and a second mode, and the length of the emphasis sound can be made different between the first mode and the second mode, and the length of the notification sound output when the specific notification is made can be made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, the presentation can be varied by varying the duration of the emphasis sound when the jackpot symbol is displayed between the first and second modes. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an operation performance that displays an operation prompting image that prompts operation of the first operating means, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance related to the operation performance when executing the operation performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding operation of the second operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output when the specific notification is made the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound during the operation presentation different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common across multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel performance that operates a reel, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance on the reel in the reel performance, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis performance, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, there are a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the first mode and the second mode, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output during the specific notification the same between the first mode and the second mode.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound when the reel operates different between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to add variety to the presentation, while by making the notification sound common to multiple modes, it is possible to make specific notifications easier for players to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestive effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the suggestive effect has a first form and a second form, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different between the suggestive effect of the first form and the suggestive effect of the second form, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output when the specific notification is the same when the suggestive effect of the first form is executed and when the suggestive effect of the second form is executed.
In this case, by making the output time of the emphasis sound of the suggestive effect different between the first and second modes, it is possible to add variety to the effect, while by making the output time of the notification sound the same regardless of whether the suggestive effect is performed in the first or second mode, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to display a corresponding display (reserved image 52, variable image 51) corresponding to the game information, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the corresponding display, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the corresponding display has a first state and a second state, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the length of the emphasis sound different when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state, and it is possible to make the length of the notification sound output during the specific notification the same when the corresponding display is displayed in the first state and when it is displayed in the second state.
In this case, the output time of the emphasis sound can be made different when the corresponding display is displayed in the first mode and when it is displayed in the second mode, thereby adding variety to the presentation, while the output time of the notification sound can be made the same regardless of the mode the icon changes to, making the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using an effect pattern, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the special effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to continuously output a predetermined sound while the effect pattern is changing, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, the predetermined sound is different before and after the execution of the emphasis effect, and it is possible to make the notification sound output during the specific notification the same before and after the execution of the emphasis effect.
In this case, the output of the emphasis sound for the emphasis effect switches to a predetermined sound, which increases the interest of the emphasis effect and adds variety to the effect using sound. On the other hand, by using the same notification sound before and after the emphasis effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (reach effect) using an effect pattern, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect on the effect pattern in the special effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, the emphasis effects include a first emphasis effect and a second emphasis effect which has a higher expectation level than the first emphasis effect, it is possible to continuously output a predetermined sound while the effect pattern is changing, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operation means, it is possible to output a first emphasis sound while the first emphasis effect is being executed and a second emphasis sound while the second emphasis effect is being executed, the predetermined sound is the same before and after the execution of the first emphasis effect but is different before and after the execution of the second emphasis effect, the notification sound output during the specific notification is the same before and after the execution of the first emphasis effect, and the notification sound is the same before and after the execution of the second emphasis effect.
In this case, a common predetermined sound can be output before and after the output of the first emphasis sound, and the predetermined sound is switched before and after the output of the second emphasis sound, which improves the interest of the emphasis effect and provides consistency and variety to the effect using sound. Also, by using a common notification sound before and after the first emphasis effect and before and after the second emphasis effect, it is possible to make the specific notification easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes a performance pattern while the performance pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to execute a specific notification during the emphasis effect, and it is possible to execute a specific notification with priority over the emphasis effect.
In this case, if an emphasis effect is displayed while a pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right, but by prioritizing the specific notification (left-hit notification), unnecessary hits to the right can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, with the execution time of the specific notification being longer (or different) than the execution time of the emphasis effect.
In this case, unnecessary right-hand hits can be suppressed by making the specific notification for a relatively long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, and a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and when a specific notification is executed during the emphasis effect, at least a part of the effect pattern and the emphasis effect becomes difficult to see or impossible to see due to the specific notification image.
In this case, the specific notification image hides part of the symbols and highlighting effects, so that the specific notification can be seen even during the highlighting effects. Since the other parts of the symbols and highlighting effects are not hidden by the specific notification image, the player can still recognize the symbols and highlighting effects even during the specific notification, so that the interest is not lost.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while it is displayed, which indicates a jackpot, and a specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and the specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification continues for a predetermined time, and if the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific notification can be terminated.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right during the emphasized display that suggests a big win, but by continuing the specific notification (left hit notification) for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to reliably prevent unnecessary hitting to the right, and if the special symbol is stopped, the player can play in accordance with the special symbol stopping.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while the effect pattern that suggests a jackpot is being displayed, and it is possible to output a specific alarm sound (left-hit alarm sound) related to the operation of the operating means (handle), and it is possible to output the specific alarm sound during the emphasis effect, and the specific alarm sound is output for a predetermined time, and if the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the output of the specific alarm sound can be terminated.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right button during the emphasized effect that suggests a big win, but by outputting a specific notification sound (left hit), it is possible to suppress unnecessary right hits, and if the special symbol stops, a sound corresponding to the special symbol stopping can be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel effect that operates a reel, and when the reel effect is executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect on the reel, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, it is possible to execute the specific notification and the reel effect simultaneously, and when the specific notification and the reel effect are executed, it is possible to make the reel appear while giving priority to the specific notification over the emphasis effect associated with the reel effect.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right hand during the bonus effect that suggests a big win, but by outputting a specific notification sound (a left hit), it is possible to prevent unnecessary right hand hits. Even in this case, the bonus effect will appear, so the fun factor can be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while it is being displayed, which indicates a jackpot, an emphasis sound can be output when the emphasis effect is executed, a specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the game can be executed depending on the operation of the operating means (handle), a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the output time of the notification sound related to the specific notification is longer (or different) than that of the emphasis sound related to the emphasis effect.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right while the effect symbol indicating a big win is displayed, but by making the notification sound for the specific notification longer than the emphasis sound for the emphasis effect, unnecessary hits to the right can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is being displayed, a first specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, the first specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and after the emphasis effect, a second specific notification (right-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, the first specific notification can continue for a first period of time, and the second specific notification can continue for a second period of time that is longer than the first period of time.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right during the emphasized display that suggests a big win, but by executing the first specific notification (left hit notification), it is possible to prevent unnecessary hitting to the right, and then by executing the second specific notification, it is possible to make the player perform the correct operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern while it is displayed, which indicates a jackpot, and there is an operating means that can perform a first operation (hit to the right) and a second operation (hit to the left), and when the first operation (hit to the right) is performed on the operating means (handle), a specific notification (hit to the left) can be executed, and during the emphasis effect, it is possible to execute a specific notification when the first operation (hit to the right) is performed, and after the emphasis effect, it is possible to not execute a specific notification when the first operation (hit to the right) is performed.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the ball to the right during the emphasis effect that suggests a big win, but by executing a specific notification (left hit notification), unnecessary hitting to the right can be suppressed, and the specific notification can be suppressed after the emphasis effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern while the effect pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed, a first specific notification (left-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, the first specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and after the emphasis effect, a second specific notification (right-hit notification) regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed upon the start of a special game, the first specific notification being executed at a fixed first position, and the second specific notification being executed at the second position and then at the third position.
In this case, the player may panic and hit the right button during the highlighting effect that suggests a jackpot, but by executing the first specific notification (left hit notification), it is possible to prevent unnecessary hitting the right button and then execute the second specific notification. The first specific notification is displayed in a fixed position, making it easy for the player to understand, while the second specific notification's display position changes, adding variety to the effect and increasing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display of the effect pattern can be changed based on the determination result of whether or not to play a special game, and when it is determined that a special game will be played, the game can be controlled to a second game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state), and in the second game state, a specific notification (right hit notification) regarding a specified operation (right hit) of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and in the second game state, an emphasis effect can be executed on the effect pattern while the effect pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, and an emphasis effect can be executed during the specific notification (right hit notification), and when an emphasis effect is executed during the specific notification, the specific notification (right hit notification) applies to a part of the emphasis effect and is displayed with priority over that part of the emphasis effect.
In this case, the specific notification is preferentially displayed so as to overlap with a part of the highlight effect, so it can be displayed in a prominent position and made easy for the player to understand. Even in this case, other parts of the highlight effect (and effect pattern) are not covered by the specific notification, so the highlight effect (and effect pattern) can be seen, and interest can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game can be controlled between a first game state (normal state) and a second game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state, and in the second game state, a first specific notification (right-hit notification) regarding a first operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, a second specific notification regarding a second operation of the operating means (handle) can be executed, and in the first game state, an emphasis effect can be executed on the effect pattern when the effect pattern stops, and a second specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the second specific notification can be displayed in priority over the effect pattern and the emphasis effect.
In this case, the second specific notification is displayed with priority over the symbols, and even if an emphasis effect is performed, the second specific notification is displayed with priority over the emphasis effect, so that the player can be strongly encouraged to perform the second operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game can be controlled between a first game state (normal state) and a second game state (time-shortened state), and in the first game state, if a first condition regarding the operation of the operating means (handle) is met, a specific notification (left-hit notification) can be executed, and if a second condition regarding the transition of the game state is met, a specific notification can be executed, and if a specific notification is made based on the second condition being met, the specific notification can be made in a first manner, and if a specific notification is made based on the first condition being met, the specific notification can be made in the first manner and then in the second manner.
In this case, when a specific notification (left-hit notification) is made based on the establishment of the first condition, the specific notification is made in two stages, which allows the player to perform the correct operation on the operating means. On the other hand, when a specific notification is made based on the establishment of the second condition, the specific notification is not made in two stages, which prevents excessive specific notifications.

In addition, in this embodiment, after stopping the display pattern indicating a jackpot, a re-draw display can be executed in which a different display pattern indicating a jackpot or the same display pattern is displayed, and in the re-draw display, an emphasis display can be executed in which the display pattern is emphasized, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis display, and the specific notification can be displayed with priority over the emphasis display.
In this case, if a jackpot is confirmed, the player may rush and make a right hit even though it is not the right time to do so. However, by displaying a specific notification (left hit notification) as a priority, unnecessary right hits can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a full rotation reach effect is performed in which a specific pattern combination, which is a combination of the same patterns that indicates a jackpot, is displayed in a variable manner, and in the full rotation reach effect, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern, a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means can be executed, a specific notification can be executed during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification can be displayed with priority over the emphasis effect.
In this case, if a jackpot is confirmed, the player may rush and make a right hit even though it is not the right time to do so. However, by displaying a specific notification (left hit notification) as a priority, unnecessary right hits can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern during the variable effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when executing the emphasis effect, it is possible to execute a special effect using the effect pattern, it is possible to display a specific image after displaying an effect pattern indicating a miss in the special effect, it is possible to execute a specific notification regarding the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to limit the output of the emphasis sound while the specific image is being displayed, but it is possible to output a notification sound regarding the specific notification.
In this case, the interest of the effect using the effect pattern can be improved by executing the highlight effect, while the highlight sound of the highlight effect can be limited while the specific image is being displayed after the result of the special effect is displayed, so that attention can be drawn to the specific image. It is also possible to output the notification sound even while the specific image is being displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being played, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to adjust the effect of the effect depending on the operation of the first operating means, it is possible to output a specific notification sound depending on the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to output a specific notification sound during the emphasis effect, and when the specific notification is performed during the emphasis effect and an operation is performed on the first operating means, it is possible to adjust the emphasis sound and it is possible to adjust the specific notification sound.
In this case, unnecessary right hits can be suppressed by outputting the specific notification sound even during the emphasis effect, and the specific notification sound can be adjusted by the first operating means.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, it is possible to output an emphasis sound when the emphasis effect is executed, it is possible to adjust the effect of the effect depending on the operation of the first operating means, it is possible to output a specific notification sound depending on the operation of the second operating means, it is possible to execute a specific notification during the emphasis effect, and when the specific notification is executed during the emphasis effect and an operation is performed on the first operating means, it is possible to adjust the emphasis sound but not adjust the specific notification sound.
In this case, unnecessary right hits can be suppressed by outputting a specific notification sound even during the emphasis effect, and by making the specific notification sound unadjustable even when the emphasis sound is adjusted using the first operating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the specific notification.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed, and it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, and it is provided with first adjustment means and second adjustment means that can adjust the effect of the effect, and if an operation is performed on the first adjustment means while the emphasis effect is being executed, it is possible to adjust the effect of the emphasis effect and to issue a specific notification, and if an operation is performed on the second adjustment means, it is possible to adjust the effect of the emphasis effect without issuing the specific notification.
In this case, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted even during the emphasis effect, and when the first adjustment means is used, a specific notification is made, so that the adjustment can be recognized, whereas when the second adjustment means is used, no specific notification is made, so that the user can concentrate on the emphasis effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, an emphasis effect can be executed to emphasize the effect pattern, and first and second adjustment means are provided that can adjust the effect of the emphasis effect, and if an operation is performed on the first adjustment means while the emphasis effect is being executed, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted and a specific notification can be issued, and if an operation is performed on the second adjustment means, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted without issuing the specific notification.
In this case, the effect of the emphasis effect can be adjusted even during the emphasis effect that emphasizes the effect pattern, and when the first adjustment means is used, a specific notification is made so that the adjustment can be recognized, whereas when the second adjustment means is used, no specific notification is made so that the player can concentrate on the emphasis effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a special game being played, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes the suggestion effect, it is possible to set a first mode and a second mode, it is possible to execute the emphasis effect in the second mode, the effect of the emphasis effect can be changed from the first state to the second state depending on the operation of the adjustment means, and when the power is turned off and then turned on while set to the second mode and the second state, the second mode is maintained but the effect is returned to the first state (or set to the second state).
In this case, the effect of the highlighting effect can be adjusted, and the interest can be improved. When the power is turned off in the second mode and then turned on again, the second mode can be started again, and the set effect can be reset.

41...Decorative pattern, 51...Variable image, 52...Reserved image, 61...Stage image, 100...Pachinko game machine, 114...Image display unit, 115...Moving role, 161...Effect button, 200...Game control unit, 300...Effect control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
A determination means for making a determination;
a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The production control means is
It can be set to either a first mode or a second mode,
It is possible to display information display according to game information,
It is possible to perform a role-playing effect that operates the movable means,
It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the effect pattern is changed, then temporarily stopped, and then stopped.
It is possible to display a specific image portion that is at least a part of the performance pattern and a predetermined image portion that is displayed behind the specific image portion,
It is possible to execute specific effects during the execution of variable effects,
The operation mode of the performance pattern includes a first operation mode that can be repeated in a first cycle, and a second operation mode that can be repeated in a second cycle that is different from the first cycle.
After the start of a specific performance during the execution of a variable performance,
The performance pattern can be displayed in the first operation mode,
The performance pattern can be displayed in the second operation mode,
It is possible to execute a specific highlighting effect in which the effect pattern is highlighted when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific sequence that suggests that a special game will be executed during the execution of the variable effect,
The specific emphasis effect includes a first specific emphasis effect and a second specific emphasis effect that is different from the first specific emphasis effect,
In one variation, a second specific emphasis effect can be executed after the first specific emphasis effect is executed ,
In the first specific emphasis effect, a first image can be displayed for each of a plurality of effect patterns,
In the second specific emphasis effect, a second image can be displayed for each of the plurality of effect patterns,
It is possible not to execute the first specific emphasis effect and the second specific emphasis effect during the stop display of the effect pattern,
The display time of the first operation mode when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific sequence suggesting that a special game will be executed in the second mode is shorter than the display time of the first operation mode when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific sequence suggesting that a special game will be executed in the first mode,
In the variation performance, an operation performance that prompts the operation of the operation means can be executed,
The operation performance includes a first operation performance and a second operation performance.
During execution of the first operation presentation, a periodic first display can be executed;
During execution of the second operation presentation, a periodic second display can be executed,
The period of the first display and the period of the second display can be made different,
There are two types of gambling performances: first gambling performance and second gambling performance.
During the execution of the first role performance, a periodic third display can be executed,
During the execution of the second role performance, a periodic fourth display can be executed,
The period of the third display can be different from the period of the fourth display,
This game machine is such that the second accessory presentation is more likely to be executed when the second operation presentation is executed than when the first operation presentation is executed .